DR Id1200 - 018 230 07e PDF

FUJIFILM DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY
DR-ID 1200
DR-ID 1200MP, DR-ID 1200DS, DR-ID 1200PB
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/
kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is
as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg
FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2014-2017 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
Document No. 018-230-07E written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Version 07 - Apr. 28, 2017
2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
Handling of This Manual Precautions for Handling of This Manual
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by
About This Manual FUJIFILM Corporation.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such
 Scope as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to
prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.
The Service Manual is applicable to the digital radiography DR-ID 1200. 4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
DR-ID 1200
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this
DR-ID 1201SE (Flat panel sensor (14"x17"GOS) * Wireless-Supported type) manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
DR-ID 1202SE (Flat panel sensor (17"x17"GOS) * Wireless-Supported type) - Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product.
DR-ID 1211SE (Flat panel sensor (14"x17"CsI) * Wireless-Supported type)
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
DR-ID 1212SE (Flat panel sensor (17"x17"CsI) * Wireless-Supported type) the product.
DR-ID 1213SE (Flat panel sensor (10"x12"CsI) * Wireless-Supported type) 6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
DR-ID 1214SE (Flat panel sensor (24 cm x 30 cm CsI) * Wireless-Supported type)
DR-ID 1200MP (Power supply unit)
DR-ID 1200DS (Docking stand)
DR-ID 1200PB (Power box)
DR-ID 1200MC (Control cabinet)
DR-ID 700AP (FUJIFILM-made AP)
DR-ID 300CL (Image processing unit)
Battery charger (Battery charger for flat panel sensor)
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
About Notation in the Manual  Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
 Notation of Warnings, Cautions, etc. (SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement
Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases.
The notation formats of "warning," "caution," "instruction," "note," and "reference" are
shown below.  Indication of Refer To
WARNING The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
{MC:1._Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment}
CAUTION  Notation in the Manual

This service manual may use the following notations.
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
instruction is not observed. Name Notation
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable Wireless LAN access point AP
or difficult-to-recover trouble).
Console Advance DR-ID 300CL, DX Console, Console, CL, CSL
INSTRUCTION Image Reader Unit RU
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, Flat panel sensor SE, Panel, FPD
if the instruction is not observed.
RU PC-TOOL PC-TOOL
NOTE Notation of Symbols


Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure. - Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
REFERENCE removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
CHECK the illustration that depicts the procedures for removing/
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations. installing the parts or components.
When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
" Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
later section.
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches

when installing the parts or components. However,
it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied

to screw sections of installed parts/components.
Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
018-230-06E
0.3
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require
Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and operation manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Dosimeter - 
Steel rule (150 mm)  -
Steel rule (300 mm)  -
Digital multimeter  
Calipers  (∗) -
∗: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
018-230-06E
Safety Precaution 0.4
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions................................................................... 1 3. CLASSIFICATION................................................................... 24

1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1 3.1 DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE /
1213SE / 1214SE...........................................................................24
1.2 Precautions on Infection...................................................................2
3.2 DR-ID 1200MC...............................................................................24
1.3 Requirement.....................................................................................2
1.3.1 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)............................................................................2 3.3 DR-ID 700AP..................................................................................24
1.3.2 Monitor.........................................................................................................2 3.4 Battery Charger..............................................................................24
1.3.3 Access Point................................................................................................2
1.4 Precautions on the Patient Environment..........................................3 4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves................................... 25
1.5 Cautions on Connection...................................................................4 4.1 DR-ID 1200....................................................................................25
1.5.1 Cautions on the Power Cable for MP, DS and PB.......................................4 4.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)........................................................25
1.5.2 Cautions on the X-Ray Shot Cable..............................................................4 4.1.2 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2)..............................26
1.5.3 Cautions on the Protective Ground Wire.....................................................4 4.2 DR-ID 1200MC...............................................................................29
1.6 Cautions on the Table Tap and Extension Cord...............................4 4.2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)........................................................29
4.2.2 Further Information for CISPR 22/EN55022 and CISPR 24/EN55024......29
1.7 Caution concerning mistaken panel.................................................4
1.8 Safety and Other Symbols...............................................................5 5. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS........................................... 31
1.8.1 Japan...........................................................................................................5
1.8.2 Outside Japan..............................................................................................5
1.9 Precautions on the MP Installation...................................................6
2. Labels........................................................................................ 7
2.1 Rating Indication Labels and Caution Labels...................................7
2.1.1 DR-ID 1200..................................................................................................7
2.1.2 DR-ID 1200MP...........................................................................................14
2.1.3 DR-ID 1200DS...........................................................................................18
2.1.4 DR-ID 1200PB...........................................................................................20
2.1.5 DR-ID 1200MC...........................................................................................21
2.1.6 Battery Charger..........................................................................................22
018-230-06E
Product Specifications 0.5
Product Specifications
1. Commodity Composition and Optional Items....................... 1 5.2 Battery Charger..............................................................................19

5.2.1 Battery Charger..........................................................................................19
1.1 Commodity Composition..................................................................1
5.2.2 AC Adapter.................................................................................................19
1.2 Optional Items..................................................................................2
5.3 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)...............................................................20
1.2.1 For DR-ID 1200 Only...................................................................................2
1.2.2 For both DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 1200...........................................................4 5.4 Monitor...........................................................................................20
5.5 Access Point...................................................................................20
2. Dimensions, Weight and Location of the Center
of Gravity.................................................................................. 7 6. Electrical Specifications........................................................ 21
2.1 DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE / 6.1 DR-ID 1200....................................................................................21
1213SE / 1214SE.............................................................................7
6.2 Battery Charger..............................................................................23
2.2 DR-ID 1200MC.................................................................................9 6.2.1 Battery Charger..........................................................................................23
2.3 FUJIFILM-made AP..........................................................................9 6.2.2 AC Adapter.................................................................................................23
2.4 Battery Charger..............................................................................10 6.3 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)...............................................................24
6.4 Monitor...........................................................................................24
3. Installation Space................................................................... 11
6.5 Access Point...................................................................................24
3.1 DR-ID 1200....................................................................................12
3.1.1 DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE.......................12 7. Other Specifications.............................................................. 25
3.1.2 DR-ID 1200MP...........................................................................................13
3.1.3 DR-ID 1200DS...........................................................................................14 8. Grid.......................................................................................... 27
3.1.4 DR-ID 1200PB...........................................................................................14
3.2 DR-ID 1200MC...............................................................................15 9. G Sensor on SE and Action in case of Failure.................... 28
3.3 Battery Charger..............................................................................15 9.1 Failure Attributed to the Customer..................................................28
3.4 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)...............................................................16 9.1.1 How to Determine Whether the Failure Is Attributed to the Customer.......28
9.1.2 Action When the Failure Is Attributed to the Customer..............................28
4. Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine.......................... 17 9.2 Failure Attributed to the Manufacturer............................................29
9.2.1 How to Determine Whether the Failure Is Attributed to the Manufacturer....29
5. Environmental Conditions.................................................... 18 9.2.2 Action When the Failure Is Attributed to the Manufacturer........................29
5.1 DR-ID 1200....................................................................................18 9.3 Other Precautions in Handling.......................................................29
018-230-06E
Product Specifications 0.6
10. Disposal of the Machine........................................................ 30

10.1 Lithium Batteries.............................................................................30
10.2 SE...................................................................................................30
10.3 Battery Pack (Lithium Ion Battery)..................................................30
10.4 Locally Procured Items...................................................................30
018-230-06E
Machine Description (MD) 0.7
Machine Description (MD)
1. Summary of the Machine.................................................. MD-1

1.1 Features of the Machine............................................................MD-1
1.2 System Configuration Examples...............................................MD-1
1.3 General Configuration of the DR-ID 1200 and Names..............MD-4
1.3.1 External View and Functions................................................................. MD-4
1.3.2 Electric parts......................................................................................... MD-6
1.3.3 I/O Parts Information............................................................................. MD-7
1.3.4 Board-Related Information.................................................................... MD-9
2. Block Diagram................................................................. MD-11

2.1 System Block Diagram............................................................ MD-11
2.2 SE Block Diagram (1201SE / 1211SE)...................................MD-12
2.3 SE Block Diagram (1202SE / 1212SE)...................................MD-12
2.4 SE Block Diagram (1213SE)...................................................MD-13
2.5 SE Block Diagram (1214SE)...................................................MD-13
2.6 DR-ID 1200MP Block Diagram................................................MD-14
2.7 DR-ID 1200DS Block Diagram................................................MD-15
2.8 DR-ID 1200PB Block Diagram................................................MD-16
3. Effective Area and Center Position of Image............... MD-17

3.1 Effective Area..........................................................................MD-17
3.2 Center of the Image.................................................................MD-19
4. Calibration....................................................................... MD-21
018-230-06E
Troubleshooting (MT) 0.8
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting............................................MT-1 8. BACKUP FILE...................................................................MT-30

1.1 Troubleshooting from Error Log................................................. MT-1 8.1 CALIB LOG............................................................................. MT-30
1.1.1 Checking the Error Log..........................................................................MT-1 8.2 GLG LOG................................................................................ MT-31
1.1.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble.......................MT-2
8.3 SERegistInfo.txt....................................................................... MT-32
1.2 How to View Error Code............................................................ MT-2
1.3 How to Use the Detail Error Log................................................ MT-3 Appendix 1. Troubleshooting for 10753 Error......................MT1-1
1.3.1 11112 Error.............................................................................................MT-4 1.1 Changing the BIOS Setting..................................................... MT1-1
1.3.2 11244 Error............................................................................................MT-6
1.2 Updating MP OS Version........................................................ MT1-4
2. Error Code Table................................................................MT-7 1.3 Checking the Network Connection Configuration.................... MT1-4
1.4 Action for the Case Where the F-Secure is Installed.............. MT1-5
3. Troubleshooting Based on LED Indication....................MT-20
1.5 Analysis with Log..................................................................... MT1-6
3.1 SE............................................................................................ MT-20
3.1.1 Status Lamps.......................................................................................MT-20
3.1.2 7-Segment............................................................................................MT-22
3.2 DS........................................................................................... MT-22
4. Analysis of Abnormal Images.........................................MT-23

4.1 Analyzing Moiré....................................................................... MT-23
5. Troubleshooting from DS Error Log...............................MT-25

5.1 How to View DS Error Log...................................................... MT-25
6. Countermeasure for the SE Temperature Error............MT-26
7. Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log.............MT-27
018-230-07E
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.9
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
1. Precautions for Check, Replacement, 3.7 Power Supply Unit...................................................................MC-24

and Adjustment................................................................. MC-1 3.8 Shutter.....................................................................................MC-25
3.9 Roller.......................................................................................MC-26
2. MP (Power Supply Unit).................................................... MC-2
3.10 Large Tray...............................................................................MC-27
2.1 MP Cover..................................................................................MC-2
3.11 Small Tray...............................................................................MC-28
2.2 MPX54A Board..........................................................................MC-4
3.12 Bottom Tray.............................................................................MC-29
2.3 MPC54B Board.........................................................................MC-5
2.3.1 Fuses.................................................................................................... MC-6
4. PB(Power Box)................................................................ MC-30
2.3.2 Setting the Jumper Pin.......................................................................... MC-7
4.1 TOP Cover...............................................................................MC-30
2.4 LED54B Board..........................................................................MC-8
4.2 Front Cover.............................................................................MC-31
2.5 NFB51A Board..........................................................................MC-9
4.3 MPS65A Board........................................................................MC-32
2.6 Cooling Fan (FAN1).................................................................MC-10
4.3.1 Fuses.................................................................................................. MC-33
2.7 Power Supply Unit................................................................... MC-11
4.4 MSU65A Board (Power Supply Unit).......................................MC-33
2.8 Switch Cover...........................................................................MC-12
4.5 LED.........................................................................................MC-35
2.9 Outlet.......................................................................................MC-13
4.6 SE Cable.................................................................................MC-36
2.10 AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional)..............................................MC-14
2.10.1 Relay................................................................................................... MC-14 5. SE (Flat Panel Sensor).................................................... MC-38
2.11 Replacing the MP whose Local IP Address Is Changed.........MC-15 5.1 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE....................................MC-39
5.1.1 SE Rear Cover.................................................................................... MC-40
3. DS (Docking Stand)......................................................... MC-17 5.1.2 SE Exposure Side Cover.................................................................... MC-47
3.1 DS Cover.................................................................................MC-18 5.1.3 WLAN Module..................................................................................... MC-50
5.1.4 POW65A Board................................................................................... MC-51
3.2 DLS65A Board.........................................................................MC-19
5.1.5 Antenna Board.................................................................................... MC-52
3.3 DSI65A Board..........................................................................MC-20 5.1.6 SPR65A Board.................................................................................... MC-53
3.4 DSB65A Board........................................................................MC-20 5.1.7 RMV65A Board................................................................................... MC-53
3.5 DSM65A Board........................................................................MC-21 5.1.8 GLG65A Board.................................................................................... MC-57
5.1.9 SD Card.............................................................................................. MC-58
3.6 DSC65A Board........................................................................MC-23 5.1.10 BCN65A Board.................................................................................... MC-59
018-230-06E
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.10
5.1.11 LEA65A Board.................................................................................... MC-61 6.3.2 Installing the Driver Software............................................................ MC-108
5.1.12 LEB65A Board.................................................................................... MC-61 6.3.3 Setting the OS................................................................................... MC-110
5.1.13 LEC65A Board.................................................................................... MC-62 6.4 Installing the MC Application.................................................MC-140
5.1.14 LED65A Board.................................................................................... MC-63
5.1.15 REC65A Board.................................................................................... MC-64
6.5 Settings After Installation for the MC Application...................MC-142
5.1.16 SE Connector...................................................................................... MC-65 6.6 Operation Verification............................................................MC-144
5.2 1213SE / 1214SE....................................................................MC-66 6.7 Restore the settings..............................................................MC-146
5.2.1 SE Rear Cover.................................................................................... MC-67 6.8 Replacing the MC whose Local IP Address Is Changed.......MC-147
5.2.2 SE Exposure Side Cover.................................................................... MC-72
6.9 Setting in Case of Replacing the MC Motherboard...............MC-148
5.2.3 WLAN Module..................................................................................... MC-74
6.9.1 Changing the BIOS Settings............................................................. MC-148
5.2.4 RMV66A Board................................................................................... MC-75
6.9.2 Changing the Network Name of the Motherboard............................ MC-149
5.2.5 MicroSD Card...................................................................................... MC-79
5.2.6 Antenna Board.................................................................................... MC-79
7. List of Tools................................................................... MC-150
5.2.7 SPR66A Board.................................................................................... MC-81
5.2.8 BCN65A Board.................................................................................... MC-82 7.1 Standard Tools......................................................................MC-150
5.2.9 LEA66A Board.................................................................................... MC-84 7.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments.............................MC-152
5.2.10 LED66A Board.................................................................................... MC-84
7.3 Special Consumables............................................................MC-153
5.2.11 LEX66A Board.................................................................................... MC-85
5.2.12 LEY66A Board.................................................................................... MC-86 7.4 Semi-Standard Tools.............................................................MC-153
5.2.13 LEZ66A Board..................................................................................... MC-87
5.2.14 NCA66A Board.................................................................................... MC-88 Appendix 1. Replacing the Terminal Board
5.2.15 REC66A Board.................................................................................... MC-89
of the Battery Charger....................... Appx MC1-1
5.2.16 RLY66A Board..................................................................................... MC-90
5.2.17 SE Connector...................................................................................... MC-91 Appendix 2. Updating/Downgrading
MP OS Version................................... Appx MC2-1
5.3 Replacing the SE whose Local IP Address Is Changed..........MC-92
Appendix 2.1 Checking the MP OS Version........................................MC2-1
6. MC (Control Cabinet)...................................................... MC-93 Appendix 2.2 Updating MP OS Version...............................................MC2-2
6.1 Network Interface Board..........................................................MC-93 Appendix 2.3 Downgrading MP OS Version........................................MC2-4
6.2 Preparing Before Installation...................................................MC-94 Appendix 2.4 Countermeasure for the Error Occurrence....................MC2-6
6.2.1 Setting on the RU PC-TOOL............................................................... MC-94
6.2.2 Preparing the PC................................................................................ MC-95 Appendix 3. Cleaning Fluids.................................. Appx MC3-1
6.3 Installing and Setting Up the OS.............................................MC-97
6.3.1 Installing the OS.................................................................................. MC-97
018-230-06E
Maintenance Utility (MU1) 0.11
Maintenance Utility (MU1)

(DR Web Maintenance Tool)
1. DR Web Maintenance Tool............................................. MU1-1 1.7 HISTORY...............................................................................MU1-49

1.7.1 UPRIGHT.......................................................................................... MU1-50
1.1 UPDATE SOFTWARE.............................................................MU1-4
1.7.2 TABLE............................................................................................... MU1-51
1.1.1 Update MP.......................................................................................... MU1-4
1.1.2 Update SE........................................................................................... MU1-4 1.8 LOG.......................................................................................MU1-52
1.2 PANEL SETTING....................................................................MU1-5 1.9 UTILITY.................................................................................MU1-53
1.2.1 SE Registration/Deletion..................................................................... MU1-5 1.9.1 Terminate MC.................................................................................... MU1-53
1.2.2 SE Wireless Setting............................................................................ MU1-6 1.9.2 Reboot MC........................................................................................ MU1-54
1.2.3 LED Color Setting............................................................................... MU1-7 1.9.3 Force Reboot MC.............................................................................. MU1-54
1.2.4 Memory Mode Setting......................................................................... MU1-7 1.9.4 Web Maintenance Status.................................................................. MU1-55
1.2.5 D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion.............................................. MU1-8 1.9.5 Check PING...................................................................................... MU1-55
1.9.6 Check FTP........................................................................................ MU1-56
1.3 CONFIG SETTING..................................................................MU1-9
1.9.7 FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)............................................... MU1-56
1.3.1 MC Setting........................................................................................ MU1-10
1.9.8 Force Serial ID Writing...................................................................... MU1-57
1.3.2 RU Image Flag.................................................................................. MU1-16
1.9.9 Replace Long Panel RMV Board...................................................... MU1-57
1.3.3 Wireless Setting................................................................................ MU1-19
1.9.10 Replace MP....................................................................................... MU1-58
1.3.4 SE Sleep Mode Setting..................................................................... MU1-22
1.9.11 LED Color RGB Setting.................................................................... MU1-60
1.4 CALIBRATION.......................................................................MU1-24 1.9.12 Battery Threshold Setting.................................................................. MU1-61
1.4.1 SE Calibration................................................................................... MU1-24
1.10 BACKUP/RESTORE.............................................................MU1-62
1.4.2 Long Panel Calibration...................................................................... MU1-30
1.10.1 SE Correct Data Backup/Restore..................................................... MU1-62
1.4.3 Sensitivity Correction Coefficient...................................................... MU1-31
1.10.2 D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore............................... MU1-65
1.4.4 GLG Calibration................................................................................ MU1-31
1.10.3 DR-ID 1422SE Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore........................ MU1-66
1.4.5 SE Correct Data Transfer.................................................................. MU1-32
1.10.4 Config Setting Backup/Restore......................................................... MU1-66
1.5 NETWORK SETTING...........................................................MU1-35 1.10.5 HISTORY Backup............................................................................. MU1-68
1.5.1 Local Network................................................................................... MU1-36 1.10.6 LOG Backup...................................................................................... MU1-68
1.6 CHECK DEVICE STATE.......................................................MU1-40
1.6.1 Check Version................................................................................... MU1-40
1.6.2 Check Board Status.......................................................................... MU1-42
1.6.3 SE Wireless Setting.......................................................................... MU1-46
1.6.4 Battery Information............................................................................ MU1-47
1.6.5 SE Registration Information.............................................................. MU1-48
018-230-07E
Maintenance Utility (MU1) 0.12
2. DS Utility........................................................................ MU1-71
2.1 DS Service Utility...................................................................MU1-71
2.1.1 Startup Window................................................................................. MU1-71
2.1.2 Address Setting Window................................................................... MU1-72
2.1.3 LED/Sound test Window................................................................... MU1-73
2.1.4 Luminance Window........................................................................... MU1-73
2.1.5 Log Window...................................................................................... MU1-74
2.2 DS Firmware Update Utility...................................................MU1-75
018-230-07E
Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.13

(RU PC-TOOL)
1. PC-TOOL.......................................................................... MU2-1 [4] Install................................................................................................. MU2-26

[4.1] Install MP Software >>...................................................................... MU2-27
1.1 NEW........................................................................................MU2-4 [4.1.1] MP1 Install >>................................................................................... MU2-27
1.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU...........................................................MU2-4 [4.1.2] MP2 Install >>................................................................................... MU2-28
1.3 DELETE..................................................................................MU2-5 [4.2] Install SE Software >>...................................................................... MU2-28
[5] Board State Check............................................................................ MU2-29
1.4 MUTL.......................................................................................MU2-5
[5.1] MP Board State >>............................................................................ MU2-29
[1] NETWORK SETTING....................................................................... MU2-11
[5.1.1] MP1 Board State >>......................................................................... MU2-30
[1.1] Local Network PreSetting >>............................................................ MU2-12
[5.1.2] MP2 Board State >>......................................................................... MU2-31
[1.2] SE Network Setting >>...................................................................... MU2-16
[5.2] SE Board State >>............................................................................ MU2-31
[1.3] MP Network Setting >>..................................................................... MU2-16
[5.3] SE SerialID Write>>.......................................................................... MU2-33
[1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >>................................................................... MU2-17
[6] Calibration......................................................................................... MU2-33
[1.3.2] MP2 Network Setting >>................................................................... MU2-18
[6.1] Offset Calibration >>......................................................................... MU2-34
[1.4] MC ETH0 IP Setting >>..................................................................... MU2-18
[6.2] Gain Calibration >>........................................................................... MU2-35
[1.5] Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)................................................. MU2-19
[6.3] Defect Calibration >>........................................................................ MU2-36
[1.6] Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)................................................. MU2-19
[6.4] Lag Calibration >>............................................................................. MU2-37
[1.7] Wireless Speed Measurement >>..................................................... MU2-19
[6.5] Marker Calibration >>....................................................................... MU2-38
[2] SE Setting......................................................................................... MU2-20
[6.6] SE Correct Data Save Status>>....................................................... MU2-38
[2.1] SE Registration >>............................................................................ MU2-20
[6.7] SE Correct Data Transfer>>............................................................. MU2-39
[2.2] SE DELETE >>................................................................................. MU2-21
[6.8] SE Correct Data Status>>................................................................ MU2-39
[2.3] LongPanel Registration >>............................................................... MU2-21
[6.9] SE Flash Correct Data Status >>...................................................... MU2-40
[2.4] LongPanel DELETE >>..................................................................... MU2-21
[7] SYSTEM........................................................................................... MU2-41
[2.5] BATTERY INFORMATION >>........................................................... MU2-21
[7.1] Termination >>.................................................................................. MU2-41
[2.6] Battery Remaining Time Threshold>>............................................... MU2-22
[2.7] SE Memory Exposure Setting>>....................................................... MU2-22 1.5 PING......................................................................................MU2-42
[2.8] SE LED Color Setting>>................................................................... MU2-23 1.6 MON......................................................................................MU2-43
[3] Version Check................................................................................... MU2-23 1.7 FTP........................................................................................MU2-43
[3.1] MC Version >>.................................................................................. MU2-24
[3.2] MP Version >>................................................................................... MU2-24
1.8 INSTALL................................................................................MU2-44
[3.2.1] MP1 Version Check >>..................................................................... MU2-25 1.9 VERSION UP........................................................................MU2-44
[3.2.2] MP2 Version Check >>..................................................................... MU2-25 1.9.1 V11.X or Later................................................................................... MU2-44
[3.3] SE Version >>................................................................................... MU2-26 1.9.2 V3.X or Earlier................................................................................... MU2-48
018-230-07E
Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.14
1.10 EDIT HISTORY.....................................................................MU2-49

1.11 EDIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................MU2-50
1.12 EDIT CL NAME.....................................................................MU2-62
1.13 BACKUP................................................................................MU2-63
1.14 RESTORE.............................................................................MU2-65
1.15 I/O TRACE EXPERT.............................................................MU2-66
1.16 ERROR DB...........................................................................MU2-67
1.17 UNINSTALL (ALL RUs).........................................................MU2-68
1.18 VERSION UP (ALL RUs).......................................................MU2-68
1.19 Configuration.........................................................................MU2-69
1.19.1 CDPath.............................................................................................. MU2-69
2. DS Utility........................................................................ MU2-70
2.1 DS Service Utility...................................................................MU2-70
2.1.1 Startup Window................................................................................. MU2-70
2.1.2 Address Setting Window................................................................... MU2-71
2.1.3 LED/Sound test Window................................................................... MU2-72
2.1.4 Luminance Window........................................................................... MU2-72
2.1.5 Log Window...................................................................................... MU2-73
2.2 DS Firmware Update Utility...................................................MU2-74
018-230-07E
Service Parts List (SP) 0.15
Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List .................................................................SP-1 08B Options 2 (DS Cover) .................................................................SP-30
01 MP ...............................................................................................SP-2 08C Options 3 (DS Cover) .................................................................SP-31
02A DS1 .............................................................................................SP-3 09 CABLE.......................................................................................SP-32
02B DS2 .............................................................................................SP-4 10 Tools ..........................................................................................SP-33
02C DS3 .............................................................................................SP-5 11A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (MP) ..........................................................SP-34
02D DS4 .............................................................................................SP-6 11B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (DS) ...........................................................SP-35
03 PB ...............................................................................................SP-7 11C CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (PB) ...........................................................SP-36
04A SE1 (1201SE, 1211SE) ................................................................SP-8 11D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)............SP-37
04B SE2 (1201SE, 1211SE) ..............................................................SP-10 11E CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1213SE) ...................................................SP-38
04C SE3 (1201SE, 1211SE) .............................................................. SP-11 11F CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1214SE) ...................................................SP-39
04D SE4 (1202SE, 1212SE) .............................................................SP-12 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ..................................................SP-40
04E SE5 (1202SE, 1212SE) .............................................................SP-14 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring..............................SP-42
04F SE6 (1202SE, 1212SE) .............................................................SP-15 14 Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols...........................SP-44
04G SE7 (1213SE) ............................................................................SP-16 15 List of Quick Wearing Parts ........................................................SP-45
04H SE8 (1214SE) ............................................................................SP-17
04I SE9 (1213SE, 1214SE)..............................................................SP-19
04J SE10 (1213SE, 1214SE) ............................................................SP-20
04K SE11 (Battery pack) ...................................................................SP-21
04L SE12 (Cable: 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE) .......................SP-22
04M SE13 (Cable: 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE) .......................SP-23
04N SE14 (Cable: 1213SE) ...............................................................SP-24
04O SE15 (Cable: 1214SE) ...............................................................SP-25
05 MC .............................................................................................SP-26
06 FUJIFILM-made AP ....................................................................SP-27
07 Battery Charger .........................................................................SP-28
08A Options 1 (Circuit Parts) .............................................................SP-29
018-230-07E
Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.16
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. Preventive Maintenance Program................................... PM-1 15. Checking the Optional Items.......................................... PM-16
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume..................... PM-1
16. Cleaning the Periphery of the Machine and
1.2 Notation of Age.......................................................................... PM-1 the External Cover.......................................................... PM-17
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List...................................... PM-2
2. Checking the Error Log.................................................... PM-3
3. Checking for Image Problems......................................... PM-4
4. Checking and Replacing the Battery Pack..................... PM-5
5. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions............................ PM-6
6. Inspecting the Fan (MP).................................................... PM-7
7. Inspecting the Filter (MP)................................................. PM-8
8. Replacing the Relay (MP)................................................. PM-9
9. Checking the LED and Buzzer Sound (DS)................... PM-10
10. Checking the Cables........................................................PM-11
11. Checking the G Sensor (SE).......................................... PM-12
12. Calibration....................................................................... PM-13
13. Checking for Image Problems....................................... PM-14
14. Checking the Error Log.................................................. PM-15

018-230-07E
Installation (IN1) 0.17
Installation (IN)
How to Read the Installation Manual........................................ IN-1
018-230-07E
Installation (IN1)
1. Installation Work Flowchart............................................. IN1-1 6. Charging the Battery Pack............................................. IN1-15
2. Installation Preparations.................................................. IN1-3 7. Installing the MP.............................................................. IN1-16

2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation....IN1-3 7.1 Removing the Covers..............................................................IN1-16
2.2 Ferrite Core...............................................................................IN1-3 7.2 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN1-17
2.2.1 Type of the Ferrite Core........................................................................ IN1-3 7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or
2.2.2 Coiling the Cable to the Ferrite Core.................................................... IN1-4 the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional).................................IN1-17
2.2.3 Network Configuration and Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core.... IN1-4 7.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover..................................................................... IN1-17
7.3.2 Installing the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional).............................. IN1-18
3. Precautions in Installation............................................... IN1-7
7.4 Connecting the Cables............................................................IN1-19
4. Transfer and Unpacking................................................... IN1-8 7.5 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable..........................................IN1-21
7.5.1 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)....................... IN1-21
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer....................................IN1-8
7.5.2 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky Contact Type)................... IN1-27
4.2 Transfer of Instruments.............................................................IN1-8 7.5.3 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type).......................... IN1-34
4.3 Unpacking the MP.....................................................................IN1-8 7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables...........................................IN1-41
4.4 Unpacking the DS.....................................................................IN1-9 7.7 Reinstalling the Covers...........................................................IN1-42
4.5 Unpacking the PB......................................................................IN1-9 7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)....................................................IN1-42
4.6 Unpacking the MC.....................................................................IN1-9
8. Installing the DS.............................................................. IN1-43
4.7 Unpacking the SE....................................................................IN1-10
8.1 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN1-43
4.8 Unpacking the Battery Pack....................................................IN1-10
8.2 Attaching the Label..................................................................IN1-43
4.9 Unpacking the Battery Charger...............................................IN1-10
8.3 Installing the DS......................................................................IN1-44
4.10 Unpacking the DX Console.....................................................IN1-10
8.3.1 Installing on the Floor.......................................................................... IN1-44
4.11 Unpacking the Monitor............................................................IN1-10 8.3.2 Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional)........................................... IN1-45
4.12 Unpacking the Access Point ...................................................IN1-10 8.3.3 Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)............................................. IN1-46
8.4 Setting the DS IP Address.......................................................IN1-49
5. Checking the Items Supplied......................................... IN1-11
018-230-07E
9. Installing the PB.............................................................. IN1-64 14.1.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device.............................................. IN1-125
14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version....................................... IN1-126
9.1 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN1-64 14.1.6 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs................................... IN1-127
9.2 Connect the LAN Cable...........................................................IN1-64 14.1.7 Configuration Settings....................................................................... IN1-130
9.3 Installing the PB......................................................................IN1-65 14.1.8 Setting the DX Console..................................................................... IN1-131
9.3.1 Installing on the Floor.......................................................................... IN1-65 14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE.......................................................... IN1-133
9.3.2 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)............................................................... IN1-65 14.1.10 Changing the SE Country Code........................................................ IN1-134
14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE....................................................... IN1-138
10. Installing the SE.............................................................. IN1-67 14.1.12 Updating SE Application Software Version....................................... IN1-140
14.1.13 Setting the SE LED Color................................................................. IN1-141
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the NIC board to 14.1.14 Installing the Machine-Specific Data................................................. IN1-143
the DX Console................................................................ IN1-70 14.1.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the FTP Server..... IN1-146
11.1 Installing the MC......................................................................IN1-70 14.1.16 Checking the MC_ID_MODE............................................................ IN1-150
11.1.1 Checking the Power Cable................................................................. IN1-70 14.1.17 Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)............... IN1-151
11.1.2 Connecting the Network Cables......................................................... IN1-70 14.2 In case of the Configuration Installing the MC Application
11.2 Mounting the NIC Board to the DX Console............................IN1-71 in the MC...............................................................................IN1-154
11.2.1 Mounting the NIC Board..................................................................... IN1-71 14.2.1 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool................. IN1-154
11.2.2 Connecting the Network Cables......................................................... IN1-72 14.2.2 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool....................................... IN1-164
14.2.3 Preparation before Setting DR Device.............................................. IN1-165
12. Installing the Access Point............................................ IN1-74 14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version....................................... IN1-166
12.1 In Case of the D-Link...............................................................IN1-74 14.2.5 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs................................... IN1-167
14.2.6 Configuration Settings....................................................................... IN1-170
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP.........................................IN1-84
14.2.7 Setting the DX Console..................................................................... IN1-171
13. Installing the DX Console............................................. IN1-102 14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE.......................................................... IN1-173
14.2.9 Changing the SE Country Code........................................................ IN1-174
14. Installing the RU Software............................................ IN1-103 14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE....................................................... IN1-178
14.2.11 Updating SE Application Software Version....................................... IN1-180
14.1 In Case of the Configuration Installing the MC Application
in the DX Console.................................................................IN1-103 14.2.12 Setting the SE LED Color................................................................. IN1-181
14.1.1 Network Settings............................................................................... IN1-104 14.2.13 Installing the Machine-Specific Data................................................. IN1-183
14.1.2 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool................. IN1-115 14.2.14 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the FTP Server..... IN1-186
14.1.3 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool....................................... IN1-124 14.2.15 Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)............... IN1-190
018-230-07E
15. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions........................ IN1-193 22. Final Checks.................................................................. IN1-211
22.1 Checking the SE.................................................................... IN1-211
16. Calibration..................................................................... IN1-195
22.2 Checking the Status of Boards.............................................. IN1-211
16.1 Offset Calibration...................................................................IN1-197
22.3 Checking the Optional Items.................................................IN1-212
16.2 Gain Calibration.....................................................................IN1-198 22.3.1 Checking the Battery Charger........................................................... IN1-212
16.3 Defect Calibration..................................................................IN1-199
16.4 Lag Calibration......................................................................IN1-201 23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine......... IN1-213
16.5 Checking the Calibration Results..........................................IN1-203
17. Checking for Image Problems..................................... IN1-204

17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems,
White Blank Portion,
and Sensitivity Problems in the Images................................IN1-204
17.2 Checking the Format.............................................................IN1-205
17.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in Read Center
and Film Character Format Information................................IN1-205
18. Disconnecting the SE Cable........................................ IN1-207
19. Checking the Error Log................................................ IN1-208
20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY......................................... IN1-209
21. Backing Up the Data..................................................... IN1-210
018-230-07E
Installation (IN) 0.21
Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)
1. Installation Work Flowchart............................................. IN2-1 6. Charging the Battery Pack............................................. IN2-15
2. Installation Preparations.................................................. IN2-3 7. Installing the MP.............................................................. IN2-16

2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation....IN2-3 7.1 Removing the Covers..............................................................IN2-16
2.2 Ferrite Core...............................................................................IN2-3 7.2 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN2-17
2.2.1 Type of the Ferrite Core........................................................................ IN2-3 7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or
2.2.2 Coiling the Cable to the Ferrite Core.................................................... IN2-4 the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional).................................IN2-17
2.2.3 Network Configuration and Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core.... IN2-4 7.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover..................................................................... IN2-17
7.3.2 Installing the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional).............................. IN2-18
3. Precautions in Installation............................................... IN2-7
7.4 Connecting the Cables............................................................IN2-19
4. Transfer and Unpacking................................................... IN2-8 7.5 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable..........................................IN2-21
7.5.1 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)....................... IN2-21
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer....................................IN2-8
7.5.2 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky Contact Type)................... IN2-27
4.2 Transfer of Instruments.............................................................IN2-8 7.5.3 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type).......................... IN2-34
4.3 Unpacking the MP.....................................................................IN2-8 7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables...........................................IN2-41
4.4 Unpacking the DS.....................................................................IN2-9 7.7 Reinstalling the Covers...........................................................IN2-42
4.5 Unpacking the PB......................................................................IN2-9 7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)....................................................IN2-42
4.6 Unpacking the MC.....................................................................IN2-9
8. Installing the DS.............................................................. IN2-43
4.7 Unpacking the SE....................................................................IN2-10
8.1 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN2-43
4.8 Unpacking the Battery Pack....................................................IN2-10
8.2 Attaching the Label..................................................................IN2-43
4.9 Unpacking the Battery Charger...............................................IN2-10
8.3 Installing the DS......................................................................IN2-44
4.10 Unpacking the DX Console.....................................................IN2-10
8.3.1 Installing on the Floor.......................................................................... IN2-44
4.11 Unpacking the Monitor............................................................IN2-10 8.3.2 Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional)........................................... IN2-45
4.12 Unpacking the Access Point ...................................................IN2-10 8.3.3 Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)............................................. IN2-46
8.4 Setting the DS IP Address.......................................................IN2-49
5. Checking the Items Supplied......................................... IN2-11
018-230-07E
9. Installing the PB.............................................................. IN2-64 14.1.3 Installing the RU Software................................................................ IN2-123

14.1.4 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock.................................... IN2-128
9.1 Checking the Power Cable......................................................IN2-64 14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version....................................... IN2-129
9.2 Connect the LAN Cable...........................................................IN2-64 14.1.6 Configuration Settings....................................................................... IN2-131
9.3 Installing the PB......................................................................IN2-65 14.1.7 Setting the DX Console..................................................................... IN2-131
9.3.1 Installing on the Floor.......................................................................... IN2-65 14.1.8 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function
(Setting the SE Country Code)......................................................... IN2-134
9.3.2 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)............................................................... IN2-65
14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE.......................................................... IN2-138
10. Installing the SE.............................................................. IN2-67 14.1.10 Updating SE Application Software Version....................................... IN2-140
14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE....................................................... IN2-143
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the NIC board to the 14.1.12 Setting the SE LED Color................................................................. IN2-144
DX Console...................................................................... IN2-70 14.1.13 Installing the Machine-Specific Data................................................. IN2-146
14.1.14 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data........................................... IN2-148
11.1 Installing the MC......................................................................IN2-70 14.1.15 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP Address......... IN2-149
11.1.1 Checking the Power Cable................................................................. IN2-70 14.1.16 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC...................................... IN2-150
11.1.2 Connecting the Network Cables......................................................... IN2-71 14.1.17 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME....................................... IN2-151
11.2 Mounting the NIC Board to the DX Console............................IN2-71 14.1.18 Checking the MC_ID_MODE............................................................ IN2-152
11.2.1 Mounting the NIC Board..................................................................... IN2-71 14.1.19 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address Filtering).............. IN2-153
11.2.2 Connecting the Network Cables......................................................... IN2-72 14.2 In case of the Configuration Installing the MC Application
in the MC...............................................................................IN2-157
12. Installing the Access Point............................................ IN2-74 14.2.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL............................................................... IN2-157
12.1 In Case of the D-Link...............................................................IN2-74 14.2.2 Installing the RU Software................................................................ IN2-166
14.2.3 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock.................................... IN2-171
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP.........................................IN2-84
14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version....................................... IN2-172
13. Installing the DX Console............................................... IN2-98 14.2.5 Configuration Settings....................................................................... IN2-174
14.2.6 Setting the DX Console..................................................................... IN2-175
14. Installing the RU Software.............................................. IN2-99 14.2.7 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function
(Setting the SE Country Code)......................................................... IN2-177
14.1 In Case of the Configuration Installing the MC Application 14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE.......................................................... IN2-182
in the DX Console...................................................................IN2-99 14.2.9 Updating SE Application Software Version....................................... IN2-183
14.1.1 Network Settings............................................................................... IN2-100 14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE....................................................... IN2-187
14.1.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL............................................................... IN2-112
018-230-07E
14.2.11 Setting the SE LED Color................................................................. IN2-188 21. Backing Up the Data..................................................... IN2-216
14.2.12 Installing the Machine-Specific Data................................................. IN2-189
14.2.13 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data........................................... IN2-191 22. Final Checks.................................................................. IN2-217
14.2.14 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP Address......... IN2-192
14.2.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC...................................... IN2-194
22.1 Checking the SE....................................................................IN2-217
14.2.16 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME....................................... IN2-194 22.2 Checking the Status of Boards..............................................IN2-217
14.2.17 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address Filtering).............. IN2-196 22.3 Checking the Optional Items.................................................IN2-217
22.3.1 Checking the Battery Charger........................................................... IN2-217
15. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions........................ IN2-199
23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine......... IN2-218
16. Calibration..................................................................... IN2-201
16.1 Offset Calibration...................................................................IN2-202
16.2 Gain Calibration.....................................................................IN2-203
16.3 Defect Calibration..................................................................IN2-205
16.4 Lag Calibration......................................................................IN2-207
16.5 Checking the Calibration Results..........................................IN2-209
17. Checking for Image Problems..................................... IN2-210

17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, White Blank
Portion, and Sensitivity Problems in the Images...................IN2-210
17.2 Checking the Format............................................................. IN2-211
17.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in Read Center and
Film Character Format Information....................................... IN2-211
18. Disconnecting the SE Cable........................................ IN2-213
19. Checking the Error Log................................................ IN2-214
20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY......................................... IN2-215
018-230-07E
Installation (AppxIN)
Appendix 1. Requirements Regarding Locally Appendix 8.1 Installing the DR-ID 1200 in the Facilities
Obtained Parts..................................... Appx IN1-1 Where the DR-ID 600 Is Already Installed........................Appx IN8-1
Appendix 8.2 Installing the DR-ID 1200 in the Facilities
Appendix 2. Installing the MC Network Interface Where the DR-ID 700 Is Already Installed........................Appx IN8-3
Board..................................................... Appx IN2-1
Appendix 9. Installing the Shock-absorbing Medium
Appendix 3. Redirecting the SE Cable.................... Appx IN3-1 Used for a Mobile X-ray Unit............... Appx IN9-1
Appendix 4. Restoring the IP Address Appendix 10. Updating MC Application Version.... Appx IN10-1
of the MP/SE/DS................................... Appx IN4-1
Appendix 4.1 Restoring the IP Address of the MP........................Appx IN4-1
Appendix 11. Installing the Wireless Bridge............Appx IN11-1
Appendix 4.2 Restoring the IP Address of the SE........................Appx IN4-3 Appendix 12. Installing the Access Point
Appendix 4.3 Restoring the IP Address of the DS........................Appx IN4-6 (DAP-2553, DAP-2695)....................... Appx IN12-1
Appendix 12.1 DAP-2553...........................................................Appx IN12-1
Appendix 5. Procedure for Installing Two MP........ Appx IN5-1
Appendix 12.2 DAP-2695...........................................................Appx IN12-8
Appendix 6. Replacement Procedure
of the Local Network............................ Appx IN6-1 Appendix 13. Connecting Third Panel to
DR-ID 200............................................ Appx IN13-1
Appendix 6.1 Local Network PreSetting >>..................................Appx IN6-1
Appendix 13.1 [DR-ID 200RU] Checking/Changing the IP
Appendix 6.2 MC ETH0 IP Setting >>..........................................Appx IN6-6 Address of CU and Upgrading the CU...........................Appx IN13-3
Appendix 6.3 Changing Folder Name...........................................Appx IN6-7 Appendix 13.2 [DR-ID 200RU] Changing the
EDIT CONFIGURATION Setting....................................Appx IN13-4
Appendix 7. Wireless Channel Used Appendix 13.3 [DR-ID 300CL] Checking the Version/
for the Access Point............................ Appx IN7-1 Upgrading.......................................................................Appx IN13-5
Appendix 13.4 [DR-ID 1200] Additional Installation
Appendix 8. Installing the DR-ID 1200 in the Facilities of DR-ID 1200................................................................Appx IN13-6
Where the DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 700
are Already Installed............................ Appx IN8-1
018-230-07E
Appendix 14. EAP-TLS Setting................................ Appx IN14-1

Appendix 14.1 During Installation...............................................Appx IN14-1
Appendix 14.2 Adding the SE.....................................................Appx IN14-5
Appendix 14.3 When the Certificate File is Expired....................Appx IN14-6
Appendix 15. Attaching the Label for Compliance

with the Radio Law............................ Appx IN15-1
Appendix 16. How to Use Memory Exposure

Mode.................................................... Appx IN16-1
Appendix 17. Battery Removal Procedure

for Replacement................................. Appx IN17-1
Appendix 18. Attaching the FUJIFILM-made AP

Radio Law Label................................. Appx IN18-1
Appendix 19. Installing the Internet Explorer 11.... Appx IN19-1
Appendix 20. Setting for Wired Connection Model.... Appx IN20-1
018-230-07E
Performance Check (PC) 0.26
Performance Check (PC)
DR-ID 1200 Performance Check List.......................................PC-1
018-230-07E DR-ID 1200 Service Manual 0.26

Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.29.2014 01 New release (FM9221) All pages
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 7-10, 12, 17
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 11-13, 17, 21
03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 14-16, 18-20, 22-31
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual

04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 12-20
04.30.2015 05 Changes in pagination (FM9309) 21-29
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 4, 7-14, 18--26, 28, 29
07.29.2016 06 Changes in pagination (FM9340) 15-17, 27, 30, 31
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 22
Safety Precaution
018-230-07E
Safety Precaution -1
1. Safety Precautions  Screws

- All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
Warnings, operating precautions, and instructions should be observed to avoid be overstressed when tightening. Screw connections with incorrect stress can result
possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and in physical injury or property damage.
servicing. - Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with our specified ones.
Labels and name plates that describe relevant precautions are attached to the
machine. The instructions on such labels and name plates should also be observed  Lithium Batteries
while installation/servicing procedures are performed.
Handling of lithium batteries mounted on the MPC54B board needs sufficient attention,
since chemically active lithium metal and combustible materials such as organic
1.1 General Precautions electrolyte are used. Observe the instructions in the Service Manual for handling and
disposal of the lithium batteries.
 Electrical System Components/Parts
 Batteries (Lithium Ion Batteries)
- Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the machine before an installation and
servicing. If an installation and servicing procedure is performed while the power - When a battery mounted on the SE is to be stored for a long time, fully charge the
is ON, you may experience an electric shock, burn, short circuit, or machine battery, then remove it from the SE, and store in a cold and dark space. Re-charge
malfunction. Since some parts are not fully discharged (such as the power supply) the battery during storage semiannually or annually. If the battery is not re-charged,
or remain at a high temperature even after the power is turned OFF, exercise due a drop in capacity of the battery might result.
care not to touch them. Installation or servicing procedures that are to be performed - If the batteries are to be transported by boat or aircraft, use the packing box
with the power turned ON must be completed while exercising due care to avoid designated by FUJIFILM.
electric shock and short circuit, as instructed in this Service Manual. - Observe the instructions in the Service Manual when handling or disposing of the
- Fully exercise care not to splash water on the SE. battery.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your - Do not leave a battery in a vehicle or near a stove at a high temperature. If it is left
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage under a high temperature atmosphere, heat generation, smoke generation, rupture,
electronic components on the board. ignition or the like might result.
- Make sure that the room temperature ranges from 5 to 35°C when a battery is to be
 Heavy Objects charged. If charged out of the range of 5 to 35°C, a protective device in the battery
might get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition
When removing or installing a heavy object, pay due attention to your working posture
or the like.
and get an assistant(s) as needed. Also, use suitable ancillary gear as appropriate.
- Do not disassemble, alter or solder the battery. A safety mechanism or a protective
 Safety Devices device in the battery might get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke
generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
Always keep effective, the safety features of the safety devices such as fuses, circuit - Do not apply heat to the battery (throw into the fire or heat in a microwave oven), nor
breakers and covers. Do not make any alternation or modification that may impair put in a high-pressure vessel. A safety mechanism in the battery might get damaged,
their functionality. resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
- Do not use the battery for other machines. Otherwise, abnormal current might
 Grounding flow in some machines to have the battery damaged, or heat generation, smoke
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and generation, rupture, ignition or the like might result.
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining - Use the dedicated battery charger to charge the battery. Otherwise, excessive
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for current might flow, and heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and like might result.
retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this Service Manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened
to properly secure the parts.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual Safety Precaution -1
- Stop charging the battery if it is not completely charged after a predetermined
charging time (approx. 3 hours). Heat generation, smoke generation, rupture,
1.2 Precautions on Infection
ignition or the like might result. The machine can be contaminated by infected blood or other bodily fluids.
- Do not short-circuit between a positive terminal and a negative terminal of a battery Comply with safety information on protection against infectious diseases when
via a metallic material such as a wire. Short-circuiting causes excessive current servicing the machine. Do not touch blood or other biological fluids.
to flow, and heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like might If not observed, severe injury and even death may result.
result.
- Do not take action for damaging or shocking the battery (as piercing, hammering,
trampling or throwing). A protective device in the battery might get damaged,
resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
1.3 Requirement
- Do not use a battery with flaws, deformation, unusual odors, tarnish or heat. Heat
generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like might result. 1.3.1 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)
- Do not wet the battery with water. If the battery is wetted, a protective device in the IEC60950-1 Approval
battery might get damaged, resulting in heat generation, smoke generation, rupture,
ignition or the like.
- If a liquid leaking from the battery splashes into the eye, immediately flush with clean
1.3.2 Monitor
water such as tap water without rubbing. Contact a doctor immediately afterwards. If IEC60950-1 Approval
left untreated, a failure in the eye might result.
- If a liquid leaking from the battery attaches to the skin or clothing, immediately rinse 1.3.3 Access Point
with clean water such as tap water. If not rinsed off, a rash on the skin might result. IEC60950-1 Approval
- If a liquid leaks or an unusual odor is felt, immediately keep the battery away
from the fire. An electrolyte leaking from the battery might ignite, resulting in heat
generation, smoke generation, rupture, ignition or the like.
 Handling Hazardous Materials

Hazardous materials are designated as substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. Their properties together
with the relevant hazards and protective measures are identified clearly by symbols.
Therefore, the required protective measures must be complied with to secure safety
before handling the hazardous materials.
 Other Precautions
- When performing a servicing procedure while the power is turned ON with covers
removed, carefully proceed with the procedure while observing the instructions
described in this Service Manual. Further, exercise care not to drop screws or other
fasteners into the machine. If any fastener is dropped, be sure to collect it.
- Keep clean the product name plates, safety standards labels, product serial number
labels, caution labels, and other labels attached to the machine, and do not peel
them or put another name plate or label over them.
- Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put covers, screws, and other
fasteners back to their original locations and secure them in place.
- Replace a damaged or worn component with the component specified in the
manual.
018-230-06E
1.4 Precautions on the Patient Environment l Medically-used room

Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
environment or not. grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
 Definition of the Patient Environment, Medically-Used Room and used room. Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Non-Medically Used Room l Non-medically used room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
l Patient environment
The patient environment is defined as an area where a patient gets medical
practice (treatment, tests, diagnosis or monitoring), measuring 2.5 m in all
horizontal directions from the patient’s body and 2.5 m in height during the
medical practice. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the
medically-used room.
<For bed-type machine>
m
5
2.
2.5 m
2.5 m 2.5 m 600_020001.ai
<For stand-type machine>
2.5 m
m
5
2.
2.5 m 2.5 m 600_020002.ai
018-230-06E
1.5 Cautions on Connection 1.6 Cautions on the Table Tap and Extension
Do not connect unspecified instruments. Cord
Do not use a table tap or an extension cord to supply the power to the system
1.5.1 Cautions on the Power Cable for MP, DS and PB
components.
The power cables which can be connected with the MP, DS and PB depend on the
installation site.
<Japan>
1.7 Caution concerning mistaken panel
Use supplied power cables. In order to prevent a mistaken panel when multiple panels are used, always confirm
Do not use other power cables. that the LED color of the panel being used and the color of the active panel icon on
<Outside Japan> the console screen are matched before taking pictures.
Use specified power cables.
Do not use other power cables.
Refer to the following section for the cable specifications.
{Spec:6._Electrical Specifications}
1.5.2 Cautions on the X-Ray Shot Cable

Measure the voltage between the cables connecting to the RDY1-RDY1 and the
RDY2-RDY2 terminals in all techniques before connecting the X-ray shot cable to the
terminal block of the AC bucky relay unit.
Check to make sure that the measured voltage conforms to the coil voltages (100/110
VAC, 110/120 VAC, 200/220 VAC and 220/240 VAC) of the relay to be used.
If the voltage between cables differs from the coil voltage of the relay, commission the
service personnel of the X-ray equipment to check the cable connection.
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged.
1.5.3 Cautions on the Protective Ground Wire

Tighten the screws for retaining the protective ground wire with tightening torque as
indicated below:
- M3 screw: 0.9±10% N•m
- M2 screw: 0.17±10% N•m
If short-circuiting occurs inside the machine, insufficient tightening of the screws might
result in electrical hazards of the patient or the customer.
018-230-06E
1.8 Safety and Other Symbols 1.8.2 Outside Japan

The safety symbols applied in the machine are listed below:
Symbol Description
1.8.1 Japan
This symbol indicates compliance of the equipment with Directive 93/42/
The safety symbols applied in the machine are listed below: 600_020042.ai
EEC.
Symbol Description 600_020027.ai
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS.
600_020027.ai
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS. OFF (To indicate disconnection from the mains, at least for mains
600_020028.ai switches or their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
OFF (To indicate disconnection from the mains, at least for mains
switches or their positions, and all those cases where safety is ON (To indicate connection to the mains, at least for mains switches or
600_020028.ai
involved.) 600_020029.ai their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
ON (To indicate connection to the mains, at least for mains switches or 600_020030.ai
Protective earth (ground)
600_020029.ai their positions, and all those cases where safety is involved.)
600_020031.ai
Alternating current
600_020030.ai
Protective earth (ground)
600_020032.ai
This symbol indicates that the equipment is a Type B Applied Part.
600_020031.ai
Alternating current
600_020033.ai
Ready (To indicate the machine is ready for operation.)
600_020032.ai
Type B applied part
600_020034.ai
Electric energy
Ready (To indicate the machine is ready for operation.)
600_020033.ai
600_020035.ai
General mandatory action sign
600_020034.ai
Electric energy Stand-by
600_020036.ai
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your
600_020035.ai
General mandatory action sign household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) and
your national law.
Stand-by This product should be handed over to a designated collection point.
600_020036.ai
Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially
Point load 600_020043.ai hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
600_020037.ai
At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product
will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
Surface load For more information about waste, please contact FUJIFILM dealers.
1200_020009.ai
This symbol includes RF transmitters or indicates equipment that 600_020044.ai Year of manufacture
intentionally applies RF electromagnetic energy for diagnosis or
600_020099.ai
treatment. Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP)
600_020097.ai
Refer to Instruction Manual/Booklet

600_020100.ai Point load
600_020037.ai
No stepping on surface Surface load

1200_020016.ai 1200_020009.ai
Recycle symbol (three arrows) This symbol indicates that the flat panel sensor supports the automatic
This symbol means that the product must not be disposed of as 600_020098.ai X-ray detection function.
600_020057.ai household wastes. This symbol includes RF transmitters or indicates equipment that
intentionally applies RF electromagnetic energy for diagnosis or
600_020099.ai
treatment.
018-230-06E
Symbol Description 1.9 Precautions on the MP Installation
Refer to Instruction Manual/Booklet The surface temperature of the MP will be raised only when the MP is malfunctioning.
Install the MP in an area that is located away from the floor path into the exposure
600_020100.ai
No stepping on surface
chamber.
1200_020016.ai
Recycle symbol of Europe (crossed out dust bin symbol)

600_020058.ai
Recycle symbol of USA and Canada (RBRC symbol)

600_020059.ai
Recycle symbol of Taiwan

600_020060.ai
Chinese RoHS mark

The symbol means that the product contains specific toxic substances (6
600_020061.ai
substances) designated as RoHS and that the product conforms to the
Chinese RoHS directive.
018-230-06E
2. Labels In addition, the serial numbers with the new type panel are as shown below. The serial
numbers are different depending on the 4th top digit value. The serial numbers other
than those below are the old type panel.
2.1 Rating Indication Labels and Caution SE

4th top digit
value
Destination
Serial numbers for
new type panel
Labels 2 - 66520417 -
5 - 66450489 -
2.1.1 DR-ID 1200 DR-ID
1201SE For Japan 66390056 -
u NOTE u 9
For Overseas 66390063 -
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE include the new type panel
or the old type panel. They can be distinguished by the SE pharmaceutical certification 2 - 66520317 -
label that has been revised since April, 2016.
- New type panel (UL certification panel) 5 - 66450222 -
DR-ID
The rated voltage and current are written on it. 1202SE
For Japan 66390049 -
9
2 - 66520460 -
DR-ID 5 - 66450635 -
1211SE For Japan 66390056 -
1200_020052.ai
9
- Old type panel (TUV certification panel) For Overseas 66390059 -
"DR-ID 1200PU/DU" is written on it. 2 - 66520320 -
DR-ID 5 - 66450324 -
1212SE For Japan 66390045 -
9
DR-ID 2 For Overseas 66520299 -

1200_020053.ai 1213SE 9 For Overseas 66390017 -
DR-ID 2 For Japan 66420434 -

1214SE 9 For Japan 66290017 -
018-230-06E
n 1201SE l Japan
(A) SE serial number label
(A)
S
1200_020027.ai
(B) SE pharmaceutical certification label
1200_020001.ai
l Outside Japan
(B) Printing area for date of manufacture
Printing area for factory
N Manufactured: 2014-3
1200_020028E.ai
1200_020005.ai 1200_020001.ai
018-230-06E
n 1202SE l Japan
(A) S
1200_020027.ai
1200_020002.ai
l Outside Japan
1200_020028E.ai
1200_020021.ai 1200_020002.ai
018-230-06E
n 1211SE l Japan
(A)
S
1200_020027.ai
1200_020003.ai
l Outside Japan
1200_020028E.ai
1200_020005.ai 1200_020003.ai
018-230-06E
n 1212SE l Japan
(A) S
1200_020027.ai
1200_020004.ai
l Outside Japan
1200_020028E.ai
1200_020021.ai 1200_020004.ai
018-230-06E
n 1213SE n 1214SE
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
1200_020033.ai 1200_020033.ai
l Outside Japan l Japan

(A) SE serial number label (A) SE serial number label
Printing area for date of manufacture
S
1200_020027.ai
Printing area for factory (B) SE pharmaceutical certification label

1200_020028E.ai
1200_020035.ai
1200_020034.ai
018-230-06E
n Inside the Battery Box n Battery Pack

(A)
(A)
(B)
Serial ID
1200_020006.ai
Rear view
(A) Caution label 1200_020007.ai
(A) Battery pack rating indication label
600_020016.ai
(B) Caution label
600_020080.ai
n Dummy Battery
1200_020008.ai
(A) 1270_020022.ai
(A) Dummy battery identification label

1270_020021.ai
018-230-06E
2.1.2 DR-ID 1200MP l Outside Japan
n MP Left-Hand Side (A) MP indication label
2015-07
1200_020012.ai
(B) MP rating indication label
(A)
(B)
1200_020030.ai
(C)
1200_020010.ai
(C) Bracket for MP identification label
1300_020015.ai
l Japan
(A) DR-ID 1200 pharmaceutical certification label
1200
226ABBZX00085000
405N120231A
1200_020011.ai
(B) MP rating indication label
1200_020030.ai
(C) Bracket for MP identification label

1300_020015.ai
018-230-06E
n MP Top n MP Rear
(D)
(E)
(F)
1200_020013.ai
1200_020022.ai
(E) Caution label
(D) Caution label
600_020016.ai
1200_020015.ai (F) Caution label
600_020080.ai
REFERENCE
The power cables which can be connected with the MP depend on the installation site.
<Japan>
Use supplied power cables.
<Outside Japan>
Use specified power cables.
Refer to the following section for the cable specifications.
{Spec:6._Electrical Specifications}
018-230-06E
n Inside MP (G) Caution label
 Front face of the relay unit  Rear of the relay unit

(G) (H)
600_020016.ai
REFERENCE
(I) RDY2-RDY2 terminals in all techniques before connecting the X-ray shot cable to the
terminal block of the AC bucky relay unit.
Check to make sure that the measured voltage conforms to the coil voltages (100/110
VAC, 110/120 VAC, 200/220 VAC and 220/240 VAC) of the relay to be used.
If the voltage between cables differs from the coil voltage of the relay, commission the
(J) service personnel of the X-ray equipment to check the cable connection.
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged.
(H) AC bucky relay unit rating identification label

l 100-110 V
(I)
(I)
(I) 2015
1300_020011.ai
l 110-120 V
AC bucky relay unit (I) MPC54B board

1300_020006E.ai
2015
1300_020012.ai
018-230-06E
l 200-220 V n Retaining Bracket for MP
(K)
1300_020016.ai
2015
(K) Retaining bracket for MP identification label
1300_020013.ai
1300_020017.ai
l 220-240 V
n SE Cable
(L)
1200_020036.ai
2015 (L) SE cable 10 m identification label

1300_020014.ai 1270_020024.ai
(I) Protective ground mark (engraved mark) SE cable 20 m identification label

1270_020025.ai
600_020041.ai
(J) Caution label
600_020080.ai
018-230-06E
n MP Power Cable Caution Label (USA Only) 2.1.3 DR-ID 1200DS

Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for U.S.A.)
n DS Top
(A)
(B) 1200_020014.ai
(A) Caution label
600_020018.ai
1200_020015.ai
(B) Bracket for DS identification label

1200_020037.ai
018-230-06E
n DS Rear l Outside Japan

(C) (D) (C) DS indication label
2015-07
1200_020019.ai
(D) DS rating indication label

(E) (F)
1200_020017.ai
l Japan
(C) DR-ID 1200 pharmaceutical certification label
1200 1200_020031.ai
(E) Caution label
226ABBZX00085000
405N120231A
1200_020011.ai
600_020016.ai
(D) DS rating indication label

(F) Caution label
600_020080.ai
1200_020031.ai
(E) Caution label
600_020016.ai
(F) Caution label
600_020080.ai
018-230-06E
n Retaining Bracket for DS 2.1.4 DR-ID 1200PB
(A) (B)
(G)
1200_020038.ai
(G) Retaining bracket for DS identification label

(C) 1200_020051.ai
1200_020039.ai
l Japan
n Wall Bracket for DS
(A) DR-ID 1200 pharmaceutical certification label
1200
(H)
1200_020040.ai
226ABBZX00085000
405N120231A
1200_020011.ai
(H) Wall bracket for DS identification label (B) PB rating indication label
1200_020041.ai
n DS to SE Conversion Connector
1200_020045.ai
(I) 1200_020042.ai (C) Caution label

(I) DS to SE conversion connector identification label (1417/1717)
1200_020043.ai
600_020080.ai
DS to SE conversion connector identification label (2430/1012)

1200_020044.ai
018-230-06E
l Outside Japan 2.1.5 DR-ID 1200MC
(A) PB indication label n In case of the PC for MC: MC Top
(A)
2015-07
1200_020046.ai
(B) PB rating indication label
1200_020045.ai
(C) Caution label
1200_020032.ai
600_020080.ai
(A) MC identification label
1200_020024.ai
018-230-06E
n In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the 2.1.6 Battery Charger
DX Console The battery charger is an optional item of the DR-ID 1200.
The battery charger is supplied together with a removable AC adapter.
(A) MC identification label
n Battery Charger Bottom
(A)
1200_020020.ai
1200_020025.ai
(A) Battery charger rating indication label
Li-ion Battery charger
n MC application Cargador de Bateria
MODEL　 125Y120011
INPUT　　 16V　　　　　 3.4A
OUTPUT　8.2V　　　　　 3A　ｘ 2ｃｈ
Do not disassemble or modify.
Do not use with anything other than the specified adaptor.
Specified battery pack:FUJIFILM Corporation 125N120008
(7.4V 3200mAh 24Wh)
EU only
FUJIFILM Corporation
Parts NO. 125N120009
MADE IN JAPAN F000001A
1200_020026.ai
1300_020021.ai
018-230-07E
n AC Adapter (A) AC adapter rating indication label
(A)
600_020048.ai
600_020049.ai
018-230-06E
3. CLASSIFICATION 3.2 DR-ID 1200MC

IEC60950-1 machine
3.1 DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE /

1213SE / 1214SE 3.3 DR-ID 700AP
IEC60950-1 machine
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
Class 1 machine
3.4 Battery Charger
2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock IEC60950-1 machine
Type B applicable
WARNING
<Requirements on protection against electrical shock>
The X-ray generator to be connected with the machine need be a permanently
installed machine which conforms to the IEC60601-1 or similar standards.
The following I/F cables for connecting the X-ray generator with the machine
need be connected to the external connection terminal of the X-ray generator.
- X-CON connection serial cable (exposure condition, exposure performance)
- X-ray camera connection cable (shot signal)
3. Protection against harmful ingress of water (protection class

against water penetration)
DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE / 1213SE / 1214SE are IPX6-compliant.
DR-ID 1200MP / 1200DS / 1200PB are IPX0.
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence

of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or
nitrous oxide
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5. According to the mode of operation

Continuous use
018-230-06E
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic This Service Manual contains the names of standards applied in IEC 60601-1-2.
The names of standards applied in EN 60601-1-2 are replaced as follows.
Waves IEC 60601-1-2
Standards applied in EN 60601-1-2
(descriptions in this Service Manual)
4.1 DR-ID 1200 CISPR 11 EN 55011
IEC 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-2

4.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-3-3 EN 61000-3-3
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical
devices to the IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2), Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation. IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity. IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to IEC 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-8
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
IEC 61000-4-11 EN 61000-4-11
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
- Increase the separation between the equipment.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
If the problem cannot be solved with the above measures, stop using this equipment
and consult the manufacturer or our official dealer for help.
WARNINGS
- Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this equipment.
- If a device(s) other than those specified is connected, predetermined EMC
performance cannot be guaranteed.
018-230-06E
4.1.2 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN60601-1-2) Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs The DR-ID 1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200 should assure that they are used in such an
the accompanying documents. environment.
- Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical Emissions test Compliance
Electromagnetic
equipment. environment - guidance
- Information regarding the cable affecting EMC is as follows. RF emissions The DR-ID 1200 uses
CISPR 11 RF energy only for their
Maximum internal function.
Name Connected Device General Specification
Length Therefore, their RF
Between the DR-ID Group 1 emissions are very low
Cat5e or more, UTP type and
1200MP and the DR-ID 20 m and are not likely to cause
straight cable
1200MC any interference in nearby
Between the DR-ID electronic equipment.
Cat5e or more, UTP type and
1200MP and the DR-ID 3m RF emissions
straight cable The DR-ID 1200 is
Network cable 1200MP CISPR 11 Class B suitable for use in all
Between the DR-ID Cat5e or more, UTP type and establishments other
20 m
1200MP and the AP straight cable Harmonic emissions than domestic and those
Between the DR-ID IEC 61000-3-2 Complies directly connected to
Cat5e or more, UTP type and the public low-voltage
1200PB and the DR-ID 2m
straight cable Voltage fluctuations/ power supply network that
1200MC
flicker emissions Complies supplies buildings used for
Use a hospital-grade power cable. IEC 61000-3-3 domestic purposes.
(for North America)
* IEC61000-3-2, which set limits for harmonic emissions, and IEC61000-3-3, which set limits
Power cable DR-ID 1200MP 3m for voltage fluctuations/flicker emissions, are applicable to equipment with power-supply
A non-hospital grade power cable voltage over 220 V. It is not necessary to apply these standards to equipment with power-
can be used.(for other countries) supply voltage less than 220 V.
- The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the DR-ID 1200.
- The DR-ID 1200 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DR-ID 1200 should be observed to
verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
- Basic performance of the equipment and the system
Image data are acquired from the DR-ID 1200 and are saved in and displayed on
the DR-ID 300CL.
018-230-06E
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DR-ID 1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The DR-ID 1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200 should assure that they are used in such an
The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200 should assure that they are used in such an environment.
environment.
IEC 60601 Compliance
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test level level
Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment - Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
guidance IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to equipment should be used no closer to any
80 MHz part of the DR-ID 1200, including cables,
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be
than the recommended separation distance
discharge (ESD) wood, concrete or
calculated from the equation applicable to
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors
the frequency of the transmitter.
are covered with
synthetic material,
Recommended separation distance
the relative humidity
d = 1.2
should be at least Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
30%. d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to
2.5 GHz d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality
transient/burst supply lines supply lines should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-4 typical commercial or where P is the maximum output power rating
±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output hospital environment. of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
lines lines the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres
Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality (m).
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode should be that of a Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
typical commercial or as determined by an electromagnetic site
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode hospital environment. survey,a should be less than the compliance
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality level in each frequency range.b
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a Interference may occur in the vicinity
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or of equipment marked with the following
power supply input hospital environment. symbol:
lines 40% UT 40% UT If the user of the DR-
IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) ID 1200 requires
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation
during power mains
70% UT 70% UT interruptions, it is NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the DR-ID 1200 be affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
powered from an a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
<5% UT <5% UT uninterruptible power telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery. broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
for 5 s for 5 s environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the DR-ID 1200 is used
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the DR-ID 1200 should be observed to verify normal
field should be at levels operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
IEC 61000-4-8 characteristic of a such as reorienting or relocating the DR-ID 1200.
typical location in a b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
typical commercial or
hospital environment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
018-230-06E
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the DR-ID 1200
TheDR-ID 1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which
radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200 can help prevent electromagnetic
interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the DR-ID 1200 as recommended
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
Rated maximum m
output power of
transmitter 80 MHz to 800 MHz to
150 kHz to 80 MHz
W 800 MHz 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2
d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the
equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
structures, objects and people.
018-230-06E
4.2 DR-ID 1200MC 4.2.2 Further Information for CISPR 22/EN55022 and CISPR
24/EN55024
4.2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1. Medical electrical equipment is subject to special precautions regarding EMC.
The equipment must be installed and put into service according to the EMC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the international standard
information provided in Tables 1 to 3.
for medical devices below, according to the requirement of the IEC 60601-1-2/EN
60601-1-2. 2. Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
EMC Standard: CISPR 22/EN 55022
3. Information regarding the cable affecting EMC is as follows.
CISPR 24/EN 55024
EN61000-3-2/IEC61000-3-2 Maximum
Name Connected Device General Specification
EN61000-3-3/IEC61000-3-3 Length
Between the DR-ID 1200MP
This does not guarantee that there is no harmful electromagnetic interference under and the DR-ID 1200MC
30 m
Cat5e or more, UTP type
any installation environment. Network cable
and straight cable
Between the DR-ID 1200MC
This equipment can generate, use and radiate radio frequency energy. If the 100 m
and the DR-ID 300CL
equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, or if peripheral Depends on the cable length of a
devices that are not complied with the EMC standard, harmful interference may be Power cable DR-ID 1200MC
personal computer.
generated under a particular environment causing malfunction of the equipment and
other devices. 4. The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
If this equipment causes harmful interference to other devices, or if this equipment is exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
affected by interference from other devices, the user is encouraged to try to correct parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
the interference by one or more of the following measures: immunity of the equipment.
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device. 5. The equipment should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
- Increase the separation between the equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the equipment should be observed to verify
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
other device(s) are connected. 6. Test items (Tables 1 to 3)
If the problem cannot be solved with the above measures, stop using this equipment
Table 1
and consult the manufacturer or our official dealer for help. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The DR-ID 1200MC is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
WARNING The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200MC should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this equipment.
Emissions test Compliance
Noise terminal voltage
CISPR 22 Class B
EN55022
Electric field noise strength
CISPR 22 Class B
EN55022
Harmonic emissions
EN61000-3-2 Class D
IEC61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/flicker emissions
EN61000-3-3 Complies
IEC61000-3-3
018-230-06E
Table 2 Table 3
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DR-ID 1200MC is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The DR-ID 1200MC is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200MC should assure that it is used in such an The customer or the user of the DR-ID 1200MC should assure that it is used in such an
environment. environment.
Immunity test EN/IEC test Compliance level Immunity test EN/IEC test Compliance level
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ±4 kV contact ±4 kV contact Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms
±8 kV air ±8 kV air EN 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast transient/burst ±1 kV for power supply lines ±1 kV for power supply lines Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
±0.5 kV for input/output lines ±0.5 kV for input/output lines EN 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge ±1.0 kV differential mode ±1.0 kV differential mode
±2.0 kV common mode ±2.0 kV common mode
EN 61000-4-5
IEC 61000-4-5
Voltage dips, short interruptions <5% UT <5% UT
and voltage variations on power (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT )
supply input lines for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle
EN 61000-4-11 70% UT 70% UT

IEC 61000-4-11 (30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT )
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT )
for 250 cycles for 250 cycles
Power frequency (50/60Hz) 1 A/m 1 A/m
magnetic field
EN 61000-4-8
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
018-230-06E
5. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Peripheral equipment to be connected with the analog interface or the digital interface
should conform to the related standards (that is, the IEC60950-1 for a data processor,
and the IEC60601-1 or JIS T 0601-1 for medical equipment).
Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1
or JIS T 0601-1-1.
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal
output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system
complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-1 or JIS T 0601-1-1.
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 27
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 1-3, 8, 9, 12, 24, 25
03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 4-7, 10, 11, 13-23, 26-31

04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 1, 7, 11
04.30.2015 05 Changes in pagination (FM9309) 2-6, 8-10, 12-29
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 1-3, 7, 9, 11-14, 18, 21, 22, 25
07.29.2016 06 Changes in pagination (FM9340) 10, 15-17, 19, 20, 23, 24, 26-31
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 1, 21
Product Specifications
018-230-07E
Product Specifications -1
1. Commodity Composition and n Power Supply Unit (MP)
Optional Items Model Type Destination

Japan
Product abbreviation
DR-ID 1200 MP #
Remarks
DR-ID 1200 MP -
Outside Japan DR-ID 1200 MP E
1.1 Commodity Composition
n Control Cabinet (MC)
n Flat Panel Sensor (SE) Model Type Destination Product abbreviation Remarks
Type Product Japan DR-ID 1200 MC SOFT # Install the
Model Size Destination Remarks
*1 abbreviation MC
MC Software Only application
Japan DR-ID 1201 SE # Outside Japan DR-ID 1200 MC SOFT E to the DX
DR-ID 1201 SE 14"x17" DR-ID 1200 MC
Outside Japan DR-ID 1201 SE E Console.
GOS Japan DR-ID 1200 MC UNIT #
Japan DR-ID 1202 SE # Control cabinet
DR-ID 1202 SE 17"x17" Outside Japan DR-ID 1200 MC UNIT E
Outside Japan DR-ID 1202 SE E
Japan DR-ID 1211 SE # n Docking Stand (DS)
DR-ID 1211 SE 14"x17"
Outside Japan DR-ID 1211 SE E Model Type Destination Product abbreviation Remarks
Japan DR-ID 1200 DS #
Japan DR-ID 1212 SE # DR-ID 1200 DS -
DR-ID 1212 SE 17"x17" Outside Japan DR-ID 1200 DS E
CsI Outside Japan DR-ID 1212 SE E
24 cm n Power Box (PB)
DR-ID 1213 SE x Outside Japan DR-ID 1213 SE E
30 cm Model Type Destination Product abbreviation Remarks
DR-ID 1214 SE 10"x12" Japan DR-ID 1214 SE # Japan DR-ID 1200 PB #

DR-ID 1200 PB -
Outside Japan DR-ID 1200 PB E
*1: Scintillator material
018-230-07E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual Product Specification-1
1.2 Optional Items

1.2.1 For DR-ID 1200 Only
n Supplied Options
(O : Supported, - : Not Supported)
Name of machine Type Destination Product abbreviation 1214SE 1213SE 1212SE 1211SE 1202SE 1201SE Remarks
Japan DR1200 SE BATTERY #      
Battery Pack for the SE - - Lithium-ion battery
Outside Japan DR1200 SE BATTERY E      
Battery Charger for the Japan DR1200 SE BATTERY CHAGER #       - For battery pack charging
-
Battery Pack Outside Japan DR1200 SE BATTERY CHAGER E       - AC adapter included
Japan DR1200 SE-CBL 10M #      

10m
Outside Japan DR1200 SE-CBL 10M E      
SE Cable MP - SE
Japan DR1200 SE-CBL 20M #      
20m
Outside Japan DR1200 SE-CBL 20M E      
Japan DR1200 STARTER KIT #      
System Accessory Kit -
Outside Japan DR1200 STARTER KIT E      
n Options for the Docking Stand (DS)

SE Adapter for the Docking Japan DR1200 SE-DS ADAPTER # - -    

-
Stand Outside Japan DR1200 SE-DS ADAPTER E - -    
SE Adapter for the Docking Japan DR1214 SE-DS ADAPTER #  - - - - -

For small size SE
Stand Outside Japan DR1213 SE-DS ADAPTER E -  - - - -
Wall-mounting Kit for Japan DR1200 DS WALL HOLDER KIT #      

-
the Docking Stand Outside Japan DR1200 DS WALL HOLDER KIT E      
Falling Prevention Kit A for Not for retaining Japan DR1200 DS FLOOR FIX KIT A #      
Supplied option only for Japan
the Docking Stand the anchor Outside Japan DR1200 DS FLOOR FIX KIT A E      
Falling Prevention Kit B for For retaining the Japan DR1200 DS FLOOR FIX KIT B #      
the Docking Stand anchor Outside Japan DR1200 DS FLOOR FIX KIT B E      
018-230-06E
n Options for the Power Supply Unit (MP)

Not for retaining Japan DR1200 MP FLOOR FIX KIT A #      

MP Falling Prevention Kit A
the anchor Outside Japan DR1200 MP FLOOR FIX KIT A E      
For retaining the Japan DR1200 MP FLOOR FIX KIT B #      

MP Falling Prevention Kit B
anchor Outside Japan DR1200 MP FLOOR FIX KIT B E      
n Options for the Power Box (PB)

Japan DR1200 PB FLOOR FIX KIT #      
PB Falling Prevention Kit -
Outside Japan DR1200 PB FLOOR FIX KIT E      
n Options for the Mobile

Japan DR1200 AP KIT #      
Kit supplied with the AP set
USA DR1200 AP KIT US E       by country-code, SE cable for
AP Kit -
Europe DR1200 AP KIT EU E       DR-ID 1200 and the Operation
Manual.
China DR1200 AP KIT CN E      
018-230-06E
1.2.2 For both DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 1200
n SE Storage Case
Japan DR600 SE CASE # - - -  - 
For 14"x17"
Outside Japan DR600 SE CASE E - - -  -  Transportation / storage case
SE Storage Case
Japan DR602 SE CASE # - -  -  - for the Outside SE.
For 17"x17"
Outside Japan DR602 SE CASE E - -  -  -
n SE Cable Retaining Clamp

Japan DR600 SE-CBL CLAMP #      
Magnet clamp -
Outside Japan DR600 SE-CBL CLAMP E      
SE Cable Retaining Clamp
Double-sided tape Japan DR600 SE-CBL TAPE CLAMP #      
-
clamp Outside Japan DR600 SE-CBL TAPE CLAMP E      
n X-Ray Shot Cable

Japan DR600 3S-CBL 5M #      
3-core, 5m
Outside Japan DR600 3S-CBL 5M E      
Japan DR600 3S-CBL 15M #       Connected between X-ray
3-core, 15m generator and MP, used for
Outside Japan DR600 3S-CBL 15M E       shot signal cooperation.
X-Ray Shot Cable
Japan DR600 9S-CBL 5M #       Refer to the DB provided by
9-core, 5m FUJIFILM for application of
Outside Japan DR600 9S-CBL 5M E       respective cables.
Japan DR600 9S-CBL 15M #      
9-core, 15m
Outside Japan DR600 9S-CBL 15M E      
MP-MIKASA X-Ray shot For connection to an X-ray
- Japan DR600 MIKASA MP-CBL #      
cable generator made by MIKASA
018-230-06E
n AC Bucky Relay Unit

Japan DR600 AC UNIT 100V #      
100V
Outside Japan DR600 AC UNIT 100V A E      
Japan DR600 AC UNIT 120V #       Connection unit for AC bucky.
120V Composed of relay and
Outside Japan DR600 AC UNIT 120V A E       terminal block.
AC Bucky Relay Unit
Japan DR600 AC UNIT 200V #       Refer to the DB provided by
200V FUJIFILM for application of
Outside Japan DR600 AC UNIT 200V A E       respective cables.
Japan DR600 AC UNIT 220V #      
220V
Outside Japan DR600 AC UNIT 220V A E      
n I/F box, Cables

Japan DR600 I/F BOX #       When the X-ray shot cable
cannot be connected to the
X-ray generator, the shot signal
I/F box -
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX E       between the X-ray generator
and DR-ID 1200 is used for
cooperation.
Japan DR600 I/F BOX HAND SW #       Exposure switch for use as
Hand switches 2 buttons
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX HAND SW E       connected with the I/F box.
Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL 10M #      
10m
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL 10M E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL 15M #      
15m
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL 15M E       Used together with the I/F box.
I/F box cable
Refer to the DB provided by
(Used to connect between Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL GENDEX #       FUJIFILM for application of
the I/F box and the MP)
GENDEX DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL GENDEX respective cables.
Outside Japan      
E
Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL DEL #      
DelMedical
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX-MP CBL DEL E      
018-230-06E

Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL 110-3 #      
110-3 wire
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL 110-3 E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL 110-4 #      
110-4 wire
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL 110-4 E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GE #      
GE1
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GE E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GE2 #      
GE2
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GE2 E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL S #      
Shimadzu
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL S E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL SMS #      
Siemens
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL SMS E      
I/F box cable Used together with the I/F box.
(Used to connect between Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL TM #       Refer to the DB provided by
the I/F box and the X-ray Toshiba FUJIFILM for application of
equipment) Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL TM E       respective cables.
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL CPI #      
CPI
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL CPI E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL DEL #      
DelMedical
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL DEL E      
DelMedical Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL DEL 2 #      
round terminal Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL DEL 2 E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GENDEX #      
GENDEX
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL GENDEX E      
Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL PH 2 #      
Philips
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL PH 2 E      
EMD (for FDR
Outside Japan DR600 I/F BOX CBL EMD E      
D-EVO Suite)
018-230-06E
2. Dimensions, Weight and Location l 1211SE

Dimensions: W460 x D384 x H15 (mm)
of the Center of Gravity Weight: Approx. 2.6 kg (The weight of the battery pack is included.)
2.1 DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE / 460 15
1213SE / 1214SE
n SE
384
l 1201SE
Weight: Approx. 2.6 kg (The weight of the battery pack is included.) Unit: mm
1200_030001E.ai
460 15 l 1212SE
Weight: Approx. 3.2 kg (The weight of the battery pack is included.)
384
460 15
Unit: mm
1200_030001E.ai
460
l 1202SE
Unit: mm
460 15 1200_030002E.ai
460
Unit: mm
1200_030002E.ai
018-230-06E
l 1213SE n MP
Dimensions: W328 x D268 x H15 (mm) Dimensions: W120 x D393.7 x H360.8 (mm)
Weight: Approx. 1.5 kg (The weight of the battery pack is included.) Weight: 6.85 kg
385.8 120
328 15 6.2 1.7
268
360.8
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
1200_030024E.ai
l 1214SE 1200_030004E.ai
Dimensions: W333 x D282 x H15 (mm) n DS

Dimensions: W290 x D581 x H206.1 (mm)
Weight: 6.5 kg
333 15
149
282
290
141
Unit: mm
1200_030025E.ai
<Battery pack>
Dimensions: W143.1 x D172.2 x H7.2 (mm)
Weight: 0.22 kg
143.1 172.2
206.1
7.2 Unit: mm
Battery 1200_030010E.ai 581
Unit: mm
1200_030005E.ai
018-230-06E
n PB 2.2 DR-ID 1200MC

Dimensions: W259 x D205 x H70 (mm) Dimensions: W100 x D379 x H338 (mm)
Weight: 3.2 kg (The weight of the SE cable is included.) Weight: Approx. 7.6 kg
100
70
338
259 205
Unit: mm
1200_030027E.ai
379
Unit: mm
1200_030023E.ai
2.3 FUJIFILM-made AP
Weight: Approx. 0.1 kg
39
17
95
Unit: mm
1200_030022.ai
018-230-06E
2.4 Battery Charger n AC Adapter

The battery charger is an optional item of the DR-ID 1200. Dimensions: W153 x D68 x H35 (mm)
The battery charger is supplied together with a removable AC adapter. Weight: 0.65 kg
n Battery Charger
Dimensions: W92.5 x D258.8 x H55.7 (mm)
Weight: 0.6 kg
35
1500
258.8
68
153 Unit: mm
600_030020.ai
92.5
55.7
Unit: mm
1200_030003E.ai
018-230-06E
3. Installation Space u NOTE u

When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
WARNING with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
When installing the MP, the MC, or the DS, check the surrounding conditions
with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the
and install the unit where the operation of the customer or motion of the patient
detection.
is not interfered. If the MP, the MC, or the DS is installed in the activity range
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
of the customer or the patient such as the floor or the passage, it might cause
communications will be interrupted, and the channel will be changed. After the
injury of the customer or the patient as she/he might stumble or tumble.
channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless
u NOTE u communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
automatically follow over to the AP channel. The wireless communications will be
- Although the SE, the MP, and the DS can be installed in the patient environment, the
maintained on the changed channel until the AP is restarted.
MC cannot. When the MC is to be installed in the exposure chamber, place the MC
at a predetermined distance from a stand-type or a bed-type machine. - In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS
search operation.
When the DR-ID 1200 is to be used as a wireless mode, the access point and the
battery charger need to be installed, but they cannot be installed in the patient The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for
environment. If the access point and the battery charger are to be installed in the checking. For the procedure for checking the log, refer to the following.
exposure chamber, place at a predetermined distance from the stand-type or the {MT:7._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
bed-type machine. Place the access point at a location with the best communication
performance, while strictly observing the mentioned installation requirements.
At this time, do not cover the anntena of the access point with a metalic shield.
Refer to the following description for the distance between the MC and the stand-
type or the bed-type machine.
{Safe:1.4_Precautions on the Patient Environment}
- When installing the MP or the DS, be sure to use the bracket on the floor or the
fixing bracket to prevent it from falling.
- In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44,
48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel
Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
018-230-06E
3.1 DR-ID 1200 l Distance between the SE and the MP (when used as a wired type)
Approx. 10 m or 20 m
3.1.1 DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE - Distance from the MP to the AP: Approx. 10 m
SE
l Distance between the SE and the MP (when used as a wireless type) MP
- Distance from the MP to the AP: Approx. 20 m
- Distance from the AP to the SE (communication coverage): (*)
SE
MP
10 m
AP
600_030019E.ai
- Distance from the MP to the AP: Approx. 20 m
SE
20 m (*) 1200_030026E.ai
MP
*: Communication is possible when the room dimensions are within W10 x D10 x
H3 (m), and the AP and the SE are located in the same room.
REFERENCE
The distance from the AP to the SE differs according to the communication
performance.
If a shield of radio waves such as a metallic plate is present around the AP, the 20 m
communication distance might be shorter or communication rate might degrade.
1200_030015E.ai
018-230-06E
l Distance between the SE and the PB 3.1.2 DR-ID 1200MP
- Distance from the PB to the SE: Approx. 10 m A single MP is shared in a 2-panel structure.
SE l Vertical setting
<Not fixed with an anchor (optional)>
100 or more
PB
10m
385.8 240
1200_030028.ai Unit: mm
0 or more 0 or more 1200_030006E.ai
- Distance from the PB to the MC: Approx. 2 m

<Fixed with an anchor (optional)>
100 or more
MC
PB
385.8 136.6
2m Unit: mm
1200_030029.ai
100 or more 100 or more 1200_030007E.ai
Horizontal setting
l
100 or more
375.2
0 or more 0 or more Unit: mm
1200_030008E.ai
u NOTE u
When installing the MP horizontally, install the MP to make the breaker switch and
the indicator underside. If the MP is installed upside down, the power supply is
deteriorated.
018-230-06E
3.1.3 DR-ID 1200DS 3.1.4 DR-ID 1200PB
u NOTE u
100 or more
The indicator function indicating the FPD status is mounted on the DS. When
installing the DS, determine the installation position after considering the visibility and
operability of the indicator.

100 or more
259 205
1200_030032E.ai

581 100 or more
Unit: mm
0 or more 1200_030016E.ai

100 or more
369 205
1200_030030E.ai

1200_030017E.ai
<Fixed on a wall>
100 or more
Unit: mm
21.2 1200_030018E.ai
018-230-06E
3.2 DR-ID 1200MC 3.3 Battery Charger

n Vertical Setting
130 or more 100 or more
MC 258.8 92.5
MC 50
or more
Unit: mm
1200_030009E.ai
379 100
0 or 0 or
more more Unit: mm
1200_030011E.ai
Horizontal Setting
n
MC
Unit: mm
379 1200_030012E.ai
018-230-06E
3.4 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)

n Vertical Setting
Computer
254 66
0 or 0 or
more more Unit: mm
1200_030013E.ai
n Horizontal Setting
251 Unit: mm
1200_030014E.ai
018-230-06E
4. Means for Moving and Fixing the REFERENCE

For the DR-ID 1200DS, the bracket for anchoring or fixing on a wall is specified as an
Machine optional item.
Refer to the following figure to anchor the DR-ID 1200DS or to fix the DR-ID 1200DS
on a wall .
n Moving Other units except for the DR-ID 1200MP and the DR-ID 1200DS are not to be
anchored or not to be fixed on a wall.
Not specified
<DR-ID 1200DS: fixed with an anchor>
n Fixing
0 or more
For placing on the floor (not fixed) 150.4 280 250.6 or more
REFERENCE
For the DR-ID 1200MP, the bracket for anchoring is specified as an optional item.
Refer to the following figure to anchor the DR-ID 1200MP.
Other units except for the DR-ID 1200MP and the DR-ID 1200DS are not to be
93.8
anchored or not to be fixed on a wall.
or more
<DR-ID 1200MP>
Unit: mm
169.5 or more 1200_030020E.ai
167.1 250 69.5 <DR-ID 1200DS: fixed on a wall>

or more
234.8 91.2
60
or more 355 or more
68.4
167.1
or more 197.4
95
34
Unit: mm 21.2 Unit: mm

1200_030019E.ai 1200_030021E.ai
018-230-06E
5. Environmental Conditions n Installation Site Conditions

Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places where the temperature changes drastically
5.1 DR-ID 1200 - Places near heat sources such as heaters
- Places where water leakage or machine submersion may occur
The environmental conditions for installing the DR-ID 1200 are described below.
- Places where a corrosive gas may be generated
REFERENCE - Dusty places
The AP is a locally procured product. Therefore, refer to the AP Instruction Manual for - Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock
environmental requirements of the AP. - Places exposed to direct sunlight
- Places where no ventilation equipment is provided
n Climate Conditions
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/
1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE/
DR-ID 1200MP/DR-ID 1200DS/
Unit Battery pack alone
DR-ID 1200PB
With the battery pack Without the battery pack
incorporated incorporated
Temperature 15°C−30°C 15°C−30°C 5°C−35°C (*2)
15%−80% RH 15%−80% RH 15%−80% RH
Humidity (without moisture (without moisture (without moisture
Operating
condensation) condensation) condensation) (*2)
Atmospheric
700−1060 hPa 700−1060 hPa 700−1060 hPa (*2)
pressure
Temperature 5°C−35°C 5°C−35°C 5°C−35°C
10%−80% RH 10%−80% RH 15%−80% RH
Non- Humidity (without moisture (without moisture (without moisture
operating condensation) condensation) condensation)
Atmospheric
700−1060 hPa 700−1060 hPa 700−1060 hPa
pressure
Temperature (*1) -30°C−50°C -20°C−50°C
10%−90% RH 10%−80% RH
Transit/ Humidity (*1) (without moisture (without moisture
storage condensation) condensation)
Atmospheric
(*1) 700−1060 hPa 700−1060 hPa
pressure
*1: Transportation or storage of the battery pack while mounted on the SE is not
permitted for the sake of safety.
*2: Requirements for charging the battery pack
n Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration

10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.0075 mm or less in amplitude
018-230-06E
5.2 Battery Charger 5.2.2 AC Adapter

Described below are the environmental conditions for installing the battery charger
and the AC adapter.
l Operating
5.2.1 Battery Charger Temperature: 0°C−40°C
Humidity: 10%−85% RH (without moisture condensation)
n Climate Conditions Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa
l Operating l Non-operating
Temperature: 0°C−40°C Temperature: -25°C−60°C
Humidity: 10%−90% RH (without moisture condensation) Humidity: 10%−95% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa
l Non-operating l Transit/storage
Temperature: -20°C−40°C Temperature: -25°C−60°C
Humidity: 10%−95% RH (without moisture condensation) Humidity: 10%−95% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa
l Transit/storage
Temperature: -20°C−40°C n Installation Site Conditions
Humidity: 10%−95% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places near heat sources such as heaters
n Installation Site Conditions - Places where water leakage or machine submersion may occur
- Dusty places
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock
- Places exposed to direct sunlight
- Patient environment (Avoid installation in the patient environment.)
- Dusty places
018-230-06E
5.3 DR-ID 300CL (Computer) 5.5 Access Point

See the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
5.4 Monitor l Operating
See the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual. Temperature: 10°C−35°C
Humidity: 10%−90% RH
Atmospheric pressure: 700−1060 hPa
l Non-operating
Temperature: -30°C−50°C
l Transit/storage
Temperature: -30°C−50°C
n Installation Site Conditions

- Dusty places
018-230-06E
6. Electrical Specifications n I/F Cable

For some parts, such as network cables, locally obtained parts may be used. In this
case, parts that meet the requirements set forth below should be obtained locally.
6.1 DR-ID 1200 l Network cable
Maximum Cable
n Frequency Connected Device
Length
General Specification
50−60 Hz Between the DR-ID 1200MP
20 m
and the DR-ID 1200MC
n Input Voltage Between the DR-ID 1200MP
20 m <Grade>
and the AP
100-240 V ~ ±10% Category 5e or more (UTP type)
Between the DR-ID 1200MP
and the DR-ID 1200MP
3m 1000Base-T
n Power Source and Grounding Conditions Between the DR-ID 1200PB
<Connection>
2m Straight cable
and the DR-ID 1200MC
AC outlet (3-pin) Between the DR-ID 1200MC
100 m
and the DR-ID 300CL
n Rated Amperage
MP: 2-0.84 A (100-240 VAC) l Network HUB
DS: 2-0.84 A (100-240 VAC) applicable standard: 1000Base-T
PB: 2-0.84 A (100-240 VAC) compliant standard: VCCI CLASS B (Japan), CE/FCC CLASS B (outside Japan)
MC: 2.55-1.27 A (100-240 VAC)
n Overload Protection
Circuit breaker incorporated (3A)
n Power Consumption
MP : 100 W or lower (when two SE’s are connected)
DS : 200 W or lower
PB :
MC : 255 W or less
n Maximum permissible conductor impedance per unit length (km)

26 Ω
018-230-07E
n MP / DS / PB Power Cable n MC Power Cable

l Japan l Japan
- Use the supplied cable. - Wire diameter: 18 AWG or more
- Rated voltage: 100 VAC or higher
l USA - Rated current: 7 A or higher
- Wire diameter: 18 AWG or more - Cable type: SJT
- Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher - Cable length: 1.8 m or shorter
- Rated current: 7 A or higher
- Cable type: SJT l USA and Canada
- Cable length: 3 m or shorter - Wire diameter: 18 AWG or more
- The caution label indicating that the cable should be grounded with an outlet - Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
conforming to the UL60601 must be applied. - Rated current: 7 A or higher
- Use a detachable power cable as UL listed. - Cable type: SJT
- Use a plug of the hospital grade. - Cable length: 1.8 m or shorter
l Canada l Europe
- Wire diameter: 18 AWG or more - Cable section area: 0.75 mm2 or more
- Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher - Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
- Rated current: 7 A or higher - Rated current: 6 A or higher
- Cable type: SJT - Cable type: H05VV-F
- Cable length: 3 m or shorter - Cable length: 1.8 m or shorter
- Plug
Mold type: Use a plug of the hospital grade conforming to the CSA C22.2 No. 21.
Assembly type: Should conform to the SA C22.2 No. 42.
- Cable: Should conform to the CSA C22.2 No. 21.
l Europe
- Use the cable certified by the country where the machine is to be installed.
- Cable section area: 1.0 mm2 or more
- Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
- Rated current: 6 A or higher
- Cable type: H05VV-F
- Cable length: 3 m or shorter
018-230-06E
6.2 Battery Charger 6.2.2 AC Adapter
6.2.1 Battery Charger

n Frequency
50−60 Hz
n Frequency
n Input Voltage
50−60 Hz
l Japan
n Input Voltage
100 V ±10%
16 VDC ± 5% (input voltage from the AC adapter)
l Outside Japan
n Power Source and Grounding Conditions 100-240 V ±10%
Use the dedicated AC adapter.
n Power Source and Grounding Conditions
n Charge Voltage
8.2 V ± 0.06 V l Japan
AC outlet (2-pin)
n Charge Current
l Outside Japan
2.9 A ± 5%
AC outlet (2-pin or 3-pin)
n Rated Output Voltage
Built-in fuse (2.5 A)
16 V
n Power Consumption
n Rated Output Current
100 W or less
6.5 A
Built-in fuse (7.73 A)
n Power Consumption
100 W or less
018-230-06E
6.3 DR-ID 300CL (Computer)

6.4 Monitor
6.5 Access Point

For details on the Access Point, see the manual provided by the manufacturer.
018-230-06E
7. Other Specifications l Withstand load (SE)

Point load
Surface load
(Φ40)
n SE 160 kgf 310 kgf
l X-ray conversion mode

Indirect conversion mode (GOS/CsI* scintillator)
n Maximum Attenuation Equivalent
* GOS: Terbium-activated gadolinium oxysulfide; one of materials emitting light by 0.1 mmAl (SE front cover)
X-ray energy
CsI: Cesium iodide ; one of materials emitting light by X-ray energy n DR-ID 300CL (computer) minimum specification
l Maximum recording size See the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
24 cm x 30 cm, 10" x 12", 14" x 17", 17"x17" n Performance

l Number of pixels
l Image display
24 cm x 30 cm: 1,920 x 1,536 (pixel)
<Time taken since the completion of irradiation until the preview display>
10" x 12": 1,980 x 1,648 (pixel)
- DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE (wireless type):
14" x 17": 2,336 x 2,836 (pixel)
Less than 2 seconds
17" x 17": 2,832 x 2,836 (pixel)
- DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE (wired type):
l Effective image area Less than 2 seconds
24 cm x 30 cm: 288 x 230.4 (mm)
<Time taken since the completion of irradiation until the diagnosis image display>
10" x 12": 297 x 247.2 (mm)
- DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wireless type): Less than 7.5 seconds
14" x 17": 350.4 x 425.4 (mm)
- DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wired type): Less than 6 seconds
17" x 17": 424.8 x 425.4 (mm)
- DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wireless type): Less than 5 seconds
l Pixel resolution - DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wired type): Less than 5 seconds
0.15 (mm/pixel) l Exposure cycle (when exposures with a usual chest radiograph dose
l Concentration resolution are repeated)
16 bit <Connecting X-ray equipment>
- DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wireless type): Less than 9 seconds
l Image quality - DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wired type): Less than 9 seconds
<GOS> - DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wireless type): Less than 9 seconds
With quality of radiation of RQA5 and a dose of 258 nC/kg; - DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wired type): Less than 9 seconds
Noise (DQE): 27.0 to 33.0% (per cycle/mm)
Sharpness (MTF): 54.0 to 66.0% [Normally sharp](per cycle/mm) <Detecting Xfree>
67.5 to 82.5% [Highly sharp](per cycle/mm) - DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wireless type): Less than 10.5 seconds
<CsI> - DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (wired type): Less than 10 seconds
With quality of radiation of RQA5 and a dose of 258 nC/kg; - DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wireless type): Less than 9 seconds
Noise (DQE): 48.6 to 59.4% (per cycle/mm) - DR-ID 1213SE/1214SE (wired type): Less than 9 seconds
Sharpness (MTF): 72.0 to 88.0% (per cycle/mm)
018-230-06E
l Duration until bootup completes
Using one panel: Approx. 2.5 minutes
u NOTE u
The duration may change depending on the number of panels to be used for the
1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE.
n Noise (MP, DS)

Operation: 55 dB or less
Standby: 50 dB or less (except single noise)
REFERENCE
The values are measured at positions that are 1.2 to 1.5 m above the floor and a 1 m
interval from the device surface.
018-230-06E
8. Grid
REFERENCE
The grid is not included in the machine components.
The recommended grids are as shown below.

- Applicable grid
Intermediate members (*1): Aluminums
Grid density (*2): 34 lines/cm, 40 to 44 lines/cm, 60 lines/cm, and 80 lines/cm or
more
*1: The fiber grid may cause moire. Be sure to check there is no problem with the
grid before use.
*2: The grids for 34 or 60 lines/cm may cause artifacts around metal parts and
synthetic bones. Be sure to check there is no problem with the grid before use.
u NOTE u
If a customer is going to purchase a new grid, recommend the grid for 40 to 44 and 80
lines/cm or more.
018-230-06E
9. G Sensor on SE and Action in case 9.1.2 Action When the Failure Is Attributed to the Customer
The machine is repaired (primary repair by the sales company), referring to the
of Failure troubleshooting manual.
A defective point is identified. Cable connection is checked, or the board is replaced
A charge-free guarantee period similar to that of a conventional machine is applied to as needed. The customer must bear the cost of the primary repair.
the machine. If “guarantee against drop” is contracted between the customer and the sales
However, since the SE is a precision instrument, a failure due to inadvertence of company, the bearer of the cost may depend on the contract. Check the individual
a customer might occur. In such a case, the charge-free guarantee period is not contract.
applicable, that is, the customer need bear the cost for repair.
u INSTRUCTION u
A period of one year after the installation of the machine is specified as the guarantee
period, and components are provided free from FUJIFILM against the failure during Observe the following terms when the primary repair takes place by the sales
that period. However, if the failure is not attributed to the design and production of the company.
manufacturer (FUJIFILM), the charge-free guarantee period is not applicable as in - Do not repair or modify if the external form of the SE deforms.
conventional cases. - Do not edit or delete the log files in the G sensor.
9.1 Failure Attributed to the Customer n Cases Where the Repair Is Not Possible
Install the SE from the stock at the sales company, return the defective SE to the
9.1.1 How to Determine Whether the Failure Is Attributed manufacturer (FUJIFILM), and order a new SE. Consult the manufacturer (FUJIFILM)
to the Customer for guarantee as special support is provided for the SE.
Conditions to determine whether the failure is attributed to the customer are as
follows. n When the Failure Is Solved by the Primary Repair
If one of the following conditions applies, the failure is determined to be attributed to Even if the failure is solved, the machine might get damaged.
the customer. Although the SE with the failure solved by the primary repair can be continuously
- Dropping or shock has recorded in the log file in the G sensor; used if the customer demands, the following conditions should be explained to the
- The external form of the SE deforms (dent, crack, breakage or the like); customer:
- A trace of water damage or liquid contamination is observed. - The quality of the SE cannot be guaranteed, and the failure may possibly recur.
REFERENCE
- If the failure recurs, the customer must bear the cost of the repair.
The SE has two G sensors incorporated for detecting shocks. The shock watch does
not detect static load (flexure or partial pressurization) or liquid immersion.
018-230-06E
9.2 Failure Attributed to the Manufacturer 9.3 Other Precautions in Handling

When more than 5 minutes passed after the SE is powered OFF, shock will not be
9.2.1 How to Determine Whether the Failure Is Attributed recorded in the G sensor. Pay attention especially to the handling after the power is
OFF.
to the Manufacturer
If none of conditions mentioned in Sect. 9.1.1 is applicable, the failure is determined to
be attributed to the manufacturer (FUJIFILM).
9.2.2 Action When the Failure Is Attributed to the

Manufacturer
The machine is repaired (primary repair by the sales company), referring to the
troubleshooting manual.
A defective point is identified. Cable connection is checked, or the board is replaced
as needed.
The manufacturer (FUJIFILM) bears the cost of the primary repair during the charge-
free guarantee period. Request via the PRS (Parts Request System).
u INSTRUCTION u
Observe the following terms when the primary repair takes place by the sales
company.
- Do not repair or modify if the external form of the SE deforms.
- Do not edit or delete the log files in the G sensor.
n Cases Where the Repair Is Not Possible

Install the SE from the stock at the sales company, return the defective SE to the
manufacturer (FUJIFILM), and request the SE to apply for the free guarantee of
charge.
n When the Failure Is Solved by the Primary Repair

The machine can be continuously used as it is free from the possibility of the damage
and has no problem on its quality.
018-230-06E
10. Disposal of the Machine 10.3 Battery Pack (Lithium Ion Battery)
Dispose of according to local rules of the country or local government.
Dispose of the machine or its components in compliance with the local regulations.
Classify the wastes according to the local situations for collection or disposal.
Take appropriate actions as consigning to waste disposers in principle. 10.4 Locally Procured Items
WARNING l AP:
Dispose of according to the instruction of the manufacturer.
Observe precautions mentioned in the “Safety Precautions” and “Checks,
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)” when a component is to be
removed.
10.1 Lithium Batteries

n Japan
Handling of lithium batteries needs sufficient attention, since chemically active lithium
metal and combustible materials such as organic electrolyte are used.
l MP:
Remove the board (MPC54B board) on which the lithium batteries are mounted when
disposing of the MP. Be sure to return the removed board to the Parts Center.
l MC:
When disposing of the MC, take appropriate actions according to the instructions
of “Disposal of batteries” and “Battery instruction” mentioned in the PC instruction
manual.
n Outside Japan
Dispose of according to the local regulations.
10.2 SE
Parts of the components of the SE contain such substances which possibly may
contaminate the environments if inadvertently disposed of.
Be sure to return the SE to the Parts Center when the machine is to be disposed of.
However, if the contamination of the SE surface is intense and can not be removed,
do not return the SE to the Parts Center, and dispose of according to the local
regulations.
018-230-06E
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 2, 3, 17
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 1-3, 5-8, 10, 11, 13, 17, 19
03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 14-16, 18, 20-23

04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 20
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 1, 2, 4, 5, 7-11, 16
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 5
Machine Description (MD)
018-230-07E
MD-1
1. Summary of the Machine 1.2 System Configuration Examples
The machine consists of the DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/
1214SE, the DR-ID 1200MC, and the DR-ID 700AP, and serves as the system (DR-ID
1.1 Features of the Machine 1200) when combined with the DR-ID 300CL.
The battery charger (optional) which constitutes the DR-ID 1200 can be selected as
an optional item only when the DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/
n DR-ID 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE / 1213SE / 1214SE 1214SE is used as the wireless type.
- The SE serving as a high performance flat panel sensor is the most light-weighted in DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE
the world, and improves portability by a user and mobility by assuring strength as a (flat panel sensor of wireless/wired type)
handy type machine.
DR-ID 1200MP
- As well as the SE can be used as a standalone unit, it can be used as mounted on (power supply unit)*1
our stand or bed supporting the CR cassettes already installed in the market (retrofit (optional)
radiography) since the SE is of the same size (external dimensions and thickness)
DR-ID 1200DS
as that of a conventional normal cassette. (docking stand)
- The machine can be connected with our designated X-ray equipment already (optional)
installed in the market (retrofit connection).
DR-ID 1200PB
- The machine is equipped with a G sensor capable of recognition of a failure if the (power box)
SE is dropped. DR-ID 1200 (optional)
- The SE can be changed over between the wired type and the wireless type by (system)
DR-ID 1200MC
putting on/off the supplied cable in one-touch operation. (control cabinet)*2*3
- When used as the wireless type, absence of a cable connecting between the SE
Battery charger
and the MP can improve workability. (optional)
- The SE can be mounted on an exposure stand with any specifications and
DR-ID 700AP
exposures can be made. (FUJIFILM-made AP)
- Adding the MP, up to five SE’s can be connected. (optional)
- Exposure images can be stored in the SE memory. (Memory exposure mode) DR-ID 300CL
(image processing unit)
(optional)
*1: For supplying the power to the SE (flat panel sensor). The power is supplied from the
battery pack incorporated in the SE when the 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/
1214SE is used as a wireless type.
*2: For controlling the SE (flat panel sensor)
*3: DR-ID 1200MC V3.0 or later can be connected to DR-ID 300CL V8.1 or later.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
n In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the n In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the
DX Console MC
A maximum of five SEs can be connected depending upon the MP, DS or PB that are A maximum of five SEs can be connected depending upon the MP, DS or PB that are
being added on. being added on.
A maximum of two SEs can be connected with the MP, and a maximum of three SEs A maximum of two SEs can be connected with the MP, and a maximum of three SEs
can be connected respectively with the PB and DS. The maximum connection total of can be connected respectively with the PB and DS. The maximum connection total of
units for the MP, DS and PB is five units. units for the MP, DS and PB is five units.
The battery charger and the AP are not required when the SE is used as a wired type. The battery charger and the AP are not required when the SE is used as a wired type.
Hospital Network Hospital Network
Ceiling suspended Battery charger Ceiling suspended Battery charger

X-ray tube support X-ray tube support
X-ray tube X-ray tube

AP DX Console
Collimator AP Collimator (DR-ID 300CL)
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/ DR-ID 1200DS DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/ DR-ID 1200DS

1211SE/1212SE/ 1211SE/1212SE/ HUB
1213SE/1214SE 1213SE/1214SE
DR-ID 1200PB DR-ID 1200PB
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/ DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/
1211SE/1212SE/ DX Console 1211SE/1212SE/
DR-ID 1200MP HUB DR-ID 1200MP HUB DR-ID 1200MC
1213SE/1214SE (DR-ID 300CL) 1213SE/1214SE
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/ DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/

1211SE/1212SE/ X-ray operator 1211SE/1212SE/ X-ray operator
Generator Generator
1213SE/1214SE console 1213SE/1214SE console
Remote Remote
control control
: DR-ID 1200 1200_100009.ai

: DR-ID 1200 1200_100010.ai
REFERENCE REFERENCE
For details on system configuration examples, refer to the following sections. For details on system configuration examples, refer to the following sections.
- Full configuration - Full configuration (DS wired connection)
{IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n Installing the MC application {IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n Installing the MC application
in the DX Console} in the MC (DS wired connection)}
- MP minimum configuration - Full configuration (DS wireless connection)
{IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n MP minimum configuration} {IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n Installing the MC application
- DS minimum configuration in the MC (DS wireless connection)}
{IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n DS minimum configuration}
- PB minimum configuration
{IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n PB minimum configuration}
018-230-06E
MD-3
n In case of the mobile configuration
Hospital Network
DX Console
Battery charger AP (DR-ID 300CL)
1211SE/1212SE/
1213SE/1214SE
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/ Wireless

DR-ID 1200DS
1211SE/1212SE/ bridge
1213SE/1214SE
Mobile
: DR-ID 1200 1200_100011.ai
REFERENCE
For details on system configuration examples, refer to the following section.
- Mobile configuration
{IN1:2.2.3_Attachment Position for the Ferrite Core n Mobile configuration}
018-230-06E
MD-4
1.3 General Configuration of the DR-ID 1200 No. Name Description
- Two kinds of SE’s are available, including the SE which can be
and Names changed over between the wired type and the wireless type by putting
on/off the supplied cable.
- Serves as the indirect FPD (X-ray flat panel detector) by means of
1.3.1 External View and Functions SE gadolinium oxide sulfur, converts the X-ray energy transmitting through
(A) (flat panel a subject into a digital image signal, and transfers it to the MC.
(B) (C) sensor) The control signal and image signals are together transmitted/
(A) received via the MC also including the Ethernet function.
- Incorporates the status lamp (LED) indicating the SE status.
- The machine is equipped with a G sensor capable of visual
recognition of a failure if the SE is dropped.
- Operates by an instruction from the MC, and has a MC protocol
conversion function.
- Transmits/receives the X-ray shot signal and exposure conditions/
MP
exposure performance data, and transmits the information to the MC.
(B) (power supply
- Supplies power (12 V) to the SE.
unit)
- The power cable is shipped together with the machine from the
factory to destinations inside Japan. The cable needs to be locally
prepared in other countries.
- Corrects the image data sent from the SE, and transmits to the CL.
MC - Transmits the exposure conditions received from the CL to the X-ray
(C) (control equipment.
cabinet) - Transmits the exposure performance data received from the X-ray
equipment to the CL.
(E) DS Supplies power (12 V) to the SE.
(D) (docking
stand)
(D) PB Supplies power (12 V) to the SE.
(E)
(power box)
FUJIFILM-
(F) Connects the SE with the DX Console via the wireless network.
made AP
(F)
1200_100012.ai
018-230-06E
MD-5
REFERENCE - Indications of the DS status lamps (LED’s) are as follows:
- Indications of the SE status lamps (LED’s) are as follows: SE identification
READY POWER
LINK
SLEEP
READY
POWER Battery
ERROR 1200_100028E.ai
LINK Lighting
LED Description
state
POWER LED Lit Power ON
(Blue) Unlit Power OFF
Connected
1200_100019.ai
LINK LED (When the connection between the
Lit
LED Lighting state Description (White) SE and the MC is established after
Lit Exposure possible inserting the SE)
READY LED Yellow- Display the charge state for the SE
Flashing at 1.0-sec intervals During exposure sequence
(Green) green battery pack
Unlit Standby
Battery LED
Lit Power ON Lit
POWER LED Error
Flashing - (Orange)
(Blue)
Unlit Power OFF SE
Display the same color as the SE
Lit Communication error identification -
ERROR LED identification lamp currently in use.
Flashing at 1.0-sec intervals Hardware error LED
(Orange)
Unlit Normal READY LED
Lit Exposure possible
Lit Connected (Blue)
LINK LED
(White)
Flashing - - When turning on the power of the DS, the Ready LED (green) may light up for
Unlit - a moment (a second or less). Note that this does not affect the performance or
Lit Extra sleep mode functions.
SLEEP LED
Flashing -
(Blue)
Unlit Sleep OFF or sleep mode
- The SE warning and error temperature are as per the following. However, these
temperatures are estimates since they fluctuate depending on the SE type and the
external temperatures.
Warning: Approx. 10°C or lower Approx. 40°C or higher
Error: Approx. -10°C or lower Approx. 60°C or higher
018-230-07E
MD-6
1.3.2 Electric parts The shading in the following table indicates parts for which market replacement is not
possible.
n SE rear
1201SE/
<1201SE/1211SE> <1202SE/1212SE> No. Name 1202SE/ 1213SE/ Function Description
1211SE/ 1214SE
(K) (K) 1212SE
1213SE:
(B) (B) (B) (B) GTC GTD66A The gate control signal (charge read switch) received from
(A) GTD65A
(A) (N) (A) (N) GTD 1214SE: the RMV board is amplified and sent to the gate control IC.
(L) (L) GTC66A
(D) (D) 1201SE/
ABA 1211SE: 1213SE:
(E) (J) (E) (J)
ABB ABB65A ABD66A The analog signal read from the panel is converted to a
(K) (F) (K) (F) (B)
ABC 1202SE/ 1214SE: digital signal and sent to the RMV board.
ABD 1212SE: ABC66A
(C) (H) (C) (H) ABA65A
(A) (I) (A) (I) - Control of image reading. The image data received
(M) (M) from the ABA/ABB/ABC/ABD board are subjected to
compensation processing and are sent to the WLAN
(G) (G) module.
- With each image acquisition completion, the temperature
in the panel is monitored by Thermistor.
- Supply of the DC power for the boards in the panel.
(N) (D) (K) (N) (D) (K) (C) RMV 65A 66A - Control of communication with the panel outside (wired/
wireless).
- Control of each board in the panel, based on requests
<1213SE> <1214SE> from the MC (battery monitoring, LED control, shock
(R) (R) sensor control, SE application update, log output to the
FTP server, etc.).
- The RMV66A board also has the functions of the POW65A
(B) (N) (B) (N) board, GLG65A board and LEC65A board.
(D) LED 65A 66A Lighting of the panel LED (status lamp)
(T) (S) (T)
Control of power supply switching (wired/battery), hot
(E) POW 65A -
(C) (C) swapping, and battery charging.
(A) (J) (A) (J)
Control between POW/REC and battery, relaying of the
(F) BCN 65A
(M) (M) power supply.
(P) (O) (P) (O) Calculation of dropping height or degree of shock based
(D) (D) on the acceleration detected by the GLS board. When the
(F) (F) calculated value exceeds the PC-TOOL set value, the log is
(H) (H) written to the built-in nonvolatile memory and transmitted to
the MC, and an error message is displayed.
In addition, the following functions are provided.
(G) GLG 65A -
- Real-time clock (RTC): The time information for the log is
(N) (D) (Q) (I) (N) (D) (Q) (I) provided.
1200_100001.ai
- Capacitor: At the time of panel power OFF, power is
supplied for approx. 5 minutes to the board.
- Calibration: Zero point adjustment for the high G sensor (3
directions: X, Y, Z).
Receive the battery current through the REC board when
(H) SPR 65A 66A
battery operated.
018-230-06E
MD-7
- Supply the battery current to the SPR board when battery 1.3.3 I/O Parts Information
operated.
(I) REC 65A 66A
- Control of power supply switching (wired/battery), hot
swapping, and battery charging. (for REC66A) n MP
(J) LEA 65A 66A Display the POWER, ERROR, LINK and READY LED.
DETAIL A
(K) LEB 65A - Display the selector color of the LED.
(L) LEC 65A - Display the 7-segment and the remaining battery capacity.
(M) WLAN module Perform the wireless communication.
(N) Antenna Wireless communication with the AP (2 locations).
(O) RLY - 66A Relay various signals.
(P) LEY - 66A Display the selector color of the LED.
(Q) LEX - 66A Display the selector color of the LED.
(R) LEZ - 66A Display the selector color of the LED.
(S) CNA - 66A Relay the RMV board and the GTC board.
Perform the short-range communication with the dedicated
(T) NCA - 66A
terminal.
(C) (A)
MP
(B)
1200_100013.ai
018-230-06E
MD-8
No. Name Symbol Type Description n DS
Power supply circuit breaker switch
(A) Power circuit breaker - 200 VAC

- Handle mark:
600_100009.ai
Cools the interior of the MP and

(B) MP cooling fan FAN1 24 VDC
exhausts the air inside the MP.
(C) Circuit protector
(A)
1200_100014.ai
No. Name Symbol Type Description

Power supply circuit breaker switch
(A) Power circuit breaker - 200 VAC

- Handle mark:
600_100009.ai
n CU (option)
For I/O parts and interface parts of the CU, see the followings.
- I/O parts
{DR-ID 320RU Service Manual_MD:2.2.2_CU (Stand Type and Bed Type)}
- Interface parts
018-230-06E
MD-9
1.3.4 Board-Related Information No. Name Description
Optional item. Four kinds of variation are available.
n MP - Type of 100 V-110 V
- Type of 110 V-120 V
(A) AC bucky relay unit
DETAIL A - Type of 200 V/220 V
- Type of 220 V-240 V
{Product Specification:1.2_Optional Items}
When the AC bucky relay unit is a type of 100-110 V.
Part No.: AHN210X0 (Panasonic Electric Works)
Part No.: AHN210X1 (Panasonic Electric Works)
(B) AC relay*
(H) Part No.: AHN210Y0 (Panasonic Electric Works)
(G)
Part No.: AHN210Y2 (Panasonic Electric Works)
(C) DC relay* Part No.: AHN12205 (Panasonic Electric Works)
Connection board with the X-ray equipment.
(D) MPX54A board Transmits X-ray exposure conditions and the shot signal to the
X-ray equipment.
(I) Contact signal output relay.
(E) Relay
MP Part No.: AHN22005 (Panasonic Electric Works)
A Board-type power supply unit.
(F) Power supply unit Supplies power of 12 VDC to the inside of the MP and the SE.
Part No.: CME240P-24 (TDK Lambda)
LED board for indicating power supply status.
(G) LED54B board
Indicates the power supply status.
For LAN connection.
MP control board with the CPU mounted.
(H) MPC54B board
Supplies power to the SE.
(A) The remote switch (optional) can be connected.
(D)
(I) NFB51A board Noise filter
*: The AC relay and the DC relay incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit need to be
replaced periodically. The relay incorporated in the MPX54A board need not be replaced
unless a failure occurs.
(B)
(C)
(E)
(F)
1200_100015.ai
018-230-06E
MD-10
n DS No. Name Description
Display the READY state signal received from the DX Console
DETAIL A (A) DSI65A board
and the selected color via the LED.
(B) DSB65A board Control the confirmation sounds of the DS during insertion etc.
(C) Power supply unit Supplies power to the inside of the DS.
Display the DS power states, the communication status
(D) DSL65A board between the MC and the DS, and the SE battery status via the
LED.
Perform the internal control and the communication with the
(E) DSM65A board
outside.
(F) DSC65A board Supply the signal and the power to the SE.
(F)
n CU (option)
For information on boards inside the CU, see the following.
(E)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
1200_100016.ai
018-230-06E
MD-11
2. Block Diagram n In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the
DX Console
<Type of cables>
2.1 System Block Diagram 1. Standard cable
2. Option cable
3. Cable supplied by dealer
n In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC X-ray control I/F BOX
<Type of cables> BOX cable
1. Standard cable Special cable

(LAN+12V power)
2. Option cable Shot signal I/F BOX
3. Cable supplied by dealer cable
LAN cable
RS232C
X-ray control I/F BOX cable
BOX cable
Special cable
(LAN+12V power)
Shot signal I/F BOX
D-Sub MPC** RJ45
cable 12V
LAN cable board
RS232C
cable
D-Sub RJ45 HUB
12V
SW-HUB
D-Sub MPC** RJ45
12V ERC** board
board
LAN cable
AC-DC
D-Sub RJ45 HUB HUB NFB board LAN cable
Power supply
12V UTP
Inlet
SW-HUB
ERC** board Special cable

(LAN+12V power) AC 100V
LAN cable Power cable (3m) Power supply
AC-DC
NFB board LAN cable AC100V-240V
Power supply
UTP with protective earth
conductor
Inlet
Power cable (3m)

AC 100V
AC100V-240V Special cable
with protective earth Power supply (LAN+12V power)
conductor
LAN cable
(2 m or shorter)
Special cable
(LAN+12V power) LAN cable
(2 m or shorter) RJ45
RJ45 AC-DC
NFB
Power supply
AC-DC Inlet
NFB
Power supply
Inlet
Power cable (3m) AC 100V
AC100V-240V Power supply RJ45
with protective earth AC-DC
Power cable (3m) AC 100V conductor Power supply RJ45
AC100V-240V Power supply AC-DC RJ45 AC 100V
with protective earth Inlet NFB
Power supply Power supply
conductor RJ45
AC 100V Power cable (3m)
Inlet NFB AC100V-240V
Power supply
Power cable (3m)
with protective earth X-ray room Outside the X-ray room
conductor
AC100V-240V (IEC 60601 environment) (IEC 60950 environment)
with protective earth X-ray room Outside the X-ray room 1200_100026E.ai
conductor (IEC 60601 environment) (IEC 60950 environment) 1200_100004E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-12
2.2 SE Block Diagram (1201SE / 1211SE) 2.3 SE Block Diagram (1202SE / 1212SE)
Battery Battery
SPR65A REC65A BCN65A SPR65A REC65A BCN65A

DC12V GLG65A board POW65A board board board board DC12V POW65A board board board board
GTD65A board
GLG65A board
GTD65A board
RMV65A TFT RMV65A TFT
board board
GTD65A board
GTD65A board
SE SE
Image data WLAN Image data WLAN

module Charge module Charge
AMP AMP
ABB65A ABB65A ABA65A ABA65A
board board board board
PD bias voltage PD bias voltage
Temperature sensor Temperature sensor
1200_100003E.ai 1200_100002E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-13
2.4 SE Block Diagram (1213SE) 2.5 SE Block Diagram (1214SE)
Battery Battery
DC12V
REC66A BCN65A REC66A BCN65A
DC12V board board board board
RLY66A SPR66A RLY66A SPR66A

board board board board
Signal Power Signal Power
NCA66A
NCA66A
board
board
GTC66A board
GTD66A board
CNA66A
board
TFT TFT
RMV66A RMV66A
board board
Charge Charge
Image data WLAN AMP Image WLAN AMP
module ABD66A data module ABC66A
board board
PD bias voltage PD bias voltage
Temperature sensor Temperature sensor
1200_100024E.ai 1200_100025E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-14
2.6 DR-ID 1200MP Block Diagram
X ray X ray
Console Shot SW
Xcon BKY
SHOT IF SHOT IF
100/ 100/ 100/ 100/ 100/ 100/ 100/
240V 240V 240V 240V 240V 240V 240V
T_BKY
BKY
_IF
U_BKY
BKY
_IF
5) BI
4) DI 1500V
4000V E:SIP/SOP Glass Plate
Relay
1
Relay
1
Relay
2
Relay
1
Relay
1
Relay
2 12**SE
Carbon Plate
Opt Opt Opt Relay Relay

Relay
Coupler Coupler Coupler (K2, (K3,
(K1,
MPX54A Board (PC5,
PC6)
K4)
(PC1,
PC3)
(PC2,
PC4)
K5) K6)
Connector X-ray
Flat Panel Detector
A:Primary Part Pulse Signal (Cassette Type)
Transformer G:Live Part TFT
A1:Line (TRX100BTH) 12V
(Secondary Type B
A2:Neutral 5V BI
connected PE) APPLIED
Cercuit Protector F6 PART
INLET NFR110-5A/IDEC
SW FUSE PE PE
2A Cable ( Shield Type)
NFB51A Pulse
Board 24V 10A Transformer
～ (TRX100BTH) D:Applied
Connector
Part
AC100-240V Signal
50/60Hz
3) DI
C:Secondary
5V
12V
4787V
BI G:Live Part
UL/IEC60601-1 Flat Panel Detector (Secondary
PE Approved
F8 (Cassette Type) connected PE)
24V FUSE PE PE
PE B:PE Fan 2A
(Option)
5V
Remote 5V
Switch E:SIP/SOP Insulation Information (point : [ed.2 Insulation] [ed.3 Insulation])
12**SE ・A1 to A2 (BOP) : [240Vref,BI] [240Vref,1MOOP]
F:PowerSupply MPC ・A to E (Pri-SIP/SOP):
6) RI
Transformer 54B ・A to B (Pri-PE) : [240Vref,BI] [240Vref,1MOOP]
500V [240Vref,RI] [240Vref,2MOOP]
Primary to Secondary ・A to C (Pri–Sec): [240Vref,RI] [240Vref,2MOOP]
Board ・A to D (Pri-Applied Part):[240Vref:RI] [240Vref:2MOPP]
・D to E (Applied Part – SIP/SOP):
[-][12Vref:2MOPP]
(Option) ・F (Power Supply Transformer Pri-Sec):
Remote [393Vref,RI] [393Vref,2MOOP]
Switch ・D to G (Applied Part – Live Part ) : [12Vref,RI] [24Vref,2MOPP]
5V
LED54B
Power Box Board
6) RI
500V
AC Line Fujifilm Unit (DR-ID600PU)
GND Line
Fujifilm Unit2 (Beyond the scope of system)
DC Line
Beyond the scope of system
Signal
※ All dotted line parts are outside
Board
the scope of application.
1200_100017.ai
018-230-06E
MD-15
2.7 DR-ID 1200DS Block Diagram
F4
5V
5V
F5
12V
F2
12V
/ -
-
*
:
: :
- , , ]
- - , , ]
- - , , ]
- -
787 , 787 , ]
1200_100018.ai
018-230-06E
MD-16
2.8 DR-ID 1200PB Block Diagram
E
SIP/SOP
MPS65A Board F
AC100-240V C
50-60Hz INLET
Signal LAN
DC12V
conne
～ A ctor
B D
IEC60601-1 Signal
ed.3.0
Approved
2A
2MOPP
～
LED
Insulation Information (point : [ed.3 Insulation]) AC Line Board

GND Line Parts
・A : Line to Neutral [340Vpeak,1MOOP]
DC Line
・B : Primary to Protective Earth [340Vpeak,1MOPP] Signal Fujifilm Unit (DR-ID1200PB)
・C : Power Supply Transformer Pri to Sec : [528Vpeak,2MOPP] Fujifilm Unit2 (Beyond the scope of system)
・D : Primary to Secondary [340Vpeak,2MOPP] ※ All dotted line parts are outside the scope of application.
・E : SIP/SOP to Primary [340Vpeak,2MOPP]
・F : SIP/SOP to Protective Earth [48Vpeak,1MOPP]
1200_100027.ai
018-230-06E
MD-17
3. Effective Area and Center Position n 1202SE / 1212SE
An effective area of an image extends over 16.7 x 16.8 inches (2,832 x 2,836 pixels).
of Image 425.40mm (2836Pixel)
3.1 Effective Area

n 1201SE / 1211SE SE
An effective area of an image extends over 13.8 x 16.8 inches (2,336 x 2,836 pixels).
425.40mm (2836Pixel)
424.80mm (2832Pixel)
Center of the image area
SE
350.40mm (2336Pixel)
1200_100006E.ai
1200_100005E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-18
n 1213SE n 1214SE
An effective area of an image extends over 9.1x11.3 inches (1,536x1,920 pixels). An effective area of an image extends over 9.7x11.7 inches (1,648x1,980 pixels).
288mm (1920Pixel) 297mm (1980Pixel)
SE SE
230.4mm (1536Pixel)
247.2mm (1648Pixel)
Center of the image area Center of the image area
1200_100020E.ai 1200_100021E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-19
3.2 Center of the Image n 1202SE / 1212SE
The center of the image is as shown below: 459.9
n 1201SE / 1211SE 229.95
459.9
229.95
SE
229.95
191.95
SE
459.9
383.9
Cable
Cable
Unit: mm
1200_100007E.ai
Unit: mm
1200_100008E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-20
n 1213SE n 1214SE
328 333
164 166.5
132.65
141
SE SE
Center of the image area Center of the image area

268.3
282
Cable Cable
Unit: mm Unit: mm
1200_100022E.ai 1200_100023E.ai
018-230-06E
MD-21
4. Calibration
The machine generates the image calibration data by four kinds of the calibrations
below.
Background Automatic offset Automatic defect
Full calibration
calibration (*1) update calibration
When the machine
Set the
is running and
implementation
the exposure - At installation-
At machine start- propriety and the
Timing menu has not At preventive
up/termination start time in EDIT
been registered maintenance
CONFIGURATION
(about 10 minutes
(default: 4 AM)
interval)
Service engineer
Automatic Automatic Automatic
Method executes from the
execution execution execution
RU PC-TOOL.
Necessity of
Not necessary Not necessary Necessary Not necessary
exposure
- For offset
- For offset
calibration
calibration
- For gain
Image (at start-up only)
- For offset calibration - For defect
calibration data - For defect
calibration - For defect calibration
to be generated calibration
calibration
(at termination
- For lag
only)
calibration (*2)
Required time
About 30 seconds About 30 seconds About 40 minutes
(per one panel)
*1: If starting the machine after the short time interruption (up to about 5 minutes) of the
power supply, battery replacement, etc., the background calibration is not performed.
After starting up, it is immediately usable.
*2: The full calibration does not generate the lag calibration data itself but calculates the
lag calibration factor only. The lag calibration data is calculated by multiplying the
offset image captured automatically when the exposure menu is registered at a normal
exposure by the lag calibration factor.
018-230-06E
MD-22
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
MD-23
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 19-23
11.28.2014 03 Revision (FM9281) 23
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 6, 8-10, 24

04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 4, 11
4-6, 12, 20, 22, 26-28,
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340)
AppxMT1-1 to 1-8
07.29.2016 06 Changes in pagination (FM9340) 7-11, 13-19, 21, 23-25, 29-31
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 12, 23, 24, 30-32
04.28.2017 07 Changes in pagination (FM9456) 25-29, 33-35
Troubleshooting (MT)
018-230-07E
MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting 1.1 Troubleshooting from Error Log
The SE (FPD) used in the machine is an expensive component. 1.1.1 Checking the Error Log
If the SE (FPD) malfunctions, check the status indication of the status lamps (LED’s)
provided on the SE, and check the error log for analysis. Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of
It is undesirable to replace the SE (FPD) unit without careful consideration even if the error codes.
SE (FPD) is suspected to have a failure. START
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
END
600_200001.ai
n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log

An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-
out basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about
errors encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log

When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code
displayed on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the
encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1.1.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered 1.2 How to View Error Code
Trouble An error code is expressed as a 5-digit number starting with “1”.
(1) Group the errors that occurred from the error codes displayed on the
ERROR DB window of the RU PC-TOOL. 1XYZZ
(Example)
00 to 99: Reference number for each error category
Divide into error occurrence groups A and B based on the error occurrence time.
1 to 9: Error category
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the 0 to 2: Error level
error that occurred first). 1: Always 1
(Example)
600_200003.ai
The first error in the error occurrence group A is “12500”. n X: Error Level
Error code that occurred first. Indicates the error level.
Start the analysis from this error code.
Error DB window
0: FATAL error
Level where the system shuts down and routine processing cannot be continued.
The user is notified of the error by the indication on the CL. It is necessary to
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action when a FATAL error occurs.
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:11 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:12 023B5B @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
A [12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:32 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1: WARNING error
[12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Level where an error occurs due to erroneous user operation, but routine processing
[12210] 2009/07/27 18:23:50 0244C0 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
can be continued.
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:10:43 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx The user is notified of the error by the indication on the CL. The user can continue
B [12103] 2009/07/27 19:12:40 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
routine processing after confirmation. If erroneous user operations frequently occur, it
is necessary to guide the user for improvement.
2: LOG error
Level where an accidental retry error causing no problem in performance, and routine
processing can be continued.
An error is logged, but the user is not notified when the error occurs.
It is necessary to check the error log in periodic servicing and take remedial action.
The logged errors may be used for design analysis.
600_200002.ai
018-230-06E
MT-3
n Y: Error Category 1.3 How to Use the Detail Error Log
Indicates a part where the error is detected. Error codes appearing on the ERROR DB window of the RU PC-TOOL or error codes
Value Category Description appearing when an error occurs in carrying out utilities store the log of various kinds
of detail error information in response to the situations of the error. You can narrow
1 Vacant -
down the cause of the error from the detail error information.
2 Error in panel Error related to the panel (FPD)
Error in mechanical Error related to the mechanism such as bucky control n Display Example of the Detail Error Log
3
control
<Display example>
Error in retro radiation Failure in communication with the retro radiation source, [12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @complementMAS...428 PARAM=uAs VALUE=0
4
source or data inconsistency
5 Error in CL (IIP) Failure in communication with the CL (IIP) Error code Expansion error log
6 Error in file Failure in reading/writing data from/in the HDD and FTP
Error DB window
Failure in communication with the MP or SE, or data
7 Error in MP
inconsistency
8 Vacant -
9 Error in software Item not applicable to 1 to 8 (for debugging software) [12500] 2009/07/27 18:11:52 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12500] 2009/07/27 18:13:12 023B5B @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
n ZZ: Serial Number for Error Category [12610] 2009/07/27 18:19:32 023913 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12210] 2009/07/27 18:23:50 0244C0 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Indicates a serial number for each error category.
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:10:43 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[12103] 2009/07/27 19:12:40 023FE9 @xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
600_200004.ai
018-230-06E
MT-4
1.3.1 11112 Error Digit Bit Meaning Probable cause and countermeasure
- Check the cable connecting between
When the 11112 error occurs, the following information for identifying the failure is REC12 and SPR6.
indicated in the detail error log. - Check the cable connecting between
Display example: 12 Connector (LED)
RMV11 and SPR5.
[11112]2010/03/09 18:43:39 00E8DD @SE[M120001] err[0x01000000] - Check the cable connecting between
RMV12 and SPR3.
@SE[val1] err[val2] - Check the cable connecting between LEC1
- val1: Serial ID 4th and REC8.
- val2: RMV detail error (in hexadecimal system) 13 Fuse (5 V) Replace the POW65A board.
14 Fuse (2.5 V) Replace the POW65A board.
n 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE - Check the cable connecting between
RMV8 and GLG1.
Digit Bit Meaning Probable cause and countermeasure 15 Connector (GLG)
- Replace the RMV65A board.
0 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_1) Check the RMV21 cable. - Replace the GLG65A board.
1 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_2) Check the RMV20 cable. - Software bug
1st 16 Sleep mode recovery error
2 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_1) Check the RMV22 cable. - Replace the RMV65A board.
3 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_2) Check the RMV19 cable. 17 Image FLASH error Replace the RMV65A board.
- Check the cable connecting between 18 X-ray detection before ready User operation error.
4 Connector (POW) RMV3 and POW2. - Check the cable connecting between
- Replace the POW65A board. POW4 and GLG2.
5 Impact detection (GLG) 5th - Check the cable connecting between
- Usable on the X-ray connection.
Disconnection detection RMV8 and GLG1.
6 - Check the RMV19, RMV20, RMV21 and
(X free) - Replace the panel. 19 Panel cracking judgment
2nd - Check the cable connecting between RMV22 cables.
RMV3 and POW2. - Check the POW5 and POW6 cables.
- Check the RMV19, RMV20, RMV21 and - In case of the white blank image, replace
7 ADAS header error RMV22 cables. the GLG, POW and RMV boards.
- Check the POW5 and POW6 cables. - Check the image.
- Replace the POW65A board. 20 DDR2 error Replace the RMV65A board.
- Replace the panel (ADAS failure). 21 Config error Replace the RMV65A board.
6th
- Check the cable connecting between 22 PPC access error Software bug
RMV3 and POW2. 23 -
8 Connector (POW_ABB_1)
- Check the POW5 and POW6 cables. 24 Thermistor 0 error Check the RMV25 cable.
- Replace the POW65A board.
25 -
RMV3 and POW2. - Check the RMV27 and RMV28 cables.
7th 26 Long panel error - Setting error for the TOP, CENTER, and
Connector (POW_ABB_2, BOTTOM panel units positions.
3rd 9 POW4 and GLG2.
POW_PDV_FUSE) - Check the IP address jig.
- Check the cable connecting between 27 IP address jig error
RMV8 and GLG1. - Replace the RMV65A board.
- Replace the POW65A board. - Check the RMV23 and RMV24 cables.
- Check the RMV23 cable. 28 Gate IC error - Check the POW7 and POW9 cables.
10 Connector (GTD_CNCHK_1) - Replace the panel.
- Replace the panel.
- Check the RMV24 cable. 8th - Error in serial ID registration.
11 Connector (GTD_CNCHK_2) 29 Serial ID registration error
- Replace the panel. - Serial ID mismatch with the FPGA version.
30 Image processing error Software bug
31 Exposure sequence error Software bug
018-230-06E
MT-5
n 1213SE/1214SE Digit Bit Meaning Probable cause and countermeasure
- Software bug
Digit Bit Meaning Probable cause and countermeasure 16 Sleep mode recovery error
0 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_1) Check the RMV9 cable. 17 Image FLASH error Replace the RMV66A board.
1 Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_2) Check the RMV10 cable. 18 X-ray detection before ready User operation error.
1st
2 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_1) - Check the cable connecting between
3 Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_2) POW4 and GLG2.
4 Connector (POW) 5th - Check the cable connecting between
5 Impact detection (GLG) RMV8 and GLG1.
19 Panel cracking judgment - Check the RMV19, RMV20, RMV21 and
- Usable on the X-ray connection.
Disconnection detection
6 RMV22 cables.
(X free) - Replace the panel.
- Check the POW5 and POW6 cables.
2nd - Check the cable connecting between - In case of the white blank image, replace
RMV3 and POW2. the GLG, POW and RMV boards.
- Check the RMV19, RMV20, RMV21 and
7 ADAS header error 20 DDR2 error Replace the RMV66A board.
RMV22 cables.
- Check the POW5 and POW6 cables. 21 Config error Replace the RMV66A board.
6th
- Replace the POW65A board. 22 PPC access error Software bug
- Check the cable connecting between 23 -
RMV3 and POW2. 24 Thermistor 0 error Check the RMV4 cable.
8 Connector (POW_ABB_1)
- Check the POW5 and POW6 cables. 25 -
- Replace the POW65A board. 7th 26 Long panel error
- Check the cable connecting between - Check the IP address jig.
RMV3 and POW2. 27 IP address jig error
3rd Connector (POW_ABB_2, - Check the RMV23 and RMV24 cables.
9 POW4 and GLG2.
POW_PDV_FUSE) 28 Gate IC error - Check the POW7 and POW9 cables.
RMV8 and GLG1. - Replace the panel.
- Replace the POW65A board. 8th - Error in serial ID registration.
29 Serial ID registration error
- Check the RMV12 cable. - Serial ID mismatch with the FPGA version.
10 Connector (GTD_CNCHK_1) 30 Image processing error Software bug
- Replace the panel.
11 Connector (GTD_CNCHK_2) 31 Exposure sequence error Software bug
REC12 and SPR6.
RMV11 and SPR5.
12 Connector (LED)
4th RMV12 and SPR3.
- Check the cable connecting between LEC1
and REC8.
13 Fuse (5 V) Replace the POW65A board.
14 Fuse (2.5 V) Replace the POW65A board.
15 Connector (GLG)
018-230-06E
MT-6
n RMV board error 1.3.2 11244 Error
If the RMV board connectors are not inserted correctly or the RMV board cables are When the 11112 error occurs, the information for identifying the failure is indicated in
disconnected, the following errors appear. the detail error log.
Connector Error display Probable cause 11244 error Error Probable Cause
RMV1 No error The RMV65A power does not turn on. 0x00000001 Initialization error
Does not recognize the battery. 0x00000002 H/W error The wireless module is not installed.
RMV2 No error Does not recognize the memory switch and the sleep 0x00000004 Power error
recovery switch.
0x00010000 Setting file error
RMV3 11112 error POW board
Same as the connector LED.
Wired communication is invalid. 0x00020000 MCU error
RMV4 No error MCU communication is invalid.
Does not recognize the DS.
0x00040000 SD card error The SD card is not installed.
RMV5 -
Device not
RMV6 11244 error H/W error 0x80000000
implemented
RMV7 -
RMV8 11112 error GLG board
RMV9 11244 error SD card error
RMV10 No error
RMV11 11112 error LED
11112 error,
RMV12 LED does not appear.
MCU error
RMV13 No error MCU JTAG
RMV14 No error
RMV15 No error Debug serial report
Does not recognize returning of the IP address.
RMV16 No error Does not recognize the wired cable connection. Wireless
communication is valid.
RMV17 No error PPC JTAG
RMV18 No error FPGA JTAG
RMV19 11112 error Connector (ABB2_CNCHK_2)
RMV20 11112 error Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_2)
RMV21 11112 error Connector (ABA1_CNCHK_1)
RMV22 11112 error Connector (BB2_CNCHK_1)
RMV23 11112 error Gate IC error
RMV24 11112 error Gate IC error
RMV25 11112 error Thermistor error
RMV27 11112 error Long panel
RMV28 11112 error Long panel
018-230-06E
MT-7
2. Error Code Table
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Memory map reconfiguration A retry of memory map reconfiguration is made, but an error is detected,
10150 resulting in system shutdown.
error
[During bootup/routine processing]
A high temperature (Approx. 60°C or higher) of the FPD is detected,
resulting in system shutdown.
- Check the temperature and humidity of the examination
room.
10212 FPD high temperature error <Reference>
- Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when
- Check the FPD.
the error is detected on the error log.
- This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE
type and the external temperatures.

A low temperature (Approx. -10°C or lower) of the FPD is detected,
- Check the temperature and humidity of the examination
10213 FPD low temperature error <Reference> room.
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the FPD.
IP address multiple connection [During bootup/routine processing]

10214 The FPD with the same IP address is connected, and the system shuts - Check the IP address setting.
error down.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the correction data from the SSD and load
onto the CPU board memory and the SODIMM mounted on the SPC
board, but read from the SSD fails. After two retries are made, a retrial
10600 Correction data load error count is over, resulting in system shutdown. - Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name where a failure in loading occurs on the error
log.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the system file (except the correction data)
from the SSD and load onto the CPU board memory and the SODIMM
mounted on the SPC board, but read from the SSD fails.
10601 System file load error - Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name where a failure in loading occurs on the error
log.
018-230-06E
MT-8
Error
Code
10750 MPX fuse blown error A blown fuse of the MPX board is detected, and the system shuts down.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the fan (FAN1).

10751 MP fan stop MP cooling fan (FAN1) stop is detected, and the system shuts down. - Check the MPC board.

10752 MPX connector disconnected The system shuts down, as the cable is disconnected from the MPX - Check the MPX board.
board or the cable is unconnected.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the MP power. (If the power of the MP is OFF,
Disconnection of a line between the MP and the MC is detected. turn it ON.)
10753 MP connection error - Select a defective item from the detail error log
mentioned in ERRORDB.LOG, and check it.
[During bootup]
10900 Parameter error Parameter settings for the stand and the bed are not made, and the - Check the parameters.
system shuts down.
[During bootup]
The following mismatches are found when the config is checked during
startup of the MC:
10902 System configuration error - Emergency mode ON & Long-time accumulation ON
- An invalid combination is set in the config.
- AutoDetect OFF & Long-time accumulation ON
- Third panel configuration ON & Emergency mode OFF

10990 Software logic error An error is detected in the logic for controlling the software, and the
system shuts down.

10991 Parameter file key not hit An attempt is made to load the parameter file, but the key is not detected,

- The RMV board detects blowout of a fuse of the POW board mounted
on the FPD, and disables the FPD.
- The RMV board detects a failure in connection of a power connector of
the GTD board mounted on the FPD, and disables the FPD.
- The RMV board detects an error of the MP cooling fan (P-FAN), and
disables the FPD.
- Check the FPD.
11111 RMV board blown fuse detected - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
[During M-Utility]
Blowout of a fuse of the POW board is detected by the RMV board during
the check of fuses.
<Reference>
You can know which device (fuse, connector or fan) is defective on the
error log.
018-230-06E
MT-9
Error
Code
Although an attempt is made to set the reading mode for the RMV
board mounted on the FPD, an error in communication is detected when
RMV board communication reading back the register value after setting of the reading mode. The
- Select a defective matter from the detail error log
11112 communication is retried, but results in a failure. The FPD is disabled.
indicated in ERRORDB.LOG, and check it.
error {MT:1.3.1_11112 Error}
[During M-Utility]
- An error is detected by Communication Check of RMV.
[During routine processing]

11140 CPU image correction error Processing of the CPU image correction library fails.
Exposure time sequence [During routine processing]

11160 Signals necessary for continuing the exposure cannot be received after
timeout starting the exposure, resulting in timeout.

MP cooling fan stop is detected.
11201 FAN stop error - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
<Reference>
You can know which fan stops on the error log.

A low temperature (Approx. 10°C or lower) in the FPD is detected, and
the FPD is disabled.
- Check the environments at the installation site.
11210 FPD low temperature warning <Reference> - Check the use conditions.
- You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the FPD.

The panel gets high temperature (Approx. 40°C or higher) and is disabled.
- Check the environments at the installation site.
<Reference> - Check the use conditions.
11211 FPD high temperature warning - You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and the temperature when - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
the error is detected on the error log. - Check the FPD.
Battery high temperature [During bootup/routine processing]

- Check the ambient temperature.
11215 The battery temperature rises to the warning level.
- Space exposures to lower the temperature in the FPD.
warning
018-230-06E
MT-10
Error
Code
[During bootup/routine processing] - Remove the battery from the FPD. If the removed
The battery temperature rises to the banning-of-use level. battery remains hot, replace it with a new one, as the
battery is defective.
11216 Battery high temperature error - Remove the battery from the FPD. If the temperature
of the removed battery lowers, check the cables in the
FPD.
Battery low temperature [During bootup/routine processing]

11217 The battery temperature lowers to the warning level. - Check the ambient temperature.
warning
11218 Battery low temperature error The battery temperature lowers to the banning-of-use level.
- Check the ambient temperature.

The board ambient temperature rises to the banning-of-use level (Approx.
Panel high temperature error 60°C or higher). - Check the ambient temperature.
11219 <Reference> - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
(SE board ambient temperature) This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE

The board ambient temperature lowers to the banning-of-use level
Panel low temperature error (SE (Approx. -10°C or lower). - Check the ambient temperature.
11220 <Reference> - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
board ambient temperature) This temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE

The remaining battery capacity has reached 10 min*.
* The setting can be changed by [BATTERY WARNING] of Configuration. - Connect the panel to the SE cable.
11223 Battery level drops <Reference> - Replace by a charged battery.
The SE serial ID of the error occurrence panel can be confirmed in the
error log.

The remaining battery capacity has reached 0 min.
- Replace by a charged battery.
11224 No battery power remains <Reference>
- Charge the battery with a battery charger.
The detected SE serial ID of the error occurrence panel can be confirmed
in the error log.
[During bootup/panel connection] - Execute [SE(n) Board State] of SE by MUTL and

A self-diagnosis request has been made from the MC to the panel and the confirm that the board has no abnormality.
response from the panel was NG. - Confirm that the network between MC-SE us connected
11225 Panel self-diagnosis error <Reference> normally.
The detected SE serial ID can be confirmed in the error log. - Inspect the boards (RMV, wireless module, POW, GTD,
ABA, ABB) and the cables in the panel.
018-230-06E
MT-11
Error
Code
[During bootup/panel connection]
At the time of active AUTO DETECT, connection of a panel not compatible
with AUTO DETECT has been detected as the result of checking the SE - Check that no panel not compatible with AUTO DETECT
11226 Not supporting AUTO DETECT serial ID. is connected.
- Check for wrong input of an SE serial ID with PC-TOOL.
<Reference>
The detected SE serial ID can be confirmed in the error log.

- Checking for external damage to the equipment
The GLG board has detected a panel drop time or an impact to the panel
- Collection of the GLG log
in excess of the specified value.
- Execution of GLG board self-analysis
11227 G sensor impact detection - Execution of GLG calibration
<Reference>
- Inspection of the GLG board
When there is no panel defect, the user can continue use of the SE after
- Inspection of the GLS board
confirmation of the message.
[During menu registration]

11228 Panel cracking judgment error The SE has detected a panel cracking and informs the MC.
- Panel breakage (9 mm x 9 mm or more) is detected.
X-ray irradiation is performed on a panel not registered in the menu. - X-ray irradiation is performed on a panel not registered
11229 Wrong exposure detection error in the menu.
[During bootup]
The value of the maximum defect pixel size or defect pixel density
exceeding the specification is detected in defect correction data
generation of background calibration (calibration automatically taking
place when the CU starts up).
Invalid data generated for [ During full calibration]
11231 The value of the maximum defect pixel size or defect pixel density
- Check the FPD.
defect correction exceeding the specification is detected in defect correction data
generation of full calibration.
<Reference>
You can know in which specifications the error is detected on the error
log.
[During initialization calibration]

11239 Initialization calibration error The calibration requirement for the SE is NG.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the switch-HUB incorporated in the MP.
Disconnection of the line to the panel is detected. - Check the network interface board incorporated in the MC.
11240 Panel disconnection detected - Check the wireless module.
- Check the POW board.
[During bootup/routine processing] - Check the RMV board.
11242 Unregistered panel detected A panel with an unregistered serial ID is detected. - Check the cable connecting between the POW board
connector and the GTD board connector.
018-230-06E
MT-12
Error
Code
Image acquisition timeout [During routine processing] - Check the wireless module.
11243 An error occurs in the image acquisition sequence from the panel. - Check the POW board.
(between panel and MC) - Check the RMV board.
- Check the wireless module.
An error occurs on the WLAN board.
11244 WLAN error {MT:1.3.2_11244 Error}
- Check the SD card.
- Check that the country code setting file is applied.
SE communication error [During bootup/routine processing] - Check communication between the FPD and the MP.
11246 An error occurs in a control command to the panel. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
(warning level) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
Exposure menu registration [During registration of exposure menu]

- Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
11247 An error occurs in exposure menu registration.
- Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
error
Mode 2 accumulation time [During bootup]
- Start up the MUTL and set the mode 2 accumulation
11248 Values of the mode 2 accumulation time set in the SE and the MC do not
time.
mismatch error match.
[During SE connection] - RMV board malfunction

When the RMV board PPC was accessing the wireless module while Replace the RMV board.
starting up, an NG was generated. - Wireless module malfunction
11254 Wireless configuration error Replace the wireless module.
- A contact fault between the RMV board and the wireless
module
Reinstall the RMV board and the wireless module.
[During SE connection]
- A SE that does not support the FIPS mode is connected. - Connect the SE that supports the FIPS mode.
11256 FIPS configuration error - The SE has not been upgraded. - Restart the SE.
- A communication error occurs.
[During SE connection] - Change to the wired connection.
11257 FIPS function error - FIPS error occurs inside the SE. - Restart the SE.
- Version mismatch among MC, AplWlan and fpgaRmv. - Re-acquire the image data from the CL.
The SE detects an error of the SD card and informs the MC.
11270 SD card error - The SE detects an error of the SD card.
The SE detects an error of MCU (microcomputer) and informs the MC.

11271 MCU error - The SE detects an error of the microcomputer.

11404 DAP communication error A DAP communication error occurs.
Check the DAP relay cable.

X-ray irradiation before it is At the time of active AUTO DETECT, exposure has been implemented
11408 after exposure menu registration before completion of the exposure
- Register the exposure menu again and expose again.
ready for exposure error preparation (before lighting of the ShotReady icon of the CL).
018-230-07E
MT-13
Error
Code
The exposure image is acquired at the time of disconnection of the The communication line of the SE could have been
communication line during the X-free exposure. disconnected in the period from when the Ready lamp is
turned on to X-ray irradiation.
<Reference> - Check if the image is the correct study image.
11409 Image acquisition error The SE outputs the image if the MC/CSL mechanism for protecting loss - If the failed menu remains, open the menu to import the
of images determines concordance between the UIDs of the MC and the exposure image.
CSL. In the case of discordance between the statuses of the CSL and the If not remain, the exposure image is imported as it is.
SE during the X-free exposure in the period from when the Ready lamp is - In the cases other than above, check the communication
turned on to X-ray irradiation, this error message appears to promote the status of the SE and retry exposure.
user to check the image at the time when the exposure image is acquired.
[During exposure menu registration]
Long-time accumulation mode The long-time accumulation mode menu is registered for a panel that - The long-time accumulation mode menu is registered
11505 does not support the long-time accumulation mode. for a panel that does not support the long-time
unsupported panel selected DR-ID 1201SE, 1202SE, 1211SE and 1212SE are the only panels that accumulation mode.
support the long-time accumulation mode.
[During bootup]
Read of the correction data load file fails (when the maximum retry count
is exceeded).
11602 Correction data load error - Rewrite the file you failed to read.
<Reference>
You can check the file name you failed to read on the error log.
[During bootup] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Correction data transfer error An error occurs in transfer of the correction data from the MC to the SE. FPD.
11603 - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
(MC → SE) - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
MP communication connection [During bootup/routine processing]

11750 Disconnection of a line from the MP is detected.
error
11751 MPC fuse blown error A blown fuse on the MPC board is detected.
Panel connector disconnection During bootup/routine processing]

11752 Disconnection of the panel connector connected in the MP is detected.
in MP
[During bootup]
11900 Parameter error An error is detected in an item set by service personnel (wrong value
setting, inconsistency of combination, or the like)
Memory map reconfiguration [During bootup/routine processing]

12150 A retry of memory map reconfiguration fails.
retry
12199 Image processing error An error is detected during image processing.
018-230-06E
MT-14
Error
Code
As a result of comparison of the configuration settings with the information
acquired from the FPD (presence of FPD connection, direct/indirect type)
is made, connection of the FPD of CALNEO (DR-ID300) not conforming
to the machine (indirect type) is recognized. - Check the configuration settings.
12210 Specified FPD type not installed - Check the FPD.
<Reference>
You can check the FPD No. of interest, the FPD specified in the
configuration and information of the actually connected FPD on the error
log.

Although the configuration setting is specified as a 1-panel system, the
2-panel system is determined due to erroneous software setting during
the manufacturing process. Setting for the unconnected FPD is made.
Specified FPD does not match
12211 [During M-Utility] N/A
FPD configuration An attempt is made to carry out respective modes of offset calibration/
defect calibration/residual image calibration, but results in failure.
<Reference>
You can check the FPD No. of interest on the error log.

12215 Battery access error A battery access error occurs in the SE.

The FPD temperature restores from a low temperature to such conditions
FPD recovered from low that exposures can take place. - Check the environments at the installation site.
12220 - Check the FPD.
temperature state <Reference>
You can know the FPD No. of interest on the error log.

The FPD temperature restores from a high temperature to such conditions
FPD recovered from high that exposures can take place. - Check the environments at the installation site.
12221 - Check the FPD.
temperature state <Reference>
You can know the FPD No. of interest on the error log.
Initialization error during SE [During bootup]

- Check the board condition in the FPD.
12222 An error occurs in bootup in connecting the SE.
{MU2:[5.2]_SE Board State >>}
connection
018-230-06E
MT-15
Error
Code
[During full calibration]
Gain correction data generation cannot take place due to excess or
insufficiency of X-ray irradiation and insufficiency of the irradiation field.
Gain correction data generation [During M-Utility]

- Check the X-ray dose.
12230 An attempt is made to carry out gain calibration but results in failure.
- Check the irradiation field.
error
<Reference>
You can check the FPD No. of interest, and the conditions of the dose
and the irradiation field under which the gain correction data cannot be
generated on the error log.
[During bootup]
The values of a total defective pixel count, continuous defect lines
and a total defective line exceeding the specifications are detected in
defect correction data generation of background calibration (calibration
automatically taking place when the CU starts up).
Defect correction data [During full calibration]
12231 The values of a total defective pixel count, continuous defect lines and
- Check the FPD.
generation error a total defective line exceeding the specifications are detected in defect
correction data generation.
<Reference>
You can know the No. of the FPD of interest and in which specifications

Grid detected at start of Although an attempt is made to start gain calibration with exposure or
12232 defect calibration, the calibration cannot take place since the grid is
- Check the grid.
calibration detected to be mounted.

After gain calibration is to take place, the number of exposures necessary - Check the exposure count.
Insufficient number of for the gain calibration is recognized to be insufficient. - Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12233 for the gain calibration is reached, and click [Create a
exposures for gain calibration <Reference> Gain Data].
Sixteen exposures are necessary to carry out the gain calibration.

After defect calibration is to take place, the number of exposures - Check the exposure count.
Insufficient number of necessary for the defect calibration is recognized to be insufficient. - Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12234 for the defect calibration is reached, and click [Create a
exposures for defect calibration <Reference> Gain Data].
Five exposures are necessary to carry out the defect calibration.
018-230-06E
MT-16
Error
Code
After residual image calibration is to take place, the number of exposures
Insufficient number of necessary for the residual image calibration is recognized to be - Check the exposure count.
- Continue exposures until the necessary exposure count
12235 exposures for residual image insufficient.
for the residual image calibration is reached, and click
calibration <Reference> [Create a Gain Data].
A single exposure is necessary to carry out the residual image calibration.
Compression or decompression of the defect map fails.

Defect map compression/
12236
decompression failure
[During exposure menu registration] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Exposure menu error (SE not The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the SE is not FPD.
12240
connected) connected. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
Exposure menu error (serial ID [During exposure menu registration]

12242 The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the SE serial ID is not - Register the serial ID of the SE.
not registered) registered.
[During routine processing] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Image transfer fails. Or an error occurs in the exposure sequence. FPD.
12243 Image transfer error (log level) - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
[During exposure menu registration]
Exposure menu error (panel - Select a defective item from the detail error log, and
12245 The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the panel is
degeneration) degenerated. check it.
[During exposure menu registration] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Panel communication error (log An error occurs in a control command to the panel. FPD.
12246
level) - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).

12250 DR cassette unit error An error is detected in the DR cassette unit.
Memory exposure image [During memory exposure image acquisition or deletion]

- Acquisition of memory exposure image cannot be
12274 Starting the memory image acquisition fails.
acquisition start error started from the SE.

- An error occurred during acquisition of memory
12275 Memory image acquisition fails.
acquisition error exposure image from the SE.

- Acquisition of memory exposure image could not be
12276 Aborting the memory image acquisition fails.
acquisition abort error aborted from the SE.
018-230-06E
MT-17
Error
Code
- Deletion of memory exposure image cannot be started
12277 Starting the memory image deletion fails.
deletion start error from the SE.

- An error occurred during deletion of memory exposure
12278 Memory image deletion fails.
deletion error image of the SE.
Unexpected notification of [During routine processing]

12405 The exposure performance is notified although the exposure conditions
exposure performance are not notified.
Exposure performance out of The exposure performance notified from the retro radiation source is out
12406 of the range defined by the CU.
range
The following error occurs in the serial communication with the retro
12407 Serial communication error irradiation source.

Exposure condition parameters sent from the CL are unrecognizable
values.
12500 Invalid exposure parameters - Check the CL exposure conditions.
<Reference>
You can know the unrecognizable items and values on the error log.

An application mode which cannot be supported by the system controller
of the CU is sent from the CL.
<Reference>
- An application mode refers to a mode of exposures such as normal
still image exposure, long cassette exposure, tomography and energy
12501 Invalid application mode subtraction. - Check the CL exposure conditions.
- The unsupportable mode application mode means such conditions
that an erroneous mode is set against the operative method, such as
tomography in the chest position or long cassette exposure in the bed
position.
- You can know the application mode and the operative method on the
error log.

12502 Line disconnection detected Breakage of the line with the CL is detected. - Check the LAN cable.
(Except when the line is intentionally cut for termination or utility)

An unrecognizable message is received during communication with the
CL.
- Check the CL software version.
12503 Invalid message from CL - Check the CU software version.
<Reference>
You can know the command name which is received but cannot be
recognized on the error log.
018-230-06E
MT-18
Error
Code
12504 CL response error Response other than normal is received from the CL.

12599 CL system error An error is detected in the CL system.
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to read the correction data from the SSD (solid state
device) and load into the CPU board memory and the SODIMM mounted
on the SPC board, but results in a failure in reading from the SSD. The
12600 Correction data load read retry attempt is retried.
- Check the SSD.
<Reference>
You can know the file name which cannot be read on the error log.
[During bootup]
As reading of the system file fails, a retry is made to read from the backup
file. - Check the SSD.
12601 System file load retry - Make another attempt to update in version.
<Reference>
You can check that recovery is made during bootup on the error log.

Transfer to the FTP (file transfer protocol) fails.
- Check the FTP server.
12610 FTP transfer failed - Check the LAN cable.
<Reference>
You can know the file name which cannot be transferred on the error log.

12699 File operation error An error is detected during file operation.
[During bootup]
Some processing takes place during background calibration (calibration
Process request from MUTL automatically taking place when the CU starts up).
12700 - Check the user operation.
rejected [During M-Utility]
An attempt is made to carry out respective modes of offset calibration/
defect calibration/residual image calibration, but results in failure.

12900 Parameter error An error is detected in an item set by service personnel (wrong value
setting, inconsistency of combination, or the like)
Exposure menu error (operative [During exposure menu registration]

The exposure menu cannot be accepted because the operative method is - Check the selector menu of the CL.
12901 - Check the settings in EDIT CONFIG.
method not specified) not specified.
018-230-06E
MT-19
Error
Code
An item that needs to be edited from its default value is not changed in
12902 System configuration error EDIT CONFIG.
- There are missing settings in the config.
Example) MC ID Code

12910 Control timeout detected The application software detects control timeout.
[During bootup] - Check communication among the MC, the MP and the
Unknown machine connection A machine to which the standard sequence cannot pass is connected FPD.
12920 during connection. - Check the connection with the AP (for wireless type).
error - Check the connection of the SE cables (for wired type).
Software logic error (only in [During bootup/routine processing]

12990 The application program detects a logic error for software control.
log)
018-230-06E
MT-20
3. Troubleshooting Based on LED 3.1.1 Status Lamps
Indication n SE Analysis Flow

l When the LINK lamp is not lit:
3.1 SE REFERENCE
The LED’s indicating the status are incorporated in the SE (FPD). The LINK lamp lights up when the serial ID of the SE is recognized.
You can roughly identify the cause of an error by checking the lighting state of the
LED’s before starting troubleshooting. START
{MD:1.3.1_External View and Functions}
Are the MC, MP, SE and DS normally

7-segment connected, and is the power ON?
NO
YES
Check the connection.
Turn ON the power.
Does the registered serial ID

coincide with the connected SE?
LED (READY) NO
YES
Register the serial ID
of the connected SE.
LED (POWER)
LED (ERROR) Check the appearing error code,
and take countermeasures.
LED (LINK) 1200_200002.ai
1200_200001E.ai
018-230-06E
MT-21
l When the READY lamp is not lit: n Battery Charger
REFERENCE
l When the orange LED lamp is flashing frequently:
The READY lamp lights up when exposures can be made. - Cause
The battery electrode pins cause contact failure.
START
- Remedy
The battery electrode pins can be improved by applying a conductivity agent to
them.
Are the CL settings correct?
NO
YES
Again make the CL settings.
1200_200004.ai
Is MC connection normal?
NO
REFERENCE
YES In Japan, "Nano Carbon" is generally used as the conductivity agent.
Again connect the MC.
Check the appearing error code,

and take countermeasures.
600_200007.ai
l When the ERROR lamp is lit or flashing:

START
Is the ERROR lamp lit/flashing?
Lit Flashing
A communication error occurs. A hardware error occurs.

Check the appearing error code, Check the appearing error code,
and take countermeasures. and take countermeasures.
600_200008.ai
018-230-06E
MT-22
3.1.2 7-Segment 3.2 DS
Error contents and countermeasures are as follows. The LED’s indicating the status are incorporated in the DS.
Error You can roughly identify the cause of an error by checking the lighting state of the
Meaning Probable cause and countermeasure
Code LED’s before starting troubleshooting.
Memory exposure
mode - After a while, check the situation. {MD:1.3.1_External View and Functions}
E01
inappropriate - After 5 seconds, error disappears.
transition states
- Save the image in the SD card to the DX Console.
E02 SD card FULL
- After 5 seconds, error is disappeared.
RMV error
E03 Check the detail error log.
(wrong exposure)
E04 RMV error (GLG) Check the detail error log.
Battery
E05 Battery level error Charge the battery.
Board temperature - Check the ambient temperature.
1200_200007E.ai
E06
error (low) - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
E07
Board temperature - Check the ambient temperature. n Battery LED
error (high) - Check the thermistor (temperature sensor).
- Check the environments at the installation site. l If the right side of the battery LED is lit in orange
Panel temperature
E06 - Check the use conditions.
error (low) - Probable cause
- Check the FPD.
- Check the environments at the installation site. SE charge error
Panel temperature - Check the use conditions. SE does not charge when the SE is inserted into the DS.
E07
error (high) - Check the MP cooling fan (P-FAN).
- Check the FPD. - Countermeasure
Battery temperature After cleaning the SE adapter and the DS terminal, restart the DS and the SE.
E17 - Check the ambient temperature. If the error persists even after implementing the above, replace the DS adapter,
error (low)
- Remove the battery from the FPD. If the removed battery DSC board, BCN board, POW board and the battery.
remains hot, replace it with a new one, as the battery is
Battery temperature
E18 defective.
error (high)
- Remove the battery from the FPD. If the temperature of the
removed battery lowers, check the cables in the FPD.
SD card error
E08 If errors occur repeatedly, replace the SD card.
（self-diagnosis）
Correction data
E09 Perform the full calibration.
transfer error
E10 Calibration failure Check the detail error log.
RMV error
E11 Replace the panel.
(panel cracking)
E12 RMV error (other) Check the detail error log.
PPC error (MCU
E13 Check the detail error log.
communication)
E14 PPC error (other) Check the detail error log.
SD card save
E15 If errors occur repeatedly, replace the SD card.
failure
E16 Software logic error Check the detail error log.
E19 Setting file error Check the detail error log.
018-230-06E
MT-23
4. Analysis of Abnormal Images 4.1 Analyzing Moiré
When the movable grid is used, the moiré might occur due to X-ray irradiation time or
u INSTRUCTION u the grid drive timing.
If you contact TIMS to proceed the abnormal image analysis efficiently, provide the  Analysis Flow
following information.
In addition, depending upon the analysis results, both types of SEs the GOS and Csl START
might need to be calibrated.
- The CL screen capture of the abnormal image as a JPEG image
- Writting of arrow and malfunction details (white streak, black streak, horizontal Is the X-ray irradiation time 10 msec or
streak, vertical streak, gradation, etc.) on the aforementioned abnormal spot longer?
- Image data files for 3 images each for before and after the abnormal image occurred NO
that have been saved in the "C:\Program Files \Fujifilm\IIP\Data\Image" of the CL, YES
apart from the individual information file (*.inf)
- Calibration data of the current panel and other registered panels, and the number of Change the X-ray irradiation time to 10 msec or longer
the current panel from "Back up Correct ALL Data" of PC-TOOL and make exposues.
- Log data from "Back up Correct ALL LOG" of PC-TOOL Does the moiré occur again on the image?
Open "IMO.LOG", "OPER.LOG" or "ISC.LOG" with Notepad and confirm that the
time before and after the abnormal image occurred is included in the log. As the
result of confirmation, if the time has not been updated, restart the CL and reacquire YES NO
the log data.
- Hearing about when the abnormal image occurred END
Perform the hearing on the following items in the possible range.
- Exposure condition (region, kV, mAs, SID, etc.), irradiation field focusing and
added filter when the abnormal image was exposed. The grid drive timing might be off.
- Exposure environment (ambient temperature, total image count of the day, Report the situations to the service personnel of the X-ray equipment to
X-ray equipment manufacturer, if the equipment have been operated for have timing delay adjusted by means of the exposure stand trimmer
24 consecutive hours or not, specification of the grid being used, exposure Is the image is normal recorded after the adjustment?
workflow, etc.) (Is the image free from the moiré?)
- If abnormal images occurred repeatedly
NO
YES
END 1200_200003E.ai
018-230-07E
MT-24
 Adjustment Procedures for the Grid Drive Timing
If the cause of the moiré is determined to be misalignment of the grid drive timing,
follow the procedures below:
(1) Register the following menu on the CL.
“QC test” - “Image format”
(2) Move the grid and make exposures with a dose of 1 mR.
The grid and the SE should be set on the exposure stand beforehand.
REFERENCE
Example of exposure conditions with a dose of 1 mR.

- Distance: 1.8 m
- Voltage: 80 kV
- Amperage: 50 mA
- Time: 0.013 msec
(3) Output a film in a single image format.

(4) Check if the moiré is observed on the output film.
If the moiré occurs although the X-ray irradiation time is suitable (longer than 10
msec), the cause of the problem is determined to be misalignment of the grid drive
timing.
(5) Report the situations to the service personnel of the X-ray equipment
to have timing delay adjusted by means of the exposure stand
trimmer.
Check to make sure that no moiré occurs on the output film.
CAUTION
Commission the service personnel of the X-ray equipment to make adjustment
of the grid drive timing.
REFERENCE
If the moiré occurs after the timing is adjusted by means of the exposure stand
trimmer, the cause might lie in some failure in the drive unit mechanism of the grid
mounted on the exposure stand.
018-230-07E
MT-25
5. Troubleshooting from DS Error Log ■ Error meaning
Battery
Use the DS Service Utility to check the error log. Error Probable cause and
Error indication LED Meaning
code countermeasure
indication
5.1 How to View DS Error Log Insert and remove the SE.
Replace the fuses of the
Central
DSM65A board if the error
orange SE charging is
 Display Example of the Error Log 01 Fuse is blow
light turns abnormal
can’t be solved.
If the same phenomenon
on
<Example> recurred, replace the DSM65A
20140120120101:01:Fuse is blow board.
CPU starts up due
Error code (double digits) and error indication 02 Watch dog error - Replace the DSM65A board.
to WDT*
Event date/time (ex. 2014.01.20 12:01:01) Clean the SE adapter and
1200_200005.ai the DS terminal. If the error
Communication
u NOTE u SE 3 orange persists after restarting the
error with SE
03 communication lights turn DS, restarting the SE and
(no communication
- If the date has not been set, it will be displayed as “00000000”. error on reinserting the battery, replace
during 10 minutes)
- The time is how much it takes after turning ON the DS. the adapter/DSC65A board/
DSM65A board.
- When the same error occurred twice or more after turning ON the power, the 2nd
error and after will not be recorded to the log. Thermistor
Temprature is up
04 - temperature is Replace the DSM65A board.
- Though the same error occurred, it will be recorded to the log if restart the power. to 70
abnormal
- The error log capacity is 384 lines. The oldest log will be deleted if the log storage
area is not enough. *WDT: Abbreviation for the watchdog timer. Operates when a CPU error is generated.
- Only “END” will be recorded to the log if no errors occurred.
018-230-07E
MT-26
6. Countermeasure for the SE
Temperature Error
Error temperature for the panel and countermeasure are as follows.
Occurrence
Error type Situation Countermeasure
temperature
Approx. 10°C or
lower Restore the SE temperature
Warning or SE is disabled. to the normal range (approx.
approx. 40°C or 10°C to approx. 40°C).
higher
Approx. -10°C or
Restore the SE temperature
lower
SE results in system to the normal range (approx.
Error or
shutdown. 10°C to approx. 40°C) and turn
approx. 60°C or
ON the SE power.
higher
u NOTE u
The temperature is an estimate since it fluctuates depending on the SE type and the
external temperatures.
018-230-07E
MT-27
7. Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM- (3) Select “LOG Information” from “Maintenance” menu to check the log.
made AP Log
Log in to the FUJIFILM-made AP from a browser and then check the log.
n Checking the log

(1) Open Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar and
press the [Enter] key.
(2) When the following window opens, enter “fuj1Film” into the password
area and click [Login].
1200_200006E.ai
u NOTE u
When sending the log for analysis, copy and paste the contents in the "Show log"
window to create a text file.
700_700051E.ai
018-230-07E
MT-28
n Details to be checked in the log
l How to interpret the log
The log appears from "2000/01/01 00:00:04" every time when the AP starts up.
In an example below, the "2000/01/01 00:00:04" in the first line is an event at first start-up, the "2000/01/01 00:00:04" in the seventh line is an event at the seventh start-up.
Line Log Description
1 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (1st)/Ethernet LAN stopped working.
2 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start. AP is starting up
3 2000/01/01 00:00:07 eth0: link down AP is starting up
4 2000/01/01 00:00:20 RNDIS start AP is starting up (USB-LAN began to start-up)
5 2000/01/01 00:00:42 http login, 192.168.0.10 IP address 192.168.0.10 logged in AP.
6 2000/01/01 00:00:42 http login success
7 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (2nd)
8 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start.
9 2000/01/01 00:00:19 eth0: link down
10 2000/01/01 00:00:24 certification was aes(ccm)
11 2000/01/01 00:00:25 DFS start on channel 5260 Because the start channel was DFS-targeted 52 ch (=5260 MHz), the frequency band is scanned for 1 minute when started up.
12 2000/01/01 00:00:25 wlan RF on.
13 2000/01/01 00:00:30 RNDIS start
14 2000/01/01 00:01:39 wlan client connected 00:80:92:6f:cb:19 SE (MAC address 00:80:92:6f:cb:19) connected to AP through encryption.
16 2000/01/01 00:00:04 eth0: link down AP began to start-up (3rd)
17 2000/01/01 00:00:04 system_start.
18 2000/01/01 00:00:19 eth0: link down
20 2000/01/01 00:00:25 DFS start on channel 5260
21 2000/01/01 00:00:25 wlan RF on.
22 2000/01/01 00:00:36 RNDIS start
23 2000/01/01 00:01:35 wlan client connected 00:80:92:6f:cb:19
25 2000/01/01 00:01:49 DFS start on channel 5280 DFS functioned to move the channel to 5280 MHz = 56 ch (1 minute frequency band scanning started.)
26 2000/01/01 00:01:49 connect channel is 56
27 2000/01/01 00:02:48 connect channel is 60 DFS functioned to move the channel to 5300 MHz = 60 ch (1 minute frequency band scanning started.)
28 2000/01/01 00:02:48 DFS start on channel 5300
31 2000/01/01 00:11:07 eth0: link up, full duplex, speed 100 Mbps Wired LAN function was activated (SE is wired to AP).
32 2000/01/01 00:11:39 eth0: link down Wired LAN function was deactivated (Wired AP is disconnected).
018-230-07E
MT-29
l Events to be obtained from log l Checking DFS operation
Events that can be obtained from the log are as shown below. The underlined parts are For the DFS detection, the AP blinks the "WSTAT" LED in red, moves the channel,
examples for the contents of the log and then detects radar waves in the environment for 1 minute without emitting waves.
Event type Occurrence timing Log contents The AP records the log when changing the channel.
AP power-on system_start Ex.: A log when the channel moved from 56ch to 60ch.
Start-up USB-LAN Link up 2000/01/01 00:01:49 DFS start on channel 5280
2000/01/01 00:01:49 connect channel is 56
Termination USB-LAN Link down
2000/01/01 00:02:48 connect channel is 60
Hardware eth0:link up, full duplex, speed 100
Wired LAN link-up
event Mbps The channel and frequency have the relation shown as below.
Wired LAN link-down eth0:link down Channel Frequency
Wireless LAN operation-on wlan RF on 52ch 5260MHz
Wireless LAN operation-off wlan RF off 56ch 5280MHz
IP addresses of clients who tried log- 60ch 5300MHz
in certification to the configuration http login 192.168.0.10
Access window 64ch 5320MHz
event to Web 100ch 5500MHz
Successful certification to Web
configuration http login success
configuration window 104ch 5520MHz
window
Failed certification to Web 108ch 5540MHz
http login fail
configuration window
112ch 5560MHz
Connection between AP and client wlan client connected
Wireless LAN 116ch 5580MHz
event Certification information between AP
certification was aes(ccm) 120ch 5600MHz
and client
DFS operation-on DFS start 124ch 5620MHz
DFS event Channel resulted from DFS 128ch 5640MHz
connected channel is 56
operation 132ch 5660MHz
136ch 5680MHz
140ch 5700MHz
018-230-07E
MT-30
8. BACKUP FILE For marker calibration:
- Results (success: "0", fail: other than "0"）
- Calibration mode (Factory mode: "factory", Maintenance mode: "maintenance")
- Border edge factor for quadruple exposures (BorderEdge)
8.1 CALIB LOG - Marker calibration results (MarkerCalibResult)
How to read the CALIB LOG file is as follows.
[2014/10/21 15:29:58] 3AA988 @<P1, L121402, center> <C4> <M0>xxxxx
Date and time TICK after SE SE SE Calibration Read Results

the MC reg No. serial position type mode
application (1-100） ID (DR-ID
starts up 1305SE
（10ms units） only)
- Calibration type
C1: Offset calibration C2: Gain calibration
C3: Lag calibration C4: Automatic offset update
C6: Defect calibration C7: Marker calibration
- Read mode
M0: mode 0 M1: mode 1 M2: mode 2
- Results
For offset calibration:
- Results (success, abort, fail)
- Response results from the SE (3 words)
For gain calibration:
For defect calibration:
- Defect detection results
- Histogram of the defect size (DefectSizeHistogram)
- Histogram of the defect cluster (DefectClusterHistogram)
- Horizontal line defect / vertical line defect (LineH/LineV)
- Number of the defect pixels (NumberOfDefectPixel)
For lag calibration:
- ROI number (NumOfROI_x/NumOfROI_y)
- ROI coordinates of the exposure part per ROI numbers (IROI/x1/y1/x2/y2)
- ROI coordinates of the Pb part per ROI numbers (PbROI/x1/y1/x2/y2)
- Acquisition timing for each frame, average QL of ROI for each exposure part,
and average QL of ROI for each Pb part (Frame/Time/QLave_X/QLave_Pb)
- Judgment results for lag correction ON/OFF (JudgementCorrect)
- Decay constant per ROI numbers (IROI/A(iROI))
018-230-07E
MT-31
8.2 GLG LOG
How to read the GLG LOG file is as follows.
date X-x X-y X-z time Y-x Y-y Y-z time Z-x Z-y Z-z time flag
2011/06/21 15:29 80G -169G 6G 0ms 78G -181G -3G 0ms -8G -48G -64G 3ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 315G 3G 5G 0ms -1G -6G 4G 11ms 2G -1G -24G 6ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 15G 3G 5G 0ms 1G 15G 1G 7ms -6G 0G -266G 3ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -249G -7G -21G 0ms -4G -20G -4G 10ms -29G -12G 90G 2ms 01 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -16G 9G -1G 0ms -16G 9G -1G 0ms -3G 2G 317G 0ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 -223G 14G -8G 0ms -99G 16G -8G 0ms -55G 11G -14G -1ms 02 Panel Impact Detected
2011/06/21 15:29 61G -100G -3G 0ms 60G -104G 3G 1ms -4G 0G 42G 6ms 00
2011/06/21 15:28 100G -33G 0G 0ms 83G -41G 0G 0ms 75G -6G -35G 3ms 01 Panel Impact Detected
(x,y,z) when X is X peak (x,y,z) when Y is Y peak (x,y,z) when Z is Z peak

Date and time Flag
the maximum moment the maximum moment the maximum moment
00: Only log (no warning notice)
01: Log and warning notice
02: Log and warning notice
(two or more warning peaks that exceed the threshold)
In addition, the GLG log orientations are as per the following.
If the SE is dropped in the directions of the arrows, because the impacts are subjected in the opposite directions, then the G values for each axis will be negative values.
Z
Y
1200_400048.ai
018-230-07E
MT-32
8.3 SERegistInfo.txt
How to read the SERegistInfo.txt file is as follows.
001 Lxxxxxx
002 Lxxxxxx
003 Lxxxxxx
004 Wxxxxxx
005 Nxxxxxx
SE SE
reg No. serial
(1-100） ID
018-230-07E
MT-33
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
MT-34
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
MT-35
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxMT1-1
Appendix 1. Troubleshooting for 10753 (4) Select [File] > [System Information].
Error
Describe the action for 10753 error.
- Changing the BIOS Setting
- Updating MP OS Version
- Checking the Network Connection Configuration
- Action for the case where the F-Secure is installed
- Analysis with Log
1.1 Changing the BIOS Setting

When the MC PC (the console PC if MC is integrated) is HP 600G1 SFF/HP 800G1
SFF, “error 10753 (MP connection error)” may occur while the system is in operation.
This section introduce the setting change of the PC (BIOS) to suppress the error 600_700335.ai
occurrence. → System Information window is displayed.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the PC. (5) Check the BIOS version.
- V02.16 or later: Perform step (6) or later.
(2) Turn ON the power of the PC while pressing the <ESC> key. - V02.15 or earlier: Perform step (6) only. Step (7) or later is unnecessary.
→ Startup Menu is displayed.
(3) Press the <F10> key.
600_700336.ai
600_700334.ai
→ BIOS setup window is displayed.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual AppxMT1-1
AppxMT1-2
(6) Press the <ESC> key and select [Ignore Changes and Exit] (9) Press the <F10> key twice to confirm the setting.
→ BIOS setup window is completed.
(10) Select [File] > [Save Changes and Exit].
(7) Select [Power] > [Hardware Power Management].
600_700339.ai
600_700337.ai
→ Save Changes and Exit window is displayed.
→ Hardware Power Management window is displayed.
(8) Select [PCI Express Power Management] and change [Enabled] to (11) Select [Yes].
[Disabled] by pressing the right arrow key.
600_700340.ai
→ BIOS setup is completed.
600_700338.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-3
n Checking the PCI Express Power Management Setting (4) Select [Power] > [Hardware Power Management].
Check that the [PCI Express Power Management] is “Disabled”.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the PC.
(2) Turn ON the power of the PC while pressing the <ESC> key.
→ Startup Menu is displayed.
600_700337.ai
→ Hardware Power Management window is displayed.
(5) Check that the [PCI Express Power Management] is “Disabled”.
600_700334.ai
→ BIOS setup window is displayed.
600_700338.ai
(6) Press the <ESC> key and select [Ignore Changes and Exit] to complete
BIOS setup window.
→ BIOS setup window is completed.
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-4
1.2 Updating MP OS Version 1.3 Checking the Network Connection
{MC:Appendix 2._Updating MP OS Version} Configuration
When the local network connecting the MC, MP, AP, HUB, and cradle is in line, a
communication error may occur.
To prevent the error for this case, connect them with the star.
n Network Configuration to be Modified

l Example 1: Devices including a HUB are connected in line
PC
MP MP HUB AP
(Console, MC)
600_203001.ai
l Example 2: MPs including a HUB are connected in line.

PC
HUB MP MP
(Console, MC)
AP
600_203002.ai
n Modified Network Configuration

Each device directly connects to the HUB.
MP
PC
HUB MP
(Console, MC)
AP
600_203003.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-5
1.4 Action for the Case Where the F-Secure is
Installed
If the MC application is installed in the DX console in which the F-Secure has been
installed, the "10753 error (MP communication disconnection)" may occur.
This is caused by the duplication of the start-up of the F-Secure services and the MC-
to-MP communication for initialization in the case where the F-Secure is not set to be
delayed in starting up at the time of the installation/version upgrade.
For a countermeasure for this case, refer to the ECN shown below.
- "ECNxxx, 10753 due to incomplete setting of F-Secure: Sporadic disconnections of
the MC-to-MP line"
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-6
1.5 Analysis with Log l In the case where the MP is not running when MC starts up (failure of
user operation)
The 10753 error, a failure in connecting the MP communication, is also caused from
the MP accidentally not being powered on or being delayed in turning on. There is no life check requirement/response (LifeCkRq /LifeCkRs) from the MP.
This section describes the analysis procedure with the log.
2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE
n Analysis procedure 0006000510010300 WakeUpNt 0000
2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE
Check the following with the MC started up.
0005100600010400 RMLRegRq 01001800
(1) Check the time stamp of the 10753 error with RU PC-TOOL - ERROR 2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 CONNECT NEW SE
DB. 1006000500010600 RMLRegRs 000018000421AA0C
[10753] 2013/12/13 09:12:26 002488 @MP-MC NOT CONNECT 2013/12/13 09:12:24 000023D4 192.168.0.30
0005100600010500 RMLRegRq 020030003400
(2) Perform RU PC-TOOL - BACKUP - LOG ALL. :
:
(3) Check the time stamp from the file in the "TRACE5" folder in the
backup folder of the log.
Explain the operation procedure for turning on the MP first then the MC (or the DX
"mc_wlan_com10753.001" or "mc_wlan_com210753.001" Console, if the MC software has been installed in the DX Console).
l Normal case The example log above is that for when the MC is started up first and then the MP
later. Because this procedure interrupts the normal startup, no life check requirement/
There is a life check requirement (LifeCkRq)/response (LifeCkRs) from the MP. response is logged. However, turning on the MP also turns on the HUB inside the MP,
and the communication between the MC and the SE starts, and then the CONNECT
2013/12/13 09:48:18 00000F04 192.168.0.20 NEW SE is recorded.
0005000710010200 LifeCkRq
2013/12/13 09:48:18 00000F04 192.168.0.20
0007000510010300 LifeCkRs 0000
:
:
* LifeCkRq: Life check requirement from the MC

LifeCkRs: Life check response from the MP
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-7
l In the case where the MP has some abnormalities
There is a log of life check requirement (LifeCkRq) but no response (LifeCkRs) from
the MP.
2013/02/19 13:46:59 00191361 192.168.0.20 0005000710010200

LifeCkRq
:
:
* In the case where two MPs are connected, the logged IP address can be used to
identify the unresponsive MP.
Ex.) Normal case (Two MPs process the life check requirement /response.)
2013/02/19 13:46:32 00190931 192.168.0.20
0005000710010200 LifeCkRq
2013/02/19 13:46:32 00190931 192.168.0.20
0007000510010300 LifeCkRs 0000
2013/02/19 13:46:32 00190931 192.168.0.21
0005000710010200 LifeCkRq
2013/02/19 13:46:32 00190931 192.168.0.21 0007000510010300 LifeCkRs 0000
:
:
* LifeCkRq: Life check requirement from the MC

LifeCkRs: Life check response from the MP
Ex.) Abnormal case (One MP processes the life check requirement /response.)
2013/02/19 13:46:59 00191361 192.168.0.20
0005000710010200 LifeCkRq
2013/02/19 13:46:59 00191361 192.168.0.20
0007000510010300 LifeCkRs 0000
2013/02/19 13:46:59 00191361 192.168.0.21
0005000710010200 LifeCkRq
.
.
The MP of 192.168.0.21 does not respond to the underlined life check requirement in
red. This shows that a possibly abnormal MP has this IP address.
Possibly abnormal parts are the ERC54A board and the HUB of this MP.
Replace the parts, identify the location of the failure, and then repair it.
If the failure is not solved after the parts are replaced, check the MPC54A board.
018-230-06E
AppxMT1-8
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 18-115
11.28.2014 03 Revision (FM9281) 36, 37, 39-53
5, 10, 30-32, 35-37, 39, 53-77,
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287)

AppxMC1-1 to 1-4, AppxMC2-1 to 2-8
03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 33, 34, 38, 40-52, 78-139
04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 44, 63
21, 30-40, 45-54, 57-67, 70-95, 97,
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 140, 142, 144, 146-150, 152, 153,
AppxMC3-1 to 3-4
22-29, 41-44, 55, 56, 68, 69, 96,
07.29.2016 06 Changes in pagination (FM9340)
98-139, 141, 143, 145, 151, 154, 155
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 52, 81
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

Parts (MC)
018-230-07E
MC-1
1. Precautions for Check, u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Replacement, and Adjustment When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
- Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed
procedures for such components, refer to the Service Parts List Volume. for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
following precautions should be observed. procedures set forth in this Service Manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
WARNINGS - Do not leave an object which might cause damage on the SE (Flat Panel Sensor)
(such as a tool, a screw or a removed component). If the SE gets scratched,
l To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing abnormalities in image might result.
the procedures. - Do not drop the SE nor apply a load larger than specified onto the exposure plane.
l Wear safety shoes for operation. {Operation Manual: Precautions}
u INSTRUCTION u
WARNING/CAUTION
Exercise care not to make a radius of curvature of the SE cable smaller than 50
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions". mm when handling the SE cable. If the radius of curvature is smaller than 50 mm,
disconnection might occur in the cable, resulting in abnormality in image.
CAUTIONS u NOTE u
Photos used for describing the procedures or the like in the manual may sometimes
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
appear to be different from the actual machine.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
- When servicing a board, do not apply force to the center of the board or bend REFERENCE
the board while holding both sides of the board. If the board is bent or force The following characters are used as abbreviations to express colors of cables or the
is applied to its center, a crack may occur on a soldered connection, resulting like.
in a failure in its connection.
Abbreviation Color Abbreviation Color
- When servicing a board, do not touch connector pins mounted on the board
with bare hands. RED Red ORN Orange
- Never remove the red-painted screws. WHT White GRY Gray
BLK Black YEL Yellow
GRN Green BLU Blue
BLN Brown PUR Purple
Y/G Spiral of yellow and green
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
2. MP (Power Supply Unit) 2.1 MP Cover
WARNING n Removal Procedures
Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker and disconnect the power cable (1) Remove the top cover.
from the outlet before servicing the MP, to avoid electric shock hazards. #1 Loosen: TP3x6 (x2)
CAUTIONS Top cover
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. #1

- When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced,
and replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage.
At that time, check the rated amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
- To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
- The power supply unit is built in the MP. Exercise care not to drop a screw or
the like into the power supply unit when servicing the MP.
If you accidentally drop something, pick it up quickly.
If the power is turned ON with the screw or the like dropping in the power 1200_700026E.ai
supply unit, short-circuiting will result. (2) Remove the front cover.
#1 Remove: TP3x6 (x6)
#1
Front cover
1200_700027E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-3
(3) Remove the rear cover. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove: TP3x6 (x3) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
REFERENCE
Reinstall the front cover by referring to the following image.
Rear cover
#1
1200_700028E.ai
Insert while spreading
the cover open.
Insert the cover against the guide. Push the cover against the guide.
1200_700109E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-4
2.2 MPX54A Board n Removal Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u (1) Remove the covers of the MP.
Do not hold the relay mounted on the board when you are mount/dismount the {MC:2.1_MP Cover}
MPX54A board. Otherwise, the relay might come off or get damaged, resulting in (2) Disconnect the X-ray shot cables from the MPX54A board.
some failure.
Reverse the installation procedures mentioned in the Installation manual for
GOOD NO GOOD disconnection.
{IN1:7.5_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable}
(3) Remove the MPX54A board.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (MPX3, 4)
Do not hold the relay. MPX54A board
#1
Hold here. 600_300009.ai
REFERENCE
The MPX54A board is equipped with exchangeable relays (K1 to K6).
#2
n Board Location
DETAIL A MPX54A board
1200_300010.ai
n Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
A
1200_300009.ai
018-230-06E
MC-5
2.3 MPC54B Board n Removal Procedures
u INSTRUCTIONS u (1) Remove the covers of the MP.
- Refer to the following procedures for replacing the MP (when two MP have been {MC:2.1_MP Cover}
installed, the MP2 is also included) MPC54B board whose local IP address is (2) Remove the MPC54B board.
changed from the default value.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (MPC1, 12, 13, 18, 21)
{MC:2.11_Replacing the MP whose Local IP Address Is Changed}
#2 Remove: M3x6 (x8)
- When replacing the MPC54B board, refer to the following procedures for updating
MP application software version. #1 #2
{IN2:14.1.5_Updating MP Application Software Version}
MPC12
n Board Location MPC13
MPC18
DETAIL A MPC54B board
A MPC1 MPC21
1200_300011.ai
Reinstallation Procedures
n
1200_300008.ai
NOTE
When changing the MPC54B board, check the MP OS version. If necessary, update/
downgrade the MP OS version.
{MC: Appendix 2._Updating/Downgrading MP OS Version}
018-230-06E
MC-6
2.3.1 Fuses n Fuse Information
Board Rated voltage Rated amperage
n Fuse Locations indications
Type
(V) (A)
Model
F9 F5 LM40(D)CDL
F4 Micro fuse 48 4 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
LM20(D)CDL
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
F8 LM20(D)CDL
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
F6
LM20(D)CDL
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
LM20(D)CDL
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
LM03(D)
F9 Micro fuse 48 0.3 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
LM20(D)CDL
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
n Handling Fuse Failures

Change the target fuse.
F7 F4 F11
1200_300002.ai
018-230-06E
MC-7
2.3.2 Setting the Jumper Pin
n Jumper Pin Location
600_300168.ai
n Jumper Pin Information

No jumper pin is used in the machine.
018-230-06E
MC-8
2.4 LED54B Board n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the covers of the MP.
n Board Location
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
DETAIL A LED54B board (2) Remove the LED54B board.
#2 Disconnect: Cable connector (LED1)
LED54B board
#1
1200_300012.ai
#2
1200_300013.ai
018-230-06E
MC-9
2.5 NFB51A Board n Removal Procedures
n Board Location
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
(2) Remove the NFB51A board.
#1 Unclamp: Clamp (x1)
NFB51A board
#2 Disconnect: Cable connectors (NFB1, NFB2)
#2 #3 #1
1200_300019.ai
1200_300018.ai
018-230-06E
MC-10
2.6 Cooling Fan (FAN1) (3) Remove the relay connector and the relay cable from the fan.
n Removal Procedures
Relay connector Relay cable
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
(2) Remove the fan together with the fan cover.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (MPC1) 1200_300159E.ai
#2 Unclamp: Clamps (x2) (4) Remove the fan.

#3 Remove: M3x6 (x4) #1 Remove: M3x25 (x2)
FAN Cover
#1
A
#3
1200_300015.ai
#1
DETAIL A u NOTE u
The cooling fan (FAN1) is for exhaustion. Check the arrow indicating the direction of
the air engraved on the fan before putting the fan on the fan cover.
A
DETAIL A
#2
1200_300014.ai
FAN
1200_300016.ai
018-230-06E
MC-11
2.7 Power Supply Unit n Removal Procedures
CAUTION
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
The power supply unit is equipped with a rotary dial (VR51). The rotary dial
(2) Remove the MPX54A board.
is designed for adjustment in the factory and must not be controlled on the
market. {MC:2.2_MPX54A Board}
(3) Remove the power supply unit.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (CN1, CN51)
Power supply unit #2 Remove: M3x6 (x5)
#3 Draw out: Power supply unit
#1 #2
VR51
600_300177.ai
1200_300017.ai
018-230-06E
MC-12
2.8 Switch Cover
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
(2) Remove the switch cover.
Front cover
1200_300078E.ai
u NOTE u
Align the tabs on the switch cover with the notches on the front cover.
Switch cover Front cover
1200_300079E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-13
2.9 Outlet n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures u NOTE u
(1) Remove the covers of the MP. Install the cable terminals (L, N, FG) as follows.
{MC:2.1_MP Cover}
N
(2) Remove the outlet.
#1 Disconnect: Cable terminals (L, N, FG) FG
L
DETAIL A 1200_300082.ai
#1
Outlet
1200_300080E.ai
REFERENCE
The outlet is installed in the MP with the tabs (two places on the right side and
one place on the left side) directed toward the outlet's opening.
018-230-06E
MC-14
2.10 AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional) REFERENCE
The relay incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit is retained by a hook. Follow the
n Removal Procedures procedures below to attach/detach the relay.
<To detach>
(1) Remove the AC bucky relay unit. #1 Disengage: Hook
Reverse the reinstallation procedures for removal. #2 Push down: Hook
{IN1:7.5.3_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)} #1
#2 Relay
Hook Terminal block
(1) Mount the AC bucky relay unit.
{IN1:7.5.3_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)}
2.10.1 Relay 600_300038.ai
REFERENCE <To attach>

The model of the relay incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit depends on the AC #1 Press: Hook
bucky relay unit type. #2 Push up: Hook
Identify the model before replacing the relay. #2 Relay
{MD:1.3.4_Board-Related Information} #1 Terminal block
Hook
(1) Remove the AC bucky relay unit. 600_300039.ai
#1 Disconnect: Relays
MP n Reinstallation Procedures
#1
600_300045.ai
018-230-06E
MC-15
2.11 Replacing the MP whose Local IP Address (9) Click [MP2 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
The MP2 Network Setting >> window appears.
Is Changed
(10) Click [Setting for MP1].
When the MP whose local IP address is changed from the default value (192.168.0.20)
The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears.
is to be replaced, refer to the following procedures to proceed with operation.
Also refer to the following procedures for replacing the MP MPC54B board whose (11) Click [OK].
local IP address is changed from the default value (192.168.0.20).
(12) Click [BACK] to return to the MP Network Setting >> window.
n Changing the Local IP Address to the Default Value (13) Click [BACK] to return to the Network Setting window.
REFERENCE (14) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON again.
The IP address of the MC ETH1 needs to be returned to the default value when the (15) Start up the MUTL, and click System\Shutdown\Forced Reboot.
MP or the MPC54B board is to be replaced. Mentioned below are the procedures for
Click [OK] when the confirmation window of “Are you sure?” appears.
returning the IP address of the MC ETH1 and then replacing the MP.
u NOTE u
(1) Back up the respective data. In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
- CONFIGURATION click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". Check that the MC
- HISTORY LOG Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
- CORRECT ALL DATA from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
{MU2:1.13_BACKUP}
(16) Delete the RU registered in the RU PC-TOOL.
(2) Set the IP address of the MP and MC to the default value on the Local
Network PreSetting. {MU2:1.3_DELETE}
{MU2:[1.1]_Local Network PreSetting >>} (17) Re-install the RU PC-TOOL.

REFERENCE REFERENCE
It is not necessary to change the IP address of the SE. The IP address of the MC ETH1 restores to the default value by re-installing the
RU PC-TOOL.
(3) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the Network Setting window.
The MP Network Setting >> window appears.
(4) Click [MP1 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
(6) Click [OK].
(7) When two MP have been installed, disconnect the LAN cable of the
MP1 and connect only the MP2.
(8) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the Network Setting window.
The MP Network Setting >> window appears.
018-230-06E
MC-16
n Procedures for Replacing the MP or the MPC54B Board
(1) Replace the MP or the MPC54B board.
REFERENCES
Refer to the following for replacing the MPC54B board.
{MC:2.3_MPC54B Board}
(2) Update MP application software version.

REFERENCES
By changing the board, the IP address has been changed to 192.162.0.20 (default
value) which is equivalent to MP1. Therefore, update MP application software
version by clicking [MP1 Software VerUp Install] on the MP1 Install >> window.
n Changing the Local IP Address

(1) Return the local IP address of the SE/MP/MC to the original value (value
before changed to the default value).
{IN:Appendix 6._Replacement Procedure of the Local Network}
REFERENCE
It is not necessary to change the IP address of the SE.
(2) Restore the respective data which has been backed up.
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
- CORRECT ALL DATA
{MU2:1.14_RESTORE}
018-230-06E
MC-17
3. DS (Docking Stand)
WARNING
Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker and disconnect the power cable
from the outlet before servicing the DS, to avoid electric shock hazards.
CAUTIONS
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
- The power supply unit is built in the DS. Exercise care not to drop a screw or
the like into the power supply unit when servicing the DS.
If the power is turned ON with the screw or the like dropping in the power
supply unit, short-circuiting will result.
018-230-06E
MC-18
3.1 DS Cover (3) Remove the DS rear cover.
#1 Remove: PS3x8 (x4)
The procedures for the DS on the floor are described as an example.
#2 Remove: TP3x6 (round head) (x4)
(1) Remove the floor foot cover.
#1 Remove: B3x12 (x4)
#1
#1 #1
#2
Rear cover 1200_300037.ai
1200_700005.ai
(4) Remove the DS top cover.
REFERENCE
#1 Remove: DT3x6 (x3)
In case of fixing the anchor, the screws to remove differ in positions and numbers. #2 Loosen: TP3x6 (blue) (x5)
#3 Disconnect: Cable connector (CN21)
(2) Remove the DS front cover. Rear side of DS
#1
#1 Remove: TP3x6 (round head) (x2)
Front cover
#1 #3
#2
CN21
1200_300036.ai
#2
1200_300038.ai
018-230-06E
MC-19
n Reinstallation Procedures 3.2 DLS65A Board
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
- When reinstalling the rear cover, adjust the screws on both sides to be visual center (1) Remove the covers of the DS.
as the following image. {MC:3.1_DS Cover}
(2) Remove the DLS65A board.
Top cover DLS65A board
#1
Rear cover 1200_300039.ai
1200_300098.ai
- When replacing the rear cover, tear the following two kinds of labels off from the
cover before replacement, and attach the labels to the new cover.
Rear side of DS Label
1200_300110.ai
018-230-06E
MC-20
3.3 DSI65A Board 3.4 DSB65A Board
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the covers of the DS. (1) Remove the front cover and the rear cover of the DS.
{MC:3.1_DS Cover} {MC:3.1_DS Cover}
(2) Remove the DSI65A board. (2) Remove the DSB65A board together with the bracket.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector #1 Disconnect: Cable connector
#2 Remove: TP3x6 (blue) (x2) #2 Remove: DT3x6 (x1)
DSI65A board DS #2 DSB65A board #1
DS
#2
#1
1200_300041.ai 1200_300042.ai
n Reinstallation Procedures (3) Remove the DSB65A board.

#1 Remove: TP3x6 (blue) (x2)
DSB65A board
#1
1200_300044.ai
018-230-06E
MC-21
3.5 DSM65A Board n Removal Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u (1) Remove the covers of the DS.
When replacing the DSM65A board, DS IP address is reset. Refer to the following {MC:3.1_DS Cover}
procedure as necessary for re-configuring the IP address.
(2) Remove the cover of the DSM65A board.
{IN1:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address}
#1 Loosen: DT3x6 (x2)
n Board Location
DS DSM65A board
Rear side of DS
#2 #1
1200_300048.ai
1200_300045.ai
018-230-06E
MC-22
(3) Remove the DSM65A board assembly. (4) Remove the DSM65A board.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (CN1) #1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (CN2-4, 7, 10)
#2 Unclamp: Clamps (x2) #2 Remove: V3x6 (x7)
#4 Lift: DSM65A board assembly
#2
#1
CN2 CN10 CN7 CN4
#2
#2
#1
CN3
Rear side of DS #3
1200_300047.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
Pass the cable into the left side of the coil so that the cable does not pass through the
#4 top of coil as per the below, when installing the DSM65A board assembly.
1200_300046.ai
1200_300093.ai
018-230-06E
MC-23
n Fuse Locations 3.6 DSC65A Board
(1) Perform the procedures (1) to (3) in "3.5 DSM65A Board" to remove
the DSM65A board assembly.
{MC:3.5_DSM65A Board}
(2) Remove the cover of the DSC65A board.
F4 F5 F1 F2 F3
1200_300006.ai
n Fuse Information
Type Model #1
indications (V) (A)
11CT 4A
F1 72 4
SOC
LM10(D)
F2 48 1 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
LM10(D) 1200_300049.ai
F3 48 1 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd. REFERENCE
F4 72 1
11CT 1A It is possible to remove the cable tie that fixes the ferrite core shown below. The
SOC cable tie does not need to be fixed while the board is being reinstalled.
11CT 1A
F5 72 1
SOC

F2, F3: Change the target fuse.
F1, F4, F5: Change the board.
1200_300092.ai
018-230-06E
MC-24
(3) Remove the DSC65A board together with the bracket. 3.7 Power Supply Unit
#1 Remove: Shoulder 3x6 (x2)
#1
(1) Perform the procedures (1) to (3) in "3.5 DSM65A Board" to remove
the DSM65A board assembly.
Cover {MC:3.5_DSM65A Board}
(2) Remove the power supply unit.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (x2)
#2 Remove: M2.5x6 (x4)
1200_300050.ai
(4) Remove the DSC65A board assembly.

#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (CN31, 41)
DS
#2
#1 #1
CN31 CN41 1200_300051.ai
n Reinstallation Procedures #1
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 1200_300052.ai
018-230-06E
MC-25
3.8 Shutter n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the shutters.
#1 Reinstall: Springs (x3)
(1) Remove the cover of the DS. #2 Pass through: Shaft
{MC:3.1_DS Cover} #3 Reinstall: K rings (x2)
#3 #1 #2 #1 #1 #3
(2) Remove the shutter assembly.
Top cover #1
Shutter (small) Shutter (large) 1200_300103.ai
u NOTE u
1200_300071E.ai When reinstalling the springs, refer to the directions in the following image. After
passing the shaft through the shutters, adjust the springs into the indentations on
(3) Remove the shutters. the shutters.
#1 Remove: K rings (x2)
#1 Shutter (small) Shutter (large) #1
1200_300072.ai
1200_300104.ai
018-230-06E
MC-26
(2) Reinstall the shutter assembly. 3.9 Roller
#1 Tighten: PS3x8 (x3)
Top cover #1 n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the cover of the DS.
{MC:3.1_DS Cover}
(2) Remove the springs.
1200_300071E.ai #1 Remove: Springs (x2)
u NOTE u
#1
When fixing shutters by the bracket, refer to the following image at first, then
reinstall the bracket to mesh with the D-cut face on the left side.
1200_300106.ai
(3) Remove the shaft assembly.

#2 Remove: Bearings (small) (x2)
#3 Remove: E rings (x2)
Top cover 1200_300105.ai
#4 Remove: Bearings (large) (x2)
#5 Remove: Shaft assembly
#3 #4 #5
(3) Reinstall the cover of the DS.
{MC:3.1_DS Cover}
#1
#2
1200_300107.ai
018-230-06E
MC-27
(4) Remove the rollers. 3.10 Large Tray
#1 Remove: E rings (x6)
#2 Remove: Rollers (side) (x2) n Removal Procedures
#3 Remove: Roller (center) (x1)
#1 #1 #1 (1) Remove the cover of the DS.
{MC:3.1_DS Cover}
(2) Remove the large tray assembly.
#2 #3 #2
1200_300108.ai
u NOTE u
To remove the roller (center), remove either of the rollers (side).
■ Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u #1
When reinstalling the rollers (side), be sure to make the small side toward the center by
referring the image below.
Center 1200_300073.ai
(3) Remove the large tray.

1200_300109.ai
#2 Remove: Shaft
#3 Remove: Spring
#2 #1
#3
1200_300074.ai
018-230-06E
MC-28
n Reinstallation Procedures 3.11 Small Tray
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
- Be sure the downside of the tray is outside the left-side bracket to reinstall the tray. (1) Remove the DSM65A board.
(2) Remove the small tray assembly.
#1
Left-side bracket
1200_300100.ai
- Before tightening the screws, press the tray assembly against the front side. Then
tighten the screws.
1200_300075.ai
(3) Remove the small tray.

#1 Remove: Shoulder 3x6 (x1)
#2 Remove: TP3x6 (blue) (x2)
#1
1200_300111.ai
#2 1200_300076.ai
018-230-06E
MC-29
3.12 Bottom Tray n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures u NOTE u
(1) Perform the procedures (1) to (3) in "3.5 DSM65A Board" to remove When reinstalling the bottom cover, check the two insertions on the left side and then
the DSM65A board assembly. reinstall it.
(2) Remove the bottom cover.
Insertions
#1 1200_300077.ai
(3) Remove the bottom trays.

1200_300102.ai
1200_300101.ai
018-230-06E
MC-30
4. PB(Power Box) 4.1 TOP Cover
WARNINGS n Removal Procedures
Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker and disconnect the power cable (1) Remove the TOP cover while pulling it on the back side.
from the outlet before servicing the PB, to avoid electric shock hazards.
#1 Remove: Screws (x6)
TOP Cover
CAUTIONS
electronic components on the board. #1
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse. 1200_300180E.ai
- The power supply unit is built in the PB. Exercise care not to drop a screw or
the like into the power supply unit when servicing the PB.
If the power is turned ON with the screw or the like dropping in the power
supply unit, short-circuiting will result.
018-230-06E
MC-31
n Reinstallation Procedures 4.2 Front Cover
(1) Reinstall the top cover.
#1 Stick in: Bracket (2 places)
#2 Fix: Screws (x6) (1) Remove the top cover.
#1 {MC:4.1_TOP Cover}
(2) Remove the front cover.
#2 Remove: Hooks (x2)
#2 Front cover #1
#2
1200_300181.ai
NOTE
When you attach the cover, hold the bracket of the PB with the spring on the back
side of the TOP cover.
1200_300183E.ai
1200_300182.ai
018-230-06E
MC-32
4.3 MPS65A Board n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the top cover.
n Board Location
{MC:4.1_TOP Cover}
(2) Remove the MPS65A board
#1 Remove: Cable connectors (MPS1, 3, 4)
#2 MPS1 MPS4
MPS65A board
#1
MPS3
1200_300184E.ai
1200_300185.ai
NOTE
When installing the SE cable and the cable between the power unit and MPS65A
board, coil the SE cable over the power unit to the power unit - MPS65A board cable.
018-230-06E
MC-33
4.3.1 Fuses 4.4 MSU65A Board (Power Supply Unit)
n Fuse Locations n Board Location
MSU65A board
F1
1200_300186.ai
1200_300187E.ai
n Fuse Information
Board Rated voltage Rated amperage n Removal Procedures
Type Model
indications (V) (A)
LM20(D)CDL
(1) Remove the top cover.
F1 Micro fuse 48 2 Daito Communication {MC:4.1_TOP Cover}
Apparatus Co. Ltd.

Change the target fuse.
018-230-06E
MC-34
(2) Remove the DSM65A board (power supply unit). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove: Cable connectors (CN1, 2) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
NOTE
#2
- When installing the SE cable and the cable between power unit and MPS65A board,
dispose the SE cable over the power unit to the power unit - MPS65A board cable.
- Pass the SE cable and the power unit - MPS65A board cable through two clamps,
respectively.
CN2 #1
CN1
1200_300209.ai
1200_300188.ai
NOTE
When you replace the CN2 cable, attach the cable tie outside the clamp.
1200_300193.ai
018-230-06E
MC-35
4.5 LED (3) Disconnect the LED cable connector on the MPS board.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (MPS4)
n LED Locations #1 MPS4
LED
1200_300189.ai
1200_300190.ai
(1) Remove the rear cover.
{MC:4.1_TOP Cover}
(2) Remove the front cover.
{MC:4.2_Front Cover}
018-230-06E
MC-36
(4) Remove the LED. 4.6 SE Cable
#1 Remove: TP3x6
#2 Remove: Bracket n Removal Procedures
#3 Remove: LED
#1 #2 #3 (1) Remove the top cover.
{MC:4.1_TOP Cover}
(2) Remove the SE Cable.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (MPS3)
#2 Remove: N3x6, SW3, W3
#3 Unclamp: Clamps
#4 Unclamp: Clamps (x2)
1200_300191.ai
#5 Remove: SE cable
NOTE #4
Push the LED out from within the PB and then remove the LED along the cutout
on the left side.
#3 #2 #1 #5 1200_300194.ai
1200_300192.ai
018-230-06E
MC-37
NOTE
- When installing the SE cable and the cable between the power unit and MPS65A
board, coil the SE cable over the power unit to the power unit - MPS65A board
cable.
- Pass the SE cable and the power unit - MPS65A board cable through two clamps,
respectively.
1200_300209.ai
018-230-06E
MC-38
5. SE (Flat Panel Sensor) Bracket cable GTD65A board SE
WARNING
Never service the SE with the power supplied under any conditions.
Before servicing the SE, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine or
ABB65A board
disconnect the SE cable from the MP and the connection cable to shut the or
power to the SE. ABA65A board
Otherwise, electrification, burn injury or short-circuiting might occur, resulting
in death or serious damage.
CAUTIONS
ASIC
- Reserve a space which anyone other than service personnel cannot easily
access before servicing the SE in terms of assuring safety and performance.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. 1200_300053E.ai
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage GTC66A board or GTD66A board
Bracket cable
- Never remove the following among the boards mounted on the SE.
Otherwise, the SE might break down and causing abnormal images.
SE
- two ABB65A boards (for 1201SE/1211SE)
- two ABA65A boards (for 1202SE/1212SE)
- one ABD65A board (for 1213SE)
ABC65A board
- one ABC65A board (for 1214SE) or
- two GTD65A boards (for 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE) ABD65A board
- one GTD66A board (for 1213SE)
- one GTC66A board (for 1214SE)
As the above boards cannot be removed, the flat cable connected with the
connector of the above boards cannot be disconnected, either. ASIC
- Do not scratch the ASIC mounted on the SE. Otherwise, abnormal images 1200_300111E.ai
might result.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Remove the SE cover where there is no dirt or dust around the machine.
- Follow the same procedures as those for installation when the SE is to be replaced
with a new one.
- If dropping or shock has recorded in the log file in the G sensor during servicing,
review the countermeasure and take necessary actions.
The SE might have been damaged due to some impact applied during routine
processing or servicing.
{Product Specifications:9._G Sensor on SE and Action in case of Failure}
018-230-06E
MC-39
5.1 1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE l Rear cover side
REC65A board LEA65A board BCN65A board LED65A board
n Board Locations
Detachable boards incorporated in the SE are shown below.
l Top cover side LEC65A board

Antenna board RMV65A board
WLAN module
SE
SE
rear cover
GLG65A board
LED65A board LEB65A board

1200_300034.ai
SPR65A board POW65A board Antenna board

1200_300033.ai
018-230-06E
MC-40
5.1.1 SE Rear Cover (1) Remove the screws from all the sides of the SE.
u NOTE u
- Peel off the tapes from the sides of the SE with tweezers or a cutter.
u INSTRUCTIONS u - Since the tapes on the sides of the SE can not be used again, new tapes
Place the exposure plane downward when removing the SE rear cover. Check to should be prepared in advance.
make sure that the exposure plane is free from anything which might scratch the
plane before removing the SE rear cover, and place a shock absorbing member for #1 Peel off: Tapes (x4)
protecting the exposure plane. #2 Remove: Screws (for 1201SE or 1211SE: x46, for 1202SE or 1212SE: x52)
SE
SE
#1
Shock absorber
#2 1200_300054.ai
1200_300070.ai
REFERENCE
Helisert is embedded in the screw holes on the SE side.
018-230-06E
MC-41
(2) Remove the screws from the SE rear cover. (3) Disconnect the SE connectors.
u NOTE u #1 Remove: Screws (x2)
#2 Draw out: SE connector
- Peel off the tapes from the SE rear cover with tweezers or a cutter.
- Since the tapes on the SE rear cover can not be used again, new tapes should
be prepared in advance.
#1 Peel off: Tapes (x4)

#1 #2
#1 #2
SE
#3
SE
1200_300055.ai
1200_300056.ai
018-230-06E
MC-42
(4) Press down the SE connector side of SE rear cover with one hand, (5) Disconnect the cable connector and remove the SE rear cover.
and lift the opposing side to the SE connector up to 45 degrees with
the other hand. u NOTE u
It requires careful handling to have no impact on the SE rear cover which has
u NOTE u been removed.
Since there are cables connecting the front side and the rear side of the SE, take
care not to break the cables while lifting the SE rear cover. #1 Disconnect: Cable connector (REC65A board)
#2 Draw out: Cables (For SE connector: x3)
#1 Press down: SE connector side
#2 Lift: Opposing side of the SE connector
#1 #1 #2
#2
1200_300083.ai
1200_300084.ai
018-230-06E
MC-43
n Reinstallation Procedures (3) Hold the SE rear cover with both hands, pass through the jig pins in
two screw holes on the SE rear cover, and position the SE rear cover.
(1) Fix the jig pins for positioning to the screw holes on the SE rear cover.
u NOTE u
#1 Fix: Jig pins (x2)
Since there are cables connecting the front side and the rear side of the SE, take
#1
care not to break the cables while positioning the SE rear cover.
#1 Position: Screw holes (x2)

#1
1200_300085.ai
(2) Connect the cable connector to the SE rear cover then push the SE
connector cable into the SE connector mounting port.
#1 Connect: Cable connector (REC65A board) 1200_300086.ai
#2 Push: Cables (For SE connector: x3)
#1 #2
1200_300084.ai
018-230-06E
MC-44
(4) Fix the screws on the SE rear cover. (6) Connect the SE connectors.
u NOTE u #1 Connect: Cable connectors (x3)
#2 Fix: Screws (x2)
- Pull out the connector cables beforehand to the outside before fixing the
screws on the SE rear cover. #1
- Do not perform Step 5 and later before attaching 4 screws on the SE rear side.
Otherwise, the connector cable may be caught between the rear cover and the
SE body, which leads to breakage of the SE.
#1 Fix: Screws (x2)

#2 Remove: Jig pins (x2)
#3 Fix: Screws (x2)
SE
#2#3
#2
1200_300163.ai
#1 1200_300087.ai
(5) To restrict the connector cable wiring, move the cables in the arrow
direction.
SE
1200_700110.ai
018-230-06E
MC-45
(7) Temporarily fix the center screws on the all sides of the SE. (9) Fully tighten the screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Center screws #1 Fix: Screws (x13)
#4 #2 Fix: Screws (x13)
#3 Fix: Screws (for 1201SE or 1211SE: x10, for 1202SE or 1212SE: x13)
#4
#1
#2
#1
#2
#3 1200_300203.ai
(8) Temporarily fix the both ends screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Both ends screws (x2)
#4 #4 #3 1200_300205.ai
#1 Fully tightening sequence for #1
#2
Fully tightening sequence for #2

#1
#2
#3 #3
1200_300204.ai
1200_300205.ai
018-230-06E
MC-46
(10) Attach the tapes on the all sides of the SE. (12) Using the new label cover supplied, attach the SE serial number label
#1 Attach: Tapes (x4) removed from the old rear cover to the new rear cover.
#1 Reinstall: SE serial number label
REFERENCE
#2 Attach: Supplied label cover
- The upper and lower sides of the tapes attached to the sides of the SE are decided.
The side with round corner is attached to the exposure side. #2
Exposure side
#1
Rear side 1200_300066E.ai
- The SE side tape is closer to the exposure side of the vertical position, after aligning
the center to the horizontal position, then attach the tape to the sides of the SE from
the center to the left and right sides.
1200_300112.ai
(13) Check that the same information as before replacement is printed on

the new rear cover.
Check the following information:
Product name, serial number, pharmaceutical certification number, DR-ID 1200 type,
FLAT PANEL SENSOR name (DR-ID 12**SE), labels (CE marking etc.)
Center Exposure side 1200_300065E.ai
(11) Remove the SE serial number label from old rear cover.
#1 Remove: Old label cover
#2 Remove: SE serial number label
#2 #1
Remove the SE Peel off the old label
serial number label. cover with tweezers.
1200_300094.ai
018-230-06E
MC-47
5.1.2 SE Exposure Side Cover n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures (1) Temporarily fix the center screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Center screws
(1) Remove the screws from all the sides of the SE and remove the SE #4
exposure side cover.
u NOTE u
- Since the tapes on the sides of the SE can not be used again, new tapes
should be prepared in advance.
#1
#2 Remove: Screws (for 1201SE or 1211SE: x46, for 1202SE or 1212SE: x52) #2
SE
#3 1200_300203.ai
#2 #1
1200_300064.ai
018-230-06E
MC-48
(2) Temporarily fix the both ends screws on the all sides of the SE. (3) Fully tighten the screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Both ends screws (x2) #1 Fix: Screws (x13)
#4 #4 #2 Fix: Screws (x13)
#1 #3 Fix: Screws (for 1201SE or 1211SE: x10, for 1202SE or 1212SE: x13)
#2
#4
#1
#1 #2
#2
#3 #3
1200_300204.ai
#3 1200_300205.ai
1200_300205.ai
018-230-06E
MC-49
(4) Attach the tapes on the all sides of the SE.
#1 Attach: Tapes (x4)
REFERENCE
The side with round corner is attached to the exposure side.
Exposure side
018-230-06E
MC-50
5.1.3 WLAN Module n Reinstallation Procedures
CAUTION u NOTE u
The service engineer must put the antistatic globes on and ground their body Before installing the wireless module, attach the tape described in "Reinstallation
to the earth to perform the procedures below. Otherwise, static electricity may Procedures" of "5.1.7 RMV65A board" onto the SD card.
cause electric damages to the circuit, which results in breakdown of the SE. {MC:5.1.7_RMV65A Board}
(1) Remove the SE rear cover.
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the WLAN module.
#1 Remove: T3x6 (x2)
WLAN module
SE
#1
1200_300020.ai
(3) Disconnect the connectors (antennas).

#1 Disconnect: Connectors (antennas) (x2)
#1
WLAN module
1200_300021.ai
018-230-06E
MC-51
5.1.4 POW65A Board n Fuse Locations
F2
(2) Remove the POW65A board.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (POW1-9)
SE
F1 F6 F5 F7 F4 F3
1200_300004.ai
n Fuse Information
Type Model
indications (V) (A)
KMS32
POW4 POW65A board F1 76 3.15 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
#1
KMC03
POW2 F2 24 0.3 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC20
F3 24 2.0 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
POW3
KMC16
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC04
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC025
#2 POW1 POW8 POW9 POW7 F6 24 0.25 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
1200_300022.ai
KMC05
n Reinstallation Procedures F7 24 0.5 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
Change the board.
018-230-06E
MC-52
5.1.5 Antenna Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
(1) Remove the SE rear cover. - Wipe off the double-sided tape attached to the SE cleanly before reinstalling the
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} antenna board.
(2) Remove the WLAN module. - Secure the antenna with the attached paper tape.
{MC:5.1.3_WLAN Module}
(3) Remove the antenna board.
u NOTE u
The antenna board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
flathead screwdriver and others to remove the antenna board together with the
double-sided tape.
#1 Remove: Antenna board

#2 Remove: Wiring
SE
#1 #2
Antenna board Wiring
1200_300023.ai
018-230-07E
MC-53
5.1.6 SPR65A Board 5.1.7 RMV65A Board

(1) Remove the SE rear cover. (1) Remove the SE rear cover.
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} {MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the SPR65A board. (2) Perform the procedures (1) and (2) in "n Removal Procedures" of
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (SPR1, 3-6) "4.1.3 WLAN module".
#2 Remove: M2.5x3 (x4) {MC:5.1.3_WLAN Module}
(3) Remove the RMV65A board.
#1 Peel off: Transparent tape (POW9-GTD1)
#2 Disconnect: Cable connectors (RMV1-4, 8, 11, 12, 16, 19-23)
SE #3 Remove: M2.5x3 (x6)
#3 RMV21
RMV4 RMV11 RMV12 RMV25 RMV24 RMV23 RMV22
SPR4 SPR3
RMV16 RMV8 RMV1 RMV2 RMV3 RMV19 RMV20

SPR5 #2 RMV65A board
#1
SPR1
SPR6
#2 SE
SPR65A board
1200_300024.ai #1
1200_300025E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-54
u NOTE u n Reinstallation Procedures
- Peel off the transparent tape and remove the RMV65A board because there is
no slack in the cable (POW9-GTD1) which pass over the RMV65A board.
(1) Reinstall the SD card on the RMV65A board.
- Be careful when removing the RMV2, RMV3 and RMV11 cable connectors #1 Insert: SD card
since the cable connectors are hidden under the harness. #2 Paste: Tape
- Remove the RMV65A board while drawing it out to the upper side of the SE. PET sheet
Take care not to break the cables which pass over the RMV65A board.
#1 RMV65A board
#2 Tape alignment 1200_300208.ai

1200_300059.ai
u NOTE u
u NOTE u - Stick the tape along the edge of the SD card case.
- Stick the tape so as not to overlap with the PET sheet.
Position and reinstall the RMV65A board by referring to the following image.
(2) Reinstall the RMV65A board.

u NOTE u
Reattach the transparent tape that is peeled off during the removal procedures in
its original position.
1200_300067.ai
(3) Reinstall the WLAN module.
(4) Remove the SD card from the RMV65A board. (4) Reinstall the SE rear cover.
#1 Remove: SD card {MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover}
#1 RMV65A board 1200_300081E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-55
(5) Input the SE serial ID. IV. Input the serial ID mentioned on the machine-specific CD, and then
REFERENCE
click [Set].
Input the serial ID only after the RMV65A board is replaced. u NOTE u
The first letter of the serial ID must be entered as a capital letter.
I. Connect only one SE.
II. Start up the MUTL. #1 Input: Serial ID
III. Click [BOARD STATE CHECK] and click [SE Write Serial ID>>]. #2 Click: [SET]
#1 Click: [BOARD STATE CHECK]
#2 Click: [SE Write Serial ID]
#1 #1
#2
#2
1200_300069.ai
(6) Set the IP address of the SE.

1200_300068.ai
{IN2:14.1.11_Setting the IP Address of the SE}
(7) Update SE application software version.
{IN2:14.1.10_Updating SE Application Software Version}
(8) Set the SE LED color.
{IN2:14.1.12_Setting the SE LED Color}
(9) Start up the MUTL and perform the memory exposure setting.
{MU2: [2.7] SE Memory Exposure Setting>>}
(10) Set the COUNTRY CODE in “WIRELESS SETTING” window of EDIT
CONFIGURATION.
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
(11) Restore the calibration data.
{MU2:1.14_RESTORE}
018-230-06E
MC-56
(12) Perform the forced transfer of the SE correct data and check the SE n Fuse Information
correct data save status.
{IN2: 14.1.14_Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data} Type Model
indications (V) (A)
u NOTE u KMC02
If the forced transfer of the SE correct data is not performed, it is not possible Apparatus Co. Ltd.
to transit to the sleep mode / extra sleep mode, and do exposing in the memory KMC13
exposure mode. F2 24 1.25 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
(13) Set the SE Country Code. KMC08
{IN2: 14.1.8_Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting the SE Apparatus Co. Ltd.
Country Code)} KMC16
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
n Fuse Locations
KMC20
F2 F11 F3 F4 F6 24 2.0 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC02
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC02
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC02
F7 F6 F9 24 0.2 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
F9 F1 F10 F8
KMC02
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC20
Apparatus Co. Ltd.

1200_300003.ai
Change the board.
018-230-06E
MC-57
5.1.8 GLG65A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u
(1) Remove the SE rear cover. In case of replacement by a new board, perform the following procedures after the
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} replacement.
(2) Remove the GLG65A board.
(1) Check the software version of the GLG board and update to a new
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (GLG1, 2)
version in case of an old version.
Version confirmation: {MU2: [3.3]_SE Version>>}
Update: {MU2: [4.2] Install SE Software >>}
(2) Perform sensor calibration.
{MU2: [5.2] SE Board State >>_l GLG Calibration}
SE
n Fuse Locations
#1
GLG1
F1 F2
1200_300005.ai
n Fuse Information
Type Model
indications (V) (A)
KMC10
#2 Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC04
GLG2 GLG65A board F2 24 0.4 Daito Communication
1200_300026.ai
Apparatus Co. Ltd.

Change the board.
018-230-06E
MC-58
5.1.9 SD Card (4) Remove the SD card while lifting the RMV65A board.
u NOTE u
wRemove the SD card as not to touch the GTD board.
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} #1 Remove: SD card

(3) Remove the screws from the RMV65A board.
#1
#1 RMV65A board
SD card
SE SE
1200_300035E.ai
1200_300058.ai
018-230-06E
MC-59
5.1.10 BCN65A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures (1) Connect the connectors to the BCN65A board.
#1 Connect: Cable connectors (BCN2, 3)
(1) Remove the SE rear cover. BCN65A board
(2) Remove the BCN65A board.
#2 Disconnect: Cable connectors (BCN2, 3)
#1
SE
1200_300096E.ai
rear cover
#1 BCN65A board
#2
1200_300027.ai
018-230-06E
MC-60
(2) Reinstall the BCN65A board to the black unit. (3) Reinstall the BCN65A board.
#1 Remove: Release paper #1 Fix: M2.6x3 (x2)
#2 Fix: BCN65A board u NOTE u
When reinstalling the BCN65A board, be sure not to let the cables be outside or
have them caught by the harness.
Good
#1
BCN65A board
No Good
#2
1200_300061.ai
(4) Reinstall the SE rear cover.

1200_300095E.ai
u NOTE u
Press the BCN65A board in the arrow's direction and reinstall it.
1200_300097.ai
018-230-06E
MC-61
5.1.11 LEA65A Board 5.1.12 LEB65A Board

(2) Disconnect the cable connector of the REC65A board and remove the (2) Remove the LEB65A board.
LEA65A board. #1 Peel off: Tape
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (REC4) #2 Remove: M2.5x3
#2 Remove: M2.5x3 (x3) #3 Disconnect: Cable connector (LEB1)
SE
rear cover SE
rear cover
#2
#1 #1
#2
REC4
1200_300032.ai
#3
u NOTE u
Press the LEA65A board against the side of cover and reinstall it.
1200_300030E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-62
n Reinstallation Procedures 5.1.13 LEC65A Board
u NOTE u
- Wipe off the tape attached to the SE cleanly before reinstalling the LEB65A board. (1) Remove the SE rear cover.
- Press the LEB65A board against the side of cover and reinstall it. {MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover}
(2) Remove the LEC65A board.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (LEC1)
SE
rear cover
#2 #1
LEC1
1200_300029E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-63
5.1.14 LED65A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
(1) Remove the SE rear cover. When reinstalling the LED65A board, do not forget to take the sheet away between
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} the LED65A board and the cover.
(2) Remove the LED65A board.
u INSTRUCTION u
#2 Remove: Cover After reinstalling the LED65A board, make sure that the button can be pressed.
SE
rear cover
#1
#2
#3
1200_300031E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-64
5.1.15 REC65A Board u NOTE u
The REC65A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
n Removal Procedures flathead screwdriver and others to remove the REC65A board together with the
double-sided tape.
(2) Remove the REC65A board.
REC65A board REC4
#2 1200_300062.ai
REC9
REC6
REC8 Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
- Wipe off the double-sided tape attached to the SE cleanly before reinstalling the
REC65A board.
RECx RECx REC5 REC1 REC3
- New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- Position and reinstall the REC65A board by referring to the following image.
REC65A board SE rear cover
SE
rear cover
1200_300028E.ai
1200_300063.ai
018-230-06E
MC-65
5.1.16 SE Connector
(1) Disconnect the SE connectors.
#2 Draw out: SE connector
#1 #2
#3
SE
1200_300056.ai
018-230-06E
MC-66
5.2 1213SE / 1214SE l Rear cover side
LEZ66A board
n Board Locations
Detachable boards incorporated in the SE are shown below.
l Top cover side

NCA66A board
Antenna board LED66A board

LEY66A board
WLAN module
LEA66A board
RMV66A board RLY66A board
BCN65A board
SE connector
REC66A board
LED66A board LEX66A board

SPR66A board 1200_300135E.ai
Antenna board SE 1200_300134E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-67
5.2.1 SE Rear Cover (1) Remove the screws from all the sides of the SE.
u NOTE u
u INSTRUCTIONS u - Since the tapes on the sides of the SE can not be used again, new tapes
Place the exposure plane downward when removing the SE rear cover. Check to should be prepared in advance.
make sure that the exposure plane is free from anything which might scratch the
plane before removing the SE rear cover, and place a shock absorbing member for #1 Peel off: Tapes (x4)
protecting the exposure plane. #2 Remove: Screws (for 1213SE: x32, for 1214SE: x34)
SE
SE
#1
Shock absorber
#2 1200_300054.ai
1200_300070.ai
REFERENCE
Helisert is embedded in the screw holes on the SE side.
018-230-06E
MC-68
(2) Remove the screws from the SE rear cover. (3) Press down the SE connector side of SE rear cover with one hand,
and lift the opposing side to the SE connector up with the other hand.
u NOTE u
- Peel off the tapes from the SE rear cover with tweezers or a cutter. u NOTE u
- Since the tapes on the SE rear cover can not be used again, new tapes should Since there are cables connecting the front side and the rear side of the SE, take
be prepared in advance. care not to break the cables while lifting the SE rear cover.
#1 Peel off: Tapes (x2) #1 Press down: SE connector side

#2 Remove: Plastic sheets (x2) #2 Lift: Opposing side of the SE connector
#3 Remove: Screws (x4) #1
#3
#2#3 #1
#3
#2
SE
1200_300083.ai
(4) Disconnect the cable connector and remove the SE rear cover.
u NOTE u
#2#3 1200_3000113.ai
It requires careful handling to have no impact on the SE rear cover which has
been removed.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (RLY66A board)

#1
1200_300114.ai
018-230-06E
MC-69
n Reinstallation Procedures (2) Hold the SE rear cover with both hands, pass through the jig pins in
two screw holes on the SE rear cover, and position the SE rear cover.
(1) Fix the jig pins for positioning to the screw holes on the SE rear cover
and connect the cable connector to the SE rear cover. u NOTE u
#1 Fix: Jig pins (x2) Since there are cables connecting the front side and the rear side of the SE, take
#2 Connect: Cable connector (RLY66A board) care not to break the cables while positioning the SE rear cover.
#1 Position: Screw holes (x2)

#1
#2
1200_300116.ai
#1
1200_300115.ai
018-230-06E
MC-70
(3) Fix the screws on the SE rear cover. (4) Temporarily fix the center screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 Fix: Screws (x2) #1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Center screws
#2 Remove: Jig pins (x2) #3
#3 Fix: Screws (x2)
#4 Fix: Plastic sheets (x2)
#2#3
#2
#1#4
#1
#1
#4 1200_300210.ai
(5) Temporarily fix the both ends screws on the all sides of the SE.
#3 #3
#2
#2#3#4 1200_300117.ai
#1
#2
#1
#4 #4
1200_300211.ai
018-230-06E
MC-71
(6) Fully tighten the screws on the all sides of the SE. (7) Attach the tapes on the all sides of the SE.
#1 Fix: Screws (x9) #1 Attach: Tapes (x4)
#2 Fix: Screws (x9)
REFERENCE
#3 Fix: Screws (for 1213SE: x7, for 1214SE: x8)
#4 Fix: Screws (for 1213SE: x7, for 1214SE: x8) - The upper and lower sides of the tapes attached to the sides of the SE are decided.
#3
Exposure side
#2
#1
#4 1200_300213.ai
Fully tightening sequence for #1#2
Fully tightening sequence for #3#4 (1213SE)

(8) Remove the SE serial number label from old rear cover.
#1 Remove: Old label cover
Fully tightening sequence for #3#4 (1214SE) #2 Remove: SE serial number label
1200_300212.ai
#2 #1
Remove the SE Peel off the old label
serial number label. cover with tweezers.
1200_300094.ai
018-230-06E
MC-72
(9) Using the new label cover supplied, attach the SE serial number label 5.2.2 SE Exposure Side Cover
removed from the old rear cover to the new rear cover.
#1 Reinstall: SE serial number label n Removal Procedures
#2 Attach: Supplied label cover
(1) Remove the screws from all the sides of the SE and remove the SE
#2 exposure side cover.
u NOTE u
#1 - Peel off the tapes from the sides of the SE with tweezers or a cutter.
- Since the tapes on the sides of the SE can not be used again, new tapes
should be prepared in advance.

#2 Remove: Screws (for 1213SE: x32, for 1214SE: x34)
1200_300112.ai
(10) Check that the same information as before replacement is printed on

the new rear cover. SE
Check the following information:
Product name, serial number, pharmaceutical certification number, DR-ID 1200 type,
FLAT PANEL SENSOR name (DR-ID 12**SE), labels (CE marking etc.)
#2 #1
1200_300064.ai
018-230-06E
MC-73
n Reinstallation Procedures (3) Fully tighten the screws on the all sides of the SE.
#1 Fix: Screws (x9)
(1) Temporarily fix the center screws on the all sides of the SE. #2 Fix: Screws (x9)
#1 to #4 Temporarily fixed: Center screws #3 Fix: Screws (for 1213SE: x7, for 1214SE: x8)
#3 #4 Fix: Screws (for 1213SE: x7, for 1214SE: x8)
#3
#2
#1 #2
#1
#4 1200_300210.ai
(2) Temporarily fix the both ends screws on the all sides of the SE. #4 1200_300213.ai

#3 #3 Fully tightening sequence for #1#2
#2
#1
#2
1200_300212.ai
#1
#4 #4
1200_300211.ai
018-230-06E
MC-74
(4) Attach the tapes on the all sides of the SE. 5.2.3 WLAN Module
#1 Attach: Tapes (x4)
REFERENCE CAUTION
The service engineer must put the antistatic globes on and ground their body
to the earth to perform the procedures below. Otherwise, static electricity may
Exposure side
cause electric damages to the circuit, which results in breakdown of the SE.
- The SE side tape is closer to the exposure side of the vertical position, after aligning (2) Remove the WLAN module.
the center to the left and right sides. #1 Remove: M2.6x3 (x2)
#2 Disconnect: Board-to-module connector (RMV8)
#1
#2
WLAN module
1200_300118E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-75
(3) Disconnect the connectors (antennas). 5.2.4 RMV66A Board
#1 Disconnect: Connectors (antennas) (x2)
WLAN module n Removal Procedures
CAUTION
#1 The service engineer must put the antistatic globes on and ground their body
1200_300119E.ai
(3) Remove the connector to the GTC66A board (for 1213SE) or CNA66A
board (for 1214SE).
l 1213SE
#2 Disconnect: Cable connector
#1
#2
1200_3000120.ai
018-230-06E
MC-76
l 1214SE (5) Remove the MicroSD card from the RMV66A board.
#1 Remove: M2.6x3 (x2) #1 Remove: MicroSD card
#1
Micro
SD card
#2 1200_700112E.ai
1200_3000122.ai
(4) Remove the RMV66A board.

RMV11 RMV10 RMV9 #2
RMV4
#1
RMV1
1200_300123.ai
018-230-06E
MC-77
n Reinstallation Procedures IV. Input the serial ID mentioned on the machine-specific CD, and then
click [Set].
(1) Reinstall the MicroSD card on the RMV66A board.
u NOTE u
(2) Reinstall the RMV66A board.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #1 Input: Serial ID
u NOTE u #2 Click: [SET]
Reattach the transparent tape that is peeled off during the removal procedures in
its original position.
#1
(3) Reinstall the WLAN module.
(5) Input the SE serial ID.
REFERENCE
Input the serial ID only after the RMV66A board is replaced. #2
I. Connect only one SE. 1200_300069.ai
II. Start up the MUTL. (6) Set the IP address of the SE.
III. Click [BOARD STATE CHECK] and click [SE Write Serial ID>>].
#2 Click: [SE Write Serial ID] (7) Update SE application software version.
#1
(8) Set the SE LED color.
(9) Start up the MUTL and perform the memory exposure setting.
#2 {MU2: [2.7] SE Memory Exposure Setting>>}
CONFIGURATION.
(11) Restore the calibration data.
{MU2:1.14_RESTORE}
1200_300068.ai
018-230-06E
MC-78
(12) Perform the forced transfer of the SE correct data and check the SE n Fuse Information
correct data save status.
{IN2: 14.1.14_Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data} Type Model
indications (V) (A)
u NOTE u KMC03
If the forced transfer of the SE correct data is not performed, it is not possible Apparatus Co. Ltd.
to transit to the sleep mode / extra sleep mode, and do exposing in the memory KMC03
exposure mode. F2 24 0.3 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
(13) Set the SE Country Code. KMC20
{IN2: 14.1.8_Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting the SE Apparatus Co. Ltd.
Country Code)} KMC05
n Fuse Locations Apparatus Co. Ltd.
F11 F13 F12 F1 F2 KMC08
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC10
F14 Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC03
F7 F11 24 0.3 Daito Communication
F15 Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC20
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
F16 KMC10
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
DXL03020291.ai
KMC04
F10 F6 F14 24 0.4 Daito Communication
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC025
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC03
Apparatus Co. Ltd.
KMC08
Apparatus Co. Ltd.

Change the board.
F8
DXL03020292.ai
018-230-06E
MC-79
5.2.5 MicroSD Card 5.2.6 Antenna Board

(2) Remove the MicroSD card. (2) Remove the WLAN module.
#1 Remove: MicroSD card {MC:5.2.3_WLAN Module}
CAUTION
The service engineer must put the antistatic globes on and ground their body
#1
1200_300121.ai
018-230-06E
MC-80
(3) In case of the antenna board through a antenna wire to the bottom of l 1214SE
the GTC board (for 1213SE) or GTD board (for 1214SE), remove the
GTC board or GTD board.
CAUTION #2
Do not lift up the GTC board and GTD board over 90 degrees.
Otherwise, the connector may get damaged, which result in breakdown of the
SE.
l 1213SE
#2
#1
1200_300126.ai
#1
1200_300125.ai
018-230-06E
MC-81
(4) Remove the antenna board. 5.2.7 SPR66A Board
u NOTE u
The antenna board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
flathead screwdriver and others to remove the antenna board together with the (1) Remove the SE rear cover.
double-sided tape.
#1 Remove: Antenna board (2) Remove the SPR66A board.
#2 Remove: Wiring #1 Disconnect: Cable connector (SPR1)
SE
SE
#1
SPR1
#1 #2
Antenna board Wiring
1200_300023.ai
#2
u NOTE u 1200_300127.ai
antenna board. n Reinstallation Procedures
- Secure the antenna with the attached paper tape. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
018-230-07E
MC-82
5.2.8 BCN65A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures (1) Connect the connectors to the BCN65A board.
#1 Connect: Cable connectors (BCN2, 3)
(1) Remove the SE rear cover. BCN65A board
(2) Remove the BCN65A board.
#2 Disconnect: Cable connectors (BCN2, 3)
#1
SE
1200_300096E.ai
rear cover
#1 BCN65A board
#2
1200_300027.ai
018-230-06E
MC-83
(2) Reinstall the BCN65A board to the black unit. (3) Reinstall the BCN65A board.
#1 Remove: Release paper #1 Fix: M2.6x3 (x2)
#2 Fix: BCN65A board u NOTE u
When reinstalling the BCN65A board, be sure not to let the cables be outside or
have them caught by the harness.
Good
#1
BCN65A board
No Good
#2
1200_300061.ai

1200_300095E.ai
u NOTE u
Press the BCN65A board in the arrow's direction and reinstall it.
1200_300097.ai
018-230-06E
MC-84
5.2.9 LEA66A Board 5.2.10 LED66A Board

(2) Disconnect the cable connector of the RLY66A board and remove the (2) Remove the LED66A board.
LEA66A board. #1 Remove: M2x3 (x2)
u NOTE u #2 Remove: Cover
The LEA66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the SE
flathead screwdriver and others to remove the antenna board together with the rear cover
double-sided tape.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (RLY4)

#1
#2
#1
RLY4
#3
SE
rear cover
#2
1200_300136E.ai
u NOTE u
1200_300129E.ai
When reinstalling the LED66A board, do not forget to take the sheet away between
n Reinstallation Procedures the LED66A board and the cover.

u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u
After reinstalling the LED66A board, make sure that the button can be pressed.
LEA66A board.
- New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
018-230-06E
MC-85
5.2.11 LEX66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
{MC:5.2.1_SE Rear Cover} LEX66A board.
(2) Remove the LEX66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- When attaching the LEX66A board, align it with the notch on the SE rear cover then
u NOTE u attach it.
The LEX66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
double-sided tape.
1200_3000138.ai
#1 Peel off: Shading tape
#2 Remove: Plate - Align the shading tape with the unevenness around where the board was attached
then stick it on there.
#3 Disconnect: Cable connector (LEX1)
SE
rear cover
#3 #2
#1 1200_300137E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-86
5.2.12 LEY66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
LEY66A board.
(2) Remove the LEY66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- Attach the LEY66A board with reference to the LED light source.
u NOTE u
The LEY66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
double-sided tape.
#1 Peel off: Tape

#2 Disconnect: Cable connector (LEY1)
SE 1200_3000140.ai
rear cover
- Align the shading tape with the unevenness around where the board was attached
then stick it on there.
#2
#1
1200_300139E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-87
5.2.13 LEZ66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
LEZ66A board.
(2) Remove the LEZ66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- Attach the LEZ66A board with reference to the LED light source.
u NOTE u
The LEZ66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
double-sided tape.
#1 Peel off: Sound isolation tape 1200_3000142.ai
#2 Peel off: Cable fixing tape - Align the sound isolation tape with the unevenness around where the board was
#3 Disconnect: Cable connector (LEZ1) attached then stick it on there.
#1
#2
SE
rear cover
#3
1200_300141E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-88
5.2.14 NCA66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
{MC:5.2.1_SE Rear Cover} NCA66A board.
(2) Remove the NCA66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- Attach the NCA66A board with reference to the unevenness of the SE rear cover.
u NOTE u - Stick the tape on with reference to what is on the right side as shown below.
The NCA66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
double-sided tape.
1200_3000144.ai
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (NCA1)
#2 Peel off: Tape
SE
rear cover
#1
#2
1200_300143E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-89
5.2.15 REC66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
{MC:5.2.1_SE Rear Cover} REC66A board.
(2) Remove the REC66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- Position and reinstall the REC66A board by referring to the following image.
u NOTE u
The REC66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
flathead screwdriver and others to remove the REC66A board together with the
double-sided tape.
1200_300145.ai
n Fuse Locations
SE F1
rear cover
REC6
1200_300146.ai
#1
n Fuse Information
REC1 Board Rated voltage Rated amperage
Model
indications (V) (A)
REC2 KNC32
REC3 Apparatus Co. Ltd.

Change the board.
REC5 REC4
1200_300130E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-90
5.2.16 RLY66A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
{MC:5.2.1_SE Rear Cover} RLY66A board.
(2) Remove the RLY66A board. - New double-sided tape should be prepared in advance.
- When attaching the RLY66A board, align it with the protrusions on the SE rear cover
u NOTE u then attach it.
The RLY66A board is attached to the SE with the double-sided tape. Use the
double-sided tape.

SE
rear cover
#1
RLY9 RLY7
RLY8
RLY6
1200_300131.ai
RLY4
RLY2 RLY3
RLY1
1200_300147E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-91
5.2.17 SE Connector (3) Disconnect the SE connector.
n Removal Procedures #2 Draw out: SE connector
SE
(2) Disconnect the cable connectors.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connectors (x3) #1
SE
rear cover
#2
1200_300133.ai
#1
1200_300132E.ai
018-230-06E
MC-92
5.3 Replacing the SE whose Local IP Address
Is Changed
When the SE whose local IP address is changed from the default value (192.168.0.30
to 34, 192.168.0.40 to 44) is to be replaced, refer to the following procedures to
proceed with operation.
n Procedures for Replacing the SE

(1) Delete the SE to be replaced.
{MU2:[2.2]_SE DELETE >>}
(2) Restore the following IP addresses to the default value.
- MC ETH1 IP
- MP1
- MP2
- SE  WIRED (: SE No. to be replaced)
- SE  WIRELESS (: SE No. to be replaced)
{MU2:[1.1]_Local Network PreSetting >>}
(3) Replace the SE.

(1) Return the local IP address of the SE/MP/MC to the original value (value
before changed to the default value).
018-230-06E
MC-93
6. MC (Control Cabinet) (3) Remove the network interface board.
#1 Release: Latch
#2 Remove: Network interface board
6.1 Network Interface Board
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your #2
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board. #1
(1) Turn OFF the power, and disconnect all of the cables from the MC.
(2) Remove the cover.
1200_300089.ai
Cover
1200_300088.ai
018-230-06E
MC-94
6.2 Preparing Before Installation n Confirming the CONFIG settings
Follow the procedures below when the MC is locally procured or before replacing the (1) Select a MC.
MC.
When a new MC is to be installed, the network interface board needs to be mounted (2) Click the “EDIT CONFIGURATION”.
on the MC. (3) Note down the set contents of each item on a paper, for example.
{MC:6.1_Network Interface Board}
(4) Close the CONFIG window.
6.2.1 Setting on the RU PC-TOOL (5) Close the RU PC-TOOL.
n Confirming the Panel (Serial ID) n Backup the Correction Data for the Panel
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(1) Select a MC.
(2) Select a MC and click [MUTL].
(2) Select “CORRECT PANEL DATA” in the “BACKUP” menu and click
(3) Select [SE Setting]. [EXECUTE].
(4) Select [SE Registration >>] and check that which panels have been (3) Specify the panel number and the destination to save the backup data,
registered, and note down the ID's on a paper, for example. and click [OK].
(5) Close the MUTL window. (4) Click [OK] when "Complete" appears after the backup completed.
(5) Repeat the procedures 2 to 4 for any panels on which serial ID’s are
registered.
n Backup the HISTORY Data

(1) Select a MC.
(2) Select “HISTORY LOG” in the “BACKUP” menu and click [EXECUTE].
(3) Specify the destination to save backup data and click [OK].
(4) Click [OK] when “Complete” appears after the backup completed.
018-230-06E
MC-95
6.2.2 Preparing the PC n Changing boot sequence of the computer (for HP PC)
In here Boot Sequence is changed so that PC starts from CD by the BIOS menu of a
n Connecting the peripheral devices PC.
(1) Connecting the following to the PC for MC. (1) Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
- Keyboard
→ The PC starts running.
- Mouse
- Jig monitor (2) Press the <F10> key when the hp logo appears at the center of the
window.
n Connection to the network  NOTE 
Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network setup windows If the <F10> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending on the OS installer open. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
specifications.
(1) Use a network cable to connect the PC for MC to the HUB. → The setup window opens.
(3) Select “Storage” – “Storage Options” and press the <Enter> key.
(2) Turn ON the power to the HUB.
AWS080205001.ai
→ The “Storage Options” window opens.
AWS080205002.ai
018-230-06E
MC-96
(4) Select “Removable Media Boot” and change it to “Enabled”. (8) Press the <F9> key when logotype of hp appears at the center of the
window.
→ The “Please select boot device” window opens.
 NOTE 
If the <F9> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the “Please select boot device”
window will not open. In that case, restart the PC to perform step 8. again.
(9) Insert the OS DVD into the PC.

AWS080205016.ai
(5) Press the <F10> key. (10) Select “Legacy Boot Source” – “ATAPI CD/DVD Drive” – “SATA2” and
press the <Enter>.
→ The system returns to the setup window.
→ After a while, the “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD” message appears.
(6) Select “File” – “Save Changes and Exit” and press the <Enter> key. (11) Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.
→ After a while, the setup window opens.
 NOTE 
If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds after the “Press
any key to boot from the CD or DVD...” message appears at the upper left corner
of the window, the installation CD will not be recognized accordingly.
If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 8. again.
AWS080205014.ai
→ The “Save Changes and Exit” window opens.
(7) Verify that “Yes” is selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
AWS080205015.ai
→ PC restarts.
018-230-06E
MC-97
6.3 Installing and Setting Up the OS (3) Click [Next].
Follow the procedures below when the MC is locally procured or before replacing the → The following window opens.
MC.
6.3.1 Installing the OS
n Re-installing the OS
(1) Select “My language is English”.
DXL03020139.ai
(4) Click “Install now”.

→ The “Please read the license terms” window opens.
(5) Place a checkmark to “I accept the license terms” and click [Next].
DXL03020137.ai
→ The language selection window opens.
(2) Make the following settings.
DXL03020140.ai
→ The “Which type of installation do you want?” window opens.
DXL03020138.ai
Language to install : English

Time and currency format : English (United States)
Keyboard or input method : US
018-230-06E
MC-98
(6) Select “Custom (advanced)”. (8) Select “Delete”.
DXL03020141.ai
→ The “Where do you want to install Windows?” window opens.

DXL03020143.ai
(7) Select the partition to be deleted and select “Drive options (advanced)”.
→ A confirmation window opens.
DXL03020144.ai
(9) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Where do you want to install Windows?” window.
DXL03020142.ai
(10) If multiple partitions exist, repeat the step 7 to 9 and delete all the
existing partitions.
018-230-06E
MC-99
(11) Select “Disk 0 Unallocated Space” and select “New”. (13) Click [Apply].
DXL03020145.ai
DXL03020146.ai
 NOTE 
When a partition is not created, go to step 13.
(12) Enter the value of “Size” according to the type of PC (capacity of the
storage).
 In the case of a PC whose storage is a 250GB/500GB HDD

Enter “131172”. DXL03020147.ai
(14) Click [OK].

 In the case of a PC whose storage is a 128GB SSD
→ “Disk 0 Partition 1”, “Disk 0 Partition 2”, and “Disk 0 Unallocated Space” are
Enter the value acquired by subtracting 82120 from the total capacity of SSDs. created.
(Enter the value so that the area which is not allocated after creation becomes
80.1GB.)
DXCL100302016.ai
REFERENCE
When a partition is not created, “Disk 0 Unallocated Space” is not created.
018-230-06E
MC-100
(15) Select “Disk 0 Partition 1” and click “Format”. (17) Select “Disk 0 Partition 2” and click “Format”.
DXCL100302017.ai
DXCL100302018.ai

DXL03020150.ai
DXL03020152.ai
(16) Click [OK]. (18) Click [OK].

018-230-06E
MC-101
(19) Select “Disk 0 Partition 2” and click [Next]. n Windows setup
(1) Make the following settings.
DXL03020154.ai
Type a user name (for example, John) : iip

DXCL100302019.ai
Type a computer name : CSL
 NOTE  (2) Click [Next].

To install Windows 7, the system requires at least 6031 MB free space. If you → A window opens to prompt for password.
select a partition whose free space is less than 6031 MB and click [Next],
Windows 7 cannot be installed.
→ The OS installation processing starts.

Upon completion of installation, a window to enter user name and computer name
opens.
018-230-06E
MC-102
(3) Make the following settings. (5) Select “Ask me later”.
DXL03020155.ai DXL03020156.ai
Type a password (recommended) : fcr-iip → The “Review your time and date settings” window opens.
Retype your password : fcr-iip
Type a password hint : enter a one-byte space
(6) Verify the “Time zone”, “Date”, and “Time” and click [Next].
If they are incorrect, correct accordingly and then click [Next].
 NOTE 
- The character string entries in the “Type a password (recommended):” and
“Retype your password:” fields appear as “●”.
- When a character has been entered into the column “Type a password hint”, it
becomes possible to click [Next].
(4) Click [Next].

→ The “Help protect your computer and improve Windows automatically” window
opens.
DXL03020157.ai
→ The “Select your computer’s current location” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-103
(7) Select “Public network”. n Setting the user account
(1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
DXL03020160.ai
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.

DXL03020158.ai
→ The system finalizes the settings. (2) Select “Large icons” from “View by”.
DXL03020161.ai
→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(3) Click “Administrative Tools”.
DXL03020159.ai
→ Upon completion of finalizing process, the desktop screen opens.
(8) Remove the Disk from the PC.
DXL03020162.ai
→ The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-104
(4) Double-click “Computer Management”. (7) Remove the checkmark from “Account is disabled” in the “General”
tab and click [OK].
DXL03020163.ai
→ The “Computer Management” window opens.
(5) Select “Local Users and Groups” – “Users”.

DXL03020166.ai
→ The system returns to the “Computer Management” window.
(8) Right-click “Administrator” and select “Set Password...”.
DXL03020164.ai
(6) Right-click “Administrator” and select “Properties”.

DXL03020167.ai
→ The “Set Password for Administrator” window opens.
(9) Click [Proceed].
DXL03020165.ai
→ The “Administrator Properties” window opens.
DXL03020168.ai
→ A window opens to prompt for password.
018-230-06E
MC-105
(10) Make the following settings and click [OK]. (13) Place a checkmark to “Account is disabled” in the “General” tab and
click [OK].
DXL03020169.ai
New password : fcr-iip

Confirm password : fcr-iip
 NOTE 
The entered password is displayed as “ ●”.

DXL03020172.ai
→ The system returns to the “Computer Management” window.
(14) Close the “Computer Management” window.

→ The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
DXL03020170.ai
(15) Close the “Administrative Tools” window.
→ The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window.
(11) Click [OK].
→ The system returns to the “Computer Management” window. (16) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window.
→ The system returns to the desktop.
(12) Right-click “iip” and select “Properties”.
DXL03020171.ai
→ The “iip Properties” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-106
n Setting the User Account Control (4) Lower the slide bar to the bottom and click [OK].
Turn off and disable “User Account Control” from prompting for credentials to install
applications, and changing the elevation prompt behavior.
DXL03020174.ai
DXL03020160.ai
(2) Click “User Accounts”.

→ The “User Accounts” window opens.
(3) Select “Change User Account Control Settings”. DXL03020175.ai
(5) Click [Yes].

→ The “User Accounts” window opens.
(6) Close the “User Accounts” window.

→ The system returns to the desktop.
(7) Restart the PC.
DXL03020173.ai
→ The “User Account Control Settings” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-107
n Changing boot sequence of the computer 2 (for HP PC) (3) Select “Removable Media Boot” and change it to “Disabled”.
(1) Press the <F9> key when logotype of hp appears at the center of the
window.
 NOTE 
If the <F9> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the “Setup Window” window
will not open. In that case, restart the PC to perform step 2. again.
→ The setup window opens. AWS080205003.ai

(2) Select “Storage” - “Storage Options” and press the <Enter> key.
→ The system returns to the setup window.
(5) Select “File” - “Save Changes and Exit” and press the <Enter> key.
AWS080205001.ai
→ The “Storage Options” window opens.
AWS080205014.ai
→ The “Save Changes and Exit” window opens.
AWS080205017.ai
018-230-06E
MC-108
(6) Verify that “Yes” is selected, and then press the <Enter> key. 6.3.2 Installing the Driver Software
Use the Resource CD supplied with the PC to install the following driver software
items.
REFERENCE
To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use Device Manager.
To open Device Manager, perform the following steps:
AWS080205015.ai
I. Right-click “My Computer” from the [Start] menu and select “Properties” from the
→ After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
pull-down menu that opens.
(7) Enter “fcr-iip” and click . → The “System Properties” window opens.
II. Click [Device Manager].
→ Device Manager opens.
The software for items marked “ ! ” in Device Manager is not installed. Install the driver
software for such items.
DXL03020046.ai
 NOTE 
→ The desktop screen opens.
018-230-06E
MC-109
n Installing the driver software n Installing the ARCNET board drive software
Install the following driver software items. (1) Insert the “ARCNET Card (PCI-EX) Driver CD V1.0” CD
 NOTE  (114Y2150079B00) into the PC.
- As an example, the driver software to be installed to HP ProDesk 600 G1 SF is → The “AutoPlay” window opens.
mentioned below. Since drivers to be installed vary depending on the PC, definitely
used the Resource CD attached with the PC. (2) Close the “AutoPlay” window.
- If the system requests to restart the PC after installation of each driver, restart the
PC. (3) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
(1) Chipset Drivers
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\1.ChipsetDriver\Setup.exe
(4) Click [Device Manager].
→ The “Device Manager” window opens.
(2) USB3.0 Drivers
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\2.USB3.0Driver\Setup.exe (5) Right-click “Network Controller” with a “!” mark of “Other devices”,
(3) Video drivers then select “Update Driver Software...”.
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\3.VideoDriver\win32_153314.exe → The “How do you want to search for driver software?” window opens.
 NOTE  (6) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”.

In the installation, remove the checkmark from “Automatically run WinSAT and → The “Browse for driver software on your computer” window opens.
enable the Windows Aero desktop theme (if supported).”.
(7) Click [Browse] in “Search for driver software in this location:”.
(4) Network drivers → The “Browse For Folder” window opens.
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\4.NetworkDriver\Install.cmd
(8) Select “Computer” — “DVD RW driver (D:) 114Y2150079B00”, and then
(5) Intel Rapid Storage Technology : click [OK].
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\5.RAID_AHCIDriver\ → The system returns to the “Browse for driver software on your computer” window.
AHCI_Setup.bat
(6) Audio drivers (9) Click [Next].
Resource (32bit) CD for 600G1/800G1 V1.1\6.AudioDriver\Setup.exe → The “Windows Security” window opens.
Refer to Device Manager and install the corresponding driver. Installation has been (10) Click “Install this driver software”.
completed when the Device Manager window shows no more exclamation marks “ ! ”.
→ The “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” window opens.
REFERENCE
There is no problem for the following two items with yellow “!” mark. (11) Click [Close].
- “Other device” - “PCI Serial Port” → The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
- “Other device” - “PCI Simple Communications Controller”
018-230-06E
MC-110
(12) Make sure that the driver which has been installed is “CCSI” — 6.3.3 Setting the OS
“PCI20EX /PCI20U-485 PCI COM20020 ARCNET card” (with a “?”
mark), and close the “Device Manager” window. Perform the following OS-related settings.
→ The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window. - Setting the control panel
- Setting the Network adapters
(13) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window.
- Setting the volume
→ The system returns to the desktop screen. - Changing the computer name
- Setting the IP address
- Setting the taskbar
- Hiding icons on the taskbar
- Setting the action center
- Setting the automatic OS update
- Setting the monitor size
- Setting the visual effects
- Setting the screen properties
- Setting the automatic window arrangement
- Setting the power options
- Setting the Internet time
- Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
- Addition of components
- Setting the service
- Disabling the scheduler
- Setting the Intel (R) HD graphics
- Deleting unnecessary shortcuts
- Setting system configuration
- Setting the Remote desktop
- Setting the Event Log
- Setting the Firewall
018-230-06E
MC-111
n Setting the control panel n Setting the Network adapters
Change display of the control panel to the “Large icons” view. (1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
(1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu. → The “Control Panel” window opens.
(2) Click “Device Manager”.

→ The “Device Manager” window opens.
(3) Right-click “Intel(R) Ethernet Connection I217-LM” under “Network

adapters” and then select “Properties”.
DXL03020160.ai
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.
(2) Select “Large icons” from “View by”.
DXCL11030D001.ai
→ The “Intel(R) Ethernet Connection I217-LM Properties” window opens.
DXL03020161.ai

→ The system returns to the desktop screen.
018-230-06E
MC-112
(4) Select the “Power Management” tab and remove the checkmark from n Setting the volume
“Wake on Pattern Match”.
(2) Click “Sound”.

→ The “Sound” window opens.
(3) Right-click “Speakers” and select “Properties”.
DXCL11030E006.ai
(5) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
(6) Close the “Device Manager” window.

DXCL07030E005.ai
→ The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window. → The “Speakers Properties” window opens.
(7) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window. (4) Select the “Levels” tab and move the “Realtek HD Audio output”
→ The system returns to the desktop screen. slidebar all the way to the right (100).
DXCL07030E006.ai
018-230-06E
MC-113
(5) Select the “Enhancements” tab, place a checkmark to “Disable all n Changing the computer name
sound effects” and click [OK].
DXCL11030E007.ai
(6) Click [OK].


→ The system returns to the desktop screen. DXL03020160.ai
(2) Click “System”.

→ The “System” window opens.
(3) Select “Advanced system settings”.
DXL03020322.ai
→ The “System Properties” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-114
(4) Select the “Computer Name” tab and click [Change]. (7) Click [OK].
→ The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
(8) Click [Close].

DXL03020326.ai
DXL03020323.ai
→ The “Computer Name/Domain Changes” window opens. (9) Click [Restart Now].
→ After the PC is restarted, a login window opens.
(5) Enter “DAxxxxxxxx” in the “Computer name:” column.
(Enter “DA” as a one-byte capital letter and enter last 8 digits of (10) Enter “fcr-iip” and click .
product serial number for “xxxxxxxx”.)
600_712025.ai
(6) Click [OK].

→ A confirmation window opens. DXL03020046.ai
 NOTE 
→ The desktop screen displays.
DXL03020325.ai
018-230-06E
MC-115
n Setting the IP address (4) Click [Properties].
Setting the IP address.
DXL03020160.ai
→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. DXL03020328.ai
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.

(2) Click “Network and Sharing Center.
(5) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
→ The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
(3) Confirm that “Unidentified network” is set to “Public network” and se-
lect “Local Area Connection”.
DXL03020327.ai
DXL03020329.ai
→ The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens. → The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-116
(6) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings. n Setting the taskbar
Change the windows taskbar display setting as follows.
I
II
III
DXL03020330.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 172.16.1.20)

II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.0.0)
III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
 NOTE 
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down before the start of DXL03020160.ai
OS installation. → The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click “Taskbar and Start Menu”.

(7) Click [OK].
→ The “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window opens.
→ The system returns to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
(3) Select the “Taskbar” tab and make the following settings.
(8) Click [Close].
- Place a checkmark to “Auto-hide the taskbar”.
→ The system returns to the “Local Area Connection Status” window.
- Place a checkmark to “Use small icons”.
(9) Click [Close].
→ The system returns to the “Network and Sharing Center” window.
(10) Close the “Network and Sharing Center” window.

DXL03020331.ai
018-230-06E
MC-117
(4) Select the “Start Menu” tab and select “Shut down”. (6) Place a checkmark to “Always show all icons and notifications on the
taskbar” and click [OK].
DXL03020332.ai
(5) Select the “Taskbar” tab and click [Customize].
DXL03020334.ai
→ The system returns to the “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window.
(7) Click [OK].

DXL03020333.ai
→ The “Notification Area Icons” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-118
n Hiding icons on the taskbar n Setting the action center
(1) Select “Unpin this program from taskbar” from the right-click menu of Hide the confirmation message for security or maintenance.
at the right side of the [Start] menu on the taskbar.
DXL03020335.ai
→ The icon hides.
(2) Perform step 1. for and at the right side of the [Start] menu
on the taskbar.
DXL03020336.ai
(2) Click “Action Center”.

→ The “Action Center” window opens.
(3) Select “Change Action Center settings”.
DXL03020337.ai
→ The “Change Action Center settings” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-119
(4) Select “Problem reporting settings”. (6) Press the <F5> key, remove all checkmarks, and click [OK].
DXL03020340.ai
→ The system returns to the “Action Center” window.
(7) Close the “Action Center” window.

DXL03020338.ai
→ The “Problem Reporting Settings” window opens. → The system returns to the desktop screen.
(5) Select “Never check for solutions” and click [OK].
DXL03020339.ai
→ The system returns to the “Change Action Center settings” window.
018-230-06E
MC-120
n Setting the automatic OS update (4) Select “Never check for updates” and click [OK].
Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows 7) update as follows.
DXL03020342.ai
→ The system returns to the “Windows Update” window.
(5) Close the “Windows Update” window.

DXL03020336.ai
(2) Click “Windows Update”.

→ The “Windows Update” window opens.
(3) Select “Change Settings”.
DXL03020341.ai
→ The “Change settings” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-121
n Setting the monitor size (4) Select “1280 by 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz” and click [OK].
Change the monitor size to “1280 by 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz” as follows.
(1) Select “Screen resolution” from the right-click menu on the desktop.
→ The “Screen Resolution” window opens.
(2) Click “Advanced settings”.
DXL03020345.ai
→ The system returns to the monitor properties window.
(5) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Screen Resolution” window.
DXL03020343.ai (6) Click [OK].

→ The monitor properties window opens. → The system returns to the desktop screen.
(3) Select the “Adapter” tab and click [List All Modes].
DXL03020344.ai
→ The “List All Modes” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-122
n Setting the visual effects (4) Remove the checkmark from “Show window contents while dragging”
on the “Visual Effects” tab and click [OK].
Hiding the windows contents while dragging.
DXL03020336.ai

DXL03020347.ai
(2) Click “Performance Information and Tools”. → The system returns to the “Performance Information and Tools” window.
→ The “Performance Information and Tools” window opens. (5) Close the “Performance Information and Tools” window.
(3) Select “Adjust visual effects”.
DXL03020346.ai
→ The “Performance Options” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-123
n Setting the screen properties n Setting the automatic window arrangement
Change the screen properties settings from “Windows 7” to “Windows Classic”. Disable the automatic adjustment function of window size.
(1) Select “Personalization” from the right-click menu on the desktop. (1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
→ The “Personalization” window opens.
(2) Select “Windows Classic”.
DXL03020210.ai
(2) Click “Ease of Access Center”.

→ The “Ease of Access Center” window opens.
DXL03020203.ai
→ The screen properties settings change to classic view.
(3) Close the “Personalization” window.

018-230-06E
MC-124
(3) Select “Make the mouse easier to use”. n Setting the power options
Changing the power options for PC and HD drives.
DXL03020220.ai
→ The “Make the mouse easier to use” window opens. DXL03020210.ai

(4) Place a checkmark to “Prevent windows from being automatically
arranged when moved to the edge of the screen” and click [OK]. (2) Click “Power Options”.
→ The “Power Options” window opens.
(3) Click at the right side of “Show additional plans”.
DXL03020221.ai
DXL03020227.ai
→ The system returns to the “Ease of Access Center” window. → An additional plan displays.
(5) Close the “Ease of Access Center” window.

018-230-06E
MC-125
(4) Select “High performance” and click “Change plan settings”. (6) Select “Hard disk” and “Turn off hard disk after”, and then set to
“Never”.
DXL03020228.ai
→ The “Edit Plan Settings” window opens. DXL03020230.ai
(5) Select “Change advanced power settings”. (7) Select “USB Settings” and “USB selective suspend setting”, and then
select “Disabled”.
DXL03020229.ai
→ The advanced settings window opens.
DXCL080302003.ai
018-230-06E
MC-126
(8) Select “Power buttons and lid” and “Power button action”, and then n Setting the Internet time
select “Shut down”.
Disabling synchronization with an Internet time server.
DXL03020231.ai
(9) Select “Display” and “Turn off display after”, and then set to “20”. DXL03020210.ai
(2) Click “Date and Time”.

→ The “Date and Time” window opens.
DXL03020232.ai
(10) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Edit plan settings” window.
(11) Close the “Edit plan settings” window.

018-230-06E
MC-127
(3) Select the “Internet Time” tab and click [Change Settings]. n Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
Disabling use of the sharing wizard.
DXL03020233.ai
→ The “Internet Time Settings” window opens.
(4) Remove checkmark from “Synchronize with an Internet time server” DXL03020210.ai
and click [OK]. → The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click “Folder Options”.

→ The “Folder Options” window opens.
(3) Select the “View” tab.

DXL03020234.ai
→ The system returns to the “Date and Time” window.
(5) Click [OK].


DXL03020225.ai
018-230-06E
MC-128
(4) Remove the checkmark from “Use Sharing Wizard” and click [OK]. n Addition of components
Installing additional Windows components.
DXL03020226.ai

DXL03020210.ai
(5) Close the “All Control Panel Items” window. → The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.
(2) Click “Programs and Features”.
→ The “Programs and Features” window opens.
(3) Select “Turn Windows features on or off”.
DXL03020257.ai
→ The “Windows Features” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-129
(4) Place a checkmark to the following items. n Setting the service
- “Internet Information Services” ― “FTP Server” and all of items under “FTP
Server” Active the Microsoft FTP Service.
- “Internet Information Services” ― “Web Management Tools” and
all of items under “Web Management Tools” (1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
- “Telnet Client”
DXL03020210.ai

(3) Double-click “Service”.
DXL03020258.ai
REFERENCE
- “ ” indicates an item to be installed.
- “ ” indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
- When a check box is checked, all items in lower levels are selected at the
same time.
- If the restart is requested after the installation, restart the PC.
(5) Click [OK].

→ The installation processing starts. DXL03020321.ai
Upon completion of installation, the system returns to the “Programs and → The “Service” window opens.
Features” window.
(6) Close the “Programs and Features” window.

018-230-06E
MC-130
(4) Right-click “Microsoft FTP Service” and select “Properties”. n Disabling the scheduler
→ The “Microsoft FTP Service Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.
Disable the scheduling settings for Defrag, Time Synchronization, and Windows Error
(5) Select “General” tab and “Automatic” from the “Startup type” pull- Reporting.
down menu, and then click [OK].
DXL03020348.ai
→ The system returns to the “Service” window.
(6) Close the “Service” window. DXL03020210.ai

→ The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
018-230-06E
MC-131
(3) Double-click “Task Scheduler”. (5) Right-click “ScheduledDefrag” and select “Disable”.
DXL03020240.ai
→ The “Status” of “ScheduledDefrag” changes to “Disable”.
DXL03020235.ai
→ The “Task Scheduler” window opens. DXL03020241.ai
(4) Select “Task Scheduler Library” ― “Microsoft” ― “Windows” ― (6) Select “Task Scheduler Library” ― “Microsoft” ― “Windows” ― “Time
“Defrag”. Synchronization”.
DXL03020239.ai
DXL03020242.ai
018-230-06E
MC-132
(7) Right-click “SynchronizeTime” and select “Disable”. (9) Right-click “QueueReporting” and select “Disable”.
DXL03020243.ai DXL03020246.ai
→ The “Status” of “SynchronizeTime” changes to “Disable”. → The “Status” of “QueueReporting” changes to “Disable”.
DXL03020244.ai DXL03020247.ai
(8) Select “Task Scheduler Library” ― “Microsoft” ― “Windows” ― (10) Close the “Task Scheduler” window.
“Windows Error Reporting”. → The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.

→ The system returns to the “All Control Panel Item” window.
(12) Close the “All Control Panel Item” window.

DXL03020245.ai
018-230-06E
MC-133
n Setting the Intel (R) HD graphics (4) Select “Off” on the left-hand side.
DXCL11030E009.ai
(5) Click “Options” and select “Preferences”.
DXL03020210.ai
(2) Click “Intel(R) HD Graphics”.

→ The “Intel® HD Graphics Control Panel” window opens.
(3) Click “Options”.

DXCL11030E010.ai
→ The “Preferences” window opens.
(6) Select “Off” of both “Profiles Warning Messages” and “Tray Icon”,
then click (Apply).
DXCL11030E008.ai
→ The “Hot Key Manager” window opens. DXCL11030E011.ai
→ The “The new settings have been applied...” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-134
(7) Click [Yes] within 15 seconds. n Deleting unnecessary shortcuts
DXCL11030E012.ai
→ The system returns to the “Preferences” window.
(8) Close the “Preferences” window.


→ The system returns to the desktop screen. DXL03020210.ai
(2) Right-click “Korea Media Player Center” and select “Delete” while
pressing the <Shift> key.
→ The “Delete Shortcut” window opens.
(3) Click [Yes].

(4) Delete “Korea Messenger Center” in the same way as in steps 1

through 3.
018-230-06E
MC-135
(5) Select the shortcuts for the following items and right-click to select n Setting system configuration
“Delete” while pressing the <Shift> key.
- “Korea Media Player Center” (1) Enter “msconfig” into the “Open folder to view files” field from the
- “Korea Messenger Center” [Start] menu, then press the <Enter> key.
- “ Intel® HD Graphics Control Panel” → The “System Configuration” window opens.
(2) From the “Startup” tab, remove the checkmark from “Realtek HD
Audio Manager” and click [OK].
DXCL11030D002.ai
DXCL0803E003.ai
→ The confirmation window opens.
→ The “Delete Multiple Items” window opens.
(3) Place a checkmark to “Don’t show this message again.” and click
(6) Click [Yes]. [Restart].
DXCL0803E004.ai DXCL11030D003.ai
→ The system returns to the desktop screen. → PC restarts.
(7) Double-click [Recycle Bin].

→ The “Recycle Bin” window opens.
(8) Confirm that nothing is left and close the “Recycle Bin” window.
 NOTE 
If files are displayed, empty the “Recycle Bin”.
018-230-06E
MC-136
n Setting the Remote desktop (4) Select “Allow connections only from computers running Remote
Desktop with...” and click [OK].
DXL03020210.ai
(2) Click “System”.

→ The “System” window opens. 600_712040.ai
(3) Click “Remote settings”. REFERENCE

If the “Remote Desktop” window opens, click [OK] to close the window.
→ The system returns to the “System” window.
(5) Close “System” window.

600_712039.ai
→ The “System Properties” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-137
n Setting the Event log (5) Make the following settings.
DXL03020210.ai
→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. I

II
(3) Double-click “Event Viewer”.

→ The “Event Viewer” window opens.
AWS35011.ai
(4) Right-click a “Application” under “Windows Logs” and then choose I. Check that the maximum log size is “20480” KB.
“Properties” from the pop-up menu.
 NOTE 
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one shown above, change
it to “20480” KB.
II. Select “Overwrite event as needed”.
(6) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.
(7) Right-click a “System” and then choose “properties” from the pop-up
menu.
→ The “Log Properties - System” window opens.
(8) Perform the same procedure as in steps 5 and 6.

AWS35039.ai
→ The “Log Properties - Application” window opens.
018-230-06E
MC-138
(9) Select “Customize” from “View” menu. n Setting the Firewall
20000012.ai
→ The “Customize View” window opens.
(10) Remove the checkmark from the “Action pane”.
DXL03020210.ai
(2) Click “Windows Firewall”.

→ The “Windows Firewall” window opens.
(3) Select “Advanced settings”.
AWS35045.ai
(11) Click [OK].

→ The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.
(12) Close the “Event Viewer” window. DXL03020259.ai
→ The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window. → The “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security” window opens.
(13) Close the “Administrative Tools” window. (4) Select “Inbound Rules”.
DXL03020260.ai
018-230-06E
MC-139
(5) Right-click “FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)” and select
“Enable Rule”.
DXL03020261.ai
→ The “Enabled” of “FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)” changes to “Yes”.
DXL03020262.ai
(6) Select “Exit” from “File” menu.
DXL03020263.ai
→ The system returns to the “Windows Firewall” window.
(7) Close the “Windows Firewall” window.

018-230-06E
MC-140
6.4 Installing the MC Application (4) Click [OK].
#1 Click: [OK]
Follow the procedures below when the MC is locally procured or before replacing the
MC.
#1
(1) Insert the install disk into the PC for MC.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window opens. 600_700277.ai
(2) Select “.\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” (5) Click [OK].
pull-down menu on the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window , and then click
The “Welcome to the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens.
[EXECUTE].
The MC Installer dialog opens. (6) Click [Next].
#1 Select: .\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat
#1 Click: [Next]
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
#1
#2
#1
1200_700105.ai
1200_700082.ai
The “License Agreement” window opens.
(3) Click [OK].

The MC application is installed and the dialog to confirm the installation opens.
#1 Click: [OK]
#1
600_700259.ai
018-230-06E
MC-141
(7) Click [I Agree]. (9) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [I Agree] #1 Click: [Finish]
#1 #1
1200_700106.ai 1200_700108.ai
The “Installation options” window opens.

(10) Click [OK].
(8) Confirm that the “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot Return to the desktop screen.
timecheck box is checked, and then click [Install]. #1 Click: [OK]
#1 Verify: utomatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time
#2 Click: [Install]
#1 600_700260.ai
(11) Remove the install disk from the CD drive.

#1 (12) Restart the PC.
NOTE
If any error occurs during installation, reinstall the MC application after uninstalling it.
Follow the procedures below to uninstall the MC application.
#2
1. Insert the install disk into the CD drive.
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window starts.
1200_700107.ai
2. Select “.\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” pull-down menu,
The “Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens. and then click [EXECUTE].
The “Are you sure you want to uninstall MC application?” dialog appears.
3. Click [OK].
018-230-06E
MC-142
6.5 Settings After Installation for the MC n Checking the HDD error
Application (1) Start up Windows and open Windows Explorer.
Follow the procedures below when the MC is locally procured or before replacing the
MC. (2) Right-click “Local Disk (C:)” and select “Properties”.
n Canceling AutoPlay Mode

600_712041.ai
DXL03020210.ai
→ The “All Control Panel Items” window opens. → The “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens.
(2) Click “AutoPlay”. (3) Select “Tools” tab and click [Check now].
→ The “AutoPlay” window opens.
(3) Remove the checkmark from “Use AutoPlay for all media and
devices”.
600_712042.ai
AWS35044.ai
(4) Click [Save].


018-230-06E
MC-143
(4) Verify that the check boxes in the “Check disk options” area are
unchecked, and then click [Start].
600_712043.ai
→ The hard disk check starts (and it takes about 5 minutes when the disk size is
40GB).
When the hard disk is normal, Phases up to 3 will be completed and a dialog box will
open to indicate the completion of the hard disk check.
If the hard disk is not normal, Phases up to 3 will not be completed and a dialog box
will open to indicate that the hard disk check is not completed.
018-230-06E
MC-144
6.6 Operation Verification (6) Check that the following is displaying.
Follow the procedures below when the MC is locally procured or before replacing the TCP 0.0.0.0:21 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
MC. TCP 0.0.0.0:23 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
TCP 0.0.0.0:3389 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
(1) Turn on the PC for MC. TCP 0.0.0.0:19001 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
TCP 0.0.0.0:19002 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
(2) Confirm that the Windows logon screen does not appear when the PC TCP 0.0.0.0:19100 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
is started. TCP 0.0.0.0:61000 0.0.0.0:0 LISTENING
(3) Wait for at least 3 minutes after the desktop screen has appeared.
REFERENCE
Directly after start of the PC, the MC application has not yet started. About 3
minutes are required for the MC application to start.
(4) Confirm that “MCManager” is resident in the task tray.
600_712015.ai
(5) Start the Command prompt.

Enter “NetstatΔ-anΔ|ΔfindΔ“LISTENING”” (The | symbol represents 600_712016.ai
a pipeline ,and the Δ symbol represents a space.), and press <Enter>

key.
018-230-06E
MC-145
(7) Connect the PC for MC to the network. Start the Internet Explorer,
enter “http://172.16.1.10:19100/mutlGetMcVerInfo(0)” in the address
field, and press the <Enter> key.
 NOTE 
If the PC for MC is not connected to the network, connect the PC to a dummy
LAN cable.
(8) Confirm that the displayed version information coincides with the
installed version.
600_712017.ai
(9) Enter “http://172.16.1.10:19100/mutlMntIfForcedEnd()” in the address

field of the Internet Explorer and press the <Enter> key.
(10) Confirm that the PC for MC is shut down automatically.
018-230-06E
MC-146
6.7 Restore the settings (10) Start up the MUTL and perform the “Forced Reboot”.
{MU2:[7.1] Termination >>}
(1) Insert the installation disk into the PC for DX Console. u NOTE u
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window opens. In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". Check that the MC
(2) Uninstall the RU PC-TOOL by clicking [UNINSTALL]. Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
→ The system returns to the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window. from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
(3) Install the RU PC-TOOL by clicking [INSTALL].
(4) Start up the RU PC-TOOL by clicking [START].
(5) Select the MC and delete the MC by clicking [DELETE].

{MU2:1.3_DELETE}
(6) Install the MC after changing the OS.

{MU2:1.8_INSTALL}
(7) Apply the CONFIG settings noted down when performing

“5.2.1 Setting on the RU PC-TOOL” - “n Confirming the CONFIG
settings”.
(8) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing

“5.2.1 Setting on the RU PC-TOOL” - “n Confirming the Panel (Serial
ID)”.
u NOTE u
(9) Restore the correction data for the panel.

{MU2:1.14_RESTORE}
 NOTE 
Exercise care not to allow any differences between the serial ID of each panel
registered in the SE settings and the data to be restored.
018-230-06E
MC-147
6.8 Replacing the MC whose Local IP Address
Is Changed
When the MC whose local IP address is changed from the default value (192.168.0.0)
is to be replaced, refer to the following procedures to proceed with operation.
n Procedures for Replacing the MC

(1) Restore the IP address of the MP to the default value by means of a jig
cable.
{IN: Appendix 4.1_Restoring the IP Address of the MP}
(2) Delete the RU registered in the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU2:1.3_DELETE}
(3) Install the RU software.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console
{IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software}
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC
(4) Set the configuration.
(5) Replace the MC.

Mentioned below are the procedures for changing the local IP address from the
default value to a desired value.
(1) Change the local IP address of the MC to a desired value.
{MU2:[1.1]_Local Network PreSetting >>}
018-230-06E
MC-148
6.9 Setting in Case of Replacing the MC (4) Select “Deep Sleep Control” in the “Power Management” area and
then select “Disabled”.
Motherboard
6.9.1 Changing the BIOS Settings
When the MC motherboard is replaced, change the BIOS settings as follows.
(1) Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
→ The PC starts running.
(2) Press the <F2> key when the DELL logo appears at the center of the
window.
 NOTE 
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open.
600_712024.ai
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again. (5) Click at the lower right corner of the window.
→ The setup window opens. → A confirmation window opens.

(3) Select “Wake on LAN” in the “Power Management” area and then (6) Click [Yes].
select “LAN Only”.
600_712023.ai
018-230-06E
MC-149
6.9.2 Changing the Network Name of the Motherboard (3) Select “Show hidden devices” from [View] menu of the Device
When the OS for MC is Windows, change the network name of the motherboard to
Manager.
"Eth0" as follows.
REFERENCES
- Hardware information of the motherboard that has been connected once is written
into the registry of Windows. Therefore, when changing the name of the NIC to
"Eth0" once, even in the case of replacing to another NIC, the network adapter
name remains the already registered name and cannot be changed to "Eth0" again.
- When changing the network card of the MC and setting the network adapter name
to "Eth1", perform the same procedure.
(1) If the DX console and the MC are not in the same housing, connect
600_300188.ai
the monitor, mouse, and keyboard to the MC, and then turn ON the (4) Right-click the semi-transparent icon of the old network adapter and
monitor and PC power switches. select “Uninstall”.
→ The MC starts running.
(2) Start the Command prompt and execute the following commands.
#1 Input: set Δ devmgr_show_nonpresent_devices=1 (Δ shows a space)
→ The hidden devices appear.
#2 Input: Start DEVMGMT.MSC
→ The Device Manager starts.
#1
#2
600_300187.ai
600_300189.ai
(5) Change the network name of the replaced motherboard to "Eth0".
018-230-06E
MC-150
7. List of Tools Phillips screwdriver No. 1 Phillips screwdriver No. 2
Reference type: NO.6300-1 Reference type: NO.6300-2
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
7.1 Standard Tools

VESSEL VESSEL
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
u NOTE u
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
inspected and calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not Thin-blade screwdriver Phillips stubby screwdriver
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be Reference type: NO.110-4 Reference type: NO.135-4
guaranteed. Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
PB PB
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Adjustable wrench 150 mm Nippers 150 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: W-120 Reference type: N-25
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Thin-blade stubby screwdriver High-frequency screwdriver
Reference type: NO.195-2 Reference type: D-29
PB HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Long-nose pliers 150 mm Pliers 150 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: P-22 Reference type: JP-200
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Jeweler's screwdriver set Combination box-open-end wrench (5.5 mm)
Reference type: NO.146 Reference type: M41-5.5
ENGINEER KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Water pump pliers Tweezers 125 mm
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: P-245 Reference type: P-87
HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Combination box-open-end wrench (7 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (8 mm)
Remarks: Remarks:
Reference type: M41-7 Reference type: M41-8
600_300090.ai KTC KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
600_300091.ai
018-230-06E
MC-151
Combination box-open-end wrench (10 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (13 mm) Cutter Calipers
Reference type: M41-10 Reference type: M41-13 Reference type: - Reference type: N-15
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
KTC KTC Any commercially available one Mitutoyo
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Inspection required.

A block gauge for use in
inspection requires calibration.
Allen wrench set Allen wrench Steel rule (150 mm) Steel rule (300 mm)
Reference type: BLX-9 Reference type: 1.5 mm Reference type: Type C Reference type: Type C
Bondhus Bondhus YAMAYO YAMAYO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Used to attach/ Remarks: Inspection required Remarks: Inspection required
detach a bolt fixing the SE rear
cover.
Digital multimeter Midget ratchet set Steel tape measure (5.5 m) Soldering iron (30 W)
Reference type: CD731 Reference type: 7331 Reference type: WS5005 Reference type: Dash15
SANWA CHAPMAN NEOLOCK HAKKO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Inspection and Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

calibration required
Crimp pliers Crimp pliers Solder Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment
Reference type: P-73 Reference type: A125 Reference type: NO.66 Reference type: US140
HOZAN IZUMI HAKKO EDSYN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Used to replace a Remarks: Remarks:

terminal of the X-ray shot
cable.
Wire stripper Scissors Adapter plug Penlight

Reference type: P-95 Reference type: - Reference type: 999-1 Reference type: BF-318

HOZAN Any commercially available one HAKKO MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

Remarks:
600_300092.ai 600_300093.ai
018-230-06E
MC-152
Loupe Blower 7.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
Reference type: 10X Reference type: JUMBO
 NOTE 
PEAK HURRICANE
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
inspected and calibrated.
Remarks: Remarks:
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Cloth Wristband
Reference type: - Reference type: - Vacuum cleaner Maintenance PC
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: - Reference type: - Reference type:
Reference manufacturer:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Reference manufacturer: -
Any commercially available one
Remarks: Remarks: Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Push-pull gauge Dosimeter

Reference type: - Reference type: - Dust-free paper
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: - Reference type: Kimwipe
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
CRECIA
Remarks: For 1kg. Remarks: Calibration required Qty.: 1
Inspection and calibration
required Remarks:
600_300094.ai
600_300095.ai
018-230-06E
MC-153
7.3 Special Consumables 7.4 Semi-Standard Tools
Electrical tape Cable tie Box driver (7 mm) Box driver (8 mm)
Reference type: 33+ Reference type: PLT1M Reference type: D-50 (2757) Reference type: D-50 (2758)
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer: 3M
KITAGAWA KOGYO HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 50 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Cable tie Cable tie IC clip IC clip

Reference type: PLT1.5M Reference type: PLT2M Reference type: TC-16 Reference type: TC-24
Reference manufacturer: 3M Reference manufacturer: 3M
KITAGAWA KOGYO KITAGAWA KOGYO
Qty.: 50 Qty.: 50 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Screw locking bond Lubricant Magnetized Phillips screwdriver Closed wrench (17 mm)
Reference type: Reference type: Molykote Reference type: Reference type:
#1401B
EM-30L
Three Bond
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 2
Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Remarks:
600_300097.ai
Undercoat paint Instant adhesive

Reference type: Reference type:
LOCTITE #770 LOCTITE #406
LOCTITE LOCTITE
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
For pasting the corner guide For pasting the corner guide
600_300096.ai
Polyimide tape
Reference type: No.5412
Reference manufacturer: 3M
Qty.: 1
Remarks: For retaining the

cables in the SE.
308S0086
018-230-06E
MC-154
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
MC-155
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxMC1-1
Appendix 1. Replacing the Terminal (2) Remove the main board.
u NOTE u
Board of the Battery Remove the main board while beware of the position of sheet metal and
Charger exercising care not to damage the main board.
■ Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the bottom cover.
#1 Remove: M2.6x6_bind (x6)
#1
1200_300160.ai
#1 Remove: M2.6x6_W sems small PW (x6)

#2 Remove: Cable connectors (CN1, 2)
#1
1200_300148.ai
#2
1200_300149.ai
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual AppxMC1-1
AppxMC1-2
(3) Remove the bracket. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove: M2.6x6_Pan head TP screws (x6)
(1) Reinstall the terminal board.
u NOTE u
#1
- Exercise care not to touch top of the terminal as the continuity ameliorative
agent is coated.
1200_300150.ai
(4) Remove the terminal board.

#1 Remove: M2.6x6_ sems small PW (x4) 1200_300152.ai
#2 Remove: Cable connectors - Adjust and attach the terminal board in the following direction in the image
#1 while reinstalling the terminal board. Adjust the cable from the terminal board
so that it is taken out from back side of main body.
#2
1200_300153.ai
1200_300151.ai
#1 Connect: Cable connectors (CN1, 2)

u NOTE u
#2 Fix: M2.6x6_W sems small PW (x6)
Isolate terminal boards from each other by not confusing the removed one and
#2
the new one.
#1
1200_300161.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMC1-3
(2) Reinstall the bracket. (3) Reinstall the main board.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
- Exercise care not to damage the board by hitting the bracket. - Since the terminal board may be damaged by a different type of screw, confirm
- Make sure that the bracket is not caught by the cables. the type of screw before fixing it.
- Reinstall the main board while beware of the position of sheet metal and
exercising care not to damage the main board.
1200_300154.ai
#1 Fix: M2.6x6_Pan head TP screws (x6)
#1 1200_300160.ai
#1 Connect: Cable connectors (CN1, 2)

1200_300150.ai
#2 Fix: M2.6x6_W sems small PW (x6)
#2
#1
1200_300162.ai
(4) Confirm that two cables between main board - terminal board and the
cable between main board - LED board are not caught by each other.
1200_300155.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMC1-4
(5) Confirm that the cable between main board - LED board is not in (6) Reinstall the bottom cover.
contact with the shutter unit when opening shutter unit.
u NOTE u
Shutter unit Adjust the wiring
Match the power cable connector of main board with the opening of cover, then
reinstall the bottom cover.
1200_300156E.ai
1200_300158.ai
When the cable is in contact with the shutter unit, adjust the wiring until they are not
in contact
#1 Fix: M2.6x6_bind (x6)
REFERENCE
It is an example below when the cable is in contact with the opened shutter unit. #1
1200_300148.ai
1200_300157.ai
(7) Connect the AC adapter to battery charger, put the battery pack into
the battery charger and confirm the following.
- No error happened
- No cable catch in shutter unit
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-1
Appendix 2. Updating/Downgrading MP (3) Click [Display MP1 Kernel Version] on the MP1 Version Check >>
window to display the version of the MP application software.
OS Version Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme.
txt in the MP OS media.
#1 Click: [Display MP1 Kernel Version]
#2 Check: Version
Appendix 2.1 Checking the MP OS Version Display MP1 Software Version <Display example>
(1) Start up the MUTL.
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK] command, and then click [MP Version >>]
and [MP1 Version Check >>]. #1
#1 Click: [VERSION CHECK]
#2 Click: [MP Version >>] #2
#3 Click: [MP1 Version Check >>]
VERSION CHECK window
#1
#2
1200_600164E.ai
MP Version>>window This procedure is terminated when the version coincides with the version
indicated in Readme.txt.
Follow the procedures below when the version does not coincide with the version
For updating MP OS version: {MC: Appendix 2.2_Updating MP OS Version}
For downgrading MP OS version: {MC: Appendix 2.3_Downgrading MP OS
Version}
REFERENCE
The appropriate version of the MP OS is indicated in Readme.txt in the MP OS
media.
MP1 Version Check>>window
Readme.txt <Display example>
New MP Kernel ver
#3
Old MP Kernel ver
1200_300179.ai
1200_700092E.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-2
Appendix 2.2 Updating MP OS Version ■ Updating OS Version
NOTE u INSTRUCTION u
- This procedure is an example whereas the MP IP address is “192.168.0.20”. For two In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC, connect the
MP configuration, perform the procedure on each MP. monitor, mouse and keyboard to an MC PC.
- This procedure is an example whereas the MC application is installed in the DX
Console. When the MC application is installed in the MC, use the MC to perform this (1) Insert the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media into the DVD drive for the DX
procedure if the MC IP address is “192.168.0.10” for example. Console and open Windows Explorer.
- This procedure is an example whereas the DVD drive is the D drive.
(2) Open “D:\kernel_fwupdate_ip_fix\debian_version” folder and execute
“fwupdate.bat”.
■ Preparations
(1) Turn ON the DX Console power.
(2) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DX Console while pressing
the <Shift> key to terminate the DX Console application and the MC
application.
1200_300166.ai
The Command Prompt window appears.

(3) Press the <Enter> key.
1200_300167.ai
(4) Enter the MP IP address (192.168.0.20) and press the <Enter> key.
1200_300168.ai
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-3
(5) Enter the IP address of the currently operating PC (192.168.0.10) and (6) The MP restarts automatically after the following window appears.
press the <Enter> key.
1200_300169.ai
The OS version update starts.
1200_300171.ai
1200_300170.ai
(7) Press the <Enter> key to close the Command Prompt window.
It takes up to approx. 5 minutes to complete the installation.
u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTION For two MP configuration, perform steps (2) to (7) for the other MP.
While write into the HDD is in progress, never turn OFF the MP power. If turned
OFF, the data on the HDD gets damaged, and the MP cannot boot up as a result. (8) Remove the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media from the DVD drive for the
DX Console and restart the system.
(9) Check the MP OS version.
{MC: Appendix 2.1_Checking the MP OS Version}
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-4
Appendix 2.3 Downgrading MP OS Version ■ Downgrading OS Version
NOTE u INSTRUCTION u
- This procedure is an example whereas the MP IP address is “192.168.0.20”. For two In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC, connect the
MP configuration, perform the procedure on each MP. monitor, mouse and keyboard to an MC PC.
- This procedure is an example whereas the MC application is installed in the DX
Console. When the MC application is installed in the MC, use the MC to perform this (1) Insert the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media into the DVD drive for the DX
procedure if the MC IP address is “192.168.0.10” for example. Console and open Windows Explorer.
- This procedure is an example whereas the DVD drive is the D drive.
(2) Open “D:\kernel_fwupdate_ip_fix\wind_river_version” folder and
execute “fwupdate.bat”.
■ Preparations
(1) Turn ON the DX Console power.
(2) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DX Console while pressing
the <Shift> key to terminate the DX Console application and the MC
application.
1200_300177.ai

(4) Enter the MP IP address (192.168.0.20) and press the <Enter> key.
(5) Enter the IP address of the currently operating PC (192.168.0.10) and
press the <Enter> key.
The OS version downgrade starts.
It takes up to approx. 40 minutes to complete the installation.
CAUTION
While write into the HDD is in progress, never turn OFF the MP power. If turned
OFF, the data on the HDD gets damaged, and the MP cannot boot up as a result.
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-5
(6) The MP restarts automatically after the following window appears.
1200_300178.ai
(7) Press the <Enter> key to close the Command Prompt window.
u INSTRUCTION u
For two MP configuration, perform steps (2) to (7) for the other MP.
(8) Remove the MP OS Installer Ver. 1.0 media from the DVD drive for the
DX Console and restart the system.
(9) Check the MP OS version.
{MC: Appendix 2.1_Checking the MP OS Version}
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-6
Appendix 2.4 Countermeasure for the Error ■ If the DVD drive is recognized in different devices with /mnt/
cdrom1
Occurrence
The following error appears.
If an error is generated when mounting the DVD drive, take necessary actions as
follows.
■ If the /mnt/cdrom folder does not exist

1200_300174.ai
Execute the following command to check the device name.

Execute the following command to create the folder. “lsΔ/dev/” (Δ shows a space)
“mkdirΔ/mnt/cdrom” (Δ shows a space)
1200_300172.ai
NOTE
If an attempt is made to create the folder when the /mnt/cdrom folder exists, the 1200_300175.ai
following error appears.
After the device name (cdrom*) appears, execute the “mount” command.
REFERENCE
“*” is usually one-digit number.
NOTE
When there are multiple “cdrom*”, even if the “mount” command is successful, the “cd”
command may fail.
1200_300176.ai
1200_300173.ai
In this case, specify the other “cdrom*” after restarting the MC, then execute the “mount”
command.
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-7
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxMC2-8
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxMC3-1
Appendix 3. Cleaning Fluids 7 Lateral surface
Describe cleaning fluids that can be used for cleaning the parts of the equipment.
■ SE 11
10 Battery pop-up mechanism
2 Flat panel sensor identification lamp 8 Status lamp

10
3 Painted back
11 Battery receiver
6
1 Counter
4 Switch
1
5 Sleep lamp
9 Battery insertion section

2 6 6 2
1200_300196E.ai
7 8 9 10 11
6 Grip seal
A Ethanol (concentration of 99.5% or less) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Isopropyl alcohol
4 2 B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1200_300195E.ai
(concentration of 99.0% or less)
C Type FO Yes ─ Yes ─ ─
1 2 3 4 5 6
D Mikrobac Tissue Yes ─ Yes Yes ─
Ethanol (concentration of 99.5%
A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes E Clinell wipes Yes ─ Yes Yes ─
or less)
Isopropyl alcohol F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI ─ ─ ─ Yes ─
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI ─ Yes No Yes Yes
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ─
J CALTECH DISPATCH ─ Yes No Yes Yes
J CALTECH DISPATCH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form No No No Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes No Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
O Bacillol AF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
O Bacillol AF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
P Bacillol plus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
P Bacillol plus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
018-230-06E
AppxMC3-2
13 Latch case 17 Surface periphery
18 Surface
14 Latch periphery
15 Back periphery
1. Battery pack
12 Latch surface 2. dummy battery
1200_300198E.ai
16 Label
17 18
1200_300197E.ai
A Ethanol (concentration of 99.5% or less) Yes Yes
12 13 14 15-1 15-2 16 Isopropyl alcohol
B Yes Yes
A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C Type FO ─ Yes
or less)
Isopropyl alcohol D Mikrobac Tissue ─ Yes
B Yes ─ Yes No Yes Yes
E Clinell wipes ─ Yes
C Type FO Yes ─ ─ ─ Yes ─
F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes
D Mikrobac Tissue Yes ─ Yes No Yes ─
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes
E Clinell wipes Yes ─ Yes No Yes ─
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI Yes ─
J CALTECH DISPATCH Yes ─
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes
H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI ─ ─ Yes ─ No ─
L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI ─ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form Yes No
J CALTECH DISPATCH ─ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes
O Bacillol AF Yes Yes
P Bacillol plus Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form No Yes Yes No Yes No
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
018-230-06E
AppxMC3-3
19 Cover ■ MP
21 Top cover
24 Air filter
20 Connector 22 Power status LED
1200_300199E.ai
23 Side cover 25 Rear cover

19 20
A Ethanol (concentration of 99.5% or less) Yes Yes 21 Surroundings
of the main switch
Isopropyl alcohol
B Yes Yes
26 Fixture
C Type FO Yes ─ 1200_300200E.ai
D Mikrobac Tissue Yes ─

21 22 23 24 25 26
E Clinell wipes Yes ─
A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes or less)
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes Isopropyl alcohol
B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI No ─
C Type FO Yes ─ ─ Yes ─ ─
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI Yes Yes
D Mikrobac Tissue Yes ─ ─ Yes ─ ─
J CALTECH DISPATCH Yes Yes
E Clinell wipes Yes ─ ─ Yes ─ ─
K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes
L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form Yes Yes
H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI No ─ ─ No ─ ─
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
O Bacillol AF Yes Yes
J CALTECH DISPATCH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
P Bacillol plus Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes
R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
018-230-06E
AppxMC3-4
35 Sticker
■ DS
27 Guide 28 Shutter
36 Sticker
29 Sticker
30 Shutter
31 Inlet cover
32 Sticker
37 Rear cover
33 Status lamp
34 Front cover
1200_300202E.ai
35 36 37
1200_300201E.ai A Ethanol (concentration of 99.5% or less) Yes Yes Yes

Isopropyl alcohol
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 B Yes Yes Yes
Ethanol (concentration of C Type FO Yes Yes ─
A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
99.5% or less)
D Mikrobac Tissue Yes Yes ─
Isopropyl alcohol (concentration
B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
of 99.0% or less) E Clinell wipes Yes Yes ─
C Type FO ─ ─ Yes ─ Yes Yes ─ ─ F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes Yes
D Mikrobac Tissue ─ ─ Yes ─ Yes Yes ─ ─ G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes Yes Yes
E Clinell wipes ─ ─ Yes ─ Yes Yes ─ ─ H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI ─ ─ ─
F SUPER SANI-CLOTH PDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI ─ ─ Yes
G SANI-CLOTH PLUS PDI Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes J CALTECH DISPATCH ─ ─ Yes
H SANI-CLOTH AF PDI Yes ─ ─ ─ No ─ ─ Yes K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes Yes
I SANI-CLOTH Bleach Wipe PDI ─ Yes ─ Yes Yes ─ Yes ─ L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes Yes
J CALTECH DISPATCH Yes Yes ─ Yes Yes ─ Yes Yes M Bacillol@30Form No No Yes
K Mikrozid AF Liquid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes Yes
L Mikrozid AF Wipes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes O Bacillol AF Yes Yes Yes
M Bacillol@30Form Yes No No No Yes No No Yes P Bacillol plus Yes Yes Yes
N MELISEPTOL rapid Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes Yes Yes
O Bacillol AF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes Yes
P Bacillol plus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Q Meliseptol Foam Pure/Fresh Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
R MELISEPTOL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
018-230-06E
Control Sheet

018-230-07E
MU1-1
1. DR Web Maintenance Tool Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool

u INSTRUCTION u
 Outline of the DR Web Maintenance Tool Before starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool, check that the network cable
The DR Web Maintenance Tool is a tool for exclusive use of the service engineer to connections and the network settings are completed.
set and check the RU functional conditions by the operation from the CL. For mobile configurations, check that the FUJIFILM AP is connected.
The “OPERATION” and “INSTALLATION” exist for the DR Web Maintenance Tool. In
this manual each of the functions in the “OPERATION” are explained. (1) Open the Internet Explorer.
u NOTE u DR Web Maintenance Tool starts.
When installing the device, refer to the “INSTALLATION. u NOTE u

If “DR Web Maintenance Tool” is not displayed, then refer to “■ How to Register
u NOTE u the DR Web Maintenance Tool Home Page”.
The DR Web Maintenance Tool operating environment is as per the following.
- MC application: V15.2 or later (2) Select the “OPERATION” at the upper left corner of the window.
- OS: Windows7 or Windows10
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
u NOTE u
If Windows 7 is being used as the OS, then install Internet Explorer 11.
{IN:Appendix 19._Installing the Internet Explorer 11}
Since Internet Explorer 11 is already installed if Windows 10 is being used as the OS,
then the aforementioned procedures are unnecessary.
1200_400052E.ai
018-230-07E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual MU1-1
MU1-2
How to Register the DR Web Maintenance Tool Home Page

(1) Click at the upper right side of the window, and click [Internet
options].
1200_700565E.ai
(2) Input the following address in the “Home page” field, and click [OK].
1200_700566E.ai
DR Web Maintenance Tool address is registered to homepage.
018-230-07E
MU1-3
 Tree of PC-TOOL Tree of Maintenance Utility
0{1.6.4_Battery Information}
Tree of Maintenance Utility 0{1.6.5_SE Registration Information}
0{1.1_UPDATE SOFTWARE} 0{1.7_HISTORY}
0{1.1.1_Update MP} 0{1.7.1_UPRIGHT}
0{1.1.2_Update SE} 0{1.7.2_TABLE}
0{1.2_PANEL SETTING} 0{1.8_LOG}
0{1.2.1_SE Registration/Deletion} 0{1.9_UTILITY}
0{1.2.2_SE Wireless Setting} 0{1.9.1_Terminate MC}
0{1.2.3_LED Color Setting} 0{1.9.2_Reboot MC}
0{1.2.4_Memory Mode Setting} 0{1.9.3_Force Reboot MC}
0{1.2.5_D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion} 0{1.9.4_Web Maintenance Status}
0{1.3_CONFIG SETTING} 0{1.9.5_Check PING}
0{1.3.1_MC Setting} 0{1.9.6_Check FTP}
0{1.3.2_RU Image FLAG} 0{1.9.7_FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)}
0{1.3.3_Wireless Setting} 0{1.9.8_Force Serial ID Writing}
0{1.3.4_SE Sleep Mode Setting} 0{1.9.9_Replace Long Panel RMV Board}
0{1.4_CALIBRATION} 0{1.9.10_Replace MP}
0{1.4.1_SE Calibration} 0{1.9.11_LED Color RGB Setting}
0{1.4.2_Long Panel Calibration} 0{1.9.12_Battery Threshold Setting}
0{1.4.3_Sensitivity Correction Coefficient} 0{1.10_BACKUP/RESTORE}
0{1.4.4_GLG Calibration} 0{1.10.1_SE Correct Data Backup/Restore}
0{1.4.5_SE Correct Data Transfer} 0{1.10.2_D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore}
0{1.5_NETWORK SETTING} 0{1.10.3_DR-ID 1422SE Correct Data Back up/Restore}
0{1.5.1_Local Network} 0{1.10.4_Config Setting Backup/Restore}
0{1.6_CHECK DEVICE STATE} 0{1.10.5_HISTORY Backup}
0{1.6.1_Check Version} 0{1.10.6_LOG Backup}
0{1.6.2_Check Board Status}
0{1.6.3_SE Wireless Setting}
018-230-07E
MU1-4
1.1 UPDATE SOFTWARE 1.1.2 Update SE
The current versions of each SE software are displayed.
1.1.1 Update MP If "Updated Version" is newer, upgrade will be implemented.
The current versions of each MP software are displayed.
If "Updated Version" is newer, upgrade will be implemented.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (2)
(3)
1200_400053E.ai
(1) Click "UPDATE SOFTWARE" - "Update MP".

The Update MP window opens. (4)
(2) Select the target MP from the drop-down list box.

(3) Click [GET]. (5)
Update MP appears.
(4) Confirm the “Current Version” and the “Updated Version”.
1200_400054E.ai
(5) If "Updated Version" is newer, click [INSTALL]. (1) Click "UPDATE SOFTWARE" - "Update SE".
The MP software is updated with the updated version. The Update SE window opens.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
(3) Click [GET].
Update SE appears.
(5) If "Updated Version" is newer, click [INSTALL].
All of the target SE software is updated with the updated version.
018-230-07E
MU1-5
1.2 PANEL SETTING  SE Deletion
A registered SE can be canceled.
1.2.1 SE Registration/Deletion Used when the SE needs to be replaced.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE, or to cancel a registered SE. u NOTE u
Disconnect the SE cable and remove the battery from the SE before deleting the SE.
 SE Registration Otherwise, the SE cannot be deleted.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
1200_400056E.ai
1200_400051E.ai
(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "SE Registration/Deletion".

(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "SE Registration/Deletion".
The SE Registration/Deletion window opens.
The SE Registration/Deletion window opens.
(2) Click [Del] for the corresponding SE.
(2) Click [Add].
The Panel Deletion window opens.
The Panel Registration window opens.
(3) Click [OK].
(3) Input the serial ID and click [OK].
The SE Registration is deleted.
1200_400055E.ai
The serial ID of the SE is registered.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data
CDROM.
018-230-07E
MU1-6
1.2.2 SE Wireless Setting  Speed Measurement
Use this when the SE country code display, or when measuring the baud rates. Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured.
 SE Country Code Display

Display the SE Country Code
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
1200_400058E.ai
(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "SE Wireless Setting".

The SE Wireless Setting window opens.
1200_400057E.ai

(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "SE Wireless Setting".
The SE Wireless Setting window opens. (3) Click [START] in the "Speed Measurement".
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. Measurement of radio wave conditions starts, and SE wireless communication
speed is appears in pop-up window.
(3) Click [GET] in the “SE Country Code Display”. (4) Check that the average speed is following status.
The SE Country Code will be displayed. - DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1211SE, DR-ID 1213SE, DR-ID 1214SE, DR-ID 601SE,
DR-ID 611SE: 5000msec or less.
- DR-ID 1202SE, DR-ID 1212SE, DR-ID 602SE, DR-ID 612SE: 6000msec or less.
- DR-ID 613SE: 4000msec or less.
018-230-07E
MU1-7
1.2.3 LED Color Setting 1.2.4 Memory Mode Setting
Register the selector color of the SE. Check the memory exposure information, and set the Read Mode for the memory
The following colors can be selected. exposure mode.
White, Pink, Blue, LimeYellow, Purple, Orange
(1)
(1) (2)
(2) (3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(4)
1200_400060E.ai
(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "Memory Mode Setting".

1200_400059E.ai The Memory Mode Setting window opens.
(1) Click "PANEL SETTING" - "LED Color Setting". (2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box.
The LED Color Setting window opens.
(3) Click [GET].
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. The memory exposure information will be displayed.
(3) Click [GET]. (4) To change the Read Mode (Read Mode setting), enter the “Updated
The selector color appears. Value”, and click [SET].
(4) Check "Current Value" and "Updated Value". The Read Mode is registered.
(5) To change the selector color, select from the drop-down list box, and u NOTE u
click [SET]. In the Read Mode (read mode setting), set the Read Mode for memory exposure
The selector color is registered. in addition to the routine exposure.Any of "0", "1" or "2" can be inputted into [Read
Mode].
u NOTE u
Restart the SE when the selector color is registered. The selector color registration will
be reflected in the SE after restart.
018-230-07E
MU1-8
1.2.5 D-EVO GL Panel Registration/Deletion
u NOTE u
Not used in the DR-ID 1200.
018-230-07E
MU1-9
1.3 CONFIG SETTING u NOTE u
In accordance with the device usage configuration, the registered RU system If the current values are not displayed, click [Refresh].
configuration information can be checked and changed. The information whose
settings have been changed is written on the HDD.
1200_400061E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-10
1.3.1 MC Setting (1) Click "CONFIG SETTING" - "MC Setting".
The MC Setting window opens.
(2) To change the setting values, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]
at the bottom of the window.
The data is written into the HDD.
u NOTE u
(1)
Do not turn OFF the power of the MC during write into the HDD. Otherwise, the
HDD data gets damaged, and the MC cannot boot up.
(3) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT".
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
and then start the MC Manager from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
u NOTE u
For configurations whereas the MC application are being installed on the
MC computer, click "Utility" - "Exit the MC". When the Exit the MC window is
displayed, click "Start" in "Restart MC".
REFERENCE
The settings become effective after restart of the MC.
(2)
1200_400062E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-11
 Setting Items  OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT)
Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
 MC ID CODE [Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
Check just the SEs shared via multiple MCs when connected to FUJIFILM APs. <Options>
The “MC_ID_MODE” checks that other MCs are not redundant, and makes changes if - None: Not connected
they are redundant. - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
- MP2: Connected to MP2
{n OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)}
 EDIT RU NAME
Input the RU name.  OPE SETTING (TABLE)
u NOTE u Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method [Bed]
of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
The RU maximum input character count is 15 one-byte characters. <Options>
- None: Not connected
 CSL MAC ADDRESS (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
Inputs the MAC address [Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00].
u NOTE u
If the PC for MC is available, input this MAC address after starting the DX Console
with the Wake on LAN when turning ON the MC power.  OPE SETTING (FREE)
REFERENCE
[FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
<How to display the MAC address> - None: Not connected
(1) Press the Windows key and the [R] key concurrently. - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
→ The “Run...” window opens.
(2) Input “cmd/k ipconfig/all”, and click [OK]. ( indicates a space.)
→ The MAC address appears in “Physical Address” of the “Ethernet adapter Local
Area Connection:” block.  PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
method [Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
 CSL IP ADDRESS (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) <Options>
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1
Inputs the IP address [Default: 127.0.0.7].
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2
u NOTE u
If the PC for MC is available, change its IP address.
018-230-07E
MU1-12
 PORT SETTING (TABLE)  TABLE DIRECTION HEAD (for DR-ID 1422SE)
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative Selects the direction of the patient’s head during exposure on the bed.
method [Bed] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected. <Options>
<Options> - LEFT: Left
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1 - RIGHT [default]: Right
 UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE

 PORT SETTING (FREE) Selects whether the exposure image of the stand SE (FPD) is to be rotated
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative 180 degrees.
method [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected. <Options>
<Options> - none [default]: Not rotated
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1 - 180: Rotated 180 degrees
 NUM OF MP (s)
Specifies the number of MPs to be connected.
u NOTE u
Specify only the number of MPs. Do not include the number of PBs and DSs.
<Settable range>
- 0 [default]: Not connected
(such as a mobile configuration, a configuration using the DS only, etc.)
- 1: One MP connected
- 2: Two MPs connected
 NUM OF SE (s)
Specifies the number of SEs (FPDs) to be connected concurrently.
<Settable range>
- 1: One SE connected
- 2: Two SEs connected
- 3: Three SEs connected
- 4: Four SEs connected
- 5 [default]: Five SEs connected
018-230-07E
MU1-13
 READ MODE  Setting with the X-ray high voltage generator connected
Sets charge accumulation time of the SE (FPD). Eight options are available and are Select among variable modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is to be
divided into “fixed modes” and “variable modes”. connected.
- FIXED MODE X-ray irradiation Charge
Sets constant time irrespective of the X-ray irradiation time specified in each Option time specified in the accumulation Remarks
exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage generator is not exposure menu time
connected. 200 msec or less 200 msec
- VARIABLE MODE Accumulation might terminate during
The reading mode is changed over the FIXED MODE (200 ms), the FIXED MODE 3: VARIABLE 201 to 500 msec 500 msec X-ray irradiation (irradiation is forced to
(500 ms) and the FIXED MODE (1200 ms) depending on the X-ray irradiation time MODE (1.0) terminate at the same time), and might
1200 to 3800 result in images with insufficient dose.
specified in each exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage 501 msec or more
msec (*)
generator is connected.
181 msec or less 200 msec
u INSTRUCTION u
4: VARIABLE 182 to 454 msec 500 msec
If the X-ray irradiation time specified by the customer in the X-ray high voltage MODE (1.1)
generator is changed, the change cannot be reflected in the mode setting as the 455 msec or more
1200 to 3800
change is not fed back to the MC before exposure. If the X-ray irradiation time msec (*)
changed by the customer is longer than the charge accumulation time specified in the 166 msec or less 200 msec
MC, the irradiation is terminated upon completion of accumulation, and images with
insufficient dose may result. 5: VARIABLE 167 to 416 msec 500 msec
Usually select this mode.
Instruct the customer not to set the charge accumulation time longer than specified in MODE (1.2)
1200 to 3800
the mode when the customer is to change the X-ray irradiation time. 417 msec or more
msec (*)
REFERENCE 142 msec or less 200 msec
You can check the X-ray irradiation time specified in each exposure menu through the 6: VARIABLE 143 to 357 msec 500 msec
MODE (1.4)
user utility of the CL. 1200 to 3800
358 msec or more
msec (*)
 Settings without the X-ray high voltage generator connected 117 msec or less 200 msec
Select among the fixed modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is not 7: VARIABLE 118 to 294 msec 500 msec
connected. Ask the customer about the exposure conditions in which the longest MODE (1.7)
X-ray irradiation time is required when a fixed mode is to be used, and select the 1200 to 3800
295 msec or more
mode with a longer charge accumulation time specified than the X-ray irradiation time. msec (*)
Charge X-ray *: When selecting any of options 3 to 7, enable the X-CON setting in the DX Console, and
Option accumulation irradiation Remarks set the appropriate value to the irradiation time in the exposure menu.
time time Example) If "3" is selected, the charge accumulation time becomes 200 msec when the
irradiation time has been set to 190 msec with the exposure menu of the DX Console.
Select for exposures with low dose or
0: FIXED MODE 200 msec Also, the charge accumulation time becomes 500 msec when the irradiation time has
200 msec exposures considering throughputs such as
(200 ms) or less been set to 300 msec with the exposure menu.
chest mass-screening.
1: FIXED MODE 500 msec
500 msec Usually select this mode.
(500 ms) [default] or less
2: FIXED MODE 1200 to 3800 1200 to 3800 Image quality might degrade for low dose
(1200 ms) msec (*) msec exposures.
*: Charge accumulation time is set in “MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME”.
018-230-07E
MU1-14
l MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME  EMERGENCY MODE
Sets the charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2. Set in a range of 1.2 to 3.8 s. Set whether the emergency mode is to be used or not.
The setting can be changed in 0.2-s steps. <Options>
<Settable range> - OFF [default]: Not used
- 1.2 to 3.8 s [default: 1.2 s] Charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2 - ON: Used
u NOTE u REFERENCE
For the facilities that may use the machine long time under high temperature, to Emergency mode is the mode that the calibration would be stopped automatically and
prevent artifact, it is recommended to set the charge accumulation time of READ the exposure would be ready when the system starts.
MODE 2 at or lower than 1.2 seconds. When it is set to ON, the exposure would be ready as soon as the system starts.
 BATTERY WARNING[min]
l MODE 3 EXPOSURE TIME Sets the threshold value of remaining battery charge.
u NOTE u If the remaining battery charge lowers to the set threshold value, exposure cannot be
accepted. The SE LED flashes in this case.
Do not use this item. The setting is made as the remaining battery time (minutes).
Always use the setting of 10 [default] in this machine.
<Settable range>
l Smart Switch HIGH SENSITIVE MODE TARGET - 0 to 120 minutes [default: 10]
u NOTE u
 SE BATTERY WATCHING (when connecting cables)
Do not use this item.
Set this option to ON for a configuration, such as the mobile configuration, wired with
the SE but the battery of which is not charged.
Set this to OFF [default] for a configuration including the MP, DS, and PB.
 AUTO DETECT <Options>
Set whether to use the automatic X-ray detection function (AUTO DETECT) or not. - OFF [default]: Not watched
<Options> - ON: Watched
- OFF [default]: Not used REFERENCE
- ON: Used
This function depends on whether this machine supplies power to the SE.
- Supply power to and communicate with the SE.
 CONNECTING CU Irrespective of ON or OFF, the battery is monitored.
Set to CONNECTED when the machine is to be connected to the DX Console to - Supply no power to but communicate with the SE.
which AcSelarete or CALNEO U/T is connected. If setting to "OFF", does not activate monitoring of the battery.
Usually, use the setting of NOT CONNECTED [default]. If setting to "ON", activates monitoring the battery.
<Options>
- NOT CONNECTED [default]
- CONNECTED
018-230-07E
MU1-15
 MC-PC EXISTENCE  OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)
Set the availability of the PC for the MC. OPE SETTING corresponds to Reader Type (selector) set on the DX Console.
<Options> Make the OPE SETTING and Reader Type settings coincide with each other.
- NOT EXIST [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC.
Web Maintenance Software Selector (DX Console)
- EXIST: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC.
 A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE

Set the termination processing queue control of the MC and the Console.
<Options>
- SYNC [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC.
- ASYNC: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC.
 LONG TIME ACCUM MODE

Set whether long time accumulation mode is to be used or not by selecting "ON" for
"AUTO DETECT" and "OFF" for "EMERGENCY MODE.
<Options>
- OFF [default]: Not used
- ON: Used Corresponding
1200_400063E.ai
REFERENCE
u NOTES u
- It takes 10 seconds to read the images by setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM - If [FPD-U] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
MODE" only when the specified menus are selected in the DX Console. When the
- Connect the stand-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
common menus are selected, the reading time is the one that set by "READ MODE".
- Specify the destination of connection via the Maintenance Software in [OPE
- When setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM MODE", set 7 minutes or more to
SETTING (UPRIGHT)] and [PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)].
"SLEEP START TIME" in "SE SLEEP MODE SETTING" window.
- Specify whether the exposure image is to be rotated 180 degrees via the
Maintenance Software in [UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE].
- If [FPD-T] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
 SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME - Connect the bed-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
Set a regulatory time to secure a required irradiation time when irradiation does not - Specify the destination of connection via the Maintenance Software in [OPE
continue for a preset time due to any reason such as a delay in communication. SETTING (TABLE)] and [PORT SETTING (TABLE)].
[default: 0] - Specify the direction of the patient’s head via the Maintenance Software in
[TABLE DIRECTION HEAD (for DR-ID 1422SE)].
REFERENCE
- If [FPD-C] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
The X-ray irradiation time is often stopped by a signal from the MP due to - Connect the free X-ray shot cable to the MP.
communication delays, which shortens the exposure time. To ensure the irradiation - Specify the destination of connection via the Maintenance Software in [OPE
time, set the SHOTGO OFF DELAY TIME value to around "the shortage of time + 10" SETTING (FREE)] and [PORT SETTING (FREE)].
ms.
018-230-07E
MU1-16
1.3.2 RU Image Flag (1) Click "CONFIG SETTING" - "RU Image Flag".
The RU Image Flag window opens.
(1)
u NOTE u
(2)
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
1200_400064E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-17
 Setting Items REFERENCE
- In comparison with High-Speed Mode, the time required for image acquisition in the
 GOS SHARPNESS FILTER Standard Mode is approximately 370 ms longer.
Select the sharpness of the GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE). - Even if the noise is generated via image evaluations whereas physical phantoms
Select HIGH when a highly sharp image is to be obtained, making use of the features such as mesh, etc. were used, this noise is not generated in human body exposures.
of DR.
Select NORMAL when an image with normal sharpness close to the FCR is to be
obtained.  IMAGE LOG SAVE
<Options>
- HIGH [default]: Highly sharp Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the HDD.
- NORMAL: Normally sharp Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
<Options>
u NOTE u - OFF [default] : Not stored
As this setting causes a large change of the image quality, select according to the - ON: Stored
desire of the user. u NOTE u
REFERENCE
When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
This setting does not influence the image quality of the CsI panel (1211SE / 1212SE /
1213SE / 1214SE).
 IMAGE LOG SAVE TO FTP
Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the FTP.
 IMAGE READING MODE Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
<Options>
u NOTE u - OFF [default] : Not stored
For the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this setting is disabled. - ON: Stored
u NOTE u
Selects the image compensation processing mode.
Normally use the default setting. If the noise is generated via image evaluations When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. were used, change to the Standard
Mode.
<Options>  OFFSET2 (blemish/unevenness correction setting)
- Standard Mode
Select whether or not the blemish/unevenness correction is to be performed.
- High-Speed Mode [default]
<Options>
u NOTE u -
OFF: Not performed
When this setting has been changed, perform the full calibration after restarting the -
ON [default]: Performed
MC in the following procedure. If not, the image compensation processing mode is not
switched correctly.
1. Change the setting.  T2 TIMER(sec)
2. Restart the MC. Set the start time (sec) of the calibration executed in the background. When the
3. Perform the full calibration. exposure has been completed, the calibration begins after the time elapsed that was
set.
- Character string: [default: 120]
018-230-07E
MU1-18
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION
Set whether the automatic defect calibration is to be executed or not.
<Options>
- OFF: Not executed
- ON [default]: Executed
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START HOURS

When "ON" is selected in "AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION", input the automatic
execution time hourly.
- 2-character string or less [default: 4]
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START MINUTES

execution time minutely.
 OFFSET JUDGING
<Options>
-
OFF: Not performed
-
018-230-07E
MU1-19
1.3.3 Wireless Setting (1) Click "CONFIG SETTING" - "Wireless Setting".
The Wireless Setting window opens.
(1)
u NOTE u
(2)
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
1200_400065E.ai The settings become effective after restart of the MC.
018-230-07E
MU1-20
 Setting Items u NOTE u
u NOTE u 48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
Select the same settings for the AP. be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
{IN1:14._Installing the RU Software} GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
 ESSID - When the system coexistent with the SE of DR-ID 600 series and DR-ID 1200
Sets the network identifier of the wireless LAN for the SE. series, only use channels that have been used conventionally.
Usually use the setting of FUJIAP01 [default].
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so u NOTE u
that the identifiers of the respective SE’s do not overlap.
Make the same setting of the identifier on the AP. perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
<Options> with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
- FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, MANUAL [default: FUJIAP01] - In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
detection.
 ESSID MANUAL (arbitrary ID setting for wireless LAN) - If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
Sets an arbitrary ID in case that “MANUAL” has been selected at “ESSID”. communications will be interrupted, and the channel will be changed. After the
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
that the ID's of the respective SE’s do not overlap. Make the same setting of the ID on again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless
the AP. communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
- A single-byte text string of 32 characters or less [default: blank] automatically follow over to the AP channel. The wireless communications will be
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS
 CHANNEL & MODE search operation.
Selects the wireless channel to be used. The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for check.
For the procedure to check the log, refer to the following.
Setting a dual channel with higher communication rate is recommended for the
machine. {MT:7._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
If the communication rate drops, overlapping channels in the site are possibly present.
Change the setting.
REFERENCE
 WLAN OUTPUT
Set whether the wireless LAN output is to be used or not.
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT <Options>
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following.
- OFF: Not used
{IN: Appendix 7_Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point} - ON [default]: Used
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
- The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40
MHz. The 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band,
but the channel cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band.
018-230-07E
MU1-21
 WLAN AUTO RATE  ENCRYPTION (encryption yes/no setting)
Set whether the wireless LAN transmission rate is constant or varible. This sets whether wireless communication is to be encrypted or not.
<Options> <Options>
- CONSTANT [default] • OFF: No encryption
- VARIABLE • ENCRYPTION [default]: WPA2-PSK encryption
REFERENCE • EAP-TLS: EAP-TLS encryption
REFERENCE
If the wireless environment is not stable or easily fluctuates, set to “VARIABLE”. If the
wireless environment is stable, use “CONSTANT”. - For MC V12 or earlier, the default value is "OFF".
- When selecting "ENCRYPTION", a separate encryption setting on the AP side is
also required.
Encryption method: AES
 COUNTRY CODE (xxxx)
Authentication method: WPA2-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 Pre Shared Key)
Since there is wireless communication with SE, inputting the country code according - When SE is shared by multiple systems, the encryption settings in the SE are
to the country where it used is required. rewritten by connecting the SE once to the SE cable of the movement destination.
u NOTE u
- Change the country code for the countries where SE is used.
 ENCRYPTION KEY (encryption key)
China: 156 Enter the text string (pass phrase) for generation of the encryption key for wireless
Taiwan: 158 communication.
<Setting range>
- For MC V2.2 or later, input "4036". A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujifilm]
- For MC V2.1 or earlier;
REFERENCE
When only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, input "4015".
When the system coexistent with the SE of DR-ID 600 series and DR-ID 1200 - The pass phrase entered for this item also must be set on the AP side.
series, input "4036". - This unit is not compatible with the pass phrase automatic change function (only
manual setting is possible).
 BSSID (xxxxxxxxxxxx)
Input the MAC address of the AP (BSSID) when wireless connection is to be made  FIPS MODE (encryption setting for image transfer)
by specifying the AP. Although input is not needed usually, inputting the BSSID is This sets whether FIPS MODE is to be used or not.
recommended when two or more AP’s are to be used. <Options>
The MAC address is mentioned on the label or in the instruction manual of the AP. • OFF [default]: Not used
<Settable range> • ON: Used
- 12-character string [default: 000000000000] REFERENCE
- Image transfer is to be encrypted only for wireless communications.
- This setting does not cover the 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE.
018-230-07E
MU1-22
1.3.4 SE Sleep Mode Setting (1) Click "CONFIG SETTING" - "SE Sleep Mode Setting".
The SE Sleep Mode Setting window opens.
(1)
u NOTE u
(2)
1200_400066E.ai
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
018-230-07E
MU1-23
 Setting Items
 SE SLEEP MODE
Set the SE sleep mode.
<Options>
- OFF: Disable the power save mode.
- ON [default]: Enable the power save mode.
 SLEEP START TIME (min)

Set the time in minutes units until when the power save mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 10 [default: 2]
REFERENCE
Shift to the sleep mode mainly in the following cases.
- After completing the initialization calibration
- After completing the exposure
- After cancelling the exposure
- After switching the panel by changing the selector for the DX Console
- After completing the automatic offset update
- After completing the periodical defect calibration
- After completing the automatic log update
 EXTRA SLEEP START TIME (min)

Set the time in minutes units until when the extra sleep mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 999 [default: 999]
REFERENCE
- After all the SEs shift to the sleep mode and past the set time by this setting, shift to
the extra sleep mode.
- When set to “999”, do not shift to the extra sleep mode.
018-230-07E
MU1-24
1.4 CALIBRATION
1.4.1 SE Calibration
Used to make the following calibration on the SE.
(1)
Refer to the Installation manual for the detailed procedures.
{IN1:16._Calibration} (2)
- Offset Calibration
- Gain Calibration
- Defect Calibration
- Lag Calibration
u INSTRUCTION u
Check to make sure that background calibration (which takes place automatically
when the MC is started) is completed before carrying out the following calibration. (3)
The image correction data cannot be correctly performed if the calibration takes place
while the background calibration is in progress.
- Offset Calibration
- Gain Calibration
- Defect Calibration
- Lag Calibration
You can check whether background calibration is completed on the status lamp
“READY” of the SE
- While background calibration is in progress:
“READY” is flashing.
- While background calibration is not carried out: 1200_400067E.ai
“READY” is unlit.
(1) Click "CALIBRATION" - "SE Calibration".
The SE Calibration window opens.
u NOTE u
When performing the calibration with the FIPS MODE set to "ON" in the CONFIG
SETTING, a warning message is displayed to indicate that the data transfer rate (3) Implement each calibration.
is slow. Set the FIPS MODE to "OFF" or perform the calibration after wire-line
connecting the SE.
018-230-07E
MU1-25
 Offset Calibration (1) Click [START].
The offset correction data generation images (4 frames) are read out from the SE
Carries out offset calibration.
(FPD).
No exposure is made during offset calibration. If the offset correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, “Succeeded”is
REFERENCE displayed on the pop-up window.
The offset calibration takes place for all of connected SE’s. u NOTE u
Clicking [START] during automatic offset update (approximately 30 seconds
every 10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” is displayed. Again click
[START] approx. 30 seconds later in this case.
REFERENCE
Whether the diagnosis is successfully completed appears on the result display
area.
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual
and take appropriate countermeasures.
(1)
(2) Click [OK].
1200_400069E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-26
 Gain Calibration (1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box.
Carries out gain calibration. (2) Click [START].
- Exposure count: 16 If the exposing preparations are finished, then [Ready] will be displayed on the
green button in the pop up window.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
Whether the calibration is successfully completed appears after completion.
(1)
(2) u NOTE u
If “NOT_READY” is displayed, reimplement after about a 5 second interval, and
after “READY” is displayed, then proceed to the next step (exposing). If exposing
is performed during a “NOT_READY” state, the calibration will fail, and abnormal
images will be generated.
(3) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Confirm that [Ready]
lights with the green button at each exposure.
u NOTE u
Perform the next exposure every time after [Ready] is lit up with the green button
because the [Ready] disappears every exposure.
1200_400070E.ai
- Exposure conditions (1201SE, 1202SE, 1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE,

600SE, 601SE, 602SE, 613SE): Tube voltage of 75 kV, dose of 10 mR
- Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 75 kV, dose of 5 mR
The gain correction data generation images (16 frames) are read out from the SE
(FPD).
u INSTRUCTION u
Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec
cannot be made, since the maximum exposure time is inherently specified as
200 msec.
018-230-07E
MU1-27
When the gain correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,  Defect Calibration
“Succeeded” appears after completion.
Carries out defect calibration.
u NOTE u - Exposure count: 5
If “NG” appeared, check the following.
- Exposure condition
- Exposure field is the entire SE.
u NOTE u
If the calibration failed, restart the MC.
(4) Click [OK].
(1)
(2)
1200_400071E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-28
(1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box. When the defect correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
(2) Click [START].
If the exposing preparations are finished, then “OK” will be displayed in the u NOTE u
results display area. If “NG” appeared, check the following.
u NOTE u - Exposure condition
[START] approx. 30 seconds later in this case. (4) Click [OK].
REFERENCE
If the exposing preparations are finished, then [Ready] will be displayed on the
green button in the pop up window.
(3) Expose 5 times with the following condition.
u NOTE u

- Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 75 kV, dose of 2.5 mR
The defect calibration correction data generation images (5 frames) are read out
from the SE (FPD).
u INSTRUCTION u
200 msec.
u NOTE u
When performing defect calibration, make sure to have the exposure conditions
such as the correct dose setting (kV, mA, msec, SID) for defect correction
calibration.
If defect correction calibration is performed by using the exposure conditions for
gain correction, a defect is expanded and its size cannot be detected correctly.
As a result, because the number of the defects becomes an erroneous value and
the defect size is increased more than expected, a calibration error may occur.
018-230-07E
MU1-29
 Lag Calibration (1) Select the target operative method from the drop-down list box.
Carries out lag calibration. (2) Click [START].
- Exposure count: 1
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
After about 2 minutes, the [Ready] button will be displayed in green in the pop up
window.
u NOTE u
If you perform exposure before [Ready] is lit up with the green button, calibration
will fail and create an abnormal image.
(3) Expose 1 time with the following condition.

(1) 600SE, 601SE, 602SE, 613SE): Tube voltage of 80 kV, dose of 100 mR or
more, irradiation time of 200 msec or shorter
(2) - Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 80 kV, dose of 100 mR
or more, irradiation time of 200 msec or shorter
Images for lag correction data generation (7 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
Images of seven frames are read with a predetermined interval for one exposure.
The number of image reads is displayed in the format of “n/7”.
1200_400072E.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
200 msec.
018-230-07E
MU1-30
u NOTE u 1.4.2 Long Panel Calibration
- In the beginning when afterimage calibration is implemented, record the u NOTE u
exposing conditions, and subsequently be sure to expose with the same
conditions. Not used in the DR-ID 1200.
This is for comparing the afterimage amounts over time, so that SE (FPD)
degradation analysis can be done in advance.
- If 100mR or greater irradiating cannot be performed via conditions with a
80kV tube voltage, and maximum irradiating times of 200 ms, then close the
distance between the X-ray tube and the panel as much as possible (to the
limit whereas the entire panel will be irradiated by the X-rays).
Nevertheless, if 100mR or greater irradiating cannot be performed, raise the
tube voltage up to 100kV. With these conditions, if the irradiating is 20mR or
greater, implement the afterimage correction calibrating.
If the aforementioned conditions do not reach 20mR or greater, the afterimage
correction calibrating needs to be implemented via another X-ray device.
When the log correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
u NOTE u
(4) Click [OK].
018-230-07E
MU1-31
1.4.3 Sensitivity Correction Coefficient 1.4.4 GLG Calibration
It is used when selecting the target SE and changing the sensitivity correction Zero point adjustment for the high G sensor (3 directions) is performed. GLG
coefficient. calibration must be performed at the time of replacement of the GLG board.
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400074E.ai
(1) Click "CALIBRATION" - "GLG Calibration".

The GLG Calibration window opens.
(3) Click [START].
1200_400073E.ai If it is successful the high G sensor 0G output will be acquired, “Succeeded”
(1) Click "CALIBRATION" - "Sensitivity Correction Coefficient". appears in the pop up window.
The Sensitivity Correction Coefficient window opens. (4) Click [OK].
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box. The offset value is stored in the FRAM of the GLG board (restart is not required).
REFERENCE
(3) Click [GET].
The Sensitivity Correction Coefficient are displayed. After execution of calibration, the actually measured value min us the offset value
is stored in the log as the measured value.
(4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The SE software will be updated with the updated version.
018-230-07E
MU1-32
1.4.5 SE Correct Data Transfer n SE Correct Data Forced Transfer
It is used to confirm or set the SE correct data. Transfer the SE correct data retained by the MC to the SE.
- SE Correct Data Forced Transfer
u INSTRUCTION u
- SE Correct Data Save Status
- SE Correct Data Status (Memory) After forcing the transfer of the SE correct data, perform “n SE Correct Data Forced
- SE Correct Data Status (FLASH) Transfer” to check the correction data status.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(3)
1200_400076E.ai
(1) Click [START].

“Succeeded” appears in the pop up window after finishing transfer.
(2) Click [OK].
1200_400075E.ai
(1) Click "CALIBRATION" - "SE Correct Data Transfer".

The SE Correct Data Transfer window opens.
(3) Implement the correction data processing.
018-230-07E
MU1-33
 SE Correct Data Save Status  SE Correct Data Status (Memory)
After finishing the full calibration or the SE correct data transfer, check whether the Check the list of correct data stored by the memory in the SE.
correction data storage has been completed or not.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
1200_400078E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The list of correct data is displayed.
(2) Confirm the list of correct data.
1200_400077E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The correct data save status is displayed.
(2) Confirm the correct data save status.
018-230-07E
MU1-34
REFERENCE  Correct Data Status (FLASH)
- There is no problem if the list of correct data is displayed as shown below. Check the list of correct data stored in the FLASH of SE.
In addition, the display of the “Mode3OffsetDataAvailable” -
“Mode6OffsetDataAvailable” and “Mode3InitialCalibrationCompleted” depends on
the setting for the LONG TIME ACCUM MODE. Therefore, there is no problem if “NG”
is displayed.
GainDataAvailable :true
SensitivityDataAvailable :true
LagDataAvailable :true
Mode0OffsetDataAvailable :true
(1)
DotDefectDataAvailable :true (2)
LineDefectDataAvailable :true
InitialCalibrationCompleted :true
Mode3InitialCalibrationCompleted :true
- If the initialization calibration has not been completed, “false” is displayed.
1200_400079E.ai
(1) Click [GET].

The list of FLASH correct data is displayed.
(2) Confirm the list of correction data’s (FLASH) saving conditions.
018-230-07E
MU1-35
1.5 NETWORK SETTING  MC ETH0 and MC ETH1
Used to set and check the IP addresses and to measure wireless communication rate. MC ETH0 indicates the network setting between the MC and CL, and MC ETH1
indicates the network setting between the MC and MP.
u INSTRUCTION u The connection diagram of the MP/MC/CL and default IP addresses are shown below.
The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value among the - In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC
MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, the network among MP MC CL
the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the machines might be needed
in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting of the ETH1
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.10
subnet mask. The default value of the subnet mask of the machine is 255.255.255.0,
and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the network address.
Segment No.
ETH0
172.16.1.10 172.16.1.20
192.168.0.0 DRID600_G00091.ai

Network address
MP MC/CL
Host address
DRID600_G0070.ai
ETH1
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.10
ETH0
172.16.1.20
DRID600_G0142.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-36
1.5.1 Local Network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING].
Input the set value when the IP address of the local network is to be changed. To The NETWORK SETTING window opens.
make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting (2) If the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask are to be changed,
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC. change the input values.
In order to activate the changed setting values, the respective SEs, MPs, and
CAUTION
MCs need to be activated (settings implemented).
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP, DS, AP and MC to make them (3) Implement the network settings pertaining to the respective SEs, MPs,
effective. If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might and MCs.
result in need of initializing the machine.
u NOTE u
u INSTRUCTION u After setting, implement “■ Restarting the config and checking the setting
effected”.
If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address of the
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400111E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-37
 SE Network Setting (1) Click "NETWORK SETTING" - "SE Network Setting".
The SE Network Setting window opens.
Set the SE’s IP address.
CAUTION
(3) Click [GET].
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP, DS, AP and MC to make them The IP Address of the SE (wired wireless) are displayed.
effective. If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might
result in need of initializing the machine. (4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The IP Address of the SE will be updated.
<Enabling the set value (SE)> (5) Remove the battery pack from the SE.
u INSTRUCTION u (6) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE.
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP (7) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (2) to (6).
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE.
(8) Reinstall the SE cable and battery pack on the SE whose setting has
been completed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400112E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-38
 MP Network Setting (1) Click "NETWORK SETTING" - "MP Network Setting".
The MP Network Setting window opens.
Set the MP’s IP address.
(2) Select the target MP from the drop-down list box.
CAUTION
(3) Click [GET].
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective. The IP Address of the MP (wired wireless) are displayed.
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in
need of initializing the machine. (4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The IP Address of the MP will be updated.
(5) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON again.
(1)
u NOTE u
(2)
(3)
(4) displayed, click "Start" in "Restart MC".
(4)
1200_400113E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-39
 MC ETH1 Network Setting  Restarting the config and checking the setting effected
Set the following MC addresses.
- IP Address (Default: 192.168.0.10)
- Subnet Mask (Default: 255.255.255.0)
(4)
CAUTION (5)
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective. (6)
need of initializing the machine.
(1)
1200_400115E.ai
(1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
(2) Turn ON the power in the order named of the MP, CL and MC.
(2) (3) Start up the MUTL.
(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING] and click [SE Network Setting].
(2) The SE Network Setting window opens.
1200_400114E.ai (6) Click [GET].
(1) Click "NETWORK SETTING" - "MC ETH1 Network Setting". Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
The MC ETH1 Network Setting window opens. REFERENCE
(2) To change the addresses, enter the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]. If you confirm the IP address of the SE, you can determine that the change in
The IP Address of the MC will be updated. settings of the MP and the MC normally ends. This is because connection of
the SE can be confirmed only when connection between the MC and the MP is
normal.
018-230-07E
MU1-40
1.6 CHECK DEVICE STATE  Check MP Version
1.6.1 Check Version

Check the version in MC, MP, SE.
 Check MC Version
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
1200_400081E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Version".

The Check Version window opens.
(2) Select the target MP in “Check MP Version” from the drop-down list
1200_400080E.ai box.
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Version". (3) Click [GET].
The Check Version window opens. The MP Version are displayed.
(2) Check the version in “Check MC Version”. (4) Confirm the “Current Version”.
018-230-07E
MU1-41
 Check SE Version
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1200_400082E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Version".

The Check Version window opens.
(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Version” from the drop-down list
box.
(3) Click [GET].
The SE Version are displayed.
(4) Confirm the “Current Version”.
018-230-07E
MU1-42
1.6.2 Check Board Status (3) Click [GET].
Check the MP and SE board conditions. In addition, implement the settings when the The MP board status will be displayed in the pop up window.
battery was first used, and run a GLG board self-diagnostic.
 Check MP Board Status
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_700554E.ai
- Fuse Status:
The status of the fuse connected with the MP board appears.
Normal: MPX Board Fuse Status: true, SE1 Fuse Status: true,
SE2 Fuse Status : true
1200_400083E.ai Defective: Other than above.
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Board Status". - Connector Status:
The Check Board Status window opens. The status of the connector connected with the MP board appears.
(2) Select the target MP in “Check MP Board Status” from the drop-down Normal: MPX Board Connector Status : true
list box. SE1 Connector Status : true
(when connected with the MPC board’s MPC6 connector cable)
SE2 Connector Status : true
Defective: Other than above.
- Fan Status:
The status of the fan connected with the MP board appears.
Normal: Fan Status: true
018-230-07E
MU1-43
- RemoteSW Status:  Check SE Board Status
The ON/OFF status of the remote switch appears.
ON: true
OFF: false
- MPX1 Shot Switch 1st Step Status:
The ON/OFF status of the MPX1 shot switch port 1 appears.
Shot Switch 1st: is ON: true
Shot Switch 1st is OFF: false (1)
(2)
- MPX1 Shot Switch 2nd Step Status:
The ON/OFF status of the MPX1 shot switch port 2 appears. (3)
Shot Switch 2nd is ON: true
Shot Switch 2nd is OFF: false
- MPX2 Shot Switch 1st Step Status:
The ON/OFF status of the MPX2 shot switch port 1 appears.
Shot Switch 1st: is ON: true
Shot Switch 1st is OFF: false
- MPX2 Shot Switch 2nd Step Status:
The ON/OFF status of the MPX2 shot switch port 2 appears. 1200_400085E.ai
Shot Switch 2nd is ON: true (1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Board Status".
Shot Switch 2nd is OFF: false The Check Board Status window opens.
(4) Check the board states, and click [Cancel]. (2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status” - "Board Status" from
the drop-down list box.
018-230-07E
MU1-44
(3) Click [GET]. - SE Button Status
The SE board conditions will be displayed in the pop up window. Displays the button status of the SE.
Normal: Extra Sleep Button Status: true or false
Memory Image Button Status: true or false
- Battery
Displays the following information on the battery
Battery ID: 0 to 65535
Manufacture Date:YYYY/MM/DD
Insert Withdraw Count:0 to 65535
Temperature:0 to 65535[0.1K]
Status:0xXXXX
Cycle Count:0 to 65535
First Use:
First Use Date:YYYY/MM/DD
(4) Check the board state, and click [Cancel].
1200_400088E.ai
- Board Status
Acquires the board conditions in the SE, and displays the contents.
Normal: Hardware Status : true
Configuration Status : true
Battery Status : true (when there is a battery)
MCU Status : true
SDCard Status : true
- Temperature
Displays the temperature of the stand SE.
Display example: Temperature = 29.4 deg C
018-230-07E
MU1-45
 Battery Start Date Setting  GLG Board Self-diagnostic
Set the start date for battery use. The following tests are performed for the GLG board, and the results (Succeeded/
Accurate display of the battery capacity becomes possible by performing “Battery Failed) are displayed in the result display area.
Start Date Setting”. - Memory check (writing of data to and reading of data from FRAM and RAM)
- Data acquisition from RTC
- Low G sensor data setting and data acquisition
- AD converter diagnosis
- Reading of set data
REFERENCE
Self-diagnostic of the GLG board is performed also at the time of equipment start.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400086E.ai
(1)
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Board Status".
The Check Board Status window opens.
(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status”-“Battery Start Date
Setting” from the drop-down list box.
(3) Click [SET].
If the battery usage start day has been set, and it is successful, a pop up window
(2)
displaying “Succeeded” will pop up.
(3)
(4) Click [OK].
1200_400087E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Check Board Status".

The Check Board Status window opens.
(2) Select the target SE in “Check SE Board Status”-“GLG Board Self-
diagnostic” from the drop-down list box.
018-230-07E
MU1-46
(3) Click [START]. 1.6.3 SE Wireless Setting
If the GLG board self-diagnostic has been started, and it is successful, a pop up Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured.
window displaying “Succeeded” will pop up.
REFERENCE
(4) Click [OK].
The details which are to be measured via “Panel settings” – “SE wireless settings” are
the same.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400090E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "SE Wireless Setting".

The SE Wireless Setting window opens.
018-230-07E
MU1-47
(3) Click [START] in the "Speed Measurement". 1.6.4 Battery Information
The wireless signal state measuring begins, and the SE wireless communications Check the battery serial no. In addition, the battery serial no. can be deleted.
speed is displayed in a pop up window. The measuring finishes after about one
minute.
(1)
1200_400091E.ai
(4) Check that the average speed is following status, and click [OK].
- DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1211SE, DR-ID 1213SE, DR-ID 1214SE, DR-ID 601SE,
DR-ID 611SE: 5000msec or less. (2)
- DR-ID 1202SE, DR-ID 1212SE, DR-ID 602SE, DR-ID 612SE: 6000msec or (3)
less.
1200_400092E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "Battery Information".

The Battery Information window opens.
(2) Click [GET].
Serial No. of the batteries are displayed.
(3) To delete the battery serial no., click [–], and click the [OK] in the pop
up window.
Serial No. of the batteries are deleted.
018-230-07E
MU1-48
1.6.5 SE Registration Information
Check the serial ID and IP address of the SE
(1)
(2)
1200_400093E.ai
(1) Click "CHECK DEVICE STATE" - "SE Registration Information".

The SE Registration Information window opens.
(2) Click [GET].
The registered serial ID and IP address of the SE are displayed.
018-230-07E
MU1-49
1.7 HISTORY (3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE exposing history. The history will be deleted.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1200_400094E.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) Click "HISTORY".

The HISTORY window opens.
(2) To confirm and make changes to the following information, input the
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the screen.
Item Function
Start Date Date when the RU software is installed
The information will be changed.
u INSTRUCTION u
To fix the “Start Date” input values, click [SET] at the bottom of the screen, and
the MC Manager needs to be restarted (if configured whereas the MC application
is installed on the MC computer, then turn OFF the MC’s main power breaker).
018-230-07E
MU1-50
1.7.1 UPRIGHT u INSTRUCTION u
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE(Upright) exposing history. After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) (1) Click "HISTORY" - "UPRIGHT".

The UPRIGHT window opens.
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
Item Function
Exposure Count Exposure count
Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)

(Exposure Count + Calibration)
Full Dose Total dose of exposures
Displays the exposure count for each of the
Dose Distribution (mAs) following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time Distribution (s) following ranges.
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
(2) Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) following ranges.
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
Shot Panel Temperature
following ranges.
Distribution (degrees)
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30<

(3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
The history is deleted.
1200_400096E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-51
1.7.2 TABLE u INSTRUCTION u
Display and edit statistical information pertaining to the SE(Table) exposing history. After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure.
(1) Click "HISTORY" - "TABLE".

(1) The TABLE window opens.
“Updated Value”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
Item Function
Exposure Count Exposure count
Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)

(Exposure Count + Calibration)
Full Dose Total dose of exposures
Dose Distribution (mAs) following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time Distribution (s) following ranges.
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) following ranges.
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
(2) Displays the exposure count for each of the
Shot Panel Temperature
following ranges.
Distribution (degrees)
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30<

(3) If the history is to be deleted, click [DELETE], and click [OK] in the pop
up window.
The history is deleted.
1200_400097E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-52
1.8 LOG
Refer to the log data, and check the error names and generation conditions.
(1)
(2)
1200_400095E.ai
(1) Click "LOG".

The Log window opens.
(2) Click [Refresh] to update the Log.
The latest log data is displayed.
(3) If the log history is to be deleted, click [DELETE] at the bottom of the
window, and click [OK] in the pop up window.
The log history will be deleted.
018-230-07E
MU1-53
1.9 UTILITY 1.9.1 Terminate MC
Implement the following utility functions in the maintenance software. Shut down the MC PC in the environments that have MC PC.
- Terminate MC u INSTRUCTION u
- Reboot MC
This function is deactivated in the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
- Force Reboot MC Console.
- Web Maintenance Status
- Check PING
- Check FTP
- FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)
- Force Serial ID Writing
- Replace Long Panel RMV Board
- Replace MP (2)
- LED Color RGB Setting
- Battery Threshold Setting
(1)
1200_400098E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Terminate MC".

The Terminate MC window opens.
(2) Click [START].
If the MC computers are shut down, and it is successful, a pop up window displaying
“Succeeded” will pop up.
(3) Click [OK].
018-230-07E
MU1-54
1.9.2 Reboot MC 1.9.3 Force Reboot MC
Shut down the MC PC in the environments that have MC PC. Reboot the MC Manager.
u INSTRUCTION u
This function is deactivated in the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
Console.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
1200_400100E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Terminate MC".

The Terminate MC window opens.
(2) Click [START] in the "Force Reboot MC"
1200_400099E.ai
Reboot the MC Manager, and if it succeeds, “Succeeded” will be displayed in the
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Terminate MC". pop up window.
The Terminate MC window opens. (3) Click [OK].
(2) Click [START] in the "Reboot MC"
Reboot the PC.
018-230-07E
MU1-55
1.9.4 Web Maintenance Status 1.9.5 Check PING
Check the Web Maintenance Tool versions. Implement a communications check via PING.
(2) (2)
(2)
(1) (1)
1200_400101E.ai 1200_400102E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Web Maintenance Status". (1) Click "UTILITY" - "Check PING".
The Web Maintenance Status window opens. The Check PING window opens.
(2) Click [GET]. (2) Input the connection confirmation IP address, and click [START].
The Web Maintenance Tool versions appears. PING is implemented, and the confirmation results are displayed in the pop up
window.
1200_400103E.ai
u NOTE u
If the communications verification is normal, “Succeeded” will be displayed.
When it fails, since “Failed” will be displayed, check the network connections.
(3) Click [OK].
018-230-07E
MU1-56
1.9.6 Check FTP 1.9.7 FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)
Access the FTP server from the CSL-PC, and check whether or not the FTP server is Implement the FTP server network settings.
operating.
Also, access the FTP server from the RU, and check whether or not the FTP server is
operating.
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
1200_400106E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "FTP Network Setting (for Active Line)".

The FTP Network Setting (for Active Line) window opens.
1200_400104E.ai at the bottom of the window.
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Check FTP".
The Check FTP window opens.
(2) Click [START].
The confirmation results are displayed in the pop up window.
1200_400105E.ai
(3) Click [OK].

018-230-07E
MU1-57
1.9.8 Force Serial ID Writing 1.9.9 Replace Long Panel RMV Board
Implement SE's serial ID forced writing. u NOTE u
(2)
(2)
(1)
1200_400107E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Force Serial ID Writing".

The Force Serial ID Writing window opens.
(2) Input the new SE serial ID, and click [SET].
The force serial ID writing will be implemented, and the implemented results are
displayed in the pop up window.
(3) Click [OK].
(4) Reboot the SE.
018-230-07E
MU1-58
1.9.10 Replace MP  MC ETH1 Network Setting
Configure the settings if the MP is to be replaced. Set the following MC addresses.
- IP Address (Default value: 192.168.0.10)
- Subnet Mask (Default value: 255.255.255.0)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2)
1200_400117E.ai
1200_400116E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Replace MP". (1) Click "UTILITY" - "Replace MP".
The Replace MP window opens. The Replace MP window opens.
(2) To change the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask, (2) If the address is to be changed, input “Updated Value” in the MC ETH1
change the input values. Network Setting window, and click [SET].
The address of the MC will be updated.
018-230-07E
MU1-59
 MC MP Network Setting  MP Network Setting
Set the MP1 and MP2 addresses. Set the MP IP address.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400118E.ai 1200_400119E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Replace MP".

The Replace MP window opens.
(2) If the MP1 and MP 2 addresses are to be changed, input “Updated
Value” in the MC MP Network Setting window, and click [SET].
The address of the MP will be updated.
u NOTE u
018-230-07E
MU1-60
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Replace MP". 1.9.11 LED Color RGB Setting
The Replace MP window opens. Set the LED display colors via the RGB.
(2) Select the target MP from the drop-down listbox in the MP Network
Setting window.
(3) Click [GET]. (1)
(2)
The IP Address of the MP is displayed.
(3)
(4) When making changes, input them in “Updated Value”, and click [SET].
The IP Address of the MP will be updated. (4)
(6) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". (4)
u NOTE u
MC computer, click "Utility" - "Exit the MC". When the Exit the MC window is 1200_400109E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "LED Color RGB Setting".
The LED Color RGB Setting window opens.
(3) Click [GET].
The SE LED colors is displayed.
The SE LED colors will be changed.
u NOTE u
018-230-07E
MU1-61
1.9.12 Battery Threshold Setting
Set the battery reserve threshold values
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
1200_400110E.ai
(1) Click "UTILITY" - "Battery Threshold Setting".

The Battery Threshold Setting window opens.
(3) Click [GET].
The battery reserve threshold values is displayed.
The battery reserve threshold values will be changed.
018-230-07E
MU1-62
1.10 BACKUP/RESTORE 1.10.1 SE Correct Data Backup/Restore
Backup/restore the configuration information and the error log in the HDD. Backup and restore the SE correction data.
You can backup/restore the following data: Backing up and restoring can be done per each SE1 sheet, or per batches.
- SE Correct Data u NOTE u
For 1 image: YYYYMMDDhhmmss- (Panel ID).ZIP
The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted.
For an SE batch: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP
- MC Configuration Data
YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP  Backup (Per Each SE1 Sheet)
- Exposing History (back up only)
YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-STATISTIC.ZIP
- The log (back up only)
ALL LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ALLLOG.ZIP
CALIBRATION LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CALIBRATIONLOG.ZIP
ERROR LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ERRORLOG.ZIP (2)
u NOTE u
- The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default.
- The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted.
(1)
1200_400120E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "SE Correct Data Backup/Restore".

The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Backup] of the target SE.
The backing up is implemented, and when it is completed the pop up window will be
displayed.
(3) Click [SAVE].
The back up file saving is completed.
u NOTE u
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-(Panel ID).ZIP
(4) Click [Open folder].

The back up file will be displayed.
018-230-07E
MU1-63
 Backup Package  Restore (Per Each SE1 Sheet)
(2) (2)
(3)
(1) (1)
1200_400121E.ai 1200_400122E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "SE Correct Data Backup/Restore". (1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "SE Correct Data Backup/Restore".
The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens. The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Turn ON the target SE checkbox. (2) Click [Restore] the target SE.
(3) Click [Backup Package]. The correction data restore window is displayed.
The backing up is implemented, and when it is completed the pop up window opens.
(4) Click [SAVE].
(3)
The backup file saving is completed.
u NOTE u (3)
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default. 1200_400123E.ai
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP

The backup file will be displayed.
018-230-07E
MU1-64
(3) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target correction data, click [OK].  Restore Package
u NOTE u
Select the file downloaded with DR Web Maintenance Tool.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-(Panel).ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, "Succeeded" will be displayed in (2)

the pop up window.
(4) Click [OK]. (3)
The SE correction data forced transferring is implemented, and if it completed,
"Succeeded" will be displayed in the pop up window.
(5) Click [OK]. (1)
1200_400125E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "SE Correct Data Backup/Restore".

The SE Correct Data Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Turn ON the target SE checkbox.
(3) Click [Restore Package].
The correction data restore window opens.
(4)
(4)
1200_400126E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-65
(4) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target correction data, click [OK]. 1.10.2 D-EVO GL Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Select the file downloaded with DR Web Maintenance Tool. Not used in the DR-ID 1200.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-PANELS.ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, "Succeeded" will be displayed in

the pop up window.
(5) Click [OK].
u NOTE u
To implement the SE correction data forced transferring, implement each SE.
018-230-07E
MU1-66
1.10.3 DR-ID 1422SE Panel Correct Data Backup/Restore 1.10.4 Config Setting Backup/Restore
u NOTE u Backup and restore the MC configuration data.
Not used in the DR-ID 1200.  Back up
(2)
(1)
1200_400127E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "Config Setting Backup/Restore".

The SE Config Setting Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Backup].
(3) Click [SAVE].
The backup file saving is completed.
u NOTE u
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP

The backup file is displayed.
018-230-07E
MU1-67
 Restore (3) Click [Browse], and after selecting the target configuration data, click
[OK].
u NOTE u
Select the file downloaded with DR Web Maintenance Tool.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CONFIG.ZIP
The restoring is implemented, and if it completed, "Succeeded" will be displayed in

the pop up window.
(4) Click [OK].
(2)
(1)
1200_400128E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "Config Setting Backup/Restore".

The Config Setting Backup/Restore window opens.
(2) Click [Restore].
The Restore configuration files is displayed.
(3)
(3)
1200_400129E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-68
1.10.5 HISTORY Backup 1.10.6 LOG Backup
Backup the exposing histories and battery information which is saved on the MC. Back up the following logs.
- All Log
- Calibration Log
- Error Log
(2)
(1)
(1)
1200_400130E.ai
(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "HISTORY Backup". (2)

The HISTORY Backup window opens.
1200_400131E.ai
(2) Click [Backup].

(1) Click "BACKUP/RESTORE" - "LOG Backup".
(3) Click [SAVE]. The LOG Backup window opens.
The backup file saving is completed. (2) Click [Backup].
u NOTE u The Save Log window opens.
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-STATISTIC.ZIP
(3)
The backup file is displayed.
(3)
1200_400132E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-69
(3) After selecting the log type, click [OK]. No. Select item Function
The target Log will be saved.
ISC TRACE LOG: Communication log
u NOTE u between packages (subsystems). For design
6 verification.
The backup files will be saved in the “Downloads” folder by default. Folder name: ISC
ALL LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ALLLOG.ZIP File name: ISC.LOG
CALIBRATION LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-CALIBRATIONLOG.ZIP Panel log. For design verification.
ERROR LOG: YYYYMMDDhhmmss-MC-ERRORLOG.ZIP 7
Folder name: MONOLITH
Communication log of TCP
(4) Click [Save]. 8
Folder name: NETWORK
The log file saving is completed. Communication log between packages
(5) Click [Open folder]. (subsystems). For design verification.
The X-ray automatic detection log and the
The log file is displayed. 9
compensation data share log are included
here.
Folder name: TRACE
 Log item
Copies the configuration information and the error log in the HDD to a desired location IO TRACE LOG: Not used in the machine.
10
Folder name: IOT
on the CL (a recording medium or a folder).
You can back up the following data: 11
Not used in the machine.
If “ALL LOG” is selected, all of the following logs will be backed up at one time. Folder name: LP_IMAGE
No. Select item Function Not used in the machine.

12
Folder name: ES_IMAGE
Calibration history log
1 CALIBRATION LOG Folder name: CALIB u NOTE u
File name: CALIB.LOG
Refer to the following for further details on the CALIBRATION LOG files, and GLG log
Error log files.
2 ERROR LOG Folder name: ERROR
File name: ERRORB.LOG {MT:8._BACKUP FILE}
Configuration file
3
Folder name: CONFIG
Communication log between the CL and the
MC
4
Folder name: CONSOLE
File name: CONSOLE.LOG
Panel drop/impact log
Folder name: GLG
When the following execution file is copied into
the folder where the log file is saved and is
double-clicked, a file converted to a viewable
5
format is generated in the same folder (file
name after conversion: GLG_[file name before
conversion]).
C:¥ProgramFiles¥FujiFilm¥FCR¥DR-
ID1200¥SYSTEM¥COMMON¥GLG.exe
018-230-07E
MU1-70
 Relation among configurations
 Point 1: X-ray shot cable
The name of a connector to which a cable of each operative method is
connected is registered in advance via the PC-TOOL.
Free
MC CSL
Table
X-CON Upright
[EDIT CONFIGURATION] [Selector Setting]
[Selector12]
[OP SETTING(FREE)]
AP [Selector1]
Defines the operative method.
[OP SETTING(TABLE)]
[Technique Code]:
[OP SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Reader Type]:
MP1 [MP1] or [FPD-C]: FREE exposure with FPD or
SE1 MPC7 MPX1 [MP2] or [FPD-T]: TABLE exposure with FPD or
SE serial No. MPC6 MPX2 [None] [FPD-U]: UPRIGHT exposure with FPD
[Caption]: Selector name
[PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Icon Type]: Selector icon
SE2 [MPX1] or
SE serial No. MP2 [MPX2] or
[Device Name]: Panel identification name
MPC7 MPX1 [None]

SE3 MPC6 MPX2 [Device Setting]
SE serial No. [MUTL] - [SE Registration] [Device Name]: Panel identification name
SE1: SE serial No. [FPD Device ID]: SE Serial No.
SE2: SE serial No. [Device Type]: Defines the panel for use.
SE3: SE serial No. [D-EVO] or
SE4: SE serial No. [AcSelarate]
SE5: SE serial No. [Device Color]: Identification of SE
 Point 2: SE serial No.

Serial Nos. of all panels are registered in advance via the PC-TOOL. Image processing is selected
The operative method for exposure and the panel to be used are determined based on the depending on the type of the panel.
CSL setting (not depending on the connector (MPC6 or 7) to which the panel is connected).
DRID600_G0139E.ai
018-230-07E
MU1-71
2. DS Utility 2.1.1 Startup Window
There are two special DS tools for service engineers as follows.  Display Window
- DS Service Utility
- DS Firmware Update Utility
2.1 DS Service Utility

Perform the following items with DS Service Utility.
- Changing the DS setting
- Verifying the operation during DS installation
- Displaying the log information for DS trouble
1200_400042.ai
 Function Description
Double-clicking “DockingStandService” icon on the desktop, the window opens.
- Address:
The Address Setting window opens.
- LED/Sound test:
LED/Sound test window opens.
- Luminance:
Luminance window opens.
- Log:
Log window opens.
- Shutdown:
Exit the DS Service Utility.
018-230-07E
MU1-72
2.1.2 Address Setting Window - Update:
The system ini file and the DS address information will be updated by the input
 Display Window content.
u NOTE u
The updated content will be reflected after restarting the DS and DS Service Utility.
- Reset:
Used to restore the DS address to the default value while pressing the reset button
on the DS body for startup.
The system ini file will be updated as the default value.
u NOTE u
- There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
Stand #1 to #3 buttons.
- The updated content will be reflected after restarting the DS and DS Service Utility.
- Addition:
1200_400043.ai
Used to add the DS.
 Function Description After inputting the IP Address and Port number of the added DS, clicking Addition
button, the system ini file will be updated by the input value.
Set the DS address information.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3: u NOTE u
Select the target DS. - There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side. Stand #1 to #3 buttons.
Blue: connected - The updated content will be reflected after restarting the DS and DS Service Utility.
Red: not connected
Yellow: address information updated - Delete:
- IP Address: Used to delete the information of the DS in use.
Input the IP Address. Leaving the IP Address and Port number blank, clicking Delete button, the
- Subnetmask: appropriate address information and ini file of the DS will be deleted.
Input the Subnetmask. u NOTE u
- Default gateway:
Input the Default gateway. - There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
- Port number:
Input the Port number.
- MAC address, Maker, Type, Date of MANUF, H/W Ver., S/W Ver., Serial No.(M), - End:
Serial No.(FF), Serial No.(PA):
Exit the Address setting window.
The appropriate items display.
018-230-07E
MU1-73
2.1.3 LED/Sound test Window 2.1.4 Luminance Window
 Display Window  Display Window
1200_400044.ai 1200_400045.ai
 Function Description  Function Description

Check the LED display and buzzer sound of the DS. Set the LED luminance of the DS.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3: - Docking Stand #1 to #3:
The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side. Select the setup target DS.
Blue: connected The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side.
Red: not connected Blue: connected
- Ready LED: Red: not connected
The Ready LED of the connected DS displays. - Ready:
- Selector #1 to #6: Input the integer 1 to 5 as the Ready LED luminance. (Default: 5)
The Selector LED#1 to #6 of the connected DS displays. - Selector #1 to #6:
- Buzzer: Input the integer 1 to 5 as the Selector LED luminance. (Default: 5)
The buzzer of the connected DS sounds. - Update:
- End: The LED luminance will be updated by the input content.
Exit the LED/Sound test window. - End:
Exit the Luminance window.
018-230-07E
MU1-74
2.1.5 Log Window
 Display Window
1200_400046.ai
Display the log information of the DS.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3:
Select the log acquisition target DS.
The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side.
Blue: connected
Red: not connected
- Acuisition:
The log information of the DS displays.
- File Name:
When output the log displayed on the window as the csv file, input the file name.
- Output Log:
Output the log as the csv file.
- End:
Exit the Log window.
018-230-07E
MU1-75
2.2 DS Firmware Update Utility  Function Description
Double-clicking “FirmwareUpdate” icon on the desktop, the window opens.
 Display Window Update the DS firmware.
u NOTE u
For updating the DS firmware version, refer to the following.
{IN1:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address_Updating the DS firmware version}
- Docking Stand #1:

Blue: connected
Red: not connected
- File name:
Set the file name of the update target firmware.
- Update:
The firmware updating starts.
1200_400047.ai
- Processing state:
The update status of the firmware is displayed.
Updating: started
Update complete: completed
- End:
Exit the DS firmware update utility.
u NOTE u
When updating the firmware, start the DS while pressing the reset button of the DS.
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 50, 64-67
11.28.2014 03 Revision (FM9281) 52-54
8, 10, 11, 20, 21, 34, 36-38, 40, 41,
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287)

51, 53, 54, 56, 59, 60
03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 42-50, 52, 55, 57, 58, 61-71
04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 34, 48, 51, 52
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 44-48, 52, 54-58, 63, 64
07.29.2016 06 Changes in pagination (FM9340) 49, 53, 59-62, 65-75
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 4, 30, 36, 44, 51, 56, 63

(RU PC-TOOL)
018-230-07E
MU2-1
1. PC-TOOL  Tree of PC-TOOL
 Outline of the PC-TOOL Tree of PC-TOOL
The PC-TOOL is a tool for exclusive use of the service engineer to set and check the PC-TOOL
RU functional conditions by the operation from the CL.
0{1.1_NEW}
 PC-TOOL Window 0{1.2_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
RU PC-TOOL Ver.*.* 0{1.3_DELETE}
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
EACH RU SETTING 0{1.4_MUTL}

CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU 0{1.5_PING}
*** RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION NEW
RU IP ADDR *** *** *** *** *** ***.***.***.*** ********* ***.*** 0{1.6_MON}
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE
0{1.7_FTP}
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION 0{1.8_INSTALL}
EDIT CL NAME
0{1.9_VERSION UP}
BACKUP RESTORE
0{1.10_EDIT HISTORY}
EXECUTE EXECUTE 0{1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
0{1.12_EDIT CL NAME}
ALL RUs SETTING 0{1.13_BACKUP}
UNINSTALL VERSION UP
DRID600_G0001.ai
0{1.14_RESTORE}
0{1.15_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
0{1.16_ERROR DB}
0{1.17_UNINSTALL (All RUs)}
0{1.18_VERSION UP (All RUs)}
0{1.19_Configuration}
0{1.19.1_CDPath}
018-230-06E
MU2-2
 [INSTALL] Button  [VERSION UP] Button
Unlike other types of machines, clicking [VERSION UP] causes only the MC
l When the PC for the MC exists application programs to be version-updated by the software installed in the HDD of
Clicking [INSTALL], an FTP folder is created in the FTP server HDD and then installed. the DX Console (FTP server).
REFERENCE
The MP and SE application programs are version-updated via the MC, by means of
FTP Server the software installed in the HDD of the DX Console (FTP server).
APL (DX Console) Execute the following command to version-update the MP and SE application
CD-ROM programs.
HDD
- Updating MP Application Software Version
Install >> Install MP Software >> MP1 Install>>MP1 Software VerUp Install
- Updating SE Application Software Version
Install >> Install SE Software >> Install SE FPGA Software, Install SE GLG Software,
Install SE LAN Software and Install SE MCU Software
DX Console
(FTP Server)
SE MP MC HDD
CD-ROM
DRID600_G0061.ai FTP
folder
l When the PC for the MC does not exist

Clicking [INSTALL], an FTP folder is created in the FTP server HDD. After the RU
software is copied in the FTP server, installed in the MC.
FTP Server
APL (Console Advance)
CD-ROM
HDD
MC SE MP MC
Flash Flash HDD

Memory Memory
SE MP DRID600_G0062.ai
DRID800_G0143.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-3
 Starting Up and Exiting the PC-TOOL
l Starting up the PC-TOOL
(1) Press the [Windows] key on the keyboard, and enter the Windows
Start menu.
(2) Open the "Run..." window from the Start menu of Windows. Specify
["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe"], and
then click [OK].
→ The “PC-TOOL” main window appears.
#2 [Type in or select]
...........
RUN ?
...........
Type the name of program, folder, document,or
........... Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you.
........... Open: “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”
...........
OK Cancel Browse...
...........
RUN...
#3 [Click]
...........
#1 [Click]
...........
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
DRID600_G0002.ai
l Exiting the PC-TOOL

(1) Click located in the upper right corner of the Main Screen of the PC-
TOOL.
018-230-06E
MU2-4
1.1 NEW 1.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU
 Function  Function
Sets the name and IP address of the RU when it is to be newly installed or added. Displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
 Procedures  Procedures
The example below shows how to register the RU whose IP address is "172.16.1.10". (1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. {MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL} The RU PC-TOOL window opens on the CL screen to display the “LIST OF
(2) Click [NEW]. EXISTING RU”, which displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
u INSTRUCTION u
(3) Set the “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”.
Uninstall the RU of interest if the “RU TYPE” column is left blank, and again
u NOTE u install it.
The maximum input character count for “RU NAME” is as per the following. Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
<Display example>
- MC application V3.4 or earlier: 16 one-byte characters
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION

RU NAME
RU IP ADDR
- MC application V11.0 or later: 15 one-byte characters ru0 172.16.1.10 DR-ID1200 V1.0

ru1 172.16.1.11 V1.0
BACKUP RESTORE
(2) NEW ALL RUs SETTING
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
Nothing is displayed.
1200_400001.ai
RU IP ADDR
CONNECTION TEST
BACKUP RESTORE
RU NAME ru0 (3) #1 (2) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.

ALL RUs SETTING
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 (3) #2
DRID600_G0003.ai
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
018-230-07E
MU2-5
1.3 DELETE 1.4 MUTL
 Function  Function
Delete the RU registered in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” from the FTP server. Performs Board check details/adjustment/checks and calibration.
u NOTE u  Starting Up and Exiting the MUTL
Be sure to back up the data before exercising the “DELETE” function.
l Starting up the MUTL
REFERENCE
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
Upon execution of “DELETE”, information of the corresponding RU is deleted from the {MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
“LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select an [RU].
 Procedures (3) Click [MUTL].

MUTL window appears on the CL screen.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. (3) <Display example>
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL} Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
LIST OF EXISTING RU
ru0 172.16.1.10 DR-ID1200 V1.0

RU NAME
(2) Select the RU to be deleted from the RU’s registered in the “LIST OF
RU IP ADDR
EXISTING RU”. ru1 172.16.1.11 ********* V1.0

BACKUP RESTORE
(3) Click [DELETE].

(2)
ALL RUs SETTING
<Display example>
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION MUTL window
ru0 172.16.1.10 DR-ID1200 V1.0
ru1 172.16.1.11 ********* V1.0
(2)
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
(3) DELETE
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
1200_400002.ai

1200_400003E.ai
l Exiting the MUTL

(1) Click in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
018-230-06E
MU2-6
n Common MUTL Operating Procedures l "Category change" buttons
The operating procedures common to various MUTL windows are described below: These buttons are used to change the displayed category. When you click the
“Category selection” buttons rightward arrow button, the next category appears on the display. Clicking the leftward
arrow button displays the previous category.
“Category change” buttons The following windows are used for the MUTL categories:
- MUTL window 1: NETWORK SETTING, SE SETTING, VERSION CHECK
“Function execution” buttons - MUTL window 2: INSTALL, BOARD STATE CHECK, CALIBRATION
- MUTL window 3: SYSTEM
l "Function execution" buttons

These buttons are used to execute the MUTL functions.
Some functions are executed the moment a button is clicked. The other functions are
executed when you enter a setting and then click a button.
l "Lower hierarchical level" mark ">>"

When you click a button having this mark, the associated lower hierarchical level
buttons appear on the display.
“Result display area” “Lower hierarchical level” mark 1200_400004E.ai l "Result display area"
Results of operation of the “Function execution” buttons are displayed as a text. The
l "Category selection" buttons
following types of displays are shown.
The "category selection" buttons are used to select an MUTL category. The following - OK/Error indication type
MUTL categories are selectable: Displays the MUTL result as “OK” or “Error”. “OK” appears if the result is good, and
- NETWORK SETTING “Error!!” appears if not. An error code is displayed on the right of “Error” in some
- SE SETTING cases.
- VERSION CHECK - Address indication type
- INSTALL Displays a network address or a MAC address.
- BOARD STATE CHECK - Board version indication type
- CALIBRATION Displays the version of the selected board.
- SYSTEM - Exposure count indication type
Displays the number of exposures in progress (exposure count).
018-230-06E
MU2-7
 Tree of MUTL Tree of Maintenance Utility
Tree of Maintenance Utility Connected SE IP Addr

0{[1]_NETWORK SETTING} Execute SE IP Setting
0{[1.1]_Local Network PreSetting>>} 0{[1.3]_MP Network Setting>>}
MC ETH1/MP>> 0{[1.3.1]_MP1 Network Setting>>}
MC ETH1 IP Setting for MP1
MP1 Setting for MP2
MP2 0{[1.3.2]_MP2 Network Setting>>}
SE Network Address Setting>> Setting for MP1
Input "OOO.OOO.OOO" No.(0-255) Setting for MP2
SE1-5>> 0{[1.4]_MC ETH0 IP Setting>>}
SE1 WIRED MC IP Address
SE1 WIRELESS MC SubNetMask
... MC Default GW
SE5 WIRED FTP IP Address
SE5 WIRELESS 0{[1.5]_Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)}
... 0{[1.6]_Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)}
SE46-50>> MC MAC Address
NEXT>> 0{[1.7]_Wireless Speed Measurement>>}
SE51-55>> SE1-10>>
SE51 WIRED Measurement for using SE1
SE51 WIRELESS ...
... Measurement for using SE10
SE55 WIRED ...
SE55 WIRELESS SE91-100>>
... 0{[2]_SE Setting}
SE96-100>> 0{[2.1]_SE Registration>>}
0{[1.2]_SE Network Setting>>} SE1-10>>
Connected SE Serial ID SE1 Serial ID
Connected SE Number ...
018-230-06E
MU2-8
Tree of Maintenance Utility Tree of Maintenance Utility
SE10 Serial ID GOS Sharpness Filter
... Offset2
SE91-100>> Image Reading Mode
0{[2.2]_SE DELETE>>} Read Mode
SE1-10>> 0{[2.8]_SE LED Color Setting>>}
DELETE SE1 Create LED Color>>
... PINK>>
DELETE SE10 R
... G
SE91-100>> B
0{[2.3]_LongPanel Registration>>} BLUE>>
0{[2.4]_LongPanel DELETE>>} R
0{[2.5]_BATTERY INFORMATIOIN>>} G
DISPLAY BATTERY SERIAL NO LIST B
DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION>> LIME YELLOW>>
Input Battery Serial No R
0{[2.6]_Battery Remaining Time Threshold>>} G
Inupt Threshold>> B
Threshold1[min] PURPLE>>
Threshold2[min] R
Threshold3[min] G
Regist Threshold>> B
Input SE No. [1-100] ORANGE>>
SE Serial ID R
Regist G
0{[2.7]_SE Memory Exposure Setting>>} B
Input SE No. [1-100] Selector Color Setting>>
SE Serial ID Input SE No. [1-100]
Mode2 Exposure Time SE Serial ID
018-230-06E
MU2-9
SE Selector Color MP2 Software VerUp Insatall
0{[3]_Version Check} 0{[4.2]_Install SE Software>>}
0{[3.1]_MC Version>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
Display MC Software Version SE Serial ID
Display MC Kernel Version Insatall SE FPGA Software
Display MC ALPS Version Insatall SE GLG Software
0{[3.2]_MP Version>>} Insatall SE LAN Software
0{[3.2.1]_MP1 Version Check>>} Insatall SE MCU Software
Display MP1 Software Version 0{[5]_Board State Check}
Display MP1 Kernel Version 0{[5.1]_MP Board State>>}
Display MP1 ALPS Version 0{[5.1.1]_MP1 Board State>>}
Display MP1 Driver Version Connector Status
0{[3.2.2]_MP2 Version Check>>} Fan Status
Display MP2 Software Version Fuse Status
Display MP2 Kernel Version RemoteSW Status
Display MP2 ALPS Version ShotSW Port1 Status
Display MP2 Driver Version ShotSW Port2 Status
0{[3.3]_SE Version>>} 0{[5.1.2]_MP2 Board State>>}
SE1-10>> Connector Status
Display SE1 Version Info Fan Status
... Fuse Status
Display SE10 Version Info RemoteSW Status
... ShotSW Port1 Status
SE91-100>> ShotSW Port2 Status
0{[4]_Install} 0{[5.2]_SE Board State>>}
0{[4.1]_Install MP Software>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
0{[4.1.1]_MP1 Insatall>>} SE Serial ID
MP1 Software VerUp Insatall SE Board State
0{[4.1.2]_MP2 Insatall>>} Temperature
018-230-06E
MU2-10
Battery 0{[6.4]_Lag Calibration>>}
BatteryDateSetting Input SE No. [1-100]
GLG Check SE Serial ID
GLG Calibration>> Operation Setting
Get X axial Offset Start
Get Y axial Offset Display Progress Status
Get Z axial Offset Display ShotRdy
Save Offset Data Create a Lag Data
0{[5.3]_SE SerialID Write>>} 0{[6.5]_Marker Calibration>>}
0{[6]_Calibration} 0{[6.6]_SE Correct Data Save Status>>}
0{[6.1]_Offset Calibration>>} Input SE No. [1-100]
Start 0{[6.7]_SE Correct Data Transfer>>}
Create an Offset Data Input SE No. [1-100]
0{[6.2]_Gain Calibration>>} 0{[6.8]_SE Correct Data Status>>}
Input SE No. [1-100] Input SE No. [1-100]
SE Serial ID 0{[6.9]_SE Flash Correct Data Status>>}
Operation Setting Input SE No. [1-100]
Start 0{[7]_SYSTEM}
Display Image Count 0{[7.1]_Termination>>}
Display ShotRdy Terminate
Create a Gain Data Forced Terminate
0{[6.3]_Defect Calibration>>} Forced Reboot
Input SE No. [1-100] Auto Shutdown Setting
SE Serial ID
Operation Setting
Start
Progress Indicator
Display ShotRdy
Create a Defect Data
018-230-06E
MU2-11
[1] NETWORK SETTING  MC ETH0 and MC ETH1
MC ETH0 indicates the network setting between the MC and CL, and MC ETH1
 Display Window indicates the network setting between the MC and MP.
NETWORK SETTING window The connection diagram of the MP/MC/CL and default IP addresses are shown below.
MP MC CL
ETH1
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.10
ETH0
172.16.1.10 172.16.1.20
DRID600_G00091.ai

MP MC/CL
ETH1
192.168.0.20 192.168.0.10
1200_400005E.ai
Used to set and check the IP addresses and to measure wireless communication rate. ETH0
u INSTRUCTION u 172.16.1.20
The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value among the
DRID600_G0142.ai
MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, the network among
the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the machines might be needed
in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting of the
subnet mask. The default value of the subnet mask of the machine is 255.255.255.0,
and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the network address.
Segment No.
192.168.0.0
Network address
Host address
DRID600_G0070.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-12
[1.1] Local Network PreSetting >>  Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u  Inputting the IP addresses
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [Local Network PreSetting >>].
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made. #1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING]
#2 Click: [Local Network PreSetting >>]
NETWORK SETTING window
 Display Window
#1
Local Network PreSetting>> window
#2 Local Network
PreSetting >> window
1200_700163E.ai
1200_400006E.ai
Input the set value when the IP address of the local network is to be changed. To
make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
018-230-06E
MU2-13
(2) Click [MC ETH1/MP>>] and input the MC/MP network address, then (3) Click the target SE, input the SE network address and click [SET].
click [SET]. Clicking [SET], the indication changes over to the input value, but the set value is
Clicking [SET], the indication changes over to the input value, but the set value is not effective. To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be
not effective. To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
enabled (setting executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
#1 Click: Target SE
#1 Click: [MC ETH1/MP>>] #2 Input: SE network address
#2 Input: MC/MP network address #3 Click: [SET]
#3 Click: [SET] Local Network PreSetting>>window
Local Network PreSetting >> window
#1
#1 SE1-5>>window
MC ETH1/MP>>window
#2
#2
#3
1200_700164E.ai #3
1200_700166E.ai
REFERENCE
By clicking [SE Network Address Setting] on the “Local Network PreSetting>>”
window, the SE Network Address Batch Setting window opens and the SE
network addresses can be set collectively.
(4) Clicking [BACK], return to the Local Network PreSetting window.
(5) If there is any item that you wish to input, click the corresponding
button and repeat procedures (3) to (4).
(6) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
018-230-06E
MU2-14
 Enabling the set value <Enabling set value (MP)>
(1) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
CAUTION
The MP Network Setting window >> appears.
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective. (2) Click [MP1 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
need of initializing the machine.
<Enabling the set value (SE)> The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears.
u INSTRUCTION u (4) Click [OK].
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP (5) Check that the set value is effective.
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE. #1 Check: OK indication
MP Network Setting>>window <Display example>
(1) Click [SE Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
The SE Network Setting >> window appears.
(2) Click [Execute SE IP Setting].
(3) Click [OK]. #1
(4) Check that the set value is effective.
#1 Check: OK indication
SE Network Setting>>window <Display example>
1200_700168E.ai
(6) Click [BACK] to return to the MP Network Setting >> window.

(7) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
#1
(9) Start up the MUTL, and click System\Shutdown\Forced Reboot.
1200_700167E.ai
(5) Clicking [BACK], return to the NETWORK SETTING window. u NOTE u
(6) Remove the battery pack from the SE. In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
click the MC Manager from the task tray and excute "EXIT". Check that the MC
(7) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE. Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
from "Start menu" → "Start-up".
(8) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (1) to (7).
(9) Reinstall the SE cable and battery pack on the SE whose setting has
been completed.
018-230-06E
MU2-15
<Enabling set value (MC)> <Restarting the machine and checking the setting effected>
(1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the NETWORK SETTING (1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
window.
(2) Click [OK].
(4) Click [Network Setting] and click [SE Network Setting >>].
(3) Check that the set value is effective.
Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
Update Network Setting REFERENCE
(MC ETH1) <Display example> If you confirm the IP address of the SE, you can determine that the change in
settings of the MP and the MC normally ends. This is because connection of
the SE can be confirmed only when connection between the MC and the MP is
normal.
#1
1200_700169E.ai

u NOTE u
In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-
Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
018-230-06E
MU2-16
[1.2] SE Network Setting >> [1.3] MP Network Setting >>

SE Network Setting >> window MP Network Setting >> window
1200_400007E.ai 1200_400008E.ai

Used to check information such as the serial ID and the SE No of the connected SE. Used to select the MP for making the MP network setting from the MP1 and the MP2.
The MP setting when shipped from the factory is set as MP1.
- Connected SE Serial ID: When two MP’s are connected, the second MP needs to be set as MP2.
The serial ID of the connected SE is displayed. {MU2: [1.3.1]_MP1 Network Setting >>}
When not connected: “No SE is Connected” appears.
- Connected SE Number:
The SE No. of the connected SE is displayed.
When not connected: “No SE Panel is Connected” appears.
- Connected SE IP Addr:
The IP address of the connected SE is displayed.
When not connected: “No SE Panel is Connected” appears.
- Execute SE IP Setting:
The IP address of the SE input in the Local Network Presetting is made effective.
The IP address which is effective appears in the result display area.
018-230-06E
MU2-17
REFERENCE [1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >>
The command tree structure and function description for the MP network setting are
mentioned below.  Display Window
[NETWORK SETTING] MP1 Network Setting >> window
[Local Network PreSetting]
[MP Network Setting >>]
[MP1 Network Setting >>]
[Setting for MP1]

Set the IP address of the MP1 as the MP1 value input in
[Local Network PreSetting].
[Setting for MP2]

Change the setting of the MP1 to the MP2.
The MP2 value input in [Local Network PreSetting]
gets effective.
[MP2 Network Setting >>]

1200_400009E.ai
[Setting for MP1]

Change the MP set as the MP2 to the MP1.  Function Description
Not in use usually. Used to enable the IP address of the MP input in [Local Network PreSetting].
[Setting for MP2] - Setting for MP1:

Change the IP address of the MP2. Sets the IP address of the MP1 as the IP address of the MP1 input in [Local Network
Set the IP address of the MP2 to the MP2 value input in PreSetting].
[Local Network PreSetting]. - Setting for MP2:
Used to change the setting of MP1 to MP2.
The IP address of the MP2 input in [Local Network PreSetting] is effective, and at
1200_700172E.ai
the same time the MP1 is set as the MP2.
018-230-06E
MU2-18
[1.3.2] MP2 Network Setting >> [1.4] MC ETH0 IP Setting >>

Same as the MP1 Network Setting >> window. MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window
Refer to [1.3.1] MP1 Network Setting >>.
Used to enable the IP address of the MP input in [Local Network Presetting].
- Setting for MP1:

Changes the MP set as MP2 to MP1.
Not in use usually.
- Setting for MP2:
Sets the IP address as the IP address of the MP2 input in [Local Network
Presetting].
1200_400010E.ai
Addresses of the following four items can be set.
The set value gets effective by clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the
“Network Setting” window. That is, by just clicking [SET], the input value does not get
effective.
- MC IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.20)

- MC SubNet Mask (Default value: 255.255.0.0)
- MC Default GW (Default value: 0.0.0.0)
- FTP IP Address (Default value: 127.0.0.1)
018-230-06E
MU2-19
[1.5] Update Network Setting (MC ETH0) [1.7] Wireless Speed Measurement >>

See the “Network Setting” window. Wireless Speed Measurement >> window
Enables the network address input in the MC ETH0 Network Setting >> window. #1
Clicking [MC ETH0 Network Setting >>] on the “Network Setting” window, the
confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears. Clicking [OK] on the confirmation
window, the network address input in the MC ETH0 Network Setting >> window gets
effective.
[1.6] Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)

#2
 Display Window
See the “Network Setting” window.
DRID600_G0092E.ai
Enables the network address input in the Local Network Presetting>> window. #1 Click: Target SE button
#2 Click: Target measurement SE button
Clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the “Network Setting” window, the
confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears. Clicking [OK] on the confirmation
window, the network address of the MC ETH1 input in the Local Network Presetting
>> window gets effective. Communication rate of the SE connected via the wireless LAN can be measured.
Buttons corresponding to the respective SE’s are available, and the communication
rate of the SE corresponding to the pressed button appears in the result display area.
Clicking one of the buttons, the confirmation window of “Are You Sure?” appears.
Clicking [OK] on the confirmation window, measurement of radio wave conditions
starts.
The measurement ends approx. in one minute.
Check that the average time is following status.

- DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1211SE, DR-ID 1213SE, DR-ID 1214SE, DR-ID 601SE,
- DR-ID 1202SE, DR-ID 1212SE, DR-ID 602SE, DR-ID 612SE: 6000msec or less.
018-230-06E
MU2-20
[2] SE Setting [2.1] SE Registration >>

SE SETTING window SE Registration >> window
#1
DRID600_G0099E.ai
1200_400011E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button
Used to register or check the set contents of the SE.
Used to register the serial ID of the SE.
- SE Registration
Select the SE to be registered.
- SE DELETE
Inputting the serial ID and clicking [SET], the registration ends.
- BATTERY INFORMATION
- Battery Remaining Time Threshold u NOTE u
- SE Memory Exposure Setting The first letter of the serial ID must be entered as a capital letter.
- SE LED Color Setting
REFERENCE
The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data
CDROM.
018-230-06E
MU2-21
[2.2] SE DELETE >> [2.3] LongPanel Registration >>
 Display Window u NOTE u
SE DELETE >> window Not used in the DR-ID 1200.
[2.4] LongPanel DELETE >>

#1
u NOTE u
[2.5] BATTERY INFORMATION >>
 Display Window
Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> window
DRID600_G0101E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button
A registered SE can be canceled.
Used when the SE needs to be replaced.
u NOTE u
Disconnect the SE cable and remove the battery from the SE before deleting the SE.
Otherwise, the SE cannot be deleted.
REFERENCE
A message indicating that the serial ID of the SE, a replacement count of the 1200_700170E.ai
connector and the power supplied time are reset appears in the result display area
upon deregistration.  Function Description
Deregistration is reflected after the machine is rebooted. - DISPLAY BATTERY SERIAL NO LIST:
Serial Nos. of the batteries are displayed.
- DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION >>:
Battery information is deleted. Clicking [DELETE BATTERY INFORMATION >>],
inputting the battery serial No., and clicking [SET], the battery information is deleted.
018-230-06E
MU2-22
[2.6] Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> [2.7] SE Memory Exposure Setting>>

Battery Remaining Time Threshold>> window SE Memory Exposure Setting>>window
#1
#2
1200_400012E.ai
- Input Threshold >>:
Set the battery remaining time threshold by three levels. Usually use the default
setting.
- Regist Threshold >>: 1200_400013E.ai
Register the battery threshold. Clicking [Regist Threshold >>], inputting the SE No. #1 Input: Target SE No.
and clicking [Regist], the battery threshold set by [Input Threshold >>] is registered #2 Click: [SET]
to the target SE.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the memory exposure setting is displayed.
In the Read Mode (read mode setting), set the Read Mode for memory exposure in
addition to the routine exposure. Input [Read Mode] and click [SET].
u NOTE u
Any of "0", "1" or "2" can be inputted into [Read Mode].
018-230-06E
MU2-23
[2.8] SE LED Color Setting>> [3] Version Check

SE LED Color Setting>> window VERSION CHECK window
1200_400014E.ai 1200_400015E.ai

- Create LED color >>: Selects the unit whose software version is to be checked.
Register the LED color. Usually use the default setting. Clicking the color button, - MC Version >>
inputting RGB of the LED color and clicking [SET], the LED color is registered. - MP Version >>
- Pink (R,G,B) (Default value: 240, 48, 80) - SE Version >>
- Light blue (R,G,B) (Default value: 16, 48, 224)
- Yellow (R,G,B) (Default value: 128, 160, 8)
- Purple (R,G,B) (Default value: 88, 8, 240)
- Orange (R,G,B) (Default value: 240, 48, 0)
- Selector Color Setting >>:
Register the selector color of the SE. Inputting the target SE No. and clicking [SET],
the Selector Color Setting >>window opens. Inputting the selector color according to
te No. displayed on the left side of the window, and clicking [SET], the selector color
registration is completed.
u NOTE u
018-230-06E
MU2-24
[3.1] MC Version >> [3.2] MP Version >>

MC Version >> window MP Version >> window
1200_400016E.ai 1200_400017E.ai

Displays the software versions of the MC. Clicking one of the following buttons, the Selects the MP whose software version is to be checked.
software version of interest appears in the result display area. - MP1 Version Check >>
- [Display MC Software Version] button - MP2 Version Check >>
- [Display MC Kernel Version] button
- [Display MC ALPS Version] button
018-230-06E
MU2-25
[3.2.1] MP1 Version Check >> [3.2.2] MP2 Version Check >>
“Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Version Check >>.
 Display Window Read MP1 as MP2.
MP1 Version >> window {MU2:[3.2.1]_MP1 Version Check >>}
1200_400018E.ai
Displays the software versions of the MP1. Clicking one of the following buttons, the
software version of interest appears in the result display area.
- [Display MP1 Software Version] button
- [Display MP1 Kernel Version] button
- [Display MP1 ALPS Version] button
- [Display MP1 Driver Version] button
018-230-06E
MU2-26
[3.3] SE Version >> [4] Install

INSTALL window
#1
DRID600_G0108E.ai
#1 Click: Target SE button 1200_400019E.ai
Selects the unit on which the software is to be installed.
The software versions of the SE boards are displayed.
- Install MP Software >>
- mcu
- Install SE Software >>
- mcu data
- aplWlan
- wifiWlan
- ethWlan
- fpgaDrv
- rmv
- fpgaRmv
- adc
- glg
018-230-06E
MU2-27
[4.1] Install MP Software >> [4.1.1] MP1 Install >>

Install MP Software>> window MP1 Install >> window
1200_400020E.ai 1200_400021E.ai

Selects the MP on which the MP application is to be installed. MP1 Software VerUp Install:
- MP1 Install >> The MP application is version-updated. The result appears in the result display area.
- MP2 Install >>
018-230-06E
MU2-28
[4.1.2] MP2 Install >> [4.2] Install SE Software >>
“Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Install >>.
Read MP1 as MP2.  Display Window
{MU2:[4.1.1]_MP1 Install >>} Install SE Software >> window
#1
#2
1200_400022E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE button

#2 Click: [SET]
- SE Serial ID:
Displays the SE serial ID.
- Install SE FPGA Software:
Installation of the FPGA application.
- Install SE GLG Software:
Installation of the GLG board application.
- Install SE LAN Software:
Installation of the LAN application
- Install SE MCU Software:
Installation of the MCU application.
018-230-06E
MU2-29
[5] Board State Check [5.1] MP Board State >>

BOARD STATE CHECK window MP Board State>>window
1200_400023E.ai 1200_400024E.ai

Checks the conditions of the following boards. Input the SE serial ID also. Selects the MP whose board conditions are to be checked.
- MP board State - MP1 Board State
- SE board State - MP2 Board State
- SE Write Serial ID
018-230-06E
MU2-30
[5.1.1] MP1 Board State >>  Function Description
Acquires the conditions of components connected with the board in the MP1. You can
 Display Window view the acquired results in the result display area.
MP1 Board State>>window
- Connector Status:
The status of the connector connected with the MP board appears in the result
display area.
Normal processing: MPX Connector: ON
Upright SE Connector: ON
Table SE Connector: ON
Error: Other than above.
- Fan Status:
The status of the fan connected with the MP board appears in the result display
area.
Normal processing: MP Fan Status: ON
- Fuse Status:
The status of the fuse connected with the MP board appears in the result display
area.
1200_400025E.ai
Normal processing: MPX Fuse: OK, UprightSE Fuse: OK, TableSE Fuse: OK
- RemoteSW Status:
The ON/OFF status of the remote switch appears in the result display area.
ON: OFF/[ON]
OFF: [OFF]/ON
- ShotSW Port1 Status
The ON/OFF status of the shot switch port 1 appears in the result display area.
ShotSW1 is ON: OFF/[ON]
ShotSW1 is OFF: [OFF]/ON
- ShotSW Port2 Status
The ON/OFF status of the shot switch port 2 appears in the result display area.
ShotSW2 is ON: OFF/[ON]
ShotSW2 is OFF: [OFF]/ON
018-230-07E
MU2-31
[5.1.2] MP2 Board State >> [5.2] SE Board State >>
“Display window” and “Function” are the same as those of MP1 Board State >>.
Read MP1 as MP2.  Display Window
{MU2:[5.1.1]_MP1 Board State >>} SE Board State >> window
#1
#2
DRID600_G0086E.ai

#2 Click: [SET]
Acquires conditions of components connected with the board in the SE. You can view
the result in the result display area.
 SE Board State
Acquires the board conditions in the SE, and displays the contents in the result
display area.
Normal: WLAN H/W Status: OK, WLAN Power Status: OK, WLAN SettingFile
Status: OK, RMV H/W Status: OK, RMV Power Status: OK
Defective: Other than the above
 Temperature
Displays the temperature of the stand SE panel in the result display area.
Display example: Temperature = 29.4 deg C
018-230-06E
MU2-32
 Battery:  GLG Calibration
Displays the following information on the battery in the result display area. GLG Calibration>>window
Serial No.: 0 to 65535
Date of manufacture: YYYY/MM/DD
Battery Status: 0xXXXX
Failure cause (Manufacture Access): 0bXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Battery capacity: 0 to 65535 [unit mAh/10 mWh]
Fitting (putting on/off) count of battery (B/I Logic Count): 0 to 65535
Charge/discharge count (Cycle Count): 0 to 65535
Remaining time (Time to Empty): 0 to 65535 [unit min]
Battery temperature: 0 to 65535 [0.1 K]
<Display example>
Serial No = 66
Manufacture Date = 2010/09/23
Battery Status = 0x0080
Manufacture Access = 0b1110000000000000
Battery Capacity: 2619 (unit mAh/10 mWh)
B/I Logic Count: 0
1200_400026E.ai
Cycle Count: 27 Zero point adjustment for the high G sensor (3 directions) is performed. GLG
Time to Empty: 65535 (min) calibration must be performed at the time of replacement of the GLG board.
Temperature: 2956 (0.1 K)
<Procedures>
(1) Start the system.
 Battery Date Setting
Set the start date for battery use. (2) Place the SE onto a stable surface with no vibrations (the orientation
Accurate display of the battery capacity becomes possible by performing “Battery does not matter).
Date Setting”. (3) Click [Get X axial Offset], [Get Y axial Offset], [Get Z axial Offset]. (The
 GLG Check order of clicking does not matter.)
The following tests are performed for the GLG board, and the results (OK/NG) are → The 0 G output of the high G sensor is acquired.
displayed in the result display area. (4) Click [Save Offset Data].
- Memory check (writing of data to and reading of data from FRAM and RAM) → The offset value is stored in the FRAM of the GLG board (restart is not required).
- Data acquisition from RTC
REFERENCE
- Low G sensor data setting and data acquisition
- AD converter diagnosis After execution of calibration, the actually measured value minus the offset value
- Reading of set data is stored in the log as the measured value.
REFERENCE
Self-diagnosis of the GLG board is performed also at the time of equipment start.
018-230-06E
MU2-33
[5.3] SE SerialID Write>> [6] Calibration

SE Write Serial ID>> window CALIBRATION window
1200_400027E.ai
1200_400040E.ai

When replacing the RMV board, inputting the SE serial ID and clicking [SET], the Used to make the following calibration on the SE.
serial ID registration is completed. Refer to the Installation manual for the detailed procedures.
{IN2:16._Calibration}
u NOTE u - Offset calibration
- Gain calibration
- Defect calibration
- Lag calibration
REFERENCE
Also, it is used to confirm or set the SE correct data.
The serial ID of an SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific data CD- - SE Correct Data Save Status
ROM. - SE Correct Data Transfer
- SE Correct Data Status
018-230-06E
MU2-34
u INSTRUCTION u [6.1] Offset Calibration >>
Check to make sure that background calibration (which takes place automatically
when the MC is started) is completed before carrying out the following calibration.  Display Window
The image correction data cannot be correctly performed if the calibration takes place Offset Calibration>> window
while the background calibration is in progress.
- Offset calibration
- Gain calibration
- Defect calibration
- Lag calibration
You can check whether background calibration is completed on the status lamp
“READY” of the SE
- While background calibration is in progress:
“READY” is flashing.
- While background calibration is not carried out:
“READY” is unlit.
u NOTE u
When performing the calibration with the FIPS MODE set to "ON" in the EDIT
CONFIGURATION, a warning message is displayed to indicate that the data transfer
rate is slow. Set the FIPS MODE to "OFF" or perform the calibration after wire-line 1200_400028E.ai
connecting the SE.

Carries out offset calibration.
No exposure is made during offset calibration.
The offset calibration takes place for all of connected SE’s.
u NOTE u
- Always click [Create an Offset Data] after you click [Start]. Processing cannot
be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click [BACK] without clicking
[Create an Offset Data]. Return to the “Store Mode” window, and again follow the
procedures in this case.
- Clicking [Start] during automatic offset update (always taking place approx. at
10-minute intervals when no exposure menu is selected), “Error 12700 currently
unavailable” is displayed. Again click [Start] approx. 30 seconds later in this case.
018-230-06E
MU2-35
REFERENCE [6.2] Gain Calibration >>
Whether the check is successfully completed appears on the result display area.
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and  Display Window
take appropriate countermeasures. Gain Calibration >> window
Correction data for use in still image radiography is generated.
Clicking [Start], the mode setting takes place.
#1
Clicking [Create an Offset Data] thereafter, the correction data is generated.
#2
DRID600_G0095E.ai

#2 Click: [SET]
Gain calibration takes place under the following conditions:
- Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 75 kV, dose of 5 mR
- Exposure count: 16
018-230-06E
MU2-36
u NOTES u [6.3] Defect Calibration >>
- Be sure to make sixteen exposures after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a
Gain Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you  Display Window
click [BACK] without clicking [Create a Gain Data]. Return to the “Gain Calibration” Defect Calibration >> window
window and again follow the procedures in this case.
- If you click [Create a Gain Data] before you make sixteen exposures, “error code”
is displayed in the result display area. If “error code” appears, continue to make
exposures, and click [Create a Gain Data] after you have made sixteen exposures. #1
REFERENCE
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and #2
take appropriate countermeasures.
- Operation Setting:
Selects the operative method for calibration.
- Start:
- Display Image Count:
Clicking [Display Image Count], you can view the exposure count.
- Display ShotRdy:
Completion of the shooting preparation by the panel is checked.
<Result indication>
- SHOT_READY: Completed DRID600_G0096E.ai
- NOT_READY: Not completed #1 Input: Target SE button

- Create a Gain Data: #2 Click: [SET]
Gain data is generated.
Defect correction calibration takes place under the following conditions:
- Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 75 kV, dose of 2.5 mR
- Exposure count: 5
u NOTE u
When performing defect calibration, make sure to have the exposure conditions such
as the correct dose setting (kV, mA, msec, SID) for defect correction calibration.
If defect correction calibration is performed by using the exposure conditions for gain
correction, a defect is expanded and its size cannot be detected correctly. As a result,
because the number of the defects becomes an erroneous value and the defect size
is increased more than expected, a calibration error may occur.
018-230-07E
MU2-37
u NOTES u [6.4] Lag Calibration >>
- Be sure to make five exposures after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a Defect
Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click  Display Window
[BACK] without clicking [Create a Defect Data]. Return to the “Defect Calibration” Lag Calibration >> window
window and again follow the procedures in this case.
- If you click [Create a Defect Data] before you make five exposures, “error code”
is displayed in the result display area. If “error code” appears, continue to make
exposures, and click [Create a Defect Data] after you have made five exposures. #1
REFERENCE
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and #2
- Start:
- Progress Indicator:
Clicking [Progress Indicator], you can view the exposure count.
- Display ShotRdy:
<Result indication>
- SHOT_READY: Completed DRID600_G0097E.ai
- NOT_READY: Not completed #1 Input: Target SE button

- Create a Defect Data: #2 Click: [SET]
Defect data is generated.
Lag correction calibration takes place under the following conditions:
600SE, 601SE, 602SE, 613SE): Tube voltage of 80 kV, dose of 100 mR or more,
irradiation time of 200 msec or shorter
- Exposure conditions (611SE, 612SE): Tube voltage of 80 kV, dose of 100 mR or
more, irradiation time of 200 msec or shorter
- Exposure count: 1
018-230-06E
MU2-38
u NOTES u [6.6] SE Correct Data Save Status>>
- Be sure to make a single exposure after you click [Start]. Then click [Create a Lag
Data]. Processing cannot be terminated, waiting for data generation, if you click  Display Window
[BACK] without clicking [Create a Lag Data]. Return to the “Lag Calibration” window SE Correct Data Save Status >> window
and again follow the procedures in this case.
unavailable” is displayed. Again click [Start] approx. 30 seconds later in this case. #1
REFERENCE
An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual and
#2
- Start:
- Display Progress Status:
Clicking [Display Progress Status], you can view the number of acquired frame data.
Data of eight frames are acquired by a single exposure.
- Display ShotRdy:
<Result indication>
- SHOT_READY: Completed
- NOT_READY: Not completed 1200_400031E.ai
- Create a Lag Data: #1 Input: Target SE No

Lag correction data is generated. #2 Click: [SET]
[6.5] Marker Calibration >> After finishing the full calibration or the SE correct data transfer, check whether the
correction data storage has been completed or not.
u NOTE u
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the correct data save status after the
Not used in the DR-ID 1200. calibration is displayed.
Display “STILL_DATASAVE” during transfer.
Display “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” after finishing transfer.
018-230-06E
MU2-39
[6.7] SE Correct Data Transfer>> [6.8] SE Correct Data Status>>

SE Correct Data Transfer >> window SE Correct Data Status >> window
#1 #1
#2 #2
1200_400032E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No
#2 Click: [SET]
Transfer the SE correct data retained by the MC to the SE.
Display “STILL_DATASAVE” during transfer.
Display “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” after finishing transfer.
u INSTRUCTION u
After forcing the transfer of the SE correct data, perform “[6.6] SE Correct Data Save
Status>>” to check the correction data status. 1200_400033E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No
#2 Click: [SET]
Check the list of correct data stored in the SE.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the correct data status is displayed.
018-230-06E
MU2-40
REFERENCE [6.9] SE Flash Correct Data Status >>
- There is no problem if the list of correct data is displayed as shown below. In
addition, the display of the “Offset Mode3 Data” and “Initial Calibration Mode3”  Display Window
depends on the setting for the LONG TIME ACCUM MODE. Therefore, there is no
SE Flash Correct Data Status >>
problem if “NG” is displayed.
Gain Data :OK
Sensitivity Data :OK
Lag Data :OK #1
Offset Mode0 Data :OK
Defect Data :OK
Initial Calibration :Done
Initial Calibration Mode3 :Done
- If the initialization calibration has not been completed, “Not Yet” is displayed. #2
DRID800_G0149E.ai
#1 Input: Target SE No.

#2 Click: [SET]
Check the list of correct data stored in the FLASH of SE.
Inputting the SE No. and clicking [SET], the flash correct data status is displayed.
018-230-06E
MU2-41
[7] SYSTEM [7.1] Termination >>

SYSTEM window Termination>> window
1200_400029E.ai
DRID600_G00115E.ai  Function Description

 Function Description You can exit from or restart the system by selecting among three kinds of shutdown or
reboot methods on the “Termination” window.
Used to select a way to shut down the system.
Each time you click [Auto Shutdown Setting], ON/OFF setting is changed over.
u NOTE u
When the MC application is installed in the Console, the [Terminate], [Forced Terminate],
and [Forced Reboot] buttons are disabled.
- Terminate:
The system is normally shut down including termination calibration.
- Forced Terminate:
The system is shut down without termination calibration.
- Forced Reboot:
The system is restarted without termination calibration.
018-230-06E
MU2-42
1.5 PING REFERENCE
“Lost = 0 (0 % loss)” means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
n Function command. If other than “(0 % loss)”, it is a sign that there was some problem.
Executes the PING command from the CL on the machine displayed in the “IP <GOOD indication>
Address”, and checks whether the network is correctly connected.
The result is normal when the following message appears.
n Procedures “172.16.1.10” is shown as an example.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL} | Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: |
| Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 0 ms, Average = 0 ms |
(2) Select the machine to be checked.
(3) Click [PING]. <NO GOOD indication>
Other than above.
The “PING” result is displayed on the CL window.
PC-TOOL window
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
(2)
(3)
Check that the display reads “0% loss”. 1200_700171E.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-43
1.6 MON 1.7 FTP
n Function n Function
The I/O status of the RU (OPEN/CLOSE) appears in real time, but this function is not Used to access the FTP server from the CL and check whether the FTP server is
used in the machine as no corresponding I/O is included. working. Or, used to access the FTP server from the RU and check whether the FTP
server is working.
n Display Window
 Procedures
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
(2) Select the machine to be checked.
(3) Click [FTP].
Operation check results of the FTP server are displayed in the command prompt,
and operation check status is displayed in the message window of the PC-TOOL.
PC-TOOL window
(2)
(3)
DRID600_G0055.ai
Result window
<GOOD indication>
OK value = 0 = 0x0
<NO GOOD indication>

Other than above.
1200_400034E.ai

{MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
018-230-06E
MU2-44
1.8 INSTALL 1.9 VERSION UP
Installs the RU software when a new RU or an additional RU is to be installed. Version-updates the RU software.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
1.9.1 V11.X or Later
- The RU PC-TOOL needs to be installed beforehand.
{IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} n Preparation
- The RU name and the IP address of the RU need to be installed beforehand.
When updating RU software version from V11.0 or earlier, the settings need to be
{MU2:1.1_NEW} configured in advance.
u NOTE u
 Procedures - When updating the version to V11.0, then this procedure is needed.
{IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software} - When updating the version from V11.X to V12 or later, then this procedure is not
needed.
u NOTE u
- To install the MC application in the Console, installing the NIC first and then
changing the setting of the CSL-PC + performing the BAT are required before (1) Connect the jig drive (standard supply) to the PC and insert the install
performing [INSTALL]. disk into the drive.
{IN2:14.1.1_Network Settings} u NOTE u
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC, when the MC
application is installed, the MC restarts automatically after the completion of the - In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console,
installation. connect the jig drive (supplied standard) to the DX Console and execute.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, when - In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC PC, connect
the MC application is installed, the MC Manager restarts automatically after the the jig drive (supplied standard) to the MC PC and execute.
completion of the installation.
(2) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer.
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window appear.
018-230-07E
MU2-45
(3) Select “\versionup\local\V11.0.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION” area, and n Updating RU Software Version
click [EXECUTE].
Set Up PC-TOOL window (1) In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
Console, restart the CL after clicking the CL software system exit
button, and sequentially click the upper left and upper right of the
screen within three seconds after the initial screen appears.
MC Manager only starts.
u NOTE u
If step 1 could not be performed within three seconds, re-execute step 1 when
the CL software has started up.
(2) Check that the MC Manager icon has appeared on the task tray.
(3) Insert the application disk into the drive.
(4) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”
area, and click [EXECUTE].
800_700197.ai (5) Input the target MC IP address and click [Connect].
The following window opens. REFERENCE
Input "127.0.0.1" as the MC IP address.
#1 Input: MC IP address
#2 Click: [Connect]
800_700198.ai
(4) Press the <Y> key on the keyboard.

The environmental settings are executed, and “Version Up Completed!” appears. #1
#2
800_700200.ai
800_700199.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-46
u NOTE u (7) Input the RU NAME and click [Register].
- If the MC could not be connected to due to the mistaken inputting of the IP #1 Input: RU NAME
address, a connection error occurs. After checking the connection status, re- #2 Click: [Register]
execute the version upgrade.
- If the MC application was not factory-installed, and if the model media being
used differs from the model which was installed, then the error will appear.
Confirm the MC application installation status and the media model information, #1
￥
and re-execute the version upgrade. #2
u INSTRUCTION u
If the RU registration has been already completed, steps 6 and 7 are not 800_700203.ai
necessary. Proceed to step 8. The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear.
(6) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window (8) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media
appears. Click [OK]. version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade].
#1 Click: [OK] #1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device
#2 Click: [Upgrade]
#1
#1
#2
800_700202.ai
800_700204.ai
(9) Click [Yes].

#1 Click: [Yes]
#1
800_700205.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-47
The following window opens during the version-update. (11) Click [START] in the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window to start the RU PC-
TOOL window.
#1 Click: [START]
Set Up PC-TOOL window
#1
800_700206.ai
(10) Check that the installation is completed, and click [OK].

#1 Click: [OK]
#1
800_700207.ai
RU PC-TOOL window
600_700056.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-48
(12) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has 1.9.2 V3.X or Earlier
changed.
RU PC-TOOL window n Procedures
REFERENCE
A total of required time is approx. 10 minutes.
(1) Connect the jig drive (standard supply) to the CL and insert the install
disk into the drive.
(2) Click [PING], and check that the machine is network-connected
properly.
{MU2:1.5_PING}
600_700289.ai
(3) Click [VERSION UP].
The conformation window appears.
(13) Restart the CL.
(4) Click [OK].
u NOTE u The "RU(s) VERSION UP" window (version selection) appears.
- When the MC application is upgraded, the MC Manager restarts automatically after (5) Select the version and click [OK].
the completion of the upgrading.
The conformation window for version update appears.
- The settings become effective after the RU is restarted.
(6) Click [OK].
(14) Update SE application software version. The version update of the RU software starts, and then the result of the version
update appears on the Command Prompt window.
(7) Check that the version update is completed properly, and press any
(15) Update MP application software version. key on the keyboard.
(8) Click [OK] on the conformation window.
Return to the RU PC-TOOL window.
(9) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has
changed to the selected version.
(10) Restart the CL.
u NOTES u
- When the MC application is upgraded, the MC Manager restarts automatically after
the completion of the upgrading.
- The settings become effective after the RU is restarted.
018-230-07E
MU2-49
1.10 EDIT HISTORY EDIT HISTORY window
n Function
Displays and edits statistic information on use conditions of the SE (FPD).
n Details of Item
No. Item Function
1 INSTALLATION DATE Date when the RU software is installed
2 Reading Count Exposure count
3 Panel Reading Count Panel reading count (exposure count + calibration)
4 Full Dose Total dose of exposures

Dose distribution
5 Dose Distribution (mAs) Displays the exposure count for each of the
following ranges.
<1, 1-3, 3-10, 10-30, 30-100, 100<
Time distribution from menu registration to DRID600_G0057.ai
exposure
6 Time Distribution (s)
n Procedures
following ranges. u INSTRUCTION u
<5, 5-15, 15-30, 30-300, 300-600, 600<
Tube voltage distribution
7 Tube Voltage Distribution (kV) Displays the exposure count for each of the (1) Select the RU in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
following ranges.
(2) Click [EDIT HISTORY].
<50, 50-70, 70-90, 90-110, 110-130, 130<
Panel temperature distribution during exposure
→ The [EDIT HISTORY] window appears.
Shot Panel Temperature “USE” tab: INSTALLATION DATE (item No. 1 in the left table)
8 Displays the exposure count for each of the
Distribution (degrees) “STAND” tab: Stand SE (FPD) (item Nos. 2 to 8 in the left table)
following ranges.
<20, 20-23, 23-26, 26-28, 28-30, 30< “TABLE” tab: Bed SE (FPD) (item Nos. 2 to 8 in the left table)
REFERENCE (3) Confirm or change the settings appearing on the window.

Information in the item Nos. 4 to 8 refer to the exposure performance values (4) Click one of the following buttons.
transmitted from the X-ray high voltage generator, and collected only when the X-ray
high voltage generator connection serial cable is used. [CANCEL]: Cancels the changes, and exit from the [EDIT HISTORY] window.
[RESET]: Clears the displayed value.
[SET]: Stores the changes, and exit from the [EDIT HISTORY] window.
u INSTRUCTION u
To make the input value in the “INSTALLATION DATE” effective, you need to click [SET]
and turn OFF the main power circuit breaker of the MC.
018-230-06E
MU2-50
1.11 EDIT CONFIGURATION n Details of Item
n Function <"RU CONFIGURATION SETTING" window>

RU CONFIGURATION SETTING window
System configuration information of the registered RU can be changed depending on
the use conditions at the customer’s site. Changed configuration information is written
in the HDD.
n Procedures
{MU2:1._PC-TOOL}
(2) Select an [RU] from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(3) Click [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
The [RU CONFIGURATION SETTING] window appears.
(4) Set the CONFIGURATION items.
Configuration window includes the following four pages.
- RU CONFIGURATION SETTING
- WIRELESS SETTING
- RU IMAGE FLAG
- SE SLEEP MODE SETTING
(5) Click [SET].
u NOTE u

u NOTE u
click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute "EXIT". Check that the MC 1200_400035.ai
REFERENCE
018-230-06E
MU2-51
 CSL MAC ADDRESS (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)  OPE SETTING (TABLE)
Inputs the MAC address [Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00]. Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method [Bed]
of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
u NOTE u
<Options>
If the PC for MC is available, input this MAC address after starting the DX Console - None: Not connected
with the Wake on LAN when turning ON the MC power. - MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
REFERENCE {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION_n OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)}
<How to display the MAC address>
(1) Press the Windows key and the [R] key concurrently.  OPE SETTING (FREE)
→ The “Run...” window appears. Specifies to which MP the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative method
(2) Input “cmd/k ipconfig/all”, and click [OK]. ( indicates a space.) [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
→ The MAC address appears in “Physical Address” of the “Ethernet adapter Local
- None: Not connected
Area Connection:” block.
- MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION_n OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)}
 EDIT RU NAME
Input the RU name.
 PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)
u NOTE u
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
The RU maximum input character count is 15 one-byte characters. method [Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
<Options>
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1
 OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT) - MPX2: Connected to MPX2
[Stand] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.  PORT SETTING (TABLE)
<Options> Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative
- None: Not connected method [Bed] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected.
- MP1 [default]: Connected to MP1 <Options>
- MP2: Connected to MP2 - MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION_n OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)} - MPX2: Connected to MPX2
018-230-07E
MU2-52
 PORT SETTING (FREE)  READ MODE
Specifies to which terminal block the X-ray shot cable corresponding to the operative Sets charge accumulation time of the SE (FPD). Eight options are available and are
method [FREE (general)] of the X-ray equipment is to be connected. divided into “fixed modes” and “variable modes”.
<Options> - FIXED MODE
- MPX1 [default]: Connected to MPX1 Sets constant time irrespective of the X-ray irradiation time specified in each
- MPX2: Connected to MPX2 exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage generator is not
connected.
 NUM OF MP - VARIABLE MODE
Specifies the number of MPs to be connected. The reading mode is changed over the FIXED MODE (200 ms), the FIXED MODE
(500 ms) and the FIXED MODE (1200 ms) depending on the X-ray irradiation time
u NOTE u specified in each exposure menu of the CL. Used when the X-ray high voltage
Specify only the number of MPs. Do not include the number of PBs and DSs. generator is connected.
<Settable range> u INSTRUCTION u

- 0: Not connected If the X-ray irradiation time specified by the customer in the X-ray high voltage
(such as a mobile configuration, a configuration using the DS only, etc.) generator is changed, the change cannot be reflected in the mode setting as the
- 1 [default]: One MP connected change is not fed back to the MC before exposure. If the X-ray irradiation time
- 2: Two MPs connected changed by the customer is longer than the charge accumulation time specified in the
MC, the irradiation is terminated upon completion of accumulation, and images with
insufficient dose may result.
 NUM OF SE Instruct the customer not to set the charge accumulation time longer than specified in
Specifies the number of SEs (FPDs) to be connected concurrently. the mode when the customer is to change the X-ray irradiation time.
<Settable range>
- 1: One SE connected REFERENCE
- 2: Two SEs connected
You can check the X-ray irradiation time specified in each exposure menu through the
- 3: Three SEs connected user utility of the CL.
- 4: Four SEs connected
- 5 [default]: Five SEs connected
 TABLE DIRECTION HEAD

Selects the direction of the patient’s head during exposure on the bed.
<Options>
- LEFT: Left
- RIGHT [default]: Right
 UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE

Selects whether the exposure image of the stand SE (FPD) is to be rotated
180 degrees.
<Options>
- none [default]: Not rotated
- 180: Rotated 180 degrees
018-230-06E
MU2-53
 Settings without the X-ray high voltage generator connected  Setting with the X-ray high voltage generator connected
Select among the fixed modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is not Select among variable modes when the X-ray high voltage generator is to be
connected. Ask the customer about the exposure conditions in which the longest connected.
X-ray irradiation time is required when a fixed mode is to be used, and select the X-ray irradiation Charge
mode with a longer charge accumulation time specified than the X-ray irradiation time. Option time specified in the accumulation Remarks
exposure menu time
Charge X-ray
Option accumulation irradiation Remarks 200 msec or less 200 msec
time time Accumulation might terminate during
3: VARIABLE 201 to 500 msec 500 msec X-ray irradiation (irradiation is forced to
Select for exposures with low dose or MODE (1.0) terminate at the same time), and might
0: FIXED MODE 200 msec
200 msec exposures considering throughputs such as 1200 to 3800 result in images with insufficient dose.
(200 ms) or less 501 msec or more
chest mass-screening. msec (*)
1: FIXED MODE 500 msec 181 msec or less 200 msec
500 msec Usually select this mode.
(500 ms) [default] or less
2: FIXED MODE 1200 to 3800 1200 to 3800 Image quality might degrade for low dose MODE (1.1)
(1200 ms) msec (*) msec exposures. 1200 to 3800
455 msec or more
msec (*)
*: Charge accumulation time is set in “MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME”.
Usually select this mode.
MODE (1.2)
1200 to 3800
417 msec or more
msec (*)
MODE (1.4)
1200 to 3800
358 msec or more
msec (*)
MODE (1.7)
1200 to 3800
295 msec or more
msec (*)
*: When selecting any of options 3 to 7, enable the X-CON setting in the DX Console, and
set the appropriate value to the irradiation time in the exposure menu.
Example) If "3" is selected, the charge accumulation time becomes 200 msec when the
irradiation time has been set to 190 msec with the exposure menu of the DX Console.
Also, the charge accumulation time becomes 500 msec when the irradiation time has
been set to 300 msec with the exposure menu.
018-230-06E
MU2-54
l MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME  BATTERY WARNING[min]
Sets the charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2. Set in a range of 1.2 to 3.8 s. Sets the threshold value of remaining battery charge.
The setting can be changed in 0.2-s steps. If the remaining battery charge lowers to the set threshold value, exposure cannot be
<Settable range> accepted. The SE LED flashes in this case.
- 1.2 to 3.8 s [default: 1.2 s] Charge accumulation time of READ MODE 2 The setting is made as the remaining battery time (minutes).
u NOTE u Always use the setting of 10 [default] in this machine.
<Settable range>
For the facilities that may use the machine long time under high temperature, to - 0 to 120 minutes [default: 10]
prevent artifact, it is recommended to set the charge accumulation time of READ
MODE 2 at or lower than 1.2 seconds.
 SE BATTERY WATCHING (when connecting cables)
Set this option to ON for a configuration, such as the mobile configuration, wired with
 AUTO DETECT the SE but the battery of which is not charged.
Set whether to use the automatic X-ray detection function (AUTO DETECT) or not. Set this to OFF [default] for a configuration including the MP, DS, and PB.
<Options> <Options>
- OFF [default]: Not used - OFF [default]: Not watched
- ON: Used - ON: Watched
REFERENCE
 CONNECTING CU This function depends on whether this machine supplies power to the SE.
- Supply power to and communicate with the SE.
Set to CONNECTED when the machine is to be connected to the DX Console to
Irrespective of ON or OFF, the battery is monitored.
which AcSelarete or CALNEO U/T is connected.
- Supply no power to but communicate with the SE.
Usually, use the setting of NOT CONNECTED [default].
If setting to "OFF", does not activate monitoring of the battery.
<Options>
If setting to "ON", activates monitoring the battery.
- NOT CONNECTED [default]
- CONNECTED
 MC-PC EXISTENCE
 EMERGENCY MODE
Set the availability of the PC for the MC.
Set whether the emergency mode is to be used or not. <Options>
<Options> - NOT EXIST [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC.
- OFF [default]: Not used - EXIST: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC.
- ON: Used
REFERENCE
 A SYNCHRONOUS MC-SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE
Emergency mode is the mode that the calibration would be stopped automatically and
the exposure would be ready when the system starts. Set the termination processing queue control of the MC and the Console.
When it is set to ON, the exposure would be ready as soon as the system starts. <Options>
- SYNC [default]: Select this option when no PC is available for the MC.
- ASYNC: Select this option when the PC is available for the MC.
018-230-06E
MU2-55
 LONG TIME ACCUM MODE <"WIRELESS SETTING" window>
Set whether long time accumlation mode is to be used or not by selecting "ON" for WIRELESS SETTING画面
"AUTO DETECT" and "OFF" for "EMERGENCY MODE.
<Options>
- OFF [default]: Not used
- ON: Used
REFERENCE
- It takes 10 seconds to read the images by setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM
MODE" only when the specified menus are selected in the DX Console. When the
common menus are selected, the reading time is the one that set by "READ MODE".
- When setting "ON" to "LONG TIME ACCUM MODE", set 7 minutes or more to
"SLEEP START TIME" in "SE SLEEP MODE SETTING" window.
 SHOT GO OFF DELAY TIME

Set a regulatory time to secure a required irradiation time when irradiation does not
continue for a preset time due to any reason such as a delay in communication.
[default: 0]
REFERENCE 1200_400036.ai
u NOTE u
The X-ray irradiation time is often stopped by a signal from the MP due to
communication delays, which shortens the exposure time. To ensure the irradiation Select the same settings for the AP.
time, set the SHOTGO OFF DELAY TIME value to around "the shortage of time + 10" {IN2:14._Installing the RU Software}
ms.
 ESSID
Sets the network identifier of the wireless LAN for the SE.
Usually use the setting of FUJIAP01 [default].
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so
that the identifiers of the respective SE’s do not overlap.
Make the same setting of the identifier on the AP.
<Options>
- FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, MANUAL [default: FUJIAP01]
 ESSID MANUAL (arbitrary ID setting for wireless LAN)

Sets an arbitrary ID in case that “MANUAL” has been selected at “ESSID”.
When two or more SE’s are to be installed in one installation site, make settings so
that the ID's of the respective SE’s do not overlap. Make the same setting of the ID on
the AP.
- A single-byte text string of 32 characters or less [default: blank]
018-230-06E
MU2-56
 CHANNEL & MODE  WLAN OUTPUT
Selects the wireless channel to be used. Set whether the wireless LAN output is to be used or not.
Setting a dual channel with higher communication rate is recommended for the machine. <Options>
If the communication rate drops, overlapping channels in the site are possibly present. - OFF: Not used
Change the setting. - ON [default]: Used
REFERENCE
 WLAN AUTO RATE
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT Set whether the wireless LAN transmission rate is constant or varible.
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following. <Options>
{IN: Appendix 7_Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point} - CONSTANT [default]
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used - VARIABLE
REFERENCE
MHz. The 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band, If the wireless environment is not stable or easily fluctuates, set to “VARIABLE”. If the
but the channel cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band. wireless environment is stable, use “CONSTANT”.
u NOTE u
 COUNTRY CODE (xxxx)
48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to Since there is wireless communication with SE, inputting the country code according
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 to the country where it used is required.
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors. - 4-character string or less [default: 4036]
Width”. Do not select 40 MHz. u NOTE u
- When the system coexistent with the SE of DR-ID 600 series and DR-ID 1200 - Change the country code for the countries where SE is used.
series, only use channels that have been used conventionally. China: 156
Taiwan: 158
u NOTE u
- For MC application V2.2 or later, input "4036".
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference - For MC application V2.1 or earlier;
with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection). When only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, input "4015".
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication When the system coexistent with the SE of DR-ID 600 series and DR-ID 1200
with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the series, input "4036".
detection.
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless  BSSID (xxxxxxxxxxxx)
channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented Input the MAC address of the AP (BSSID) when wireless connection is to be made
again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless by specifying the AP. Although input is not needed usually, inputting the BSSID is
communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will recommended when two or more AP’s are to be used.
automatically follow over to the AP channel. The wireless communications will be The MAC address is mentioned on the label or in the instruction manual of the AP.
maintained on the changed channel until the AP is restarted. <Settable range>
- In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, the “WSTAT” LED flashes red during the DFS - 12-character string [default: 000000000000]
search operation.
The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for check.
{MT:7._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
018-230-07E
MU2-57
 ENCRYPTION (encryption yes/no setting) <"RU IMAGE FLAG" window>
This sets whether wireless communication is to be encrypted or not. RU IMAGE FLAG window
<Options>
• OFF: No encryption
• ENCRYPTION [default]: WPA2-PSK encryption
• EAP-TLS: EAP-TLS encryption
REFERENCE
- For MC V12 or earlier, the default value is "OFF".
- When selecting "ENCRYPTION", a separate encryption setting on the AP side is
also required.
Encryption method: AES
Authentication method: WPA2-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 Pre Shared Key)
- When SE is shared by multiple systems, the encryption settings in the SE are
rewritten by connecting the SE once to the SE cable of the movement destination.
 ENCRYPTION KEY (encryption key)

Enter the text string (pass phrase) for generation of the encryption key for wireless 1200_400037.ai
communication.
<Setting range>  GOS SHARPNESS FILTER
A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujifilm] Select the sharpness of the GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE).
REFERENCE Select HIGH when a highly sharp image is to be obtained, making use of the features
of DR.
- The pass phrase entered for this item also must be set on the AP side. Select NORMAL when an image with normal sharpness close to the FCR is to be
- This unit is not compatible with the pass phrase automatic change function (only obtained.
manual setting is possible). <Options>
- HIGH [default]: Highly sharp
 FIPS MODE (encryption setting for image transfer) - NORMAL: Normally sharp
This sets whether FIPS MODE is to be used or not. u NOTE u
<Options> As this setting causes a large change of the image quality, select according to the
• OFF [default]: Not used desire of the user.
• ON: Used
REFERENCE REFERENCE
- Image transfer is to be encrypted only for wireless communications. This setting does not influence the image quality of the CsI panel (1211SE / 1212SE /
- This setting does not cover the 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE. 1213SE / 1214SE).
018-230-06E
MU2-58
 IMAGE READING MODE  IMAGE LOG SAVE TO FTP
u NOTE u Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the FTP server.
Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
For the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this setting is disabled. <Options>
- OFF [default] : Not stored
Selects the image compensation processing mode. - ON: Stored
Normally use the default setting. If the noise is generated via image evaluations
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. were used, change to the Standard u NOTE u
Mode. When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
<Options>
- Standard Mode
- High-Speed Mode [default]
 OFFSET2 (blemish/unevenness correction setting)
u NOTE u
When this setting has been changed, perform the full calibration after restarting the <Options>
MC in the following procedure. If not, the image compensation processing mode is not
-
OFF: Not performed
switched correctly.
-
1. Change the setting.
2. Restart the MC.
3. Perform the full calibration.  T2 TIMER(sec)
Set the start time (sec) of the calibration executed in the background. When the
REFERENCE exposure has been completed, the calibration begins after the time elapsed that was
- In comparison with High-Speed Mode, the time required for image acquisition in the set.
Standard Mode is approximately 370 ms longer. - Character string: [default: 120]
- Even if the noise is generated via image evaluations whereas physical phantoms
such as mesh, etc. were used, this noise is not generated in human body exposures.
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION
Set whether the automatic defect calibration is to be executed or not.
<Options>
 IMAGE LOG SAVE - OFF: Not executed
Selects whether or not the recorded image log is to be stored in the HDD. - ON [default]: Executed
Always use the setting of OFF [default] in the machine.
<Options>
- OFF [default] : Not stored  AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START HOURS
- ON: Stored When "ON" is selected in "AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION", input the automatic
execution time hourly.
u NOTE u
When set to “ON”, the PC capacity is compressed and the throughput is degraded.
 AUTO DEFECT CALIBRATION START MINUTES

execution time minutely.
018-230-06E
MU2-59
<"SE SLEEP MODE SETTING" window>  EXTRA SLEEP START TIME
SE SLEEP MODE SETTING window Set the time in minutes units until when the extra sleep mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 999 [default: 999]
REFERENCE
- After all the SEs shift to the sleep mode and past the set time by this setting, shift to
the extra sleep mode.
- When set to “999”, do not shift to the extra sleep mode.
1200_400038.ai
 SE SLEEP MODE
Set the SE sleep mode.
<Options>
- OFF: Disable the power save mode.
- ON [default]: Enable the power save mode.
 SLEEP START TIME

Set the time in minutes units until when the power save mode is started.
<Setting range>
- 2 to 10 [default: 2]
REFERENCE
Shift to the sleep mode mainly in the following cases.
- After completing the initialization calibration
- After completing the exposure
- After cancelling the exposure
- After switching the panel by changing the selector for the DX Console
- After completing the automatic offset update
- After completing the periodical defect calibration
- After completing the automatic log update
018-230-06E
MU2-60
 OPE SETTING (UPRIGHT/TABLE/FREE)
OPE SETTING corresponds to Reader Type (selector) set on the DX Console.
Make the OPE SETTING and Reader Type settings coincide with each other.
EDIT CONFIGURATION Selector (DX Console)
Corresponding
1200_400041E.ai
u NOTES u
- If [FPD-U] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the stand-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
- Specify the destination of connection via the PC-TOOL in [OPE SETTING
(UPRIGHT)] and [PORT SETTING (UPRIGHT)].
- Specify whether the exposure image is to be rotated 180 degrees via the PC-
TOOL in [UPRIGHT 180 REVERSE].
- If [FPD-T] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the bed-type X-ray shot cable to the MP.
(TABLE)] and [PORT SETTING (TABLE)].
- Specify the direction of the patient’s head via the PC-TOOL in [TABLE
DIRECTION HEAD].
- If [FPD-C] is registered in any selector, always carry out the following operations.
- Connect the free X-ray shot cable to the MP.
(FREE)] and [PORT SETTING (FREE)].
018-230-06E
MU2-61
 Relation among configurations
 Point 1: X-ray shot cable
The name of a connector to which a cable of each operative method is
connected is registered in advance via the PC-TOOL.
Free
MC CSL
Table
X-CON Upright
[EDIT CONFIGURATION] [Selector Setting]
[Selector12]
[OP SETTING(FREE)]
AP [Selector1]
Defines the operative method.
[OP SETTING(TABLE)]
[Technique Code]:
[OP SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Reader Type]:
MP1 [MP1] or [FPD-C]: FREE exposure with FPD or
SE1 MPC7 MPX1 [MP2] or [FPD-T]: TABLE exposure with FPD or
SE serial No. MPC6 MPX2 [None] [FPD-U]: UPRIGHT exposure with FPD
[Caption]: Selector name
[PORT SETTING(UPRIGHT)] [Icon Type]: Selector icon
SE2 [MPX1] or
SE serial No. MP2 [MPX2] or
[Device Name]: Panel identification name
MPC7 MPX1 [None]

SE3 MPC6 MPX2 [Device Setting]
SE serial No. [MUTL] - [SE Registration] [Device Name]: Panel identification name
SE1: SE serial No. [FPD Device ID]: SE Serial No.
SE2: SE serial No. [Device Type]: Defines the panel for use.
SE3: SE serial No. [D-EVO] or
SE4: SE serial No. [AcSelarate]
SE5: SE serial No. [Device Color]: Identification of SE
 Point 2: SE serial No.

Serial Nos. of all panels are registered in advance via the PC-TOOL. Image processing is selected
The operative method for exposure and the panel to be used are determined based on the depending on the type of the panel.
CSL setting (not depending on the connector (MPC6 or 7) to which the panel is connected).
DRID600_G0139E.ai
018-230-06E
MU2-62
1.12 EDIT CL NAME
n Function
Edits/adds the CL of the image destination, and edits the list of the master CL.
 Procedures for Editing/Adding the Image Destination

(1) Select the RU in which the CL of the image destination is to be edited
or added from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click [EDIT CL NAME].
→ The “CL NAME” window appears.
(2) Select the CL to be edited and click [MODIFY] when the CL is to be
edited, or click [NEW] when the CL is to be added.
→ The window for prompting the input of “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
(3) Input “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” and click [SET].
(4) Click [SET].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
 Procedures for Setting the Master CL

(1) Select the CL to be the master CL among those appearing on the “CL
NAME” window.
(2) Click [>>], and click [SET].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window restores.
018-230-06E
MU2-63
1.13 BACKUP No. Selection item Data to be backed up
GLG LOG : Panel drop/impact log
n Function File name: SE_GSENS_[SE serial No.].LOG
When the following execution file is copied into the folder where
Copies the configuration information and the error log in the HDD to a desired location the log file is saved and is double-clicked, a file converted to a
2.9
on the CL (a recording medium or a folder). viewable format is generated in the same folder (file name after
You can back up the following data: conversion: GLG_[file name before conversion]).
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM\
No. Selection item Data to be backed up COMMON\GLG.exe
Configuration file SE REGISTRATION
1 CONFIGURATION 2.10 Output the registration information of panels to the log.
Folder name: CONFIG INFORMATION
Logs of Nos. 1 “CONFIGURATION” and 2.1 to 2.10 below are Collectively acquire the data of the registered panels (maximum
3 CORRECT ALL DATA
backed up together. of 100 pieces).
Collect the following logs together with the mentioned logs. CORRECT PANEL Acquire the data of an individual panel by specifying the panel
2 LOG ALL 4
NETWORK: Communication log of TCP DATA number.
STATISTIC: BATTERY.CFG (battery information) and
HISTORY.CFG (history information)
u NOTE u
ERROR LOG: Error log
2.1 Refer to the following for further details on the CALIBRATION LOG files, GLG log files
File name: ERROR.cab
and SERegistInfo.txt.
IO TRACE LOG: Not used in the machine.
2.2 {MT:8._BACKUP FILE}
Folder name: IOT
ISC TRACE LOG: Communication log between packages
2.3 (subsystems). For design verification.
File name: ISC.cab
SOFT LOG: Communication log between packages
(subsystems). For design verification.
File name: Trace.cab, Trace2.cab, Trace3.cab, Trace4.cab,
2.4
Trace5.cab
The X-ray automatic detection log and the compensation data
share log are included here.
CSL LOG: Communication log between the CL and the MC
2.5
File name: CONSOL.cab
RADCON LOG: Serial communication log between the MC and
2.6 the X-CON
File name: RADCON.cab
CALIB LOG : Calibration history log
2.7
File name: CALIB.cab
HISTORY LOG: Use status statistic file of the FPD
2.8
File name: HISTORY.cab
018-230-07E
MU2-64
n Procedures
Select the item to be backed up, and then select the location for backup (drive or folder).
You can select only the drive or the folder recognized by the CL as the location.
Select the item to be backed up with

Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
the RU PC-TOOL, and then click

RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
"EXECUTE".
ALL RUs SETTING
Select panel number.

To change the backup location,
click .
Only the drives and directories

recognized by the CL are displayed
as the locations available for backup.
Choose a backup location (by double-clicking it).
The selected
location
appears.
DRID600_G0066.ai
018-230-07E
MU2-65
1.14 RESTORE n Procedures
Select the item to be restored, and then select the location where the data resides (drive
n Function or folder).
You can select only the drive or the folder recognized by the CL as the location.
Copies the configuration information and the machine-specific data from a desired
location on the CL (a recording medium or a folder) to the HDD of the MC. u INSTRUCTION u
You can restore the following data:
Do not restore the data (file or folder) while selected via the Windows Explorer.
No. Selection item Data to be restored Restore may result in failure, and an error message may appear.
1 CONFIGURATION Configuration file
2 HISTORY LOG Use status statistic file of the FPD Select the item to be restored
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
with the RU PC-TOOL, and then

RU IP ADDR
Update the machine-specific data (defect upon shipment,

3 INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA sensitivity correction coefficient) of an individual panel by
BACKUP RESTORE
click on "EXECUTE".
specifying the panel number. ALL RUs SETTING
Update the correction data (gain, offset, dot defect 4, 2, 5,

4 CORRECT PANEL DATA 6, defect upon shipment, sensitivity correction coefficient)
of an individual panel by specifying the panel number.
Select panel number.
u NOTE u
Click to change
The restored data become effective after the RU is restarted. the region to restore.
Only the drives and directries

recognized by the CL are
displayed as regions to which
the data can be restored.
Select (double-click) the region

to restore.
The selected ex.: When restoring the

location configuration, do not specify
appears. the folder CONFIG, but the
folder one level higher.
DRID600_G0067.ai
018-230-07E
MU2-66
1.15 I/O TRACE EXPERT
Not used in the machine.
018-230-07E
MU2-67
1.16 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button An error log file to be viewed is selected.
n Function
Of the error log files, only "FATAL" errors are
Refers to the error log data and checks the error name and occurrence conditions. 2 “FATAL" button
displayed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Of the error log files, only "WARNING" errors are

3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
7
Both “FATAL” and “WARNING” errors windows
4 “BOTH” button
are displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
9
Copies the latest error log data from the HDD of
6 “UPDATE” button
11 the MC to the FTP server of the CL.
The contents of the error log file selected are
12 displayed.
8 7 Error message list box Displays the name and occurrence conditions
on the bottom of the window, when selecting the
displayed data.
13
10
8 “Error Code” text box Displays the code of the selected error message.
Displays the name of the selected error
9 “Error Name” text box
message.
Displays the occurrence conditions of the
10 “Meaning” text box
selected error message.
14 15
DRID600_G0068.ai 11 “Details Info.” button Unusable
12 “Analysis Flow” button Unusable
n Procedures
You can keep a note about the selected error
13 “Memo.” text box
(1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". message.
The name of the person (author) who entered
(2) Click [ERROR DB]. 14 “Author” text box
text in the “Memo.” text box is entered.
→ The “ERROR DB” window appears. The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete
(3) Click [UPDATE], and update the error log. key and press the [SAVE] button again.
018-230-07E
MU2-68
1.17 UNINSTALL (ALL RUs) 1.18 VERSION UP (ALL RUs)
Uninstall all of the RU software of a machine type recorded in the CD-ROM (RU The entire RU software recorded in the CD-ROM (RU software) inserted into the CL is
software) inserted into the CL. version-updated.
Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP
server and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". CAUTIONS
In addition, the contents of "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR" directory on the CL are
- Never turn OFF the power of the MC during version-update. Otherwise, the
deleted.
contents of the HDD are damaged, and the MC cannot boot up.
u NOTE u - When one or more RU’s are to be version-updated, the RU application
If a plurality of RU’s of the DR-ID 1200 exist, the software and configuration data program is version-updated sequentially for the connected RU’s. Be sure to
for the RU of the DR-ID 1200 are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing check the RU software version of all RU’s after installation, and make sure
UNINSTALL. that version-update is completed.
n Procedures n Procedures
CAUTIONS (1) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user (2) Use the [PING] command to check the connection of the machine.
settings) of the RU, CL, and FTP server. Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the
{MU:1.5_PING}
user settings are lost.
- For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. Those files must (3) Repeat procedures (1) and (2) for all the RU's connected to the CL.
be restored after installation.
- CONFIGURATION (4) Insert the CD-ROM (RU software) into the CL.
- HISTORY LOG
(5) Click [VERSION UP] on ALL RUs SETTING.
(1) Insert the CD-ROM (RU software) into the CL. (6) Click [OK].
(2) Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
(7) Set the version update conditions, and click [OK].
(3) Click [UNINSTALL] on ALL RUs SETTING.
→ The version update of the RU software starts.
→ The Confirmation window appears.
(4) Click [OK]. (8) Click [OK].
→ The version update starts.
(5) Verify that the RU selected in the procedure (2) is deleted from "LIST
OF EXISTING RU." (9) Check that the version update is completed, and press the [Enter] key.
(10) Click [OK].

→ Return to the RU PC-TOOL window.
(11) Check that the version indication in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has
changed.
018-230-07E
MU2-69
1.19 Configuration n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
1.19.1 CDPath
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
n Function (2) Click [CLEAR].
When the RU software data is copied in the CL or the like, the RU software is installed → The path in the text box is cleared.
by specifying the folder path in which the data is stored.
(3) Click [SET].
u NOTES u
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
- Copy the whole CD-ROM (RU software) data into a single folder when copying the
data into the CL or the like. If it is partially copied or folder configuration is changed,
the installation might fail.
- Make the “CDPath” setting only when installation is to be made from copied data.
If "CDPath" is set, installation from the CD-ROM (RU software) cannot be executed.
n Procedures for Setting "CDPath"

The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the "Copy CD-R" of the C
drive are described as an example.
(1) Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.

→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
(2) Input or select the path of the folder in which the CD-ROM (RU
software) data is completely copied.
(3) Click [SET].
DRID600_G0069.ai
→ “CDPath” is set.
018-230-07E
MU2-70
2. DS Utility 2.1.1 Startup Window
There are two special DS tools for service engineers as follows.  Display Window
- DS Service Utility
- DS Firmware Update Utility
2.1 DS Service Utility

Perform the following items with DS Service Utility.
- Changing the DS setting
- Verifying the operation during DS installation
- Displaying the log information for DS trouble
1200_400042.ai
Double-clicking “DockingStandService” icon on the desktop, the window appears.
- Address:
The Address Setting window appears.
- LED/Sound test:
LED/Sound test window appears.
- Luminance:
Luminance window appears.
- Log:
Log window appears.
- Shutdown:
Exit the DS Service Utility.
018-230-07E
MU2-71
2.1.2 Address Setting Window - Update:
The system ini file and the DS address information will be updated by the input
 Display Window content.
u NOTE u
The updated content will be reflected after restarting the DS and DS Service Utility.
- Reset:
Used to restore the DS address to the default value while pressing the reset button
on the DS body for startup.
The system ini file will be updated as the default value.
u NOTE u
- There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
- Addition:
1200_400043.ai
Used to add the DS.
 Function Description After inputting the IP Address and Port number of the added DS, clicking Addition
button, the system ini file will be updated by the input value.
Set the DS address information.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3: u NOTE u
Select the target DS. - There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side. Stand #1 to #3 buttons.
Blue: connected - The updated content will be reflected after restarting the DS and DS Service Utility.
Red: not connected
Yellow: address information updated - Delete:
- IP Address: Used to delete the information of the DS in use.
Input the IP Address. Leaving the IP Address and Port number blank, clicking Delete button, the
- Subnetmask: appropriate address information and ini file of the DS will be deleted.
Input the Subnetmask. u NOTE u
- Default gateway:
Input the Default gateway. - There are no problems if the error message displays when clicking the Docking
- Port number:
Input the Port number.
- MAC address, Maker, Type, Date of MANUF, H/W Ver., S/W Ver., Serial No.(M), - End:
Serial No.(FF), Serial No.(PA):
Exit the Address setting window.
The appropriate items display.
018-230-07E
MU2-72
2.1.3 LED/Sound test Window 2.1.4 Luminance Window
1200_400044.ai 1200_400045.ai

Check the LED display and buzzer sound of the DS. Set the LED luminance of the DS.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3: - Docking Stand #1 to #3:
The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side. Select the setup target DS.
Blue: connected The connection status of the machine is displayed with the icons on the left-side.
Red: not connected Blue: connected
- Ready LED: Red: not connected
The Ready LED of the connected DS displays. - Ready:
- Selector #1 to #6: Input the integer 1 to 5 as the Ready LED luminance. (Default: 5)
The Selector LED#1 to #6 of the connected DS displays. - Selector #1 to #6:
- Buzzer: Input the integer 1 to 5 as the Selector LED luminance. (Default: 5)
The buzzer of the connected DS sounds. - Update:
- End: The LED luminance will be updated by the input content.
Exit the LED/Sound test window. - End:
Exit the Luminance window.
018-230-07E
MU2-73
2.1.5 Log Window
 Display Window
1200_400046.ai
Display the log information of the DS.
- Docking Stand #1 to #3:
Select the log acquisition target DS.
Blue: connected
Red: not connected
- Acuisition:
The log information of the DS displays.
- File Name:
When output the log displayed on the window as the csv file, input the file name.
- Output Log:
Output the log as the csv file.
- End:
Exit the Log window.
018-230-07E
MU2-74
2.2 DS Firmware Update Utility  Function Description
Double-clicking “FirmwareUpdate” icon on the desktop, the window appears.
 Display Window Update the DS firmware.
u NOTE u
For updating the DS firmware version, refer to the following.
{IN2:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address_Updating the DS firmware version}
- Docking Stand #1:

Blue: connected
Red: not connected
- File name:
Set the file name of the update target firmware.
- Update:
The firmware updating starts.
1200_400047.ai
- Processing state:
The update status of the firmware is displayed.
Updating: started
Update complete: completed
- End:
Exit the DS firmware update utility.
u NOTE u
When updating the firmware, start the DS while pressing the reset button of the DS.
018-230-07E
MU2-75
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) 9, 12, 23
11.28.2014 03 Revision (FM9281) 6, 7, 9, 10, 12-31
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 2-4, 7-22, 24, 25, 27-29, 32-35

03.31.2015 04 Changes in pagination (FM9287) 5, 6, 23, 26, 30, 31, 36-39
04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309) 2-4, 7-21, 23, 27, 28, 33, 34
04.30.2015 05 Changes in pagination (FM9309) 22, 24-26, 29-32, 35-39
2, 3, 7-10, 12-14, 16-19, 23, 27,
07.29.2016 06 Revision for PB (FM9340)
31-33, 35, 37, 40, 41
1, 4-6, 11, 15, 20-22, 24∼26,
28-30, 34, 37-39, 42-47
2, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16, 19, 27, 28,
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456)
32, 40, 41
Service Parts List (SP)
018-230-07E
SP-1
How to Use ● Fault RANK characters (which

provide reference for determining the
■PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
■REFER TO
The "REFER TO" column shows reference
Service Parts List recom-mended stock quantity) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number
sections concerning the part.Clicking
All parts are assigned with one of the reference section in the "REFER
has the following meaning. TO" column jumps to the top page of
characters A through E.
■RANK Character Significance the reference section where the related
○For hardware
Consumable parts or parts The alphabet denotes the version number information is in.
● Handling RANK characters (parts A that will be replaced at short of a part. If parts have different version
that are handled in a special manner intervals. ■ Quantities of recommended spare
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
during parts operation, such as Parts that may become faulty
○For software parts
management) B accidentally and have a
The alphabet denotes a difference in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
relatively high failure rate.
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that have a sufficiently long
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix in stock a certain quantity of parts according
R Must be returned. Repairable C MTBF, but are expected to have are not compatible with each other. Version to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
Must be returned. a relatively high failure rate. number is omitted in the list. parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Q (We use for Not repairable Parts that have a sufficiently parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
analysis.) D long MTBF, but are expected to ■PART NAME the stock quantity of service parts depending
become faulty. PART NAME represents a general name of
Must Not be on the number of working units (N).
returned. Parts that are necessary for fault a part. Quantity used in a single system : Q
(Consumable analysis, or parts that may be
E needed in case of unexpected ■QTY. ○N = 1
T part. Not Not repairable
accidents such as man-induced ○QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
applicable to
free-of-charge damage. each unit. Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
warranty.) Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide> ○A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
without Must Not be The Fault RANK characters, Handling represents a small part that is shipped in ○2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. RANK characters, and Export regulation- packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
applicable character are assigned in that in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
● Export regulation-applicable order. of that part is supplied.) Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
character(Parts with the following Thus, at least one character or up to three
■REMARKS ○11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character are controlled by Export characters are assigned in the RANK
Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
regulation.) column.
Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
name of a part or relevant information of
Character Significance ■REF.NO. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
Parts applicable to export
＋
regulations.
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the ■SERIAL NUMBER ■ Precautions to be Observed When
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts The units may contain different parts Returning Parts for Repair
having different functions, they are clearly depending on their shipment control number.
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL When returning a component for repair,
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
NUMBER columns. pack it in the same manner as for the
control number to which the relevant parts
supplied substitute, using the substitute
are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER
packing materials.
column is blank, the parts are applicable to
The use of different packing materials or
all the relevant units. The shipment control
packing methods may incur damage to
number is represented by lower five digits
packed component during transit.
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
01 MP
MP
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DETAIL A E 1 350Y120177 カバー Cover 2
MP3 上下カバー
MP3 Top/Bottom
Cover
MP3 前カバー
E 2 350Y120080G カバー Cover 1
MP3 Front Cover
MP3 スイッチ周り
E 3 350N120130F カバー Cover 1 カバー
MP3 Switch Cover
12
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 4 113Y100858A 1
LED60C LED60C
C 5 113Y1979B 1
NFB51A NFB51A
C 6 857Y120034B 1
MPC54B MPC54B
48V / 4A
9 for MPC54B F4
A 6.1 137S1422 ヒューズ Fuse 1
型式／ Model：
LM40(D)CDL (*1)
10 48V / 2A
for MPC54B
A 6.2 137S1420 ヒューズ Fuse 5 F5,F6,F7,F8,F11
型式／ Model：
LM20(D)CDL (*1)
11 48V / 0.3A
for MPC54B F9
8 A 6.3 137S1170 ヒューズ Fuse 1
型式／ Model：
LM03(D) (*1)
D 7 120S5277 コンセント Concent 1
1 MP3 後カバー
A E 8 350Y120078B カバー Cover 1
MP3 Rear Cover
型式／ Model：
D 9 131S0534 リレー Relay 1
AHN22005 (*2)
電源部 Power Supply Unit 型式／ Model：
C 10 125N100032B 1
PSU27A PSU27A CME240P-24 (*3)
7 DC ファン
4 E 11 119N100041 ファン Fan 1
DC Fan
6 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 12 113Y100293C 1
MPX54A MPX54A
*1: メーカ／大東通信機株式会社
Manufacturer / Daito Communication Apparatus Co.
*2: メーカ／パナソニック電工株式会社
2
Manufacturer / Panasonic Electric Works Co.
*3: メーカ／ TDK ラムダ株式会社
Manufacturer / TDK-Lambda Co.
5
1
3
1200_500001.ai
018-230-07C
SP-3
02A DS1
DS1
5
A 6
E 1 350Y120104B カバー Cover 1
DS 後カバー
DS Rear Cover
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly ブザー基板
4 C 2 113Y120124 1
DSB65A DSB65A Buzzer Board
DS 前カバー
6 E 3 350Y120103F カバー Cover 1
DS Front Cover
レディインジケータ
C 4 113Y120122F 1 基板
DSI65A DSI65A
Indicator Board
DS 入り口カバー
E 5 350Y120071E カバー Cover 1
DS Insertion Cover
DS 壁固定穴目隠し
アセンブリ
Blind Plate
Assembly of DS
Hook Slot for Fixing
on the Wall
1 D 7 388N120025A シャッタばね Shutter Spring 3
E 8 398N120003C シャッタ小 Small Shutter 1
E 9 398N120002D シャッタ大 Large Shutter 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly LED 基板
C 10 113Y120123B 1
DSL65A DSL65A LED Board
7 8
10
9
DETAIL A
1200_500002.ai
018-230-06C
SP-4
02B DS2
DS2
10 D 1 388N120026 ニップばね Spring 2
1 8
D 2 388N120024A 大サイズばね Large Spring 1
E 3 362N120020A 大サイズコマ Large Tray 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly メイン、制御基板
C 4 857Y120032 1
DSM65A DSM65A Main/Control Board
48V / 1A
for DSM65A F2,F3
A 4.1 137S1417 ヒューズ Fuse 2
型式／ Model：
9 LM10(D) (*1)
E 5 363N120023F コネクタガイド Connector Guide 1
DETAIL B C 6 857Y120033A
ボードアセンブリ
DSC65A
Board Assembly
DSC65A
1
端子基板
Connector Board
D 7 388N120021B コネクタばね Connector Spring 1
D 8 388N120023B 小サイズばね Small Spring 1
D 9 388N120022A 可動コマばね Tray Spring 1
E 10 362N120018B 小サイズコマ Small Tray 1
A 1 *1: メーカ／大東通信機株式会社
B A
2
3
5
7
DETAIL A
1200_500003.ai
018-230-06C
SP-5
02C DS3
DS3
D 1 386N100413D キャップ Cap 3
D 2 386S1123 ショックアブソーバ Shock Absorber 3
NPS-63M
C 3 125N120013 電源部 Power Supply Unit 1
（EMARSON）
1
2
1200_500004.ai
018-230-06C
SP-6
02D DS4
DS4
E 1 362N120016C 底面受け Tray 3
D 2 388N120034 保護接地用ばね Spring 1
E 3 334N120011B ローラ（両端） Roller (side) 2
E 4 334N120012B ローラ（中央） Roller (center) 1
1200_500005.ai
018-230-06C
SP-7
03 PB
PB
国内
C 1 814Y200007 DR-ID1200PB (JP) DR-ID1200PB (JP) 1
For Japan (*4)
PB TOP カバー
C 2 350Y130029 PB TOP Cover Kit 1
キット
PB FRONT カバー
C 3 350Y130038 PB FRONT Cover Kit 1 (*1)
キット
C 4 857Y200010 1
MPS65A MPS65A
48V / 2A
for MPS65A F1
A 5 137S1420 ヒューズ Fuse 1
型式／ Model：
3 1 LM20(D)CDL (*2)
型式／
6 4, 5 C 6 125S0410 電源部 Power Supply Unit 1 MDS-065APS12B
(*3)
A 7 126Y0353 LED LED 1
電源部 -MPS
E 8 136Y121522A ケーブル Cable 1 Power Supply Unit -
MPS
*1: PB 正面樹脂カバー、PB 導光テープ (x2)、PB 導光を含む。

7 Includes the PB front resin cover, PB light guide tape (x2), and PB light guide.
*2: メーカ／大東通信機株式会社
2
*3: メーカ／デルタ株式会社
Manufacturer / Delta electronics, Inc
*4: SE ケーブルを含む。
Includes the SE cable.
1200_500028.ai
018-230-06C
SP-8
04A SE1 (1201SE, 1211SE)

SE1 (1201SE, 1211SE)
G47 フラットパネル G47 Flat Panel 国内 (1201SE)
C 1.1 812Y120039A 1
センサ（TUV） Sensor (TUV) For Japan (*1)
S47 フラットパネル S47 Flat Panel 国内 (1201SE)
C 1.2 812Y200039 1
センサ（UL） Sensor (UL) For Japan (*1)
47G フラットパネル 47G 海外 (1201SE)
C 1.3 812Y120043A 1
1 センサ Flat Panel Sensor For Overseas
3
C47 フラットパネル C47 Flat Panel 国内 (1211SE)
C 1.4 812Y120049 1
4 C47 フラットパネル C47 Flat Panel 国内 (1211SE)
C 1.5 812Y200043 1
8 5 47C フラットパネル 47C 海外 (1211SE)
6 C 1.6 812Y120053 1
センサ Flat Panel Sensor For Overseas
6
G47 背面カバー G47 Rear Cover Kit 国内 (1201SE)
C 2.1 898Y120252F 1
キット（TUV） (TUV) For Japan (*2)
47G 背面カバー 47G Rear Cover Kit 海外 (1201SE)
C 2.2 898Y120254F 1
キット（TUV） (TUV) For Overseas (*2)
C47 背面カバー C47 Rear Cover Kit 国内 (1211SE)
C 2.3 898Y120253E 1
7 47C 背面カバー 47C Rear Cover Kit 海外 (1211SE)
7 C 2.4 898Y120255E 1
S47 背面カバー S47 Rear Cover Kit 国内 (1201SE)
C 2.5 898Y200110B 1
キット（UL） (UL) For Japan (*2)
8
5 C 2.6 898Y200112B 1
キット（UL） (UL) For Overseas (*2)
C 2.7 898Y200111A 1
47C 背面カバー 47C Rear Cover Kit 海外 (1211SE)
C 2.8 898Y200113B 1
1417TOP カバー
E 3 898Y120256 上カバーキット Top Cover Kit 1 1417 TOP Cover
(*3)
47 ねじキット
E 4 898Y120257A 47 ねじキット 47 Screw Kit 1
2 47 Screw Kit (*4)
14inch 抗菌塗装
A 5 375Y120009C ねじ上シール Seal 2 14 inch Antibacterial
Coating Seal
A 6 405N120054A グリーンラベル Name plate 4
A 7 405N120237A グレーラベル Name plate 4
17inch 抗菌塗装
Coating Seal
*1: 「フラットパネルセンサ（TUV）」は「TUV 認証取得パネル」のみに適用すること。「TUV 認証取得パ

ネル」は次ページの表に示す号機番号以前のものが対象となる。
「フラットパネルセンサ（UL）」適用時は、旧パネルからシリアルナンバー銘板とコネクタを移植す
1200_500011.ai
ること。
Apply the "Flat Panel Sensor (TUV)" only for the TUV certification panel. The machine-specific
numbers other than the table of the next page are the TUV certification panel.
When applying the "Flat Panel Sensor (UL)", replace the serial number label and the connector from
the old panel.
018-230-07C
SP-9
04A SE1 (1201SE, 1211SE)

SE1 (1201SE, 1211SE)
*2: 背面カバー、背面ネジおよび背面ネジキャップシール（4 セット）、手かかりシート（4 枚）、側面ネジ（46
本）、側面ネジ上シール（4 枚）同梱。
Includes rear cover, rear screws and rear screw cap seal (4 sets), plug sheet (4 sheets), side
screws(x46), and seals on the side screws (4 sheets).
「背面カバーキット（TUV）」は「TUV 認証取得パネル」のみ、「背面カバーキット（UL）」は「UL 認
証取得パネル」のみに適用すること。
Apply the "Rear Cover Kit (TUV)" only for the TUV certification panel, and the "Rear Cover Kit (UL)"
only for the UL certification panel.
「UL 認証取得パネル」の対象号機番号は下記のとおり。上から 4 桁目の数値ごとに対象号機番号が
異なる。下記以外は「TUV 認証取得パネル」である。
The serial numbers for the UL certification panel are as shown below. The serial numbers are different
depending on the fourth top digit value. The serial numbers other than below are the TUV certification
panel.
モデル名上 4 桁目 / 仕向地 / UL 認証取得パネル /
Model name Fourth top digit value Destination UL certification panel
2 - 66520417 ∼
5 - 66450489 ∼
DR-ID 1201SE
国内 /For Japan 66390056 ∼
9
海外 /For Overseas 66390063 ∼
2 - 66520460 ∼
5 - 66450635 ∼
DR-ID 1211SE
9
「TUV 認証取得パネル」と「UL 認証取得パネル」の見分け方については、「安全に関する注意：2.1.1_

DR-ID 1200」を参照すること。
For how to identify the TUV certification panel and the UL certification panel, refer to the "Safety
Precaution: 2.1.1_DR-ID 1200".
*3: 上カバー、側面ネジ（46 本）、側面ネジ上シール（4 枚）、グリーンラベル（2 枚）、グレーラベル（2
枚）同梱。
Includes top cover, side screws(x46), seals on the side screws (4 sheets), green labels (2 sheets),
and gray labels (2 sheets).
*4: M2x3（46 個）と項番 5 ∼ 8 のセット。
Set of 46 M2x3 screws and REF 5 to 8.
018-230-06C
SP-10
04B SE2 (1201SE, 1211SE)

SE2 (1201SE, 1211SE)
DETAIL A 13
E 1 328Y120001B
バッテリツメ交換
アセンブリ
Battery Ratchet
Assembly
1

C 2 857Y120045A 3
LEB65A LEB65A LED Board
11 11 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly LED 基板
C 3 857Y120046A 2
LED65A LED65A LED Board
SE コネクタ PET
E 4 363N120041A Guide 1
シート
E 5 120N120006B 有線接続コネクタ Connector 1
有線接続コネクタ
E 6 375Y120020 Seal 1
防水パッキン
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 中継基板
C 7 857Y120050 1
REC65A REC65A Relay board
C 8 857Y120044A 1
LEA65A LEA65A LED Board
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly バッテリ中継基板
C 9 857Y120043C 1
BCN65A BCN65A Battery Relay Board
C 10 857Y120036B 1
LEC65A LEC65A LED Board
A 11.1 332N120005 滑り止めシート Stopper 4
抗菌塗装
A 11.2 317Y120002 手かかりシート Plug 4 Antibacterial Coating
12 Seal
9 10 1417 有線コネクタ部
E 12.1 350Y120115A Cover Assembly 1
カバーアセンブリ
クレードルアダプタ Cradle Adapter
E 12.2 120N120008B 1
8 （47/77） (44/77)
Dummy Battery
2 E 13 350Y120075H ダミーバッテリ Assy 1
Assembly
7
3
5
6
2
1
3
A
1200_500012.ai
018-230-06C
SP-11
04C SE3 (1201SE, 1211SE)

SE3 (1201SE, 1211SE)
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 電源基板
E 1 857Y120042F 1
POW65A POW65A Power Board
基板固定導通
C 3 338N120007 Spacer 17
スペーサ
アンテナ基板
E 4 347Y120010B スペーサ Spacer 2
ANT Board
8 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 333 ㎜
E 5 857Y120047 1
アンテナ基板 ANT ケーブル /Cable
9
C 6 857Y120126 1
Wireless LAN Module Wireless LAN Module
3
衝撃検出基板
E 7 857Y120037B 1 Shock Detection
GLG65A GLG65A
Board
記憶媒体
C 8 114Y120042C SD カード SD Card 1
Storage Medium
C 9 857Y120057A 1
RMV65A RMV65A
11 C 11 857Y120049B 1
SPR65A SPR65A Relay board
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 578 ㎜
E 13 857Y120048 1
13
4
7
6
5
4
1
3
1200_500004.ai
018-230-07C
SP-12
04D SE4 (1202SE, 1212SE)

SE4 (1202SE, 1212SE)
G77 フラットパネル G77 Flat Panel 国内 (1202SE)
C 1.1 812Y120044A 1
S77 フラットパネル S77 Flat Panel 国内 (1202SE)
C 1.2 812Y200041 1
77G フラットパネル 77G 海外 (1202SE)
C 1.3 812Y120048A 1
1 センサ Flat Panel Sensor For Overseas
3
C 1.4 812Y120054 1
C 1.5 812Y200045 1
7 7 77C フラットパネル 77C 海外 (1212SE)
5 C 1.6 812Y120058 1
センサ Flat Panel Sensor For Overseas
5
G77 背面カバー G77 Rear Cover Kit 国内 (1202SE)
C 2.1 898Y120347E 1
C 2.2 898Y120349E 1
C 2.3 898Y120348E 1
6 77C 背面カバー 77C Rear Cover Kit 海外 (1212SE)
6 C 2.4 898Y120350E 1
S77 背面カバー S77 Rear Cover Kit 国内 (1202SE)
C 2.5 898Y200114A 1
7
7 C 2.6 898Y200116B 1
C 2.7 898Y200115A 1
77C 背面カバー 77C Rear Cover Kit 海外 (1212SE)
C 2.8 898Y200117B 1
1717TOP カバー
E 3 898Y120351 上カバーキット Top Cover Kit 1 1717 TOP Cover
(*3)
77 ねじキット
E 4 898Y120352 77 ねじキット 77 Screw Kit 1
2 77 Screw Kit (*4)
A 5 405N120054A グリーンラベル Name plate 4
A 6 405N120237A グレーラベル Name plate 4
17inch 抗菌塗装
Coating Seal

ネル」は次ページの表に示す号機番号以前のものが対象となる。
ること。
numbers other than the table of the next page are the TUV certification panel.
1200_500019.ai
the old panel.
018-230-07C
SP-13
04D SE4 (1202SE, 1212SE)

SE4 (1202SE, 1212SE)
depending on the fourth top digit value. The serial numbers other than below are the TUV certification
panel.
2 - 66520317 ∼
5 - 66450222 ∼
DR-ID 1202SE
9
2 - 66520320 ∼
5 - 66450324 ∼
DR-ID 1212SE
9

枚）同梱。
*4: M2x3（52 個）と項番 5 ∼ 7 のセット。
Set of 52 M2x3 screws and REF 5 to 7.
018-230-06C
SP-14
04E SE5 (1202SE, 1212SE)

SE5 (1202SE, 1212SE)
DETAIL A 13
E 1 328Y120001B
バッテリツメ交換
アセンブリ
Battery Ratchet
Assembly
1

C 2 857Y120045A 3
LEB65A LEB65A LED Board
C 3 857Y120046A 2
LED65A LED65A LED Board
SE コネクタ PET
E 4 363N120041A Guide 1
シート
E 6 375Y120020 Seal 1
防水パッキン
C 7 857Y120050 1
REC65A REC65A Relay board
C 8 857Y120044A 1
LEA65A LEA65A LED Board
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly バッテリ中継基板
C 9 857Y120043C 1
BCN65A BCN65A Battery Relay Board
C 10 857Y120036B 1
LEC65A LEC65A LED Board
A 11.1 332N120005 滑り止めシート Stopper 4
抗菌塗装
A 11.2 317Y120002 手かかりシート Plug 4 Antibacterial Coating
12 Seal
9 10 1417 有線コネクタ部
E 12.1 350Y120115A Cover Assembly 1
カバーアセンブリ
E 12.2 120N120008B 1
8 （47/77） (44/77)
Dummy Battery
2 E 13 350Y120075H ダミーバッテリ Assy 1
Assembly
7
3
5
6
2
1
3
A
1200_500020.ai
018-230-06C
SP-15
04F SE6 (1202SE, 1212SE)

SE6 (1202SE, 1212SE)
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 電源基板
E 1 857Y120042F 1
POW65A POW65A Power Board
基板固定導通
C 3 338N120007 Spacer 18
スペーサ
アンテナ基板
E 4 347Y120010B スペーサ Spacer 2
ANT Board
8 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 333 ㎜
E 5 857Y120047 1
9
C 6 857Y120126 1
Wireless LAN Module Wireless LAN Module
3
衝撃検出基板
E 7 857Y120037B 1 Shock Detection
GLG65A GLG65A
Board
記憶媒体
C 8 114Y120042C SD カード SD Card 1
Storage Medium
C 9 857Y120057A 1
RMV65A RMV65A
11 C 11 857Y120049B 1
SPR65A SPR65A Relay board
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 578 ㎜
E 13 857Y120048 1
13
4
7
6
5
4
1
3
1200_500021.ai
018-230-07C
SP-16
04G SE7 (1213SE)

SE7 (1213SE)
海外（1213SE）
C 1 812Y120129 フラットパネルセンサ Flat Panel Sensor 1
For Overseas
E 2 898Y120441A 上カバーキット Top Cover Kit 1 (*2)
24x30 側面ネジシール 24x30 Side Seal
A 3 375N120028 2
（短辺） (Short Side)
A 4 405N120054A グリーンラベル Green Name plate 2
A 5 405N120237A グレーラベル Gray Name plate 2
2 1 24x30 側面ネジシール 24x30 Side Seal
A 6 375N120027 2
（長辺） (Long Side)
2430C ねじキット
3 3 E 7 898Y120443A 24x30 ねじキット 24x30 Screw Kit 1 2430C Screw Kit
4 (*3)
4
E 8 308N120002B タフクロス M2x3 Screw 1
背面カバーキット Rear Cover Kit 海外（1213SE）
C 9.1 898Y120439D 1
（TUV） (TUV) For Overseas (*1)
背面カバーキット海外（1213SE）
C 9.2 898Y200119A Rear Cover Kit (UL) 1
（UL） For Overseas (*1)
5 5
6
6
7,8
9
枚）同梱。
*3: 項番 3 ∼ 6 および 8 のセット。
Set of REF 3 to 6 and 8.
1300_500001.ai
018-230-07C
SP-17
04H SE8 (1214SE)

SE8 (1214SE)
C12 フラットパネル C12 Flat Panel 国内（1214SE）
C 1.1 812Y120127 1
C12 フラットパネル C12 Flat Panel 国内（1214SE）
C 1.2 812Y200047 1
E 2 898Y120440 上カバーキット Top Cover Kit 1 (*3)
10x12 側面ネジシール 10x12 Side Seal
A 3 375N120049 2
（短辺） (Short Side)
A 4 405N120054A グリーンラベル Green Name plate 2
2 A 5 405N120237A グレーラベル Gray Name plate 2
1 10x12 側面ネジシール 10x12 Side Seal
A 6 375N120048 2
（長辺） (Long Side)
3 3 1012C ねじキット
4 E 7 898Y120442 10x12 ねじキット 10x12 Screw Kit 1 1012C Screw Kit
4 (*4)
E 8 308N120002B タフクロス M2x3 Screw 1
背面カバーキット Rear Cover Kit 国内（1214SE）
C 9.1 898Y120438C 1
（TUV） (TUV) For Japan (*2)
背面カバーキット国内（1214SE）
C 9.2 898Y200118A Rear Cover Kit (UL) 1
（UL） For Japan (*2)
5 5
6
6
7,8
1300_500004.ai
018-230-06C
SP-18
04H SE8 (1214SE)

SE8 (1214SE)
ネル」は下表に示す号機番号以前のものが対象となる。
ること。
numbers other than the following table are the TUV certification panel.
the old panel.
depending on the fourth top digit value. The serial numbers other than below are the TUV certification panel.
2 国内 /For Japan 66420434 ∼

DR-ID 1214SE
9 国内 /For Japan 66290017 ∼

枚）同梱。
*4: 項番 3 ∼ 6 および 8 のセット。
Set of REF 3 to 6 and 8.
018-230-06C
SP-19
04I SE9 (1213SE, 1214SE)

SE9 (1213SE, 1214SE)
DETAIL A
E 1 857Y120100A 1
LEX66A LEX66A LED Board
C 2 857Y120097 2
LED66A LED66A
E 3 375Y120020 Seal 1
防水パッキン
14 14 C 5 857Y120093
1
18 15 REC66A REC66A
C 6 857Y120096A 1
16 15 LEA66A LEA66A LED Board
C 7 857Y120092 1
16 BCN65A BCN65A
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 信号中継基板
C 8 857Y120095 1
RLY66A RLY66A Signal Relay Board
14 C 9 857Y120103 1
17 NCA66A NCA66A
16 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly LED 基板
C 10 857Y120102 1
LEZ66A LEZ66A LED Board
C 11 857Y120101 1
LEY66A LEY66A LED Board
バッテリツメ交換 Battery Ratchet
E 12 328Y120003 1
アセンブリ Assembly
19
Dummy Battery
E 13 350Y120075H ダミーバッテリ Assy 1
Assembly
8 小サイズ滑り止め
A 14.1 332N120012 Stopper 3
6 2 シート
9 抗菌塗装
小サイズ手かかり
A 14.2 317N120017 Plug 3 Antibacterial
シート
Coating Seal
A 15 317N120032 ネジキャップシール Plug 2
10 E 16 308N120015A 特殊ネジ Special Screw 4
7
5 小サイズネジ隠し
A 17 382N120292A Tape 2
4 キャップダイノック
小サイズネジ隠し
A 18 317Y120017A Cap 2
キャップ Assy
小サイズ用コネクタ
3 E 19.1 350Y120237
カバー Assy
Cover 1

E 19.2 120N120013A 1
（1012/2430） (1012/2430)
11 A 20 382N130044 固定テープ Tape 1
2
1
12
12
A 1300_500002.ai
018-230-07C
SP-20
04J SE10 (1213SE, 1214SE)

SE10 (1213SE, 1214SE)
サービスパーツ Board Assembly
C 1 857Y120098 2
CNB66A CNB66A
Board Assembly
ボードアセンブリ
E 2 857Y120126 Wireless LAN 1
Wireless LAN Module
Module
記憶媒体
C 3 114Y120056 MicroSD カード MicroSD Card 1
Storage Medium
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1214SE のみ
C 4 857Y120099 1
CNA66A CNA66A 1214SE only
C 5 857Y120105A 1
RMV66A RMV66A
E 6 857Y120104 小サイズアンテナ基板 ANT 2
C 7 857Y120094A 1
SPR66A SPR66A
1
4
6
6
1300_500003.ai
018-230-06C
SP-21
04K SE11 ( バッテリパック )

SE11 (Battery pack)
バッテリラッチ Battery Latch
E 1 340Y120017A 1
1200_500023.ai
018-230-06C
SP-22
04L SE12 ( ケーブル : 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)

SE12 (Cable: 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)
POW7-GTD1
E 1.1 136Y120125D ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
15 16 17 18 (1201SE,1211SE)
POW7-GTD1
E 1.2 136Y120292C ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
(1202SE,1212SE)
E 2 136Y120429A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 SPR1-POW8 (SE)
RMV-POW
E 3.1 136Y120427A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
(1201SE,1211SE)
RMV1-POW1
E 3.2 136Y121060 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
(1202SE,1212SE)
RMV3-POW2
(1201SE,1211SE)
RMV3-POW2
(1202SE,1212SE)
SE Connector_CN2
E 5.1 136Y120431B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 -REC11
1 (1201SE,1211SE)
SE Connector-
E 5.2 136Y121061A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 RMV/POW
14 (1202SE,1212SE)
SPR4-RMV
(1201SE,1211SE)
2
SPR4-RMV2
(1202SE,1212SE)
SPR5-RMV11
E 7.1 136N120007A ケーブル Cable 1
(1201SE,1211SE)
SPR5-RMV11
E 7.2 136N120057A ケーブル Cable 1
(1202SE,1212SE)
13 POW-GLG
(1201SE,1211SE)
3 POW-GLG
(1202SE,1212SE)
E 9 136N120006A ケーブル Cable 1 RMV8-GLG1
SPR3-RMV12
E 10.1 136Y120434B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
(1201SE,1211SE)
12 SPR3-RMV12
4 E 10.2 136Y121063 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
(1202SE,1212SE)
POW10-GTDL
(1201SE,1211SE)
POW10-GTDL
(1202SE,1212SE)
RMV- サーミスタ /
11 E 12 136Y120433A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
Thermistor (SE)
E 13 136N120009B ケーブル Cable 1 RMV24-GTD2
E 14 136N120008A ケーブル Cable 1 RMV23-GTD2
E 15 136Y120921 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 2 ABB_L-RMV
ABB_L-POW
(1201SE,1211SE)
ABB_L-POW
(1202SE,1212SE)
10 9 8 7 6 5 1200_500016.ai
ABB_R-RMV
(1201SE,1211SE)
ABB_R-RMV
(1202SE,1212SE)
E 18 136Y120919 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 POW5-ABB1
018-230-06C
SP-23
04M SE13 ( ケーブル : 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)

SE13 (Cable: 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)
LEB_1-REC
8 9 (1201SE,1211SE)
LEB_1-REC
(1202SE,1212SE)
LED(SW)_2-
E 2.1 136Y120417A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 REC_13
(1201SE,1211SE)
LED(Cmode)-
E 2.2 136Y121057 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 REC13
(1202SE,1212SE)
LEB_3-REC
(1201SE,1211SE)
7
LEB_3-REC
(1202SE,1212SE)
REC1-BCN2
(1201SE,1211SE)
REC1-BCN2
(1202SE,1212SE)
E 5 136N120024A ケーブル Cable SPR6-REC12
REC3-BCN3
(1201SE,1211SE)
REC3-BCN3
(1202SE,1212SE)
E 7 136Y120416A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 LED(SW)_1-REC_9
LEC-REC
(1201SE,1211SE)
LEC-REC
(1202SE,1212SE)
6 LEB_2-REC
(1201SE,1211SE)
LEB_2-REC
1 (1202SE,1212SE)
3 2 1200_500017.ai
018-230-06C
SP-24
04N SE14 ( ケーブル : 1213SE)

SE14 (Cable: 1213SE)
REC-LED
E 2 136Y121097 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
RLY-LED
E 3 136N120079C ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
REC6-RLY1
10 E 6 136Y121101 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE）
RLY5-RMV3
E 7 136N120081B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
RMV-ABD
（1213SE 1214SE）
REC-LEX
（1213SE）
RLY-LEY
14 （1213SE）
RLY-LEZ
15 （1213SE）
RLY9-NCA
11 （1213SE 1214SE）
RMV- サーミスタ /
E 13 136Y121105A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 Thermistor
（1213SE 1214SE）
3 REC2-BCN3
（1213SE 1214SE）
16
REC3-BCN2
17 E 15 136Y120787B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
18 SE Connector-
E 16 136Y120788 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 REC1
13 （1213SE 1214SE）
2
SE Connector-RLY2
（1213SE 1214SE）
6 SE Connector-RLY3
（1213SE 1214SE）
SPR1-RMV1
（1213SE 1214SE）
19
1200_500025.ai
018-230-06C
SP-25
04O SE15 ( ケーブル : 1214SE)

SE15 (Cable: 1214SE)
REC-LEX
（1214SE）
REC-LED
（1213SE 1214SE）
RLY-LED
E 3 136N120079C ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
4
RLY-LEY
（1214SE）
RLY-LEZ
（1214SE）
REC6-RLY1
（1214SE）
5 RLY5-RMV3
E 7 136N120081B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
1 （1213SE 1214SE）
RMV-ABD
（1213SE 1214SE）
RLY9-NCA
14 （1213SE 1214SE）
15 RMV- サーミスタ /
E 13 136Y121105A ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 Thermistor
（1213SE 1214SE）
REC2-BCN3
3 （1213SE 1214SE）
17
REC3-BCN2
18 E 15 136Y120787B ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1
（1213SE 1214SE）
2 SE Connector-
E 16 136Y120788 ケーブルアセンブリ Cable Assembly 1 REC1
13
（1213SE 1214SE）
19 SE Connector-RLY2
（1213SE 1214SE）
SE Connector-RLY3
（1213SE 1214SE）
SPR1-RMV1
（1213SE 1214SE）
1200_500024.ai
018-230-06C
SP-26
05 MC
MC
ネットワーク Gigabit CT Desktop
Network Interface
C 1 898Y101450 インターフェース 1 Adapter
Card
カード (EXPI9301CT)
1200_500015.ai
018-230-06C
SP-27
06 FUJIFILM 製 AP
FUJIFILM-made AP
2 E 1 108S0040 アイソレータ Isolator 1
SE communication SE-LAN
E 2 136Y120392 SE 通信ケーブル 1
cable For DR-ID 1200
LAN conversion
E 3 136Y120260 LAN 変換ケーブル 1
cable
国内
E 4.1 898Y120692 小型 AP Kit Small AP Kit 1
For Japan (*1)
1 E 4.2 853Y120008B 小型 AP Kit Small AP Kit 1
海外
For Overseas (*2)
4
3 *1: USB 口識別銘板、マジックテープ、コードクランプを同梱。
USB port identification label, magic tape and cord clamp are included.
1200_500026.ai *2: 各国向け電波法銘板を同梱。
Radio law certification label for each country is included.
018-230-07C
SP-28
07 バッテリチャージャ
Battery Charger
DV2 チャージャ DV2 Charger
C 1 113Y120235 1
端子基板 Terminal Board
C 2 125Y120011K バッテリチャージャ Battery Charger 1
018-230-07C
SP-29
08A オプション 1（回路パーツ）

Options 1 (Circuit Parts)
AC ブッキー用リレー 100-110V 用
C 1.1 ********* AC Bucky Relay Unit 1
ユニット for 100V-110V
AC ブッキー用リレー 110V-120V 用
100-110V 用
for 100V-110V
D 2.1 131S0530 リレー Relay 4
型式／ Model：
AHN210X0 (*)
MP
110V-120V 用
for 110V-120V
D 2.2 131S0531 リレー Relay 4
型式／ Model：
AHN210X1 (*)
200V-220V 用
for 200V-220V
D 2.3 131S0532 リレー Relay 4
型式／ Model：
AHN210Y0 (*)
220V-240V 用
for 220V-240V
D 2.4 131S0533 リレー Relay 4
1 型式／ Model：
AHN210Y2 (*)
型式／ Model：
D 3 131S0529 リレー Relay 2
AHN12205 (*)
7 HN2_terminal
D 4 120S5279 ソケット Socket 4
blocks
6 HN1_terminal
D 5 120S5278 ソケット Socket 2
blocks
D 6 135N100012 端子台 Terminal block 1 TB1
5 2
D 7 135N100013 端子台 Terminal block 1 TB2
4 *: メーカ／パナソニック電工株式会社
3 Manufacturer / Panasonic Electric Works Co.
1200_500009.ai
018-230-06C
SP-30
08B オプション 2（DS カバー）

Options 2 (DS Cover)
DS 床固定カバー
アセンブリ
DS Floor Foot Cover
Assembly
1200_500006.ai
018-230-06C
SP-31
08C オプション 3（DS カバー）

Options 3 (DS Cover)
DV2DS 床置き足
E 1 899Y120215B カバー Cover 1 For DV2DS Foot on
the Floor
1200_500014.ai
018-230-06C
SP-32
09 ケーブル
CABLE
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
ケーブル Cable
E 1 136Y120438 1 INRET-SW (DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 2 136Y120439 1 SW-SK1 (DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 3 136Y120440 1 SK2-CN1 (DS)
ケーブル Cable CN2-CN21, CN7-CN71,
E 4 136Y120441 1
アセンブリ Assembly CN10-CN101 (DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 5 136Y120442 1 CN3-CN31 (DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 6 136Y120443 1 CN4-CN41 (DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 7 136Y120444 1 INLET-NFB65A(DS)
ケーブル Cable
E 8 136Y200036A 1 LAN Cable for PB
E 9 382N120156 テープ Tape 1 両面 /Both Sides (SE)
E 10 382N120157 テープ Tape 1 片面 /One Side (SE)
E 11 382N120158A テープ Tape 5 両面 /Both Sides (SE)
E 12 382N120159B テープ Tape 7 片面 /One Side (SE)
E 13 382N120160 テープ Tape 5 GLG 止め /GLG Stopper (SE)
E 14 382N120167A テープ Tape 1 SE-RMV1 (SE)
E 15 382N120168B テープ Tape 1 SE-RMV2 (SE)
E 16 382N120169A テープ Tape 2 POW-GTD (SE)
SFC1, PFC2, MFC1
フェライト Ferrite
E 17 138S0009 9 Manufacturer's parts number:
コア Core
E04SR200932
PFC1
コア Core
E04SR301334
PFC3
コア Core
E04SR170730A
PFC4
コア Core
TFT274015S
AFC1
コア Core
E04SR130525A
AFC2
コア Core
E04SR200917
018-230-07C
SP-33
10 治工具
Tools
DR-ID12xxSE
DR-ID12xxSE
E 1 319N120132 Positioning jig for SE 1
組立用位置決め治具
assembly
DR-ID12xxSE
DR-ID12xxSE
E 2 120N120011 IP アドレスリセット 1
IP address reset jig
治具
DR-ID1200 付属品 DR-ID1200 Starter 国内
E 3.1 898Y200075 1
キット Kit For Japan
DR-ID1200 付属品 DR-ID1200 Starter 海外
E 3.2 898Y200096 1
キット Kit For Overseas
018-230-06C
SP-34
11A 回路図（MP)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (MP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y120305
136Y120393 MPC6 MPC6/7 MIX6C LAN複合ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ SE
FAN MPC21 MPC21
A1 1
赤 UL1007-AWG24橙 12_GND
+24 1
24V
FAN
4 1
黒 UL1007-AWG24黒 MPC_GND B1 2
Check
GND 2 3 2
MPC_GND 黒
白 2 UL1007-AWG24灰 3 TD+ A2 3
GND_MP
FAN_DETECT
****/ﾐﾈﾍﾞｱ Lock 3
赤
4 TD- B2 4
VCC_MP
A
1
青 A
RD+ A3 5
RXN
173977-4 179228-4 A2501WV02-3P-BS B3 白 6
NFR110-5A/IDEC RX- RXP
179609-1 179518-1
SE1CONNECTOR A4 橙 7
TXN SE
白
136Y120301 12V TXP
CP SW 136Y120304 B4 8
L
NFB1 NFB1 NFB2 NFB2
CP1 CP2
LED1 MPC18 MPC18 9
CRD1 ﾊﾟﾈﾙ1
UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1061-AWG30灰
INLET 1 1
2
L_IN L_OUT 1
3 DS-250PU
1 1 2 1
DS-250PU
1
DS-250PU
SW1 SW2 1
DS-250PU
1
2 UL1061-AWG30灰
1
2
5V B08B-J21DK-GGXR J21DF-08V-KX-L 10
11
CRD2
DS-250PU NC NC LED1ON CRD3
120S5277 SPS-61T-250
UL1015-AWG18白 3
N_IN NC 2 SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250
LED54B 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3
LED2ON UL1061-AWG24黒 12
CRD4
UL1015-AWG18白 UL1015-AWG18白 UL1061-AWG30灰
MPC54B
1
N N_OUT 4 1
SW3 SW4 1 4 4
MPC_GND 13
Check
AC-P12CF36-1.0 DS-250PU UL1061-AWG30灰 FG1
1
VLP-03V-1 B03P-VL DS-250PU 5 5
MPC_GND
(0.8t) SPS-61T-250 UL1061-AWG30灰
DS-250PU SVF-61T-P2.0 B04P-VL VLP-04V-1 SPS-61T-250 6 6
5V 113Y100975 PLUG ASSEMBLY 7P KIT
/ｴｺｰ電子 SPS-61T-250 SVF-61T-P2.0
UL1015-AWG18緑/黄 RCT5.5-3
FG
1 UL1015-AWG18緑/黄 NFB51A SHR-06V-S-B
SSH-003T-P0.2-H
SHR-06V-S-B
SSH-003T-P0.2-H
BM06B-SRSS-TB
MPC7
B DS-250PU B
FG2 12_GND
1
SPS-61T-250 MPC3
MPC_GND
136Y120302 DETECTION TD+
FG1 MPC_GND TD-
1
FV1.25-4 RD+
DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA RX-
電源 SE1CONNECTOR
AC100～240V MPC2
12V
1
FV1.25-4 VHR-5N
DETECTION
CN1 SVH-21T-P1.1
MPC_GND B08B-J21DK-GGXR
CN1 5V
CN51 CN51 LED_CONTROL
- 1
DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA
-
DC電源
2
C 136Y120303 C
- 3
UL1007-AWG18黒 MPC1 MPC1
CME240P-24 - 4
UL1007-AWG18橙
/TDKﾗﾑﾀﾞ + 5
UL1007-AWG18橙
1
24V
MPX*
+ 6 3
24V
UL1007-AWG18黒
+ 7 2
POWER_GND
+ 8
VHR-8N
5557-04R
4
POWER_GND MPX54A RJ-45
SVH-21T-P1.1 136Y120306
5556PBTL MPC12 MPC12 MPX4 MPX4
W107D-12M
UL1007-AWG24赤
5V 1 1
+5V M4 ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ
2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2
MPC_GND DG FV1.25-M4
Option MPC1 3
136Y120362 XAP-02V-1 B02B-XASK-1

1
CN51 UL1007-AWG18橙 3 B03B-XASK-1 XAP-03V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6
D
UL1007-AWG18黒 SXA-001T-P0.6 D
- 1 2
UL1007-AWG18黒 MPC13 MPC13 MPX3 MPX3
- 2 4
UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG26灰
- 3
MPC_GND 1 1
4 2 UL1007-AWG26灰 2
- 5557-04R RD_D2
DC電源← UL1007-AWG26灰
+ 5
5556PBTL TX_D2 3 3
UL1007-AWG26灰
+ 6
MPC_GND 4 4
UL1007-AWG26灰
+ 7
KEY0_IN 5 5
MPC6 UL1007-AWG26灰
+ 8
136Y120363 KEY1_IN 6 6
A1 7 UL1007-AWG26灰 7
KEY2_IN
NETSTAR-C5E PC 24AWG×4P LBTK UL1007-AWG26灰
VHR-8N B1
KEY3_IN 8 8
橙 TD+ UL1007-AWG26灰
SVH-21T-P1.1 A2
MPC_GND 9 9
白 TD- UL1007-AWG26灰
B2
#2BKYSW2 10 10
青 RD+ UL1007-AWG26灰
A3
#1BKYSW2 11 11
白 RX- B3 12 UL1007-AWG26灰 12
#2SHOTGO
UL1007-AWG26灰
E
A4
MPC5 LAN #1SHOTGO 13 13
E
UL1007-AWG26灰
B4
MPC_GND 14 14
UL1007-AWG26灰
HW VERSION 15 15
UL1007-AWG26灰
J21DF-08V-KX-L HW VERSION 16 16
17 UL1007-AWG26灰 17
SJ2F-002GF-P1.0 HW VERSION
UL1007-AWG26灰
HW VERSION 18 18
136Y120374 MPC4 MPC4 LAN UL1007-AWG26灰

MPC_GND 19 19
UL1007-AWG26灰
UL20276-C5E(H)/8 LF 24AWGX4P(UW) CONNECTION 20 20
(200～250㎜) MP588 DF1BZ-20DP-2.5DSA DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1BZ-20DP-2.5DSA

DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-2428SCA MPX2 MPX1
136Y120364
MPL3 MPL3 LAN
F MPL5 MPL5/6 複合6芯ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ AWG20/AWG28 LP F
LAN1_TXP 1 白 1
LAN1_TXP LP
橙
LAN1_TXN 4 9
LAN1_TXN
MP588 白
LAN1_RXP 2 2
LAN1_RXP
5 青 10
MPL4 MPL4 LAN LAN1_RXN LAN1_RXN
赤
1 24V_OUT1 3 3
24V_OUT1
LAN1_TXP 黒
2 GND_OUT1 6 11
GND_OUT1
LAN1_TXN 4
3
LAN1_RXP
5566-06A-210 5557-06R 12
4
<NC> 5
5556PBTL
MPL65A
5
<NC> 13
6
LAN1_RXN 6
7
<NC>
8
<NC> 113Y120110 14
7
MP588 15
G G
MPL6
UL1007-AWG18黒 MPL1 MPL1 8
UL1007-AWG18橙 1 LAN1_TXP
VCC_+24V_IN
UL1007-AWG18橙 LAN1_TXN DA-15PF-N
3
VCC_+24V_IN
UL1007-AWG18黒 LAN1_RXP DA-C4-J10-S1
2
GND
LAN1_RXN ｼｮｰﾄ/ｲﾝﾁ/金属
4
GND
24V_OUT1
GND_OUT1
5557-04R 5569-04A1-210
5556PBTL
MPL2 5566-06A-210
DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA
H H
機種 2312 ユニット MP
名称回路図補助名称 Devo2/Long Panel
コード Z22N2312000 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-35
11B 回路図（DS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (DS)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
L 136Y120444 CN1 CN2 136Y120438

SW 136Y120439 SK1 SK1 SK2 SK2
136Y120440
UL1007-AWG24黒 CN1 CN1
CN2 CN2 136Y120441
UL10368-AWG28白
CN21 CN21 DSB65A
1 2 1 1
UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1015-AWG18黒 UL1007-AWG24赤 UL10368-AWG28白
INLET 1 1
2
1
2
1 1 2 1 1
2
Line +12V 1
2 UL1007-AWG24赤
1
2
2 2 FP2563A-404
BZR BOARD
DS-250PU DS-187PU DS-187PU +12V
AC-P12CF36 T=1.0 UL1007-AWG24黒
SPS-61T-250 3 3
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 3
Neutral Common 3 3
GHR-02V-S GHR-02V-S 113Y120124
/ｴｺｰ電子 N 4
Common 4 4
SSHL-002T-P0.2 SSHL-002T-P0.2
3 4
1 UL1015-AWG18白 VHR-3N UL1015-AWG18白 1 1 2 1 UL1015-AWG18白 09-50-8031 -Sense 5
VHR-4N 08-52-0113
電源 +Sense
DSM65A
6
EHR-4
DS-250PU SVH-21T-P1.1 DS-187PU DS-187PU BEH-001T-P0.6
SVH-21T-P1.1
SPS-61T-250
NFB65 SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187
B B
FG- NPS63-M 09-50-8061 CN7 CN7 CN71 CN71
FG UL1015-AWG18緑/黄
/Emerson
AJ76202BF 08-50-0105 UL10368-AWG28灰
DSI65A
1
UL1015-AWG18緑/黄 FP2563A-201 1 1
1
113Y120144 /ﾊﾟﾅｿﾆｯｸ DS-250PU UL10368-AWG28灰
DS-250PU SPS-61T-250 125N120013 113Y120121 2
UL10368-AWG28灰
2
3 3
SPS-61T-250 4 UL10368-AWG28灰 4 FP2563A-403
5 UL10368-AWG28灰 5
UL10368-AWG28灰 SELECTOR_READY_BOARD
6 6
113Y120122
GHR-06V-S GHR-06V-S
SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-3
C
CN10 CN10 CN101 CN101 C
1 UL10368-AWG28灰 1
2 UL10368-AWG28灰 2
4
UL10368-AWG28灰
UL10368-AWG28灰
3
4
DSL65A
5 UL10368-AWG28灰 5
6 UL10368-AWG28灰 6 FP2563A-402
7 UL10368-AWG28灰 7
UL10368-AWG28灰 CHARGER MODE DISP BOARD
8 8
9 UL10368-AWG28灰 9 113Y120123
10 UL10368-AWG28灰 10
11 UL10368-AWG28灰 11
12 UL10368-AWG28灰 12
D
GHR-12V-S GHR-12V-S D
CN3 CN3 136Y120442 CN31 CN31

1 UL1007-AWG24赤 1
2 UL1007-AWG24赤 2
3 UL1007-AWG24黒 3
UL1007-AWG24黒
DSC65A
4 4
PHR-4 PHR-4
E SPH-002T-P0.5S SPH-004T-P0.5S FP2563A-405 E
CN4 CN4 136Y120443 CN41 CN41 OUTPUT_TURMINAL_BOARD

1 UL1061-AWG30青 1
UL1061-AWG30白 113Y120125
2 2
3 UL1061-AWG30橙 3
4 UL1061-AWG30白 4
5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5
6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6
7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7
8 UL1061-AWG30灰 8
SHR-08V-S-B SHR-08V-S-B
SSH-003T-P0.2-H SSH-003T-P0.2-H
F F
G G
H H
機種 2312 ユニット Cradle
名称回路図補助名称 Devo2
頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-36
11C 回路図（PB)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (PB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
B B
C C
共通
CN2
136Y120301 NFB1 NFB1 NFB2 NFB2 136Y121521 CN1
共通
UL1015-AWG20黒 UL1015-AWG20白電源 1
共通
L L_IN L_OUT
MPS65A
1 1 1 1 2
136Y121522 MPS1 MPS1
136Y102484 NC NC
INLET
2 3 2
UL1015-AWG20白 UL1015-AWG20黒 PMA60F-12 3
UL1007-AWG20橙 136Y120305
ACｺｰﾄﾞ N 1 3
N_IN NC 2 3
/COSEL 4 1
UL1007-AWG20黒 MPS3 MPC6/7 MIX6C LAN複合ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ SE
120S5277 N_OUT 4 2
A1
1 1 1
FG VLP-03V-1 B03P-VL VHR-3N VHR-4N B1
VM1075 ｴｺｰ電子
VM1076 SVF-61T-P2.0 B04P-VL VLP-04V-1 SVH-21T-P1.1 SVH-21T-P1.1 VHR-2N 5
A2
2
Check
黒
NFB51A
UL1015-AWG20緑/黄
AC100～240V SVF-61T-P2.0 SVH-21T-P1.1 2

B2
3
GND_MP
赤
6 4
VCC_MP
DS-250PU A3
D
3 5
RXN D
SPS-21T-250 113Y1979 7
B3
6
RXP
4
A4
B4
橙 7
TXN SE
白
8 8
TXP
9
CRD1 ﾊﾟﾈﾙ
136Y121523 MPS4 MPS4 B08B-J21DK-GGXR(LF)(AU) J21DF-08V-KX-L 10
CRD2
1
11
AWG26赤 1 CRD3
AWG26黒 2 UL1061-AWG24黒 12
CRD4
1
13
Check
XAP-02V-1
PLUG ASSEMBLY 7P KIT
SXA-001T-P0.6
FV1.25-4
E E
2 1
RJ45
(+) 1 2 (-)
A K MPS2 1-406541-1
LED
558-6003-027F
/Dialight
F F
G G
H H
機種 2312,2331 ユニット PB
名称回路図補助名称 MPコストダウン
コード Z22N**** Rev.
頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-37
11D 回路図（1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE）
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SE Connector RMV65A (B) GLG65A (B)

120N120006 共)136N120006 GLG3 [ｺｰﾄﾞ]
CN3 CN3 113Y120019 RMV8 GLG1 113Y120027
136Y120216 GND 1 CS_LOWGL 共)赤：共通
1
CRD_CONNECT *136Y120297 FFC 24pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ同赤：14×17
～
RMV4 RMV4 SE/ｸﾚｰﾄﾞﾙ CS_HIGHGL
A CRD_BUFRST 2
GLG_GND_RET 24 *緑：17×17 A
UL1061-AWG30灰 SPI-SCLK
SECN_TXRXN_B 3 1
CDR_RS232_TX
UL1061-AWG30灰 FH52-24S-0.5SH(99) FH52-24S GND
SECN_TXRXP_B 4 2
CDR_RS232_RX -0.5SH(99) SPI-DOUT
SECN_TXRXN_A 5 3
GND
6 UL3610-AWG26橙 4 SPI-DIN
SECN_TXRXP_A SECN_TXRXP_A
UL3610-AWG26白 RMV6 GLG4 INT-SHOCK
DF57AH-6S-1.2C 5
SECN_TXRXN_A
UL3610-AWG26青 INT-FALL
DF57H-6P-1.2V(21) DF57-2628SCF(41) 6
SECN_TXRXP_B VCC_+5V
UL3610-AWG26白 +3.3V
7
SECN_TXRXN_B GND
CN2 CN2 無線ﾓｼﾞｭｰﾙ接続 GND
1
8
9
GND_ETHER 無線LAN +5V
CRD_RS232C_RX SECN_TXRXP_C
CRD_RS232C_TX 2
UL1061-AWG30灰
10
SECN_TXRXN_C ﾓｼﾞｭｰﾙ GLG5 GND
CAB_CONNECT 3 11
SECN_TXRXP_D TXD
UL1061-AWG30灰 SM12B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN)
1
IP_ADR_CLR_A 4 12
SECN_TXRXN_D RXD 136Y120126
× UL1061-AWG30灰
2
GND 5 13
GND GND *136Y120293
UL1061-AWG30灰 14 24 6407 052 +8V電源出力 GLG2 GLG2 POW4 POW4 GLG入力
3
SHR-05V-S-B MD_CRD_BUFRST 001 888+
B GND_MP SM05B-SRSS UL1061-AWG30灰 UL1061-AWG30赤 B
4 -TB(LF)(SN) SSH-003T-P0.2-H 15
FM_CRD_CONNECT_INT GLG6 VCC_+8V 1 1
VCC_GLG
VCC_MP UL1061-AWG30黒
5
DF13-15S-1.25C GND 2 2
GND_GLG
SECN_TXRXN_B CPU JTAG
6
DF13-2630SCFA DF13A-15P-1.25H(51)
SECN_TXRXP_B
7
RMV16 RMV16 SM02B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) SHR-02V-S-B SHR-02V-S-B SM02B-SRSS-G-TB(LF)(SN)
SECN_TXRXN_A
8 SECN_TXRXP_A Battery 1
SW_RSV
SSH-003T-P0.2-H SSH-003T-P0.2-H
9 2
GND 136N120012
*136N120059
SM02B-SFHRS-TF
ABB65A_R
10 × IP_ADR_CLR ABB基板_R(制御系) RMV19 ABB2
11 × BCN1 9pin GND GND 1
136Y120130 4
FFC 40pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
VCC_MP
GND_MP
～
12 × CAB_CONNECT_INT
BCN2 *136Y120295
5
BCN2 REC1 REC1 ABA_CNCHK_IN_2 40 113Y120024
13 SHR-06V-S-B 6
GND ABB1 共)136N120004 POW5
UL1061-AWG26赤 FH52-40S-0.5SH(99) FH52-40S-0.5SH(99)
DC12V 1 1
VCC_BAT SSH-003T-P0.2-H 1 GND
UL1061-AWG26黒 136N120012 FFC 20pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
～
2 2
CN1 GND GND_BAT SM06B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) *ABA65A_R
ABB基板_R(画像系) RMV22 *136N120059 ABB3
共)136Y120129 113Y120051 20 ABB_CNCHK_IN1
CN1 RMV25 RMV25 ABA_CNCHK_IN_1 1
SM02B-SFHRS-TF SFHR-02V-R SFHR-02V-R SM02B-SFHRS-TF FFC 40pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
～
C UL1061-AWG30灰 FH52-20S-0.5SH(99) FH52-20S-0.5SH(99) C
1
SSFH-001T-P0.5 SSFH-001T-P0.5 1
GND 40
SFHR-02V-R
SSFH-002T-P0.5
BCN65A 136Y120131
*136Y120296 REC65A 103AP-2
UL1061-AWG30灰 2
3
FH52-40S-0.5SH(99) FH52-40S-0.5SH(99)
113Y120029 BCN3 BCN3 REC3 REC3

113Y120038
ｻｰﾐｽﾀ POW65A (B)
4
UL1061-AWG30灰
B/I 1 1
B/I 共)136N120011
TH2
INPUT
2
3
UL1061-AWG30灰
UL1061-AWG30灰
2
3
TH2
INPUT
SHR-04V-S-B
SSH-003T-P0.2-H
SM04B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN)
ABB基板_L(制御系) RMV20
GND 1
ABB2
ABB65A_L 113Y120026
～
4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 RMV10 113Y120024 136N120005
OUTPUT OUTPUT ABA_CNCHK_IN_2 40
UL1061-AWG30灰 ABB1 *136N120056 POW6
TH1 5 5
TH1 40FHY-RSM1-GAN-TF(LF)(SN) FH52-40S-0.5SH(99)
SPI(予備) 1 GND
～
SHR-05V-S-B SHR-05V-S-B SM05B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) SM15B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) ABB基板_L(画像系) RMV21 136N120011 ABB3 *ABA65A_L
113Y120051 20 ABB_CNCHK_IN1
SSH-003T-P0.2-H SSH-003T-P0.2-H ABA_CNCHK_IN_1 1
RMV13 FFC 40pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
～
FH52-20S-0.5SH(99) FH52-20S-0.5SH(99)
GND 40
D
LEA65A LEA1 REC4 MCU
JTAGｺﾈｸﾀ
40FHY-RSM1-GAN-TF(LF)(SN) FH52-40S-0.5SH(99) D
113Y120030 136Y120125
RMV15
GTD1_R *136Y120292
FH52-8S-0.5SH(99)
CPU UARTｺﾈｸﾀ GTD基板_R(制御系) RMV23 共)136N120008 GTD65A_R GND
GTD1
1 UL1061-AWG30灰 1
POW7 POW7 toGTD
GND_GTD
113Y120025 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2
136N120017 GND 1 +3.3V VCC_+3.3V
SM03B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) FFC 28pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆 UL1061-AWG30灰
～
LEB65A (ADAS) LEB1 *136N120061 REC6 LEB(ADAS) GTD2 GND GND_GTD
3 3
CENTER 1
FFC 4pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ同
1 SPR65A RMV17 GTD_CNCHK1 28 VGL 4 UL1061-AWG30灰
UL1061-AWG30灰
4
VGL
～
113Y120031 GND 5 5
GND
B 4 4 113Y120037 FH52-28S-0.5SH(99) FH52-28S-0.5SH(99) UL1061-AWG30灰
共) 136N120024 CPU JTAGｺﾈｸﾀ VGH 6 6
VGH
04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB REC12 SPR6
(LF)(SN) 04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB
2 (LF)(SN) SM14B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN)
SPR2 SM06B-SSR-H-TB(LF)(SN) SHLP-06V-S-B SHLP-06V-S-B SM06B-SSR-H-TB(LF)(SN)
FFC 30pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ同
RMV18 SSHL-003T-P0.2 SSHL-003T-P0.2
136N120018 VCC_MP
136Y120287
E
LEB65A (GD) CENTER 1 LEB1 *136N120062
REC5 LEB(GD)
FH52-30S-0.5SH(99) FH52-30S-0.5SH(99)
GND_MP
FPGA JTAGｺﾈｸﾀ
共)136N120009 GTD65A_L GTD1 GTD1_L *136Y120298
UL1061-AWG30灰
POW10 POW10 E
～
113Y120031 SM06B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) GTD基板_L(制御系) RMV24 GND 1 1

GND_GTD
B 4 136Y120128 113Y120025 UL1061-AWG30灰
GND 1 +3.3V 2 2
VCC_+3.3V
04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB SPR3 SPR3 *136Y120294 RMV12 RMV12 FFC 28pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ同 UL1061-AWG30灰
～
3 3
(LF)(SN) 04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB GTD2 GND GND_GTD
3 (LF)(SN) UL1061-AWG26赤 UL1061-AWG30灰
1 1
VCC_+5V GTD_CNCHK2 28 VGL 4 4
VGL
UL1061-AWG26黒 UL1061-AWG30灰
2 2
GND GND 5 5
GND
136N120016 6pin FH52-28S-0.5SH(99) FH52-28S-0.5SH(99) UL1061-AWG30灰
VGH 6 6
VGH
LEB65A (GLG)CENTER LEB1
1
*136N120060
REC7 LEB(GLG)
1
SFHR-02V-R
SSFH-001T-P0.5
SFHR-02V-R
SSFH-001T-P0.5
SM02B-SFHRS-TF(LF)(SN)
RMV27
SM06B-SSR-H-TB(LF)(SN) SHLP-06V-S-B SHLP-06V-S-B SM06B-SSR-H-TB(LF)(SN)
～
113Y120031 B 4 4 SSHL-003T-P0.2 SSHL-003T-P0.2

136Y120120
04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB SPR4 SPR4 *136Y120290 RMV2 RMV2
(LF)(SN) 04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB SPR7 SM06B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) POW9
1 (LF)(SN) UL1061-AWG30灰
1 1
SW_WAKE_INT
UL1061-AWG30灰 RMV28
2 2
GND
136N120019 UL1061-AWG30灰
F
3 3
SW_CR_MODE_INT F
LEC65A loopback 1
LEC1 *136N120063
REC8 LEC(7SEG)
1
4
5
UL1061-AWG30灰
UL1061-AWG30灰
4
5
GND
BAT_CONNECT
113Y120032 UL1061-AWG30灰 136N120010
～
6 6
GND
loopback 18 18 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 POW基板 RMV3 *136N120058 POW2
BAT_SIN
UL1061-AWG30灰 GND 1
FH52-18S-0.5SH(99) FH52-18S-0.5SH(99) 8 8
GND FFC 30pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
～
9 UL1061-AWG30灰 9
BAT_SOUT
POW_CNCHK 30
共)136N120020
LED65A (SleepSW) FFC 4pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ逆
REC9 LED(SleepSW)
1
SHR-09V-S-B SHR-09V-S-B
SSH-003T-P0.2-HSSH-003T-P0.2-H
SM09B-SRSS-TB(LF)(SN) FH52-30S-0.5SH(99)
136Y120124
*136Y120291
FH52-30S-0.5SH(99)
～
113Y120033 LED1 136N120007 電源入力 RMV1 RMV1 POW3 POW3

4
SPR5 *136N120057 RMV11 UL1061-AWG26赤
04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB VCC_+12V_IN 1 1
(LF)(SN) 04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB(LF)(SN) UL1061-AWG26黒

1 FFC 24pin 0.5mmﾋﾟｯﾁ同 GND_+12V 2 2
SFHR-02V-R
FH52-24S-0.5SH(99)
G 136N120047 SM02B-SFHRS-TF(LF)(SN) SFHR-02V-R SSFH-001T-P0.5 SM02B-SFHRS-TF(LF)(SN) G
FH52-24S-0.5SH(99)
LED65A (CRmode) *136N120066
REC13
1
LED(CRmode)
SPR1 SPR1
SSFH-001T-P0.5 共)136Y120122
UL1061-AWG26赤
POW8 POW8 ﾊﾞｯﾃﾘ入力
～
113Y120033 LED1 VCC_BAT 1 1

VCC_BAT
4 UL1061-AWG26黒
GND_BAT 2 2
GND
04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB
(LF)(SN) 04FHSY-RSM1-GAN-TB(LF)(SN) SFHR-02V-R
2
SM02B-SFHRS-TF SFHR-02V-R SSFH-001T-P0.5 SM02B-SFHRS-TF(LF)(SN)
SSFH-001T-P0.5 共)136Y120121 POW1 POW1 MP入力
UL1061-AWG26赤 1
VCC_IN
UL1061-AWG26黒 2
GND
SFHR-02V-R
SSFH-001T-P0.5 SM02B-SFHRS-TF(LF)(SN)
H H
機種 2312 ユニット SE
名称回路図補助名称 Devo2
頁
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-38
11E 回路図（1213SE）
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1213SE)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-39
11F 回路図（1214SE）
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1214SE)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
018-230-06C
SP-40
12 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
108S0040 06-1 136Y120260 06-3 136Y121065 04M-6.2 317N120032 04I-15 375Y120008C 04D-7 812Y200043 04A-1.5
113Y100293C 01-12 136Y120292C 04L-1.2 136Y121066 04L-16.2 317Y120002 04B-11.2 375Y120009C 04A-5 812Y200045 04D-1.5
113Y100858A 01-4 136Y120392 06-2 136Y121067 04L-17.2 317Y120002 04E-11.2 375Y120020 04B-6 812Y200047 04H-1.2
113Y120122F 02A-4 136Y120412A 04M-9.1 136Y121068 04L-11.2 317Y120017A 04I-18 375Y120020 04E-6 814Y200007 03-1
113Y120123B 02A-10 136Y120413A 04M-3.1 136Y121070 04L-4.2 319N120132 10-1 375Y120020 04I-3 853Y120008B 06-4.2
113Y120124 02A-2 136Y120414A 04M-1.1 136Y121096 04O-1 328Y120001B 04B-1 382N120156 09-9 857Y120032 02B-4
113Y120235 07-1 136Y120415A 04M-8.1 136Y121097 04N-2 328Y120001B 04E-1 382N120157 09-10 857Y120033A 02B-6
113Y1979B 01-5 136Y120416A 04M-7 136Y121097 04O-2 328Y120003 04I-12 382N120158A 09-11 857Y120034B 01-6
114Y120042C 04C-8 136Y120417A 04M-2.1 136Y121098 04O-4 332N120005 04B-11.1 382N120159B 09-12 857Y120036B 04B-10
114Y120042C 04F-8 136Y120422A 04L-6.1 136Y121099 04O-5 332N120005 04E-11.1 382N120160 09-13 857Y120036B 04E-10
114Y120056 04J-3 136Y120423 04L-8.1 136Y121101 04N-6 332N120012 04I-14.1 382N120167A 09-14 857Y120037B 04C-7
119N100041 01-11 136Y120427A 04L-3.1 136Y121103 04N-8 334N120011B 02D-3 382N120168B 09-15 857Y120037B 04F-7
120N120006B 04B-5 136Y120429A 04L-2 136Y121103 04O-8 334N120012B 02D-4 382N120169A 09-16 857Y120042F 04C-1
120N120006B 04E-5 136Y120431B 04L-5.1 136Y121104 04N-12 338N120007 04C-3 382N120292A 04I-17 857Y120042F 04F-1
120N120006B 04I-4 136Y120433A 04L-12 136Y121104 04O-12 338N120007 04F-3 382N130044 04I-20 857Y120043C 04B-9
120N120008B 04B-12.2 136Y120434B 04L-10.1 136Y121105A 04N-13 340Y120017A 04K-1 386N100413D 02C-1 857Y120043C 04E-9
120N120008B 04E-12.2 136Y120438 09-1 136Y121105A 04O-13 347Y120010B 04C-4 386S1123 02C-2 857Y120044A 04B-8
120N120011 10-2 136Y120439 09-2 136Y121106 04N-14 347Y120010B 04F-4 388N120021B 02B-7 857Y120044A 04E-8
120N120013A 04I-19.2 136Y120440 09-3 136Y121106 04O-14 350N120130F 01-3 388N120022A 02B-9 857Y120045A 04B-2
120S5277 01-7 136Y120441 09-4 136Y121108 04N-17 350Y120071E 02A-5 388N120023B 02B-8 857Y120045A 04E-2
120S5278 08A-5 136Y120442 09-5 136Y121108 04O-17 350Y120075H 04B-13 388N120024A 02B-2 857Y120046A 04B-3
120S5279 08A-4 136Y120443 09-6 136Y121109 04N-18 350Y120075H 04E-13 388N120025A 02A-7 857Y120046A 04E-3
125N100032B 01-10 136Y120444 09-7 136Y121109 04O-18 350Y120075H 04I-13 388N120026 02B-1 857Y120047 04C-5
125N120013 02C-3 136Y120787B 04N-15 136Y121110 04N-19 350Y120078B 01-8 388N120034 02D-2 857Y120047 04F-5
125S0410 03-6 136Y120787B 04O-15 136Y121110 04O-19 350Y120080G 01-2 398N120002D 02A-9 857Y120048 04C-13
125Y120011K 07-2 136Y120788 04N-16 136Y121111 04N-9 350Y120103F 02A-3 398N120003C 02A-8 857Y120048 04F-13
126Y0353 03-7 136Y120788 04O-16 136Y121112 04N-10 350Y120104B 02A-1 405N120054A 04A-6 857Y120049B 04C-11
131S0529 08A-3 136Y120917 04M-4.1 136Y121113 04N-11 350Y120108B 02A-6 405N120054A 04D-5 857Y120049B 04F-11
131S0530 08A-2.1 136Y120918 04M-6.1 136Y121299 04O-6 350Y120114B 08B-1 405N120054A 04G-4 857Y120050 04B-7
131S0531 08A-2.2 136Y120919 04L-18 136Y121522A 03-8 350Y120115A 04B-12.1 405N120054A 04H-4 857Y120050 04E-7
131S0532 08A-2.3 136Y120920 04L-16.1 136Y200036A 09-8 350Y120115A 04E-12.1 405N120237A 04A-7 857Y120057A 04C-9
131S0533 08A-2.4 136Y120921 04L-15 137S1170 01-6.3 350Y120177 01-1 405N120237A 04D-6 857Y120057A 04F-9
131S0534 01-9 136Y120922 04L-17.1 137S1417 02B-4.1 350Y120237 04I-19.1 405N120237A 04G-5 857Y120092 04I-7
135N100012 08A-6 136Y120923A 04L-11.1 137S1420 01-6.2 350Y130029 03-2 405N120237A 04H-5 857Y120093 04I-5
135N100013 08A-7 136Y120924 04L-4.1 137S1420 03-5 350Y130038 03-3 812Y120039A 04A-1.1 857Y120094A 04J-7
136N120006A 04L-9 136Y121053 04M-9.2 137S1422 01-6.1 362N120016C 02D-1 812Y120043A 04A-1.3 857Y120095 04I-8
136N120007A 04L-7.1 136Y121054 04M-3.2 138S0009 09-17 362N120018B 02B-10 812Y120044A 04D-1.1 857Y120096A 04I-6
136N120008A 04L-14 136Y121055 04M-1.2 138S0139 09-22 362N120020A 02B-3 812Y120048A 04D-1.3 857Y120097 04I-2
136N120009B 04L-13 136Y121056 04M-8.2 138S0143 09-19 363N120023F 02B-5 812Y120049 04A-1.4 857Y120098 04J-1
136N120024A 04M-5 136Y121057 04M-2.2 138S0195 09-18 363N120041A 04B-4 812Y120053 04A-1.6 857Y120099 04J-4
136N120057A 04L-7.2 136Y121058 04L-6.2 138S0544 09-21 363N120041A 04E-4 812Y120054 04D-1.4 857Y120100A 04I-1
136N120079C 04N-3 136Y121059 04L-8.2 138S0573 09-20 375N120027 04G-6 812Y120058 04D-1.6 857Y120101 04I-11
136N120079C 04O-3 136Y121060 04L-3.2 308N120002B 04G-8 375N120028 04G-3 812Y120127 04H-1.1 857Y120102 04I-10
136N120081B 04N-7 136Y121061A 04L-5.2 308N120002B 04H-8 375N120048 04H-6 812Y120129 04G-1 857Y120103 04I-9
136N120081B 04O-7 136Y121063 04L-10.2 308N120015A 04I-16 375N120049 04H-3 812Y200039 04A-1.2 857Y120104 04J-6
136Y120125D 04L-1.1 136Y121064 04M-4.2 317N120017 04I-14.2 375Y120008C 04A-8 812Y200041 04D-1.2 857Y120105A 04J-5
018-230-07C
SP-41
12 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
857Y120126 04C-6
857Y120126 04F-6
857Y120126 04J-2
857Y200010 03-4
898Y101450 05-1
898Y120252F 04A-2.1
898Y120253E 04A-2.3
898Y120254F 04A-2.2
898Y120255E 04A-2.4
898Y120256 04A-3
898Y120257A 04A-4
898Y120347E 04D-2.1
898Y120348E 04D-2.3
898Y120349E 04D-2.2
898Y120350E 04D-2.4
898Y120351 04D-3
898Y120352 04D-4
898Y120438C 04H-9.1
898Y120439D 04G-9.1
898Y120440 04H-2
898Y120441A 04G-2
898Y120442 04H-7
898Y120443A 04G-7
898Y120692 06-4.1
898Y200075 10-3.1
898Y200096 10-3.2
898Y200110B 04A-2.5
898Y200111A 04A-2.7
898Y200112B 04A-2.6
898Y200113B 04A-2.8
898Y200114A 04D-2.5
898Y200115A 04D-2.7
898Y200116B 04D-2.6
898Y200117B 04D-2.8
898Y200118A 04H-9.2
898Y200119A 04G-9.2
899Y120215B 08C-1
018-230-07C
SP-42
13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
l
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
2. ねじ類
2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described.
l
This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.
長さ
ねじの呼び
ねじの種類をあらわす文字
018-230-06C
SP-43
13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
ネジ
参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状
部品名称 Parts name
Shape
Cross-recessed hexagonheaded
TP3x6 308S0414 六角頭 TP ネジ
TPscrew
018-230-06C
SP-44
14 ネジ・座金類の記号一覧表
Table of Screws / Washers Indication Symbols
Table of Screws/Washers Indication Symbols
Symbol in the
Indication
No. Part name dissassembly Size Shape
Symbols chart (example)
Cross-recessed 1. 2.
1 S S3×10 M3×10
flat-head screw
Cross-recessed M4×8
2 T **T4×8 Flat-head screw Truss-head screw
truss-head screw M4×10 S T
Cross-recessed
3 pan-head screw with A M2.6×16 M2.6×16 3. 4.
spring washer
Pan -head screw with Pan-head screw with
Cross-recessed spring washer spring and plain washers
M3×6
pan-head screw A B
4 B B3×6 M3×30
with spring and plain M3×35 5. 6.
washers
Cross-recessed M3×10 Hexagon-headed screw Hexagon-headed bolt
hexagonheaded BR3×10 M3×12 with spring and plain washer
5 BR Q
screw with spring and BR3×12 M4×8 BR
plain washers M4×12
7. 8.
6 Hexagon-headed bolt Q Q3×20 M3×20
Hexagon-Headed bolt Hexagon-Headed bolt Deltight screw*
7 with spring and plain BQ BQ4×10 M4×10 with spring and plain washer
DT
washer BQ
M3×6 9. 10.
8 Deltight screw* DT *DT3×6
M4×8
Nominal Plax Hexagon-headed set screw
9 Plax** Ps **Ps3×6 diameter Ps WP
3×6
11.
Hexagon-headed M3×5
10 setscrew WP WP4×6 M4×6
(double-point) M4×8 TP Screw
TP
M3×6
11 TPscrew TP TP3×6
M4×8 12. 13.
M16
12 Hexagon nut Na Na20
M20 Hexagon nut Plain washer
13 Plain washer W W4 M4 Na W
14 Spring washer SW SW3 M3 14. 15.
Nominal
diameter 4
15 E ring E E6
Nominal Spring washer E ring
diameter 6 SW E
16.
KL4 M4
16 K-CL ring KL
KL6 M6 K-CL ring
KL 1200_500022.ai
* : Self-tapping screw with a noncircular end

** : Stainless-made
018-230-06E
SP-45
15 消耗品一覧表
List of Quick Wearing Parts
List Of Quick Wearing Parts
No. Part name Shape
1 Fixing plug
1. 2. 3.
2 Binding band
Fixing plug Binding band N.K. clamp
3 N.K. clamp 4. 5.
4 Edging
Edging Edge saddle
600_500003.ai
5 Edge saddle
018-230-06E
SP-46
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
SP-47
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
07.29.2016 02 Revision (FM9274) 2, 10-17
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
018-230-06E
PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notation of Age
The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance
: Procedure performed at an age of 1 year.
Volume
1Y
2Y : Procedure performed at an age of 2 years.
- Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age 3Y : Procedure performed at an age of 3 years.
( 1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y ). 4Y : Procedure performed at an age of 4 years.
- The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 1, 2, 5Y : Procedure performed at an age of 5 years.
3, 4 and 5 years. As the tasks to be performed depend on the age of service, follow
the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance program.
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
The preventive maintenance program is defined in terms of the age of the machine. When the age of the machine reaches the specified value, take each action of the preventive
maintenance program corresponding to the age. Take the action referring to the list, as the program differs depending on the age of the machine.
u INSTRUCTION u
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To
maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
n Preventive Maintenance Program List

Cycle Time
Maintenance program Replacement parts
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y requirements
2. Checking the Error Log      10 min
3. Checking for Image Problems      10 min
4. Checking and Replacing the Battery Pack *1      3 min Battery pack
5. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions      3 min
6. Inspecting the Fan (MP)      3 min
7. Inspecting the Filter (MP)      2 min
<AC relay>
- AHN210X0: For use of 100-110 V
- AHN210X1: For use of 110-120 V
8. Replacing the Relay *2 (MP)      - AHN210Y0: For use of 200/220 V
- AHN210Y2: For use of 220-240 V
<DC relay>
- AHN12205: Applicable to all types
9. Checking the LED and Buzzer Sound (DS)      3 min
10. Checking the Cables (SE)      1 min
11. Checking the G Sensor (SE)      1 min
12. Calibration *3      35 min
13. Checking for Image Problems      10 min
14. Checking the Error Log      5 min
15. Checking the Optional Items      3 min
16. Cleaning the Periphery of the Machine and the
     5 min
External Cover
*1: Replace the battery pack every 400 counts of charging.
*2: Replacement of the relay refers to one incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit.
*3: This procedure is applicable only to the CsI type SE. For the GOS type SE, calibration during the preventive maintenance is not required.
REFERENCE
The model of the relay depends on a type of the AC bucky relay unit.
Identify the type of the AC bucky relay unit, and select the relay for replacement.
{MD:1.3.4_Board-Related Information}
018-230-06E
PM-3
2. Checking the Error Log
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check the error log.

{IN1:19._Checking the Error Log}
018-230-06E
PM-4
3. Checking for Image Problems
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check the images.

{IN1:17._Checking for Image Problems}
018-230-06E
PM-5
4. Checking and Replacing the
Battery Pack
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
This procedure is applicable only to the wireless type SE.
(2) Confirm the battery capacity.
{MU1:1.6.2_Board State Check_■ Check SE Board Status}
{MU2:[5.2] _SE Board State >>_Battery}
When the battery capacity drops to 2057 mAh or lower, battery replacement is
recommended (the possible standby time is approx. 3 hours or less).
(3) Replace the battery pack.
018-230-06E
PM-6
5. Checking the Radio Wave
Conditions
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
This procedure is applicable only to the wireless type SE.
(1) Check radio wave conditions.
{IN1:15._Checking the Radio Wave Conditions}
018-230-06E
PM-7
6. Inspecting the Fan (MP)
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check to make sure that the MP fan is working.

#1 Check: Exhaust air
MP
#1
1200_600001.ai
018-230-06E
PM-8
7. Inspecting the Filter (MP)
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Remove the filter from the MP.

#1 Remove: Filter
MP DETAIL A
#1
1200_600002.ai
(2) Clean the filter with a vacuum cleaner.

u NOTE u
Replace the filter if the filter cannot be cleaned by the vacuum cleaner.
(3) Reinstall the filter.
018-230-06E
PM-9
8. Replacing the Relay (MP)
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
Take the following procedures only when the AC bucky relay unit (optional) is
mounted.
WARNING
Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard to avoid
electric shock hazards.
(1) Replace the relay.

{MC:2.10.1_Relay}
018-230-06E
PM-10
9. Checking the LED and
Buzzer Sound (DS)
1Y 、 2Y 、 3Y 、 4Y 、 5Y
(1) Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS.
{IN1:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address n Checking the LED and buzzer sound of
the DS}
018-230-06E
PM-11
10. Checking the Cables
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
This procedure is applicable only to the wired type SE.

(1) Check that the SE cable has no twist or breakage of the jacket.
#1 Check: Cable
MP
SE
#1
1200_600003.ai
018-230-06E
PM-12
11. Checking the G Sensor (SE)
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check the G sensor mounted on the SE rear cover.

Check that no dropping nor shock has been recorded in the log file in the G
sensor.
u INSTRUCTION u
If any dropping or shock has been recorded in the log file in the G sensor, review
the countermeasure and take necessary actions.
{Product Specifications:9._G Sensor on SE and Action in case of Failure}
018-230-06E
PM-13
12. Calibration
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
This procedure is applicable only for the CsI type SE.

(1) Carry out calibration.
018-230-06E
PM-14
13. Checking for Image Problems
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check the images.

018-230-06E
PM-15
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y

018-230-06E
PM-16
15. Checking the Optional Items
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Check the optional items.

{IN1:22.3_Checking the Optional Items}
018-230-06E
PM-17
16. Cleaning the Periphery of the
Machine and the External Cover
1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y
(1) Make sure that no dirt or dust remains around the machine. If dirty,
clean around the machine.
(2) Install the battery pack or the dummy battery, and clean the SE with a
cloth moistened with ethanol etc.
(3) Clean the DS with an air duster etc.
018-230-06E
PM-18
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
PM-19
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
Control Sheet
Installation (IN)
018-230-07E
IN-1
How to Read the Installation Manual
The installation procedures vary depending upon the application version that is being
used in installing this machine. Refer to the procedures which correspond to the
application version that is being used.
n MC application V15.2 or later

The procedures for using the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
{Installation (IN1) (DR Web Maintenance Tool)}
u NOTE u
The DR Web Maintenance Tool operating environment is as per the following.
- MC applicatio: V15.2 or later
- OS: Windows7 or Windows10
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
u NOTE u
If Windows 7 is being used as the OS, then install Internet Explorer 11.
{IN:Appendix 19._Installing the Internet Explorer 11}
Since Internet Explorer 11 is already installed if Windows 10 is being used as the OS,
then the aforementioned procedures are unnecessary.
n MC application V15.0 or earlier

The procedures for using the RU PC-TOOL.
{Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)}
018-230-07E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
IN-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
Installation (IN1)
018-230-07E
IN1-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart A
7. Installing the MP
START
7.1 Removing the Covers
2. Installation Preparations
7.2 Checking the Power Cable
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation
7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or the Anchor Mounting Bracket
2.2 Ferrite Core (Optional)
3. Precautions in Installation 7.4 Connecting the Cables
7.5 Connecting the X-Ray shot cable

4. Transfer and Unpacking
7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer 7.7 Reinstalling the Covers
4.2 Transfer of Instruments 7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)
4.3 Unpacking the MP 8. Installing the DS
4.4 Unpacking the DS
4.5 Unpacking the MC
8.2 Attaching the Label
4.6 Unpacking the SE
8.3 Installing the DS
4.7 Unpacking the Battery Pack
8.4 Setting the DS IP Address
4.8 Unpacking the Battery Charger
9. Installing the PB
4.9 Unpacking the DX Console
4.10 Unpacking the Monitor 9.1 Checking the Power Cable
4.11 Unpacking the Access Point 9.2 Connect the LAN Cable
5. Checking the Items Supplied 9.3 Installing the PB
10. Installing the SE

6. Charging the Battery Pack
B
A
018-230-07E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual IN1-1
IN1-2
B C
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the NIC board to the DX Console 17. Checking for Image Problems
11.1 Installing the MC 17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, White
Blank Portion, and Sensitivity Problems in the Images
11.2 Mounting the NIC board to the DX Console
17.2 Checking the Format
12. Installing the Access Point
12.1 In Case of the D-Link and Film Character Format Information
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP 18. Disconnecting the SE Cable
13. Installing the DX Console

14. Installing the RU Software

20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY
14.1 In Case of the Configuration Installing the MC
Application in the DX Console 21. Backing Up the Data

Application in the MC 22. Final Checks
15. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions 22.1 Checking the SE
22.2 Checking the Status of Boards

16. Calibration
22.3 Checking the Optional Items
16.1 Offset Calibration
23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine
16.2 Gain Calibration
END
16.3 Defect Calibration
16.4 Lag Calibration

16.5 Checking the Calibration Results
018-230-07E
IN1-3
2. Installation Preparations 2.2 Ferrite Core
Install ferrite cores with the cables when installing the machine.
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments 2.2.1 Type of the Ferrite Core
Necessary for Installation Ferrite cores used in the machine are as follows.
Manufacturer’s Attached Manu-
Prepare the tools, jigs and measuring instruments before installing the machine. Supplied Name Qty. Shape
part number position facturer
{Handling of this Manual: Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require
Inspection/Calibration} FC1 E04SR200932 7 CL/MC Seiwa
NOTE 1200_700199B.ai
The SE cable is always needed to install the machine. Prepare the SE cable for use of MC-HUB
FC3 E04SR170730A 3 Seiwa
the jig if the SE cable (optional) is not purchased by the customer. System 1200_700199C.ai
AP-HUB
FC7 TFT274015S 2 AP-POW Takeuchi
1200_700199D.ai
FC2 E04SR301334 2 MP Seiwa
MP 1200_700199A.ai
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 1200_700199C.ai

MP-HUB Seiwa
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 1200_700199C.ai

DS-HUB Seiwa
DS-LAN
FC4 E04SR211132 2 Wireless Seiwa
1200_700199H.ai
Bridge
DS
FC5 TFT-102010N 1 DS-LAN Takeuchi
1200_700199I.ai
FC6 SFT-59SN 1 DS-POW Takeuchi

1200_700199J.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-4
2.2.3 Network Configuration and Attachment Position for
FC2 E04SR301334 1 PB-LAN Seiwa the Ferrite Core
PB Attachment position of each installation configuration for the ferrite core is shown
below.
1200_700199A.ai
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 PB-HUB Seiwa INSTRUCTION

1200_700199C.ai
The ferrite core is attached about 60 mm from the base of the cables.
SE cable FC1 E04SR200932 4 SE cable Seiwa
1200_700199B.ai
n Installing the MC application in the MC (DS wired connection)
CL-AP
AFC E04SR130525A 3 Seiwa FC1
AP-Isorator SE
Cable
Hand
SW I/F Box Hand SW
1200_700199F.ai DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP
SE-LAN FC2
LAN
DVI Monitor
cable
FC1
USB
FC2
SE
AFC4 E04SR200917 1 Isorator-AP Seiwa DR-ID12xxSE
Cable DR-ID300CL FC1 USB
FC1 Keyboard
Card USB FC1 USB
1200_700199G.ai DR-ID1200MP LAN
Reader FC1 Mouse
FC1 FC1
SE FC2
Barcode USB
Cable Reader
DR-ID12xxSE FC3
2.2.2 Coiling the Cable to the Ferrite Core

FC2 LAN
FC3 Legend
FC3
FC3 FC3 : 0 coils
FC1 LAN
The number of ferrite core coils vary according to where they are attached on the Hub LAN DR-ID1200MC
SE FC4 : 1 coil
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC3 : 2 coils
cable.
FC1 NIC
(Connecter)
FC5 AC : 3 coils
CSL FC4 FC3 Adapter
There are four patterns; 0 coils (embeded only), 1 coil, 2 coils and 3 coils. FC6
Coiling examples are shown below. SE FC4

LAN Wireless Access
Point (AP)
FC3
0 coils 1 coil 2 coils DR-ID12xxSE

(Connecter)
DR-ID1200DS FC5 FC7
AC
Hospital
HUB
AC
CSL FC4 Adapter
Adapter
GND
FC6
LAN Isolator
DR-ID1200PB FC2
AC Power Cable
Signal Cable
DC Power Cable
FC2
1200_700241E.ai
1200_700191E.ai
NOTE
Connect DX console port of the DS to the DX console via the hospital HUB.
018-230-07E
IN1-5
n Installing the MC application in the MC (DS wireless connection) n Installing the MC application in the DX Console
FC1 FC1
Hand Hand
SE SW I/F Box SE SW I/F Box
Cable Hand SW Cable Hand SW
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP
LAN LAN
FC2 DVI FC2 DVI
FC1 Monitor FC1 Monitor
USB USB
FC2 FC2
SE SE
Cable Cable DR-ID300CL
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID300CL FC1 USB DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
FC1 Keyboard FC1 Keyboard
Card FC1 USB Card FC1 USB
DR-ID1200MP LAN Reader USB DR-ID1200MP LAN Reader USB
FC1 FC1 FC1 Mouse FC1 FC1 FC1 Mouse
SE FC2 SE FC2
Barcode USB Barcode USB
Cable Cable Reader
DR-ID12xxSE FC2 FC3 Reader
LAN DR-ID12xxSE FC2 FC3 LAN
FC3 FC3
FC3 凡例
Legend FC3 Legend
FC3 FC3 FC3 LAN : 0 coils
FC1 LAN :…巻き数0
0 coils
FC4 Hub LAN DR-ID1200MC FC4 Hub
SE FC3 :…巻き数1
1 coil SE : 1 coil
DR-ID1200DS AC
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC1 NIC :…巻き数2
2 coils DR-ID12xxSE FC3
Adapter : 2 coils
(Connecter) (Connecter)
FC5 AC CSL FC5
CSL :…巻き数3
3 coils FC3 FC3 : 3 coils
FC3 Adapter FC4
FC4
FC6 FC6
LAN Wireless Access LAN Wireless Access
FC4 Point (AP) Point (AP)
FC4 FC3 FC4 FC3
SE Wireless SE FC5
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC5 Converter FC7 DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC7
(Connecter) Hospital AC (Connecter) CSL Hospital AC
CSL AC HUB AC HUB
FC4 Adapter FC4 Adapter
Adapter Adapter
GND GND
AC
FC6 FC6
Adapter
FC4 FC4
SE SE
LAN Isolator DR-ID1200DS LAN Isolator
DR-ID1200DS
AC Power Cable CSL AC Power Cable
CSL FC4 FC5 FC4 FC5
Signal Cable Signal Cable
DC Power Cable DC Power Cable
FC6 FC6
1200_700242E.ai 1200_700243E.ai
NOTE n MP minimum configuration

FC1
Hand
SE SW I/F Box
Cable FC2 Hand SW
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP LAN
DVI Monitor
FC1
FC3 USB
FC2 FC1
SE
Cable DR-ID300CL
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
Keyboard
Card FC1 USB
Reader USB
FC1 FC1 FC1 Mouse
Barcode USB
Reader
LAN
Legend
LAN Wireless Access : 0 coils
Point (AP)
FC3
: 1 coil
FC7 : 2 coils
AC : 3 coils
Adapter
GND
LAN Isolator
AC Power Cable Hospital AC
HUB Adapter
Signal Cable
DC Power Cable
1200_700244E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-6
n DS minimum configuration (DS wired connection) n PB minimum configuration
Legend
DVI SE FC1 DVI
Monitor Monitor
: 0 coils Cable
USB DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200PB USB
: 1 coil FC2
DR-ID300CL DR-ID300CL
: 2 coils DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
: 3 coils Keyboard Keyboard
FC2
Reader USB Reader USB
Reader Reader
LAN LAN
FC3
FC3 LAN FC3 FC3 LAN
FC4 Hub Hub USB
SE Legend
DR-ID1200DS AC AC
DR-ID12xxSE (Connecter) Adapter : 0 coils Adapter
CSL FC5
FC4 FC3 FC3
: 1 coil
FC6 : 2 coils
LAN Wireless Access : 3 coils LAN Wireless Access
Point (AP) Point (AP)
FC3 FC3
FC7 FC7
LAN Isolator Hospital AC LAN Isolator Hospital AC
AC HUB AC HUB
Adapter Adapter
AC Power Cable Adapter AC Power Cable Adapter
Signal Cable GND Signal Cable GND
1200_700249E.ai 1200_700356E.ai
n DS minimum configuration (DS wireless connection) n Mobile configuration (SE wired connection)
FC4 FC4 SE Cable LAN Wireless USB DR-ID300CL Legend

SE DVI Monitor Access Point
Wireless DR-ID12xxSE Isolator
(CSL) : 0 coils
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC5 Bridge USB AFC AFC
(AP)
AFC AFC
(Connecter)
CSL : 1 coil
DR-ID300CL
AC DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB : 2 coils
Adapter Keyboard
FC6 : 3 coils
Card FC1 USB
Reader USB FC4 FC4
FC1 Mouse SE Wireless
FC1 FC1 DR-ID1200DS FC5 Converter
Barcode USB CSL LAN Isolator
Reader
LAN AC Power Cable
AC
FC6
Adapter Signal Cable
FC3 LAN DC Power Cable
Hub USB
1200_700245E.ai
Legend AC
Adapter
: 0 coils
FC3
n Mobile configuration (SE wireless connection)

: 1 coil
: 2 coils
LAN Wireless Access
: 3 coils Point (AP)
FC3
FC7
LAN Isolator Hospital AC Wireless USB DR-ID300CL Legend
AC HUB Adapter Access Point
AC Power Cable Adapter (AP) (CSL) : 0 coils
AFC AFC
Signal Cable GND
: 1 coil
DC Power Cable
: 2 coils
1200_700284E.ai : 3 coils
FC4 FC4
SE Wireless
DR-ID12xxSE (Connecter) DR-ID1200DS FC5 Bridge
CSL LAN Isolator
AC Power Cable
AC
FC6
DC Power Cable
1200_700285E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-7
3. Precautions in Installation
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warning and precautions mentioned in “Safety Precaution”.
CAUTION
When connecting or disconnecting the cable connector, wear an antistatic wrist
band to ground the human body. Otherwise, static electricity charged in the
human body might damage electronic components.
INSTRUCTION
It is recommended that you should not install machine cables (such as the power
cables and communication cables) near such instruments that generate magnetic field
noise (such as a motor, transducer and switching power source) and other cables to
assure appropriate image quality.
INSTRUCTION
Do not make a radius of curvature of the SE cable smaller than 50 mm. If the radius of
curvature is smaller than 50 mm, disconnection might occur in the cable, resulting in
abnormality in image.
018-230-07E
IN1-8
4. Transfer and Unpacking 4.3 Unpacking the MP
(1) Take out the MP from transporting box.
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer #1 Take out: MP
CAUTION
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
u INSTRUCTION u #1 Accessories
Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put
off immediately after the machine is transferred into the room, the machine might get
condensation.
Desiccant
(outside Japan)
4.2 Transfer of Instruments
Pad
CAUTION
If the machine is to be transferred over differing floor levels, slowly move the
machine not to shock it. Note that the carrier can come over a differing level up Transporting box
to approx. 10 mm.
1200_700141.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-9
4.4 Unpacking the DS 4.5 Unpacking the PB
(1) Take out the DS from transporting box. (1) Take out the PB from transporting box.
#1 Take out: DS #1 Take out: PB
SE connection cable
Accessories
Accessories
Dummy cassette
#1 #1 LAN cable
Pad
Desiccant
(outside Japan)
Pad Transporting box
1200_700385E.ai

NOTE
Transporting box
Perform this procedure only when the MC application is installed in the MC.
1200_700142.ai
(1) Take out the MC from transporting box.
018-230-07E
IN1-10
4.7 Unpacking the SE 4.8 Unpacking the Battery Pack
(1) Take out the SE from transporting box. (1) Take out the battery pack from transporting box.
#1 Take out: SE
Accessories
(1) Take out the battery charger from transporting box.

Pad
(1) Take out the DX Console from transporting box.
#1 4.11 Unpacking the Monitor

Desiccant
(1) Take out the monitor from transporting box.
(outside Japan)
4.12 Unpacking the Access Point

(1) Take out the Access Point from transporting box.
Transporting box
1200_700001E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-11
5. Checking the Items Supplied n SE (1213SE / 1214SE)
Item Qty. Remarks
Check the components against the packing list supplied. SE 1 -
Machine-specific data 1
n SE (1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE) Special screw M2x3 34
Item Qty. Remarks Screw cap seal 2
SE 1 - Small size screw cap 2
Machine-specific data 1 Small size plug seal 3 Seal including antibacterial paint
1201SE/1211SE (Japan): 46 pcs. Stopper seal 2
Special screw M2x3 1201SE/1211SE (Overseas): 45 pcs. Small size stopper seal 2
1202SE/1212SE: 52 pcs. Dummy battery 1
Screw cap seal 4 Small size connector cover 1
Plug seal 4 Seal including antibacterial paint Screw seal 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Stopper seal 4 Small size screw DINOC 2
Dummy battery 1 Green label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Connector cover 1 Gray label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint Small size insertion position seal 1
Screw seal 4 1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs., 17inch; 2 pcs. SE operation manual 1
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs. Letter of guarantee/Report of completion
Green label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs. 1 Only inside Japan
of installation/Performance check list
Gray label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs. Notes on the X-ray exposure/Antibacterial
1
SE operation manual 1 coating operation manual
Letter of guarantee/Report of completion Supplementary Material 1 Only Overseas
1 Only inside Japan
*1: Refer to the Operation Manual for the application location.
Notes on the X-ray exposure/Antibacterial
1
coating operation manual
Supplementary Material 1 Only Overseas
018-230-07E
IN1-12
n MP n System Accessory Kit
Item Qty. Remarks Item Qty. Remarks
MP 1 - System operation manual 1
Jig cable 2 Short-circuiting cable for initializing the MP
Spare part: 1 cable
Positioning jig for SE assembly 1
Jig for resetting the IP address 1
Medical power cable Ferrite core 11 FC1 (x7), FC3 (x3), FC7 (x1)
Cable 1
Only inside Japan
SE-LAN cable 1
Ferrite core 3 FC2 (x2), FC3 (x1)
Performance check list/Attached
Cross recessed pan head screw (M3x6) 3 document/How to use the memory
1 Only inside Japan
exposure mode/Report of completion of
Plain washer (W3) 3 installation/
Spring washer (SW3) 3
Fastener 3 n DR-ID 300CL
Cable tie 3
Cable tie 2 For details on the DR-ID 300CL, refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
Clamp 6
Stand for the floor 1 Only inside Japan n MC (Inside Japan)
DR-ID 1200MP operation manual 1 Item Qty. Remarks
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan Body 1 -
Keyboard 1 -
n DS Mouse 1 -
Power cable 1 With conversion adapter
Item Qty. Remarks
Ferrite core 1 FC1
DS 1 -
Set of reinstallation CD’s 1 -
Setup CD 1 DR-ID 1200DS Service Tool Software
Set of resource CD’s 1 -
Ferrite core 5 FC3 (x1), FC4 (x2), FC5 (x1), FC6 (x1)
Other DELL accessories 1 -
Stand for the floor 1 Only inside Japan
Memory element 1 Application software/PC-Tool
Power cable 1
Memory element 1 Operating System (for MC Default Set Up)
Cross recessed hexagon head screw
4 308S0404 Letter of guarantee 1 DR-ID 1200MC
double sems screw (M3x12)
Hexagon head tapping screw for plastic
4 306S0152
(double -point) (M3x8) n MC (Outside Japan)
Insert position seal for small size cassette 1
Item Qty. Remarks
Lead precaution label 1
Body 1 -
DR-ID 1200DS operation manual 1
Keyboard 1 -
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan
Mouse 1 -
n PB Ferrite core 1 FC1
Item Qty. Remarks Set of reinstallation CD’s 1 -
PB 1 - Set of resource CD’s 1 -
LAN cable 1 With FC2 (x1) and FC3 (x1) Other DELL accessories 1 -
Power cable 1 Only inside Japan Memory element 1 Application software/PC-Tool
DR-ID 1200PB operation manual 1 Memory element 1 Operating System (for MC Default Set Up)
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan Letter of guarantee 1 DR-ID 1200MC
018-230-07E
IN1-13
n Optional Items l IF box-related
CASE.NO. Name Qty. Remarks
l Connector cable for the X-ray Used to synchronize exposure
CASE NO. Name Qty. Remarks timing with accumulation start
301 I/F box 1 timing by means of a hand switch
9-core signal. (the Main Kit of Hand SW
Cable length: 5 m Interface BOX (only inside Japan))
101 X-Ray shot cable 1
Cable to connect between MP and X-ray
equipment. Used to synchronize exposure
timing with accumulation start
9-core timing by means of a hand switch
Cable length: 15 m 302 I/F box 1
102 X-Ray shot cable 1 signal. (the Main Kit of Hand
Cable to connect between MP and X-ray SW Interface BOX (only outside
equipment. Japan))
3-core Exposure switch for use as
Cable length: 5 m 303 Hand switches (2button) 1
103 X-Ray shot cable 1 connected with the I/F box.
High-current cable to connect between MP
and X-ray equipment. 304 I/F box cable_10m 1 Used to connect between the I/F
305 I/F box cable_15m 1 box and the MP.
3-core
Cable length: 15 m 306 I/F box cable_GE1 1
104 X-Ray shot cable 1 307 I/F box cable_GE2 1
and X-ray equipment. 308 I/F box cable_Siemens 1
MIKASA 309 I/F box cable_Shimadzu 1
105 Generator 1
Generator-MP terminal block 310 I/F box cable_Toshiba 1
312 I/F box cable_DelMedical 1
l AC bucky relay unit I/F box cable
Used to connect between the I/F
313 1 box and the X-ray equipment.
CASE.NO. Item Qty. Remarks _round terminal DelMedical
201 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 100V 314 I/F box cable_GENDEX 1
202 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 110V 315 I/F box cable_CPI 1
203 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 200V 316 I/F box cable_Philips 1
204 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 220V 317 I/F box cable_110-3 wire 1
318 I/F box cable_110-4 wire 1
311 I/F box cable_EMD 1 box and the X-ray equipment.
Optional item only outside Japan.
l Battery-related
401 Battery pack 1
Battery pack charger
402 Battery charger 1
Only inside Japan
Only outside Japan
018-230-07E
IN1-14
l SE cable-related
501 SE cable 1 10m
502 SE cable 1 20m
Adapter for installing the
503 DS connection adapter 1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
into the DS.
DS connection adapter Adapter for installing the
504 1
(for small size SE) 1213SE/1214SE into the DS.
SE cable retaining clamp
505 1
(magnet clamp)
Clamp for retaining the SE cable.
506 1
(double-sided tape clamp)
l Fixture
601 Anchor fixing bracket of MP 1
602 Falling prevention metal fitting of MP 1
603 Anchor floor fixing bracket of DS 1
604 Falling prevention metal fitting of DS 1
605 Wall fixing bracket of DS 1 Bracket to fix the DS on the wall
l FUJIFILM-made AP-related
Including SE-AP cable and ferrite
701 1200AP Kit 1 core (AFC: x3, AFC4: x1)
Only inside Japan
Only for USA
Only for Europe
Only for China
l Storage case (Shared with DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 1200)

801 SE storage case for 14x17 1
018-230-07E
IN1-15
(1) Charge the battery pack using the battery charger or the SE.
{Operation Manual}
NOTE
Error display that appears when the battery charger has a charging current failure
includes the following.
- Ver.G or later
Three green LEDs blink until charging starts.
- The red LED blinks after a few seconds and an error display appears.
- Ver.F or earlier
The LED blinks, which looks like charging is going on properly.
- The number of LEDs blinking does not increase.
- After three hours, three green LEDs are lit up.
If a communication error occurred, the red LED blinks after a few seconds and an
error display appears.
The battery charger version is labeled with an alphabet at the end of the serial no. at
the lower right of the rating plate. A serial number “F000001A”, for example, means a
version “A”.
018-230-07E
IN1-16
7. Installing the MP (3) Remove the MP rear cover.

(1) Remove the MP top cover.
#1 Loosen: T3x6 (x2) Rear cover
Top cover
#1
#1
1200_700028E.ai
1200_700026E.ai
(2) Remove the MP front cover.

#1
Front cover
1200_700027E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-17
7.2 Checking the Power Cable 7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or
WARNING the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional)
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet before measuring a resistance value. Install the foot cover (when installing on the floor) or the anchor mounting bracket (when
fixing the anchor :optional) before connecting the cables.
(1) Embed the ferrite core (FC2) on the MP-side of the power cable,
7.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover
connect the power cable to the MP, and set the power switch to the ON
position. (1) Remove the MP bottom cover.
Manufacturer’s
Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position
part number
Power cable (MP-side)

FC2 E04SR301334 0 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
1200_700199A.ai
(2) Measure the resistance value of the power cable.

(Reference value)
Terminal L to N L to E N to E
Resistance value Over 100 kΩ ∞ ∞
#1
<For use in Japan> <For use in USA> <For use in Europe, etc> <For use in UK, etc>
Bottom cover
E 1200_700149.ai
E E E (2) Turn the height retaining brackets of the bottom cover over and
L L N N reinstall them to the same position.
N N L #1 Remove: T3x6 (x3)
L #2 Turn over: height retaining brackets (x3)
#3 Tighten: T3x6 (x3)
600_700005.ai #1 Bottom cover
(3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power
cable and the bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there
is continuity. #3
(4) Set the main power switch to the OFF position after completion of the
measurement.
#2
1200_700150.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-18
(3) Install the foot cover. 7.3.2 Installing the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional)
(1) Perform the procedures (1) to (2) in “8.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover”.
Foot cover
#1 {IN1:7.3.1_Installing the Foot Cover}
(2) Install the anchor mounting bracket to the MP.
#1
1200_700159.ai
1200_700151.ai
(3) Install the bottom cover.
(4) Reinstall the bottom cover.
Bottom cover
#1
#1
1200_700154.ai
1200_700152.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-19
7.4 Connecting the Cables (3) Tighten the SE cable (MP-side) with the two cable ties that are passed
through the clamp, and attach the ferrite core (FC1).
(1) Route the SE cable (optional item or a jig) from the lower opening on #1 Tighten: Cable tie (Panduit PLT1.5I: lateral direction, inside)
the MP rear cover, and connect the cable connector and the protective #2 Tighten: Cable tie (Panduit PLT1.5I: vertical direction, outside)
ground wire. #3 Embed: Ferrite core (FC1)
#1 Route: SE cable (optional item or a jig) Manufacturer’s
#2 Connect: Cable connector Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position
part number
#3 Tighten: N3x6, SW3, W3
SE cable (MP-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 0 Refer to the following
#3 1200_700199B.ai instruction.
#2 MP
MPC6
#1
SE cable
1200_700057.ai
#1 #2
(2) Clamp the protective ground wire of the SE cable. #3
#1 Clamp: Clamp 1200_700059E.ai
#1 Protective ground wire INSTRUCTION

- When tightening the cable tie, adjust the length of the cable tie as in the figure below.
When measuring the length of the cable tie, set the steel rule up against the
cable bundle tie and measure the length to the tip.
Cable tie (outside)

97 mm or more
1200_700058.ai
Cable tie (inside)

105 mm or more
1200_700175E.ai
- Attach the ferrite core as in the figure below.
1200_700197.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-20
(4) Route the LAN cables between the MP and MC and between the MP n With two MP structure
and AP from the lower opening on the MP rear cover, connect them,
and then attach the ferrite cores (FC2). MP2
REFERENCE
MPC7
- You may connect the LAN cable either to the MPC4 or the MPC5.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console,
connect the LAN cable between MP and DX Console and between MP and AP. MPC6
MPC54B
#1 Route: LAN cable MPC5 board
#2 Connect: LAN cable connector
#3 2 coils: Ferrite core (FC2 x2)
Manufacturer’s MPC4
part number
LAN cable (MP-side) HUB

1200_700199A.ai
instruction. MP1
MPC7
MPC6
MPC54B
MPC5 board
MPC4
#1#3 #2 #2
MPC4 MPC5 1200_700328.ai
LAN cable (between MP and MC) REFERENCE

LAN cable (between MP and AP) 1200_700060.ai - The LAN cable can be connected to either MPC4 or MPC5.
- Refer to the following for the procedure when installing two MP.
INSTRUCTION {IN1:14.1.6_Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs}
Attach the ferrite core as in the figure below.
1200_700198.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-21
7.5 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable 7.5.1 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)
WARNINGS n Connection Diagram of the X-Ray High Voltage Generator (When

a Single SE Is Connected)
l Be sure to turn OFF the power supply of the X-ray high voltage generator to
avoid electric shock hazards due to high voltage. X-ray high
l The X-ray high voltage generator is a product of another manufacturer. voltage generator MPX54A
Commit the cable connection to the service personnel of the X-ray equipment.
+5V BKY1
8 RDY1A
How to connect the X-Ray shot cable depends on the grid oscillation mode. K5
Refer to the corresponding connection method. AHN22005
BKY1
l Steady grid type +5V_iso +5V_iso Driver 9 RDY1B
circuit
The grid is fixed and does not oscillate. 1 PC3
{IN1:7.5.1_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)} TLP421F +5V BKY1
SHOT1 10 RDY2A
l Bucky contact type RDY 1 2
820Ω K6
Shot
The grid is oscillated by the motor. When the relay contact is closed, the motor starts Switch 1 +5V_iso AHN22005
BKY1
SHOT1
to drive. Prep RDY 1 3 11 RDY2B
PC2
{IN1:7.5.2_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky Contact Type)} TLP421F
GND_iso
l Bucky AC type SHOT1
4
RDY 2
The grid is pressed against the leaf spring, and the grid rebounds by means of Shot 820Ω 12
reaction force of the spring. A solenoid is employed as a mechanical part against Switch 2
SHOT1
RAD
which the grid is pressed. RDY 2 5
The AC bucky relay unit (optional) is required when the bucky AC type is to be
connected. SHOT1 GND_iso +5V
{IN1:7.5.3_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)} GO A 6
K4
AHN22005
SHOT1
GO B 7
600_700010.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-22
n Signal Descriptions n Timing Chart
A: Preparation starts for SE exposures corresponding to the first stage of the switch when
l SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1 (Input) the shot switch (first stage) is turned ON.
The signal is generated when only the first stage of the shot switch on the X-ray high B: Preparation starts for SE exposures corresponding to the second stage of the switch
voltage generator is pressed. (Prep signal) when the shot switch (second stage) is turned ON.
C: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) starts.
l SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2 (Input) D: An exposure request signal is output, and X-ray exposure starts.
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the E: X-ray exposure ends.
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
l SHOT1 GO A/B (Output)
The signal generates X-rays. SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
A relay type is normally open (NO).
SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity
SHOT GO
The specifications of relays (K4, K5 and K6) are as follows.
l Relay model X-ray exposure
AHN22005 (Panasonic Electric Works) Charge accumulation

l Rated control capacity of SE (FPD)
Standard contact: 30 VDC A B CD E F 600_700011.ai
l Maximum switching current

1A
018-230-07E
IN1-23
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable (2) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
CAUTION #1 Connect: Cable terminals
MPX2 MPX1
RDY2-RDY2 terminals before connecting the X-Ray shot cable, to make sure 1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO #1
that a high voltage (100 VAC, for example) is not observed whichever technique
2 SHOT2 RDY1 2 SHOT1 RDY1
of the X-ray high voltage generator is selected.
If the high voltage (such as 100 VAC ) is observed in the cable voltage, contact a 3 SHOT2 RDY1 3 SHOT1 RDY1
service personnel of the X-ray equipment for checking the connection.
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise care. 4 SHOT2 RDY2 4 SHOT1 RDY2

u INSTRUCTION u
Always use a reusable band (clamp) included in the supplied accessories to retain the 6 SHOT2 GO A 6 SHOT1 GO A
cable, as the band is a UL-standard component. The manufacturer and the part No. of
the reusable band are mentioned below for your reference. 7 SHOT2 GO B 7 SHOT1 GO B
Manufacturer: Kitagawa Industries, Co. Ltd. 8 BKY2 RDY1A 8 BKY1 RDY1A
Name: Reusable band
Part No.: LWS-3S V0 9 BKY2 RDY1B 9 BKY1 RDY1B
(1) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) from the upper opening on the 10 BKY2 RDY2A 10 BKY1 RDY2A
MP rear cover.
11 BKY2 RDY2B 11 BKY1 RDY2B
#1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional)
12 NC2 12 NC1
600_700013.ai
#1
1200_700029.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-24
(3) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable terminals. (5) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
u NOTE u
#1 Connect: Cable terminals
No cable terminal may remain depending on the X-ray high voltage generator to
#1
be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not
necessary. MPX2 MPX1
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO
#1 Wrap: Plastic tape
6 SHOT2 GO A 6 SHOT1 GO A
7 SHOT2 GO B 7 SHOT1 GO B
8 BKY2 RDY1A 8 BKY1 RDY1A

#1 600_700014.ai

(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) from the upper opening
on the MP rear cover. 10 BKY2 RDY2A 10 BKY1 RDY2A
u NOTE u 11 BKY2 RDY2B 11 BKY1 RDY2B
If the second cable is not present, the procedure is not necessary. Proceed to the
procedure (7). 12 NC2 12 NC1
600_700016.ai
#1
1200_700030.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-25
(6) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable (7) Tie the remaining cables and the X-ray shot cable(s) together, and
terminals. retain with the reusable band (supplied accessory).
#1 Retain: Reusable band(s) (supplied accessory)
u NOTE u
<When one X-Ray shot cable is used>
be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not #1
necessary.
1200_700031.ai
<When two X-Ray shot cables are used>

#1
#1 600_700014.ai
1200_700032.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-26
(8) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable
terminals of the X-Ray shot cable, and tie them with the reusable band
(supplied accessory).
When two cables are used, wrap each of the cable terminals with the plastic tape.
u NOTE u
necessary.

#2 Tie: Cables
#3 Retain: Reusable band (supplied accessory)
#1 #3 #2
1200_700033.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-27
7.5.2 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable
(Bucky Contact Type)
n Connection Diagram of the X-Ray High Voltage Generator (When

X-ray high
voltage generator MPX54A Bucky Unit
+5V BKY1
8 RDY1A
K5
AHN22005
BKY1
+5V_iso +5V_iso Driver 9 RDY1B
circuit
1 PC3
TLP421F +5V BKY1
SHOT1 10 RDY2A
RDY1 2 K6
820Ω
Shot AHN22005
Switch 1 +5V_iso BKY1
SHOT1
Prep 3 11 RDY2B
RDY1
PC4
TLP421F
GND_iso
SHOT1
RDY2 4
Shot 820Ω 12
Switch 2
SHOT1
RAD 5
RDY2
SHOT1 GND_iso +5V

GO A 6
K4
AHN22005
SHOT1
GO B 7
BKY1 EXP
600_700022.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-28
A: The signal for preparing for the bucky operation is output, and preparation starts for SE
l SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1 (Input) exposures corresponding to the first stage of the switch when the shot switch (first stage)
The signal is generated when only the first stage of the shot switch on the X-ray high is turned ON.
voltage generator is pressed. (Prep signal) B: Preparation starts for SE exposures corresponding to the second stage of the switch
when the shot switch (second stage) is turned ON.
l SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2 (Input) C: The signal for operating the bucky is output upon completion of the preparation for the SE
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the (FPD) exposure.
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) D: An exposure request signal is output after a predetermined time elapses since the bucky
operation starts, and X-ray exposure starts.
l BKY1 RDY1 A/B (Output) E: X-ray exposure ends.
The signal prepares for the bucky operation. F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
l BKY1 RDY2 A/B (Output)
The signal operates the bucky upon completion of the preparation for the SE BKY1 RDY1/RDY1
exposure.
A relay type is normally open (NO). SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity BKY1 RDY2/RDY2

Bucky
l Relay model
AHN22005 (Panasonic Electric Works) BKY1 EXP
l Rated control capacity X-ray exposure

Standard contact: 30 VDC Charge accumulation
of SE (FPD)
A B C D E F
1A
600_700023.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-29
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable (1) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable from the
upper opening on the MP rear cover.
CAUTION #1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
RDY2-RDY2 terminals before connecting the X-Ray shot cable, to make sure
If the high voltage (such as 100 VAC) is observed in the cable voltage, contact a
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise X-Ray shot cable
care.
u INSTRUCTION u #1
Always use a reusable band (clamp) included in the supplied accessories to retain the
the reusable band are mentioned below for your reference.
Manufacturer: Kitagawa Industries, Co. Ltd.
Name: Reusable band Bucky cable
Part No.: LWS-3S V0 1200_700034.ai
u NOTE u
Abut the cable terminals as shown below when fastening them together.
Cable GOOD
Screw
Terminal
Terminal block
NO GOOD
600_700132.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-30
(2) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A (3) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable
board. terminals.
#1 Connect: Cable terminals u NOTE u
MPX2 MPX1 X-Ray shot cable
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO #1 be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not
necessary.

10 BKY2 RDY2A 10 BKY1 RDY2A #1 600_700014.ai
(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
from the upper opening on the MP rear cover.
12 NC2 12 NC1
u NOTE u
If the second cable and the bucky cable are not present, the procedure is not
Bucky cable necessary. Proceed to the procedure (7).
#1
600_700026.ai
#1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
#1
1200_700035.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-31
board. terminals.
u NOTE u
MPX2 #1 MPX1
X-Ray shot cable No cable terminal may remain depending on the X-ray high voltage generator to
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not
necessary.


12 NC2 12 NC1
Bucky cable
#1 600_700028.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-32
(7) Tie the remaining cables and the X-Ray shot cable(s) together, and (8) Retain the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) on the MP rear.
retain with the reusable band(s) (supplied accessory). #1 Retain: Reusable band (supplied accessory)
#1 Retain: Reusable band(s) (supplied accessory) <When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used>
<When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used>
#1
X-Ray shot cable

#1
Bucky cable
1200_700036.ai
Bucky cable 1200_700145.ai <When two X-Ray shot cables and two bucky cables are used>
<When two X-Ray shot cables and two bucky cables are used>
#1 #2
X-Ray shot cables Bucky cables
X-Ray shot cables
#1
Bucky cables
1200_700146.ai
1200_700037.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-33
u NOTE u
necessary.

#2 Tie: Cables
#1 #3 #2
1200_700033.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-34
7.5.3 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)
REFERENCE
The relay incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit needs to be replaced periodically.
Refer to the following for the replacement interval and the replacement procedures.
- Replacement interval
{PM:1.3_Preventive Maintenance Program List}
- Replacement procedures
{MC:2.10_AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional)}

X-ray high voltage generator Bucky Unit
AC100/240V (L)
AC100/240V (L)
AC100/240V (N)
AC100/240V (N)
Shot
Switch 1
SHOT RDY1 (L)
Prep BKY RDY1 (L)
SHOT RDY1 (N)
Shot BKY RDY1 (N)
Switch 2 SHOT RDY2 (L)
RAD BKY RDY2 (L)
SHOT RDY2 (N)
BKY RDY2 (N)
SHOT GO A BKY EXP A
SHOT GO B
BKY EXP B
FGND
FGND
Relay
AHN12205
AHN210 □
AHN210□
AC100/110V : AHN210X0
AC110/120V : AHN210X1
AC200/220V : AHN210Y0
AC220/240V : AHN210Y2
AC Bucky Relay Unit

600_700033.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-35
l SHOT1 RDY1 L/N (Input) the shot switch (first stage) is turned ON.
C: The signal for operating the bucky is output upon completion of the preparation for the SE
l SHOT1 RDY2 L/N (Input) (FPD) exposure.
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the D: An exposure request signal is output after a predetermined time elapses since the bucky
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) operation starts, and X-ray exposure starts.
E: X-ray exposure ends.
l BKY1 RDY2 L (Output) F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
The signal operates the bucky upon completion of the preparation for the SE
exposure. SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity
The specifications of relays (K1, K2 and K3) are as follows. BKY1 RDY2/RDY2
l Relay model and rated control capacity Bucky

- AHN210 (Panasonic Electric Works)
Coil voltage Rated excitation current BKY1 EXP
AHN210X0: 100/110 VAC 9.0/13.0 mA
X-ray exposure
AHN210X1: 110/120 VAC 8.2/11.8 mA
AHN210Y0: 200/220 VAC 4.5/6.5 mA Charge accumulation
AHN210Y2: 220/240 VAC 4.1/5.9 mA of SE (FPD)
A B C D E F
Standard contact: 250 VAC and 30 VDC
600_700034.ai

1A
018-230-07E
IN1-36
n Mounting the AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional) (2) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
u NOTE u #1 Connect: Cable terminals
GOOD MPX54A Board (*) (*) AC bucky relay unit
Cable
Screw
MPX2 MPX1
Terminal
MPX2-1 MPX1-1 KA3
MPX2-2 MPX1-2 KA4
MPX2-3 MPX1-3
Terminal block KB3
MPX2-4 MPX1-4
KB4
NO GOOD MPX2-5-1 MPX1-5-1
MPX2-5-2 MPX1-5-2 KC5
KC1
600_700132.ai
KD3
(1) Mount the AC bucky relay unit (optional) on the MP. KD4
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (x4) MPX2-10 MPX1-10
AC bucky relay unit #1 KE3
MPX2-11 MPX1-11
KE4
KF5
KF1
600_700036.ai
*: Short cable (supplied accessory)
MP
1200_700147.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-37
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTION cable, as the band is a UL-standard component. The manufacturer and the part No. of
Measure the voltage between the cables connecting to the RDY1-RDY1 and
the RDY2-RDY2 terminals in all techniques before connecting the X-Ray shot
cables. Check to make sure that the measured voltage conforms to the coil Name: Reusable band
voltages (100/110 VAC, 110/120 VAC, 200/220 VAC and 220/240 VAC) of the relay Part No.: LWS-3S V0
to be used.
If the voltage between cables differs from the coil voltage of the relay, u NOTE u
commission the service personnel of the X-ray equipment to check the cable Abut the cable terminals as shown below when fastening them together.
connection.
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise Cable GOOD
Screw
care. Terminal
CAUTION
Use the cable and the terminal as specified below when connecting the X-Ray Terminal block
shot cable and the bucky cable. When crimping the terminal, use the crimp
nippers as indicated below. If the following specifications of the cable and the
NO GOOD
terminal are not observed, the machine might get damaged.
- Cable: AWG18 to 22 thick
- Terminal: FV1.25-M4 (J.S.T. Connector)
- Crimp nippers: Manufactured by IZUMI; A125
600_700132.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-38
(1) Remove the terminal block covers of the AC bucky relay unit. (2) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable from the
#1 Remove: B3x6 (x4) upper opening on the MP rear cover.
AC bucky relay unit #1 #1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
Covers
X-Ray shot cable
MP
1200_700148.ai Bucky cable
1200_700038.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-39
(3) Connect the cable terminals to the terminal blocks (TB1 and TB2) of X-Ray shot cable
the AC bucky relay unit.
WARNING
Be sure to connect the X-Ray shot cable and the FG line of the bucky cable to
the FG (TB2-6) of the terminal block. If the FG line is fixed to the MP frame or the
like, electrification or ignition might result due to difference in ground levels.
TB1 TB2
u NOTE u Bucky cable
1 1
If two X-Ray shot cables and two bucky cables are to be connected, make
2 2
connection of the first cable to the terminal indicated in a white cell and the
second cable to the terminal indicated in a shaded cell shown in the table below. 3 3
The method of connecting the second cable is described in the procedure (4).
4 4
No. TB1 TB2 5 5

6
X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable 6
1 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY1 (L) X-Con BKY Stand AC (L) 7 7
2 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY1 (N) X-Con BKY Stand AC (N) 8 8
3 X-Con SHOT1 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Bed AC (L) 9 9
4 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY2 (N) X-Con BKY Bed AC (N) 10 10

600_700050.ai
5 BKY SHOT1 RDY2 (L) N.C. N.C.

X-Con BKY Stand FG
6 X-Con BKY SHOT2 RDY1 (L)
X-Con BKY Bed FG
7 X-Con BKY SHOT2 RDY1 (N) X-Con BKY Stand Exp A
8 X-Con SHOT2 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Stand Exp B
9 X-Con BKY SHOT2 RDY2 (N) X-Con BKY Bed Exp A
10 BKY SHOT2 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Bed Exp B
018-230-07E
IN1-40
(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable X-Ray shot cable
from the MP rear, and connect the cable terminals with the terminal
blocks (TB1 and TB2) of the AC bucky relay unit.
WARNING
Bucky cable
u NOTE u TB1 TB2
If the second X-Ray shot cable and the second bucky cable are not present, the 1 1
procedure is not necessary. Proceed to the procedure (5).
2 2
u NOTE u 3 3
The terminals to be connected with the second X-Ray shot cable and the second 4 4
bucky cable are indicated in white cells in the table below.
5 5
6
6
No. TB1 TB2
7 7
X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable
8 8
1 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY1 (L) X-Con BKY Stand AC (L)

Bucky cable
4 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY2 (N) X-Con BKY Bed AC (N)
X-Con BKY Stand FG
X-Con BKY Bed FG
8 X-Con SHOT2 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Stand Exp B X-Ray shot cable
600_700051.ai

018-230-07E
IN1-41
(5) Put on the terminal block covers. 7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables
(6) Retain the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) on the MP rear.
CAUTION
<When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used> Exercise care not to stumble over the bundle of cables during installation.
Furthermore, after doing the wiring, be careful to lay out the cables so that no
one trips over all of them.
(1) Make sure that the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) are
bound together.
X-Ray shot cable
(2) Bind the LAN cables together.
#1
Bucky cable
1200_700036.ai
X-Ray shot cables
#1
LAN cable (between MP and MC) X-Ray shot cable(s)
LAN cable (between MP and AP) and the bucky cable(s)
1200_700039.ai
Bucky cables
1200_700037.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-42
7.7 Reinstalling the Covers (5) Put the protruded section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
bracket, and then place the bracket.
(1) Reinstall the MP front cover, the rear cover and the top cover.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #1
7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)

(1) Make two marks on the floor by an oil-based marker or a center punch.
(2) Drill a hole on the two positions marked on the floor by the oil-based
pen, the center punch or the like.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
1200_700157.ai
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling. (6) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts.
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine #1 Fix: Anchor nuts (x2)
against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
- The anchor which is to be used when fixing is as per the following. In step 6, Less than 14mm
adjust the depth of the hole so that the anchor is less than 14mm.
Part No.: SANKO TECHNO C-645
Anchor diameter: 6 mm, Pilot hole size: 6.4 mm, Length: 45 mm 1200_700158.ai
(7) Place the MP with fixing bracket on the anchor-fixed bracket, and then
(3) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust fix the MP at two locations on the front and the rear.
from the drilled holes. #1 Tighten: Screws (x4)
(4) Embed the anchors in the holes.
#1 Embed: Anchors (x2)
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
u NOTE u
The anchors corresponding to the anchor nut size should be prepared.
#1
#1
1200_700155.ai
1200_700007.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-43
8. Installing the DS 8.2 Attaching the Label
(1) Attach the small size cassette label and lead precaution label.
8.1 Checking the Power Cable #1 Attach: Small size cassette label
WARNING #2 Attach: Lead precaution label
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet before measuring a resistance value. #1 #2
(1) Embed the ferrite core (FC6) on the DS-side of the power cable, connect
the power cable to the DS, and set the power switch to the ON position.
Manufacturer’s
part number
Power cable (DS-side)
FC6 SFT-59SN 0 About 60 mm from the base
1200_700199J.ai
of the cable
1200_700248.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
NOTE
Attach the ferrite core of the DS-side as in the figure below.
Clean the attachment surface with a cloth moistened with ethanol, then attach the
FC6
labels.
1200_700258.ai

(Reference value)
E
E E E
L L N N
N N L
L
600_700005.ai
is continuity.
measurement.
018-230-07E
IN1-44
8.3 Installing the DS 8.3.1 Installing on the Floor
The DS can be installed in the following three ways: NOTE
- Placed on the floor
The floor foot cover is standardly supplied only in Japan. Overseas it is an option.
{IN1:8.3.1_Installing on the Floor}
- Fixed on the floor with anchors
(1) Remove the screws from the DS bottom cover.
{IN1:8.3.2_Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional)}
- Fixed on the wall with anchors
{IN1:8.3.3_Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)}
NOTE
When installing the 17 x 17 inch size SE into the DS, fixing with anchors is necessary.
#1
1200_700250.ai
(2) Attach the floor foot cover to the DS.

#1 Tighten: Screws (x4)
#1
1200_700005.ai
(3) Install the DS on the floor.
1200_700006.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-45
8.3.2 Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional) (5) Put the protruded section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum 1200_700008.ai
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine (6) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts.
#1 Fix: Anchor nuts (x2)
(3) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust
Less than 17mm
from the drilled holes.
#1 Embed: Anchors (x2) 1200_700158.ai
u INSTRUCTION u (7) Remove the screws from the DS bottom cover.

Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes. #1 Remove: B3x12 (x4)
#1
#1
1200_700250.ai
(8) Attach the bracket to the DS.

#1 Tighten: B3x12 (x4)
#1
1200_700007.ai
1200_700010.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-46
(8) Place the DS with fixing bracket on the anchor-fixed bracket, and then 8.3.3 Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)
fix the DS at two locations on the front and the rear.
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (x4)
INSTRUCTION
When installing the DS on the wall, make sure to check the operability of the DS and
visibility of the LED in advance.
NOTE
#1
The requirements for installing the DS on the wall are as described below.
- Withstand load of the wall: Concrete (Design strength of 18 N/mm2 or greater)
- Installation position:
Lowest: Distance from the floor to the DS base is 150 mm or greater
1200_700011.ai
Highest: Distance from the floor to the DS top is 1200 mm or less
(9) Attach the decorative cover on the front and rear of the DS with a - Anchor bolts: Use only supplied anchor bolts.
magnet.
(1) Make four marks on the wall by an oil-based marker or a center punch.
(2) Drill a hole on the four positions marked on the wall by the oil-based
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use a drill that is suitable for wall hole drilling.
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine
1200_700012.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-47
(4) Embed the anchors in the holes. (7) Fix the fixing bracket to the wall using anchor nuts.
#1 Embed: Anchors (x4) #1 Fix: Anchor nuts (x4)
u INSTRUCTION u #1
#1
1200_700016.ai
(8) Temporarily fix the fixing bracket using the hexagon-headed bolt.
1200_700013.ai #1 Temporarily fix: Hexagon-headed bolts (x4)
(5) Attach the anchor nuts on the two anchors shown above. #1
#1 Attach: Anchor nuts (x2)

#1
1200_700017.ai
1200_700014.ai
(6) Hook the two hook slots of the wall fixing bracket on the anchor/nut
subassembly.
1200_700015.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-48
(9) Remove the DS front cover and the DS rear cover, and remove the (11) Hook the DS hook slot on the hexagon-headed bolt that is temporarily
blind plates that are attached on the hook slots of the rear cover. fixed on the bracket, and then install the DS on the wall.
Remove the DS front cover and the DS rear cover: {MC:3.1_DS Cover} Rear side of DS
REFERENCE
The blind plates that are attached to the hook slots are pasted on the double-sided tape.
1200_700203.ai
Fixing bracket
(10) Reinstall the DS rear cover. for the wall
NOTE
Do not reinstall the DS front cover in this step since it is reinstalled later.
1200_700018E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-49
(12) Fully tighten the hexagon-headed bolt from the front of the DS to fix 8.4 Setting the DS IP Address
the DS on the wall.
#1 Fully tighten: Hexagon-headed bolts (x4) u INSTRUCTION u
#1 - In case of connecting with the FUJIFILM-made AP, the procedure is not required.
- Restart the DS and DX Console after using the Docking Stand Service Utility.
Check and set the following items to use the Docking Stand Service Utility.
- Preparation
- Installing the Docking Stand Service Utility (only if necessary)
- Checking the DS IP address
- Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS
- Setting the LED brightness of the DS (only if necessary)
- Checking the DS firmware version
- Updating the DS firmware version (only if necessary)
- Turning OFF the DS power
- Setting the DX Console
- Setting the second DS IP address (only if necessary)
REFERENCE
The default IP address of the DS is “192.168.0.55”.
1200_700019.ai
(13) Attach the DS front cover and fix it by tightening the six screws at the
bottom.
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (round head) (x6)
#1 DS front cover
1200_700020E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-50
 Preparation  Installing the Docking Stand Service Utility
(1) Connect the CSL-PC with the DS via the LAN cable. u NOTE u
NOTE If the Docking Stand Service Utility has already been installed on the DX Console, the
procedure is not necessary.
The DS has two LAN ports. Connect the LAN cable to the port for the CSL-PC.
For CSL-PC For SE When installing the Docking Stand (DS) service utilities on Windows 10 PCs, the
installer (setup.bat) needs to be executed via the 114Y2312002A05 attached to this
ECN. This describes the installation procedures.
NOTE
In 64-bit computer environments, use the installer via 114Y2312002A05. If the previous
1200_700204E.ai installer and the setup.exe are used in conjunction with the DS service utilities that
normally are no longer functioning, the DS Ready LED lighting-up will no longer
(2) Connect the power cable to the DS, and set the power switch to the normally operate.
ON position.
REFERENCE
(1) Double-click “setup.bat” inside of 114Y2312002A05.
If the DS power switch is set to the ON position, the Ready LED (green) might
#1 Double-click: “setup.bat”
momentarily light up, however there are no problems with the operations or
functions.
#1
1200_700467.ai
The following window opens.
1200_700468.ai
(2) Press <1> key.

The “Welcome to the DockingStand Service Setup Wizard” window opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-51
(3) Click [Next]. (5) Click [Next] and start installation.
The “Select Installation Folder” window opens. #1 Click: [Next]
#1 Click: [Next]
#1
#1 1200_700471.ai
1200_700469.ai
(4) Click [Next].

The “Confirm Installation” window opens.
#1 Click: [Next]
1200_700472.ai
(6) Press <Enter> key.

The installation has been completed.
(7) Confirm that the following DLLs are installed in “C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DEMAGLib”
DEMAGCSL.dll
DEMAGMNT.dll
#1
1200_700470.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-52
 Checking the DS IP address (3) Click [Docking stand#1].
DS IP address is displayed.
(1) Select “FujiFilm” - “DockingStandService” from the [Start] menu. #1 Click: [Docking stand#1]
Docking Stand Service Utility window opens.
(2) Click [Address].

#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700212.ai
(4) Check the IP address and click [End].

#1 Check: IP address
1200_700211.ai #2 Click: [End]
#1
#2
1200_700213.ai
REFERENCE
Default IP address of the DS is set to ”192.168.0.55”.
018-230-07E
IN1-53
 Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS (3) Click [Selector#1] to [Selector#6] and check that the selector LED of
the DS is displayed.
(1) Click [LED/Sound test]. #1 Click: [Selector#1] to [Selector#6]
#1 Click: [LED/Sound test]
#1
#1
1200_700216.ai
1200_700214.ai
REFERENCE
(2) Click [Ready] and check that the Ready LED of the DS is displayed. - The default indication of the Selector#1 LED is as below.
#1 Click: [Ready]
1200_700251.ai
#1 - The default indication of the Selector#1 to #6 LED are as below.

#1: Pink
#2: Blue
#3: Lime Yellow
#4: Purple
#5: Orange
1200_700215.ai
#6: White
REFERENCE
The default indication of the Ready LED is as below.
1200_700251.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-54
(4) Click [Buzzer#1] and check that the DS buzzer sounds. (5) After checking the LED and the buzzer sound, click [End].
#1 Click: [Buzzer#1] #1 Click: [End]
#1
#1
1200_700217.ai
1200_700219.ai
REFERENCE
(6) Click [Shutdown].
- Buzzer ON/OFF of the DS can be set with the mute switch of the DS. In the
figure below, the switch is set to buzzer ON. If switching, change to mute. Docking Stand Service Utility window is closed.
#1 Click: [Shutdown]
#1
1200_700218.ai
- When the battery is fully charged, the DS buzzer will sound twice.
1200_700220.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-55
 Setting the LED brightness of the DS (3) Click [Docking stand#1].
If necessary, set the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED. DS LED brightness is displayed.
#1 Click: [Docking stand#1]
(1) Select “FujiFilm” - “DockingStandService” from the [Start] menu.
\
(2) Click [Luminance].

#1 Click: [Luminance]
#1
#1
1200_700222.ai
(4) Set the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED, and click
[Update].
Brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED have been changed.
1200_700221.ai #1 Input: 1 to 5
#2 Click: [Update]
REFERENCE
Set an integer of 1 to 5 for the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector
LED. The default value is “5” (the state with the highest brightness).
#1
#2
1200_700223.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-56
(5) Click [End].  Checking the DS firmware version
#1 Click: [End]

#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700224.ai
(6) Perform “ Checking the LED and buzzer sounds of the DS” and
check that the LED brightness has already been changed.
Docking Stand Service Utility window is closed.
1200_700211.ai
#1
1200_700220.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-57
(3) Click [Docking stand#1]. (5) Click [Shutdown].
The DS firmware version displays. The Docking Stand Service Utility window closes.
#1 Click: [Docking stand#1] #1 Click: [Shutdown]
#1
#1
1200_700212.ai 1200_700220.ai
(4) Check the firmware version and click [End]. (6) Check the file name in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD.
#1 Check: S/W Ver. The number between “cradle” and “.” of the file name means the firmware
#2 Click: [End] version.
(“16” in the image above)
If the firmware version differs from the number of S/W Ver. which has been
#1 checked in step 4, it is required to update the DS firmware version.
In that case, perform “Updating the DS firmware version”.
#2
1200_700253.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-58
 Updating the DS firmware version (5) When the confirmation window opnes, click [OK].
u NOTE u (6) Make sure the installation has completed and click [End].
#1 Check: update complete
Perform the procedure only when it is required to update the DS firmware version. #2 Click: [End]
(1) Copy the files in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD to the folder
below.
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\DEMAGLib\Firmware #1
REFERENCE
Since the file name in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD will be used during
the next procedure, take it down to another paper.
(2) Turn the DS power ON while pressing the DS reset switch. #2

The battery charge mark on the DS is blinking.
Reset switch
1200_700256.ai
(7) Restart the DS.

(8) Check the DS firmware version.
1200_700237.ai
{IN1:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address_ Checking the DS firmware version}
(3) Select “FujiFilm” - “FirmwareUpdate” from the [Start] menu.
The Docking Stand Firmware Update Utility window opens.
(4) Click [Browse] to specify the file name copied in step (1) and click
[Update].
#1 Click: [Browse]
#2 Click: [Update]
#1
#2
1200_700255.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-59
 Turning OFF the DS power  Setting the second DS IP address
(1) Set the DS main power switch to the OFF position. u NOTE u
If installing only one DS, this procedure is not necessary.
 Setting the DX console
Up to three DS’s can be installed.
(1) Turn ON the DX Console power. This procedure is an example of setting the second DS IP address.
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, (1) Remove the LAN cable and the power cable of the first DS.
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
(2) Connect the LAN cable and the power cable to the second DS, and set
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. the DS main power switch to the ON position.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.

#1 Click: [Address]
DXL04010001.ai
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item], select “CONFIG - SYSTEM CONFIG - 5.

CSL/IDT FUNCTION” and set “Yes” (Uses) to “Use Exposure Support
Device” of No.393. #1
REFERENCE
Setting whether or not to use the DS/indicator (exposure sub-function) with “Use
Exposure Support Device”.
1200_700211.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-60
(5) Click [Docking stand#2]. REFERENCE
#1 Click: [Docking stand#2] - If the IP address and port number of the DS have been already changed from
the default value, input the changed values.
- If the IP address and port number of the DS are lost, restore the IP address.
{IN:Appendix 4.3_Restoring the IP Address of the DS}
(7) Click [OK].

The system returns to the Docking Stand Service Utility window.
#1 Click: [OK]
#1
#1
1200_700225.ai 1200_700227.ai
(6) Input the default IP address and port number, and click [Addition]. (8) Click [End].
Overwrite the input items to the set value of DS#2 in the configuration file, and the #1 Click: [End]
confirmation window opens.
#1 Input: 192.168.0.55 (default IP address of DS)
#2 Input: 50000 (default port number of DS)
#3 Click: [Addition]
#1 #2
#1
#3
1200_700228.ai
1200_700226.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-61
(9) Click [Shutdown]. (11) Click [Address].
Docking Stand Service Utility window is closed. #1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700211.ai
1200_700220.ai
REFERENCE
(12) Click [Docking stand#2].
Since the Docking Stand Service Utility re-reads the configuration file, it is #1 Click: [Docking stand#2]
necessary to restart the Docking Stand Service Utility. Restarting the DS is
unnecessary.

#1
1200_700229.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-62
(13) Input the IP address and port number of the second DS, and click (15) Click [End].
[Update]. #1 Click: [End]
Overwrite the input items to the set value of DS#2 in the configuration file and the
DS, and the confirmation window opens.
#1 Input: IP address (ex. : 192.168.0.56)
#2 Input: port number (ex. : 50001)
#3 Click: [Update]
#1 #2
#3 #1
1200_700232.ai

The “Docking Stand Service Utility” window closes.
1200_700230.ai
#1
u NOTE u
- Input the IP address and port No. different from those of the other DS.
- Set any of the following as the port No.
50000, 50001, 50002
(14) Click [OK].

The icon on the left side of [Docking stand#2] button is yellow.
#1 Click: [OK] 1200_700220.ai
(17) Restart the DS.

#1
1200_700231.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-63
(18) Select “FujiFilm” - “DockingStandService” from the [Start] menu. (21) Check that the IP address and port number have been changed, and
Docking Stand Service Utility window opens. click [End].
(19) Click [Address]. #2 Click: [End]
The icon on the left side of [Docking stand#2] button is blue.
#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
#2
1200_700234.ai
1200_700211.ai
u NOTE u
Continue to perform the following items for the second DS.
(20) Click [Docking stand#2]. -  Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS
DS IP address is displayed -  Setting the LED brightness of the DS (only if necessary)
#1 Click: [Docking stand#2] -  Checking the DS firmware version
-  Updating the DS firmware version (only if necessary)
-  Turning OFF the DS power
#1
1200_700233.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-64
9. Installing the PB 9.2 Connect the LAN Cable
CAUTION
9.1 Checking the Power Cable Exercise care not to stumble over the bundle of cables during installation.
WARNING one trips over all of them.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet before measuring a resistance value.
(1) Attach the LAN shield to the PB.
(1) Measure the resistance value of the power cable. #1 Tighten: Screws
(Reference value)
#1
E
E E E
L L N N 1200_700325.ai
N N L (2) Connect the LAN cable with two ferrite cores to the PB.
L
600_700005.ai
is continuity.
1200_700324.ai
u NOTE u
- Use the attached 2 m LAN cable for between the PB and the CL. If you use
an LAN cable longer than 2 m, use a HUB and the attached 2 m LAN cable
between the HUB and the PB.
- The LAN cable is equipped with two ferrite cores. Connect the LAN cable
connector on the side with the larger ferrite core to the PB.
018-230-07E
IN1-65
9.3 Installing the PB 9.3.2 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)
The PB can be installed in the following two ways: (1) Make two marks on the floor by an oil-based marker or a center punch.
{IN1:9.3.1_Installing on the Floor} pen, the center punch or the like.
{IN1:9.3.2_Fixing the Anchor (Optional)} u INSTRUCTIONS u
9.3.1 Installing on the Floor - When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum
(1) Place the PB on the floor. against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
(2) Connect the power cable to the PB.
u INSTRUCTION u
#1
1200_700007.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-66
(5) Remove the rubber feet from the bottom of the PB. (7) Put the protruding section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
#1 Remove: Screws (x4) bracket, and then position the PB with fixing bracket.
#1 (8) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts at two locations.
#2 Cover: caps (x2)
u INSTRUCTION u
Fix the PB using the two fixing holes on the front side of the PB.
#1
#2
1200_700326.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
Use the screws that has fixed the rubber feet for fixing the brackets.
1200_700343.ai
(6) Attach the brackets to the PB.

#1 Tighten: Screws (x4) (9) Connect the power cable to the PB
#1
1200_700327.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-67
10. Installing the SE  Preparation
(1) Apply the labels to the SE.
CAUTIONS
NOTE
- Do not connect the SE to the power supply unit other than the MP or the DS.
- The green label indicates the upward direction of the SE. Check with the
Otherwise, the connector might get damaged.
customer as to which location is to be used as the upper face before applying
- Exercise care not to drop the connector when connecting/disconnecting the the labels.
SE cable (SE-side). The connector might get damaged.
- The labels may not be pasted on the SE because the attaching surface is dirty
- Make sure that the MP power or the DS power is turned OFF before when applying the labels. In this case, clean the attaching surface with a cloth
connecting/disconnecting the SE cable (SE-side). moistened with ethanol etc.
NOTE #1 Apply: Green labels (two locations)

#2 Apply: Opposite side labels (two locations)
When the SE is mounted on the exposure stand, the SE cable sometimes interfere
with members of the exposure stand, depending on the specifications of the exposure
stand. If the SE cable interferes with the members of the exposure stand, the
interference can be avoided by changing the mounting orientation of the SE cable.
{IN:Appendix 3._Redirecting the SE Cable} #1
SE
#2
600_700146.ai
REFERENCE
The SE power is configured to be automatically turned OFF if an unregistered SE is 1200_700040.ai
connected. A new SE needs to be registered before connecting it.
018-230-07E
IN1-68
(2) Apply plug sheets (gray) or nonslip sheets (black) to the SE. REFERENCE
#1 Apply: Plug sheets or nonslip sheets When the customer demands, nonslip sheets (black) may be applied in the following
(1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE: 4 locations, 1213SE/1214SE: 3 locations) positions on the 1213SE/1214SE.
NOTE 160mm
Apply the plug sheets (gray) or nonslip sheets (black) only when the customer
demands. SE
- 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
SE
1200_700281.ai
100mm
#1
 Installation Procedures (for MP)

(1) Connect the SE cable (optional item or a jig) to the SE.
1200_700041.ai
#1 Connect: Cable connector
- 1213SE/1214SE #1
SE MP
#1
SE SE cable
1200_700062.ai
1200_700280.ai
(2) Mount the battery pack on the SE.

{Operation Manual}
(3) Turn ON the power of the MP.
018-230-07E
IN1-69
 Installation Procedures (for DS)  Installation Procedures (for using the SE cable without MP, DS
and PB)
(1) In case of transporting the SE data to the MC (ex. memory exposure
mode), connect the LAN cable for the SE with the DS. (1) Connect the control PC and AP to the HUB and then connect the SE
NOTE cable (optional item or a jig) between control PC and the SE.
The DS has two LAN ports. Connect the LAN cable to the port for the SE.
AP
For CSL-PC For SE PC
1200_700204E.ai
SE
REFERENCE
HUB
There are three ways to connect the LAN cable to the DS. Set the LAN cable with
reference to the following.
1. When DS communicates with DX Console:
Connect the LAN cable to the DX Console port.
2. When transport the SE data to the MC: 1270_700002.ai
Connect the LAN cable to the SE port.

3. When both 1 and 2 above are performed: (2) Mount the battery pack on the SE.
Connect the LAN cable to the the DX Console port and SE port. {Operation Manual}
If the LAN cable is not connected to the DX Console, then the Ready LED and
Selector LED of the DS do not functioned.
{IN1: 2.2.3_Network Configuration and Attachment Position for the Ferrite
Core}
(2) Mount the DS connection adapter to the SE.

{Operation Manual}
(4) Turn ON the power of the DS.
 Installation Procedures (for PB)

{Operation Manual}
018-230-07E
IN1-70
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the (3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power
NIC board to the DX Console is continuity.
NOTE measurement.
- The procedure depends on whether or not to use the MC in DR-ID 1200. Perform
either procedure of "11.1 Installing the MC" or "11.2 Mounting the NIC board to the 11.1.2 Connecting the Network Cables
DX Console". (1) Attach ferrite cores (FC1) to the LAN cables between the MC and the
- In case of the configuration installing the FUJIFILM-made AP, this procedure is not DX Console and between the MC and the MP, and then connect the
necessary.
LAN cables to the MC.
#1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MC and the DX Console)
11.1 Installing the MC #2 Connect: LAN cable (between the MC and the DX Console)
#3 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MC and the MP)
INSTRUCTION #4 Connect: LAN cable (between the MC and the MP)
If the MC is locally procured, carry out the following preparations. Manufacturer’s
- Mounting the network interface board Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position
part number
{IN:Appendix 2._Installing the MC Network Interface Board}
LAN cable (MC-side)
- Installing the MC application software FC1 E04SR200932 1 About 60 mm from the base
{MC:6.2_Preparing Before Installation} 1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
DX Console
11.1.1 Checking the Power Cable
MC MP
WARNING
(1) Connect the power cable to the MC, and set the power switch to the
ON position.
(Reference value) HUB
Terminal L to N L to E N to E #3#4
<For use in Japan> <For use in USA> <For use in Europe, etc> <For use in UK, etc> #1#2
1200_700042.ai
E
E E E
L L N N
N N L
L
600_700045.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-71
11.2 Mounting the NIC Board to the DX Console (3) Pull up the latch, and remove the slot bracket.
u INSTRUCTION u
11.2.1 Mounting the NIC Board Remove the slot bracket as indicated in the figure below.
CAUTION #1 Pull up: Latch

#2 Remove: Slot bracket
(1) Turn OFF the power and disconnect all of the cables.
#1 Pull: Lever
#2 Remove: Cover
#1 #2 #1
600_700103.ai
(4) Mount the network interface board.

(5) Lower the latch, and fix the network interface board.
(5)
#2
Cover
(4)
600_700104.ai
(6) Put on the cover removed in the procedure (2).

600_700102.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-72
11.2.2 Connecting the Network Cables  Installation Procedures (for DS)
 Installation Procedures (for MP) (1) Attach the ferrite cores (FC1, FC4, FC5) to both sides of the LAN cable
between the DS and the DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the
(1) Attach the ferrite core (FC1) to the LAN cable between the MP and the DX Console.
DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the DX Console. #1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the DS and the DX Console)
#1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MP and the DX Console) #2 1 coil: Ferrite cores (FC4x2: between the DS and the DX Console, and
#2 Connect: LAN cable (between the MP and the DX Console) between the DS and the HUB)
#3 Embed: Ferrite core (FC5: two LAN cables of the DS)
Manufacturer’s
Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position #4 Connect: LAN cables (between the DS and the DX Console, and between
part number
the DS and the HUB)
LAN cable (DX Console-
side) Manufacturer’s
FC1 E04SR200932 1 Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position
About 60 mm from the base part number
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
DX Console side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
About 60 mm from the base
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
MP LAN cable (DS-side)
1200_700199H.ai
instruction.
#1#2 LAN cable (DS-side)

FC5 TFT-102010N 0 Refer to the following
instruction.
1200_700199I.ai
HUB DX Console
#2#3#4
1200_700104.ai
#1#4
DS
1200_700240.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-73
INSTRUCTION  Installation Procedures (for PB)
Attach the ferrite cores of the DS-side as in the figure below.
(1) Attach the ferrite core (FC1) to the LAN cable between the PB and the
FC4 DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the DX Console.
#1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the PB and the DX Console)
#2 Connect: LAN cable (between the PB and the DX Console)
FC5 Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (DX Console-side)

1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
1200_700239.ai
NOTE
The DS has two LAN ports. Check the ports when connecting the LAN cable.
For CSL-PC For SE
1200_700204E.ai
REFERENCE
When connecting the LAN cable to the DS, set the network connection with
- If setting the network connection by connecting the LAN cable to the port for
the DX Console, the DS and the DX Console are synchronized, and the Ready
LED and the panel selection LED are lit.
- If setting the local network connection by connecting the LAN cable to the port
for the SE, it is possible to work the same (image acquisition etc.) as the SE
wired connection when the SE is mounted on the DS.
018-230-07E
IN1-74
12. Installing the Access Point (3) Set the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel to the same
network as the IP address of the access point.
Install the access point and set the wireless connection without encryption. IP address: 192.168.0.xxx
INSTRUCTION u NOTE u
Setting the MAC address filtering is performed in “14. Installing the RU Software”. Set the IP address other than “192.168.0.50”.
u NOTE u (4) Input the IP address for the access point via the browser and then
click [Cancel].
The procedure depends on the access point types.
Default IP address: 192.168.0.50
- DAP-1665 (Locally Procured Item)
{IN1:12.1_In Case of the D-Link}
- DAP-2553, DAP-2695 (Locally Procured Item)
{IN:Appendix 12._Installing the Access Point (DAP-2553, DAP-2695)}
- FUJIFILM-made AP
{IN1:12.2_In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP}
12.1 In Case of the D-Link

 Login 600_700285.ai
(1) Attach the antenna to the access point. u NOTE u

u NOTE u The IP address, login name and password to input are different according to the
access point types. Check the seal on the access point.
When using the 5 GHz channel, attach the antenna described as “5GHz”.
(5) Input the login name and password for the access point and then click
(2) Connect the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel with the [Log In].
access point via the LAN cable. Login name: admin
u NOTE u Password: None
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN1 port of the access point.
REFERENCE
Connect the PC with the LAN cable to set the AP.
You can connect the LAN cable with the DX Console if the DX Console is
available at a site where a new DX Console is to be installed.
600_700286.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-75
 LAN Port Settings  Login Password Settings
(1) Select “LAN SETUP” menu, change the following LAN port settings (1) Select “MAINTENANCE” menu, input the login password and then
and then click [Save Settings]. click [Save Settings].
Item Set value New Password: fuj1Film
My LAN Connection is Static IP Verify Password: fuj1Film
IP Address 192.168.0.25
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address *1 192.168.0.10
Primary DNS Server *2 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server *2 0.0.0.0
*1 Input the MC IP address.
*2 Since this cannot be set with a blank field, input “0.0.0.0”.
600_700286_2.ai
(2) Click [Reboot Later].
600_700288.ai
600_700287.ai
600_700288.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-76
 Wireless Settings l Login
REFERENCE (1) Input the login name and password for the access point and then click
[Log In].
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following. Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
{IN: Appendix 7_Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point}
u NOTE u
- Set the network name (SSID) that does not overlap with the surrounding.
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 600_700286.ai
u NOTE u
with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
detection.
communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
018-230-07E
IN1-77
l Wireless Settings (for using the 5 GHz) (3) Perform the 5 GHz wireless setting.
Item Set value
(1) Select “WIRELESS SETUP” menu and set the Wireless Mode.
5GHZ WIRELESS NETWORK SETTINGS:
Item Set value
Enable Wireless Checked
WIRELESS MODE:
Wireless Network Name *1 One of FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10,
Wireless Mode Access Point or set the unique SSID with Manual
802.11 Mode Mixed 802.11n and 802.11a
Wireless Channel *2 One of 1 CH to 165 CH
Enable Auto Channel Scan Unchecked
Channel Width 20 MHz or Auto 20/40 MHz
*1 Match the set value with the ESSID of the Edit Configuration. If the Network Name
1200_700357E.ai
is “Manual”, set a single-byte text string of 32 characters or less that is set with the
ESSID of the Edit Configuration.
(2) Disable the 2.4 GHz wireless setting. {MU1:1.3.3_Wireless Setting}
Item Set value *2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
2.4GHZ WIRELESS NETWORK SETTINGS: 11 CH can be selected.
Enable Wireless Unchecked Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected.
China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected.
When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
11 CH can be selected.
Other countries: Channels except 52CH to 165CH can be selected.
When the panels of DR-ID 600 series are used at the same time, only one of
channels 36 CH, 40 CH, 44 CH or 48 CH can be used.
1200_700358E.ai
1200_700359E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-78
(4) Set the stealth mode. (5) Encode the wireless communication.
u INSTRUCTION u u INSTRUCTION u
If only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this step is required. If only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this step is required.
If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, perform this If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, encryption is
step only when changing the wireless communication to the stealth mode since not allowed in China. Do not activate the encryption function with this step.
the DR-ID 600 series SE has the following limitations.
- If the SE is used with the wireless communication, turning on and off the power Item Set value
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication 5GHZ WIRELESS SECURITY SETTINGS:
between the SE and the AP and line disconnection will appear. Security Mode *1 WPA-Personal
If non-stealth wireless communication is used, the wireless communication WPA Mode WPA2 Only
automatically resumes between the SE and the AP when the power to the AP Cipher Type AES
is restored. This is how it normally operates.
Pre-Shared Key *2 Encryption password [default: fujiFilm34]
- On the other hand, if stealth wireless communication is used for the DR-ID 600
series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication
does not automatically resume between the DR-ID 600 series SE and the
AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to
the AP and communication line for the DR-ID 600 series SE is disconnected,
connect the SE cable and recognize the SE before use.
Item Set value
VIsibility Status Invisible
1200_700274_2.ai
*1 Set the ENCRYPTION in EDIT CONFIGURATION to “ON”.

*2 Match the passphrase with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting in EDIT ONFIGURATION.
{MU1:1.3.3_Wireless Setting}
1200_700360E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-79
l Wireless Settings (for using the 2.4 GHz) (2) Perform the 2.4 GHz wireless setting.
Item Set value
2.4GHZ WIRELESS NETWORK SETTINGS:
Item Set value
WIRELESS MODE:
802.11 Mode Mixed 802.11n and 802.11a
1200_700357E.ai
Enable Wireless Unchecked
*2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected.
1200_700363E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-80
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication 2.4 GHZ WIRELESS SECURITY SETTINGS:
series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication *1 Set the ENCRYPTION in EDIT CONFIGURATION to “ON”.
does not automatically resume between the DR-ID 600 series SE and the *2 Match the passphrase with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting in EDIT ONFIGURATION.
AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to {MU1:1.3.3_Wireless Setting}
Item Set value
1200_700274_3.ai
1200_700364E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-81
(5) Disable the 5 GHz wireless setting. l Saving the settings
Item Set value
(1) Click [Save Settings] on the top of the screen.
1200_700362E.ai
(2) Click [Reboot Now].
1200_700366E.ai
600_700291.ai
Restart the access point.
018-230-07E
IN1-82
 Confirming the MAC Address  Installing the Access Point
(1) Input the IP address, login name, and password for the access point (1) Fix the access point.
via the browser. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual of the purchased instrument for
IP address: 192.168.0.25 the way of fixing.
Login name: admin (2) Attach the ferrite core (FC3) to the AP-side of LAN cable between the
Password: fuj1Film MP and the AP, and connect the LAN cable to the AP.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (AP-side)
FC3 E04SR170730A 0 About 60 mm from the base
1200_700199C.ai of the cable
(3) Attach the ferrite core (FC7) to the AP-side of adapter cable between
the AC adapter and the AP, and connect the adapter cable to the AP.
Manufacturer’s
part number
600_700286.ai
Adapter cable (AP-side)

(2) Select “Status” menu and confirm the MAC address. FC7 TFT274015S 3 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
u NOTE u
1200_700199D.ai
The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT
CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not
enter the “:” (e.g.: b0c554bcbc69).
- For 5 GHz - For 2.4 GHz
600_700291_2.ai
(3) Disconnect the LAN cable from the maintenance PC and the access
point.
018-230-07E
IN1-83
 Confirming the Stealth Mode Settings
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform the following procedures only when changing the wireless communication to
the stealth mode.
(1) Start up the InSSIDer etc. and confirm that the stealth mode SSID is
invisible on the target channel.
REFERENCE
There is no problem if the SSID is “Unknown” or the target MAC address is
invisible.
1200_700309.ai
If the SSID is displayed, set the stealth mode again.
018-230-07E
IN1-84
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP (2) Connect the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC with a LAN and USB cable.
n Updating to Windows 10 Compatible Firmware

Firmware versions V1.4 or earlier FUJIFILM-made APs cannot perform USB
communications to Windows 10 PCs. #1
In order to connect to Windows 10 compatible PCs, the firmware needs to be updated
to V1.5 via a wired LAN cable.
#2
u INSTRUCTION u
Implement these procedures prior to installing the FUJIFILM-made AP RNDIS drivers.
1200_700443.ai
(1) Remove the LAN cable from the isolator. (3) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”.
#1 Right-click: menu
#2 Select: [Network Connections]
#2
#1
1200_700441.ai
#1
NOTE
When disconnecting the LAN cable from the isolator, push on the LAN connector
1200_700444E.ai
tab with a thin pointed object, and unplug the cable. (4) Right-click “Local Area Connection”, and select “Properties”.
#1
#2
1200_700442.ai
1200_700445E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-85
(5) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties]. (8) Since the following window is displayed, check that the firmware
version is “1.4” or earlier.
(6) Select the [Use the next IP address] radio button, and input the
following IP address, subnet mask, then click [OK].
#1 Select: Use the following IP address
#2 Input: IP address (192.168.0.11), Subnet mask (255.255.255.0)
#3 Click: [OK]
#1
#2
1200_700452E.ai
u NOTE u
#3
1200_700447E.ai If the firmware version is “1.5” or later, steps (9) to (12) are not necessary.
Proceed to step (13).
(7) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar
and press <Enter> key.
(9) Input the password for the access point and then click [Log In].
Password: fuj1Film (Default: fujifilm)
1200_700448E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-86
(10) Select “Firm update”. NOTE
Firmware updates take several minutes. Do not unplug the LAN – USB cables
while updating. If the cables are unplugged the FUJIFILM-made AP will be
damaged, and it will no longer be able to be restored.
1200_700450E.ai
(12) After the updates are completed, check that the firmware version
turned to “1.5.0”.
1200_700449E.ai
(11) Click [Browse], then click [Update] after having selected the
“853Y120001.bin” which is attached to ECN.
#1 Click: [Browse]
#2 Select: 853Y120001.bin
#3 Click: [Update]
1200_700451E.ai
(13) Disconnect the wired LAN cable from the FUJIFILM-made AP and PC.
#1#2
#3
1200_700449bE.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-87
l Restoring the IP Address (3) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
If “Automatically acquire IP address” had been set prior to changes being made, “Local
area connection” will revert to the original address. (4) Select “Obtain an IP address automatically”, and click [OK].
#1 Select: Obtain an IP address automatically
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”.
#2 Click: [OK]
#1
#2
#1
#2
1200_700444E.ai
1200_700466E.ai
(2) Right-click “Local Area Connection”, and select “Properties”.
1200_700445E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-88
 Preparations (3) Attach the ferrite cores (AFC4, AFC) to the both side of LAN cable
between the FUJIFILM-made AP and the isolator, and connect the
(1) Remove and dispose the factory management label on the FUJIFILM- FUJIFILM-made AP to the SE.
made AP. #1 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC4: FUJIFILM-made AP-side of the LAN cable)
#2 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC: Isolator-side of the LAN cable)
#3 Connect: LAN cable (between the FUJIFILM-made AP and the isolator)
#4 Connect: SE-LAN cable (between the isolator and the SE)
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (FUJIFILM-made

AP-side)
AFC4 E04SR200917 0
1200_700199G.ai of the cable
Factory management
label LAN cable (Isolator-side)
700_700076E.ai AFC E04SR130525A 0 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
(2) Attach the ferrite core (AFC1) to the both side of USB cable between
1200_700199F.ai
the DX console and the FUJIFILM-made AP, and connect the USB REFERENCE
cable.
#1 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC1 x2: between the DX Console and the FUJIFILM- When connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and the SE via a wired network,
made AP) connect the supplied isolator shown in the figure below.
#2 Connect: USB cable (between the DX Console and the FUJIFILM-made AP) SE DX Console
Manufacturer’s
part number FUJIFILM-made
Isolator
AP
USB cable (DX Console-side
and FUJIFILM-made AP-
AFC1 E04SR130525A 0 side)
1200_700199F.ai About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
NOTE
A USB cable is not supplied. Prepare the USB 2.0 cable which length is 50 cm or
less.Connector type for inserting into the FUJIFILM-made AP side is a Micro-B
type.
700_700074E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-89
(4) Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the PC or on the mobile. ● Installing on the PC
I. Stick the included Velcro tapes on the following two places of the
INSTRUCTION FUJIFILM-made AP.
- The FUJIFILM-made AP antenna is mounted on the LED surface. When If dirty, clean the FUJIFILM-made AP with a cloth moistened with ethanol
installing the FUJIFILM-made AP, install the LED surface towards the SE in etc.
consideration of the radio directivity shown below. Do not install the FUJIFILM-
made AP at where it is hidden by the Kangaroo box of the mobile etc.
Antenna position
1200_700288.ai
II. Stick the included Velcro tapes on the rear side of the PC display.
If dirty, clean the rear side of the PC display with a cloth moistened with
ethanol etc.
AP
1200_700287E.ai
- Install the FUJIFILM-made AP using Velcro tapes or clamps, etc. so that the
USB cable does not fall away from the PC and the FUJIFILM-made AP.
1200_700289.ai
1200_700291.ai
III. Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the rear side of the PC display.

Consider where it is to be installed so that operations are not impeded.
1200_700290.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-90
● Installing on the mobile n Installing the RNDIS driver
FUJIFILM-made AP. NOTE
If dirty, clean the FUJIFILM-made AP with a cloth moistened with ethanol After checking that the FUJIFILM-made AP Power LED lights up green, implement the
etc. following procedures.
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Device Manager”.
#2
1200_700288.ai
II. Stick the included Velcro tapes on the top surface of the mobile.
If dirty, clean the top surface of the mobile with a cloth moistened with
ethanol etc.
#1
1200_700453E.ai
The “Device Manager” window opens.
(2) Right-click “RNDIS/EthernetGadget”, and select “Update Driver

Software”.
1200_700292.ai
III. Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the top surface of the mobile.

1200_700293.ai
(5) Mount the battery pack on the SE. 1200_700454E.ai
The “Update Driver Software” window opens.

{Operation Manual}
018-230-07E
IN1-91
(3) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”. REFERENCE
In Windows 10 environments, since the drivers are inside the PCs, the RNDIS6 driver
disk is not required.
(5) Click “Network adapters”, and then [Next].
1200_700455E.ai
(4) Click “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”, and
click [Next].
1200_700457E.ai
(6) Select “Microsoft”, “USB RNDIS6 Adapter”, and click [Next].
1200_700456E.ai
1200_700458E.ai
The “Update Driver Warning” window opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-92
(7) Click [Yes]. (11) Right-click the button, and select “Network Connections”.
1200_700459E.ai
#2
The “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” window opens.
(8) Click [Close].
#1
1200_700444E.ai
The “Network Connections” window opens.
(12) Right-click “Local Area Connection”, and select “Properties”.
1200_700460E.ai
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window. 1200_700462E.ai
The “Local area connection Properties” window opens.

(9) Confirm that “USB RNDIS6 Adapter” appears in “Device Manager”.
1200_700461E.ai

The system returns to the desktop screen.
1200_700463E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-93
(14) Click the [Use the following IP address:] radio button, input the IP  Setting the AP Country Code
address and Subnet mask below, and click [OK].
The AP radio function is turned OFF at the factory.
- IP address: 192.168.0.10
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Be sure to set the AP country code in order to implement the
wireless connection.
and press the [Enter] key.
(2) When the following window appears, check that it is possible to enter
“fujifilm” into the password area and click [Login].
1200_700464.ai
(15) Close the “Network Connections” window.

700_700051E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-94
(3) Copy the zip file (AP_Countrycode.zip) supplied by ECN to the PC (DX (5) After the following window appears, press the <Enter> key.
Console) that the MC has been installed with and then unzip it in this
PC.
u INSTRUCTION u
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
properly if just the files in the unzipped folder are copied.
1200_700301.ai
Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC (DX Console) that the MC has been Setting of country code begins.
installed with and then unzip it in this PC. When the setting is complete, the command prompt is automatically terminated.
NOTE
REFERENCE
If the following window is displayed, perform step (1) again after confirming that
For outside Japan, the batch file for setting the country code is distributed by
the connection and the IP address are correct.
ECN.
ECN Country
2015-E-0203 USA
2015-E-0252 Canada
2015-E-0249 Europe
2015-E-0254 China 1200_700302.ai
2015-E-0266 Taiwan
2015-E-0270 Russia, Serbia
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, Nicaragua,
Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand,
Singapore, Vietnam, Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel,
2015-E-0271 Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea,
Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, the Dominican Republic,
Bangladesh, the Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El
Salvador, (Ecuador)
2015-E-0253 Indonesia
2015-E-0272 Qatar, Honduras
(4) Execute the batch file (region_set_to_xx.bat).
1200_700300.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-95
 Login - Display of the AP setting window for “Channel”, “Mac address” and “Transmit
power”
(1) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar Before setting: “--” is displayed.
and press the [Enter] key. After setting: The set value is displayed.
(2) When the following window appears, enter “fujifilm” into the password Before setting
area and click [Login].
700_700051E.ai
REFERENCE
After setting
The FUJIFILM-made AP situation and display of the AP setting window before
and after setting the country code is as follows.
- FUJIFILM-made AP
Before setting: AP WIRELESS LED is unlit.
After setting: AP WIRELESS LED is lit.
Before setting After setting
1200_700338E.ai
1200_700337E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-96
 Troubleshooting  Setting the Login Password
l Phenomena (1) Select “Password” from the “Detail Configuration” menu, input the
new password and click [Submit].
The AP country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
implemented, or all of the windows close. New Password: fuj1Film
Confirm New Password: fuj1Film
1200_700339.ai
l Probable cause
- There are files missing that are required for the batch file.
- AP IP address is not “192.168.0.25”.
l Countermeasure / Action 1200_700379E.ai
Unzip the zip file including the batch file again, check that the AP IP address is
“192.168.0.25”, and execute the batch file. (2) Select “Restart”.
1200_700380E.ai
(3) Click [Yes].
1200_700381E.ai
Restart the AP.
018-230-07E
IN1-97
 Wireless Settings  NOTE 
Do not change the settings except following items.
and press the [Enter] key. Item Set value
(2) When the following window appears, enter “fuj1Film” into the Channel Bandwidth 20 MHz or 40 MHz
password area and click [Login]. Channel *1 One of 1 CH to 165 CH
One of FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10,
SSID *2
or set the unique SSID with Manual
Network Authentication OPEN
*1 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH
to 11 CH can be selected. In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP,
channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected.
China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected. When the
wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH can
be selected.
Korea: Do not select 48CH to 165CH for Radio Law compliance.
700_700051E.ai When the panels of DR-ID 600 series are used at the same time, only one of
(3) Select “General” from the “General Configuration” menu and make *2 Do not set the SSID except FUJIAP01, FUJIAP02 or FUJIAP03. Match the set value
settings of the access point as necessary. with the ESSID of the Edit Configuration.
REFERENCE
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently
used can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
700_700053E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-98
u NOTE u (4) Set the stealth mode.
- In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44, u INSTRUCTION u
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 If only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this step is required.
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors. If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, perform this
- In accordance with the Radio Law of Egypt, the dual channel cannot be used step only when changing the wireless communication to the stealth mode since
outdoors. the DR-ID 600 series SE has the following limitations.
- When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel - If the SE is used with the wireless communication, turning on and off the power
Width”. Do not select 40 MHz. to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication
between the SE and the AP and line disconnection will appear.
If non-stealth wireless communication is used, the wireless communication
u NOTE u automatically resumes between the SE and the AP when the power to the AP
When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then is restored. This is how it normally operates.
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference - On the other hand, if stealth wireless communication is used for the DR-ID 600
with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection). series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication
- In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication does not automatically resume between the DR-ID 600 series SE and the
with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to
detection. the AP and communication line for the DR-ID 600 series SE is disconnected,
- If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless connect the SE cable and recognize the SE before use.
Item Set value
again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless Stealth Mode ENABLE
search operation.
The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for
checking. For the procedure for checking the log, refer to the following.
1200_700306E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-99
(5) Encode the wireless communication.  Saving the Settings
u INSTRUCTION u CAUTION
If only using the DR-ID 1200 series SE, this step is required.
- If you skip this operation, all of the settings are not changed from the default.
If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, encryption is
not allowed in China. Do not activate the encryption function with this step. - Click [submit] promptly after make settings. If it takes five minutes or more
for changing the settings, the system returns to the login window.
Item Set value
Network Authentication (1) Click [Submit] and select “Restart”.
WPA2-PSK
*1
AES
Encryption Mode When the network authentication is OPEN, this item is not
displayed and the setting is not required.
Pre-Shared Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34]
700_700055E.ai
(2) Click [Yes].
1200_700304E.ai
700_700056E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-100
The following window which has been restarting the access point opens.  Confirming the MAC Address
NOTES
- The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT
CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not enter
the “:” (e.g.: 1cbdb98a00dc).
- For the SE to discriminate the access points correctly, the BSSID settings is required
even though there are more than one access points nearby, and there are same
ESSID within the access point.
(1) Select “System” from the “Status” menu and confirm the MAC
address.
700_700064E.ai
(3) Return to the login window and confirm that the modified items are
reflected.
REFERENCE
If the following window opens, click the update button after about 20 seconds,
and confirm that the login window opens.
700_700054E.ai
700_700065E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-101
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform the following procedures only when changing the wireless communication to
the stealth mode.
REFERENCE
invisible.
1200_700309.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-102
13. Installing the DX Console n Wake on LAN
The machine is equipped with the Wake on LAN function which automatically boots up
upon startup of the CL.
n Installing the DX Console Refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual for the setting method.
Refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual. Refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
NOTE REFERENCE
- After attaching the following ferrite cores (FC1), connect the cables. The MAC address of the MC is required during the setting operation on the CL. The
MAC address of the MC appears by selecting “Network Address” in the “MUTL”.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable between the MP

or MC and the DX Console
FC1 E04SR200932 1 (DX Console-side)
1200_700199B.ai Within 60 mm from the base
of the cable
LAN cable between the

hospital LAN and the DX
FC1 E04SR200932 1 Console (DX Console-side)
1200_700199B.ai
Within 60 mm from the base
of the cable
USB cable of the keyboard

(DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 2
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the mouse (DX
Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 2
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the card reader
(DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the barcode
reader (DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
- When using the HUB for connecting the LAN cable, refer to the below and embed
the ferrite core (FC3) into the HUB-side of LAN cable.
Core}
- Be sure to make [Device Color] set in [IIP Service Utility] – [Device Setting] coincide
with the LED color set to the SE.
018-230-07E
IN1-103
14. Installing the RU Software 14.1 In Case of the Configuration Installing the
Describe the following two procedures.
MC Application in the DX Console
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console n Flow of the Installation Procedures of the RU Software
START
NOTE
- “In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console”, the 14.1.1 Network Settings
installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP is included.
- Install the RU software programs after the DX Console setting is complete. 14.1.2 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool
- The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows. 14.1.3 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool
Item IP address
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10 14.1.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device
MP1 192.168.0.20
MP2 192.168.0.21 14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version
AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30 14.1.6 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs
SE1 WIRELESS 192.168.0.40
SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31 14.1.7 Configuration Settings
14.1.8 Setting the DX Console
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
SE3 WIRELESS 192.168.0.42 14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33
SE4 WIRELESS 192.168.0.43 14.1.10 Changing the SE Country Code
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34
SE5 WIRELESS 192.168.0.44 14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE
- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to
cause the IP addresses to duplicate. 14.1.12 Updating SE Application Software Version
14.1.13 Setting the SE LED Color
14.1.14 Installing the Machine-Specific Data
14.1.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the FTP Server
14.1.16 Checking the MC_ID_MODE
14.1.17 Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)
END
018-230-07E
IN1-104
14.1.1 Network Settings (2) Click [Network and Sharing Center].
The procedure depends on whether the FUJIFILM-made AP is installed or not. The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
- Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP #1 Click: [Network and Sharing Center]
{n For desktop PC configuration}
#1
- Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP
{n For mobile configuration (FUJIFILM-made AP)}
n For desktop PC configuration

l Installing the NIC
(1) Installing the network interface board in the CSL-PC.
l Setting the NIC

(1) Right-click the button, and select “Control Panel”. 1200_700399E.ai
#1 Right-click: menu (3) Click [Change adapter settings].

#2 Select: [Control Panel] The Network Connections window opens.
#1 Click: [Change adapter settings]
#1
#2
#1
1200_700398E.ai
The All Control Panel Items window opens.

1200_700400E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-105
(4) Rename “Ethernet” to “Eth0”, and “Ethernet 2” to “Eth1”. (6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens.
u NOTE u
#1 Select: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
Be sure to rename the Eth0/Eth1. #2 Click: [Properties]
Otherwise, errors may occur, for example, software update.
#1 Rename: “Ethernet” to “Eth0”

#2 Rename: “Ethernet 2” to “Eth1”
#1 #2
#1
#2
1200_700402E.ai
(7) Click the [Use the following IP address:] radio button, and then input
the IP address below.
1200_700401E.ai
(5) Select “Eth1”, and then select [Properties] from the right-click menu. - IP address: 192.168.0.10
The Network Properties dialog opens. - Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
#2 Input: IP address, Subnet mask
#1
#2
1200_700403E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-106
(8) Click [OK]. (10) Click [←].
Return to the Network Properties dialog. Return to the Network and Sharing Center window.
#1 Click: [OK] #1 Click: [←]
#1
1200_700406E.ai
(11) Confirm that “Eth0” and “Eth1” have appeared at “Connections:”, and
then click [←].
#1 Return to the All Control Panel Items window.
#1 Verify: Eth0 and Eth1
#2 Click: [←]
1200_700404E.ai
#2
(9) Click [Close].
Return to the Network Connections window.
#1 Click: [Close]
#1
1200_700407E.ai
#1
1200_700405E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-107
l Enable Telnet Client (3) Place a checkmark to “Telnet Client”, then click [OK].
Return to the Programs and Features window.
(1) Click [Programs and Features]. #1 Check ON: “Telnet Client”
The Programs and Features window opens. #2 Click: [OK]
#1 Click: [Programs and Features]
#1
#1
1200_700408E.ai
(2) Click [Turn Windows features on or off]. #2 1200_700410E.ai
The Windows Features window opens.

#1 Click: [Turn Windows features on or off] REFERENCE
For Windows 7, place a checkmark to the check-box of “Telnet Server”.
#1
1200_700409E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-108
l Setting the Firewall (4) Select [Inbound Rules].
#1 Select: Inbound Rules
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Control Panel”.
#1 Right-click: button #1
#2 Select: [Control Panel]
#2
#1 1200_700474E.ai
(5) Right-click [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] and select
1200_700398E.ai “Enable Rule”.
The All Control Panel Items window opens. The “Enabled” of [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] changes to “Yes”.
#1 Right-click: FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)
(2) Click [Windows Firewall]. #2 Click: Enable Rule
The Windows Firewall window opens.
(3) Select [Advanced settings].

The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.
#1 Select: Advanced settings #1
#2
#1
1200_700475E.ai
1200_700473E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-109
(6) Select [Exit] from [File] menu. n For mobile configuration (FUJIFILM-made AP)
The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
#1 Click: [File] menu l Confirming the driver
#2 Click: Exit
#1 (1) Right-click the button, select [Device Manager] and confirm that
#2
the RNDIS driver (Remote NDIS6 based Device) is installed as the
network adapter.
1200_700476E.ai
(7) Close the Windows Firewall window.

u INSTRUCTION u
Follow the procedures below after setting the NIC/Telnet.
{IN1:14.1.2_Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool}
1200_700477.ai
NOTE
When using Windows 10, check that the firmware version is “15”.
{IN1:12.2_In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP}
018-230-07E
IN1-110
l Setting the IP address (4) Change the adapter name of the local area connection, enable/disable,
and the IP address as shown in the following table.
Setting the IP address.
Wired local area Wireless Remote NDIS6based
network network network
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Control Panel”. Pattern 1:
#1 Right-click: button Eth2 disabled
In case of a wired Eth0 Eth1
(automatic
#2 Select: [Control Panel] connection with the hospital (172.16.1.20) acquisition)
(192.168.0.10)
network
Pattern 2:
Eth2 disabled
In case of a wireless Eth0 Eth1
(automatic
#2 connection with the hospital acquisition) (172.16.1.20) (192.168.0.10)
network
#1
REFERENCE
1200_700398E.ai
Following figure shows an example when connecting the hospital LAN via the
The All Control Panel Items window opens. wireless network (pattern 2).
(2) Click [Network and Sharing Center].

The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
(3) Confirm that “Unidentified network” is set to “Public network” and
select “Change adapter settings”.
The “Network Connections” window opens. 1200_700481.ai
(5) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Properties”.

The “Eth1 Properties” window opens.
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-111
(7) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings. l Setting the network priority
 INSTRUCTIONS 
If Windows 10 is being used as the OS, this procedure is not necessary.
(1) Select “Advanced Settings” from the [Advanced] menu.

REFERENCE
I. When the menu bar is not displayed, press <Alt> key.
II.
III.
The “Advanced Settings” window opens.
1200_700440.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 192.168.0.10) (2) Set [Connections] and [Bindings for xxx] area (“xxx” is the connection
II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0) name) to be displayed in order from highest to lowest priority.
III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter) When changing the network priority, select the target protocol and click the up-arrow
button or down-arrow button.
NOTE
The SE cannot be connected if the IP address is not set at this procedure.
- In case of a wireless connection with the hospital network, set the network
priority in the following order.
(8) Click [OK]. Eth1 → Eth0 (Wireless) → Eth2 (Wired)
- In case of a wired connection with the hospital network, set the network priority
The system returns to the “Eth1 Properties” window.
in the following order.
(9) Click [Cancel]. Eth1 → Eth0 (Wired) → Eth2 (Wireless)
The system returns to the “Network Connections” window.
(3) Click [OK].

REFERENCE
- When the wireless networks of the CSL-PC connects the “FUJIAPxx” access
point, the connection must be cancelled. When the setting becomes “Auto
Connect”, select [Network and Internet] - [Manage wireless networks] and the
auto connection must be cancelled.
- Connecting the “Eth0” adapter to the hospital network via the wireless LAN is
confirmed.
018-230-07E
IN1-112
l Addition of components (4) Place a checkmark to the following items.
Installing additional Windows components. Server”
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Control Panel”. all of items under “Web Management Tools”
#1 Right-click: button - “Telnet Client”
#2
#1
1200_700398E.ai
(2) Click [Programs and Features].

The “Programs and Features” window opens.
(3) Select “Turn Windows features on or off”.
#1
1200_700478E.ai
REFERENCE
1200_700409E.ai

The “Windows Features” window opens. - “ ” indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
same time.
(5) Click [OK].

The installation processing starts.
Upon completion of installation, the system returns to the “Programs and Features”
window.
018-230-07E
IN1-113
l Setting the Firewall (4) Select [Inbound Rules].
(1) Right-click the button, and select “Control Panel”.
#1 Right-click: button #1
#2
#1 1200_700474E.ai
1200_700398E.ai “Enable Rule”.
The All Control Panel Items window opens. The “Enabled” of [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] changes to “Yes”.
(2) Click [Windows Firewall]. #2 Click: Enable Rule
(3) Select [Advanced settings].

The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens. #1
#2
#1 Select: Advanced settings
#1
1200_700475E.ai
1200_700473E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-114
(6) Select [Exit] from [File] menu.
The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
#1 Click: [File] menu
#2 Click: Exit
#1
#2
1200_700476E.ai

018-230-07E
IN1-115
14.1.2 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance (4) Click [INSTALL].
Tool A window for selecting the installation location opens.
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
n Installing the RU PC-TOOL Set Up PC-TOOL window
(1) Turn ON the power of the machine.

u INSTRUCTION u
When the CSL-PC power is turned ON for the first time, do so after one of two
SE’s, if connected, is removed. #1
This is because the default IP address (IP address when shipped out from the
factory) which is registered in the SE is the same (192.168.0.30) for all SE’s.
If two SE’s are connected therefore, the SE cannot be identified due to the Installation selection
duplicate address, resulting in an error. window
REFERENCES
If the Wake on LAN setting is not completed, turn ON the power in the following
order: 1200_700412.ai
(1) Turn ON the MP power.

(2) Turn ON the CSL-PC power. (5) Check that the installation location is “For FTP-Server”, and click [SET].
RU PC-TOOL Setup start window (wizard window) opens.
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, #1 Verify: For FTP-Server
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. #2 Click: [SET]
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. Installation selection window
#1
#2
RU PC-TOOL Setup start window

(wizard window)
DXL04010001.ai
(3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CSL-PC.
Upon inserting the install disk into the DVD drive, the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window
automatically starts.
1200_700413E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-116
(6) Click [Next]. (8) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [Next] #1 Click: [Finish]
#1 #1
1200_700414.ai 1200_700416.ai
The window opens, prompting to start the installation (wizard window). The Command Prompt window opens. When the Command Prompt window opens,
press any key on the keyboard.
(7) Click [Install] and start installation.
The Command Prompt window opens three times.
#1 Click: [Install]
#1
1200_700415.ai
Upon completion of the installation, the RU PC-TOOL Set Up window (wizard

window) opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-117
n Install the MC application (5) Input the following values as the “Network Configuration” setting.
- For MC-less configurations: 1
l Install the MC application
(1) Insert the application disk into the DVD drive of the CSL-PC.

(3) Select “.\install\local\Install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and

then click [EXECUTE]. 1200_700419.ai
#1 Select: .\install\local\Install.bat The following window opens.

#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
1200_700420.ai
#1
(6) Press <Y> key.
#2 The “Maintenance mode” window opens.
1200_700417.ai
1200_700418.ai
(4) Press <Y> key.
018-230-07E
IN1-118
(7) Select “Repair” and click [Next]. (9) Click [Next].
#1 Select: “Repair”
#2 Click: [Next]
#1
#2 1200_700423.ai
1200_700421.ai The “License Agreement” window opens.

The “Setup Complete” window opens. (10) Click [I Agree].
(8) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [Finish]
#1 1200_700424.ai
1200_700422.ai The “Installation options” window opens.

When the Installation is completed, the “WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window
opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-119
(11) Confirm that the “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time” (13) Press <Enter> key.
check box is checked, and then click [Install]. The installation has been completed.
(14) Restart the PC.
(15) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,

The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
DXL04010001.ai
1200_700425.ai
The “Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens. (16) Check that the MC Manager icon has appeared on the task tray.
(12) Click [Finish]. l Registering to the MC Manager start menu

(1) Right-click I:/MC/MCManager.exe, and select “Pin to Start”.
1400_700020E.ai
The MC Manager is pinned to the start menu.

1200_700426.ai
After the Installation is completed, the following window opens.
1200_700427.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-120
l Setup the MC application u NOTE u
(1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer. - If the MC could not be connected to due to the mistaken inputting of the IP
address, a connection error occurs. After checking the connection status, re-
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window appear. execute the version upgrade.
#1 Select: .\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE] 1200_700430.ai
Set Up PC-TOOL window - If the MC application was not factory-installed, and if the model media being
Confirm the MC application installation status and the media model information,
￥
and re-execute the version upgrade.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the RU registration has been already completed, steps 4 and 5 are not
necessary. Proceed to step 6.
#1
(4) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window
#2 opens. Click [OK].
#1 Click: [OK]
1200_700428.ai
(3) Input the target MC IP address and click [Connect]. #1

#1 Input: MC IP address (for MC-less configuration “127.0.0.1”) 1200_700431.ai
#2 Click: [Connect]
(5) Input the RU NAMEand click [Register].
#1 Input: RU NAME
#2 Click: [Register]
#1 #1
#2
#2
1200_700432.ai
The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear.
1200_700429.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-121
(6) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media (11) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade]. sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
#1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
#2 Click: [Upgrade] Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
#1
#2 DXL04010001.ai
1200_700433.ai NOTE
(7) Click [Yes]. If any error occurs during installation, reinstall the MC application after uninstalling it.
#1 Click: [Yes] Follow the procedures below to uninstall the MC application.
1. Insert the install disk into the DVD drive.
2. Select “.\Initial\apl_initial\uninstall.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” pull-down
menu, and then click [EXECUTE].
#1
1200_700434.ai
3. Click [OK].
The following window opens during the version-update.
1200_700435.ai

#1 Click: [OK]
#1
1200_700436.ai
(9) Remove the disk from the DVD drive.
018-230-07E
IN1-122
n Installing the DR Web Maintenance Tool (3) Press <1> key.
(1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the application disk drive on the My
Computer.
(2) Select “.\install\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and

then click [EXECUTE].
#1 Select: .\install\DRWM\Setup.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
Set Up PC-TOOL window 1200_700484.ai
(4) Press <Y> key.
(5) Press <Enter> key.
#1
1200_700482.ai
1200_700483.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-123
n Unlocking the DR Web Maintenance Tool’s Security Lock REFERENCES
In order to use DR Web Maintenance Tool, the security lock needs to be unlocked. Procedures (2) to (3) are procedures that registered homepage above address.
NOTE
(2) Click on the upper right side of the window, and click [Internet
An unlocking key file (PCToolSecKey.key) until June 30, 2017 is supplied inside the options].
application disk.
Subsequent valid files are distributed via ECN every year around April.
u INSTRUCTION u
Check that connecting the Network Cables and Network Settings before starting DR
Web Maintenance Tool.
When the mobile configuration, Check the FUJIFILM-made AP will be connected.
{IN1:14.1.1_Network Settings}
1200_700565E.ai
(1) Open Internet Explorer, enter the following address into the address
bar and press the [Enter] key.
The following window is displayed.
1200_700486E.ai
1200_700566E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-124
(4) Click the [Browse] in the DR Web Maintenance Tool, select the 14.1.3 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool
“PCToolSecKey.key” in the application disk of top directory, and click
[Open]. (1) Open the Internet Explorer.
DR Web Maintenance Tool starts.
(2) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the window.
1200_700487E.ai
(5) Click [OK].

1200_700564E.ai
NOTE
Perform the subsequent proceduese according to the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
REFERENCES
When the DR Web Maintenance Tool is restarted, open the Internet Explorer
1200_700488E.ai again.
Security Lock is canceled.
(6) Click [OK].
1200_700489E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-125
14.1.4 Preparation before Setting DR Device ■ Checking the Network Settings
■ Checking the access point (1) Check that there is no problem in MC application and Network Settings.
(1) When the SE radio function is used, check that the access point has
been set.
{IN1:12._Installing the Access Point}
(2) Click [Next].
1200_700490E.ai
1200_700491E.ai
(2) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-126
14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version n Updating MP Application Software Version
NOTE NOTE
In the case of the configuration not including MP, this procedure is not necessary. Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
software is necessary.
n Checking the MP Application Software Version
(1) Make sure that the install disk is inserted in the DVD drive of the CL.
(1) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET]. (2) Click [INSTALL].
REFERENCES
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, the
[INSTALL] cannot be clicked.
1200_700492E.ai
The MP Application Software Version appears.

INSTRUCTION
1200_700493E.ai
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the The MP Application Software Version has been updated.
[Next] to go to the following procedure.
NOTE
{IN1:14.1.6_Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs}
If the MP application failed in upgrading the version, restart the MP and retry from
connection check.
(3) Check that the installation is completed, and restart the MP.
(4) Check the MP application software version.

{IN1:14.1.5_Updating MP Application Software Version_n Checking the MP
Application Software Version}
018-230-07E
IN1-127
14.1.6 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs (4) Input “192.168.0.21” as the IP address in the “Updated Value” of the IP
address, and click [SET].
n Changing the second MP IP address
(1) Turn OFF the power of the first MP.
(2) Turn ON the power of the second MP.
(3) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
1200_700542E.ai
MP address has been updated.
(5) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON.
(6) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
1200_700543E.ai
and then start the MC Manager from “Start menu”.
018-230-07E
IN1-128
(7) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web ■ Changing the MP IP address information
Maintenance Tool, click [GET] in the “MP Network Setting”, confirm
This procedure is executed only when the MC application is V15.2 or V15.3.
that the “Current Value” of the IP address has been changed, and
restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool. (1) Turn ON the power of both MPs.
(2) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web
Maintenance Tool, and then click “CONFIG SETTING”-“MC Setting”.
1200_700567E.ai
(3) Set “NUM OF MP” to “2” , and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
1200_700545E.ai
REFERENCE Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray,
To restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool, once close and reopen Internet
Explorer.
(8) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-129
(5) Click “UTILITY” - “Replace MP”. (9) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “MP Network Setting”.
(6) Input the following values in the “MC MP Network Setting”, then click (10) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
[SET] at the bottom of the window.
- “Updated Value” of “MP1 IP Address”: 20 (11) Input “20” in the “Updated Value” for the “IP Address”, then click
- “Updated Value” of “MP2 IP Address”: 21 “SET”.
1200_700568E.ai
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, 1200_700569E.ai

018-230-07E
IN1-130
14.1.7 Configuration Settings
(1) Make configuration settings, then click [SET] at the bottom of the
window.
{MU1:1._DR Web Maintenance Tool}
1200_700495E.ai
(2) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-131
14.1.8 Setting the DX Console (4) Input “FPD Device ID” and click [OK].
(1) Turn ON the DX Console power. NOTE

(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, - Be sure to set [FPD Device ID] set to coincide with [SE Serial ID] displayed in
the MUTL “Install SE Software >>” window.
{MU1:1.2.1_SE Registration/Deletion}
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. - Be sure to set [Device Color] in [IIP Service Utility] – [Device Setting] to
coincide with the LED color set to the SE.
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.

#1 Input: FPD Device ID
#2 Click: [OK]
DXL04010001.ai
Device Setting window
(3) Click [Device Setting] and click [Modify].

#1 Click: [Device Setting]
#2 Click: [Modify] #1
IIP Service Utility window
#1
#2
1200_700137.ai
#2
1200_700136.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-132
(5) Click [Selector Setting]. (8) Select “CONFIG - NETWORK CONFIG - ALL OTHER NODES” and click
#1 Click: [Selector Setting] [NEW].
IIP Service Utility window The New Node window opens.
#1 Select: ALL OTHER NODES
#1 #2 Click: [NEW]
Setup Configuration Item window
#1
#2
1200_700138.ai
(6) Set “Reader Type” and click [OK]. 1200_700140.ai
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window. (9) Make the following settings and click [OK].
#1 Set: Reader Type
#2 Click: [OK] NOTE
Selector Setting window The IP address to be entered in “IP Address” depends on the installation
destination of the MC application.
- To install in the DX Console: 127.0.0.1
- To install in the MC: 172.16.1.10
#1
#1 Input: HostName and IP Address (127.0.0.1)
#2 Select: CU/MC
#3 Click: [OK]
New Node window
#3
#2 #1
1200_700139.ai
NOTE #2
Correspond with the Edit Configuration settings.
1200_700144.ai
(7) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
018-230-07E
IN1-133
NOTE 14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE
Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes. INSTRUCTION
As needed, click “SYSTEM CONFIG” – “99.CONFIG FIX” via the IIP Service Utility
window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize” values. If the - Take the procedures from “14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.2.12 Setting
setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.” error might be the SE LED Color” with connecting only one SE.
displayed. - For making the setting of the second SE, replace the SE after the setting of the first
For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC: SE is completed.
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”under “DR-ID 300CL Service
Manual”. NOTE
If two SE’s are connected, set the serial ID after one of them is removed. The default
(10) Restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool. IP address (IP address when shipped out from the factory) which is registered in the
SE is the same (192.168.0.30) for all SE’s. If two SE’s are connected therefore, the
REFERENCES SE cannot be identified due to the duplicate address, resulting in an error.
To restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool, once close and reopen Internet Explorer.
(1) Click [Add].
(11) Click [Next] on the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
1200_700496E.ai
1200_700497E.ai
The Panel Registration window opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-134
(2) Input the serial ID, and click [OK]. 14.1.10 Changing the SE Country Code
NOTE
Be sure to perform this procedure in order to observe the Radio Law.
The SE communication function is turned OFF at the factory.

1200_400055E.ai
The SE country code needs to be set in order to use the SE.
u NOTE u n Preparation
(1) Copy the zip file (SE_Countrycode.zip) supplied by ECN to the PC that
REFERENCE
the MC has been installed with and then unzip it in this PC.
The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD- u INSTRUCTION u
ROM. Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
(3) Confirm that the serial ID is displayed, then click [Next]. Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC that the MC has been installed with and
then unzip it in this PC.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the PC for DX
Console
Unzip the zip file on the PC for DX Console.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the PC for MC
Unzip the zip file on the PC for MC.
1200_700498E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-135
n Setting (3) Connect the SE with a wired connection.
Connect the SE with the SE cable for the MP or insert the SE into the
u INSTRUCTION u DS. For mobile, connect the cable to the SE and install the battery
Turn ON the power when changing the SE country code for only one SE.
pack into the SE.
u NOTE u
(1) Make configuration settings. When the following error appears, click [OK].
- ESSID: Follow the settings of installed facility
- CHANNEL & MODE: Follow the settings of installed facility
- BSSID: Follow the settings of installed facility
- ENCRYPTION: Follow the settings of installed facility
- WLAN OUTPUT: Do not change the default (ON)
- WLAN AUTO RATE: Do not change the default (VARIABLE)
- COUNTRY CODE: For the following countries, change it from the default value
(4036) to the country of usage
Country Setting value
China 156
Taiwan 158
Indonesia 360 800_700190.ai
Qatar, Honduras 634
(2) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”. (4) Close all unnecessary windows.
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start (5) Exceute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”. REFERENCE
The batch file for changing the SE country code is supplied by ECN.
The following command prompt is displayed automatically.
800_700191.ai
(6) When the following window opens, enter the IP address of SE and
click [OK].
800_700192.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-136
(7) When the following window opens, enter the IP address (default: Country Code
192.168.0.10) of PC that is connected to the SE and click [OK]. Japan 4015
USA, Canada 841
Europe 56
China 156
Taiwan 158
Russia, Serbia 643
1200_700303.ai
Indonesia 360
u NOTE u Qatar, Honduras 634
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela,
The command prompt completes automatically after several minutes if the IP Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand,
address for SE or PC that is connected with SE is different. Perform step (1) Hong Kong, India, Thailand, Singapore, Vietnam,
again after confirming that the IP addresses are correct. Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel, Saudi
Arabia, South Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South 392
Korea, Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala,
(8) Check that the following window is displayed. the Dominican Republic, Bangladesh, the
- A completion message is displayed Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait,
El Salvador, Ecuador
- The following code (differs from that entered in EDIT CONFIGURATION in step
1) is displayed Countries where wired-only SEs are used. 999
Perform step (5) again if the above window is not displayed.

(9) Close the command prompt.
(10) Restart the SE and check that the SE LED flashes and turn to lights up
(about 30 seconds).
(11) Restart the SE.
REFERENCE
After restarting the SE twice, the wireless output of the SE will turn to ON.
- After restarting the SE for the first time, the SE country code is enabled.
- After restarting the SE for the second time, the wireless setting is enabled and
the wireless output of the SE will turn ON.
800_700193.ai Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
018-230-07E
IN1-137
 Checking the Settings (3) Check that the correct country code has been set, and click [Next].
(1) Connect the MC PC and the SE with wired connection.
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box in DR Web
maintenance Tool, and click [GET].
1200_700500E.ai
u NOTE u
If the SE country code is wrong, set the SE country code again.
1200_700499E.ai
 Troubleshooting
l Phenomena
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
implemented, or all of the windows close.
- Wrong SE IP address
1200_700340.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-138
- Wrong MC IP address 14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE
Select the target SE, and set the IP address.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure that the number of the connected SE is one when setting the IP address of
SE. Because all the default IP addresses (when shipped out from the factory) are
the same each other, connecting multiple SEs in parallel causes “10214 IP address
multiple connection error”, resulting in system down.
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
1200_700341.ai
- Non-existent invisible files
1200_700501E.ai
The IP Address of the SE (wired/wireless) appears.

1200_700342.ai
l Countermeasure
Unzip the zip file including the batch file again, after checking the SE and MC IP
address and that communications between the MC and SE are established, and then
execute the batch file.
018-230-07E
IN1-139
(2) When changing, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]. (3) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
NOTE
The IP address of the SE, either the one for the wired mode or the one for the
wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE No.
SE No. IP address 1200_700503E.ai
Wired mode Wireless mode

1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40 (4) Click [GET], confirm that the IP address has been changed, and click
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41 [Next].
3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42
4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
1200_700505E.ai
1200_700502E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-140
14.1.12 Updating SE Application Software Version n Updating SE Application Software Version
n Checking the SE Application Software Version NOTE
Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the SE application
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET]. software is necessary.
(1) Click [INSTALL].
1200_700505E.ai
The software version of the SE appears.

1200_700506E.ai

The software version of the SE has been updated after update version.
INSTRUCTION
NOTE
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the
- If any error occurred during version upgrade of the SE application, restart the
SE and retry the version upgrade again.
{IN1:14.1.13_Setting the SE LED Color} - The version upgrade of SE application renews necessary software only. Wait a
while until a completion message appears.
018-230-07E
IN1-141
(2) Check that the installation is completed, click [OK], and restart the SE. 14.1.13 Setting the SE LED Color
1200_700507E.ai
(3) Click [GET], confirm that the SE application version has been updated,
and click [Next].
1200_700509E.ai
The SE color appears.

REFERENCE
The selector color is following 6 colors.
- White
- Pink
- Blue
- Lime Yellow
1200_700508E.ai
- Purple
- Orange
{IN:14.1.12_Updating SE Application Software Version_n Checking the SE
018-230-07E
IN1-142
(3) When changing the selector color, select it from the drop-down list (5) Click [GET], confirm that the SE color setting has been updated, and
box, and click [GET]. click [Next].
1200_700510E.ai 1200_700512E.ai
The selector color is registered.
(4) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
1200_700511E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-143
14.1.14 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (3) Click [Browse], and select all of the files inside the folders in the
“CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel, and inside the folders in the
u INSTRUCTION u “INDIVIDUALH” for the CsI panel from the DVD drives.
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to NOTE
each of them for installation.
If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct Folders cannot be specified as reference destinations. Therefore, open up
results cannot be obtained by calibration. the relevant folder, and specify all of the files inside of that folder.
(1) Insert the machine-specific data CD into the DVD drive of the CL.
(2) Click [Install] of the SE where you want to install the machine-specific
data.
1200_700544E.ai
1200_700514E.ai
IMAGE READING MODE

1200_700513E.ai
Panel type
High-Speed Mode Standard Mode
GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE) CORRECTH CORRECTS
CsI panel (1211SE, 1212SE,
INDIVIDUALH INDIVIDUALS
1213SE, 1214SE)
018-230-07E
IN1-144
NOTE (5) For forced transfer of SE correct data, then click [OK].
Select the folder corresponding with the IMAGE READING MODE settings in Edit
Configuration.
{MU1:1.3.2_RU Image Flag}
1200_700516E.ai
REFERENCE
SE correct data is forcibly transferred.
Select the “CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel or the “INDIVIDUALH” folder
for the CsI panel normally. NOTE
However, if in the acceptance check the noise was generated in the image
In case of correct data forced transfer failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. are used to expose, select the
connection confirmation again.
respective “CORRECTS” folder, or the “INDIVIDUALS” folder. For the procedure
for changing the folder selection, refer to “RU IMAGE FLAG window_IMAGE
READING MODE” of “MU1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION”.
(6) Click [OK].
(4) Click [OK].
1200_700517E.ai
(7) Click [Next].
1200_700515E.ai
(8) In order to confirm the transfer status of the SE correct data, select
the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
The Machine-Specific Data has been installed.
NOTE
In case of installing the machine-specific data failed, restart the SE and execute
from SE connection confirmation again.
NOTE
Steps (5) to (9) are for the GOS type of SEs (DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1202SE) only. Do
not perform the steps for other types.
For the CsI type of SE, go to step (10).
1200_700518E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-145
(9) Check that the transport status of SE correct data is “Completed”. (11) Click [Next].
(10) Backup the SE correct data.

I. Click [Backup], and backup the correct data.
1200_700519E.ai
(12) Remove the machine-specific data CD from the CL.
(13) If there are two or more SE’s, repeat the procedures (1) to (12).
1200_700557E.ai
REFERENCE (14) Complete the CL and confirm that the background calibration is
To back up correct data of multiple SEs together, click [Backup Package]. performed.
REFERENCE
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad. Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration
If the number is other than 150,8000: Restoration of the serial number is during the CL termination.
successful.
If the number is 150,8000: Compare with machine-specific CD and confirm
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the machine- NOTE
specific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the machine- In case of the background calibration failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
specific has failed, so install the machine-specific again. connection confirmation again.
018-230-07E
IN1-146
14.1.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the ■ Changing the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask
FTP Server
INSTRUCTION
NOTE - The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value
These procedures are only to be executed if the SE/MP/MC, and FTP server IP among the MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set,
addresses need to be changed from their defaults. the network among the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the
machines might be needed in such a case.
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting
NOTE
of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is
- The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows. 255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
Item IP address network address.
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10 The default value of the network address is “192.168.0”.
MP1 192.168.0.20 Segment No.
MP2 192.168.0.21
AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30
SE1 WIRELESS 192.168.0.40 192.168.0.0

SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31
SE2 WIRELESS 192.168.0.41 Network address
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
Host address
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33 600_700206.ai
SE4 WIRELESS 192.168.0.43 - If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34 of the access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If
SE5 WIRELESS 192.168.0.44 the network address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE
- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to cannot be made.
cause the IP addresses to duplicate. - To change the network address, execute SE, MP, DS, AP, MC in this order.
<Example>
The IP addresses duplicate if MC ETH0 is changed as follows when MC ETH1 is
192.168.0.10 (default value).
MC SubNetMask: 255.255.255.0
MC ETH0: 192.168.0.200
018-230-07E
IN1-147
(1) Change the Network Address Field and MC Subnet Mask of MC ETH 1 ■ Changing the SE Network Setting
Network (Local).
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box then click [GET],
confirm the address and click [SET].
1200_700520E.ai
1200_700521E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-148
(2) Click [OK]. ■ Changing the MP Network Setting
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box then click [GET], and
click [SET].
1200_700522E.ai
REFERENCE
Do not restart the SE for this step, but perform in the next step.
INSTRUCTION
- If the access point is going to be used, change the access point IP address
here.
- If the DS is going to be used, change the DS IP address here.
1200_700523E.ai
(2) Click [OK].

REFERENCE
Do not restart the MP and MC Manager for this step, but perform in the next step.
018-230-07E
IN1-149
■ Changing the MC Network Setting (3) Open the Internet Explorer, input “http://(Changed the IP address of
MC):19101/index.html” in the address bar and press the [Enter] key.
(1) Click [SET] of MC ETH1 Network Setting. DR Web Maintenance Tool starts.
(4) Select the “Changing the IP address SE/MP/MC“, confirm that the SE/
MP/MC IP address has been changed correctly.
INSTRUCTION
If the IP address of the MP or the SE is lost by mistake during the operation
procedures, restore the IP address.
{IN:Appendix 4._Restoring the IP Address of the MP/SE/DS}
(5) Restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool.

REFERENCE
In case of the DR Web Maintenance Tool restart, open the Internet Explorer
again.
1200_700525E.ai (6) Click [Next].

1200_700526E.ai
(2) Restart all of the SE/MP/MC.
018-230-07E
IN1-150
14.1.16 Checking the MC_ID_MODE (2) If “MC_ID_MODE” overlaps other MC, change “Updated Value” and
click [SET].
NOTE
Perform the following procedures only when connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and
sharing the SE with multiple MCs.
Make a note of the other MC “MC_ID_MODE” in advance, and check that it is not
duplicated.
REFERENCE
The “MC_ID_MODE” will be generated based upon the dates and times when
installed.
(1) Check “Current value”, and confirm that “MC_ID_MODE” is not

duplicated with other MCs.
1200_700529E.ai
1200_700528E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-151
14.1.17 Security Setting for Access Point (3) Click “ADVANCED” and “MAC ADDRESS FILTER”, and then select
(MAC Address Filtering) “Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the
network”.
<Optional Setting Item> #1 Click: ADVANCED
#2 Click: MAC ADDRESS FILTER
u INSTRUCTION u #3 Select: Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the
network
- Perform this procedure only when activating the MAC address filtering.
- Configure the SE and AP settings, and set the wireless connections in advance.
This section describes the procedures for the access points shown below. #1
- DAP-1665 #2
- FUJIFILM-made AP
NOTE
Refer to the following for in case of DAP-2553、DAP-2695(Locally Procured Item).
#3
{Appendix 12._Installing the Access Point (DAP-2553, DAP-2695)}
 DAP-1665 1200_700367E.ai
(1) Open Internet Explorer and enter the following URL to login.
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
(2) Input the login name, and password for the access point, and click [Log
In].
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
600_700286.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-152
(4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering, and  FUJIFILM-made AP
then click [Save setting].
#1 Check ON: Check box (1) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar
#2 Check: Client List and press the [Enter] key.
#3 Select: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering
#4 Click: [<<] (2) When the following window opens, enter “fuj1Film” into the password
#5 Check: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering is displayed area and click [Login].
#6 Click: [Save setting]
u NOTE u
- Check that the same number of lists appear as the SEs being connected when
selecting the “Client List” dropdown list.
- If there are two or more SEs, repeat #3 through #5 as many times as the
number of the SEs.
700_700051E.ai
#6 (3) Check the SE MAC address.

#1 #1 Click: Client information
#2#3 #2 Check: SE MAC addresses that connect with the access point are displayed
#3 Copy: Select the MAC address and press <Ctrl>+<C> to copy it
60:92:17:49:XX:XX 60:92:17:49:XX:XX
#4
#5
1200_700368E.ai
#1
#2
#3
600_700291.ai
1200_700371E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-153
(4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering. (5) Check that the following window is displayed and select “Restart”.
#1 Click: Wireless LAN
#2 Click: Security Configuration
#3 Select: ALLOW
#4 Paste: MAC address that is copied in step (3)
#5 Click: [Add]
#6 Check: Additional SE MAC address is displayed
#7 Click: [Submit]
u NOTE u
If there are two or more SEs, repeat #4 through #6 as many times as the number
of the SEs.
Be sure to input the MAC address in the form of “xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx”.
1200_700373E.ai
#2
(6) Click [Yes].
#1
#3
#6
#4
#5 1200_700374E.ai
#7 u INSTRUCTION u
1200_700372E.ai
When this procedure is completed, proceed to the following procedure.
018-230-07E
IN1-154
14.2 In case of the Configuration Installing the 14.2.1 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance
Tool
MC Application in the MC
n Flow of the Installation Procedures of the RU Software n Installing the RU PC-TOOL
START (1) Turn ON the power of the machine.
14.2.1 Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool u INSTRUCTION u

When the MC power is turned ON for the first time, do so after one of two SE’s, if
14.2.2 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool connected, is removed.
14.2.3 Preparation before Setting DR Device This is because the default IP address (IP address when shipped out from the
14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version If two SE’s are connected therefore, the SE cannot be identified due to the
duplicate address, resulting in an error, and causing the MC power to be turned
14.2.5 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs OFF. If the MC power is turned OFF for the mentioned reason, turn ON the MC
power after one of the two SE’s is removed.
REFERENCES
14.2.7 Setting the DX Console
- When the Wake on LAN setting is completed, the MC power is automatically
14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE turned ON when turning ON the CL power. Always keep the MP power switch
ON, however.
14.2.9 Changing the SE Country Code - If the Wake on LAN setting is not completed, turn ON the power in the following
order:
14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE (1) Turn ON the MP power.
14.2.11 Updating SE Application Software Version (2) Turn ON the CSL-PC power.
(3) Turn ON the MC power.
14.2.14 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the FTP

Server
14.2.15 Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)
END
018-230-07E
IN1-155
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, (5) Check that the installation location is “For FTP-Server”, and click [SET].
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. RU PC-TOOL Setup start window (wizard window) opens.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. #1 Verify: For FTP-Server
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. #2 Click: [SET]
Installation selection window
#1
#2
DXL04010001.ai
(3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CSL-PC. RU PC-TOOL Setup start window
Upon inserting the install disk into the DVD drive, the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window (wizard window)
A window for selecting the installation location opens.
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
1200_700413E.ai
#1
(6) Click [Next].
#1 Click: [Next]
Installation selection
window
1200_700412.ai
#1
1200_700414.ai
The window opens, prompting to start the installation (wizard window).
018-230-07E
IN1-156
(7) Click [Install] and start installation. n Install the MC application
#1 Click: [Install]
(1) Connect the jig drive (standard supply) to the CL and insert the
application disk into the drive.
#1
(3) Select “.\install\local\Install.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”, and then
click [EXECUTE].
#1 Select: .\install\local\Install.bat
1200_700415.ai

#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
window) opens.
(8) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [Finish]
#1
#1
#2
1200_700416.ai
The Command Prompt window opens. When the Command Prompt window opens,
press any key on the keyboard.
The Command Prompt window opens three times.
800_700208.ai
800_700209.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-157
(5) Input the following values as the “Network Configuration” setting. (7) Select “Repair” and click [Next].
- MC PC is 1 NIC configuration: 2 #1 Select: “Repair”
- MC PC is 2 NIC configuration: 3 #2 Click: [Next]
#1
800_700210.ai
#2
1200_700421.ai
The “Setup Complete” window opens.

(8) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [Finish]
800_700211.ai

The “Maintenance mode” window opens.
#1
1200_700422.ai
When the Installation is completed, the “WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window
opens.
018-230-07E
IN1-158
(9) Click [Next]. (11) Confirm that the “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time”
check box is checked, and then click [Install].
1200_700423.ai
The “License Agreement” window opens. 1200_700425.ai
(10) Click [I Agree]. The “Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens.
(12) Click [Finish].
1200_700424.ai

1200_700426.ai
After the Installation is completed, the following window opens.
1200_700427.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-159
(13) Press <Enter> key. l Setup the MC application
The installation has been completed.

#1 Select: .\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
#1
#2
1200_700428.ai
(3) Input the target MC IP address and click [Connect].

#1 Input: MC IP address (for MC-less configuration “127.0.0.1”)
#2 Click: [Connect]
#1
#2
1200_700429.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-160
u NOTE u (6) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media
version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade].
- If the MC could not be connected to due to the mistaken inputting of the IP
address, a connection error occurs. After checking the connection status, re- #1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device
execute the version upgrade. #2 Click: [Upgrade]
#1
1200_700430.ai
#2
￥
and re-execute the version upgrade. 1200_700433.ai
u INSTRUCTION u (7) Click [Yes].

#1 Click: [Yes]
(4) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window
opens. Click [OK]. #1
#1 Click: [OK] 1200_700434.ai
#1
1200_700431.ai 1200_700435.ai
(5) Input the RU NAMEand click [Register]. (8) Check that the installation is completed, and click [OK].
#1 Input: RU NAME #1 Click: [OK]
#1
#2
#1
1200_700432.ai 1200_700436.ai
The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear. The system returns to the desktop screen.
(9) Remove the disk from the DVD drive.
018-230-07E
IN1-161
(11) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, n Installing the DR Web Maintenance Tool
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. (1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the application disk drive on the My
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. Computer.
(2) Select “.\install\DRWM\Setup.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”, and

then click [EXECUTE].
#1 Select: .\install\DRWM\Setup.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
DXL04010001.ai Set Up PC-TOOL window
NOTE
If any error occurs during installation, reinstall the MC application after uninstalling it.
1. Insert the install disk into the DVD drive.
#1
3. Click [OK].
1200_700482.ai
1200_700483.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-162
(3) Press <1> key. n Unlocking the DR Web Maintenance Tool’s Security Lock
In order to use DR Web Maintenance Tool, the security lock needs to be unlocked.
NOTE
An unlocking key file (PCToolSecKey.key) until June 30, 2017 is supplied inside the
application disk.
u INSTRUCTION u
Check that connecting the Network Cables and Network Settings before starting DR
Web Maintenance Tool.
1200_700484.ai
(4) Press <Y> key.

(1) Open Internet Explorer, enter the following address into the address
(5) Press <Enter> key. bar and press the [Enter] key.
The following window is displayed.
1200_700486E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-163
REFERENCES (4) Click the [Browse] in the DR Web Maintenance Tool, select the
Procedures (2) to (3) are procedures that registered bookmark above address. “PCToolSecKey.key” in the application disk of top directory, and click
[Open].
(2) Click on the upper right side of the window, and click [Internet
options].
1200_700487E.ai
1200_700565E.ai
(5) Click [OK].
1200_700488E.ai
Security Lock is canceled.

(6) Click [OK].
1200_700489E.ai
1200_700566E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-164
14.2.2 Starting up the DR Web Maintenance Tool
(1) Open the Internet Explorer.
DR Web Maintenance Tool starts.
(2) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the window.
1200_700564E.ai
NOTE
Perform the subsequent proceduese according to the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
REFERENCES
When the DR Web Maintenance Tool is restarted, open the Internet Explorer
again.
018-230-07E
IN1-165
14.2.3 Preparation before Setting DR Device ■ Checking the Network Settings
■ Checking the access point (1) Check that there is no problem in MC application and Network
Settings.
(1) When the SE radio function is used, check that the access point
hasbeen set.
(2) Click [Next].
1200_700490E.ai
1200_700491E.ai
(2) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-166
14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version n Updating MP Application Software Version
NOTE NOTE
In the case of the configuration not including MP, this procedure is not necessary. Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
(1) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET]. (2) Click [INSTALL].
REFERENCES
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, the
[INSTALL] cannot be clicked.
1200_700492E.ai
The MP Application Software Version appears.

INSTRUCTION
1200_700493E.ai
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the The MP Application Software Version has been updated.
[Next] to go to the following procedure. NOTE
{IN1:14.2.5_Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs}
If the MP application failed in upgrading the version, restart the MP and retry from
connection check.
(3) Check that the installation is completed, and restart the MP.

018-230-07E
IN1-167
14.2.5 Changing the IP Address for Using Two MPs (4) Input “192.168.0.21” as the IP address in the “Updated Value” of the IP
address, and click [SET].
n Changing the second MP IP address
(1) Turn OFF the power of the first MP.
(2) Turn ON the power of the second MP.
(3) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
1200_700542E.ai
MP address has been updated.
(6) Select the “OPERATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web
Maintenance Tool , and then click “Utility”-“Exit the MC”.
1200_700543E.ai
When the Exit the MCwindow is displayed, click “Start” in “Restart MC”.
018-230-07E
IN1-168
(7) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web ■ Changing the MP IP address information
Maintenance Tool, click [GET] in the “MP Network Setting”, confirm
When the procedure is upgraded Software, only V15.2 and V15.3.
that the “Current Value” of the IP address has been changed, and
restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool. (1) Turn ON the power of both MPs.
(2) Select the “INSTALLATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web
Maintenance Tool, and then click “CONFIG SETTING”-“MC Setting”.
1200_700567E.ai
(3) Set “NUM OF MP” to “2”, and click [SET] at the bottom of the window.
1200_700545E.ai
(4) Click “UTILITY”-“Terminate MC”.
REFERENCES When the Terminate MC window is displayed, click “START” in “Reboot MC”.
To restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool, once close and reopen Internet
Explorer.
(8) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-169
(5) Click “UTILITY” - “Replace MP”. (9) Click “NETWORK SETTING” - “MP Network Setting”.
(6) Input the following values in the “MC MP Network Setting”, then click (10) Select “MP1” from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
[SET] at the bottom of the window.
- “Updated Value” of “MP1 IP Address”: 20 (11) Input “20” in the “Updated Value” for the “IP Address”, then click
- “Updated Value” of “MP2 IP Address”: 21 “SET”.
1200_700568E.ai

When the Terminate MC window is displayed, click “START” in “Reboot MC”. 1200_700569E.ai

When the Terminate MC window is displayed, click “START” in “Reboot MC”.
018-230-07E
IN1-170
(1) Make configuration settings, then click [SET] at the bottom of the
window.
{MU1:1._DR Web Maintenance Tool}
1200_700495E.ai
(2) Click [Next].
018-230-07E
IN1-171

{MU1:1.2.1_SE Registration/Deletion}

#2 Click: [OK]
DXL04010001.ai

#2 Click: [Modify] #1
#1
#2
1200_700137.ai
#2
1200_700136.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-172
#1 #2 Click: [NEW]
#1
#2
1200_700138.ai
#1 Set: Reader Type
#2 Click: [OK] NOTE
#1
#2 Select: CU/MC
#3 Click: [OK]
New Node window
#3
#2 #1
1200_700139.ai
NOTE #2
1200_700144.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-173
NOTE 14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE
Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes. INSTRUCTION
window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize” values. If the - Take the procedures from “14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.2.12 Setting
setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.” error might be the SE LED Color” with connecting only one SE.
displayed. - For making the setting of the second SE, replace the SE after the setting of the first
For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC: SE is completed.
Manual”. NOTE
If two SE’s are connected, set the serial ID after one of them is removed. The default
(10) Restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool. IP address (IP address when shipped out from the factory) which is registered in the
SE is the same (192.168.0.30) for all SE’s. If two SE’s are connected therefore, the
REFERENCES SE cannot be identified due to the duplicate address, resulting in an error, and causing
To restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool, once close and reopen Internet Explorer. the MC power to be turned OFF.
If the power to the MC is turned off due to the reason above, turn of the MC with
single SE connected.
(11) Click [Next] on the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
(1) Click [Add].
1200_700496E.ai
1200_700497E.ai
The Panel Registration window appears.
018-230-07E
IN1-174
(2) Input the serial ID, and click [OK]. 14.2.9 Changing the SE Country Code
NOTE

1200_400055E.ai
The SE country code needs to be set in order to use the SE.
u NOTE u n Preparation
REFERENCE
The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD- u INSTRUCTION u
ROM. Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
(3) Confirm that the serial ID is displayed, then click [Next]. Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC that the MC has been installed with and
Console
1200_700498E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-175
pack into the SE.
u NOTE u
(1) Make configuration settings. When the following error appears, click [OK].
China 156
Taiwan 158
Qatar, Honduras 634
(2) Select the “OPERATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web (4) Close all unnecessary windows.
Maintenance Tool , and then click “Utility”-“Exit the MC”. (5) Execute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
When the Exit the MCwindow is displayed, click “Start” in “Restart MC”. REFERENCE
800_700191.ai
click [OK].
800_700192.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-176
USA, Canada 841
Europe 56
China 156
Taiwan 158
Russia, Serbia 643
1200_700303.ai
Indonesia 360

(about 30 seconds).
REFERENCE
(12) Select the “OPERATION” at the upper left corner of the DR Web
800_700193.ai
Maintenance Tool , and then click “Utility”-“Exit the MC”.
When the Exit the MCwindow is displayed, click “Start” in “Restart MC”.
018-230-07E
IN1-177
 Checking the Settings (3) Check that the correct country code has been set, and click [Next].
(2) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box in DR Web
maintenance Tool, and click [GET].
1200_700500E.ai
u NOTE u
1200_700499E.ai
 Troubleshooting
l Phenomena
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
1200_700340.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-178
- Wrong MC IP address 14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE
Select the target SE, and set the IP address.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure that the number of the connected SE is one when setting the IP address of
SE. Because all the default IP addresses (when shipped out from the factory) are
the same each other, connecting multiple SEs in parallel causes “10214 IP address
multiple connection error”, resulting in system down.
1200_700341.ai
1200_700501E.ai
The IP Address of the SE (wired/wireless) appears.

1200_700342.ai
l Countermeasure
execute the batch file.
018-230-07E
IN1-179
(2) When changing, input the “Updated Value”, and click [SET]. (3) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
NOTE
wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE No.
SE No. IP address 1200_700503E.ai

1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40 (4) Click [GET], confirm that the IP address has been changed, and click
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41 [Next].
3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42
4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
1200_700505E.ai
1200_700502E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-180
14.2.11 Updating SE Application Software Version n Updating SE Application Software Version
n Checking the SE Application Software Version NOTE
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET]. software is necessary.
1200_700505E.ai
The software version of the SE appears.

1200_700506E.ai

The software version of the SE has been updated after update version.
INSTRUCTION
NOTE
If “Current Version” and “Updated Version” are identical with each other, click the
- If any error occurred during version upgrade of the SE application, restart the
SE and retry the version upgrade again.
{IN1:14.2.12_Setting the SE LED Color} - The version upgrade of SE application renews necessary software only. Wait a
while until a completion message appears.
018-230-07E
IN1-181
(2) Check that the installation is completed, click [OK], and restart the SE. 14.2.12 Setting the SE LED Color
1200_700507E.ai
(3) Click [GET], confirm that the SE application version has been updated,
and click [Next].
1200_700509E.ai
The SE color appears.

REFERENCE
The selector color is following 6 colors.
- White
- Pink
- Blue
- Lime Yellow
1200_700508E.ai
- Purple
- Orange
{IN1:14.2.11_Updating SE Application Software Version_n Checking the SE
018-230-07E
IN1-182
(3) When changing the selector color, select it from the drop-down list (5) Click [GET], confirm that the SE color setting has been updated, and
box, and click [GET]. click [Next].
1200_700510E.ai 1200_700512E.ai
The selector color is registered.
(4) Click [OK], and restart the SE.
1200_700511E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-183
14.2.13 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (3) Click [Browse], and select all of the files inside the folders in the
“CORRECTH” folder for the GOS panel, and inside the folders in the
u INSTRUCTION u “INDIVIDUALH” for the CsI panel from the DVD drives.
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to NOTE
each of them for installation.
If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct Folders cannot be specified as reference destinations. Therefore, open up
results cannot be obtained by calibration. the relevant folder, and specify all of the files inside of that folder.
(2) Click [Install] of the SE where you want to install the machine-specific
data.
1200_700544E.ai
1200_700514E.ai
IMAGE READING MODE

1200_700513E.ai
Panel type
1213SE, 1214SE)
018-230-07E
IN1-184
NOTE (5) For forced transfer of SE correct data, then click [OK].
Configuration.
1200_700516E.ai
REFERENCE
SE correct data is forcibly transferred.
for the CsI panel nomally. NOTE
In case of correct data forced transfer failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
connection confirmation again.
(6) Click [OK].
(4) Click [OK].
1200_700517E.ai
(7) Click [Next].
1200_700515E.ai
(8) In order to confirm the transfer status of the SE correct data, select
the target SE from the drop-down list box, and click [GET].
The Machine-Specific Data has been installed.
NOTE
In case of installing the machine-specific data failed, restart the SE and execute
from SE connection confirmation again.
NOTE
Steps (5) to (9) are for the GOS type of SEs (DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1202SE) only. Do
not perform the steps for other types.
For the CsI type of SE, go to step (10).
1200_700518E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-185
(9) Check that the transport status of SE correct data is “Completed”. (11) Click [Next].
(10) Backup the SE correct data.

I. Click [Backup], and backup the correct data.
1200_700519E.ai
(13) If there are two or more SE’s, repeat the procedures (1) to (12).
1200_700557E.ai
REFERENCE (14) Complete the CL and confirm that the background calibration is
To back up correct data of multiple SEs together, click [Backup Package]. performed.
REFERENCE
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad. Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration
If the number is other than 150,8000: Restoration of the serial number is during the CL termination.
successful.
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the machine- NOTE
specific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the machine- In case of the background calibration failed, restart the SE and execute from SE
specific has failed, so install the machine-specific again. connection confirmation again.
018-230-07E
IN1-186
14.2.14 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the ■ Changing the Network Address Field and the MC Subnet Mask
FTP Server
INSTRUCTION
NOTE - The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value among the
These procedures are only to be executed if the SE/MP/MC, and FTP server IP MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, the network among
addresses need to be changed from their defaults. the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the machines might be needed
in such a case.
NOTE of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is
- The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows. 255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
Item IP address network address.
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10 The default value of the network address is “192.168.0”.
MP1 192.168.0.20 Segment No.
MP2 192.168.0.21
AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30
SE1 WIRELESS 192.168.0.40 192.168.0.0
SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31
SE2 WIRELESS 192.168.0.41 Network address
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
Host address
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33 600_700206.ai
SE4 WIRELESS 192.168.0.43 - If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address of the
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34 access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network
SE5 WIRELESS 192.168.0.44 address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made.
- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to - To change the network address, execute SE, MP, DS, AP, MC in this order.
cause the IP addresses to duplicate.
<Example>
The IP addresses duplicate if MC ETH0 is changed as follows when MC ETH1 is
192.168.0.10 (default value).
MC ETH0: 192.168.0.200
018-230-07E
IN1-187
(1) Change the Network Address Field and MC Subnet Mask of MC ETH 1 ■ Changing the SE Network Setting
Network (Local).
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box then click [GET],
confirm the address and click [SET].
1200_700520E.ai
1200_700521E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-188
(2) Click [OK]. ■ Changing the MP Network Setting
(1) Select the target SE from the drop-down list box then click [GET], and
click [SET].
1200_700522E.ai
REFERENCE
Do not restart the SE for this step, but perform in the next step.
INSTRUCTION
- If the access point is going to be used, change the access point IP address
here.
- If the DS is going to be used, change the DS IP address here.
1200_700523E.ai
(2) Click [OK].
REFERENCE
Do not restart the MP and MC Manager for this step, but perform in the next step.
018-230-07E
IN1-189
■ Changing the MC Network Setting (3) Open the Internet Explorer, input “http://(Changed the IP address of
MC):19101/index.html” in the address bar and press the [Enter] key.
(1) Click [SET] of MC ETH1 Network Setting. DR Web Maintenance Tool starts.
(4) Select the “Changing the IP address SE/MP/MC“, confirm that the SE/
MP/MC IP address has been changed correctly.
INSTRUCTION
(5) Restart the DR Web Maintenance Tool.

REFERENCE
In case of the DR Web Maintenance Tool restart, open the Internet Explorer
again.
1200_700525E.ai (6) Click [Next].

1200_700526E.ai
(2) Restart all of the SE/MP/MC.
018-230-07E
IN1-190
14.2.15 Security Setting for Access Point (3) Click “ADVANCED” and “MAC ADDRESS FILTER”, and then select
(MAC Address Filtering) “Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the
network”.
network
- DAP-1665 #2
- FUJIFILM-made AP
NOTE
Refer to the following for in case of DAP-2553、DAP-2695(Locally Procured Item).
#3
{Appendix 12._Installing the Access Point (DAP-2553, DAP-2695)}
 DAP-1665 1200_700367E.ai
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
(2) Input the login name, and password for the access point, and click [Log
In].
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
600_700286.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-191
u NOTE u
number of the SEs.
700_700051E.ai

60:92:17:49:XX:XX 60:92:17:49:XX:XX
#4
#5
1200_700368E.ai
#1
#2
#3
600_700291.ai
1200_700371E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-192
#3 Select: ALLOW
#5 Click: [Add]
#7 Click: [Submit]
u NOTE u
of the SEs.
1200_700373E.ai
#2
(6) Click [Yes].
#1
#3
#6
#4
#5 1200_700374E.ai
#7
1200_700372E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-193
15. Checking the Radio Wave (5) Check the measurement result, and click [OK].
Check that the average time is following status.
Conditions - DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1211SE, DR-ID 1213SE, DR-ID 1214SE, DR-ID 601SE,
Since the AP’s optimum position in the SE and AP connection is confirmed, perform - DR-ID 1202SE, DR-ID 1212SE, DR-ID 602SE, DR-ID 612SE: 6000msec or
the wireless communications speed measuring. less.
(1) Check that the battery pack is mounted on the SE.
(2) Disconnect the SE cable from the SE.
(3) Start up the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
(4) Click [START] of “Speed Measurement”.
u NOTE u
Here check that the SE whose wireless signal status is to be checked is
connected via the wireless LAN.
1200_700531E.ai
(6) Click [Next].
1200_700530E.ai
Measurement of radio wave conditions starts.

The measurement ends in approx. 1 minute.
018-230-07E
IN1-194
(7) Check the radio wave strength on the DX Console.
#1 Check: Radio wave strength
#1
1200_700246.ai
REFERENCE
If the wireless communication cannot be established, check the following items
again.
- The settings of the AP and the EDIT CONFIG (ESSID, SSID, CH, and
encryption) are the same.
- Other APs are operating with the same channel, whose communication status
can be checked visually (such as inSSIDer).
- The MAC address of the AP is appeared on the inSSIDer.
018-230-07E
IN1-195
16. Calibration REFERENCE

Refer to the table below for the kinds of calibration to be executed.
A total of required time is approx. 35 minutes per SE.
INSTRUCTION
Exposure conditions
- In case of the GOS type SE, calibration during installation is not required. 1211SE, 1212SE,
Calibration type Grid
However, if troubleshooting or generating abnormal images, calibration is required. 1213SE, 1214SE, 611SE, 612SE
- Check that background calibration automatically executed upon startup of the 613SE
machine is completed before carrying out calibration. For reading
mode 0
- Keep the CL software running. If the software is terminated, the MC power will be Can be
automatically turned OFF, and calibration might result in failure. For reading
Offset No exposure No exposure kept
mode 1
mounted.
For reading
REFERENCE
mode 2
Messages of “Calibrating” and “Urgent use is possible” alternately appear on the DX Exposure conditions: Exposure conditions:
Console status indication area. - Tube voltage of 75 kV - Tube voltage of 75 kV
Gain -
#1 Check: Status indication - Dose of 10 mR (*) - Dose of 5 mR (*)
Number of exposures: 16 Number of exposures: 16
Exposure conditions: Exposure conditions:
Cannot
Defect - Tube voltage of 75 kV - Tube voltage of 75 kV
- be
correction - Dose of 5 mR (*) - Dose of 2.5 mR (*)
mounted.
Lag - Tube voltage of 80 kV - Tube voltage of 80 kV
-
correction - Dose of 100 mR (*) - Dose of 50 mR (*)
*: Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less.
REFERENCE
- Calibration can take place either in a wired or wireless mode.
- If calibration takes place in a wireless mode, radio wave strength may be weakened
#1 when the SE is placed on a concrete floor. In this case, distance the SE from the
concrete floor surface and calibration takes place.
1200_700172E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-196
n Preparations
(1) Remove the grid.
(2) Clean the SE exposure plane with a dry cloth.
(3) Position the X-ray tube at an SID usually used at the installation site.
u INSTRUCTION u
Set the SID as large as possible for table exposure. If the SID is too small,
inappropriate image correction data might be generated.
(4) Adjust the irradiation field to cover the entire exposure plane.
018-230-07E
IN1-197
16.1 Offset Calibration REFERENCE
Whether the diagnosis is successfully completed appears on the result display
REFERENCE area.
Offset calibration is carried out for all SE’s which are connected. An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual
(1) Click [START] of “Offset Calibration”.
u NOTE u
If the calibration failed, restart the SE and retry from connection check.
(2) Click [OK].
(3) Click [Next].
1200_700532E.ai
Images for offset correction data generation (4 frames) are read from the SE
(FPD).
If the offset correction data which was generated is stored on a HDD, a pop up
window displaying “Succeeded” pops up.
1200_700489E.ai
u NOTE u
If you click [START] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [START] again
after an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
018-230-07E
IN1-198
16.2 Gain Calibration u NOTE u
If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
CAUTION 10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [Start] again after
Keep to the exposure interval defined in the Operation Manual of the X-ray high an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
voltage generator when making continuous exposures. An interval of 1 minute
or longer normally needs to be taken. REFERENCE
REFERENCE An error code is displayed in some cases. Refer to the Troubleshooting manual
The focal size of the X-ray high voltage generator may be either large or small. and take appropriate countermeasures.
(1) Select a SE to be calibrated and set an operation with “Operation u NOTE u

Setting”, and then click [START] of “Gain Calibration”. Before going to the next step (exposure), check that [Ready] is lit up with the
green button.
(2) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Confirm that [Ready]
lights with the green button at each exposure.
REFERENCE
- Exposure condition (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE) :

Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 10 mR
- Exposure condition (611SE, 612SE) : Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 5 mR
Images for gain correction data generation (16 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
u INSTRUCTION u
1200_700533E.ai
If exposing preparations are completed, the [Ready] button will be displayed in 200 msec.
green in the pop up window.
1200_700546E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-199
REFERENCE
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 10 mR are shown
below. (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE) CAUTION
SID: 1.8 m
Keep to the exposure interval defined in the Operation Manual of the X-ray high
Voltage: 75 kV voltage generator when making continuous exposures. An interval of 1 minute
Amperage: 100 mA or longer normally needs to be taken.
Time: 63 msec
REFERENCE
below. (611SE, 612SE)
SID: 1.8 m The focal size of the X-ray high voltage generator may be either large or small.
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA (1) Select a SE to be calibrated and set an operation with “Operation
Time: 63 msec Setting”, and then click [START] of “Defect Calibration”.
When the gain correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
If the calibration freezes in the above procedures, restart the SE and the MC,
then re-execute from the SEs whose connections have been checked.
(3) Click [OK].
1200_700534E.ai
u NOTE u
If you click [START] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
1200_700548E.ai after an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
(4) Click [Next].
REFERENCE
018-230-07E
IN1-200
If exposing preparations are completed, the [Ready] button will be displayed in REFERENCE
green in the pop up window.
below. (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE)
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 63 msec
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 2.5 mR are
1200_700549E.ai
shown below. (611SE, 612SE)
SID: 1.8 m
u NOTE u Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 32 msec
When the defect correction data is automatically generated and stored in the
(2) Expose 5 times with the following condition. HDD, “Succeeded” appears after completion.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Perform the next exposure every time after [Ready] is lit up with the green button If “NG” appeared, check the following.
because the [Ready] disappears every exposure. - Exposure condition
- Exposure condition (611SE, 612SE) : Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 2.5 mR u NOTE u
Images for defect correction data generation (5 frames) are read from the SE If the calibration failed, restart the SE and retry from connection check.
(FPD).
u INSTRUCTION u (3) Click [OK].
200 msec.
u NOTE u
When performing defect calibration, make sure to have the exposure conditions
such as the correct dose setting (kV, mA, msec, SID) for defect correction 1200_700550E.ai
calibration.
If defect correction calibration is performed by using the exposure conditions for (4) Click [Next].
gain correction, a defect is expanded and its size cannot be detected correctly.
As a result, because the number of the defects becomes an erroneous value and
the defect size is increased more than expected, a calibration error may occur.
018-230-07E
IN1-201
16.4 Lag Calibration After about 2 minutes, the [Ready] button will be displayed in green in the pop up
window.
REFERENCE
The focal size of the X-ray high voltage generator may be either large or small.
(1) Select a SE to be calibrated and set an operation with “Operation

Setting”, and then click [START] of “Lag Calibration”.
1200_700551E.ai
u NOTE u
(2) Expose 1 time with the following condition.

- Exposure condition (611SE, 612SE) : Tube voltage of 80 kV, Dose of 50 mR
The number of image reads is displayed in the format of “n/7”.
1200_700535E.ai
u NOTE u
If you click [START] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx. 1200_700552E.ai

after an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case. u INSTRUCTION u
REFERENCE cannot be made, since the maximum exposure time is inherently specified as
Whether the calibration is successfully completed appears after completion. 200 msec.
018-230-07E
IN1-202
u NOTE u u NOTE u
- Record the exposure conditions when lag calibration is executed for the first If the calibration failed, restart the SE and retry from connection check.
time, and subsequently, always make exposures under the same conditions.
This is to compare the lag amounts serially and analyze deterioration of the SE (3) Click [OK].
(FPD).
- If irradiation of 100 kV or over cannot be performed with the condition of the
tube voltage of 80 kV and the maximum exposure time of 200 msec, move the
X-ray tube and the panel close to each other as much as possible (to the limit
which the whole panel is irradiated with X-ray).
If irradiation of 100 kV or over still cannot be performed with this condition,
increase the tube voltage to 100 kV.
If the irradiation does not become 20 mR or over with the aforementioned
condition, you have to perform the lag calibration by using another X-ray 1200_700553E.ai
equipment.
(4) Click [Next].
REFERENCES
(5) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DX Console.
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 100 mR are
shown below. (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE) (6) Check that the READY LED (green) of the SE flashes and becomes
SID: 1.8 m unlit, and the calibration has been completed when the system
Voltage: 80 kV terminates. Then, wait for the DX Console being powered OFF.
Amperage: 320 mA
Time: 200 msec (7) Remove the battery and SE cable from the SE, and turn OFF the power
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 50 mR are shown of the SE.
SID: 1.8 m (8) Connect the battery and SE cable to the SE, and turn ON the power of
Voltage: 80 kV the DX Console.
Amperage: 320 mA
Time: 100 msec
When the log correction data is automatically generated and stored in the HDD,
u NOTE u
018-230-07E
IN1-203
16.5 Checking the Calibration Results - Defect calibration: DV.txt
If the data do not line more than or equal to 19 lines for the 14 x 17 inch SE or
The calibration results can be checked after the calibration. 23 lines for the 17 x 17 inch SE, the restoration of the machine-specific data or
(1) Click [Backup] in the “SE Correct Data Backup/Restore” in the the defect calibration failed.
“BACKUP/RESTORE”, and back up the SE correction data. For 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE, check that the
time stamp of LagData.txt is newer than the time stamp of GAIN00.xxx
in the opt/config/machine/correct/panel** folder.
When the time stamp of LagData.txt is older, the lag calibration has not been
performed.
REFERENCE
- The description of the defect calibration is an example of the IMAGE READING
MODE in EDIT CONFIGURATION that is “High-speed Mode”.
If two lines appeared for “Standard Mode”, there is no problem.
- For lag calibration
Only for 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE, check that the data contents are
gradually getting smaller.
1200_700558E.ai When multiple “8192” are displayed, the lag calibration has not been
REFERENCE performed.
To backup correct data of multiple SEs together, click [Backup Package].

u INSTRUCTION u
(2) Open the files written below with the Word Pad. Perform the procedures from “16.1_Offset Calibration” to “16.5_Checking the
Calibration Results” at an installation site where two or more SEs are connected.
- Gain calibration: PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt
If the number is other than 150,8000: Restoration of the serial number is {IN1:16.1_Offset Calibration}
successful.
that time stamp and contents are the same. If they are the same, the machine-
specific has been successfully restored. If it is different, restoring the machine-
specific has failed, so install the machine-specific again.
018-230-07E
IN1-204
17. Checking for Image Problems - When the automatic X-ray detection function is not used, expose an IP to a
dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are shown
below.
Problems, White Blank Portion, and Distance: 1.8 m
Sensitivity Problems in the Images Voltage: 80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
u INSTRUCTIONu Time: 0.013 sec
Check for the irregularities and the density problems respectively with the grid
removed and with the grid mounted. (3) Output the film in the one-image format to the printer.
If the grid is not to be used, you only need to check with the grid removed. (4) Check the output film for irregularities, partial density problems, and
white blank portions.
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu: If moiré is determined to occur on the image, identify the cause and deal with the
- "QC-Test" - "IMAGE-FORMAT" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches) problem according to the procedures mentioned in the Troubleshooting manual. The
image problems might be possibly caused by the movable grid.
(2) Expose an IP.
{MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré}
- When the automatic X-ray detection function is used, expose an IP to a tube
voltage of 55 kV and a dose of 1.5 mR. (5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
REFERENCE Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a tube voltage of 55 kV and a
dose of 1.5 mR are shown below. u NOTE u
Distance: 1.8 m If the S value is more than 300 or less than 100, the Machine-Specific Data may
Voltage: 55 kV not be correctly installed. In such a case, reinstall the Machine-Specific Data and
Amperage and time: 1.6 mAs perform "16. Calibration".
(When the amperage and the time can be specified, minimize the amperage.) {IN1:14.1.14_Installing the Machine-Specific Data}
u NOTE u REFERENCES
If the exposure is performed with the exposure menu other than the specified - The S-value or a density value might vary with the photo-timer mounted.
ones or with the exposure condition other than the referred one, abnormal - The S-value varies from 206 to 210 when the X-ray absorption factor is 3 to
images, such as horizontal streak, may be found despite no error in the SE since 5%.
the study conditions are tight.
When an abnormal image occurred, perform the exposure with the specified
exposure menu and exposure condition, and check the images.
018-230-07E
IN1-205
17.2 Checking the Format 17.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in
Read Center and Film Character Format
n Procedures for Checking the Format
Information
(1) Check to make sure that the image in the SE exposure frame is
correctly read. n Checking for False Image
u NOTE u
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
The exposure frame lines on the SE exposure plane do not exactly indicate - "QC-Test" - "IMAGE-FORMAT" (Size: 17 inches×17 inches)
edges of the image recording area. The effective image recording area is approx.
1 mm inward from the exposure frame lines. (2) Attach 150 mm steel rules to the center of the vertical and horizontal
exposure center lines on the SE front cover.
Exposure center
Steel rule
SE front cover
Exposure center 600_700098.ai
(3) Expose an IP.

Effective image Exposure frame line
voltage of 55 kV and a dose of 1.5 mR.
recording area
1200_700173E2.ai
REFERENCE
dose of 1.5 mR are shown below.
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage: 55 kV
Amperage and time: 1.6 mAs
(When the amperage and the time can be specified, minimize the amperage.)
018-230-07E
IN1-206
- When the automatic X-ray detection function is not used, expose an IP to a n Checking the Film Character Format Information
dose of 1 mR.
Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
REFERENCE
Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are shown (1) Check the film character format information.
below.
Distance: 1.8 m Check the following:
Voltage: 80 kV - The film character format information that has been set is correct.
Amperage: 50 mA - There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
Time: 0.013 sec REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
(4) Output the film in the two-image format to the printer. locations are as follows.
(5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the Hospital name (medical institution name)
frame and the steel rule on the output film. FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
IP barcode No.
EDR mode and menu code
System ID and image No.
600_700099.ai
Patient ID
(6) Detach the steel rules. Image processing conditions
Patient Film mark
name
Sex
Age or date of birth
n Checking the Read Center

G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
SKULL GENERAL
L 0000000001 Hanako Fuji [F] 23
Date of
exposure1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE: 50% RT-04
Have on hand the output film used for "n Checking for False Image". Check that the
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure Exposure menu
Standardization conditions
Set processing information
Reduction ratio
center lines. and correction item Exposure time
Film density Image reversal mark Date of exposure
System sensitivity 600_700101.ai
Read center Read center

600_700100.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-207
18. Disconnecting the SE Cable
Described below are the procedures for disconnecting the SE cable from the MP.
The procedures depend on whether the SE cable is an optional item or a jig.
- SE cable as a jig cable: Always disconnect the cable.
- SE cable as an optional item: Confirm with the customer as to whether or not the SE
cable is to be disconnected, and disconnect the cable only when demanded.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the machine.
(2) Remove the top cover, the front cover and the rear cover of the MP.
{IN1:7.1_Removing the Covers}
(3) Disconnect the SE cable from the MP.
(4) Put on the MP cover.
018-230-07E
IN1-208
19. Checking the Error Log n DS Service Utility
(1) Start up the DS Service Utility.
n DR Web Maintenance Tool (2) Click [Log].
(1) Start up the DR Web Maintenance Tool. → The Log window opens.
(3) Click the log confirmation target from [Docking Stand #1] to [Docking
(2) Click [ERROR DB] and check the error log.
Stand #3].
(3) Click [DELETE].
(4) Click [Acquisition].
→ The Log information displays.
(6) Exit the DS Service Utility.
(7) Restart the DS and the DX Console.
1200_700536E.ai
(4) Click [OK] to clear the error log.
1200_700537E.ai
018-230-07E
IN1-209
INSTRUCTION

(2) Click [HISTORY].
(3) Click [DELETE].
1200_700538E.ai
(4) Click [OK] to clear the HISTORY.
018-230-07E
IN1-210
21. Backing Up the Data
(1) Select “Backup/Restore”, and click [Backup] in “Device settings” and
“Log”, and back up the data.
1200_700540E.ai
NOTE
Clicking [Backup] of “Log” displays the following window.
Select “All Log” and click [OK].
1200_700559E.ai
(2) Exit the DR Web Maintenance Tool.
018-230-07E
IN1-211
22. Final Checks Make sure that the board is free from errors on the Board State display.
- MP board status
22.1 Checking the SE

(1) Check that the SE is not damaged.

(2) Click [Get] in “Board status check”, and check the following board
statuses.
1200_700554E.ai
Status Item Normal display

MPXBoardFuseStatus “true”, if there is any MP.
BoardFuseStatus SE1FuseStatus “true”, if there is any MP.
SE2FuseStatus “true”, if there is any MP.
MPXBoardConnectorStatus “true”, if there is any MP.
BoardConnector
SE1ConnectorStatus “true”, if any SE is connected.
Status
SE2ConnectorStatus “true”, if any SE is connected.
1200_700541E.ai BoardFanStatus FanStatus “true”, if there is any MP.
There is no problem with
RemoteSwitchStatus
“false”.
MPX1ShotSwitch1stStepStatus
“false”.
SwitchStatus MPX1ShotSwitch2ndStepStatus
“false”.
MPX2ShotSwitch1stStepStatus
“false”.
MPX2ShotSwitch2ndStepStatus
“false”.
018-230-07E
IN1-212
- SE board status 22.3 Checking the Optional Items
22.3.1 Checking the Battery Charger
(1) Insert the battery pack into the battery charger, and check to make
sure that:
- a working sound is heard;
- the charge indicator LED lights up.
Refer to the operation manual for details.
1200_700555E.ai
Status Item Normal display

Hardware Status true
Configuration Status true
SE BoardStatus Battery Status “true”, if there is any battery.
MCU Status true
SDCard Status true
A temperature close to the room
Panel Temperature Temperature
temperature
Extra Sleep Button Status There is no problem with “false”.
SE Button Status
Memory Image Button Status There is no problem with “false”.
Battery Serial No Battery ID Any one of “0” to “65535”
Battery Manufacture
Manufacture Date Display with “YYYY/MM/DD”.
Date
Battery Insert
Insert Withdraw Count Any one of “0” to “65535”
Withdraw Count
Battery Temperature Temperature
Battery Status Status
Battery Cycle Count Cycle Count Any one of “0” to “65535”
Battery First Use First Use
Battery First Use
First Use Date
Date
018-230-07E
IN1-213
23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Machine
Visually check the units for damage.
If contaminated, wipe off with a dry cloth.
018-230-07E
IN1-214
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
IN1-215
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
1-167,
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) AppxIN4-1, 4-6 to 4-8
AppxIN9-1 to 9-4
43, 48, 56, 63, 111, 113, 117, 118, 137,

139, 143, 155, AppxIN3-1, AppxIN4-3
11.28.2014 03 Revision (FM9281)
to 4-6, AppxIN6-1, AppxIN8-1, 8-3,
AppxIN9-1
1, 2, 6, 11, 41, 43, 50, 53, 55-57, 59,
61, 64, 70-77, 82, 86, 115, 118, 122-
125, 139, 142, 146-149, 151, 152,
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 154, 156, 158-160, AppxIN3-1, 3-2,
AppxIN4-4, 4-5, AppxIN8-1 to 8-4,
AppxIN10-1 to 10-4, AppxIN11-1 to
11-4, AppxIN12-1 to 12-4
65-69, 78-81, 83-85, 87-114, 116, 117,
119-121, 126-138, 140, 141, 143-
145, 150, 153, 155, 157, 161-169,
Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)

AppxIN13-1 to 13-4
2, 11, 12, 70-75, 83, 87, 124-136, 159-
169, 172, 180, AppxIN1-1, AppxIN7-2,
04.30.2015 05 Revision for abbreviation unification (FM9309)
AppxIN11-1, AppxIN12-1, 12-2, 12-4
to 12-8, AppxIN14-1 to 14-8
76-82, 84-86, 88-123, 137-158, 170,
171, 173-179, 181-191
1-4, 6, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 20, 46,
50, 64-74, 76-81, 83, 84, 90-95,
97-100, 105, 112, 116-122, 127-131,
133, 136-139, 141-156, 159-165,
170-174, 176, 179-182, 184-198,
200-202, 204, 206, 208-210,212-217,
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) ApppxIN1-1,AppxIN3-1 to 3-3,
AppxIN4-4 to 4-6, AppxIN5-1,
AppxIN8-1 to 8-4,
AppxIN12-1 to 12-4, 12-8 to 12-10,
AppxIN13-1 to 13-8, AppxIN15-1 to 15-4,
AppxIN16-1 to 16-4, AppxIN17-1 to 17-4,
AppxIN18-1 to 18-4
11, 13, 15, 18, 19, 21-45, 47-49,
51-63, 75, 82, 85-89, 96, 101-104,
106-111, 113-115, 123-126, 132, 134, 135,
140, 157, 158, 166-169, 175, 177, 178,
183, 199, 203, 205, 207, 211, 218, 219,
AppxIN12-5 to 12-7, 12-11, 12-12
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 15, 54, 69, 90, 99-198, 201, 204, 206
04.28.2017 07 Changes in pagination (FM9456) 199, 200, 202, 203, 205, 207-219
018-230-07E
IN2-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart A
7. Installing the MP
START
2. Installation Preparations
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation
7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or the Anchor Mounting Bracket
2.2 Ferrite Core (Optional)
3. Precautions in Installation 7.4 Connecting the Cables
7.5 Connecting the X-Ray shot cable

4. Transfer and Unpacking
7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer 7.7 Reinstalling the Covers
4.2 Transfer of Instruments 7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)
4.3 Unpacking the MP 8. Installing the DS
4.4 Unpacking the DS
8.2 Attaching the Label
4.6 Unpacking the SE
8.3 Installing the DS
4.7 Unpacking the Battery Pack
8.4 Setting the DS IP Address
9. Installing the PB
4.10 Unpacking the Monitor 9.1 Checking the Power Cable
4.11 Unpacking the Access Point 9.2 Connect the LAN Cable
5. Checking the Items Supplied 9.3 Installing the PB
10. Installing the SE

B
A
018-230-06E
IN2-2
B C
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the NIC board to the DX Console 17. Checking for Image Problems
11.1 Installing the MC 17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, White
Blank Portion, and Sensitivity Problems in the Images
11.2 Mounting the NIC board to the DX Console
17.2 Checking the Format
12. Installing the Access Point
12.1 In Case of the D-Link and Film Character Format Information
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP 18. Disconnecting the SE Cable
13. Installing the DX Console

14. Installing the RU Software

Application in the DX Console 21. Backing Up the Data

Application in the MC 22. Final Checks
15. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions 22.1 Checking the SE

16. Calibration
22.3 Checking the Optional Items
16.1 Offset Calibration
23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine
16.2 Gain Calibration
END
16.4 Lag Calibration

16.5 Checking the Calibration Results
018-230-06E
IN2-3
2. Installation Preparations 2.2 Ferrite Core
Install ferrite cores with the cables when installing the machine.
2.1 Tools and Measuring Instruments 2.2.1 Type of the Ferrite Core
Necessary for Installation Ferrite cores used in the machine are as follows.
Manufacturer’s Attached Manu-
Prepare the tools, jigs and measuring instruments before installing the machine. Supplied Name Qty. Shape
part number position facturer
{Handling of this Manual: Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require
Inspection/Calibration} FC1 E04SR200932 7 CL/MC Seiwa
NOTE 1200_700199B.ai
The SE cable is always needed to install the machine. Prepare the SE cable for use of MC-HUB
FC3 E04SR170730A 3 Seiwa
the jig if the SE cable (optional) is not purchased by the customer. System 1200_700199C.ai
AP-HUB
FC7 TFT274015S 2 AP-POW Takeuchi
1200_700199D.ai
FC2 E04SR301334 2 MP Seiwa
MP 1200_700199A.ai
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 1200_700199C.ai

MP-HUB Seiwa
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 1200_700199C.ai

DS-HUB Seiwa
DS-LAN
FC4 E04SR211132 2 Wireless Seiwa
1200_700199H.ai
Bridge
DS
FC5 TFT-102010N 1 DS-LAN Takeuchi
1200_700199I.ai
FC6 SFT-59SN 1 DS-POW Takeuchi

1200_700199J.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-4
2.2.3 Network Configuration and Attachment Position for
FC2 E04SR301334 1 PB-LAN Seiwa the Ferrite Core
PB Attachment position of each installation configuration for the ferrite core is shown
below.
1200_700199A.ai
FC3 E04SR170730A 1 PB-HUB Seiwa INSTRUCTION

1200_700199C.ai
The ferrite core is attached about 60 mm from the base of the cables.
SE cable FC1 E04SR200932 4 SE cable Seiwa
1200_700199B.ai
n Installing the MC application in the MC (DS wired connection)
CL-AP
AFC E04SR130525A 3 Seiwa FC1
AP-Isorator SE
Cable
Hand
SW I/F Box Hand SW
1200_700199F.ai DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP
SE-LAN FC2
LAN
DVI Monitor
cable
FC1
USB
FC2
SE
AFC4 E04SR200917 1 Isorator-AP Seiwa DR-ID12xxSE
Cable DR-ID300CL FC1 USB
FC1 Keyboard
Card USB FC1 USB
1200_700199G.ai DR-ID1200MP LAN
Reader FC1 Mouse
FC1 FC1
SE FC2
Barcode USB
Cable Reader
DR-ID12xxSE FC3
2.2.2 Coiling the Cable to the Ferrite Core

FC2 LAN
FC3 Legend
FC3
FC3 FC3 : 0 coils
FC1 LAN
The number of ferrite core coils vary according to where they are attached on the Hub LAN DR-ID1200MC
SE FC4 : 1 coil
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC3 : 2 coils
cable.
FC1 NIC
(Connecter)
FC5 AC : 3 coils
CSL FC4 FC3 Adapter
There are four patterns; 0 coils (embeded only), 1 coil, 2 coils and 3 coils. FC6
Coiling examples are shown below. SE FC4

LAN Wireless Access
Point (AP)
FC3
0 coils 1 coil 2 coils DR-ID12xxSE

(Connecter)
DR-ID1200DS FC5 FC7
AC
Hospital
HUB
AC
CSL FC4 Adapter
Adapter
GND
FC6
LAN Isolator
DR-ID1200PB FC2
AC Power Cable
Signal Cable
DC Power Cable
FC2
1200_700241E.ai
1200_700191E.ai
NOTE
018-230-06E
IN2-5
n Installing the MC application in the MC (DS wireless connection) n Installing the MC application in the DX Console
FC1 FC1
Hand Hand
SE SW I/F Box SE SW I/F Box
Cable Hand SW Cable Hand SW
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MP
LAN LAN
FC2 DVI FC2 DVI
FC1 Monitor FC1 Monitor
USB USB
FC2 FC2
SE SE
Cable Cable DR-ID300CL
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID300CL FC1 USB DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
FC1 Keyboard FC1 Keyboard
DR-ID1200MP LAN Reader USB DR-ID1200MP LAN Reader USB
SE FC2 SE FC2
Cable Cable Reader
DR-ID12xxSE FC2 FC3 Reader
LAN DR-ID12xxSE FC2 FC3 LAN
FC3 FC3
FC3 凡例
Legend FC3 Legend
FC3 FC3 FC3 LAN : 0 coils
FC1 LAN :…巻き数0
0 coils
FC4 Hub LAN DR-ID1200MC FC4 Hub
SE FC3 :…巻き数1
1 coil SE : 1 coil
DR-ID1200DS AC
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC1 NIC :…巻き数2
2 coils DR-ID12xxSE FC3
Adapter : 2 coils
(Connecter) (Connecter)
FC5 AC CSL FC5
CSL :…巻き数3
3 coils FC3 FC3 : 3 coils
FC3 Adapter FC4
FC4
FC6 FC6
LAN Wireless Access LAN Wireless Access
FC4 Point (AP) Point (AP)
FC4 FC3 FC4 FC3
SE Wireless SE FC5
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC5 Converter FC7 DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC7
(Connecter) Hospital AC (Connecter) CSL Hospital AC
CSL AC HUB AC HUB
FC4 Adapter FC4 Adapter
Adapter Adapter
GND GND
AC
FC6 FC6
Adapter
FC4 FC4
SE SE
LAN Isolator DR-ID1200DS LAN Isolator
DR-ID1200DS
AC Power Cable CSL AC Power Cable
CSL FC4 FC5 FC4 FC5
Signal Cable Signal Cable
FC6 FC6
1200_700242E.ai 1200_700243E.ai
NOTE n MP minimum configuration

FC1
Hand
SE SW I/F Box
Cable FC2 Hand SW
DVI Monitor
FC1
FC3 USB
FC2 FC1
SE
Cable DR-ID300CL
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
Keyboard
Card FC1 USB
Reader USB
FC1 FC1 FC1 Mouse
Barcode USB
Reader
LAN
Legend
LAN Wireless Access : 0 coils
Point (AP)
FC3
: 1 coil
FC7 : 2 coils
AC : 3 coils
Adapter
GND
LAN Isolator
AC Power Cable Hospital AC
HUB Adapter
Signal Cable
DC Power Cable
1200_700244E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-6
n DS minimum configuration (DS wired connection) n PB minimum configuration
Legend
DVI SE FC1 DVI
Monitor Monitor
: 0 coils Cable
USB DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200PB USB
: 1 coil FC2
DR-ID300CL DR-ID300CL
: 2 coils DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
: 3 coils Keyboard Keyboard
FC2
Reader USB Reader USB
Reader Reader
LAN LAN
FC3
FC3 LAN FC3 FC3 LAN
FC4 Hub Hub USB
SE Legend
DR-ID1200DS AC AC
DR-ID12xxSE (Connecter) Adapter : 0 coils Adapter
CSL FC5
FC4 FC3 FC3
: 1 coil
FC6 : 2 coils
LAN Wireless Access : 3 coils LAN Wireless Access
Point (AP) Point (AP)
FC3 FC3
FC7 FC7
LAN Isolator Hospital AC LAN Isolator Hospital AC
AC HUB AC HUB
Adapter Adapter
AC Power Cable Adapter AC Power Cable Adapter
Signal Cable GND Signal Cable GND
1200_700249E.ai 1200_700356E.ai
n DS minimum configuration (DS wireless connection) n Mobile configuration (SE wired connection)
FC4 FC4 SE Cable LAN Wireless USB DR-ID300CL Legend

SE DVI Monitor Access Point
Wireless DR-ID12xxSE Isolator
(CSL) : 0 coils
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS FC5 Bridge USB AFC AFC
(AP)
AFC AFC
(Connecter)
CSL : 1 coil
DR-ID300CL
AC DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB : 2 coils
Adapter Keyboard
FC6 : 3 coils
Card FC1 USB
Reader USB FC4 FC4
FC1 Mouse SE Wireless
FC1 FC1 DR-ID1200DS FC5 Converter
Barcode USB CSL LAN Isolator
Reader
LAN AC Power Cable
AC
FC6
FC3 LAN DC Power Cable
Hub USB
1200_700245E.ai
Legend AC
Adapter
: 0 coils
FC3
n Mobile configuration (SE wireless connection)

: 1 coil
: 2 coils
LAN Wireless Access
: 3 coils Point (AP)
FC3
FC7
LAN Isolator Hospital AC Wireless USB DR-ID300CL Legend
AC HUB Adapter Access Point
AC Power Cable Adapter (AP) (CSL) : 0 coils
AFC AFC
Signal Cable GND
: 1 coil
DC Power Cable
: 2 coils
1200_700284E.ai : 3 coils
FC4 FC4
SE Wireless
DR-ID12xxSE (Connecter) DR-ID1200DS FC5 Bridge
CSL LAN Isolator
AC Power Cable
AC
FC6
DC Power Cable
1200_700285E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-7
3. Precautions in Installation
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warning and precautions mentioned in “Safety Precaution”.
CAUTION
INSTRUCTION
It is recommended that you should not install machine cables (such as the power
cables and communication cables) near such instruments that generate magnetic field
noise (such as a motor, transducer and switching power source) and other cables to
assure appropriate image quality.
INSTRUCTION
Do not make a radius of curvature of the SE cable smaller than 50 mm. If the radius of
curvature is smaller than 50 mm, disconnection might occur in the cable, resulting in
abnormality in image.
018-230-06E
IN2-8
4. Transfer and Unpacking 4.3 Unpacking the MP
(1) Take out the MP from transporting box.
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer #1 Take out: MP
CAUTION
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
u INSTRUCTION u #1 Accessories
Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put
off immediately after the machine is transferred into the room, the machine might get
condensation.
Desiccant
(outside Japan)
4.2 Transfer of Instruments
Pad
CAUTION
If the machine is to be transferred over differing floor levels, slowly move the
machine not to shock it. Note that the carrier can come over a differing level up Transporting box
to approx. 10 mm.
1200_700141.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-9
4.4 Unpacking the DS 4.5 Unpacking the PB
(1) Take out the DS from transporting box. (1) Take out the PB from transporting box.
#1 Take out: DS #1 Take out: PB
SE connection cable
Accessories
Accessories
Dummy cassette
#1 #1 LAN cable
Pad
Desiccant
(outside Japan)
Pad Transporting box
1200_700385E.ai

NOTE
Transporting box
Perform this procedure only when the MC application is installed in the MC.
1200_700142.ai
(1) Take out the MC from transporting box.
018-230-06E
IN2-10
4.7 Unpacking the SE 4.8 Unpacking the Battery Pack
(1) Take out the SE from transporting box. (1) Take out the battery pack from transporting box.
#1 Take out: SE
Accessories
(1) Take out the battery charger from transporting box.

Pad
(1) Take out the DX Console from transporting box.
#1 4.11 Unpacking the Monitor

Desiccant
(1) Take out the monitor from transporting box.
(outside Japan)
4.12 Unpacking the Access Point

(1) Take out the Access Point from transporting box.
Transporting box
1200_700001E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-11
5. Checking the Items Supplied n SE (1213SE / 1214SE)
Item Qty. Remarks
Check the components against the packing list supplied. SE 1 -
Machine-specific data 1
n SE (1201SE / 1202SE / 1211SE / 1212SE) Special screw M2x3 34
Item Qty. Remarks Screw cap seal 2
SE 1 - Small size screw cap 2
Machine-specific data 1 Small size plug seal 3 Seal including antibacterial paint
1201SE/1211SE (Japan): 46 pcs. Stopper seal 2
Special screw M2x3 1201SE/1211SE (Overseas): 45 pcs. Small size stopper seal 2
1202SE/1212SE: 52 pcs. Dummy battery 1
Screw cap seal 4 Small size connector cover 1
Plug seal 4 Seal including antibacterial paint Screw seal 4 For short side: 2 pcs., For long side: 2 pcs.
Stopper seal 4 Small size screw DINOC 2
Dummy battery 1 Green label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Connector cover 1 Gray label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs.
Seal including antibacterial paint Small size insertion position seal 1
Screw seal 4 1201SE/1211SE: 14inch; 2 pcs., 17inch; 2 pcs. SE operation manual 1
1202SE/1212SE: 17inch; 4 pcs. Letter of guarantee/Report of completion
Green label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs. 1 Only inside Japan
Gray label (*1) 4 Spare part: 2 pcs. Notes on the X-ray exposure/Antibacterial
1
SE operation manual 1 coating operation manual
Letter of guarantee/Report of completion Supplementary Material 1 Only Overseas
1 Only inside Japan
Notes on the X-ray exposure/Antibacterial
1
coating operation manual
Supplementary Material 1 Only Overseas
018-230-06E
IN2-12
n MP n System Accessory Kit
Item Qty. Remarks Item Qty. Remarks
MP 1 - System operation manual 1
Jig cable 2 Short-circuiting cable for initializing the MP
Spare part: 1 cable
Positioning jig for SE assembly 1
Jig for resetting the IP address 1
Medical power cable Ferrite core 11 FC1 (x7), FC3 (x3), FC7 (x1)
Cable 1
Only inside Japan
SE-LAN cable 1
Ferrite core 3 FC2 (x2), FC3 (x1)
Performance check list/Attached
Cross recessed pan head screw (M3x6) 3 document/How to use the memory
1 Only inside Japan
exposure mode/Report of completion of
Plain washer (W3) 3 installation/
Spring washer (SW3) 3
Fastener 3 n DR-ID 300CL
Cable tie 3
Cable tie 2 For details on the DR-ID 300CL, refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
Clamp 6
Stand for the floor 1 Only inside Japan n MC (Inside Japan)
DR-ID 1200MP operation manual 1 Item Qty. Remarks
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan Body 1 -
Keyboard 1 -
n DS Mouse 1 -
Item Qty. Remarks
Ferrite core 1 FC1
DS 1 -
Set of reinstallation CD’s 1 -
Setup CD 1 DR-ID 1200DS Service Tool Software
Set of resource CD’s 1 -
Ferrite core 5 FC3 (x1), FC4 (x2), FC5 (x1), FC6 (x1)
Other DELL accessories 1 -
Stand for the floor 1 Only inside Japan
Memory element 1 Application software/PC-Tool
Power cable 1
Memory element 1 Operating System (for MC Default Set Up)
Cross recessed hexagon head screw
4 308S0404 Letter of guarantee 1 DR-ID 1200MC
double sems screw (M3x12)
Hexagon head tapping screw for plastic
4 306S0152
(double -point) (M3x8) n MC (Outside Japan)
Insert position seal for small size cassette 1
Item Qty. Remarks
Lead precaution label 1
Body 1 -
DR-ID 1200DS operation manual 1
Keyboard 1 -
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan
Mouse 1 -
n PB Ferrite core 1 FC1
Item Qty. Remarks Set of reinstallation CD’s 1 -
PB 1 - Set of resource CD’s 1 -
LAN cable 1 With FC2 (x1) and FC3 (x1) Other DELL accessories 1 -
Power cable 1 Only inside Japan Memory element 1 Application software/PC-Tool
DR-ID 1200PB operation manual 1 Memory element 1 Operating System (for MC Default Set Up)
Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan Letter of guarantee 1 DR-ID 1200MC
018-230-06E
IN2-13
n Optional Items l IF box-related
l Connector cable for the X-ray Used to synchronize exposure
CASE NO. Name Qty. Remarks timing with accumulation start
301 I/F box 1 timing by means of a hand switch
9-core signal. (the Main Kit of Hand SW
Cable length: 5 m Interface BOX (only inside Japan))
101 X-Ray shot cable 1
Cable to connect between MP and X-ray
equipment. Used to synchronize exposure
timing with accumulation start
9-core timing by means of a hand switch
Cable length: 15 m 302 I/F box 1
102 X-Ray shot cable 1 signal. (the Main Kit of Hand
Cable to connect between MP and X-ray SW Interface BOX (only outside
equipment. Japan))
3-core Exposure switch for use as
Cable length: 5 m 303 Hand switches (2button) 1
103 X-Ray shot cable 1 connected with the I/F box.
and X-ray equipment. 304 I/F box cable_10m 1 Used to connect between the I/F
305 I/F box cable_15m 1 box and the MP.
3-core
Cable length: 15 m 306 I/F box cable_GE1 1
104 X-Ray shot cable 1 307 I/F box cable_GE2 1
and X-ray equipment. 308 I/F box cable_Siemens 1
MIKASA 309 I/F box cable_Shimadzu 1
105 Generator 1
Generator-MP terminal block 310 I/F box cable_Toshiba 1
312 I/F box cable_DelMedical 1
l AC bucky relay unit I/F box cable
313 1 box and the X-ray equipment.
CASE.NO. Item Qty. Remarks _round terminal DelMedical
201 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 100V 314 I/F box cable_GENDEX 1
202 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 110V 315 I/F box cable_CPI 1
203 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 200V 316 I/F box cable_Philips 1
204 AC bucky relay unit 1 For 220V 317 I/F box cable_110-3 wire 1
318 I/F box cable_110-4 wire 1
311 I/F box cable_EMD 1 box and the X-ray equipment.
Optional item only outside Japan.
l Battery-related
401 Battery pack 1
Only inside Japan
Only outside Japan
018-230-06E
IN2-14
l SE cable-related
501 SE cable 1 10m
502 SE cable 1 20m
Adapter for installing the
503 DS connection adaper 1 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
into the DS.
DS connection adaper Adapter for installing the
504 1
(for small size SE) 1213SE/1214SE into the DS.
505 1
(magnet clamp)
Clamp for retaining the SE cable.
506 1
(double-sided tape clamp)
l Fixture
601 Anchor fixing bracket of MP 1
602 Falling prevention metal fitting of MP 1
603 Anchor floor fixing bracket of DS 1
604 Falling prevention metal fitting of DS 1
605 Wall fixing bracket of DS 1 Bracket to fix the DS on the wall
l FUJIFILM-made AP-related
Only inside Japan
Only for USA
Only for Europe
Only for China
l Storage case (Shared with DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 1200)

018-230-06E
IN2-15
(1) Charge the battery pack using the battery charger or the SE.
{Operation Manual}
NOTE
Error display that appears when the battery charger has a charging current failure
includes the following.
- Ver.G or later
Three green LEDs blink until charging starts.
- The red LED blinks after a few seconds and an error display appears.
- Ver.F or earlier
The LED blinks, which looks like charging is going on properly.
- The number of LEDs blinking does not increase.
- After three hours, three green LEDs are lit up.
If a communication error occurred, the red LED blinks after a few seconds and an
error display appears.
The battery charger version is labeled with an alphabet at the end of the serial No. at
the lower right of the rating plate. A serial number “F000001A”, for example, means a
version “A”.
018-230-07E
IN2-16
7. Installing the MP (3) Remove the MP rear cover.

#1 Loosen: T3x6 (x2) Rear cover
Top cover
#1
#1
1200_700028E.ai
1200_700026E.ai
(2) Remove the MP front cover.

#1
Front cover
1200_700027E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-17
7.2 Checking the Power Cable 7.3 Installing the Foot Cover or
WARNING the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional)
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet before measuring a resistance value. Install the foot cover (when installing on the floor) or the anchor mounting bracket (when
fixing the anchor :optional) before connecting the cables.
(1) Embed the ferrite core (FC2) on the MP-side of the power cable,
7.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover
connect the power cable to the MP, and set the power switch to the ON
position. (1) Remove the MP bottom cover.
Manufacturer’s
part number
Power cable (MP-side)

of the cable
1200_700199A.ai

(Reference value)
#1
Bottom cover
E 1200_700149.ai
E E E (2) Turn the height retaining brackets of the bottom cover over and
L L N N reinstall them to the same position.
N N L #1 Remove: T3x6 (x3)
L #2 Turn over: height retaining brackets (x3)
600_700005.ai #1 Bottom cover
is continuity. #3
measurement.
#2
1200_700150.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-18
(3) Install the foot cover. 7.3.2 Installing the Anchor Mounting Bracket (Optional)
(1) Perform the procedures (1) to (2) in “8.3.1 Installing the Foot Cover”.
Foot cover
#1 {IN2:7.3.1_Installing the Foot Cover}
(2) Install the anchor mounting bracket to the MP.
#1
1200_700159.ai
1200_700151.ai
(3) Install the bottom cover.
(4) Reinstall the bottom cover.
Bottom cover
#1
#1
1200_700154.ai
1200_700152.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-19
7.4 Connecting the Cables (3) Tighten the SE cable (MP-side) with the two cable ties that are passed
through the clamp, and attach the ferrite core (FC1).
(1) Route the SE cable (optional item or a jig) from the lower opening on #1 Tighten: Cable tie (Panduit PLT1.5I: lateral direction, inside)
the MP rear cover, and connect the cable connector and the protective #2 Tighten: Cable tie (Panduit PLT1.5I: vertical direction, outside)
ground wire. #3 Embed: Ferrite core (FC1)
#1 Route: SE cable (optional item or a jig) Manufacturer’s
#2 Connect: Cable connector Ferrite core Shape Coils Attachment position
part number
#3 Tighten: N3x6, SW3, W3
SE cable (MP-side)
#3 1200_700199B.ai instruction.
#2 MP
MPC6
#1
SE cable
1200_700057.ai
#1 #2
(2) Clamp the protective ground wire of the SE cable. #3
#1 Clamp: Clamp 1200_700059E.ai
#1 Protective ground wire INSTRUCTION

- When tightening the cable tie, adjust the length of the cable tie as in the figure below.
When measuring the length of the cable tie, set the steel rule up against the
cable bundle tie and measure the length to the tip.
Cable tie (outside)

97 mm or more
1200_700058.ai
Cable tie (inside)

105 mm or more
1200_700175E.ai
- Attach the ferrite core as in the figure below.
1200_700197.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-20
(4) Route the LAN cables between the MP and MC and between the MP n With two MP structure
and AP from the lower opening on the MP rear cover, connect them,
and then attach the ferrite cores (FC2). MP2
REFERENCE
MPC7
- You may connect the LAN cable either to the MPC4 or the MPC5.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console,
connect the LAN cable between MP and DX Console and between MP and AP. MPC6
MPC54B
#1 Route: LAN cable MPC5 board
#2 Connect: LAN cable connector
#3 2 coils: Ferrite core (FC2 x2)
Manufacturer’s MPC4
part number
LAN cable (MP-side) HUB

1200_700199A.ai
instruction. MP1
MPC7
MPC6
MPC54B
MPC5 board
MPC4
#1#3 #2 #2
MPC4 MPC5 1200_700328.ai
LAN cable (between MP and MC) REFERENCE

LAN cable (between MP and AP) 1200_700060.ai - The LAN cable can be connected to either MPC4 or MPC5.
- Refer to the following for the procedure when installing two MP.
INSTRUCTION {IN:Appendix 5._Procedure for Installing Two MP}
Attach the ferrite core as in the figure below.
1200_700198.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-21
7.5 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable 7.5.1 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)
WARNINGS n Connection Diagram of the X-Ray High Voltage Generator (When

l Be sure to turn OFF the power supply of the X-ray high voltage generator to
avoid electric shock hazards due to high voltage. X-ray high
l The X-ray high voltage generator is a product of another manufacturer. voltage generator MPX54A
Commit the cable connection to the service personnel of the X-ray equipment.
+5V BKY1
8 RDY1A
How to connect the X-Ray shot cable depends on the grid oscillation mode. K5
Refer to the corresponding connection method. AHN22005
BKY1
l Steady grid type +5V_iso +5V_iso Driver 9 RDY1B
circuit
The grid is fixed and does not oscillate. 1 PC3
{IN2:7.5.1_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Steady Grid Type)} TLP421F +5V BKY1
SHOT1 10 RDY2A
l Bucky contact type RDY 1 2
820Ω K6
Shot
The grid is oscillated by the motor. When the relay contact is closed, the motor starts Switch 1 +5V_iso AHN22005
BKY1
SHOT1
to drive. Prep RDY 1 3 11 RDY2B
PC2
{IN2:7.5.2_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky Contact Type)} TLP421F
GND_iso
l Bucky AC type SHOT1
4
RDY 2
The grid is pressed against the leaf spring, and the grid rebounds by means of Shot 820Ω 12
reaction force of the spring. A solenoid is employed as a mechanical part against Switch 2
SHOT1
RAD
which the grid is pressed. RDY 2 5
The AC bucky relay unit (optional) is required when the bucky AC type is to be
connected. SHOT1 GND_iso +5V
{IN2:7.5.3_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)} GO A 6
K4
AHN22005
SHOT1
GO B 7
600_700010.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-22
l SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1 (Input) the shot switch (first stage) is turned ON.
C: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) starts.
l SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2 (Input) D: An exposure request signal is output, and X-ray exposure starts.
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the E: X-ray exposure ends.
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
l SHOT1 GO A/B (Output)
The signal generates X-rays. SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity
SHOT GO
l Relay model X-ray exposure
AHN22005 (Panasonic Electric Works) Charge accumulation

l Rated control capacity of SE (FPD)
Standard contact: 30 VDC A B CD E F 600_700011.ai

1A
018-230-06E
IN2-23
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable (2) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
CAUTION #1 Connect: Cable terminals
MPX2 MPX1
RDY2-RDY2 terminals before connecting the X-Ray shot cable, to make sure 1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO #1
If the high voltage (such as 100 VAC ) is observed in the cable voltage, contact a 3 SHOT2 RDY1 3 SHOT1 RDY1
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise care. 4 SHOT2 RDY2 4 SHOT1 RDY2

u INSTRUCTION u
Always use a reusable band (clamp) included in the supplied accessories to retain the 6 SHOT2 GO A 6 SHOT1 GO A
the reusable band are mentioned below for your reference. 7 SHOT2 GO B 7 SHOT1 GO B
Manufacturer: Kitagawa Industries, Co. Ltd. 8 BKY2 RDY1A 8 BKY1 RDY1A
Name: Reusable band
Part No.: LWS-3S V0 9 BKY2 RDY1B 9 BKY1 RDY1B
(1) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) from the upper opening on the 10 BKY2 RDY2A 10 BKY1 RDY2A
MP rear cover.
12 NC2 12 NC1
600_700013.ai
#1
1200_700029.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-24
(3) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable terminals. (5) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
u NOTE u
#1
necessary. MPX2 MPX1
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO

#1 600_700014.ai

(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) from the upper opening
on the MP rear cover. 10 BKY2 RDY2A 10 BKY1 RDY2A
u NOTE u 11 BKY2 RDY2B 11 BKY1 RDY2B
If the second cable is not present, the procedure is not necessary. Proceed to the
procedure (7). 12 NC2 12 NC1
600_700016.ai
#1
1200_700030.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-25
(6) Wrap a plastic tape around the unconnected (remaining) cable (7) Tie the remaining cables and the X-ray shot cable(s) together, and
terminals. retain with the reusable band (supplied accessory).
#1 Retain: Reusable band(s) (supplied accessory)
u NOTE u
<When one X-Ray shot cable is used>
be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not #1
necessary.
1200_700031.ai
<When two X-Ray shot cables are used>

#1
#1 600_700014.ai
1200_700032.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-26
u NOTE u
necessary.

#2 Tie: Cables
#1 #3 #2
1200_700033.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-27
7.5.2 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable
(Bucky Contact Type)

X-ray high
voltage generator MPX54A Bucky Unit
+5V BKY1
8 RDY1A
K5
AHN22005
BKY1
+5V_iso +5V_iso Driver 9 RDY1B
circuit
1 PC3
TLP421F +5V BKY1
SHOT1 10 RDY2A
RDY1 2 K6
820Ω
Shot AHN22005
Switch 1 +5V_iso BKY1
SHOT1
Prep 3 11 RDY2B
RDY1
PC4
TLP421F
GND_iso
SHOT1
RDY2 4
Shot 820Ω 12
Switch 2
SHOT1
RAD 5
RDY2
SHOT1 GND_iso +5V

GO A 6
K4
AHN22005
SHOT1
GO B 7
BKY1 EXP
600_700022.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-28
A: The signal for preparing for the bucky operation is output, and preparation starts for SE
l SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1 (Input) exposures corresponding to the first stage of the switch when the shot switch (first stage)
The signal is generated when only the first stage of the shot switch on the X-ray high is turned ON.
voltage generator is pressed. (Prep signal) B: Preparation starts for SE exposures corresponding to the second stage of the switch
when the shot switch (second stage) is turned ON.
l SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2 (Input) C: The signal for operating the bucky is output upon completion of the preparation for the SE
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the (FPD) exposure.
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) D: An exposure request signal is output after a predetermined time elapses since the bucky
operation starts, and X-ray exposure starts.
l BKY1 RDY1 A/B (Output) E: X-ray exposure ends.
The signal prepares for the bucky operation. F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
l BKY1 RDY2 A/B (Output)
The signal operates the bucky upon completion of the preparation for the SE BKY1 RDY1/RDY1
exposure.
A relay type is normally open (NO). SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity BKY1 RDY2/RDY2

Bucky
l Relay model
AHN22005 (Panasonic Electric Works) BKY1 EXP
l Rated control capacity X-ray exposure

Standard contact: 30 VDC Charge accumulation
of SE (FPD)
A B C D E F
1A
600_700023.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-29
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable (1) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable from the
upper opening on the MP rear cover.
CAUTION #1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
RDY2-RDY2 terminals before connecting the X-Ray shot cable, to make sure
If the high voltage (such as 100 VAC) is observed in the cable voltage, contact a
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise X-Ray shot cable
care.
u INSTRUCTION u #1
Name: Reusable band Bucky cable
Part No.: LWS-3S V0 1200_700034.ai
u NOTE u
Cable GOOD
Screw
Terminal
Terminal block
NO GOOD
600_700132.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-30
board. terminals.
#1 Connect: Cable terminals u NOTE u
MPX2 MPX1 X-Ray shot cable
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO #1 be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not
necessary.

(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
from the upper opening on the MP rear cover.
12 NC2 12 NC1
u NOTE u
If the second cable and the bucky cable are not present, the procedure is not
Bucky cable necessary. Proceed to the procedure (7).
#1
600_700026.ai
#1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
#1
1200_700035.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-31
board. terminals.
u NOTE u
MPX2 #1 MPX1
X-Ray shot cable No cable terminal may remain depending on the X-ray high voltage generator to
1 5V2 ISO 1 5V1 ISO be connected in some cases. If no cable terminal remains, the procedure is not
necessary.


12 NC2 12 NC1
Bucky cable
#1 600_700028.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-32
(7) Tie the remaining cables and the X-Ray shot cable(s) together, and (8) Retain the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) on the MP rear.
retain with the reusable band(s) (supplied accessory). #1 Retain: Reusable band (supplied accessory)
#1 Retain: Reusable band(s) (supplied accessory) <When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used>
<When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used>
#1
X-Ray shot cable

#1
Bucky cable
1200_700036.ai
Bucky cable 1200_700145.ai <When two X-Ray shot cables and two bucky cables are used>
#1 #2
X-Ray shot cables Bucky cables
X-Ray shot cables
#1
Bucky cables
1200_700146.ai
1200_700037.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-33
u NOTE u
necessary.

#2 Tie: Cables
#1 #3 #2
1200_700033.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-34
7.5.3 Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable (Bucky AC Type)
REFERENCE
The relay incorporated in the AC bucky relay unit needs to be replaced periodically.
Refer to the following for the replacement interval and the replacement procedures.
- Replacement interval
{PM:1.3_Preventive Maintenance Program List}
- Replacement procedures
{MC:2.10_AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional)}

X-ray high voltage generator Bucky Unit
AC100/240V (L)
AC100/240V (L)
AC100/240V (N)
AC100/240V (N)
Shot
Switch 1
SHOT RDY1 (L)
Prep BKY RDY1 (L)
SHOT RDY1 (N)
Shot BKY RDY1 (N)
Switch 2 SHOT RDY2 (L)
RAD BKY RDY2 (L)
SHOT RDY2 (N)
BKY RDY2 (N)
SHOT GO A BKY EXP A
SHOT GO B
BKY EXP B
FGND
FGND
Relay
AHN12205
AHN210 □
AHN210□
AC100/110V : AHN210X0
AC110/120V : AHN210X1
AC200/220V : AHN210Y0
AC220/240V : AHN210Y2
AC Bucky Relay Unit

600_700033.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-35
l SHOT1 RDY1 L/N (Input) the shot switch (first stage) is turned ON.
C: The signal for operating the bucky is output upon completion of the preparation for the SE
l SHOT1 RDY2 L/N (Input) (FPD) exposure.
The signal is generated when the first and second stages of the shot switch on the D: An exposure request signal is output after a predetermined time elapses since the bucky
X-ray high voltage generator are pressed. (RAD signal) operation starts, and X-ray exposure starts.
E: X-ray exposure ends.
l BKY1 RDY2 L (Output) F: Charge accumulation of the SE (FPD) ends.
The signal operates the bucky upon completion of the preparation for the SE
exposure. SHOT1 RDY1/RDY1
SHOT1 RDY2/RDY2
n Contact Capacity
The specifications of relays (K1, K2 and K3) are as follows. BKY1 RDY2/RDY2
l Relay model and rated control capacity Bucky

Coil voltage Rated excitation current BKY1 EXP
AHN210X0: 100/110 VAC 9.0/13.0 mA
X-ray exposure
AHN210X1: 110/120 VAC 8.2/11.8 mA
AHN210Y0: 200/220 VAC 4.5/6.5 mA Charge accumulation
AHN210Y2: 220/240 VAC 4.1/5.9 mA of SE (FPD)
A B C D E F
Standard contact: 250 VAC and 30 VDC
600_700034.ai

1A
018-230-06E
IN2-36
n Mounting the AC Bucky Relay Unit (Optional) (2) Connect the cable terminals with the terminal block of the MPX54A
board.
u NOTE u #1 Connect: Cable terminals
GOOD MPX54A Board (*) (*) AC bucky relay unit
Cable
Screw
MPX2 MPX1
Terminal
MPX2-1 MPX1-1 KA3
MPX2-2 MPX1-2 KA4
MPX2-3 MPX1-3
Terminal block KB3
MPX2-4 MPX1-4
KB4
NO GOOD MPX2-5-1 MPX1-5-1
MPX2-5-2 MPX1-5-2 KC5
KC1
600_700132.ai
KD3
(1) Mount the AC bucky relay unit (optional) on the MP. KD4
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (x4) MPX2-10 MPX1-10
AC bucky relay unit #1 KE3
MPX2-11 MPX1-11
KE4
KF5
KF1
600_700036.ai
*: Short cable (supplied accessory)
MP
1200_700147.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-37
n Procedures for Connecting the Cable u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTION cable, as the band is a UL-standard component. The manufacturer and the part No. of
Measure the voltage between the cables connecting to the RDY1-RDY1 and
the RDY2-RDY2 terminals in all techniques before connecting the X-Ray shot
cables. Check to make sure that the measured voltage conforms to the coil Name: Reusable band
voltages (100/110 VAC, 110/120 VAC, 200/220 VAC and 220/240 VAC) of the relay Part No.: LWS-3S V0
to be used.
If the voltage between cables differs from the coil voltage of the relay, u NOTE u
commission the service personnel of the X-ray equipment to check the cable Abut the cable terminals as shown below when fastening them together.
connection.
If erroneous connection is made, the machine might get damaged. Exercise Cable GOOD
Screw
care. Terminal
CAUTION
Use the cable and the terminal as specified below when connecting the X-Ray Terminal block
shot cable and the bucky cable. When crimping the terminal, use the crimp
nippers as indicated below. If the following specifications of the cable and the
NO GOOD
terminal are not observed, the machine might get damaged.
- Cable: AWG18 to 22 thick
- Terminal: FV1.25-M4 (J.S.T. Connector)
- Crimp nippers: Manufactured by IZUMI; A125
600_700132.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-38
(1) Remove the terminal block covers of the AC bucky relay unit. (2) Insert the X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable from the
#1 Remove: B3x6 (x4) upper opening on the MP rear cover.
AC bucky relay unit #1 #1 Insert: X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable
Covers
X-Ray shot cable
MP
1200_700148.ai Bucky cable
1200_700038.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-39
(3) Connect the cable terminals to the terminal blocks (TB1 and TB2) of X-Ray shot cable
the AC bucky relay unit.
WARNING
TB1 TB2
u NOTE u Bucky cable
1 1
If two X-Ray shot cables and two bucky cables are to be connected, make
2 2
connection of the first cable to the terminal indicated in a white cell and the
second cable to the terminal indicated in a shaded cell shown in the table below. 3 3
The method of connecting the second cable is described in the procedure (4).
4 4
No. TB1 TB2 5 5

6
X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable 6
1 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY1 (L) X-Con BKY Stand AC (L) 7 7
4 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY2 (N) X-Con BKY Bed AC (N) 10 10

600_700050.ai

X-Con BKY Stand FG
X-Con BKY Bed FG
8 X-Con SHOT2 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Stand Exp B
018-230-06E
IN2-40
(4) Insert the second X-Ray shot cable (optional) and the bucky cable X-Ray shot cable
from the MP rear, and connect the cable terminals with the terminal
blocks (TB1 and TB2) of the AC bucky relay unit.
WARNING
Bucky cable
u NOTE u TB1 TB2
If the second X-Ray shot cable and the second bucky cable are not present, the 1 1
procedure is not necessary. Proceed to the procedure (5).
2 2
u NOTE u 3 3
The terminals to be connected with the second X-Ray shot cable and the second 4 4
bucky cable are indicated in white cells in the table below.
5 5
6
6
No. TB1 TB2
7 7
X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable X-Ray shot cable Bucky cable
8 8
1 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY1 (L) X-Con BKY Stand AC (L)

Bucky cable
4 X-Con BKY SHOT1 RDY2 (N) X-Con BKY Bed AC (N)
X-Con BKY Stand FG
X-Con BKY Bed FG
8 X-Con SHOT2 RDY2 (L) X-Con BKY Stand Exp B X-Ray shot cable
600_700051.ai

018-230-06E
IN2-41
(5) Put on the terminal block covers. 7.6 Binding and Checking the Cables
(6) Retain the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) on the MP rear.
CAUTION
<When one X-Ray shot cable and one bucky cable are used> Exercise care not to stumble over the bundle of cables during installation.
one trips over all of them.
(1) Make sure that the X-Ray shot cable(s) and the bucky cable(s) are
bound together.
X-Ray shot cable
(2) Bind the LAN cables together.
#1
Bucky cable
1200_700036.ai
X-Ray shot cables
#1
LAN cable (between MP and MC) X-Ray shot cable(s)
LAN cable (between MP and AP) and the bucky cable(s)
1200_700039.ai
Bucky cables
1200_700037.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-42
7.7 Reinstalling the Covers (5) Put the protruded section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
(1) Reinstall the MP front cover, the rear cover and the top cover.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #1
7.8 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)

u INSTRUCTIONS u
1200_700157.ai
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling. (6) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts.
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine #1 Fix: Anchor nuts (x2)
- The anchor which is to be used when fixing is as per the following. In step 6, Less than 14mm
adjust the depth of the hole so that the anchor is less than 14mm.
Part No.: SANKO TECHNO C-645
Anchor diameter: 6 mm, Pilot hole size: 6.4 mm, Length: 45 mm 1200_700158.ai
(7) Place the MP with fixing bracket on the anchor-fixed bracket, and then
(3) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust fix the MP at two locations on the front and the rear.
from the drilled holes. #1 Tighten: Screws (x4)
u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u
The anchors corresponding to the anchor nut size should be prepared.
#1
#1
1200_700155.ai
1200_700007.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-43
8. Installing the DS 8.2 Attaching the Label
(1) Attach the small size cassette label and lead precaution label.
8.1 Checking the Power Cable #1 Attach: Small size cassette label
WARNING #2 Attach: Lead precaution label
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet before measuring a resistance value. #1 #2
(1) Embed the ferrite core (FC6) on the DS-side of the power cable, connect
the power cable to the DS, and set the power switch to the ON position.
Manufacturer’s
part number
Power cable (DS-side)
FC6 SFT-59SN 0 About 60 mm from the base
1200_700199J.ai
of the cable
1200_700248.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
NOTE
Attach the ferrite core of the DS-side as in the figure below.
Clean the attachment surface with a cloth moistened with ethanol, then attach the
FC6
labels.
1200_700258.ai

(Reference value)
E
E E E
L L N N
N N L
L
600_700005.ai
is continuity.
measurement.
018-230-06E
IN2-44
8.3 Installing the DS 8.3.1 Installing on the Floor
The DS can be installed in the following three ways: NOTE
The floor foot cover is standardly supplied only in Japan. Overseas it is an option.
{IN2:8.3.1_Installing on the Floor}
(1) Remove the screws from the DS bottom cover.
{IN2:8.3.2_Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional)}
- Fixed on the wall with anchors
{IN2:8.3.3_Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)}
NOTE
When installing the 17 x 17 inch size SE into the DS, fixing with anchors is necessary.
#1
1200_700250.ai
(2) Attach the floor foot cover to the DS.

#1 Tighten: Screws (x4)
#1
1200_700005.ai
(3) Install the DS on the floor.
1200_700006.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-45
8.3.2 Fixing the Anchor on the Floor (Optional) (5) Put the protruded section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum 1200_700008.ai
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine (6) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts.
Less than 17mm
#1 Embed: Anchors (x2) 1200_700158.ai
u INSTRUCTION u (7) Remove the screws from the DS bottom cover.

Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes. #1 Remove: B3x12 (x4)
#1
#1
1200_700250.ai
(8) Attach the bracket to the DS.

#1 Tighten: B3x12 (x4)
#1
1200_700007.ai
1200_700010.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-46
(8) Place the DS with fixing bracket on the anchor-fixed bracket, and then 8.3.3 Fixing the Anchor on the Wall (Optional)
fix the DS at two locations on the front and the rear.
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (x4)
INSTRUCTION
When installing the DS on the wall, make sure to check the operability of the DS and
visibility of the LED in advance.
NOTE
#1
The requirements for installing the DS on the wall are as described below.
- Withstand load of the wall: Concrete (Design strength of 18 N/mm2 or greater)
- Installation position:
Lowest: Distance from the floor to the DS base is 150 mm or greater
1200_700011.ai
Highest: Distance from the floor to the DS top is 1200 mm or less
(9) Attach the decorative cover on the front and rear of the DS with a - Anchor bolts: Use only supplied anchor bolts.
magnet.
(1) Make four marks on the wall by an oil-based marker or a center punch.
(2) Drill a hole on the four positions marked on the wall by the oil-based
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use a drill that is suitable for wall hole drilling.
1200_700012.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-47
(4) Embed the anchors in the holes. (7) Fix the fixing bracket to the wall using anchor nuts.
#1 Embed: Anchors (x4) #1 Fix: Anchor nuts (x4)
u INSTRUCTION u #1
#1
1200_700016.ai
(8) Temporarily fix the fixing bracket using the hexagon-headed bolt.
1200_700013.ai #1 Temporarily fix: Hexagon-headed bolts (x4)
(5) Attach the anchor nuts on the two anchors shown above. #1
#1 Attach: Anchor nuts (x2)

#1
1200_700017.ai
1200_700014.ai
(6) Hook the two hook slots of the wall fixing bracket on the anchor/nut
subassembly.
1200_700015.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-48
(9) Remove the DS front cover and the DS rear cover, and remove the (11) Hook the DS hook slot on the hexagon-headed bolt that is temporarily
blind plates that are attached on the hook slots of the rear cover. fixed on the bracket, and then install the DS on the wall.
Remove the DS front cover and the DS rear cover: {MC:3.1_DS Cover} Rear side of DS
REFERENCE
The blind plates that are attached to the hook slots are pasted on the double-sided tape.
1200_700203.ai
Fixing bracket
(10) Reinstall the DS rear cover. for the wall
NOTE
Do not reinstall the DS front cover in this step since it is reinstalled later.
1200_700018E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-49
(12) Fully tighten the hexagon-headed bolt from the front of the DS to fix 8.4 Setting the DS IP Address
the DS on the wall.
#1 Fully tighten: Hexagon-headed bolts (x4) u INSTRUCTION u
#1 - In case of connecting with the FUJIFILM-made AP, the procedure is not required.
- Restart the DS and DX Console after using the Docking Stand Service Utility.
Check and set the following items to use the Docking Stand Service Utility.
- Preparation
- Installing the Docking Stand Service Utility (only if necessary)
- Checking the DS IP address
- Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS
- Setting the LED brightness of the DS (only if necessary)
- Checking the DS firmware version
- Updating the DS firmware version (only if necessary)
- Turning OFF the DS power
- Setting the DX Console
- Setting the second DS IP address (only if necessary)
REFERENCE
The default IP address of the DS is “192.168.0.55”.
1200_700019.ai
(13) Attach the DS front cover and fix it by tightening the six screws at the
bottom.
#1 Tighten: TP3x6 (round head) (x6)
#1 DS front cover
1200_700020E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-50
 Preparation  Installing the Docking Stand Service Utility
(1) Connect the DX Console with the DS via the LAN cable. u NOTE u
NOTE If the Docking Stand Service Utility has already been installed on the DX Console, the
procedure is not necessary.
The DS has two LAN ports. Connect the LAN cable to the port for the DX
Console.
(1) Insert the DR-ID 1200DS Service Tool setup CD into the DVD drive.
For DX Console For SE
REFERENCE
The folder configuration of the setup CD is as below.
1200_700204E.ai
(2) Connect the power cable to the DS, and set the power switch to the
ON position.
REFERENCE
Although the Ready LED (green) may blink when setting the DS power switch to
the ON position, this does not affect operations or functions.
1200_700247.ai
(2) Double-click “DockingStandServiceSetup” in the setup CD.

Welcome to the DockingStandService Setup Wizard window opens.
#1 Double-click: DockingStandServiceSetup
#1
1200_700205.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-51
(3) Click [Next]. (5) Click [Next] to start the installation.
Select Installation Folder window opens. Upon completion of the installation, the Installation Complete window opens.
#1 Click: [Next] #1 Click: [Next]
#1 #1
1200_700206.ai 1200_700208.ai
(6) Click [Close].

(4) Click [Next].
#1 Click: [Close]
Confirm Installation window opens.
#1 Click: [Next]
#1
#1
1200_700209.ai
1200_700207.ai
(7) Confirm that the following DLLs are installed in C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DEMAGLib.
DEMAGCSL.dll
DEMAGMNT.dll
018-230-06E
IN2-52
 Checking the DS IP address (3) Click [Docking stand#1].
(1) Select “FujiFilm” - “DockingStandService” from the [Start] menu. #1 Click: [Docking stand#1]

#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700212.ai
(4) Check the IP address and click [End].

1200_700211.ai #2 Click: [End]
#1
#2
1200_700213.ai
REFERENCE
Default IP address of the DS is set to ”192.168.0.55”.
018-230-06E
IN2-53
 Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS (3) Click [Selector#1] to [Selector#6] and check that the selector LED of
the DS is displayed.
(1) Click [LED/Sound test]. #1 Click: [Selector#1] to [Selector#6]
#1 Click: [LED/Sound test]
#1
#1
1200_700216.ai
1200_700214.ai
REFERENCE
(2) Click [Ready] and check that the Ready LED of the DS is displayed. - The default indication of the Selector#1 LED is as below.
#1 Click: [Ready]
1200_700251.ai
#1 - The default indication of the Selector#1 to #6 LED are as below.

#1: Pink
#2: Blue
#3: Lime Yellow
#4: Purple
#5: Orange
1200_700215.ai
#6: White
REFERENCE
The default indication of the Ready LED is as below.
1200_700251.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-54
(4) Click [Buzzer#1] and check that the DS buzzer sounds. (6) Click [Shutdown].
#1 Click: [Buzzer#1] Docking Stand Service Utility window is closed.
#1
#1
1200_700217.ai
REFERENCE 1200_700220.ai
- Buzzer ON/OFF of the DS can be set with the mute switch of the DS. In the
figure below, the switch is set to buzzer ON. If switching, change to mute.
1200_700218.ai
- When the battery is fully charged, the DS buzzer will sound twice.
(5) After checking the LED and the buzzer sound, click [End].
#1 Click: [End]
#1
1200_700219.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-55
 Setting the LED brightness of the DS (3) Click [Docking stand#1].
If necessary, set the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED. DS LED brightness is displayed.
\
(2) Click [Luminance].

#1 Click: [Luminance]
#1
#1
1200_700222.ai
(4) Set the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED, and click
[Update].
Brightness of the Ready LED and the selector LED have been changed.
1200_700221.ai #1 Input: 1 to 5
#2 Click: [Update]
REFERENCE
Set an integer of 1 to 5 for the brightness of the Ready LED and the selector
LED. The default value is “5” (the state with the highest brightness).
#1
#2
1200_700223.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-56
(5) Click [End].  Checking the DS firmware version
#1 Click: [End]

#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700224.ai
(6) Perform “ Checking the LED and buzzer sounds of the DS” and
check that the LED brightness has already been changed.
1200_700211.ai
#1
1200_700220.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-57
(3) Click [Docking stand#1]. (5) Click [Shutdown].
The DS firmware version displays. The Docking Stand Service Utility window closes.
#1 Click: [Docking stand#1] #1 Click: [Shutdown]
#1
#1
1200_700212.ai 1200_700220.ai
(4) Check the firmware version and click [End]. (6) Check the file name in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD.
#1 Check: S/W Ver.
#2 Click: [End]
#1
1200_700254.ai
The number between “cradle” and “.” of the file name means the firmware
version.
#2
(“16” in the image above)
If the firmware version differs from the number of S/W Ver. which has been
1200_700253.ai
checked in step 4, it is required to update the DS firmware version.
In that case, perform “Updating the DS firmware version”.
018-230-06E
IN2-58
 Updating the DS firmware version (4) Click [Browse] to specify the file name copied in step (1) and click
[Update].
u NOTE u #1 Click: [Browse]
Perform the procedure only when it is required to update the DS firmware version. #2 Click: [Update]
(1) Copy the files in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD to the folder
below.
#1
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\DEMAGLib\Firmware
#2
1200_700255.ai
1200_700254.ai
(5) When the confirmation window opnes, click [OK].

REFERENCE
Since the file name in the “Firmware” folder of the setup CD will be used during
(6) Make sure the installation has completed and click [End].
the next procedure, take it down to another paper. #1 Check: update complete
#2 Click: [End]
(2) Turn the DS power ON while pressing the DS reset switch.

The battery charge mark on the DS is blinking.
Reset switch #1
1200_700237.ai
(3) Select “FujiFilm” - “FirmwareUpdate” from the [Start] menu. #2
The Docking Stand Firmware Update Utility window opens.

1200_700256.ai
(7) Restart the DS.

(8) Check the DS firmware version.
{IN:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address_Checking the DS firmware version}
018-230-06E
IN2-59
 Turning OFF the DS power  Setting the second DS IP address
(1) Set the DS main power switch to the OFF position. u NOTE u
If installing only one DS, this procedure is not necessary.
 Setting the DX console
Up to three DS’s can be installed.
(1) Turn ON the DX Console power. This procedure is an example of setting the second DS IP address.
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, (1) Remove the LAN cable and the power cable of the first DS.
(2) Connect the LAN cable and the power cable to the second DS, and set
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. the DS main power switch to the ON position.

#1 Click: [Address]
DXL04010001.ai
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item], select “CONFIG - SYSTEM CONFIG - 5.

CSL/IDT FUNCTION” and set “Yes” (Uses) to “Use Exposure Support
Device” of No.393. #1
REFERENCE
Setting whether or not to use the DS/indicator (exposure sub-function) with “Use
Exposure Support Device”.
1200_700211.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-60
(5) Click [Docking stand#2]. REFERENCE
#1 Click: [Docking stand#2] - If the IP address and port number of the DS have been already changed from
the default value, input the changed values.
- If the IP address and port number of the DS are lost, restore the IP address.
{IN:Appendix 4.3_Restoring the IP Address of the DS}
(7) Click [OK].

#1 Click: [OK]
#1
#1
1200_700225.ai 1200_700227.ai
(6) Input the default IP address and port number, and click [Addition]. (8) Click [End].
Overwrite the input items to the set value of DS#2 in the configuration file, and the #1 Click: [End]
confirmation window opens.
#3 Click: [Addition]
#1 #2
#1
#3
1200_700228.ai
1200_700226.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-61
(9) Click [Shutdown]. (11) Click [Address].
Docking Stand Service Utility window is closed. #1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
1200_700211.ai
1200_700220.ai
REFERENCE
Since the Docking Stand Service Utility re-reads the configuration file, it is #1 Click: [Docking stand#2]
necessary to restart the Docking Stand Service Utility. Restarting the DS is
unnecessary.

#1
1200_700229.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-62
(13) Input the IP address and port number of the second DS, and click (15) Click [End].
[Update]. #1 Click: [End]
Overwrite the input items to the set value of DS#2 in the configuration file and the
DS, and the confirmation window opens.
#1 Input: IP address (ex. : 192.168.0.56)
#2 Input: port number (ex. : 50001)
#3 Click: [Update]
#1 #2
#3 #1
1200_700232.ai

1200_700230.ai
#1
u NOTE u
- Input the IP address and port No. different from those of the other DS.
- Set any of the following as the port No.
50000, 50001, 50002
(14) Click [OK].

#1 Click: [OK] 1200_700220.ai

#1
1200_700231.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-63
(18) Select “FujiFilm” - “DockingStandService” from the [Start] menu. (21) Check that the IP address and port number have been changed, and
Docking Stand Service Utility window opens. click [End].
(19) Click [Address]. #2 Click: [End]
#1 Click: [Address]
#1
#1
#2
1200_700234.ai
1200_700211.ai
u NOTE u
Continue to perform the following items for the second DS.
(20) Click [Docking stand#2]. -  Checking the LED and buzzer sound of the DS
DS IP address is displayed -  Setting the LED brightness of the DS (only if necessary)
#1 Click: [Docking stand#2] -  Checking the DS firmware version
-  Updating the DS firmware version (only if necessary)
-  Turning OFF the DS power
#1
1200_700233.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-64
9. Installing the PB 9.2 Connect the LAN Cable
CAUTION
9.1 Checking the Power Cable Exercise care not to stumble over the bundle of cables during installation.
WARNING one trips over all of them.
(1) Attach the LAN shield to the PB.
(1) Embed the ferrite core (FC2) on the PB-side of the power cable, #1 Tighten: Screws
connect the power cable to the PB and set the power switch to the ON
position.
Manufacturer’s
part number
#1
Power cable (PB-side)
of the cable
1200_700199A.ai 1200_700325.ai
(2) Measure the resistance value of the power cable. (2) Connect the LAN cable with two ferrite cores to the PB.
(Reference value)
E
E E E
1200_700324.ai
L L N N
u NOTE u
N N L
L - Use the attached 2 m LAN cable for between the PB and the CL. If you use
an LAN cable longer than 2 m, use a HUB and the attached 2 m LAN cable
between the HUB and the PB.
600_700005.ai
- The LAN cable is equipped with two ferrite cores. Connect the LAN cable
(3) Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power connector on the side with the larger ferrite core to the PB.
is continuity.
measurement.
018-230-06E
IN2-65
9.3 Installing the PB 9.3.2 Fixing the Anchor (Optional)
The PB can be installed in the following two ways: (1) Make two marks on the floor by an oil-based marker or a center punch.
{IN2:9.3.1_Installing on the Floor} pen, the center punch or the like.
{IN2:9.3.2_Fixing the Anchor (Optional)} u INSTRUCTIONS u
9.3.1 Installing on the Floor - When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum
(1) Place the PB on the floor. against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
(2) Connect the power cable to the PB.
u INSTRUCTION u
#1
1200_700007.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-66
(5) Remove the rubber feet from the bottom of the PB. (7) Put the protruding section of the anchor through the fixing hole of the
#1 Remove: Screws (x4) bracket, and then position the PB with fixing bracket.
#1 (8) Fix the bracket using anchor nuts at two locations.
#2 Cover: caps (x2)
u INSTRUCTION u
Fix the PB using the two fixing holes on the front side of the PB.
#1
#2
1200_700326.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
Use the screws that has fixed the rubber feet for fixing the brackets.
1200_700343.ai
(6) Attach the brackets to the PB.

#1 Tighten: Screws (x4) (9) Connect the power cable to the PB
#1
1200_700327.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-67
10. Installing the SE  Preparation
(1) Apply the labels to the SE.
CAUTIONS
NOTE
- Do not connect the SE to the power supply unit other than the MP or the DS.
- The green label indicates the upward direction of the SE. Check with the
Otherwise, the connector might get damaged.
customer as to which location is to be used as the upper face before applying
- Exercise care not to drop the connector when connecting/disconnecting the the labels.
SE cable (SE-side). The connector might get damaged.
- The labels may not be pasted on the SE because the attaching surface is dirty
- Make sure that the MP power or the DS power is turned OFF before when applying the labels. In this case, clean the attaching surface with a cloth
connecting/disconnecting the SE cable (SE-side). moistened with ethanol etc.
NOTE #1 Apply: Green labels (two locations)

#2 Apply: Opposite side labels (two locations)
When the SE is mounted on the exposure stand, the SE cable sometimes interfere
with members of the exposure stand, depending on the specifications of the exposure
stand. If the SE cable interferes with the members of the exposure stand, the
interference can be avoided by changing the mounting orientation of the SE cable.
{IN:Appendix 3._Redirecting the SE Cable} #1
SE
#2
600_700146.ai
REFERENCE
The SE power is configured to be automatically turned OFF if an unregistered SE is 1200_700040.ai
connected. A new SE needs to be registered before connecting it.
018-230-06E
IN2-68
(2) Apply plug sheets (gray) or nonslip sheets (black) to the SE. REFERENCE
#1 Apply: Plug sheets or nonslip sheets When the customer demands, nonslip sheets (black) may be applied in the following
(1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE: 4 locations, 1213SE/1214SE: 3 locations) positions on the 1213SE/1214SE.
NOTE 160mm
Apply the plug sheets (gray) or nonslip sheets (black) only when the customer
demands. SE
- 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
SE
1200_700281.ai
100mm
#1

1200_700041.ai
#1 Connect: Cable connector
- 1213SE/1214SE #1
SE MP
#1
SE SE cable
1200_700062.ai
1200_700280.ai

{Operation Manual}
018-230-06E
IN2-69
 Installation Procedures (for DS)  Installation Procedures (for using the SE cable without MP, DS
and PB)
(1) In case of transporting the SE data to the MC (ex. memory exposure
mode), connect the LAN cable for the SE with the DS. (1) Connect the control PC and AP to the HUB and then connect the SE
NOTE cable (optional item or a jig) between control PC and the SE.
The DS has two LAN ports. Connect the LAN cable to the port for the SE.
AP
For DX Console For SE PC
1200_700204E.ai
SE
REFERENCE
There are three ways to connect the LAN cable to the DS. Set the LAN cable with HUB
1. When DS communicates with DX Console:
Connect the LAN cable to the DX Console port.
2. When transport the SE data to the MC:
Connect the LAN cable to the SE port. 1270_700003.ai
3. When both 1 and 2 above are performed: (2) Mount the battery pack on the SE.
Connect the LAN cable to the the DX Console port and SE port.
If the LAN cable is not connected to the DX Console, then the Ready LED and {Operation Manual}
Selector LED of the DS do not functioned.
Core}
(2) Mount the DS connection adapter to the SE.

{Operation Manual}
(4) Turn ON the power of the DS.

{Operation Manual}
018-230-07E
IN2-70
11. Installing the MC / Mounting the 11.1.1 Checking the Power Cable
NIC board to the DX Console WARNING

NOTE
- The procedure depends on whether or not to use the MC in DR-ID 1200. Perform
(1) Connect the power cable to the MC, and set the power switch to the
either procedure of "11.1 Installing the MC" or "11.2 Mounting the NIC board to the
DX Console". ON position.
- In case of the configuration installing the FUJIFILM-made AP, this procedure is not (2) Measure the resistance value of the power cable.
necessary. (Reference value)
11.1 Installing the MC Resistance value Over 100 kΩ ∞ ∞
INSTRUCTION <For use in Japan> <For use in USA> <For use in Europe, etc> <For use in UK, etc>
If the MC is locally procured, carry out the following preparations.

E
- Mounting the network interface board E E E
{IN:Appendix 2._Installing the MC Network Interface Board} L L N N
- Installing the MC application software N N L
{MC:6.2_Preparing Before Installation} L
600_700045.ai
is continuity.
measurement.
018-230-06E
IN2-71
11.1.2 Connecting the Network Cables 11.2 Mounting the NIC Board to the DX Console
(1) Attach ferrite cores (FC1) to the LAN cables between the MC and the
DX Console and between the MC and the MP, and then connect the 11.2.1 Mounting the NIC Board
LAN cables to the MC.
#1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MC and the DX Console) CAUTION
#2 Connect: LAN cable (between the MC and the DX Console)
#3 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MC and the MP) When connecting or disconnecting the cable connector, wear an antistatic wrist
#4 Connect: LAN cable (between the MC and the MP)
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (MC-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1 About 60 mm from the base (2) Remove the cover.
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable #1 Pull: Lever
#2 Remove: Cover
DX Console
#1
MC MP
HUB
#3#4 #2
#1#2 Cover
1200_700042.ai
600_700102.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-72
(3) Pull up the latch, and remove the slot bracket. 11.2.2 Connecting the Network Cables
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the slot bracket as indicated in the figure below.
(1) Attach the ferrite core (FC1) to the LAN cable between the MP and the
#1 Pull up: Latch DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the DX Console.
#2 Remove: Slot bracket #1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the MP and the DX Console)
#2 Connect: LAN cable (between the MP and the DX Console)
Manufacturer’s
part number
side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
DX Console
#2 #1
MP
600_700103.ai

(5) Lower the latch, and fix the network interface board. #1#2
(5)
1200_700104.ai
(4)
600_700104.ai

018-230-06E
IN2-73
 Installation Procedures (for DS) INSTRUCTION
Attach the ferrite cores of the DS-side as in the figure below.
(1) Attach the ferrite cores (FC1, FC4, FC5) to both sides of the LAN cable
between the DS and the DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the FC4
DX Console.
#1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the DS and the DX Console)
#2 1 coil: Ferrite cores (FC4x2: between the DS and the DX Console, and FC5
between the DS and the HUB)
#3 Embed: Ferrite core (FC5: two LAN cables of the DS)
#4 Connect: LAN cables (between the DS and the DX Console, and between
the DS and the HUB)
Manufacturer’s 1200_700239.ai

part number
LAN cable (DX Console- NOTE
side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1 The DS has two LAN ports. Check the ports when connecting the LAN cable.
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable For DX Console For SE
LAN cable (DS-side)
1200_700199H.ai
instruction.
LAN cable (DS-side) 1200_700204E.ai
FC5 TFT-102010N 0 Refer to the following

instruction. REFERENCE
When connecting the LAN cable to the DS, set the network connection with
1200_700199I.ai
HUB DX Console reference to the following.

#2#3#4 - If setting the network connection by connecting the LAN cable to the port for
the DX Console, the DS and the DX Console are synchronized, and the Ready
LED and the panel selection LED are lit.
#1#4 - If setting the local network connection by connecting the LAN cable to the port
for the SE, it is possible to work the same (image acquisition etc.) as the SE
wired connection when the SE is mounted on the DS.

(1) Attach the ferrite core (FC1) to the LAN cable between the PB and the
DX Console, and connect the LAN cable to the DX Console.
DS #1 1 coil: Ferrite core (FC1: between the PB and the DX Console)
1200_700240.ai
#2 Connect: LAN cable (between the PB and the DX Console)
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (DX Console-side)

1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
018-230-06E
IN2-74
12. Installing the Access Point (3) Set the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel to the same
Install the access point and set the wireless connection without encryption. IP address: 192.168.0.xxx
INSTRUCTION u NOTE u
Setting the MAC address filtering is performed in “14. Installing the RU Software”. Set the IP address other than “192.168.0.50”.
u NOTE u (4) Input the IP address for the access point via the browser and then
click [Cancel].
The procedure depends on the access point types.
- DAP-1665 (Locally Procured Item)
{IN2:12.1_In Case of the D-Link}
- DAP-2553, DAP-2695 (Locally Procured Item)
- FUJIFILM-made AP
{IN2:12.2_In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP}
12.1 In Case of the D-Link

 Login 600_700285.ai
(1) Attach the antenna to the access point. u NOTE u

u NOTE u The IP address, login name and password to input are different according to the
(5) Input the login name and password for the access point and then click
(2) Connect the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel with the [Log In].
access point via the LAN cable. Login name: admin
u NOTE u Password: None
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN1 port of the access point.
REFERENCE
600_700286.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-75
 LAN Port Settings  Login Password Settings
(1) Select “LAN SETUP” menu, change the following LAN port settings (1) Select “MAINTENANCE” menu, input the login password and then
and then click [Save Settings]. click [Save Settings].
Item Set value New Password: fuj1Film
My LAN Connection is Static IP Verify Password: fuj1Film
IP Address 192.168.0.25
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address *1 192.168.0.10
Primary DNS Server *2 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server *2 0.0.0.0
*1 Input the MC IP address.
*2 Since this cannot be set with a blank field, input “0.0.0.0”.
600_700286_2.ai
600_700288.ai
600_700287.ai
600_700288.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-76
 Wireless Settings l Login
REFERENCE (1) Input the login name and password for the access point and then click
[Log In].
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following. Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
u NOTE u
- Set the network name (SSID) that does not overlap with the surrounding.
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 600_700286.ai
u NOTE u
detection.
018-230-06E
IN2-77
l Wireless Settings (for using the 5 GHz) (3) Perform the 5 GHz wireless setting.
Item Set value
Item Set value
WIRELESS MODE:
802.11 Mode Mixed 802.11n and 802.11a
1200_700357E.ai
(2) Disable the 2.4 GHz wireless setting. {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Item Set value *2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
2.4GHZ WIRELESS NETWORK SETTINGS: 11 CH can be selected.
Enable Wireless Unchecked Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected.
1200_700358E.ai
1200_700359E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-78
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication 5GHZ WIRELESS SECURITY SETTINGS:
Item Set value
1200_700274_2.ai

1200_700360E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-79
l Wireless Settings (for using the 2.4 GHz) (2) Perform the 2.4 GHz wireless setting.
Item Set value
2.4GHZ WIRELESS NETWORK SETTINGS:
Item Set value
WIRELESS MODE:
802.11 Mode Mixed 802.11n and 802.11a
1200_700357E.ai
*2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
1200_700363E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-80
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication 2.4 GHZ WIRELESS SECURITY SETTINGS:
Item Set value
1200_700274_3.ai

1200_700364E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-81
(5) Disable the 5 GHz wireless setting. l Saving the settings
Item Set value
(1) Click [Save Settings] on the top of the screen.
1200_700362E.ai
1200_700366E.ai
600_700291.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-82
 Confirming the MAC Address  Installing the Access Point
(1) Input the IP address, login name, and password for the access point (1) Fix the access point.
via the browser. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual of the purchased instrument for
IP address: 192.168.0.25 the way of fixing.
Login name: admin (2) Attach the ferrite core (FC3) to the AP-side of LAN cable between the
Password: fuj1Film MP and the AP, and connect the LAN cable to the AP.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (AP-side)
Manufacturer’s
part number
600_700286.ai

(2) Select “Status” menu and confirm the MAC address. FC7 TFT274015S 3 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
u NOTE u
1200_700199D.ai
The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT
CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not
- For 5 GHz - For 2.4 GHz
600_700291_2.ai
point.
018-230-06E
IN2-83
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform the following procedures only when changing the wireless
communication to the stealth mode.
REFERENCE
invisible.
1200_700309.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-84
12.2 In Case of the FUJIFILM-made AP (3) Attach the ferrite cores (AFC4, AFC) to the both side of LAN cable
between the FUJIFILM-made AP and the isolator, and connect the
FUJIFILM-made AP to the SE.
 Preparations
#1 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC4: FUJIFILM-made AP-side of the LAN cable)
(1) Remove and dispose the factory management label on the FUJIFILM- #2 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC: Isolator-side of the LAN cable)
made AP. #3 Connect: LAN cable (between the FUJIFILM-made AP and the isolator)
#4 Connect: SE-LAN cable (between the isolator and the SE)
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (FUJIFILM-made

AP-side)
AFC4 E04SR200917 0
1200_700199G.ai of the cable
LAN cable (Isolator-side)

AFC E04SR130525A 0 About 60 mm from the base
Factory management 1200_700199F.ai of the cable
label
700_700076E.ai
REFERENCE
(2) Attach the ferrite core (AFC1) to the both side of USB cable between When connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and the SE via a wired network,
the DX console and the FUJIFILM-made AP, and connect the USB connect the supplied isolator shown in the figure below.
cable. DX Console
SE
#1 Embed: Ferrite core (AFC1 x2: between the DX Console and the FUJIFILM-
made AP)
#2 Connect: USB cable (between the DX Console and the FUJIFILM-made AP) FUJIFILM-made
Isolator
AP
Manufacturer’s
part number
USB cable (DX Console-side

and FUJIFILM-made AP-
AFC1 E04SR130525A 0 side)
1200_700199F.ai About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
NOTE
A USB cable is not supplied. Prepare the USB 2.0 cable which length is 50 cm or
less.Connector type for inserting into the FUJIFILM-made AP side is a Micro-B
700_700074E.ai
type.
018-230-06E
IN2-85
(4) Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the PC or on the mobile. ● Installing on the PC
INSTRUCTION FUJIFILM-made AP.
- The FUJIFILM-made AP antenna is mounted on the LED surface. When If dirty, clean the FUJIFILM-made AP with a cloth moistened with ethanol
installing the FUJIFILM-made AP, install the LED surface towards the SE in etc.
consideration of the radio directivity shown below. Do not install the FUJIFILM-
made AP at where it is hidden by the Kangaroo box of the mobile etc.
Antenna position
1200_700288.ai
II. Stick the included Velcro tapes on the rear side of the PC display.
If dirty, clean the rear side of the PC display with a cloth moistened with
ethanol etc.
AP
1200_700287E.ai
- Install the FUJIFILM-made AP using Velcro tapes or clamps, etc. so that the
USB cable does not fall away from the PC and the FUJIFILM-made AP.
1200_700289.ai
1200_700291.ai
III. Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the rear side of the PC display.

1200_700290.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-86
● Installing on the mobile n Installing the RDIS driver
FUJIFILM-made AP. (1) Select “Control Panel” from the [Start] menu.
If dirty, clean the FUJIFILM-made AP with a cloth moistened with ethanol
etc.
1200_700288.ai
II. Stick the included Velcro tapes on the top surface of the mobile.
If dirty, clean the top surface of the mobile with a cloth moistened with DXL03020210.ai
ethanol etc. The “All Control Panel Items” window opens.

(2) Click [Device Manager].
The “Device Manager” window opens.
(3) Double-click “RNDIS/EthernetGadget”.
1200_700292.ai
III. Install the FUJIFILM-made AP on the top surface of the mobile.

700_700057E.ai
The “RNDIS/EthernetGadget Properties” window opens.

1200_700293.ai

{Operation Manual}
018-230-06E
IN2-87
(4) Click [Update Driver]. (6) Click “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”.
700_700060E.ai
700_700058E.ai
The “Update Driver Software” window opens. (7) Select “Show All Devices”and click [Next].
(5) Click “Browse my computer for driver software”.
700_700061E.ai
700_700059E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-88
(8) Click [Have Disk]. (11) Click [Next].
700_700062E.ai 700_700068E.ai
The “Install From Disk” window opens. The “Update Driver Warning” window opens.
(9) Click [Browse]. (12) Click [Yes].
700_700063E.ai
The “Windows Security” window opens.

700_700066E.ai (13) Select “Install this driver software anyway”.
The “Lotate File” window opens. The “Windows has successfully updated your driver software” window opens.
(10) Insert the supplied CD into the Jig drive, select “rndis_v6_ff_V011.inf”,
and click [Open].
700_700067E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-89
(14) Click [Close]. (18) Disable the network devices except “Remote NDIS6 based Device”.
700_700072E.ai
(19) Change the IP address of the “Remote NDIS6 based Device” network
device shown below.
IP address: 192.168.0.10
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
700_700070E.ai
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
(15) Confirm that “Remote NDIS6 based Device” appears in “Network

adapters”.
700_700071E.ai

(17) Select “Control Panel”- [Network and Sharing Center] - [Change

adapter settings] from the [Start] menu.
018-230-06E
IN2-90
 Setting the AP Country Code (3) Copy the zip file (AP_Countrycode.zip) supplied by ECN to the PC (DX
Console) that the MC has been installed with and then unzip it in this
u INSTRUCTION u PC.
To set the AP country code, the RNDIS driver needs to be installed and the DX u INSTRUCTION u
Console IP address needs to be set in advance. Refer to the DR-ID 1200 Service
Manual for the procedure. Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
The AP radio function is turned OFF at the factory. Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC (DX Console) that the MC has been
installed with and then unzip it in this PC.
Be sure to set the AP country code in order to implement the
REFERENCE
wireless connection.
For outside Japan, the batch file for setting the country code is distributed by
(1) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar ECN.
and press the [Enter] key. ECN Country
(2) When the following window opens, check that it is possible to enter 2015-E-0203 USA
“fujifilm” into the password area and click [Login]. 2015-E-0252 Canada
2015-E-0249 Europe
2015-E-0254 China
2015-E-0266 Taiwan
2015-E-0270 Russia, Serbia
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, Nicaragua,
Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand, Hong Kong, India, Thailand,
Singapore, Vietnam, Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel,
2015-E-0271 Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Morocco, Algeria, South Korea,
Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, the Dominican Republic,
Bangladesh, the Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait, El
Salvador, (Ecuador)
2015-E-0253 Indonesia
700_700051E.ai 2015-E-0272 Qatar, Honduras
(4) Execute the batch file (region_set_to_xx.bat).
1200_700300.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-91
(5) After the following window appears, press the <Enter> key.  Login
and press the [Enter] key.
(2) When the following window opens, enter “fujifilm” into the password
1200_700301.ai area and click [Login].
Setting of country code begins.
When the setting is complete, the command prompt is automatically terminated.
NOTE
If the following window is displayed, perform step (1) again after confirming that
the connection and the IP address are correct.
1200_700302.ai
700_700051E.ai
REFERENCE
The FUJIFILM-made AP situation and display of the AP setting window before
and after setting the country code is as follows.
- FUJIFILM-made AP
Before setting: AP WIRELESS LED is unlit.
After setting: AP WIRELESS LED is lit.
Before setting After setting
1200_700337E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-92
- Display of the AP setting window for “Channel”, “Mac address” and “Transmit  Troubleshooting
power”
Before setting: “--” is displayed. l Phenomena
After setting: The set value is displayed.
The AP country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
Before setting implemented, or all of the windows close.
1200_700339.ai
l Probable cause
- There are files missing that are required for the batch file.
- AP IP address is not “192.168.0.25”.
l Countermeasure / Action
Unzip the zip file including the batch file again, check that the AP IP address is
“192.168.0.25”, and execute the batch file.
After setting
1200_700338E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-93
 Setting the Login Password  Wireless Settings
(1) Select “Password” from the “Detail Configuration” menu, input the (1) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar
new password and click [Submit]. and press the [Enter] key.
New Password: fuj1Film (2) When the following window opens, enter “fuj1Film” into the password
Confirm New Password: fuj1Film area and click [Login].
1200_700379E.ai
(2) Select “Restart”. 700_700051E.ai
(3) Select “General” from the “General Configuration” menu and make
settings of the access point as necessary.
1200_700380E.ai
(3) Click [Yes].
700_700053E.ai
1200_700381E.ai
Restart the AP.
018-230-06E
IN2-94
 NOTE  u NOTE u
Do not change the settings except following items. - In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44,
Item Set value be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
Channel Bandwidth 20 MHz or 40 MHz GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
Channel *1 One of 1 CH to 165 CH - In accordance with the Radio Law of Egypt, the dual channel cannot be used
One of FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, outdoors.
SSID *2 - When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel
Network Authentication OPEN Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
*1 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH
to 11 CH can be selected. In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, u NOTE u
channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected. When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then
Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected. perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected. When the with the weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH can - In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
be selected. with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the
Korea: Do not select 48CH to 165CH for Radio Law compliance. detection.
Other countries: Channels except 52CH to 165CH can be selected. - If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
When the panels of DR-ID 600 series are used at the same time, only one of communications will be interrupted, and the channel will be changed. After the
channels 36 CH, 40 CH, 44 CH or 48 CH can be used. channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
*2 Do not set the SSID except FUJIAP01, FUJIAP02 or FUJIAP03. Match the set value again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless
with the ESSID of the Edit Configuration. communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} automatically follow over to the AP channel. The wireless communications will be
REFERENCE
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT search operation.
CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following. The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for
{IN: Appendix 7_Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point} checking. For the procedure for checking the log, refer to the following.
- When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently {MT:7._Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log}
used can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
018-230-06E
IN2-95
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication Network Authentication
WPA2-PSK
between the SE and the AP and line disconnection will appear. *1
If non-stealth wireless communication is used, the wireless communication AES
automatically resumes between the SE and the AP when the power to the AP Encryption Mode When the network authentication is OPEN, this item is not
displayed and the setting is not required.
- On the other hand, if stealth wireless communication is used for the DR-ID 600 Pre-Shared Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34]
series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication *1 Set the ENCRYPTION in EDIT CONFIGURATION to “ON”.
does not automatically resume between the DR-ID 600 series SE and the *2 Match the passphrase with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting in EDIT ONFIGURATION.
AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Item Set value
Stealth Mode ENABLE
1200_700304E.ai
1200_700306E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-96
 Saving the Settings The following window which has been restarting the access point opens.
CAUTION
- If you skip this operation, all of the settings are not changed from the default.
- Click [submit] promptly after make settings. If it takes five minutes or more
for changing the settings, the system returns to the login window.
(1) Click [Submit] and select “Restart”.
700_700064E.ai
(3) Return to the login window and confirm that the modified items are
reflected.
REFERENCE
If the following winows opens, click the update button after about 20 seconds,
and confirm that the login window opens.
700_700055E.ai
(2) Click [Yes].
700_700065E.ai
700_700056E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-97
 Confirming the MAC Address  Confirming the Stealth Mode Settings
NOTES u INSTRUCTION u
- The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT Perform the following procedures only when changing the wireless communication to
CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not enter the stealth mode.
the “:” (e.g.: 1cbdb98a00dc).
- For the SE to discriminate the access points correctly, the BSSID settings is required (1) Start up the InSSIDer etc. and confirm that the stealth mode SSID is
even though there are more than one access points nearby, and there are same invisible on the target channel.
ESSID within the access point.
REFERENCE
(1) Select “System” from the “Status” menu and confirm the MAC There is no problem if the SSID is “Unknown” or the target MAC address is
address. invisible.
1200_700309.ai
700_700054E.ai
018-230-06E
IN2-98
13. Installing the DX Console n Wake on LAN
The machine is equipped with the Wake on LAN function which automatically boots up
upon startup of the CL.
n Installing the DX Console Refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual for the setting method.
NOTE REFERENCE
- After attaching the following ferrite cores (FC1), connect the cables. The MAC address of the MC is required during the setting operation on the CL. The
MAC address of the MC appears by selecting “Network Address” in the “MUTL”.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable between the MP

or MC and the DX Console
FC1 E04SR200932 1 (DX Console-side)
1200_700199B.ai Within 60 mm from the base
of the cable
LAN cable between the

hospital LAN and the DX
FC1 E04SR200932 1 Console (DX Console-side)
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the keyboard

(DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 2
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the mouse (DX
Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 2
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the card reader
(DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
USB cable of the barcode
reader (DX Console-side)
FC1 E04SR200932 1
1200_700199B.ai
of the cable
- When using the HUB for connecting the LAN cable, refer to the below and embed
the ferrite core (FC3) into the HUB-side of LAN cable.
Core}
- Be sure to make [Device Color] set in [IIP Service Utility] – [Device Setting] coincide
with the LED color set to the SE.
018-230-06E
IN2-99
14. Installing the RU Software 14.1 In Case of the Configuration Installing the
Describe the following two procedures.
MC Application in the DX Console
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console n Flow of the Installation Procedures of the RU Software
START
NOTE
- “In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console”, the 14.1.1 Network Settings
installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP is included.
- Install the RU software programs after the DX Console setting is complete. 14.1.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
- The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows. 14.1.3 Installing the RU Software
Item IP address
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10 14.1.4 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock
MP1 192.168.0.20
MP2 192.168.0.21 14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version
AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30 14.1.6 Configuration Settings
SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31 14.1.7 Setting the DX Console
14.1.8 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
SE3 WIRELESS 192.168.0.42 the SE Country Code)
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33
SE4 WIRELESS 192.168.0.43 14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34
14.1.10 Updating SE Application Software Version
- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to 14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE
cause the IP addresses to duplicate.
14.1.14 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data
14.1.15 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP Address
14.1.16 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC
14.1.17 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME
14.1.18 Checking the MC_ID_MODE
14.1.19 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address Filtering)
END
018-230-07E
IN2-100
14.1.1 Network Settings (2) Click [Network and Sharing Center].
The procedure depends on whether the FUJIFILM-made AP is installed or not. The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
- Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP #1 Click: [Network and Sharing Center]
{IN2:14.1.1_n Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP: Installing and
Setting the NIC Board to the DX Console}
- Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP
{IN2:14.1.1_n Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP}
n Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP: Installing and Setting

the NIC Board to the DX Console
l Installing the NIC
(1) Installing the network interface board in the DX Console.
#1
{IN2:11.2_Mounting the NIC board to the DX Console}
l Setting the NIC/Telnet

(1) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu.
#1 Click: [Start] menu 600_700238.ai
#2 Click: [Control Panel]

#2 (3) Click [Change adapter settings].
The Network Connections window opens.
#1 Click: [Change adapter settings]
#1
#1 600_700237.ai
600_700239.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-101
(4) Rename “Local Area Connection” to “Eth0”, and “Local Area (6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
Connection 2” to “Eth1”. The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens.
u NOTE u #1 Select: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
#2 Click: [Properties]
Be sure to rename the Eth0/Eth1.
Otherwise, errors may occur, for example, software update.
#1 Rename: “Local Area Connection” to “Eth0”

#2 Rename: “Local Area Connection 2” to “Eth1”
#1 #2
#1
#2
600_700242.ai
(7) Click the [Use the following IP address:] radio button, and then input
the IP address below.
- IP address: 192.168.0.10
600_700240.ai
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(5) Select “Eth1”, and then select [Properties] from the right-click menu. #2 Input: IP address, Subnet mask
The Network Properties dialog opens.
#1 Right-click: Eth1
#2 Click: [Properties]
#1
#2
#1
#2 600_700241.ai
600_700243.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-102
(8) Click [OK]. (10) Click [←].
Return to the Network Properties dialog. Return to the Network and Sharing Center window.
#1 Click: [OK] #1 Click: [←]
#1
600_700246.ai
(11) Confirm that “Eth0” and “Eth1” have appeared at “Connections:”, and
then click [←].
Return to the All Control Panel Items window.
#1 Verify: Eth0 and Eth1
#2 Click: [←]
#1
#2
600_700244.ai
(9) Click [OK].

Return to the Network Connections window.
#1 Click: [OK] #1
600_700247.ai
REFERENCE
The setting procedure up to here is for NIC, and from here is for Telnet.

The Programs and Features window opens.
#1 Click: [Programs and Features]
#1
600_700245.ai
#1
600_700248.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-103
(13) Click [Turn Windows features on or off]. (16) Click [Administrative Tools].
The Windows Features window opens. The Administrative Tools window opens.
#1 Click: [Turn Windows features on or off] #1 Click: [Administrative Tools]
#1
600_700249.ai
(14) Place a checkmark to “Telnet Client” and “Telnet Server”, then click
#1
[OK]. 600_700252.ai
Return to the Programs and Features window. (17) Double-click “Services”.

#1 Check ON: “Telnet Client” and “Telnet Server”
The Services window opens.
#2 Click: [OK]
#1 Double-click: Services
#1
#2 600_700250.ai
(15) Click [←]. #1 600_700253.ai
Return to the All Control Panel Items window.

#1 Click: [←]
#1
600_700251.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-104
(18) Select “Telnet”, and then select [Properties] from the right-click menu. (20) Click [x] on the upper right side of the window.
The Telnet Properties (Local Computer) dialog opens. The Services window closed and return to the Administrative Tools window.
#1 Right-click: Telnet #1 Click: [x]
#2 Click: [Properties] #1
600_700256.ai
(21) Click [x] on the upper right side of the window.

The Administrative Tools window closed.
#1 Click: [x]
#1
#1
600_700257.ai
#2
600_700254.ai (22) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu.
(19) Select “Automatic” from the “Startup type:” pull-down menu and click #1 Click: [Start] menu
[OK]. #2 Click: [Control Panel]
Return to the Services window.
#1 Select: Automatic #2
#2 Click: [OK]
#1 #1 600_700237.ai
(23) Click [Windows Firewall].

#2 600_700255.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-105
(24) Select [Advanced settings]. (27) Select [Exit] from [File] menu.
The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens. The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
#1 Select: Advanced settings #1 Click: [File] menu
#2 Click: Exit
#1 #2
#1
600_700267.ai

600_700264.ai
(25) Select [Inbound Rules]. u INSTRUCTION u
Follow the procedures below after setting the NIC/Telnet.
#1 {IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
600_700265.ai
"Enable Rule".
The "Enabled" of [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] changes to "Yes".
#2 Click: Enable Rule
#1
#2
600_700266.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-106
n Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP l Setting the IP address
l Confirming the driver Setting the IP address.
(1) Select “Control Panel” - [Device Manager] from the [Start] menu (1) Click [Control Panel] from [Start] menu.
and confirm that the RNDIS driver (Remote NDIS6 based Device) is The All Control Panel Items window opens.
installed as the network adapter. #1 Click: [Start] menu
#2
#1 600_700237.ai
700_700071E.ai
(2) Click [Network and Sharing Center].
REFERENCE The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.

When the RNDIS driver is not installed, perform the procedures (1) to (16) in (3) Confirm that “Unidentified network” is set to “Public network” and
“ Installing the RNDIS driver” of “12.2 In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP”. select “Change adapter settings”.
{IN2:12.2_In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP  Installing the RNDIS driver}
600_712030.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-107
(4) Change the adapter name of the local area connection, enable/disable, (6) Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click [Properties].
and the IP address as shown in the following table.
Wired local area Wireless Remote NDIS6based
network network network
Pattern 1:
Eth2 disabled
In case of a wired Eth0 Eth1
(automatic
connection with the hospital (172.16.1.20) aquisition)
(192.168.0.10)
network
Pattern 2:
Eth2 disabled
In case of a wireless Eth0 Eth1
(automatic
connection with the hospital aquisition) (172.16.1.20) (192.168.0.10)
network
REFERENCE
Following figure shows an example when connecting the hospital LAN via the
wireless network. 600_712031.ai
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.

(7) Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
I.
II.
700_700075E.ai
III.
600_712033.ai
(5) Right-click “Eth1” and select “Properties”. I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 192.168.0.10)
The “Eth1 Properties” window opens. II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
NOTE
Set the IP address in this procedure to connect to the SE.
(8) Click [OK].

The system returns to the “Eth0 Properties” window.
(9) Click [Cancel].
018-230-07E
IN2-108
l Setting the network priority l Addition of components
(1) Select “Advanced Settings” from the [Advanced] menu. Installing additional Windows components.
REFERENCE
When the menu bar is not displayed, press the [Alt] key. The All Control Panel Items window opens.
#1 Click: [Start] menu
The “Advanced Settings” window opens. #2 Click: [Control Panel]
(2) Set [Connections] and [Bindings for xxx] area (“xxx” is the connection #2
name) to be displayed in order from highest to lowest priority.
When changing the network priority, select the target protocol and click the up-arrow
button or down-arrow button.
- In case of a wireless connection with the hospital network, set the network
priority in the following order.
Eth1 → Eth0 (Wireless) → Eth2 (Wired)
- In case of a wired connection with the hospital network, set the network priority
in the following order. #1 600_700237.ai
Eth1 → Eth0 (Wired) → Eth2 (Wireless)

(3) Click [OK]. The “Programs and Features” window opens.
The system returns to the “Network Connections” window. (3) Select “Turn Windows features on or off”.
REFERENCE
- When the wireless networks of the DX Console connects the “FUJIAPxx”
access point, the connection must be cancelled. When the setting becomes
“Auto Connect”, select [Network and Internet] - [Manage wireless networks]
DXL03020257.ai
and the auto connection must be cancelled. The “Windows Features” window opens.
- Connecting the “Eth0” adapter to the hospital network via the wireless LAN is
confirmed.
018-230-07E
IN2-109
(4) Place a checkmark to the following items. l Setting the Telnet server
Server” Active the Microsoft FTP Service.
all of items under “Web Management Tools” (1) Click [←].
- “Telnet Client” The system returns to the “All Control Panel Items” window.
- “Telnet Server”
(2) Click [Administrative Tools].
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
(3) Double-click “Service”.
DXL03020321.ai
The “Service” window opens.

(4) Right-click “Telnet” and select “Properties”.
600_712029.ai → The “Telnet Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.
REFERENCE
- “ ” indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
same time.
(5) Click [OK].

Upon completion of installation, the system returns to the “Programs and Features”
window.
018-230-07E
IN2-110
(5) Select “General” tab and “Automatic” from the “Startup type” pull- l Setting the Firewall
down menu, and then click [OK].
#1 Click: [Start] menu
#2
600_712302.ai
The system returns to the “Service” window.

(6) Close the “Service” window.
The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
(7) Close the “Administrative Tools” window. #1 600_700237.ai

(2) Click [Windows Firewall].
The “Windows Firewall” window opens.
(3) Select “Advanced settings”.
DXL03020259.ai
The “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security” window opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-111
(4) Select “Inbound Rules”. (6) Select “Exit” from “File” menu.
DXL03020263.ai
DXL03020260.ai
(5) Right-click “FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)” and select The system returns to the “Windows Firewall” window.
“Enable Rule”. (7) Close the “Windows Firewall” window.
DXL03020261.ai
The “Enabled” of “FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)” changes to “Yes”.
DXL03020262.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-112
14.1.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL (2) Exit from the CL software, and display the normal Windows screen.
REFERENCE
n Installing the RU PC-TOOL
When you click the Shut Down button of the CL software, the pop-up menu
(1) Turn ON the power of the machine. appears for prompting to exit from the system. When you click [OK] in the pop-up
menu while pressing the shift key on the keyboard, the CL software terminates
u INSTRUCTION u and the Windows screen opens.
When the CL power is turned ON for the first time, do so after one of two SE’s, if Keep pressing the shift key until the message of termination processing in
connected, is removed. progress disappears.
This is because the default IP address (IP address when shipped out from the
#1 Click: [Shut Down]
If two SE’s are connected therefore, the SE cannot be identified due to the #2 Click: [OK] (click while pressing the shift key on the keyboard)
duplicate address, resulting in an error.
REFERENCES
If the Wake on LAN setting is not completed, turn ON the power in the following #1
order:
(2) Turn ON the CL power.
#2
1200_700143E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-113
(3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CL. (5) Check that the installation location is “For FTP-Server”, and click [SET].
Upon inserting the install disk into the DVD drive, the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window RU PC-TOOL Setup start window (wizard window) opens.
automatically starts. #1 Verify: For FTP-Server
(4) Click [INSTALL]. #2 Click: [SET]
A window for selecting the installation location opens. Installation location
#1 Click: [INSTALL] selection window
Set Up PC-TOOL window #1
#2
#1 RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window

(wizard window)
Installation location
selection window
1200_700078.ai
600_700054.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-114
(6) Click [Next]. l Install the MC application
The window appears, prompting to start the installation (wizard window).
(1) Select “.\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION”
#1 Click: [Next]
pull-down menu on the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window , and then click
RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window [EXECUTE].
(wizard window) The MC Installer dialog opens.
#1 Select: .\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
#1
#1
#2
Window prompting to install
(wizard window)
1200_700082.ai
(2) Click [OK].

The MC application is installed and the dialog to confirm the installation opens.
#1 Click: [OK]
600_700055.ai
#1
(7) Click [Install] and start installation. 600_700259.ai

window) opens. (3) Click [OK].
(8) Click [Finish]. #1 Click: [OK]
Upon clicking [Finish], the Command Prompt window opens. When the Command
Prompt window appears, press any key on the keyboard. #1
The Command Prompt window appears three times.
600_700277.ai
(4) Click [OK].

The “Welcome to the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-115
(5) Click [Next]. (7) Confirm that the “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot
#1 Click: [Next] timecheck box is checked, and then click [Install].
#1 Verify: utomatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time
#2 Click: [Install]
#1
#1
#2
1200_700105.ai
The “License Agreement” window opens.

1200_700107.ai
(6) Click [I Agree]. The “Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard” window opens.
#1 Click: [I Agree]
(8) Click [Finish].
#1 Click: [Finish]
#1
#1
1200_700106.ai

1200_700108.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-116
(9) Click [OK]. n Install the MC application
Return to the desktop screen.
#1 Click: [OK]
u INSTRUCTION u
The following procedures are not required when installing the MC application V3.4 or
earlier.
#1 l Install the MC application

600_700260.ai
(10) Remove the install disk from the DVD drive. application disk into the drive.
(11) Restart the CL. (2) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer.
NOTE
If any error occurs during installation, reinstall the MC application after uninstalling it. (3) Select “.\install\local\Install.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION” area, and
Follow the procedures below to uninstall the MC application. click [EXECUTE].
1. Insert the install disk into the DVD drive. #1 Select: .\install\local\Install.bat
The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window starts. #2 Click: [EXECUTE]
3. Click [OK].
#1
#2
800_700208.ai
800_700209.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-117
(4) Press the <Y> key on the keyboard. (7) Select Repair and click [Next].
#1Select: Repair
(5) Input “1” as the “Network Configuration” setting. #2Click: [Next]
#1
800_700210.ai
#2
800_700215.ai
The Setup Complete window opens.

(8) Click [Finish].
800_700211.ai

The setup wizard window opens.
#1
800_700212.ai
Upon completion of the installation, the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup window opens.
(9) Click [OK].
#1
800_700213.ai
The Welcome to the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard window opens.

018-230-07E
IN2-118
(10) Click [Next]. (12) Comfirm that “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time” is
checked and click [Install].
800_700216.ai
The License Agreement window opens. 800_700218.ai
The Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard window opens.

(11) Click [I Agree].
800_700217.ai
The Installation options window opens. 800_700219.ai
Upon completion of the installation, the following window opens.
800_700214.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-119
(14) Press the <Enter> key. l Preparation (for V11.X or later)
The installation has been completed. Implement the following procedures when newly installing MCV11 or later, or when
(15) Restart the PC. upgrading the versions on computers which have MCV11 or earlier installed on them
to V11.x or later.
(16) Exit from the CL software, and display the normal Windows screen. (1) Insert the application disk into the CL drive and double-click
REFERENCE “SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer.
When you click the Shut Down button of the CL software, the pop-up menu The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window appear.
appears for prompting to exit from the system. When you click [OK] in the pop up
menu while pressing the shift key on the keyboard, the CL software terminates (2) Select “\versionup\local\V11.0.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION” area, and
and the Windows screen appears. click [EXECUTE].
Keep pressing the shift key until the message of termination processing in Set Up PC-TOOL window
progress disappears.
(17) Check that the MC Manager icon has appeared on the task tray.
800_700197.ai
800_700198.ai

Upon completion of the configuration setting, the “Version Up Completed” opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-120
l Setup the MC application (4) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window
appears. Click [OK].
(1) Double-click “SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer. #1 Click: [OK]


#1 Input: MC IP address #1
#2 Click: [Connect]
800_700202.ai

#1 #1 Input: RU NAME
#2 #2 Click: [Register]
800_700200.ai #1
#2
u NOTE u
execute the version upgrade. 800_700203.ai
- If the MC application was not factory-installed, and if the model media being The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear.
Confirm the MC application installation status and the media model information, (6) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media
and re-execute the version upgrade. version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade].
#1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device
￥
u INSTRUCTION u #2 Click: [Upgrade]

#1
#2
800_700204.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-121
(7) Click [Yes]. (11) Exit from the CL software, and display the normal Windows screen.
#1 Click: [Yes] REFERENCE
appears for prompting to exit from the system. When you click [OK] in the pop up
menu while pressing the shift key on the keyboard, the CL software terminates
and the Windows screen appears.
Keep pressing the shift key until the message of termination processing in
#1
800_700205.ai
(12) Select the followings on the CONFIG window of the RU PC-TOOL.
l Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP
#1 Select: NOT EXIST (Default)
#2 Select: SYNC
800_700206.ai
(8) Check that the installation is completed, and click [OK]. #1

#2
#1 Click: [OK]
1200_700089.ai
#1
800_700207.ai

(9) Remove the disk from the jig drive.
018-230-07E
IN2-122
l Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP (15) Click [MODIFY] and check the IP address is “127.0.0.1”.
#1 Select: 0 #1 Select: CL0
#2 Select: ON #2 Click: [MODIFY]
#3 Select: NOT EXIST (Default) #3 Check: 127.0.0.1
#4 Select: SYNC CL NAME画面
#1 #1
#2
#2
#3 #3
#4
800_700273.ai
(16) Click [SET] on the CL NAME window.

1200_700200.ai
(13) Click [SET]. Write into the HDD starts.

The system returns to the RU PC-TOOL window. #1 Click: [SET]
CL NAME window
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform step 14 or later only when the CL NAME is not registered.
(14) Select the RU NAME on the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” and click [EDIT
CL NAME].
The CL NAME window opens.
REFERENCE
#1
You may make configuration settings. 1200_700090.ai
CAUTION
While write into the HDD is in progress, never turn OFF the CL power and the
circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. If turned OFF, the data on the
HDD gets damaged, and the CL cannot boot up as a result.
018-230-07E
IN2-123
(17) Make sure that the write into the HDD has completed, and press any 14.1.3 Installing the RU Software
key on the keyboard.
#1 Check: “Install is complete”appears on the Command Prompt window u INSTRUCTION u
#2 Press: Any key on the keyboard Take the following procedures only for the MC application V11.0 or earlier.
Command Prompt window
NOTE
Set the following IP address before installing the RU software.
Control Panel\Administrative Tools\Internet Information Services(IIS) Manager\local
#1 computer\Edit Bindings\Edit
IP address: All Unassigned
#2 600_700066.ai
(18) Click [OK].

The DX Console restarts automatically.
#1 Click: [OK]
#1
1200_700135.ai
600_700067.ai
Start up the MC Manager from [Start] menu.
018-230-07E
IN2-124
(1) Click [START] in the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window to start the RU PC- (2) Click [NEW], and input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”.
TOOL window. #1 Click: [NEW]
#1 Click: [START] #2 Input: RU NAME
Set Up PC-TOOL window #3 Input: RU IP ADDR (127.0.0.1)
NOTE
The maximum input character count for “RU NAME” is as per the following.
#1 - MC application V3.4 or earlier: 16 one-byte characters
- MC application V11.0 or later: 15 one-byte characters
NOTE
The IP address to be entered in “RU IP ADDR” depends on the installation
destination of the MC application. Be sure to enter the correct IP address. Wrong
IP addresses result in mulfunctions such as the installation error and non-display
of the error DB.
RU PC-TOOL window (input example)
RU PC-TOOL window
#1
1200_700083.ai
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0 #2
RU IP ADDR 127 0 0 1 #3
1200_700084E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-125
(3) Click [PING], and check that the input RU address is present and that (4) Click [INSTALL].
it is connected. The “RU INSTALL” window opens.
Check that “Lost=0 (0% loss)” appears on the displayed window. Otherwise, check #1 Click: [INSTALL]
the RU IP address and the I/F cable connection. RU PC-TOOL window
REFERENCE
"Lost = 0 (0 % loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of the PING
check. If "Lost = 0 (0 % loss)" does not appear, it indicates some problem.
Do not take the procedures of (4) and later in this case, but solve the problem.
#1 Click: [PING] #1
#2 Verify: Lost = 0 (0% loss)
RU PC-TOO window
#1
RU INSTALL window
1200_700086.ai
(5) Select the software version “INSTALL VERSION” to be installed.

#1 Select: INSTALL VERSION
#2 RU INSTALL window
1200_700085.ai
INSTALL VERSION
XXX
YYY #1
1200_700087.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-126
(6) Click [OK]. (8) Select the followings on the CONFIG window.
After a while, the installation will be completed. l Non-installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP
#1 Select: NOT EXIST
(7) Exit from the RU INSTALL window. #2 Select: SYNC
The CONFIG window opens.
#1 Click: [OK]
RU INSTALL window
#1
#1
#2
CONFIG window
1200_700089.ai
l Installation of the FUJIFILM-made AP

#1 Select: 0
#2 Select: ON
#3 Select: NOT EXIST
#4 Select: SYNC
#1
#2
#3
#4
1200_700088.ai
1200_700200.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-127
(9) Click [SET]. (12) Make sure that the write into the HDD has completed, and press any
The CL NAME window opens. key on the keyboard.
REFERENCE #1 Check: “Install is complete”appears on the Command Prompt window
#2 Press: Any key on the keyboard
You may make configuration settings.
(10) Click [MODIFY] and change the IP address to “127.0.0.1”.

#1 Select: CL0
#2 Click: [MODIFY] #1
CL NAME window
#1
#2 #2 600_700066.ai
(13) Click [OK].

The DX Console restarts automatically.
1200_700179E.ai #1 Click: [OK]

Write into the HDD starts.
#1 Click: [SET] #1
CL NAME window
600_700067.ai
→ Start up the MC Manager from [Start] menu.
#1
1200_700090.ai
CAUTION
circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. If turned OFF, the data on the
018-230-07E
IN2-128
14.1.4 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock REFERENCE
For MC V14 (PC TOOL V6) or later, the MUTL function is locked. In order to use it, the The following errors may occur when the MUTL starts up. The reasons and actions for
security lock needs to be unlocked. the cases are as shown below.
NOTE RU PC-TOOL window
application disk.
(1) Select “Key Regist” from the RU PC-TOOL “License”.

#1 Select: target RU NAME
#2 Select: “License” – “Key Regist.”
RU PC-TOOL window
#2
#1
800_700274.ai
- The security of the RU PC-TOOL is not unlocked.

Follow the procedure described here to unlock the security lock.
- The MUTL is started up without selecting the RU.
Follow the procedure described here to select the target RU NAME in the RU PC-
TOOL and then unlock the security lock.
- The RU software is not installed.
Follow the procedure below to install the RU software.
{IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
1200_700482.ai
(2) Select “PCToolSecKeykey” inside the application disk drive, and click
[Open].
ID900_J0215.ai
The security lock is unlocked.
018-230-07E
IN2-129
14.1.5 Updating MP Application Software Version (3) Click [Display MP1 Software Version] on the MP1 Version Check >>
NOTE Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme.
In case of the configuration installing the FUJIFILM-made AP, this procedure is not txt in the MC APL software DVD.
necessary. #1 Click: [Display MP1 Software Version]
#2 Check: Version
Display MP1 Software Version <Display example>
#1
and [MP1 Version Check >>].
#2
#2 Click: [MP Version >>]
#1
#2 1200_700093E.ai
INSTRUCTION
MP Version>>window
{IN2:14.1.5_Updating MP Application Software Version_n Updating MP
Follow the procedures below when the version coincides with the version
{IN2:14.1.6_Configuration Settings}
REFERENCE
MP1 Version Check>>window The appropriate version of the MP application software is indicated in Readme.txt
in the DR-ID 1200 MC APL software DVD.
#3
MP Software ver
1200_700119.ai
1200_700092E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-130
n Updating MP Application Software Version (3) Click [MP1 Software VerUp Install] on the MP1 Install >> window.
#1 Click: [MP1 Software VerUp Install]
NOTE MP1 Install>>window
Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
#1
(2) Click [INSTALL] command, and then click [Install MP Software >>] and
[MP1 Install >>].
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
#2 Click: [Install MP Software >>]
#3 Click: [MP1 Install >>]
INSTALL window
1200_700095E.ai
#1
(4) Click [OK] when the confirmation window opens.
#2
(5) Check that the installation is completed, and again start up the MP.
MP Install>>window
#1 Check: OK
MP1 Install>>window
#1
MP1 Install>>window
#3 1200_700096E.ai

1200_700094E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-131
14.1.6 Configuration Settings 14.1.7 Setting the DX Console
(1) Make configuration settings. (1) Turn ON the DX Console power.
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} (2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
DXL04010001.ai

#2 Click: [Modify]
#1
#2
1200_700136.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-132
(4) Input “FPD Device ID” and click [OK]. (5) Click [Selector Setting].
#1 Click: [Selector Setting]
NOTE
- Be sure to set [FPD Device ID] set to coincide with [SE Serial ID] displayed in
the MUTL “Install SE Software >>” window. #1
{MU2:[4.2] Install SE Software >>}
- Be sure to set [Device Color] in [IIP Service Utility] – [Device Setting] to

#2 Click: [OK]
1200_700138.ai
#1 (6) Set “Reader Type” and click [OK].

#1 Set: Reader Type
#2 Click: [OK]
Selector Setting window
#2
1200_700137.ai
#1
#2
1200_700139.ai
NOTE
018-230-07E
IN2-133
(8) Select “CONFIG - NETWORK CONFIG - ALL OTHER NODES” and click NOTE
[NEW].
Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes.
The New Node window opens. As needed, click “SYSTEM CONFIG” – “99.CONFIG FIX” via the IIP Service Utility
#1 Select: ALL OTHER NODES window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize” values. If the
#2 Click: [NEW] setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.” error might be
Setup Configuration Item window displayed.
For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC:
#1 Manual”.
#2
1200_700140.ai
(9) Make the following settings and click [OK].

NOTE
The IP address to be entered in “IP Address” depends on the installation

#2 Select: CU/MC
#3 Click: [OK]
New Node window
#3
#1
#2
1200_700144.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-134
14.1.8 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting n Setting
the SE Country Code)
u INSTRUCTION u
NOTE Turn ON the power when changing the SE country code for only one SE.
(1) Make configuration settings for EDIT CONFIGURATION.
The SE country code needs to be set in order to use the SE. - ESSID: Follow the settings of installed facility
n Preparation - ENCRYPTION: Follow the settings of installed facility
u INSTRUCTION u (4036) to the country of usage
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run Country Setting value
properly if just the files in the unzipped folder are copied. China 156
Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC that the MC has been installed with and Taiwan 158
then unzip it in this PC. Indonesia 360
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the PC for DX Qatar, Honduras 634
Console
Unzip the zip file on the PC for DX Console. (2) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the PC for MC Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
Unzip the zip file on the PC for MC. the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
018-230-07E
IN2-135
(3) Connect the SE with a wired connection. (7) When the following window opens, enter the IP address (default:
Connect the SE with the SE cable for the MP or insert the SE into the 192.168.0.10) of PC that is connected to the SE and click [OK].
DS. For mobile, connect the cable to the SE and install the battery
pack into the SE.
u NOTE u
When the following error appears, click [OK].
1200_700303.ai
u NOTE u
The command prompt completes automatically after several minutes if the IP
address for SE or PC that is connected with SE is different. Perform step (1)
again after confirming that the IP addresses are correct.
(8) Check that the following window is displayed.

- A completion message is displayed
1) is displayed
800_700190.ai
(4) Close all unnecessary windows.

(5) Exceute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
REFERENCE
800_700191.ai
click [OK]. 800_700193.ai
800_700192.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-136
Country Code  Checking the Settings
Japan 4015
USA, Canada 841
Europe 56 (2) Start up the MUTL.
China 156 (3) Click [BOARD STATE CHECK] command and [SE Board State >>].
Taiwan 158 #1 Click: [BOARD STATE CHECK]
Russia, Serbia 643 #2 Click: [SE Board State >>]
Indonesia 360 #3 Input: Target SE No.
Qatar, Honduras 634 #4Click: [SET]
Mexico, Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Venezuela, BOARD STATE CHECK window
Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Australia, New Zealand,
Hong Kong, India, Thailand, Singapore, Vietnam, #1
Malaysia, Bahrain, Cambodia, UAE, Israel, Saudi
Korea, Chile, Panama, Uruguay, Guatemala, #2
the Dominican Republic, Bangladesh, the SE Board State >> window
Philippines, Nepal, Tunisia, Iraq, Egypt, Kuwait,
Countries where wired-only SEs are used. 999

(about 30 seconds).
REFERENCE
After restarting the SE twice, the wireless output of the SE will turn to ON. #3 #4
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
1200_700382.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-137
(4) Click [SE Board State] and check that the correct country code has  Troubleshooting
been set.
#1 Click: [SE Board State] l Phenomena
#2 Check: SE country code The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being
SE Board State >> window implemented, or all of the windows close.
#2
#1
1200_700340.ai
- Wrong MC IP address
1200_700383.ai
u NOTE u
1200_700341.ai
1200_700342.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-138
l Countermeasure 14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE
INSTRUCTION
execute the batch file. - Take the procedures from “14.1.9 Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.1.12 Setting
the SE LED Color” with connecting only one SE.
- For making the setting of the second SE, replace the SE after the setting of the first
SE is completed.
NOTE
- If two SE’s are connected, set the serial ID after one of them is removed. The default
IP address (IP address when shipped out from the factory) which is registered in
the SE is the same (192.168.0.30) for all SE’s. If two SE’s are connected therefore,
the SE cannot be identified due to the duplicate address, resulting in an error, and
causing the MC power to be turned OFF.
- Always turn OFF the MP power before installing/removing the SE.
018-230-07E
IN2-139
(1) Start up the MUTL. (3) Input the serial ID of the SE to be registered, and click [SET].
(2) Click [SE SETTING] command, and then click [SE Registration >>] and u NOTE u
[SE1-10 >>].
#1 Click: [SE SETTING]
#2 Click: [SE Registration >>]
REFERENCE
#3 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
SE SETTING window The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD-
ROM.
#1
#2 #1 Input: Serial ID
#2 Click: [SET]
SE Registration>>window SE1-10>>window
#1
SE1-10>> window #2
1200_700103E.ai
#3 (4) Check that the serial ID appears in the registration frame.

#1 Check: Serial ID
SE Registration>>window <Input example>
#1
1200_700098E.ai
1200_700099E.ai
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then
start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
018-230-07E
IN2-140
14.1.10 Updating SE Application Software Version (3) Click [Display SE1 Version Info] and check the SE application software
version.
n Checking the SE Application Software Version Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme.
txt in the MC APL software DVD. Check the version in three subjects of “aplWlan
(1) Start up the MUTL. ver”, “fpgaRmv ver”, and “glg ver”.
#1 Click: [Display SE1 Version Info]
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK] command, and then click [SE Version >>] and
#2 Check: aplWlan ver
[SE1-10 >>].
#3 Check: fpgaRmv ver
#1 Click: [VERSION CHECK] #4 Check: glg ver
#2 Click: [SE Version >>] <Input example>
SE1-10>>window
#3 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
#1 #1
#2
SE Version>>window
#2/#3/#4
1200_700101E.ai
INSTRUCTION
SE1-10>>window {IN2:14.1.10_Updating SE Application Software Version_n Updating SE
#3 indicated in Readme.txt.
1200_700100E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-141
REFERENCE n Updating SE Application Software Version
The appropriate version of the SE application software is indicated in Readme.txt
NOTE
Readme.txt <Display example> Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the SE application
aplWlan ver
(2) Click [INSTALL] command, click [Install SE Software >>] and input the
target SE No.
#1 Click: INSTALL
fpgaRmv ver #2 Click: Install SE Software >>
#3 Input: SE No.
INSTALL window
#1
glg ver
#2
Install SE Software>>window
1200_700102.ai
#3
1200_700120E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-142
(3) Click [Install SE FPGA Software]. (6) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE LAN
#1 Click: [Install SE FPGA Software] Software].
Install SE1 Software>>window #1 Check: OK
#2 Click: [Install SE LAN Software]
Install SE1 Software>>window
#1
#2
1200_700125E.ai

(5) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE GLG #1 1200_700122E.ai
Software].
#1 Check: OK
#2 Click: [Install SE GLG Software] u INSTRUCTION u
For 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE, step (8) is not necessary. Proceed to
step (9).
(8) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE MCU
Software].
#2 #1 Check: OK
#2 Click: [Install SE MCU Software]
#1 1200_700121E.ai
#2
#1 1200_700123E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-143
NOTE 14.1.11 Setting the IP Address of the SE
When the SE MCU software is updated successfully, “Successed Please Reboot (1) Start up the MUTL.
SE OK” appears after about 80 seconds. In this case, this procedure is completed
successfully. Updating the SE application software version is completed after (2) Click [NETWORK SETTING] command, and then click [SE Network
restarting the SE. Setting >>].
In addition, if about 40 seconds elapse after “OK” appears, “Make sure if MCU #1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING]
software is latest version.” appears. Ignore this message if “Successed” has #2 Click: [SE Network Setting >>]
already appeared. NETWORK SETTING window
If “Successed” has not appeared and only “Make sure if MCU software is latest
version.” is displayed, restart the SE and check the SE application software #1
version.
#2
If the update is not performed, update the SE MCU software version once again.
SE Network Setting>> window
(9) Check that the installation is completed, and restart the SE.
#1 Check: OK
1200_700126E.ai

REFERENCE
#1 1200_700124E.ai
If an error occurs on the following display, again click [Execute SE IP Setting]
(10) Check the SE application software version. several minutes later.
The error occurs while the SE is being initialized.
Application Software Version} <Error indication>
System Status is not IDLE. Please retry after returning System Status “IDLE”
Error!!
018-230-07E
IN2-144
(5) Check the IP address which is set. 14.1.12 Setting the SE LED Color
REFERENCE
wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE No. (2) Click [SE SETTING] command, and then click [SE LED Color Setting >>].
SE No. IP address
#2 Click: [SE LED Color Setting >>]
SE SETTING window
1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41 #1
3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42 #2
4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
#1 1200_700128E.ai
(3) Click [Selector Color Setting>>].

#1 Click: [Selector Color Setting>>]
SE LED Color Setting>>window
#1
1200_700127E.ai
1200_700129E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-145
(4) Input the target SE No. and click [SET]. (7) Restart the MP, or remove and re-install the SE cable and the SE
#1 Input: SE No battery to restart only SE.
#2 Click: [SET] u INSTRUCTION u
Selector Color Setting>>window
Take the procedures from “14.1.9_Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.1.12_
Setting the SE LED Color” at an installation site where two or more SE’s are
connected.
#1
{IN2:14.1.9_Setting the Serial ID of the SE}
#2
1200_700130E.ai
(5) Refer to the SE color number on the left side of the screen, then input
the SE color number and click [SET].
u NOTE u
If there are two or more SEs, specify the colors that are not duplicated as much
as possible to consider the operations at the installation site.
#1 Input: SE color No.

#2 Click: [SET]
Selector Color Setting>>window
#1
#2
1200_700131E.ai
(6) Verify that the LED of the SE is in the correct color as specified.
018-230-07E
IN2-146
14.1.13 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (3) Select the menu corresponding to the panel type from the RESTORE
pull-down menu and click [EXECUTE].
u INSTRUCTION u #1 Click: Pull-down button
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to #2 In case of GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE): Select “CORRECT PANEL DATA”
each of them for installation. In case of Csl panel (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE):
If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct Select “INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA”
results cannot be obtained by calibration. #3 Click: [EXECUTE]
RU PC-TOOL window
(2) Select the RU whose machine-specific data is to be installed from the
“LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL.
#1 Select: RU
RU PC-TOOL window
#3
#1
RESTORE #1
CONFIGURATION
HISTORY LOG
#2
INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA
CORRECT PANEL DATA
600_700090.ai
1200_700177.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-147
(4) Select the target panel number and the folder (for the GOS panel: (5) Click [OK].
“CORRECTH” folder, for the CsI panel: “INDIVIDUALH” folder) in the #1 Click: [OK]
DVD drive. Directory selection window
#1 Select: Panel number
#2 Click: [...]
#3 Select: Following DVD drive folder
#1
IMAGE READING MODE
Panel type 600_700094.ai
GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE) CORRECTH CORRECTS (6) Click [OK] when “Completed” appears.
CsI panel (1211SE, 1212SE, #1 Click: [OK]
1213SE, 1214SE)
Completed window
#4 Click: [OK]
NOTE
Configuration. #1
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} 600_700095.ai
Directory selection window

#1 Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
#2
(9) Complete the CL and confirm that the background calibration is
performed.
REFERENCE
#3 Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration

during the CL termination.
#4 (10) Check that the machine-specific data is restored.

I. Back up the CORRECT DATA on the RU-PC TOOL.
1200_700190.ai {MU2:1.13_BACKUP}
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad.
REFERENCE
If the number is 150,8000, restoration of the serial number has failed.
REFERENCE
for the CsI panel nomally.
However, if in the acceptance check the noise was generated in the image The number shown in “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” is to be written on the
whereas physical phantoms such as mesh, etc. are used to expose, select the machine-specific CD and then not modified by any operation such as calibration.
respective “CORRECTS” folder, or the “INDIVIDUALS” folder. For the procedure If no serial data is found, 150,8000 (default value) is set.
018-230-07E
IN2-148
14.1.14 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data n Checking the SE Correct Data Save Status
NOTE (1) Click [SE Correct Data Save Status >>] and input the target SE
Take the following procedures only for the GOS type SE. number, then click [SET].
#1 Click: [SE Correct Data Save Status >>]
#2 Input: Target SE number
n Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data #3 Click: [SET]
(1) Start up the MUTL. CALIBRATION window
#1
(2) Click [CALIBRATION] command and [SE Correct Data Transfer >>],
input the target SE number, and then click [SET].
#1 Click: [CALIBRATION] SE Correct Data Save Status >>
#2 Click: [SE Correct Data Transfer >>] window
#4 Click: [SET]
CALIBRATION window #2
#1
#2
SE Correct Data Transfer >>
window
#3 #3
1200_700186E.ai
(2) Check that saving of the SE correct data is completed.

#1 Check: Save result
SE Correct Data Save Status >> window
#4
1200_700185E.ai
The SE correct data stored in the MC is transferred to the SE. #1

NOTE
Make sure that “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” is displayed in the SE Correct Data
Status >> window. “STILL_DATASAVE” is displayed during transfers.
(3) Click [BACK]. 1200_700187E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-149
14.1.15 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP (3) Click [NETWORK SETTING] command, and then click [MC ETH0 IP
Address Setting >>].
#1 Click: [NETWORK SETTING]
The IP addresses of the MC and the FTP server are changed so as to align the
#2 Click: [MC ETH0 IP Setting >>]
network setting (MC ETH0) between the MC and the FTP server (DX Console) with
the network system in the hospital.
NOTES #1
- The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows. #2
Item IP address
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10 MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window
MP1 192.168.0.20
MP2 192.168.0.21
AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30
SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34 1200_700173E.ai

- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to (4) Input [MC IP Address], [MC SubNetMask] and [FTP IP Address], and
cause the IP addresses to duplicate. click [SET].
<Example> #1 Input: [MC IP Address]
The IP addresses duplicate if MC ETH0 is changed as follows when MC ETH1 is #2 Input: [MC SubNetMask]
192.168.0.10 (default value). #3 Input: [FTP IP Address]
MC SubNetMask: 255.255.255.0 #4 Click: [SET]
MC ETH0: 192.168.0.200 MC EHT0 IP Setting>> window
(1) Click [EDIT CL NAME] of the RU PC-TOOL, and change the IP address
of the CL. #1
#2
#3
#4
1200_700174E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-150
(5) Click [BACK], and return to the NETWORK SETTING window. 14.1.16 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC
(6) Click “Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)”. NOTE
#1 Click: [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)]
Take the following procedures only when the IP address of the SE/MP/MC is to be
changed from the default value.
(1) Change the IP address of the SE/MP/MC from the default value.
INSTRUCTIONS
#1 - The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value
among the MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set,
the network among the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the
600_700174E.ai of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is
255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
(7) Change the IP address of the DX Console. network address.
(8) Change the default IP address of the DX Console IIS. Segment No.
(9) Again install the RU software.

{IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software} 192.168.0.0

REFERENCE
The settings such as the serial ID of the SE are not deleted but succeeded as Network address
they are, if the RU software is re-installed. Host address
600_700206.ai
- If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address
of the access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If
the network address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE
cannot be made.
INSTRUCTION
018-230-07E
IN2-151
14.1.17 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME (3) Check that the MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME value coincides with the
value set in EDIT CONFIG, and then click [MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME
INSTRUCTION SE1].
Always set the SE MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME when the set value of MODE2 NOTE
EXPOSURE TIME is changed in EDIT CONFIG. Otherwise, inconsistency might
possibly occur in the MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME between the MC and the SE, The value appearing on the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window is a value
resulting in inability to obtain appropriate images. set in EDIT CONFIG plus 100 msec.
The procedures need not be taken if the accumulation mode is set to 0 or 1. Therefore, if a value set in EDIT CONFIG plus 100 mse appears, you can
determine that the set values coincide with each other.
REFERENCE Note that the indication unit differs between EDIT CONFIG and the SE MODE2
EXPOSURE TIME >> window.
Refer to the following for details on MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME of EDIT CONFIG. <Display comparison (example)>
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION _l MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME} EDIT CONFIG/ MUTL/
MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window indication
(1) Start up the MUTL. 1.2 s 1300 msec
(2) Click [SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>] of the [SE Setting] command.
#1 Check: Value
#1 Click: [SE Setting] #2 Click: [MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME SE1]
#2 Click: [SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>]
SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window
SE Setting window
#1
#1
#2
SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>
window
#2 600_700184E.ai
(4) Click [OK] when the confirmation window appears.
600_700183E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-152
(5) Make sure that the setting is effective. 14.1.18 Checking the MC_ID_MODE
NOTE
Perform the following procedures only when connecting the FUJIFILM-made AP and
sharing the SE with multiple MCs.
Make sure that the “MC_ID_MODE” does not duplicate other MCs.
(1) Select the RU to confirm the MC_ID_MODE from the “LIST OF

EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL, select [CONFIGURATION] from
“BACKUP”, and click [EXECUTE].
#1 Select: RU
#2 Select: CONFIGURATION
#3 Click: [EXECUTE].
#1 RU PC-TOOL window
600_700185E.ai
#1
#2
#3
1200_700201.ai
After selecting the location, IRSET.CFG file is generated in CONFIGURATION folder.
018-230-07E
IN2-153
(2) Open IRSET.CFG file with a text editor, notepad, etc., and make sure 14.1.19 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address
that the “MC_ID_MODE” do not duplicate with other MC. Filtering)
<Optional Setting Item>

u INSTRUCTION u
This section describes the procedures for the access points shown below.
- DAP-1665
- FUJIFILM-made AP
NOTE
In the case of DAP-2553, DAP-2695 (locally procured item), refer to the following.
1200_700202.ai {IN:Appendix 12._Installing the Access Point (DAP-2553, DAP-2695)}
 DAP-1665
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
(2) Input the login name, and password for the access point via the
browser.
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
600_700286.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-154
(3) Click “ADVANCED” and “MAC ADDRESS FILTER”, and then select (4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering, and
“Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the then click [Save setting].
network”. #1 Check ON: Check box
#1 Click: ADVANCED #2 Check: Client List
#2 Click: MAC ADDRESS FILTER #3 Select: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering
#3 Select: Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the #4 Click: [<<]
network #5 Check: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering is displayed
u NOTE u
#1
#2
number of the SEs.
#3
1200_700367E.ai
#6
#1
#2#3
60:92:17:49:XX:XX 60:92:17:49:XX:XX
#4
#5
1200_700368E.ai
600_700291.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-155
 FUJIFILM-made AP (4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering.
(1) Open the Internet Explorer, enter “192.168.0.25” into the address bar #2 Click: Security Configuration
and press the [Enter] key. #3 Select: ALLOW
(2) When the following window opens, enter “fuj1Film” into the password #5 Click: [Add]
area and click [Login]. #6 Check: Additional SE MAC address is displayed
#7 Click: [Submit]
u NOTE u
of the SEs.
#2
700_700051E.ai
(3) Check the SE MAC address.

#1
#1 Click: Client information #3
#2 Check: SE MAC addresses that connect with the access point are displayed #6
#4
#5
#7
#1 1200_700372E.ai
#2
#3
1200_700371E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-156
(5) Check that the following window is displayed and select “Restart”.
1200_700373E.ai
(6) Click [Yes].
1200_700374E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-157
14.2 In case of the Configuration Installing the 14.2.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
MC Application in the MC n Installing the RU PC-TOOL
n Flow of the Installation Procedures of the RU Software (1) Turn ON the power of the machine.
START u INSTRUCTION u
14.2.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL When the MC power is turned ON for the first time, do so after one of two SE’s, if
connected, is removed.
14.2.2 Installing the RU Software This is because the default IP address (IP address when shipped out from the
14.2.3 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock If two SE’s are connected therefore, the SE cannot be identified due to the
duplicate address, resulting in an error, and causing the MC power to be turned
14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version OFF. If the MC power is turned OFF for the mentioned reason, turn ON the MC
power after one of the two SE’s is removed.
14.2.6 Setting the DX Console REFERENCES

- When the Wake on LAN setting is completed, the MC power is automatically
14.2.7 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting
turned ON when turning ON the CL power. Always keep the MP power switch
the SE Country Code) ON, however.
- If the Wake on LAN setting is not completed, turn ON the power in the following
14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE order:
14.2.9 Updating SE Application Software Version
(2) Turn ON the CL power.
14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE (3) Turn ON the MC power.
14.2.13 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data
14.2.14 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP Address
14.2.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC
14.2.16 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME
14.1.17 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address Filtering)
END
018-230-07E
IN2-158
(2) Exit from the CL software, and display the normal Windows screen. (3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CL.
REFERENCE Upon inserting the install disk into the DVD drive, the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window
appears for prompting to exit from the system. When you click [OK] in the pop-up (4) Click [INSTALL].
menu while pressing the shift key on the keyboard, the CL software terminates A window for selecting the installation location opens.
and the Windows screen opens. #1 Click: [INSTALL]
Keep pressing the shift key until the message of termination processing in Set Up PC-TOOL window
#1 Click: [Shut Down]

#2 Click: [OK] (click while pressing the shift key on the keyboard)
#1
#1
Installation location
selection window
#2 1200_700078.ai
1200_700143E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-159
(5) Check that the installation location is “For FTP-Server”, and click [SET]. (6) Click [Next].
RU PC-TOOL Setup start window (wizard window) opens. The window appears, prompting to start the installation (wizard window).
#1 Verify: For FTP-Server #1 Click: [Next]
#2 Click: [SET] RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window
Installation location (wizard window)
selection window
#1
#2
#1
RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window
(wizard window)
Window prompting to install

(wizard window)
600_700054.ai
600_700055.ai
(7) Click [Install] and start installation.

window) opens.
(8) Click [Finish].
Upon clicking [Finish], the Command Prompt window opens. When the Command
Prompt window appears, press any key on the keyboard.
The Command Prompt window appears three times.
018-230-07E
IN2-160
n Install the MC application (4) Press the <Y> key on the keyboard.
u INSTRUCTION u (5) Input the following values as the “Network Configuration” setting.
The following procedures are not required when installing the MC application V3.4 or - MC PC is 1 NIC configuration: 2
earlier. - MC PC is 2 NIC configuration: 3

application disk into the drive.
(3) Select “.\install\local\Install.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION” area, and

800_700210.ai
click [EXECUTE]. The following window opens.

#1 Select: .\install\local\Install.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
#1
800_700211.ai

#2
The setup wizard window opens.
800_700208.ai
800_700209.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-161
(7) Select Repair and click [Next]. (10) Click [Next].
#1Select: Repair
#2Click: [Next]
#1
#2 800_700216.ai
800_700215.ai The License Agreement window opens.

The Setup Complete window opens.
(8) Click [Finish]. (11) Click [I Agree].
#1
800_700212.ai
Upon completion of the installation, the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup window opens.
800_700217.ai
The Installation options window opens.

(9) Click [OK].
#1
800_700213.ai
The Welcome to the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard window opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-162
(12) Comfirm that “Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time” is (14) Press the <Enter> key.
checked and click [Install]. The installation has been completed.
800_700218.ai
The Completing the WinPcap 4.1.3 Setup Wizard window opens.
800_700219.ai
Upon completion of the installation, the following window opens.
800_700214.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-163
l Preparation (for V11.X or later) l Setup the MC application
Implement the following procedures when newly installing MCV11 or later, or when
upgrading the versions on computers which have MCV11 or earlier installed on them
to V11.x or later. The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window appear.
(1) Insert the application disk into the CL drive and double-click (2) Select “.\install\remote\MCSetupWizard.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION”
“SetupRun.exe” into the drive on the My Computer. area, and click [EXECUTE].
(2) Select “\versionup\local\V11.0.bat” from “FILE EXECUTION” area, and #1 Input: MC IP address
click [EXECUTE]. #2 Click: [Connect]
#1
#2
800_700200.ai
u NOTE u
execute the version upgrade.
800_700197.ai
The following window opens. ￥
and re-execute the version upgrade.
u INSTRUCTION u
800_700198.ai

Upon completion of the configuration setting, the “Version Up Completed” opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-164
(4) If the RU registration has not been completed, the following window (7) Click [Yes].
opens. Click [OK]. #1 Click: [Yes]
#1 Click: [OK]
#1
#1
800_700205.ai

800_700202.ai

#1 Input: RU NAME
#1
#2
800_700206.ai

800_700203.ai #1 Click: [OK]
The version and the media version that are installed on the device appear.
(6) Check that there are not any problems with the version and the media
version that are installed on the device, and click [Upgrade].
#1 Check: the version and the media version that are installed on the device
#2 Click: [Upgrade]
#1
800_700207.ai
#1 The system returns to the desktop screen.

(9) Remove the disk from the jig drive.
#2
800_700204.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-165
(11) Exit from the CL software, and display the normal Windows screen. (14) Click [MODIFY] and change the IP address to “172.16.1.20”.
REFERENCE #1 Select: CL0
#2 Click: [MODIFY]
appears for prompting to exit from the system. When you click [OK] in the pop up CL NAME window
menu while pressing the shift key on the keyboard, the CL software terminates #1
and the Windows screen appears.
Keep pressing the shift key until the message of termination processing in
#2
(12) Select “THE MC-PC EXISTENCE” and “A SYNCHRONOUS THE MC-
SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE” on the CONFIG window of the RU PC-
TOOL.
#1 Select: EXIST
1200_700179E.ai
#2 Select: ASYNC
Write into the HDD starts.
#1 Click: [SET]
CL NAME window
#1
#2
1200_700089.ai #1
(13) Click [SET].

1200_700090.ai
The CL NAME window opens.

CAUTION
REFERENCE
You may make configuration settings. circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. If turned OFF, the data on the
018-230-07E
IN2-166
(16) Make sure that the write into the HDD has completed, and press any 14.2.2 Installing the RU Software
key on the keyboard.
#1 Check: “Install is complete”appears on the Command Prompt window INSTRUCTION
#2 Press: Any key on the keyboard Take the following procedures only for the MC application V11.0 or earlier.
INSTRUCTION
Set the IP address of the MC and the DX Console (FTP server) to the following IP
addresses (the IP address as shipped from the factory) before installing the MC
#1 application in MC.
If the IP address setting is wrong, an error results and installation cannot be normally
completed.
- MC: 172.16.1.10
- DX Console: 172.16.1.20
When the IP address of the DX Console is to be changed, write down the current
network settings.
#2 600_700066.ai Restore the IP address if you take wrong operation procedures and cannot access the
MC from the DX Console.
018-230-07E
IN2-167
NOTE (1) Click [START] in the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window to start the RU PC-
Set the following IP address before installing the RU software. TOOL window.
Control Panel\Administrative Tools\Internet Information Services(IIS) Manager\local #1 Click: [START]
computer\Edit Bindings\Edit Set Up PC-TOOL window
IP address: 172.16.1.20
#1
1200_700135.ai
RU PC-TOOL window
1200_700083.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-168
(2) Click [NEW], and input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”. (3) Click [PING], and check that the input RU address is present and that
#1 Click: [NEW] it is connected.
#2 Input: RU NAME Check that “Lost=0 (0% loss)” appears on the displayed window. Otherwise, check
#3 Input: RU IP ADDR (172.16.1.10) the RU IP address and the I/F cable connection.
NOTE REFERENCE
The maximum input character count for “RU NAME” is as per the following. “Lost = 0 (0 % loss)” means that there is no problem as a result of the PING
- MC application V3.4 or earlier: 16 one-byte characters check. If “Lost = 0 (0 % loss)” does not appear, it indicates some problem.
Do not take the procedures of (4) and later in this case, but solve the problem.
- MC application V11.0 or later: 15 one-byte characters
#1 Click: [PING]
NOTE #2 Verify: Lost = 0 (0% loss)
The IP address to be entered in “RU IP ADDR” depends on the installation RU PC-TOO window
destination of the MC application. Be sure to enter the correct IP address. Wrong
IP addresses result in mulfunctions such as the installation error and non-display
of the error DB.
- To install in the MC: 172.16.1.10 #1
RU PC-TOOL window (input example)
#1
#2
1200_700085.ai
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0 #2
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 #3
1200_700180E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-169
(4) Click [INSTALL]. (6) Click [OK].
The “RU INSTALL” window opens. After a while, the installation will be completed.
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
RU PC-TOOL window (7) Exit from the RU INSTALL window.
The CONFIG window opens.
#1 Click: [OK]
RU INSTALL window
#1
#1
CONFIG window
RU INSTALL window
1200_700086.ai
(5) Select the software version “INSTALL VERSION” to be installed.

#1 Select: INSTALL VERSION
RU INSTALL window
INSTALL VERSION
XXX
YYY #1
1200_700087.ai
1200_700088.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-170
(8) Select “THE MC-PC EXISTENCE” and “A SYNCHRONOUS THE MC- (11) Click [SET] on the CL NAME window.
SHUTDOWN WITH CONSOLE”. Write into the HDD starts.
#1 Select: EXIST #1 Click: [SET]
#2 Select: ASYNC CL NAME window
#1 #1
#2 1200_700090.ai
CAUTION
1200_700089.ai
While write into the HDD is in progress, never turn OFF the MC power and the
(9) Click [SET]. circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. If turned OFF, the data on the
The CL NAME window opens. HDD gets damaged, and the MC cannot boot up as a result.
REFERENCE
(12) Make sure that the write into the HDD has completed, and press any
You may make configuration settings. key on the keyboard.
#1 Check: “Install is complete”appears on the Command Prompt window
(10) Click [MODIFY] and change the IP address to “172.16.1.20”. #2 Press: Any key on the keyboard
#1 Select: CL0 Command Prompt window
#2 Click: [MODIFY]
CL NAME window
#1
#1
#2
#2 600_700066.ai
1200_700179E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-171
(13) Click [OK]. 14.2.3 Unlocking the RU PC-TOOL’s Security Lock
The MC restarts automatically. For MC V14 (PC TOOL V6) or later, the MUTL function is locked. In order to use it, the
#1 Click: [OK] security lock needs to be unlocked.
NOTE
#1 application disk.
600_700067.ai
→ This completes the procedure. (1) Select “Key Regist” from the RU PC-TOOL “License”.
#1 Select: target RU NAME
#2 Select: “License” – “Key Regist.”
RU PC-TOOL window
#2
#1
1200_700482.ai
(2) Select “PCToolSecKeykey” inside the application disk drive, and click
[Open].
ID900_J0215.ai
The security lock is unlocked.
018-230-07E
IN2-172
REFERENCE 14.2.4 Updating MP Application Software Version
The following errors may occur when the MUTL starts up. The reasons and actions for
the cases are as shown below. n Checking the MP Application Software Version
RU PC-TOOL window
and [MP1 Version Check >>].
#2 Click: [MP Version >>]
#1
#2
800_700274.ai
MP Version>>window
- The security of the RU PC-TOOL is not unlocked.
Follow the procedure described here to unlock the security lock.
- The MUTL is started up without selecting the RU.
Follow the procedure described here to select the target RU NAME in the RU PC-
TOOL and then unlock the security lock.
- The RU software is not installed.
Follow the procedure below to install the RU software.
MP1 Version Check>>window
#3
1200_700092E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-173
(3) Click [Display MP1 Software Version] on the MP1 Version Check >> n Updating MP Application Software Version
Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme. NOTE
txt in the MC APL software DVD. Follow the procedures below only when the version update of the MP application
#1 Click: [Display MP1 Software Version] software is necessary.
#2 Check: Version
Display MP1 Software Version <Display example>
(2) Click [INSTALL] command, and then click [Install MP Software >>] and
#1 [MP1 Install >>].
#1 Click: [INSTALL]
#2 Click: [Install MP Software >>]
#2
#3 Click: [MP1 Install >>]
INSTALL window
#1
#2
MP Install>>window
1200_700093E.ai
INSTRUCTION
{IN2:14.2.4_Updating MP Application Software Version_n Updating MP
{IN2:14.2.5_Configuration Settings}
MP1 Install>>window
REFERENCE
The appropriate version of the MP application software is indicated in Readme.txt #3
MP Software ver
1200_700094E.ai
1200_700119.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-174
(3) Click [MP1 Software VerUp Install] on the MP1 Install >> window. 14.2.5 Configuration Settings
#1 Click: [MP1 Software VerUp Install]
MP1 Install>>window (1) Make configuration settings.
#1
1200_700095E.ai

(5) Check that the installation is completed, and again start up the MP.
#1 Check: OK
MP1 Install>>window
#1
1200_700096E.ai

018-230-07E
IN2-175

{MU2:[4.2] Install SE Software >>}

#2 Click: [OK]
DXL04010001.ai

#1 Click: [Device Setting] #1
#2 Click: [Modify]
#1
#2
1200_700137.ai
#2
1200_700136.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-176
#1 #2 Click: [NEW]
#1
#2
1200_700138.ai
#1 Set: Reader Type
#2 Click: [OK] NOTE
#1
#2 Select: CU/MC
#3 Click: [OK]
New Node window
#3
#2 #1
1200_700139.ai
NOTE #2
1200_700144.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-177
NOTE 14.2.7 Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting
Depending on the SE registration count, set the image folder sizes. the SE Country Code)
window – [Setup Configuration Item], and set the “MaximumDataSize” values. If the NOTE
setting values are incorrect, then the “[MD10016] hard disc is full.” error might be Be sure to perform this procedure in order to observe the Radio Law.
displayed.
For details, see “21. Setting the Images Folder Size (V7.3 or later)” in “MC: The SE communication function is turned OFF at the factory.
Manual”. The SE country code needs to be set in order to use the SE.
n Preparation
u INSTRUCTION u
Since the unzipped folder contains invisible files, the batch file will not run
Therefore, copy the zip file to the PC that the MC has been installed with and
Console
018-230-07E
IN2-178
pack into the SE.
u NOTE u
(1) Make configuration settings for EDIT CONFIGURATION. When the following error appears, click [OK].
China 156
Taiwan 158
Qatar, Honduras 634
(2) Left-click the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”. (4) Close all unnecessary windows.
Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start (5) Exceute the batch file (replace_countrycode.bat).
the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”. REFERENCE
800_700191.ai
click [OK].
800_700192.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-179
USA, Canada 841
Europe 56
China 156
Taiwan 158
Russia, Serbia 643
1200_700303.ai
Indonesia 360

(about 30 seconds).
REFERENCE
800_700193.ai Check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start
018-230-07E
IN2-180
 Checking the Settings (4) Click [SE Board State] and check that the correct country code has
been set.
(1) Connect the MC PC and the SE with wired connection. #1 Click: [SE Board State]
(2) Start up the MUTL. #2 Check: SE country code
SE Board State >> window
(3) Click [BOARD STATE CHECK] command and [SE Board State >>].
#2 Click: [SE Board State >>]
#3 Input: Target SE No. #2
#4Click: [SET] #1
BOARD STATE CHECK window
#1
#2
SE Board State >> window
1200_700383.ai
u NOTE u
#3 #4
1200_700382.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-181
 Troubleshooting l Countermeasure
l Phenomena address and that communications between the MC and SE are established, and then
The SE country code batch file stops at the following window while it is being execute the batch file.
1200_700340.ai
- Wrong MC IP address
1200_700341.ai
1200_700342.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-182
14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE (1) Start up the MUTL.
INSTRUCTION (2) Click [SE SETTING] command, and then click [SE Registration >>] and
[SE1-10 >>].
- Take the procedures from “14.2.8 Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.2.11 Setting #1 Click: [SE SETTING]
the SE LED Color” with connecting only one SE.
#2 Click: [SE Registration >>]
- For making the setting of the second SE, replace the SE after the setting of the first
#3 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
SE is completed.
SE SETTING window
NOTE #1
- If two SE’s are connected, set the serial ID after one of them is removed. The default #2
IP address (IP address when shipped out from the factory) which is registered in
the SE is the same (192.168.0.30) for all SE’s. If two SE’s are connected therefore, SE Registration>>window
the SE cannot be identified due to the duplicate address, resulting in an error, and
causing the MC power to be turned OFF.
If the MC power is turned OFF for the mentioned reason, turn ON the MC power
after one of the two SE’s is removed.
- Always turn OFF the MP power before installing/removing the SE.
SE1-10>> window
#3
1200_700098E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-183
(3) Input the serial ID of the SE to be registered, and click [SET]. 14.2.9 Updating SE Application Software Version
u NOTE u
n Checking the SE Application Software Version
REFERENCE
(2) Click [VERSION CHECK] command, and then click [SE Version >>] and
The serial ID of the SE is mentioned on the surface of the machine-specific CD- [SE1-10 >>].
ROM. #1 Click: [VERSION CHECK]
#2 Click: [SE Version >>]
#1 Input: Serial ID #3 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
#2 Click: [SET] VERSION CHECK window
SE1-10>>window
#1
#2
#1
SE Version>>window
#2
1200_700103E.ai
(4) Check that the serial ID appears in the registration frame.

#1 Check: Serial ID SE1-10>>window
SE Registration>>window <Input example>
#3
#1
1200_700100E.ai
1200_700099E.ai

Click [OK] when the confirmation window of “Are you sure?” opens.
018-230-07E
IN2-184
(3) Click [Display SE1 Version Info] and check the SE application software REFERENCE
version. The appropriate version of the SE application software is indicated in Readme.txt
Check that the displayed version coincides with the version indicated in Readme. in the DR-ID 1200 MC APL software DVD.
txt in the MC APL software DVD. Check the version in three subjects of “aplWlan
ver”, “fpgaRmv ver”, and “glg ver”. Readme.txt <Display example>
#1 Click: [Display SE1 Version Info]
aplWlan ver
#2 Check: aplWlan ver
#3 Check: fpgaRmv ver
#4 Check: glg ver
SE1-10>>window <Input example>
fpgaRmv ver
#1
glg ver
#2/#3/#4
1200_700101E.ai
INSTRUCTION 1200_700102.ai
{IN2:14.2.9_Updating SE Application Software Version_n Updating SE
018-230-07E
IN2-185
n Updating SE Application Software Version (3) Click [Install SE FPGA Software].
#1 Click: [Install SE FPGA Software]
NOTE Install SE1 Software>>window
(1) Make sure that the install disk is inserted in the DVD drive of the CL. #1
(2) Click [INSTALL] command, click [Install SE Software >>] and input the
target SE No.
#1 Click: INSTALL
#2 Click: Install SE Software >>
#3 Input: SE No.
INSTALL window
#1 1200_700125E.ai
#2 (4) Click [OK] when the confirmation window opens.

(5) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE GLG
Install SE Software>>window
Software].
#1 Check: OK
#2 Click: [Install SE GLG Software]
#2
#3
#1 1200_700121E.ai
1200_700120E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-186
(6) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE LAN NOTE
Software].
When the SE MCU software is updated successfully, “Successed Please Reboot
#1 Check: OK SE OK” appears after about 80 seconds. In this case, this procedure is completed
#2 Click: [Install SE LAN Software] successfully. Updating the SE application software version is completed after
Install SE1 Software>>window restarting the SE.
In addition, if about 40 seconds elapse after “OK” appears, “Make sure if MCU
software is latest version.” appears. Ignore this message if “Successed” has
already appeared.
If “Successed” has not appeared and only “Make sure if MCU software is latest
version.” is displayed, restart the SE and check the SE application software
#2 version.
If the update is not performed, update the SE MCU software version once again.
(9) Check that the installation is completed, and restart the SE.
#1 Check: OK
#1 1200_700122E.ai

u INSTRUCTION u
For 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE, step (8) is not necessary. Proceed to
step (9).
(8) Check that the installation is completed, and click [Install SE MCU
Software].
#1 Check: OK
#2 Click: [Install SE MCU Software] #1 1200_700124E.ai

(10) Check the SE application software version.
#2
#1 1200_700123E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-187
14.2.10 Setting the IP Address of the SE (5) Check the IP address which is set.
REFERENCE
(2) Click [NETWORK SETTING] command, and then click [SE Network wireless mode, is automatically assigned corresponding to the connected SE No.
Setting >>].
SE No. IP address
#2 Click: [SE Network Setting >>]
NETWORK SETTING window 1 192.168.0.30 192.168.0.40
2 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.41
#1 3 192.168.0.32 192.168.0.42
#2 4 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.43
5 192.168.0.34 192.168.0.44
#1
1200_700126E.ai
(3) Click [Execute SE IP Setting]. 1200_700127E.ai
REFERENCE
If an error occurs on the following display, again click [Execute SE IP Setting]
several minutes later.
The error occurs while the SE is being initialized.
<Error indication>
System Status is not IDLE. Please retry after returning System Status “IDLE”
Error!!
018-230-07E
IN2-188
14.2.11 Setting the SE LED Color (4) Input the target SE No. and click [SET].
#1 Input: SE No
(1) Start up the MUTL. #2 Click: [SET]
(2) Click [SE SETTING] command, and then click [SE LED Color Setting >>]. Selector Color Setting>>window
#2 Click: [SE LED Color Setting >>]
SE SETTING window #1
#1
#2
#2
1200_700130E.ai
(5) Refer to the SE color number on the left side of the screen, then input
the SE color number and click [SET].
1200_700128E.ai
(3) Click [Selector Color Setting>>].

u NOTE u
#1 Click: [Selector Color Setting>>] If there are two or more SEs, specify the colors that are not duplicated as much
SE LED Color Setting>>window as possible to consider the operations at the installation site.
#1 Input: SE color No.

#2 Click: [SET]
#1 Selector Color Setting>>window
#1
1200_700129E.ai
#2
1200_700131E.ai
(6) Verify that the LED of the SE is in the correct color as specified.
018-230-07E
IN2-189
(7) Restart the MP, or remove and re-install the SE cable and the SE 14.2.12 Installing the Machine-Specific Data
battery to restart only SE.
u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u
If two or more SE’s are present, use a machine-specific data CD-R corresponding to
Take the procedures from “14.2.8_Setting the Serial ID of the SE” to “14.2.11_ each of them for installation.
Setting the SE LED Color” at an installation site where two or more SE’s are If the machine-specific data corresponding to each SE has not been installed, correct
connected. results cannot be obtained by calibration.
{IN2:14.2.8_Setting the Serial ID of the SE}
(2) Select the RU whose machine-specific data is to be installed from the
“LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-TOOL.
#1 Select: RU
RU PC-TOOL window
#1
600_700090.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-190
(3) Select the menu corresponding to the panel type from the RESTORE (4) Select the target panel number and the folder (for the GOS panel:
pull-down menu and click [EXECUTE]. “CORRECTH” folder, for the CsI panel: “INDIVIDUALH” folder) in the
#1 Click: Pull-down button DVD drive.
#2 In case of GOS panel (1201SE, 1202SE): Select “CORRECT PANEL DATA” #1 Select: Panel number
In case of Csl panel (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE): #2 Click: [...]
Select “INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA” #3 Select: Following DVD drive folder
#3 Click: [EXECUTE]
IMAGE READING MODE
RU PC-TOOL window Panel type
1213SE, 1214SE)
#4 Click: [OK]
NOTE
#3 Configuration.

RESTORE #1
#1
CONFIGURATION
#2
HISTORY LOG
#2
INDIVIDUAL PANEL DATA
CORRECT PANEL DATA
1200_700177.ai
#3
#4
1200_700190.ai
REFERENCE
for the CsI panel nomally.
018-230-07E
IN2-191
(5) Click [OK]. 14.2.13 Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data
#1 Click: [OK]
NOTE
Take the following procedures only for the GOS type SE.
#1 n Forced Transfer of the SE Correct Data

600_700094.ai
(6) Click [OK] when “Completed” appears. (2) Click [CALIBRATION] command and [SE Correct Data Transfer >>],
#1 Click: [OK] input the target SE number, and then click [SET].
Completed window #1 Click: [CALIBRATION]
#2 Click: [SE Correct Data Transfer >>]
#4 Click: [SET]
#1 CALIBRATION window
600_700095.ai
#1
(7) Remove the machine-specific data CD from the CL. #2
SE Correct Data Transfer >>
window
Click [OK] when the confirmation window of “Are you sure?” opens.
(9) Complete the CL and confirm that the background calibration is
performed. #3
REFERENCE
Defect correction data is generated according to the background calibration
during the CL termination.
(10) Check that the machine-specific data is restored.

I. Back up the CORRECT DATA on the RU-PC TOOL.
{MU2:1.13_BACKUP} #4
II. Open “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” with WordPad. 1200_700185E.ai
If the number is 150,8000, restoration of the serial number has failed. The SE correct data stored in the MC is transferred to the SE.
REFERENCE NOTE
The number shown in “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” is to be written on the Make sure that “COMPLETE_DATASAVE” is displayed in the SE Correct Data
machine-specific CD and then not modified by any operation such as calibration. Status >> window. “STILL_DATASAVE” is displayed during transfers.
If no serial data is found, 150,8000 (default value) is set.
(3) Click [BACK].
018-230-07E
IN2-192
n Checking the SE Correct Data Save Status 14.2.14 Changing the MC IP Address and the FTP Server IP
Address
(1) Click [SE Correct Data Save Status >>] and input the target SE
number, then click [SET]. The IP addresses of the MC and the FTP server are changed so as to align the
#1 Click: [SE Correct Data Save Status >>] network setting (MC ETH0) between the MC and the FTP server (DX Console) with
the network system in the hospital.
#3 Click: [SET] NOTES
CALIBRATION window - The IP addresses used in the local network of the system are as follows.
#1 Item IP address
MC ETH1 IP 192.168.0.10
MP1 192.168.0.20
SE Correct Data Save Status >> MP2 192.168.0.21
window AP 192.168.0.25
SE1 WIRED 192.168.0.30
#2 SE2 WIRED 192.168.0.31
SE3 WIRED 192.168.0.32
SE4 WIRED 192.168.0.33
SE5 WIRED 192.168.0.34
- The IP address of the local network can be changed. However, exercise care not to
#3 cause the IP addresses to duplicate.
1200_700186E.ai
<Example>
(2) Check that saving of the SE correct data is completed. The IP addresses duplicate if MC ETH0 is changed as follows when MC ETH1 is
#1 Check: Save result 192.168.0.10 (default value).
SE Correct Data Save Status >> window
MC ETH0: 192.168.0.200
(1) Click [EDIT CL NAME] of the RU PC-TOOL, and change the IP address
of the CL.
#1 (2) Start up the MUTL.
1200_700187E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-193
(3) Click [NETWORK SETTING] command, and then click [MC ETH0 IP (5) Click [BACK], and return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
Setting >>].
(6) Click “Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)”.
#1 Click: [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)]
#1
#2
MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window

#1
600_700174E.ai
(7) Change the IP address of the DX Console.

(8) Change the default IP address of the DX Console IIS.
(9) Again install the RU software.
1200_700173E.ai
(4) Input [MC IP Address], [MC SubNetMask] and [FTP IP Address], and REFERENCE
click [SET].
The settings such as the serial ID of the SE are not deleted but succeeded as
#1 Input: [MC IP Address] they are, if the RU software is re-installed.
#2 Input: [MC SubNetMask]
#3 Input: [FTP IP Address]
#4 Click: [SET]
MC EHT0 IP Setting>> window
#1
#2
#3
#4
1200_700174E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-194
14.2.15 Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC 14.2.16 Setting the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME
NOTE INSTRUCTION
Take the following procedures only when the IP address of the SE/MP/MC is to be Always set the SE MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME when the set value of MODE2
changed from the default value. EXPOSURE TIME is changed in EDIT CONFIG. Otherwise, inconsistency might
possibly occur in the MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME between the MC and the SE,
resulting in inability to obtain appropriate images.
(1) Change the IP address of the SE/MP/MC from the default value.
The procedures need not be taken if the accumulation mode is set to 0 or 1.
INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE
- The segment No. of the network address must be set to the same value Refer to the following for details on MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME of EDIT CONFIG.
among the MC, MP, SE and AP. If different network address values are set, {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION _l MODE 2 EXPOSURE TIME}
the network among the machines might get disconnected. Initialization of the
How far in the IP address the network address indicates depends on the setting (1) Start up the MUTL.
of the subnet mask. As the default value of the subnet mask of the machine is (2) Click [SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>] of the [SE Setting] command.
255.255.255.0, and locations assigned by 255 (mask value areas) indicate the
#1 Click: [SE Setting]
network address.
#2 Click: [SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>]
Segment No.
SE Setting window
#1
192.168.0.0 #2

SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >>

Network address window
Host address
600_700206.ai
- If the segment No. of the network address is changed, the network address
of the access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If
the network address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE
cannot be made.
INSTRUCTION
600_700183E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-195
(3) Check that the MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME value coincides with the (5) Make sure that the setting is effective.
value set in EDIT CONFIG, and then click [MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME #1 Check: OK indication
SE1]. SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window
NOTE
The value appearing on the SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window is a value
set in EDIT CONFIG plus 100 msec.
Therefore, if a value set in EDIT CONFIG plus 100 mse appears, you can
determine that the set values coincide with each other.
Note that the indication unit differs between EDIT CONFIG and the SE MODE2
EXPOSURE TIME >> window.
<Display comparison (example)>
EDIT CONFIG/ MUTL/
MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME SE MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME >> window indication
1.2 s 1300 msec
#1
600_700185E.ai
#1 Check: Value
#2 Click: [MODE2 EXPOSURE TIME SE1]
#1
#2 600_700184E.ai
(4) Click [OK] when the confirmation window appears.
018-230-07E
IN2-196
14.2.17 Setting the Access Point Security (MAC Address (3) Click “ADVANCED” and “MAC ADDRESS FILTER”, and then select
Filtering) “Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the
network”.
network
- DAP-1665 #2
- FUJIFILM-made AP
NOTE
In the case of DAP-2553, DAP-2695 (locally procured item), refer to the following.
#3
 DAP-1665 1200_700367E.ai
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
browser.
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
600_700286.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-197
u NOTE u
number of the SEs.
700_700051E.ai

60:92:17:49:XX:XX 60:92:17:49:XX:XX
#4
#5
1200_700368E.ai
#1
#2
#3
600_700291.ai
1200_700371E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-198
#3 Select: ALLOW
#5 Click: [Add]
#7 Click: [Submit]
u NOTE u
of the SEs.
1200_700373E.ai
#2
(6) Click [Yes].
#1
#3
#6
#4
#5 1200_700374E.ai
#7
1200_700372E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-199
15. Checking the Radio Wave (6) Click [Wireless Speed Measurement >>], and then click [SE1-10 >>]
and [Measurement for using SE1].
Conditions Clicking [Measurement for using SE1], the confirmation window as to whether the
measurement is to be started opens.
Since the AP’s optimum position in the SE and AP connection is confirmed, perform #1 Click: [Wireless Speed Measurement >>]
the wireless communications speed measuring. #2 Click: [SE1-10 >>]
#3 Click: [Measurement for using SE1]
(1) Check that the battery pack is mounted on the SE.
(3) Start up the MUTL. #1
(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING] command, and click [SE Network Setting >>]. Wireless Speed
Check that the SE whose radio wave conditions are to be checked is connected Measurement>> window
via the wireless LAN.
#2 Click: [SE Network Setting >>]
#3 Check: Serial ID of the connected SE and IP address of the connected SE
#1
#2

SE1-10>>window
#2
#3
1200_700132E.ai 1200_700133E.ai
#3
(5) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window. Clicking [OK], measurement of radio wave conditions starts.
The measurement ends in approx. 1 minute.
018-230-07E
IN2-200
(8) Check the measurement result. REFERENCE
Check that the average time is following status. If the wireless communication cannot be established, check the following items
- DR-ID 1201SE, DR-ID 1211SE, DR-ID 1213SE, DR-ID 1214SE, DR-ID 601SE, again.
DR-ID 611SE: 5000msec or less. - The settings of the AP and the EDIT CONFIG (ESSID, SSID, CH, and
- DR-ID 1202SE, DR-ID 1212SE, DR-ID 602SE, DR-ID 612SE: 6000msec or encryption) are the same.
less. - Other APs are operating with the same channel, whose communication status
- DR-ID 613SE: 4000msec or less. can be checked visually (such as inSSIDer).
#1 Check: Average time - The MAC address of the AP is appeared on the inSSIDer.
SE1-10>>window
#1
1200_700134E.ai
(9) Check the radio wave strength on the DX Console.

#1 Check: Radio wave strength
#1
1200_700246.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-201
16. Calibration REFERENCE
Refer to the table below for the kinds of calibration to be executed.
A total of required time is approx. 35 minutes per SE.
INSTRUCTION
Exposure conditions
- In case of the GOS type SE, calibration during installation is not required. 1211SE, 1212SE,
Calibration type Grid
However, if troubleshooting or generating abnormal images, calibration is required. 1213SE, 1214SE, 611SE, 612SE
- Check that background calibration automatically executed upon startup of the 613SE
machine is completed before carrying out calibration. For reading
- Keep the CL software running. If the software is terminated, the MC power will be mode 0
Can be
automatically turned OFF, and calibration might result in failure. For reading
Offset No exposure No exposure kept
mode 1
mounted.
REFERENCE For reading
mode 2
Messages of “Calibrating” and “Urgent use is possible” alternately appear on the DX Exposure conditions: Exposure conditions:
Console status indication area. - Tube voltage of 75 kV - Tube voltage of 75 kV
Gain -
#1 Check: Status indication - Dose of 10 mR (*) - Dose of 5 mR (*)
Cannot
Defect - Tube voltage of 75 kV - Tube voltage of 75 kV
- be
correction - Dose of 5 mR (*) - Dose of 2.5 mR (*)
mounted.
Lag - Tube voltage of 80 kV - Tube voltage of 80 kV
-
correction - Dose of 100 mR (*) - Dose of 50 mR (*)
*: Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less.
REFERENCE
- Calibration can take place either in a wired or wireless mode.
- If calibration takes place in a wireless mode, radio wave strength may be weakened
#1 when the SE is placed on a concrete floor. In this case, distance the SE from the
concrete floor surface and calibration takes place.
1200_700172E.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-202
n Preparations 16.1 Offset Calibration
(1) Remove the grid. REFERENCE
(2) Clean the SE exposure plane with a dry cloth. Offset calibration is carried out for all SE’s which are connected.
(3) Position the X-ray tube at an SID usually used at the installation site.
(1) Click [Offset Calibration >>] on the calibration window.
u INSTRUCTION u The Offset Calibration >> window opens.
Set the SID as large as possible for table exposure. If the SID is too small, (2) Click [Start].
inappropriate image correction data might be generated.
Images for offset correction data generation (16 frames) are read from the SE
(FPD).
(4) Adjust the irradiation field to cover the entire exposure plane. “OK” appears in the result display area when the processing is completed
(5) Start up the MUTL. normally.
u NOTE u
(6) Click [Calibration].
The Calibration window opens. If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
10 minutes), “Error 12700 currently unavailable” appears. Click [Start] again after
an interval of approx. 30 seconds, in this case.
(3) Click [Create an Offset Data].

The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
(4) Click [OK].
When the offset correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
appears in the result display area.
(5) After operations are completed, click [BACK] to return to the
Calibration window.
018-230-07E
IN2-203
16.2 Gain Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
#1 Click: [Operation Setting]
CAUTION Gain Calibration >> window <Display example>
or longer normally needs to be taken. #1
REFERENCE
(1) Click [Gain Calibration >>] on the Calibration window.

The Gain Calibration >> window opens.
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET]. 600_700178E.ai
#1 Input: SE No. (4) Click [Start].

#2 Click: [SET] “OK” appears in the result display area upon completion of the preparation for
Gain Calibration >> window exposure.
u NOTE u
#1 If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
(5) Click [Display ShotRdy] and confirm display of "SHOT_READY" in the

result indication column.
u NOTE u
#2 If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed
to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated.
When exposure is executed in "NOT_READY" status, the calibration fails and an
600_700273.ai
abnormal image is generated.
018-230-07E
IN2-204
(6) Expose 16 times with the following condition. Click [Display ShotRdy] (9) Click [BACK] to return to the Calibration window.
at each exposure and confirm display of "SHOT_READY" in the result
u NOTE u
indication column.
If you freeze in step (5) or (6) above, restart the MC according to the following
REFERENCE
procedure.
Clicking [Display Image Count], you can know the number of exposures. - In case of the MC PC, start up the MUTL, and click System\Shutdown\Forced
The count is displayed in the format of “n/16” in the result display area after Reboot. Click [OK] when the confirmation window of “Are you sure?” appears.
n-times of exposures. - In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console, left-click
the MC Manager from the task tray and execute “EXIT”. Check that the MC Manager
- 1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE : icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager from “Start
Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 10 mR menu” → “Start-up”.
- 611SE, 612SE : Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 5 mR
Images for gain correction data generation (16 frames) are read from the SE (FPD).
u INSTRUCTION u
200 msec.
REFERENCE
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 100 mA
Time: 63 msec
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 63 msec
(7) Click [Create a Gain Data].

The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
REFERENCE
If you click [Create a Gain Data] when less than sixteen exposures have been
made, “Error!!” appears in the result display area. Continue to make exposures
until sixteen exposures are made, and click [Create a Gain Data], in this case.
(8) Click [OK].

When the defect correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
appears in the result display area.
018-230-07E
IN2-205
16.3 Defect Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
CAUTION Defect Calibration >> window <Display example>
or longer normally needs to be taken. #1
REFERENCE
(1) Click [Defect Calibration >>] on the Calibration window.

The Defect Calibration >> window opens.
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET]. 600_700179E.ai
#1 Input: SE No.
(4) Click [Start].
#2 Click: [SET]
“OK” appears in the result display area upon completion of the preparation for
Defect Calibration >> window exposure.
u NOTE u
#1 If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.

u NOTE u
#2
If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed
600_700274.ai to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated.
018-230-07E
IN2-206
(6) Expose 5 times with the following condition. (7) Click [Create a Defect Data].
- 1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE : The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 5 mR REFERENCE
- 611SE, 612SE : Tube voltage of 75 kV, Dose of 2.5 mR
Images for defect correction data generation (5 frames) are read from the SE If you click [Create a Defect Data] when less than five exposures have been
(FPD). made, “Error!!” appears in the result display area. Continue to make exposures
until five exposures are made, and click [Create a Defect Data], in this case.
u INSTRUCTION u
- When performing defect calibration, make sure to have the exposure conditions (8) Click [OK].
such as the correct dose setting (kV, mA, msec, SID) for defect correction When the defect correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK]
calibration. appears in the result display area.
If defect correction calibration is performed by using the exposure conditions for
gain correction, a defect is expanded and its size cannot be detected correctly. (9) Click [BACK] to return to the Calibration window.
As a result, because the number of the defects becomes an erroneous value
and the defect size is increased more than expected, a calibration error may
occur.
- Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec
200 msec.
REFERENCE
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 63 msec
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 2.5 mR are
shown below. (611SE, 612SE)
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 75 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 32 msec
REFERENCE
Clicking [Display Image Count], you can know the number of exposures.
The count is displayed in the format of “n/5” in the result display area after
n-times of exposures.
018-230-07E
IN2-207
16.4 Lag Calibration (3) Click [Operation Setting] and set the operative method.
REFERENCE
Lag Calibration >> window <Display example>
(1) Click [Lag Calibration >>] on the Calibration window. #1

The Lag Calibration >> window opens.
(2) Input the SE No. for calibration into [Input SE No.] and click [SET].
#1 Input: SE No.
#2 Click: [SET]
Lag Calibration >> window
#1 600_700180E.ai
(4) Click [Start].

“Please wait for a few minutes” appears.
u NOTE u
If you click [Start] during automatic offset update (for 30 seconds every approx.
#2
600_700275 .ai (5) Click [OK].

“OK” appears in the result display area approx. 2 minutes later.
u NOTE u
If "NOT_READY" is indicated, wait for approx. 5 seconds, try again, and proceed
to the next step (exposure) after "SHOT_READY" is indicated.
018-230-07E
IN2-208
(7) Expose 1 time with the following condition. (8) Click [Create a Lag Data].
- 1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE : The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” opens.
(9) Click [OK].
- 611SE, 612SE : Tube voltage of 80 kV, Dose of 50 mR
When the lag correction data is generated and stored in the HDD, [OK] appears
in the result display area.
Clicking [Display Progress Status], you can know the number of image reads. The (10) Select “Shut Down” in the menu of the DX Console.
count is displayed in the format of “n/7” in the result display area after n-times of
(11) Check that the READY LED (green) of the SE flashes and becomes
reads.
unlit, and the calibration has been completed when the system
u INSTRUCTION u terminates. Then, wait for the DX Console being powered OFF.
Set the exposure time to 200 msec or less. Exposure for longer than 200 msec (12) Remove the battery and SE cable from the SE, and turn OFF the power
cannot be made, since the maximum exposure time is inherently specified as of the SE.
200 msec.
(13) Connect the battery and SE cable to the SE, and turn ON the power of
the DX Console.
u NOTES u
- Record the exposure conditions when lag calibration is executed for the first
time, and subsequently, always make exposures under the same conditions.
This is to compare the lag amounts serially and analyze deterioration of the SE
(FPD).
- If irradiation of 100 kV or over cannot be performed with the condition of the
tube voltage of 80 kV and the maximum exposure time of 200 msec, move the
X-ray tube and the panel close to each other as much as possible (to the limit
which the whole panel is irradiated with X-ray).
If irradiation of 100 kV or over still cannot be performed with this condition,
increase the tube voltage to 100 kV.
If the irradiation does not become 20 mR or over with the aforementioned
condition, you have to perform the lag calibration by using another X-ray
equipment.
REFERENCES
- Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 100 mR are
shown below. (1211SE, 1212SE, 1213SE, 1214SE, 613SE)
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 80 kV
Amperage: 320 mA
Time: 200 msec
SID: 1.8 m
Voltage: 80 kV
Amperage: 320 mA
Time: 100 msec
018-230-07E
IN2-209
16.5 Checking the Calibration Results u INSTRUCTION u
The calibration results can be checked after the calibration. Perform the procedures from “16.1_Offset Calibration” to “16.5_Checking the
Calibration Results” at an installation site where two or more SEs are connected.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL and back up the CORRECT DATA. {IN2:16.1_Offset Calibration}
{MU2:1.13_BACKUP}
(2) Open the files written below with the Word Pad.
- Gain calibration: PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt
In the case of 150,8000, the restoration of the machine data failed.
REFERENCE
The number shown in “PanelCorrectSensitivity.txt” is to be written on the
machine-specific CD and then not modified by any operation such as calibration.
If no serial data is found, 150,8000 (default value) is set.
u NOTE u
In the case of 150,8000, compare the machine data with the machine-specific CD
to check that the time stamp and contents are the same.
- Defect calibration: DV.txt

If the data do not line more than or equal to 19 lines for the 14 x 17 inch SE or
23 lines for the 17 x 17 inch SE, the restoration of the machine-specific data or
the defect calibration failed.
For 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE, check that the
time stamp of LagData.txt is newer than the time stamp of GAIN00.xxx
in the opt/config/machine/correct/panel** folder.
When the time stamp of LagData.txt is older, the lag calibration has not been
performed.
REFERENCE
- The description of the defect calibration is an example of the IMAGE READING
MODE in EDIT CONFIGURATION that is “High-speed Mode”.
If two lines appeared for “Standard Mode”, there is no problem.
- For lag calibration
Only for 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE/613SE, check that the data contents are
gradually getting smaller.
When multiple “8192” are displayed, the lag calibration has not been
performed.
018-230-07E
IN2-210
17. Checking for Image Problems - When the automatic X-ray detection function is not used, expose an IP to a
dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
17.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are shown
below.
Problems, White Blank Portion, and Distance: 1.8 m
Sensitivity Problems in the Images Voltage: 80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
u INSTRUCTIONu Time: 0.013 sec
Check for the irregularities and the density problems respectively with the grid
removed and with the grid mounted. (3) Output the film in the one-image format to the printer.
If the grid is not to be used, you only need to check with the grid removed. (4) Check the output film for irregularities, partial density problems, and
white blank portions.
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu: If moiré is determined to occur on the image, identify the cause and deal with the
- "QC-Test" - "IMAGE-FORMAT" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches) problem according to the procedures mentioned in the Troubleshooting manual. The
image problems might be possibly caused by the movable grid.
(2) Expose an IP.
{MT:4.1_Analyzing Moiré}
voltage of 55 kV and a dose of 1.5 mR. (5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
REFERENCE Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
dose of 1.5 mR are shown below. u NOTE u
Distance: 1.8 m If the S value is more than 300 or less than 100, the Machine-Specific Data may
Voltage: 55 kV not be correctly installed. In such a case, reinstall the Machine-Specific Data and
Amperage and time: 1.6 mAs perform "16. Calibration".
(When the amperage and the time can be specified, minimize the amperage.) {IN2:14.1.13_Installing the Machine-Specific Data}
u NOTE u REFERENCES
If the exposure is performed with the exposure menu other than the specified - The S-value or a density value might vary with the photo-timer mounted.
ones or with the exposure condition other than the referred one, abnormal - The S-value varies from 206 to 210 when the X-ray absorption factor is 3 to
images, such as horizontal streak, may be found despite no error in the SE since 5%.
the study conditions are tight.
When an abnormal image occurred, perform the exposure with the specified
exposure menu and exposure condition, and check the images.
018-230-07E
IN2-211
17.2 Checking the Format 17.3 Checking for False Images, Problems in
Read Center and Film Character Format
n Procedures for Checking the Format
Information
(1) Check to make sure that the image in the SE exposure frame is
correctly read. n Checking for False Image
u NOTE u
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
The exposure frame lines on the SE exposure plane do not exactly indicate - "QC-Test" - "IMAGE-FORMAT" (Size: 17 inches×17 inches)
edges of the image recording area. The effective image recording area is approx.
1 mm inward from the exposure frame lines. (2) Attach 150 mm steel rules to the center of the vertical and horizontal
exposure center lines on the SE front cover.
Exposure center
Steel rule
SE front cover
Exposure center 600_700098.ai
(3) Expose an IP.

Effective image Exposure frame line
voltage of 55 kV and a dose of 1.5 mR.
recording area
1200_700173E2.ai
REFERENCE
dose of 1.5 mR are shown below.
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage: 55 kV
Amperage and time: 1.6 mAs
(When the amperage and the time can be specified, minimize the amperage.)
018-230-07E
IN2-212
- When the automatic X-ray detection function is not used, expose an IP to a n Checking the Film Character Format Information
dose of 1 mR.
Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
REFERENCE
Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
Exposure condition examples for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are shown (1) Check the film character format information.
below.
Distance: 1.8 m Check the following:
Voltage: 80 kV - The film character format information that has been set is correct.
Amperage: 50 mA - There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
Time: 0.013 sec REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
(4) Output the film in the two-image format to the printer. locations are as follows.
(5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the Hospital name (medical institution name)
frame and the steel rule on the output film. FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
IP barcode No.
EDR mode and menu code
System ID and image No.
600_700099.ai
Patient ID
(6) Detach the steel rules. Image processing conditions
Patient Film mark
name
Sex
Age or date of birth
n Checking the Read Center

G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
SKULL GENERAL
L 0000000001 Hanako Fuji [F] 23
Date of
exposure1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE: 50% RT-04
Have on hand the output film used for "n Checking for False Image". Check that the
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure Exposure menu
Standardization conditions
Set processing information
Reduction ratio
center lines. and correction item Exposure time
Film density Image reversal mark Date of exposure
System sensitivity 600_700101.ai

600_700100.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-213
18. Disconnecting the SE Cable
Described below are the procedures for disconnecting the SE cable from the MP.
The procedures depend on whether the SE cable is an optional item or a jig.
- SE cable as a jig cable: Always disconnect the cable.
- SE cable as an optional item: Confirm with the customer as to whether or not the SE
cable is to be disconnected, and disconnect the cable only when demanded.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the machine.
(2) Remove the top cover, the front cover and the rear cover of the MP.
{IN2:7.1_Removing the Covers}
(3) Disconnect the SE cable from the MP.
(4) Put on the MP cover.
018-230-07E
IN2-214
n RU PC-TOOL
(2) Click [ERROR DB].
→ The ERROR-DB window opens.
(4) Click [CLEAR] to clear the error log.
n DS Service Utility
(1) Start up the DS Service Utility.
(2) Click [Log].
→ The Log window opens.
(3) Click the log confirmation target from [Docking Stand #1] to [Docking
Stand #3].
(4) Click [Acuisition].
→ The Log information displays.
(6) Exit the DS Service Utility.
(7) Restart the DS and the DX Console.
018-230-07E
IN2-215
20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY (4) Click the [STAND] tab, and reset the counts.
#1 Click : [STAND] tab
#2 Click : [RESET]
INSTRUCTION #3 Click : [SET]
After exiting the DX Console application, perform the following procedure. EDIT HISTORY window <Display example>
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. #1

(2) Click [EDIT HISTORY].
#2
→ The EDIT HISTORY window opens.
(3) Input the installation date.
#1 Input: Installation date
#2 Click : [SET]
EDIT HISTORY window <Display example>
#3 600_700140.ai
#1 (5) Click the [TABLE] tab, and reset the counts.

#1 Click : [TABLE] tab
#2 Click : [RESET]
#3 Click : [SET]
EDIT HISTORY window <Display example>
#2 #1
600_700139.ai
#2
#3 600_700141.ai
018-230-07E
IN2-216
21. Backing Up the Data
(2) Back up “LOG ALL” and “CORRECT ALL DATA”.
018-230-07E
IN2-217
22. Final Checks 22.3 Checking the Optional Items
22.3.1 Checking the Battery Charger
22.1 Checking the SE
(1) Insert the battery pack into the battery charger, and check to make
(1) Check that the SE is not damaged. sure that:
- a working sound is heard;
22.2 Checking the Status of Boards - the charge indicator LED lights up.
Refer to the operation manual for details.
(2) Click [MP Board State Check] and check the following board status.
Make sure that the board is free from errors on the Board State display.
- MP board status
{MU2:[5.1]_MP Board State >>}
- SE board status
{MU2:[5.2]_SE Board State >>}
018-230-07E
IN2-218
23. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Machine
Visually check the units for damage.
If contaminated, wipe off with a dry cloth.
018-230-07E
IN2-219
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
AppxIN10-1, AppxIN11-1 to 4,
04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) AppxIN12-4 to 16, AppxIN14-1,
AppxIN19-1 to 4, AppxIN20-1 to 4
Installation (AppxIN)
018-230-07E
AppxIN1-1
Appendix 1. Requirements Regarding u NOTE u
Locally Obtained Parts perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference
For some parts, such as network cables, locally obtained parts may be used. In this - In order to detect radar waves about one minute before starting the communication
case, parts that meet the requirements set forth below should be obtained locally. with each channel, the wireless communication cannot be performed during the
detection.
n Locally Obtained Parts and Their Requirements - If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
l Network cable and Network HUB channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
{Product Specifications:6._Electrical Specifications_n I/F Cable} communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
l MP / DS / PB power cable maintained on the changed channel until the AP is restarted.
{Product Specifications:6._Electrical Specifications_n MP / DS / PB Power search operation.
Cable}
The FUJIFILM-made AP logs that the DFS functioned to alter the channel for check.
l MC power cable
{Product Specifications:6._Electrical Specifications_n MC Power Cable}
l AP (access point)
- Supporting IEEE802.11 n [W52, W53] (2.4GHz, 5.2GHz band)
- WLAN interface: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX
- LAN interface: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX
- Should conform to the IEC60950
- Should be UL-approved
u NOTE u
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
018-230-06E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual AppxIN1-1
AppxIN1-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN1-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN2-1
Appendix 2. Installing the MC Network (3) Pull up the latch, and remove the slot bracket.
#1 Pull up: Latch
Interface Board #2 Remove: Slot bracket
CAUTION
#2
#1
Cover
1200_700188.ai

#1 Mount: Network interface board
1200_300088.ai
#1
1200_700189.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN2-2
(5) Lower the latch, and fix the network interface board.
018-230-06E
AppxIN2-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN2-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN3-1
Appendix 3. Redirecting the SE Cable (1) Remove the cap of SE cable connector with flathead screwdriver etc.
Cap
Described below are the procedures for redirecting the SE cable.
REFERENCE
The SE cable connector is fixed with two types of structures shown below.
- The stops on the both sides of the connector enter into the groove on the cable to
fix.
1200_700021.ai
(2) Remove the top cover of the SE cable connector.

#1 Remove: Screw
1200_700396.ai
- The hook on the cable enters into the hole on the connector to fix.
#1
1200_700299.ai
1200_700397.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN3-2
(3) Press and hold the buttons on both sides of the SE cable connector, (5) Be careful not to damage the tab on the opposite side of the screw,
and lift the screw side of the cover. and remove the cover.
1200_700393.ai 1200_700395.ai
NOTE
(4) Shift the cover to the screw side.
Since there is a tab on the opposite side of the screw, be careful not to damage it
when removing the cover.
Also, take care not to cut the cable.
1200_700394.ai
1200_700297.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN3-3
(6) Redirect and inlet the cover together with the SE cable. (7) Fix the cover of the SE cable connector.
#1 Tighten: Screw
CAUTION
Exercise care not to have the cables caught in the cover when putting on the
cover. If the cables are caught in the cover, the cables might be short-circuited,
resulting in electric hazards of the patient or the customer.
#1
Take into account the
presence of the cables,
and the tab catches in
removing the cover. 1200_700022.ai
(8) Press the cap of the SE cable connector inside.

Cap
1200_700025E.ai
1200_700023E.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN3-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-1
Appendix 4. Restoring the IP Address (3) Remove the MP front cover.
of the MP/SE/DS #1
If the IP address of the MP, the SE or the DS is lost by mistake during the operation
procedures of PC-Tool/MUTL, you can restore the IP address to the default value (as
shipped from the factory).
Described below are the procedures for restoring the IP address of the MP, the SE or
the DS to the default value (as shipped from the factory).
<IP address of the MP (default value)>
192.168.0.20
<IP address of the SE (default value)> Front cover
192.168.0.30
<IP address of the DS (default value)>
192.168.0.55
Appendix 4.1 Restoring the IP Address of the MP

WARNING 1200_700027E.ai
() Remove the MP rear cover.

You must never work on the MP with the power supplied in any situation for #1 Remove: T3x6 (x3)
servicing the MP. Always turn OFF the power of the MP before servicing.
If you work with the power supplied, an accident such as electric shock hazard,
burn or short-circuiting might occur, resulting in death or serious injury.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the MP. Rear cover

#1 Loosen: T3x6 (x2)
Top cover
#1 #1
1200_700028E.ai
1200_700026E.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-2
(5) Disconnect all connectors of the SE cable from the MPC54A board. (7) Reinstall the MP rear cover, front cover and the top cover.
#1 Disconnect: Cable connector (MPC6) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Disconnect: Cable connector (MPC7)
MPC54A borad
The IP address of the MP is changed to the default value.
(9) Turn OFF the power of the MP approx. 30 seconds later.
(10) Remove the MP top cover, front cover and the rear cover.
(11) Disconnect the jig cable.
#2
(12) Connect all connectors of the SE cable.
#1 (13) Reinstall the MP rear cover, front cover and the top cover.
1200_700161.ai
(6) Connect the jig cable <supplied accessory> to the connector (MPC2)
of the MPC54A board.
NOTE
Connect the jig cable after disconnecting the cable connector of the remote
switch if the remote switch (optional item) is connected.
#1 Connect: Jig cable <supplied accessory>

#1 MPC54A borad
1200_700162.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-3
Appendix 4.2 Restoring the IP Address of the SE (2) Connect the jig connector.
#1 Connect: Jig connector
WARNING
You must never work on the SE with the power supplied in any situation for
servicing the SE. Always disconnect the SE cable from the SE, and remove the
battery pack from the SE.
burn or short-circuiting might occur, resulting in death or serious injury.
<IP address of the MP (default value)>

192.168.0.20
<IP address of the SE (default value)>
192.168.0.30
192.168.0.55
 Using the jig connector

If the battery pack is available, perform the following procedure.
#1
1200_700160.ai
(3) Install the battery pack to the SE.
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-4
(4) Make sure that two external positions of the status lamp (LED) of the  Using the jig cable
SE flash three times successively.
Perform the following procedure when using the SE with wired connection only and
You can know that the IP address of the SE is changed to the default value if the when not using the battery pack.
LED flashes three times successively. This session explains the restoring procedures for the1201SE as an example.
#1 Check: LED
(2) Remove the battery pack from the SE.
- For 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
- For 1213SE/1214SE
(4) Connect the jig cable <supplied accessory> to the connector of the
RMV board.
- For 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE
#1 Connect: Jig cable (RMV16) <supplied accessory>
SE
#1
1200_700153.ai

(6) Remove the jig connector.
CONFIGURATION.
RMV65A board #1
{MU1:1.3.3_Wireless Setting} RMV16
1200_700181E.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-5
- For 1213SE/1214SE (7) Check to make sure that two external positions of the status lamp (LED)
#1 Connect: Jig cable (RMV5) <supplied accessory> of the SE flash three times successively.
You can know that the IP address of the SE is changed to the default value if the
LED flashes three times successively.
#1 Check: LED
SE
#1
RMV5
RMV #1
66A 1200_700153.ai
board (8) Disconnect the SE cable to turn OFF the power of the SE.
1200_700259E.ai
(10) Disconnect the jig cable you connect in the procedure (4).
(5) Put on the SE rear cover. (11) Put on the SE rear cover.
- For 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE (12) Set the COUNTRY CODE in “WIRELESS SETTING” window of EDIT
{MC:5.1.1_SE Rear Cover} CONFIGURATION.
- For 1213SE/1214SE {MU1:1.3.3_Wireless Setting}
{MC:5.2.1_SE Rear Cover} {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
NOTES
- Exercise care not to have the harness of the jig cable caught in the SE rear
cover when putting on the SE rear cover.
- You need not put tape on the rear and side of SE .
(6) Connect the SE cable to turn ON the power of the SE.
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-6
Appendix 4.3 Restoring the IP Address of the DS (5) Double-click “DockingStandService” icon on the desktop.
WARNING #1 Double-click: DockingStandService
#1
You must never work on the DS with the power supplied in any situation for
servicing the DS. Always turn OFF the power of the DS before servicing.
burn or short-circuiting might occur, resulting in death or serious injury. 1200_700210.ai
<IP address of the MP (default value)> (6) Click [Address].

192.168.0.20 #1 Click: [Address]
<IP address of the SE (default value)>
192.168.0.30
192.168.0.55
(1) Connect the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel with the
DS via the LAN cable. #1
NOTE
The DS has two LAN ports. Connect the LAN cable to the port for the DX
console.
For DX Console For SE
1200_700211.ai

1200_700204E.ai DS IP address is displayed.
(2) Connect the power cable to the DS, and set the power switch to the
ON position.
(3) While pressing the reset switch on the DS, turn the DS power ON.
The battery charge mark on the DS is flashing during reset.
Reset switch
#1
1200_700237E.ai
(4) If the Docking Stand Service Utility has not been installed in the PC,
install it. 1200_700212.ai
{IN1:8.4_Setting the DS IP Address_ Installing the Docking Stand Service

Utility}
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-7
(8) Input the default IP address and port number, and click [Update]. (10) Click [End].
Overwrite the input items to the DS and the configuration file, and the confirmation #1 Click: [End]
window opens.
#3 Click: [Update]
#1 #2
#3
#1
1200_700236.ai

1200_700235.ai
(9) Click [OK]. #1

#1 Click: [OK]
#1
1200_700227.ai
1200_700220.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN4-8
(13) Double-click “DockingStandService” icon on the desktop. (16) Check that the IP address and port number have been changed to the
Docking Stand Service Utility window opens. default value, and click [End].
#1 Double-click: DockingStandService #1 Check: IP address
#1
#2 Click: [End]
1200_700210.ai
#1
#1 Click: [Address]
#2
1200_700213.ai
#1
#1
1200_700211.ai

1200_700220.ai
#1
1200_700212.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN5-1
Appendix 5. Procedure for Installing (8) Disconnect the second MP, and connect the MP1 and MP2 to the MC
as follows.
Two MP MP2
(1) Connect the first MP to the MC. MPC7

MPC6
(3) Set the IP address of the first MP. MPC54B
Click buttons in the order of [NETWORK SETTING], [MP Network Setting >>], MPC5 board
[MP1 Network Setting >>], and [Setting for MP1].
(4) Update the first MP application software version.
MPC4
Click buttons in the order of [INSTALL], [Install MP Software >>], [Install MP1
Software >>], and [MP1 Software VerUp Install].
(5) Disconnect the first MP, and connect the second MP to the MC. HUB
(6) Update the second MP application software version.
MP1
Click buttons in the order of [INSTALL], [Install MP Software >>], [Install MP1
Software >>], and [MP1 Software VerUp Install].
MPC7
(7) Set the IP address of the second MP.
Click buttons in the order of [NETWORK SETTING], [MP Network Setting >>],
MPC6
[MP1 Network Setting >>], and [Setting for MP2].
MPC54B
MPC5 board
MPC4
1200_700328.ai
REFERENCE
The LAN cable can be connected to either MPC4 or MPC5.
018-230-06E
AppxIN5-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN5-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN5-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-1
Appendix 6. Replacement Procedure of  Inputting the IP addresses
the Local Network (1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [Local Network PreSetting >>].
#1 Click: [[NETWORK SETTING]]
#2 Click: [Local Network PreSetting >>]
Appendix 6.1 Local Network PreSetting >> NETWORK SETTING window
Change the following IP address. #1

- MC ETH1 IP #2 Local Network
- MP1 PreSetting>>window
- SE1 WIRED
- SE1 WIRELESS
To make the changed set value effective, the set value needs to be enabled (setting
executed) respectively for the SE, MP and MC.
CAUTION
When changing the network addresses, input all of the addresses to be changed
via the " Inputting the IP addresses" following the next sections. Enable the
set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective.
u INSTRUCTION u 1200_700163E.ai
access point (AP) must be changed to include the same segment No. If the network
address of the access point differs, wireless connection of the SE cannot be made.
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-2
(2) Click [MC ETH1/MP>>] and input the MC/MP network address, then (3) Click the target SE, input the SE network address and click [SET].
click [SET]. #1 Click: Target SE
#1 Click: [MC ETH1/MP>>] #2 Input: SE network address
#2 Input: MC/MP network address #3 Click: [SET]
#3 Click: [SET] Local Network PreSetting>>window
Local Network PreSetting >> window
#1
#1 SE1-5>>window
MC ETH1/MP>>window
#2
#2
#3
1200_700164E.ai #3
1200_700166E.ai
(4) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-3
 Enabling the set value (4) Check that the set value is effective.
The IP addresses of the SE and the MC are rewritten, and the IP addresses are
Enable the network address input in the Local Network PreSetting>> window.
reflected after restarting the SE and the MC.
u NOTE u
CAUTION
Restart only the SE in this procedure.
Enable the set value in the order of the SE, MP and MC to make them effective.
If a wrong order is taken, the setting does not get effective, and might result in #1 Check: OK indication
need of initializing the machine. SE Network Setting>>window <Display example>
<Enabling the set value (SE)>

u INSTRUCTION u
Connect only one SE when enabling the set value (SE). Otherwise, the SE whose IP
address is changed cannot be identified, and might result in need of initializing the SE.
#1
(1) Click [SE Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window.
The SE Network Setting >> window appears.
1200_700167E.ai
(3) Click [OK].

(5) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window.
(8) If an unspecified SE exists, repeat procedures (1) to (7).
(9) Connect the SE cable to the specified SE and reinstall the battery pack
on the specified SE.
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-4
<Enabling set value (MP)> <Enabling set value (MC)>
(1) Click [MP Network Setting >>] on the NETWORK SETTING window. (1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH1)] on the NETWORK SETTING
The MP Network Setting window >> appears. window.
(2) Click [MP1 Network Setting >>] on the MP Network Setting window >>.
The MP1 Network Setting >> window appears. (2) Click [OK].
(3) Click [Setting for MP1]. (3) Check that the set value is effective.
The confirmation dialogue box of “Are you sure?” appears. The IP address of the MC is rewritten, and the IP address is reflected after
restarting the MC.
(4) Click [OK].
(5) Check that the set value is effective. Update Network Setting
The IP address of the MP is rewritten, and the IP address is reflected after (MC ETH1) <Display example>
restarting the MP.
MP Network Setting>>window <Display example>
#1
#1
1200_700169E.ai

1200_700168E.ai
(6) Click [BACK] to return to the MP Network Setting >> window. u NOTE u
(7) Click [BACK] to return to the NETWORK SETTING window. click the MC Manager from the task tray and excute "EXIT". Check that the MC
(8) Turn OFF the power of the MP, and then turn it ON again. Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then start the MC Manager
u NOTE u
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-5
<Restarting the machine and checking the setting effected>
(1) Turn OFF the power in the order named of the CL, MC and MP.
u NOTE u
click the MC Manager from the task tray and excute "EXIT".
u NOTE u
In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console,
check that the MC Manager icon has disappeared from the task tray, and then
start the MC Manager from "Start menu" → "Start-up".

(4) Click [NETWORK SETTING], [SE Network Setting >>] and the target SE
button.
Check that the IP address of the SE has been changed.
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-6
Appendix 6.2 MC ETH0 IP Setting >> (2) Input the network address values, and click [SET].
#1 Input: Set value
 Inputting the IP addresses #2 Click: [SET]
MC ETH0 IP Setting>>window
Input the following IP address.
- MC IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.10)
- FTP IP Address (Default value: 172.16.1.20)
The set value gets effective by clicking [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the
“NETWORK SETTING” window. That is, by just clicking [SET], the input value does #1
not get effective.
(1) Click [NETWORK SETTING], and click [MC ETH0 IP Setting >>].
#2
#1 1200_700171E.ai
 Enabling the set value

Enable the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >> window.
#2 (1) Click [Update Network Setting (MC ETH0)] on the NETWORK SETTING
window.
(2) Click [OK].
(3) Check that the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >>
1200_700170E.ai window gets effective.
u NOTE u
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-7
Appendix 6.3 Changing Folder Name
u INSTRUCTION u
Perform the following procedure only when installing the MC application in the MC and
when the MC ETH0 address has been set to "192.168.0.xx".
(1) Change the folder name of the IP address under C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\FCR\DR-ID1200\SYSTEM to that of the current IP address of
the MC.
Ex: Change the folder name "172.16.1.10" to "192.168.0.53".
(2) Start up the RU PC-TOOL and check the following.
- The IP ADDRESS of RU TYPE for the DR-ID1200 on the RU PC-TOOL is the
modified address.
- It is possible to check that the SE and MP are connected.
(3) Check that the network address input in the MC ETH0 IP Setting >>
window gets effective.
018-230-06E
AppxIN6-8
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN7-1
Appendix 7. Wireless Channel Used for  Setting correspondence table for the wireless channels
Setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT CONFIGURATION and
the Access Point access point is shown as follows (the bold characters are the default value).
EDIT CONFIGURATION AP Setting
Channel Type
Wireless Channel Channel Width
 Flowchart for setting the wireless channel CHANNEL & MODE to be used *5*6
Band *1 *2*3*4
START MG:11N20 & CH:1 2.4GHz 1 20MHz 1
MG:11N20 & CH:2 2.4GHz 2 20MHz 2
Install the DR-ID 1200 in the facilities MG:11N20 & CH:3 2.4GHz 3 20MHz 3
where the DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 700 is MG:11N20 & CH:4 2.4GHz 4 20MHz 4
already installed?
YES
MG:11N20 & CH:5 2.4GHz 5 20MHz 5
NO MG:11N20 & CH:6 2.4GHz 6 20MHz 6
Only select the already being MG:11N20 & CH:7 2.4GHz 7 20MHz 7
used channel.
MG:11N20 & CH:8 2.4GHz 8 20MHz 8
MG:11N20 & CH:9 2.4GHz 9 20MHz 9
Use any Wireless Band？
MG:11N20 & CH:10 2.4GHz 10 20MHz 10
5GHz 2.4GHz
MG:11N20 & CH:11 2.4GHz 11 20MHz 11
MG:11N20 & CH:12 2.4GHz 12 20MHz 12
Use the dual channel? Use the dual channel?
MG:11N20 & CH:13 2.4GHz 13 20MHz 13
YES YES
MO:11N20 & CH:36 5GHz 36 20MHz 36
NO NO
Select from Select from MO:11N20 & CH:40 5GHz 40 20MHz 40
MO:11N40P & CH:36 MG:11N40P & CH:1 W52
MO:11N20 & CH:44 5GHz 44 20MHz 44
to to
MO:11N40P & CH:157, and MG:11N40P & CH:9, and MO:11N20 & CH:48 5GHz 48 20MHz 48
MO:11N40M & CH:40 MG:11N40M & CH:5
to to MO:11N20 & CH:52 5GHz 52 20MHz 52
MO:11N40M & CH:161 MG:11N40M & CH:13 MO:11N20 & CH:56 5GHz 56 20MHz 56
W53
MO:11N20 & CH:60 5GHz 60 20MHz 60
Select from Select from
MO:11N20 & CH:36 MG:11N20 & CH:1 MO:11N20 & CH:64 5GHz 64 20MHz 64
to to MO:11N20 & CH:100 5GHz 100 20MHz 100
MO:11N20 & CH:165 MG:11N20 & CH:13 1200_700184E.ai
MO:11N20 & CH:104 5GHz 104 20MHz 104
MO:11N20 & CH:108 5GHz 108 20MHz 108
MO:11N20 & CH:112 5GHz 112 20MHz 112
MO:11N20 & CH:116 5GHz 116 20MHz 116
MO:11N20 & CH:120 5GHz 120 20MHz 120 W56
MO:11N20 & CH:124 5GHz 124 20MHz 124
MO:11N20 & CH:128 5GHz 128 20MHz 128
MO:11N20 & CH:132 5GHz 132 20MHz 132
MO:11N20 & CH:136 5GHz 136 20MHz 136
MO:11N20 & CH:140 5GHz 140 20MHz 140
MO:11N20 & CH:149 5GHz 149 20MHz 149
MO:11N20 & CH:153 5GHz 153 20MHz 153
MO:11N20 & CH:157 5GHz 157 20MHz 157
018-230-06E
AppxIN7-2
EDIT CONFIGURATION AP Setting *1 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH
Channel Type can be selected.
Wireless Channel Channel Width
CHANNEL & MODE to be used *5*6 In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, channels except 100CH to 140CH
Band *1 *2*3*4
can be selected.
MO:11N20 & CH:161 5GHz 161 20MHz 161
MO:11N20 & CH:165 5GHz 165 20MHz 165
MG:11N40P & CH:1 2.4GHz 1 AUTO20/40MHz 1,5
When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to 11 CH
can be selected.
Korea: Do not select 48CH to 165CH for Radio Law compliance.
When the panels of DR-ID 600 series are used at the same time, only one of channels 36
CH, 40 CH, 44 CH or 48 CH can be used.
*2 In case of the FUJIFILM-made AP, channel width 20 MHz or 40 MHz can be selected.
*3 The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40 MHz. The
MG:11N40P & CH:9 2.4GHz 9 AUTO20/40MHz 9,13 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band, but the channel
MO:11N40P & CH:36 5GHz 36 AUTO20/40MHz 36,40 cannot be fixed to the 40MHz band.
W52
MO:11N40P & CH:44 5GHz 44 AUTO20/40MHz 44,48 *4 When selecting 2.4 GHz on the FUJIFILM-made AP, select 20 MHz on the “Channel
MO:11N40P & CH:52 5GHz 52 AUTO20/40MHz 52,56 Width”. Do not select 40 MHz.
W53
MO:11N40P & CH:60 5GHz 60 AUTO20/40MHz 60,64 *5 In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44, 48,
MO:11N40P & CH:100 5GHz 100 AUTO20/40MHz 100,104 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to be used
MO:11N40P & CH:108 5GHz 108 AUTO20/40MHz 108,112 outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 GHz. All of the
MO:11N40P & CH:116 5GHz 116 AUTO20/40MHz 116,120 W56 channels can be used indoors.
MO:11N40P & CH:124 5GHz 124 AUTO20/40MHz 124,128 In accordance with the Radio Law of Egypt, the dual channel cannot be used outdoors.
MO:11N40P & CH:132 5GHz 132 AUTO20/40MHz 132,136 *6 When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then perform
MO:11N40P & CH:149 5GHz 149 AUTO20/40MHz 149,153
the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference with the
weather radar is required by the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection).
MO:11N40P & CH:157 5GHz 157 AUTO20/40MHz 157,161
MG:11N40M & CH:5 2.4GHz 5 AUTO20/40MHz 5,1
MG:11N40M & CH:6 2.4GHz 6 AUTO20/40MHz 6,2 detection.
MG:11N40M & CH:7 2.4GHz 7 AUTO20/40MHz 7,3 - If radar waves are detected during wireless communications, the wireless
MG:11N40M & CH:8 2.4GHz 8 AUTO20/40MHz 8,4 communications will be interrupted, and the channel will be changed. After the
MG:11N40M & CH:9 2.4GHz 9 AUTO20/40MHz 9,5 channel has been changed, then the radar wave detection will be implemented
MG:11N40M & CH:10 2.4GHz 10 AUTO20/40MHz 10,6 again in about one minute, and if no radar waves are detected, then the wireless
MG:11N40M & CH:11 2.4GHz 11 AUTO20/40MHz 11,7 communications will be resumed on the changed channel. At this time, the SE will
MO:11N40M & CH:40 5GHz 40 AUTO20/40MHz 40,36 search operation.
W52
MO:11N40M & CH:48 5GHz 48 AUTO20/40MHz 48,44
REFERENCE
W53
MO:11N40M & CH:64 5GHz 64 AUTO20/40MHz 64,60 When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
MO:11N40M & CH:104 5GHz 104 AUTO20/40MHz 104,100 can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
W56
MO:11N40M & CH:128 5GHz 128 AUTO20/40MHz 128,124 W56
018-230-06E
AppxIN7-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN7-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN8-1
Appendix 8. Installing the DR-ID 1200 (2) Start the EDIT CONFIGURATION in the DR-ID 600 and note down the
set contents of each item on paper, for example.
in the Facilities Where the {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
DR-ID 600 and DR-ID 700 (3) Delete the registered RU in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the PC-TOOL
from the FTP server.
Are Already Installed {MU2:1.3_DELETE}
NOTE
An error message may be displayed while the PC-TOOL is shutting down,
Appendix 8.1 Installing the DR-ID 1200 in the however shut it down in this state.
Facilities Where the DR-ID 600 Is Already
(4) Update the DX Console software to V8.0 or later.
Installed
Refer to the DR-ID 300CL Service Manual.
Configuration after installation is shown below.
(5) Uninstall the installed MC application from the DX console.
DX Console
DR-ID 1201SE
NOTE
DR-ID 1202SE DR-ID 1200MP
DR-ID 1211SE Follow the procedures below to uninstall the MC application.
or MC
DR-ID 1212SE DR-ID 1200DS 1. Insert the install disk into the CD drive.
DR-ID 1213SE
DR-ID 1214SE
DR-ID 601SE The “Are you sure you want to uninstall MC application?” dialog appears.
DR-ID 602SE 3. Click [OK].
DR-ID 611SE DR-ID 600MP
DR-ID 612SE
DR-ID 613SE
(6) Install the DR-ID 1200 PC-TOOL and MC application whose version is
1200_700182E.ai
V1.0 or later on the DX Console.
NOTE {IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
Do not restore the backup file of the DR-ID 600MC in the DR-ID 1200. Not compatible
(7) Start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
with the MC application for the DR-ID 600 and the MC application for the DR-ID 1200.
(8) Install the DR-ID 1200 RU software on the DX Console.
 In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the {IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software}
DX Console (9) Connect the SE of the DR-ID 600 system to the DR-ID 600MP, and
Installing the DR-ID 1200MP or the DR-ID 1200DS is necessary.
connect the SE of the DR-ID 1200 system to the DR-ID 1200MP or the
DR-ID 1200DS.
(1) Start the MUTL and select [SE Setting] in the DR-ID 600, check which
panels have been registered, and note down the ID's on paper, for (10) Install the DR-ID 1200 by referring to the following for the procedures
example. when installing two MPs.
{MU2:1.4_MUTL} {IN:Appendix 5._Procedure for Installing Two MP}
(11) Apply the CONFIG settings noted down when performing step (2).
(12) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing step (1).
018-230-06E
AppxIN8-2
 In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the
MC
Furthermore, install the MC application on the DX Console.
panels have been registered, and note down the ID's on paper, for
example.
{MU2:1.4_MUTL}
(2) Start the EDIT CONFIGURATION in the DR-ID 600 and note down the
(3) Update the DX Console software to V8.0 or later.
(5) Start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
(6) Install the DR-ID 1200 RU software on the DX Console.
(7) Connect the SE of the DR-ID 600 system to the DR-ID 600MP, and
connect the SE of the DR-ID 1200 system to the DR-ID 1200MP or the
DR-ID 1200DS.
(8) Install the DR-ID 1200 by referring to the following for the procedures
when installing two MPs.
{IN:Appendix 5._Procedure for Installing Two MP}
(10) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing step (1).
018-230-06E
AppxIN8-3
Appendix 8.2 Installing the DR-ID 1200 in the (4) Update the DX Console software to V8.0 or later.
Facilities Where the DR-ID 700 Is Already
(5) Uninstall the installed MC application from the DX console.
Installed
NOTE
Configuration after installation is shown below.
DX Console
DR-ID 1201SE 1. Insert the install disk into the CD drive.
DR-ID 1202SE
DR-ID 1211SE
AP MC 2. Select “.\Initial\apl_initial\install.bat” from the “FILE EXECUTION” pull-down
DR-ID 1212SE USB menu, and then click [EXECUTE].
DR-ID 1213SE
DR-ID 1214SE
3. Click [OK].
DR-ID 601SE
DR-ID 602SE
DR-ID 611SE
DR-ID 612SE {IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
DR-ID 613SE 1200_700183.ai (7) Start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
NOTE (8) Install the DR-ID 1200 RU software on the DX Console.
Do not restore the backup file of the DR-ID 700MC in the DR-ID 1200. Not compatible {IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software}
with the MC application of the DR-ID 700 and the MC application of the DR-ID 1200.
 In case of using the FUJIFILM-made AP (10) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing step (1).
panels have been registered, and note down the ID's on paper, for
example.
{MU2:1.4_MUTL}
(2) Start the EDIT CONFIGURATION in the DR-ID 700 and note down the
(3) Delete the registered RU in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the PC-TOOL
from the FTP server.
{MU2:1.3_DELETE}
NOTE
Although the error is displayed during the PC-TOOL completion, this completes it.
018-230-06E
AppxIN8-4
 In case of using the Utility Box and installing the MC application  In case of using the Utility Box and installing the MC application
in the MC in the DX Console
Installing the DR-ID 1200MP or the DR-ID 1200DS is necessary. Installing the DR-ID 1200MP or the DR-ID 1200DS is necessary.
Furthermore, install the AP kit for the DR-ID 700 and the SE communication cable for Furthermore, install the AP kit for the DR-ID 700 and the SE communication cable for
the DR-ID 1200. the DR-ID 1200.
(1) Start the MUTL and select [SE Setting] in the DR-ID 700, check which (1) Start the MUTL and select [SE Setting] in the DR-ID 700, check which
panels have been registered, and note down the ID's on paper, for panels have been registered, and note down the ID's on paper, for
example. example.
{MU2:1.4_MUTL} {MU2:1.4_MUTL}
(2) Start the EDIT CONFIGURATION in the DR-ID 700 and note down the (2) Start the EDIT CONFIGURATION in the DR-ID 700 and note down the
set contents of each item on paper, for example. set contents of each item on paper, for example.
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
(3) Update the DX Console software to V8.0 or later. (3) Update the DX Console software to V8.0 or later.
(4) Install the DR-ID 1200 PC-TOOL and MC application whose version is (4) Install the DR-ID 1200 PC-TOOL and MC application whose version is
V1.0 or later on the DX Console. V1.0 or later on the DX Console.
{IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} {IN2:14.1.2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
(5) Start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”. (5) Start the MC Manager from “Start menu” → “Start-up”.
(6) Install the DR-ID 1200 RU software on the DX Console. (6) Install the DR-ID 1200 RU software on the DX Console.
{IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software} {IN2:14.1.3_Installing the RU Software}
(7) Apply the CONFIG settings noted down when performing step (2). (7) Apply the CONFIG settings noted down when performing step (2).
(8) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing step (1). (8) Apply the SE settings noted down when performing step (1).
018-230-06E
AppxIN9-1
Appendix 9. Installing the Shock-absorbing (2) Attach the shock-absorbing medium at uniform intervals to the bottom
of the cassette storage box.
Medium Used for a Mobile
X-ray Unit
When the DR-ID 1200 is used for a mobile x-ray unit, the shock-absorbing medium
must be installed in the cassette storage box of the mobile x-ray unit.
n Installing the Shock-absorbing Medium
(1) Cut the shock-absorbing medium (6 pcs.) to the width of the cassette
storage box.
Attach the shock-absorbing
medium at uniform intervals
700_7A0002.ai
NOTE
When the mobile x-ray unit has a projection in front of the cassette storage box
as in the case of the T&S product, also attach the shock-absorbing medium to
the front of the cassette storage box, so that the SE does not collide with the
projection.
Cassette storage box

Shock-absorbing medium
Cut the shock-absorbing medium to

the width of the cassette storage box
Attach
the shock-absorbing
medium 700_7A0003.ai
700_7A0001.ai
REFERENCE
Use the same shock-absorbing medium as for the DR-ID 700.
n Replacing the Shock-absorbing Medium
The remaining shock-absorbing medium is for replacement at the time of periodic When replacing the shock-absorbing medium, wipe off the adhesive of the previously
maintenance. attached shock-absorbing medium before attaching the new shock-absorbing medium.
The replacement interval of the shock-absorbing medium is two years.
018-230-06E
AppxIN9-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN9-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN9-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN10-1
Appendix 10. Updating MC Application
Version
To install the DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE on the equipment which the MC
application V2.2 or earlier is already installed on, the MC application must be updated
to V3.0 or later and the MP application and the SE application must be also updated.
Refer to the following for the procedure when updating the software.
- Updating MC application version
{MU2:1.9_VERSION UP}
- Updating MP application software version

- Updating SE application software version

018-230-07E
AppxIN10-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN10-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN10-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN11-1
Appendix 11. Installing the Wireless (3) Keep pressing the push switch in the front of the wireless bridge.
#1 Keep press: Push switch
Bridge
To use the access point and DS in different rooms, DS must be connected to wireless
#1
bridge. Procedure for installing the wireless bridge is described in this section.
u NOTE u
If the DS and access point are communicating via the wireless bridge, the DS ready
LED, panel selection LED , and status LED do not light up in conjunction with the DX
Console, and they will be constantly unlit.
■ Preparation 1200_700260.ai
- Make settings for the access point. (4) Release the push switch after the WLAN LED light and STATUS LED
DAP-1665/FUJIFILM-made AP light start blinking simultaneously.
REFERENCE
DAP-2553/DAP-2695
It takes up to 20 seconds to keep pressing the push switch until the LED lights
start blinking.
- Close the Web browser of maintenance PC.
- Disable the wireless LAN function of maintenance PC.
- Set IP address of the wired LAN to "Obtain an IP address automatically" in the
"Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" of maintenance PC.
■ Setting the wireless bridge

(1) Connect the wireless bridge to maintenance PC via the LAN cable
attached to the wireless bridge.
REFERENCE
1200_700261.ai
To connect PC with LAN cable in this step is to make settings for wireless bridge.
It is allowed to connect to the newly installed DX Console in the facilities if the DX The wireless bridge starts into setting mode.
Console setup is finished. (5) Start up the Web browser of maintenance PC.
The setup window of wireless bridge opens.
(2) Connect the AC adapter to the wireless bridge and turn power ON.
POWER LED light of wireless bridge turns on.
u NOTE u
If the setup window of wireless bridge does not open, enter "silex" into the
address input column and press the <Enter> key.
1200_700269.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN11-2
(6) Select "Advanced Configuration" on the left side of the window. (8) Click [Cancel] when the following message appears.
1200_700264E.ai
(9) Select "Wireless LAN Configuration" on the left side of the window.
1200_700262E.ai
The "Advanced Configuration" window opens.

(7) Change “Client Mode” and click [Submit].
u NOTE u
To communicate with the SE inserted in the DS via the wireless bridge, “Client
Mode” must be set to “Multi-Client Mode” in this step.
#1 Select: “Multi-Client Mode”

#2 Click: [Submit]
1200_700266E.ai
#1
#2
1200_700263E.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN11-3
(10) Select the AP to connect. ● When stealth setting for AP is performed:
● When stealth setting for AP is not performed: u NOTE u
Select SSID of the connected AP from “Wireless Network List” and click
[Submit]. If encoding the wireless communication is performed, enter the password into
“Network Key”.
u NOTE u Combine the encryption password with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting of EDIT
If the network is in ciphering configuration, enter the password into "Network CONFIGURATION. [default: fujifilm]
Key".
Combine the encryption password with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting of EDIT Click “Advanced setting” tab in the upside of the window, enter the SSID
CONFIGURATION. [default: fujifilm] of the connected AP and click [Submit].
Since the message which urges rebooting is displayed, click [OK] to restart the
wireless bridge, then the WLAN LED and STATUS LED light up.
1200_700282E.ai
1200_700265E.ai
(11) Close the Web browser and restart maintenance PC.
The message which urges rebooting is displayed, and then the WLAN LED and
STATUS LED of wireless bridge light up.
(12) Set the maintenance PC owned by the service personnel to the same
network as the IP address of the wireless bridge.
IP address: 192.168.0.xxx
(13) Open "Command prompt", enter "ping 192.168.0.25" and press the
<Enter> key. Confirm whether the network is connected correctly
according to execution result to the Ping command.
u NOTE u
Perform the following when the network is not connected correctly.
1. Remove and reinstall the plug of AC adapter from wireless bridge, then turn
power ON.
2. If it has not been improved by step 1 above, perform the next procedures in
"■ Initializing wireless bridge" to initialize wireless bridge settings. Then set the
1200_700282E.ai wireless bridge again by performing the procedures from step (5).
When the window turns into the above, proceed to step (11).
(14) Remove the LAN cable from maintenance PC.
018-230-07E
AppxIN11-4
(15) Connect DS with wireless bridge via the LAN cable. ■ Initializing wireless bridge
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Be sure to connect the LAN cable to the LAN port for SE on the DS. Perform this procedure only when the network is not connected correctly.
■ Confirming wireless bridge connection (1) Remove the AC adapter from the wireless bridge.
(1) Confirm it can be communicated with SE inserted in DS via the (2) Keep pressing the push switch of wireless bridge, connect the plug to
wireless bridge. AC adapter and turn power ON.
u NOTE u (3) When the WLAN LED on the top of the device from green to red, release
your finger from the push switch.
If the communications failed, the setting for “Client Mode” may be not set to Since the wireless bridge is initialized, redo from “■ Setting the wireless bridge”.
“Multi-Client Mode” in step (7) of “■ Setting the wireless bridge”. In that case, set
the wireless bridge again.
Also, the STATUS LED blinks while the wireless bridge is communicating. If the
STATUS LED is not blinking, the wireless bridge is not communicating.
■ Installing the Wireless Bridge

Wireless bridge antenna is mounted on the LED surface. Consider the radio directivity
which is shown in the diagram below, and install the wireless bridge.
u NOTE u
Do not cover the LED surface of the wireless bridge with metal plates, nor install it
facing towards the floor.
Antenna
position
Wireless bridge
1200_700286E.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-1
Appendix 12. Installing the Access Point  Wireless Settings
(DAP-2553, DAP-2695) (1) Select “Administration Settings” from “Maintenance” menu, click
[Login Settings], input the following values and then click [Save].
Item Set value
Appendix 12.1 DAP-2553 New Password fuj1Film
Confirm Password fuj1Film
 Login
access point via the LAN cable.
REFERENCE
network as the IP address of the access point. 600_700347.ai
(3) Read the instructions on the access point and confirm the default IP
address, login name, and password.
Login name: admin
Password: None
1200_700043.ai
u NOTE u
The IP address, login name and password to input are different according to the
018-230-06E
AppxIN12-2
(2) Make settings of the access point as required and then click [Save]. REFERENCE
Item Set value - For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT
Wireless Band 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz CONFIGURATION and access point, refer to the following.
Network Name (SSID) *1 One of FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10, {IN: Appendix 7_Wireless Channel Used for the Access Point}
or set the unique SSID with Manual - When multiple access points are vicinally placed, changing the channel currently used
Auto Channel Selection Disable can prevent decreasing the communication speed due to interferences.
Channel *2 One of 1 CH to 165 CH - The Auto 20/40 MHz mode changes the band automatically between 20 and 40
Channel Width 20 MHz or Auto 20/40 MHz MHz. The 40 MHz band can provide faster communication than the 20 MHz band,
ESSID of the Edit Configuration. u NOTE u
*2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to - Set the network name (SSID) that does not overlap with the surrounding.
Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected. 48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to
China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected. be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4
When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors.
u NOTE u
channels 36 CH, 40 CH, 44 CH or 48 CH can be used. When the W53 or W56 type channel is selected, if interference is detected, then
detection.
1200_700044.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN12-3
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication Authentication*1 WPA2-PSK
between the SE and the AP and line disconnection will appear. Encryption Enable
If non-stealth wireless communication is used, the wireless communication Key Type AES
automatically resumes between the SE and the AP when the power to the AP When the network authentication is OPEN System, this item is
is restored. This is how it normally operates. not displayed and the setting is not required.
- On the other hand, if stealth wireless communication is used for the DR-ID 600 Network Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34]
series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication Confirm Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34]
AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to *1 Set the ENCRYPTION in EDIT CONFIGURATION to “ON”.
the AP and communication line for the DR-ID 600 series SE is disconnected, *2 Match the passphrase with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting in EDIT ONFIGURATION.
connect the SE cable and recognize the SE before use. {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Item Set value

SSID Visibility Enable
1200_700387.ai
1200_700386.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN12-4
(5) Click [Save].  Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)
<Optional Setting Item>

u INSTRUCTION u
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
browser.
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
1200_700388.ai
1200_700270.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-5
(3) Click “Advanced Settings” - “Filters” - “Wireless MAC ACL” and select (4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering.
“Accept” in “Access Control List”. #1 Check ON: Check box
#1 Click: “Advanced Settings” #2 Check: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering is displayed
#2 Click: “Filters” - “Wireless MAC ACL” #3 Click: [Save]
#3 Check: Current Client Information
u NOTE u
#4 Select: Accept
If there are two or more SEs, repeat #1 and #2 as many times as the number of
the SEs.
#1
#4 REFERENCE
When putting a check in the check box on the right side of the “Current Client
Information” list, the corresponding MAC address appears in the “MAC Address”
#2 column.
#3
#2
1200_700369.ai
u NOTE u #1
Check that the same number of lists appear as the SEs being connected in the
“Current Client Information”.
#3
1200_700370.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-6
 Confirming the MAC Address  Saving the Settings
NOTE CAUTION
The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT If you skip this operation, all of the settings are not changed from the default.
CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not enter the
":" (e.g.: b0c554bcbc69).
(1) Select "Save and Activate" from the "Configuration" menu.
(1) Confirm the MAC address written on the seal of the access point.
REFERENCE
You can also confirm the MAC address from the status of browser (in the
following example, b0:c5:54:bc:bc:69).
1200_700046.ai

(2) Confirm the modified items after the machine restarts.
point.
1200_700045.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-7
 Installing the Access Point
(1) Fix the access point.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual of the purchased instrument for
the way of fixing.
(2) Attach the ferrite core (FC3) to the AP-side of LAN cable between the
MP and the AP, and connect the LAN cable to the AP.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (AP-side)
Manufacturer’s
part number

FC7 TFT274015S 3 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
1200_700199D.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-8
Appendix 12.2 DAP-2695 (4) Input the IP address, login name, and password for the access point
via the browser.
 Login
Login name: admin
(1) Attach the antenna to the access point. Password: None
u NOTE u
access point via the LAN cable.
u NOTE u 1200_700270.ai
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN1 port of the access point. u NOTE u
The IP address, login name and password to input are different according to the
REFERENCE access point types. Check the seal on the access point.
u NOTE u
Set the IP address other than “192.168.0.50”.
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-9
 Wireless Settings (3) Select “Wireless” from the “Basic Settings” menu, set the following
items and then click [Save].
Make settings of the access point as required and then click [Save].
Item Set value
(1) Select “LAN” from the “Basic Settings” menu, change the IP Address Wireless Band 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
to “192.168.0.25” and then click [Save].
Network Name (SSID) *1 One of FUJIAP01 to FUJIAP10,
Auto Channel Selection Disable
Channel *2 One of 1 CH to 165 CH
1200_700271.ai is “Manual”, set a single-byte text string of 32 characters or less that is set with the
(2) Select “Administration Settings” from the “Maintenance” menu, click {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
[Login Settings] to input the following items and then click [Save]. *2 USA: When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
Item Set value 11 CH can be selected.
New Password Fuj1Film Japan/Europe: Channels except 149CH to 165CH can be selected.
Confirm Password Fuj1Film China: Channels except 100CH to 140CH can be selected.
Apply New Password Checked When the wireless band is 2.4 GHz, only one of channels 1 CH to
1200_700272.ai
1200_700273.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-10
REFERENCE (4) Set the stealth mode.
- For details on setting correspondence table of the wireless channel for EDIT u INSTRUCTION u
If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, perform this
step only when changing the wireless communication to the stealth mode since
- If the SE is used with the wireless communication, turning on and off the power
to the AP or a temporary disconnection interrupts the wireless communication
between the SE and the AP and line disconnection will appear.
If non-stealth wireless communication is used, the wireless communication
u NOTE u automatically resumes between the SE and the AP when the power to the AP
- Set the network name (SSID) that does not overlap with the surrounding. is restored. This is how it normally operates.
- In accordance with the Radio Law, the W52 and W53 type channels (36, 40, 44, - On the other hand, if stealth wireless communication is used for the DR-ID 600
48, 52, 56, 60 and 64) cannot be used outdoors. If wireless communications are to series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/612SE), the wireless communication
be used outdoors, select a 5 GHz other than the aforementioned channels or a 2.4 does not automatically resume between the DR-ID 600 series SE and the
GHz. All of the channels can be used indoors. AP even when the power to the AP is restored. Therefore, when the power to
u NOTE u
Item Set value
perform the following workaround operations. This is because avoiding interference SSID Visibility Enable
detection.
1200_700389.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-11
(5) Encode the wireless communication. (6) Click [Save].
u INSTRUCTION u
If using the DR-ID 600 series SE with the DR-ID 1200 series SE, encryption is
not allowed in China. Do not activate the encryption function with this step.
Item Set value
Authentication*1 WPA2-PSK
Encryption Enable
Key Type AES
When the network authentication is OPEN System, this item is
not displayed and the setting is not required.
Network Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34]
Confirm Key *2 A single-byte text string of 8 to 63 characters [default: fujiFilm34] 1200_700391.ai

*2 Match the passphrase with the ENCRYPTION KEY setting in EDIT ONFIGURATION. (7) For using the 5 GHz band, select “Performance” from the “Advanced
{MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION} Settings” menu, set the following items and then click [Save].
Item Set value
Wireless band 5 GHz
Wireless Confirm that ON is selected.
Wireless Mode Mixed 802.11n, 802.11a
Continue, set the following items and click [Save].
Item Set value
Wireless band 2.4 GHz
Wireless OFF
1200_700390.ai
1200_700275.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-12
(8) For using the 2.4 GHz band, select “Performance” from the “Advanced  Security Setting for Access Point (MAC Address Filtering)
Settings” menu, set the following items and then click [Save].
Item Set value <Optional Setting Item>
Wireless band 5 GHz
u INSTRUCTION u
Wireless OFF
Continue, set the following items and click [Save].
Item Set value
Wireless band 2.4 GHz
Wireless ON
URL: http://192.168.0.25/
Wireless Mode 802.11n only
browser.
Login name: admin
Password: fuj1Film
1200_700276.ai 1200_700270.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-13
(3) Click “Advanced Settings” - “Filters” - “Wireless MAC ACL” and select (4) Set the SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering.
“Accept” in “Access Control List”. #1 Check ON: Check box
#1 Click: “Advanced Settings” #2 Check: SE MAC address that allows the MAC address filtering is displayed
#2 Click: “Filters” - “Wireless MAC ACL” #3 Click: [Save]
#3 Check: Current Client Information
u NOTE u
#4 Select: Accept
If there are two or more SEs, repeat #1 and #2 as many times as the number of
the SEs.
#1
#4 REFERENCE
When putting a check in the check box on the right side of the “Current Client
Information” list, the corresponding MAC address appears in the “MAC Address”
#2 column.
#3
#2
1200_700369.ai
u NOTE u #1
Check that the same number of lists appear as the SEs being connected in the
“Current Client Information”.
#3
1200_700370.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-14
 Saving the Settings  Confirming the settings
CAUTION (1) Input the IP address, login name, and password for the access point
via the browser.
If you skip this operation, all of the settings are not changed from the default.
IP address: 192.168.0.25
Login name: admin
(1) Select “Save and Activate” from the “Configuration” menu. Password: fuj1Film
1200_700270.ai
(2) Confirm the MAC address on the login window.

u NOTE u
1200_700277.ai
- The MAC address of access point is required when setting the BSSID of EDIT
Restart the access point. CONFIGURATION. When entering the MAC address of access point, do not
- Confirm “MAC Address (2.4GHz)” when using the 2.4 GHz band, and “MAC
Address (5GHz)” when using the 5 GHz band.
1200_700279.ai
(3) Select “Wireless” from the “Basic Settings” menu and “Performance”
from the “Advanced Settings” menu, and then confirm the modified
items.
point.
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-15
 Installing the Access Point
(1) Fix the access point.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual of the purchased instrument for
the way of fixing.
(2) Attach the ferrite core (FC3) to the AP-side of LAN cable between the
MP and the AP, and connect the LAN cable to the AP.
Manufacturer’s
part number
LAN cable (AP-side)
Manufacturer’s
part number

FC7 TFT274015S 3 About 60 mm from the base
of the cable
1200_700199D.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN12-16
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN13-1
Appendix 13. Connecting Third Panel to ■ Connection diagram
DR-ID 200 ● Before additional connection

Hospital Network
Describe the procedures for connecting DR-ID 1200 to DR-ID 200 as the third panel.
For adding DR-ID 1200 to installed DR-ID 200RU, to set the “CU of DR-ID 200RU” 172.16.1.20 172.16.1.10
as MASTER CL of DR-ID 1200 is necessary. This differs from that only DR-ID 1200 is
used. DR-ID 300CL CU
NOTE
Make sure the installation of DR-ID 200RU has been completed, then perform this
procedure.
FPD FPD
REFERENCE 1200_700294E.ai
DR-ID 1200MP can be installed with up to two units and DR-ID 1200DS can be
installed with up to three units. If using the DR-ID 600 with the DR-ID 1200, DR-ID ● In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX
1200MP and DR-ID 1200DS can be installed with only one unit for each device. Console
Hospital Network
■ Version information
172.16.1.20 172.16.1.10
The versions of DR-ID 1200 to be additionally installed to DR-ID 200RU are as
follows. DR-ID 300CL
CU
- DR-ID 300CL V8.0 or later (MC)
- DR-ID 200RU CU: V3.12 or later 192.168.0.10
- DR-ID 1200 MC: V1.4 or later
CSL port
HUB DS
SE port
192.168.0.20
MP
192.168.0.30 192.168.0.31
SE SE FPD FPD
1200_700296E.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-2
● In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC ■ Work Flowchart
Hospital Network Register the necessary information items according to the flow shown below.
172.16.1.10 START
172.16.1.20 172.16.1.10 →172.16.1.11
13.1 [DR-ID 200RU] Checking/Changing the IP Address of CU and
DR-ID 300CL MC CU Upgrading the CU
192.168.0.10 13.2 [DR-ID 200RU] Changing the EDIT CONFIGURATION Setting

CSL 192.168.0.55
port →172.16.1.xx
13.3 [DR-ID 300CL] Checking the Version/Upgrading
HUB SE DS
port 13.4 [DR-ID 1200] Additional Installation of DR-ID 1200
SE
192.168.0.20
END
MP For memory
mode
192.168.0.30 192.168.0.31
SE SE FPD FPD
1200_700295E.ai
NOTE
The part with red letters (IP address of CU and DS) in the above is the IP address that
is required to be changed during installation.
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-3
Appendix 13.1 [DR-ID 200RU] Checking/Changing ● For CALNEO MT
the IP Address of CU and Upgrading the CU (1) Start the RU PC-TOOL and start MUTL.
(2) Select “Network Address” → “Settings>>” and check the IP address of
NOTE
CU (CU IP Address).
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX Console for using
the DR-ID 1200, this procedure is not required. Proceed to “Appendix 13.2 [DR-ID
u NOTE u
200RU] Changing the EDIT CONFIGURATION Setting”. The IP address is required to be changed if it is set to “172.16.1.10”.
- In this section, only the outline of procedure performed for DR-ID 200RU is Perform from step 3.
summarized. For details on each step, see the DR-ID 200RU Service Manual.
(3) Set the IP address of CU to other than “172.16.1.10”.
■ Checking/Changing the IP Address of CU (4) Turn OFF the power of RU then turn it ON.
If the IP address of CU of the DR-ID 200RU is default setting (172.16.1.10), it may (5) Start RU PC-TOOL and delete the RU with the IP address before
overlap with IP address of this machine (MC). changed.
Check the IP address of DR-ID 200RU (CU) with RU PC-TOOL, change the setting as
required. (6) Input the changed IP address of CU, and install the RU application.
● For CALNEO U
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance of the RU with operation panel. ■ Upgrading the CU
To additionally install the DR-ID 1200 to DR-ID 200RU, the version of CU is required
(2) Select [CU IP Address] and check the IP address of CU. to be V3.12 or later.
u NOTE u Check the version of CU and upgrade it as required.
The IP address is required to be changed if it is set to “172.16.1.10”. (1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
Perform from step 3.
(2) Check the version of registered RU (CU).
(3) Set the IP address of CU to other than “172.16.1.10”. (3) Upgrade the CU if the version is V3.11 or earlier.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU then turn it ON.
(5) Start RU PC-TOOL and delete the RU with the IP address before
changed.
(6) Input the changed IP address of CU, and install the RU application.
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-4
Appendix 13.2 [DR-ID 200RU] Changing the
EDIT CONFIGURATION Setting
Change the EDIT CONFIGURATION setting of DR-ID 200RU to be connected to DR-
ID 1200.
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(2) Select the RU (CU) connected to DR-ID 600 and start “MUTL”.
(3) Change the following setting.
● The “CU Configuration Setting” page
Item Setup Remark
CASETTE DR Select whether or not to connect
Set to “CONNECT”.
CONNECTION with DR-ID 1200.
CASETTE DR MAC Set the MAC address of Set this item when start DR-ID 1200
ADDRESS DR-ID 1200 MC. from CU via Wake On LAN.
In case of the configuration installing
the MC application in the MC, set
the IP address to 172.16.1.10.
In case of the configuration
installing the MC application in the
DX Console, set the IP address to
Set the IP address of 172.16.1.20.
CASETTE DR IP
DR-ID 1200 MC . ◆ NOTE ◆
ADDRESS
(Default: 172.16.1.100)
When the IP address is set to
127.0.0.1, CU will stop starting
up because no corresponding IP
address exists. In this case, to
change the SSD of CU is required.
CASETTE DR PORT Control signal communication port

No changed
NO setting of DR-ID 1200.
CASETTE DR PORT Image transfer communication port
No changed
NO setting of DR-ID 1200.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU then turn it ON.
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-5
Appendix 13.3 [DR-ID 300CL] Checking the
Version/Upgrading
Check the version of DX console.
Upgrade the DX console to V8.0 or later if the version is earlier than V8.0.
See DR-ID 300CL Service Manual
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-6
Appendix 13.4 [DR-ID 1200] Additional Installation (4) Install the DR-ID 1200 referring to the installation work flowchart in
“Installation (IN)”.
of DR-ID 1200 {IN2:1._Installation Work Flowchart}
Install the DR-ID 1200 and make settings so that it can used as the 3rd panel of DR- u NOTE u
ID 200RU.
Perform the following work when the DR-ID 200RU is in a usable state (usable to In the case that DR-ID 1200 is used as the 3rd panel of DR-ID 200RU, when
read). installing the RU software of DR-ID 1200, setting the information (information of
CL such as address etc.) of CU (DR-ID 200RU) is usually required.
(1) Finish the CL software and display the desktop of Windows. The difference from that only DR-ID 600 is installed is shown as follows.
(2) Turn OFF the power of DR-ID 200RU. ● EDIT CONFIGURATION
Start the MUTL, select “System” → “Shutdown>>” → “Shutdown”, and turn OFF the Make the following settings in the “RU CONFIGURATION SETTING” window.
power of RU. Item Setup Remark
(3) Start up the MC. Set this item when start DR-
CSL MAC
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the MC Set the MAC address of CU ID 1200 from CU via Wake On
ADDRESS
LAN.
Turn ON the power of MC.
- In case of the configuration installing the MC application in the DX CONNECTING CU Select “CONNECTED”
Console EMERGENCY
Select “ON”
MODE
Start the MC application.
Select “MC Manager” from the “Start menu” → “Start-up”. LONG TIME
Select “OFF”
ACCUM MODE
● EDIT CL NAME
Change MASTER CL to the default setting.
I. Click “NEW”, input “172.16.1.10” into CL IP ADDRESS and “CU0” into CL
NAME, and click “SET”.
II. Select the created CU (172.16.1.10: CU” on the left side of the window, and
click “>>”.
III. Select the existing MASTER CL (CL0) on the right side of the window, and
click “<<”.
(5) Start DR-ID 200RU after the installation, and check that the image can
be read in both DR-ID 200RU and DR-ID 1200.
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-7
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN13-8
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-1
Appendix 14. EAP-TLS Setting Appendix 14.1 During Installation
The procedures for this unit to perform the encryption communication by EAP-TLS are n System configuration
described.
(1) Update the MC application to V3.4 or later.
(2) Set ENCRYPTION to "EAP-TLS" in EDIT CONFIGURATION.
n System configuration {MU2:1.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Range of EAP-TLS Hospital Network
n Installing FF_EAP TOOL
1211SE/1212SE/ HUB PC (1) Start up the MC Manager.
1213SE/1214SE
[RADIUS Servers] (2) Insert the install disk into the CD drive of the CL.
Cisco Identity Upon inserting the install disk into the CD drive, the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window
DR-ID 1200MP/ DX Console Services Engine (ISE) automatically starts.
DR-ID 1200DS (DR-ID 300CL)
(3) Select ".\Initial\eapapl_initial\installEap.bat" from the "FILE
[AP] [L2 Switch] [LAN Controller] EXECUTION" pull-down menu on the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window, and
Cisco AIR-SAP1602I-Q-K9 Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-L
or AIR-CAP2602I-Q-K9 (or Same function product)
Cisco 5508 then click [EXECUTE].
1200_700311.ai
#1 Select: .\Initial\eapapl_initial\installEap.bat
#2 Click: [EXECUTE]
NOTE
- L2 switch and AP need to be purchased locally.
- Set the AP, L2 switch, Radius servers and LAN Controller by the customer.
- Match the AP settings (ESSID, BSSID, Channel, Channel Width) with the EDIT
CONFIGURATION.
- Set the L2 switch for passing only EAP packets.
#1
- The EAP-TLS system covers only wireless network. (not cover wired network such
as console, MP etc) #2
- Console and MC (control cabinet) should operate as one computer. (not separate
computer)
- EAP-TLS does not cover the DR-ID 600 series SE (DR-ID 601SE/602SE/611SE/
612SE/613SE). When using the EAP-TLS for the systems which coexist with the SE
of the DR-ID 600 series and DR-ID 1200 series, the DR-ID 600 series SE can be
used only for wired connections. 1200_700312.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN14-2
(4) Press any key on the keyboard. n Acquiring the SE serial ID
Acquire the SE serial ID registered in the MUTL by Serial ID Register Tool since it is
used via FF_EAP TOOL.
(1) Select "FujiFilm" - "SerialIDRegisterTool" from the [Start] menu.
SerialIDRegisterTool window opens.
(2) Click [Import MC Setting].
The SE serial ID registered in the MUTL is displayed.
#1
1200_700313.ai
(5) Close the Set Up PC-TOOL.
1200_700314.ai
(3) Click [OK].
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-3
n Importing certificate files (4) Click [UPDATE].
The certificate file received from the facility is imported to SE.
(1) Select "FujiFilm" - "FF_EAPTOOL" from the [Start] menu. #1
The Password window opens.
(2) Enter the password, and then click [OK].
#1 Input: Password [default: eaptls]
#2 Click: [OK]
#1 1200_700317.ai
(5) Click [IMPORT].

#2 The Import window opens.
1200_700315.ai
REFERENCE
#1
The password can be changed.
Refer to the EAP-TLS operation manual.
(3) Select a target SE serial ID, and click [SET].

#1 Select: SE serial ID
#2 Click: [SET]
#1
1200_700318.ai
#2
1200_700316.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-4
(6) Set the following items and then click [OK]. (9) Check that the SE can make wireless connection.
Item Set value NOTE
CA Certificate Select CA Certificate file.
Since CA certificate file and Client certificate file have the same format, even if
Client Certificate Select Client Certificate file. the file is selected wrongly, the import will complete normally. If the encryption
Private Key Select a Private Key. communication cannot be performed even if the import completed normally,
User Enter a user name of any string which is check again if the certificate file was selected wrongly.
64-character or less in single-byte.
Private Key Password If the Private Key is encrypted, enter a
Private Key password of any string which is
A screen is displayed to notify that the certificate file has been imported to SE.
#1
#2
1200_700319.ai
NOTE
If "21129 xxxx has invalid format." message is displayed, the following reasons
can be assumed. Handle the situation according to different reasons.
- The selected file is wrong.
- The entered password is wrong.
- Input the character strings that cannot be input.
(7) Click [OK].
#1
1200_700320.ai
(8) Close the "Import" window.

The system returns to the desktop.
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-5
Appendix 14.2 Adding the SE n Importing certificate files
Acquire the SE serial ID by Serial ID Register Tool, and import the certificate file. Same procedures as "Appendix 14.1 During Installation".
n Acquiring the SE serial ID

(1) Start up the MUTL, and register the added SE serial ID.
(2) Select "FujiFilm" - "SerialIDRegisterTool" from the [Start] menu.
SerialIDRegisterTool window opens.
(3) Click [Import MC Setting].
A message is displayed to confirm that the SE serial ID being displayed is
overwritten.
#1
1200_700321.ai
(4) Click [Yes].

The SE serial ID being displayed will be overwritten.
#1
1200_700322.ai
(5) Click [OK].
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-6
Appendix 14.3 When the Certificate File is (4) Click [UPDATE].
The imported certificate file appears.
Expired
Receive the certificate file which is within the expiration date from the facility, and
import it to SE.
#1
n Importing certificate files
(1) Select "FujiFilm" - "FF_EAPTOOL" from the [Start] menu.
The Password window opens.
(2) Enter the password, and then click [OK].
#1 Input: Password [default: eaptls] 1200_700317.ai
#2 Click: [OK] REFERENCE

The expired certificate file is displayed with the background color in yellow.
#1
(5) Select the expired certificate file, and click [DELETE].
#2 The certificate file is deleted.
1200_700315.ai
#1 Select: Certificate file
REFERENCE #2 Click: [DELETE]
The password can be changed.

Refer to the EAP-TLS operation manual. #2
#1
(3) Select a target SE serial ID, and click [SET].
#1 Select: SE serial ID
#2 Click: [SET]
#1
#2 1200_700323.ai
1200_700316.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-7
(6) Click [IMPORT]. (8) Click [OK].
The Import window opens.
#1 #1
1200_700320.ai
(9) Close the "Import" window.

The system returns to the desktop.
(10) Check that the SE can make wireless connection.
1200_700318.ai NOTE
(7) Set the following items and then click [OK]. Since CA certificate file and Client certificate file have the same format, even if
the file is selected wrongly, the import will complete normally. If the encryption
Item Set value communication cannot be performed even if the import completed normally,
CA Certificate Select CA Certificate file. check again if the certificate file was selected wrongly.
Client Certificate Select Client Certificate file.
Private Key Select a Private Key.
User Enter a user name of any string which is
Private Key Password If the Private Key is encrypted, enter a
Private Key password of any string which is
A screen is displayed to notify that the certificate file has been imported to SE.
#1
#2
1200_700319.ai
NOTE
If "21129 xxxx has invalid format." message is displayed, the following reasons
can be assumed. Handle the situation according to different reasons.
- The selected file is wrong.
- The entered password is wrong.
- Input the character strings that cannot be input.
018-230-06E
AppxIN14-8
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN15-1
Appendix 15. Attaching the Label for u NOTE u
- Refer to the figure below for attachment position of the label.
Compliance with the Radio
Law
About
This section informs the procedure to attach the label required for distribution of DR- 10mm
ID1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE in UAE, Morocco, Chile, Israel, Australia,
New Zealand and Serbia in order to comply with the local radio law.
n Procedure
(1) If the surface where the label is attached is dirty, wipe it with ethanol.
(2) Attach the label for each country’s radio law.
Country Radio law label
Center 1200_700330.ai
- For DR-ID1213SE, as the approval for Israeli radio law is not yet obtained, no
Morocco label for the radio law is available.
1200_700331.ai
Israel
1200_700332.ai
Australia/
New Zealand
1200_700333.ai
UAE
1200_700334.ai
Serbia
1200_700335.ai
Chile
1200_700336.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN15-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN15-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN15-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN16-1
Appendix 16. How to Use Memory REFERENCE
Before the start-up process is completed, calibration of the flat panel sensor may
Exposure Mode be performed.
During calibration, “888” blinks in the memory exposure mode status.
In the memory exposure mode, a maximum of 100 exposures (DR-ID 1201SE/DR-
ID 1202SE/DR-ID 1211SE/DR-ID 1212SE) or 200 exposures (DR-ID 1213SE) can be
made only with the flat panel sensor, without using the image processing unit.
1200_700346.ai
n How to Start up, Use and Terminate Memory Exposure Mode When calibration is completed, the number of images stored on the flat panel
sensor is displayed.
(1) Press and hold the memory exposure mode start button and the sleep
release/memory exposure mode start button at the same time for 2
seconds. u NOTE u
Do not subject the flat panel sensor to shock during calibration. Otherwise,
Memory exposure
mode status Sleep release/
artifacts may appear in the image.
memory exposure
mode start button
Status lamp REFERENCE

When the memory exposure mode is started up, the flat panel sensor enters
X-ray detection mode.
Memory exposure mode start button 1200_700344.ai

(2) When the READY lamp among the status lamps is automatically lit in
green, make an exposure.
When the number of images stored on the flat panel sensor is displayed in the
memory exposure mode status, the start-up process is completed.
READY
1200_700347.ai
1200_700345.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN16-2
(3) Make sure that the number of images displayed in the memory n How to Load Images
exposure mode status has increased.
When the READY lamp among the status lamps is lit in green, the next exposure (1) Connect/insert the flat panel sensor to/into each device.
can be made. <When the DR-ID 1200PU is used>
Connect the flat panel sensor to the power supply unit using the SE cable.
1200_700348.ai
REFERENCE
The value displayed as the number of images is used for managing the images.
For example, when “3” is displayed before an exposure and then “4” is displayed
SE MP
after the exposure, the number of the exposed image is “4”.
1200_700349.ai
u NOTE u <When the DR-ID 1200DU is used>

- Note that when the flat panel sensor is used in the memory exposure mode, Insert the flat panel sensor into the docking stand.
if a strong impact is applied to the flat panel sensor, a white image may be
obtained, incrementing the number of images.
- Manage the records of exposed images to identify the correspondence between
the image number and the patient name.
(4) When terminating memory exposure mode for the DR-ID 1200PU,
remove the battery pack from the flat panel sensor. Or connect the 1200_700350.ai
flat panel sensor to the power supply unit or to the optional access
point by using the SE cable or SE communication cable. For the DR-ID (2) To load images stored on the fl at panel sensor into the image
1200DU, remove the battery pack from the flat panel sensor, or insert processing unit, display the “Image Reader Status window” on the
the flat panel sensor into the docking stand. image processing unit, select the fl at panel sensor and then “Get
Image (FPD → CSL)”.
1200_700351.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN16-3
(3) Display the “Study screen” of the patient corresponding to the loaded n List of Error Codes
images, and select the exposure menu to be linked with the images.
If an error occurs while starting up or using the memory exposure mode, the
(4) Select the selector of the fl at panel sensor in which the image is corresponding error code is displayed in the memory exposure mode status.
stored and then select [Image Box]. Terminate the memory exposure mode and then perform the countermeasure
against each error.
(5) On the “Image Library screen”, select the image of which the number
is to be linked with the exposure menu and then select [Import]. Error code Occurrence condition Countermeasure
Calibration of the flat panel Wait for a while and then start
sensor is in progress. up the memory exposure
mode again.
An exposure menu is Terminate or suspend the
registered on the image study on the image processing
processing unit. unit.
E01 The SE cable or SE Disconnect the SE cable or
communication cable is SE communication cable from
connected to the flat panel the flat panel sensor.
sensor.
1200_700352.ai The flat panel sensor is Remove the flat panel sensor
inserted into the docking from the docking stand.
stand.
An X-ray is irradiated when Connect the flat panel sensor
exposure is not available. to the image processing unit
E03 or remove and attach the
battery pack and then restart
the memory exposure mode.
The flat panel sensor detects Connect the flat panel sensor
E04
an impact. to the image processing unit.
The remaining capacity of the Replace the battery pack.
E05
battery pack is low.
The temperature of the flat Check if the operating
panel sensor or battery pack temperature is within the
E06, E07, E17, E18 is abnormal. temperature range specified
in the environmental operating
conditions.
E08, E09, E11 to An abnormality occurred on -
E14, E16, E19 the flat panel sensor.
Calibration has failed. Restart the memory exposure
E10
mode.
E15 Image storage has failed. -
018-230-06E
AppxIN16-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN17-1
Appendix 17. Battery Removal
Procedure for Replacement
Describe the battery removal procedure for its replacement.
Explain the following procedure to the installation destination with the instruction for
the battery pack.
n Removal Procedure
(1) Press the ● part on the battery latch.
1200_700353.ai
(2) Slide the raised latch part and lift the battery as it is.
1200_700354.ai
(3) Remove the battery.
1200_700355.ai
018-230-06E
AppxIN17-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN17-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN17-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-06E
AppxIN18-1
Appendix 18. Attaching the FUJIFILM-
made AP Radio Law Label Chile
If a FUJIFILM-made AP is going to be installed, you might need to check whether the

Radio Law Label is properly stuck on.
Vietnam
u NOTE u
The Radio Law Labels for each nation are included with the FUJIFILM-made AP.
When installing, be sure to stick on the Radio Law Label for your nation. For nations
not covered, the “Radio Law Label” does not need to be stuck on. Mexico
n Attaching the label

(1) If the spot where the label is to be stuck on is dirty, clean that spot Argentina
with a cloth applied with ethanol, etc.
(2) Stick on the Radio Law Label and double-sided tape which indicate
the subject nation’s Radio Law Conformance. Brazil1
Country Radio law label
Morocco Brazil
Brazil2
Taiwan
Australia/
New Zealand
UAE
Serbia
018-230-07E
AppxIN18-2
u NOTE u
- Refer to the following illustrations regarding the attachment positions for the
Radio Law Labels and the double-sided tape.
Except for Brazil:
#1 double-sided tape (upper depression)
#2 Radio Law Label (lower depression)
#1
#2
1200_7C0001.ai
For Brazil:
#1 double-sided tape (upper depression)
#2 Brazil 2 Radio Law Label (Do not overlap the labels. Spaces are OK.)
#3 Brazil 1 Radio Law Label (Do not overlap the labels. Spaces are OK.)
#2 #3
Visually align
from the edge
#1 of the flat
surfase 1 mm
Visually align
from the edge
of the cover
1 mm
1200_7C0002.ai
- Visually approximate half of the short end of the double-sided tape and cut it in
half with scissors, etc. and stick it on against the Radio Law Label.
Discard the cut magic tape that is not used for attaching.
018-230-07E
AppxIN18-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN18-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN19-1
Appendix 19. Installing the Internet (5) Confirm the display contents on the following window, and press the
<1> key.
Explorer 11
To use the DR Web Maintenance Tool in Windows 7, Internet Explorer 11 needs to be
installed.
 Preparations
Installing the MC application.
{IN1:14.1.2_Installing the MC Application/DR Web Maintenance Tool} 1200_7C0015.ai
INSTRUCTION
 Installing the Internet Explorer 11
To change the installation contents, press the <2> key, and change the OS bit
(1) Turn ON the CSL-PC power. count and OS language.
- OS bit count selection window
(2) Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,

1200_7C0016.ai
- OS bit count selection window

DXL04010001.ai
(3) Insert the install disk into the DVD drive of the CSL-PC.
INSTRUCTION
Use the following installation media.
Internet Explorer 11 installation media: 114Y2312721A00
(4) When the following window opens, press any key on the keyboard. 1200_7C0017.ai
1200_7C0014.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN19-2
INSTRUCTION  Errors and workaround methods when installing
Restarting might be generated a maximum of three times during the installing.
After restarting, execute steps 2 and 4. l If an error is generated by the installing (Step 01) of a compulsory
update program before the installing of IE11.
The "E11 Install Success" appears.
(6) End End installation, and press any key on the keyboard.
1200_7C0018.ai
(7) Restart the PC.
1200_7C0019.ai
Check the following Windows Update error code list, and do a workaround.
- Windows Update error code list
https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/938205
018-230-07E
AppxIN19-3
l If an error is generated by the IE11 Install (Step02) l If an error is generated by the installing (Step 03) of a compulsory
update program after the installing of IE11.
1200_7C0020.ai
If the installing of IE 11 has failed as per the following, verify the troubleshooting, and
do a workaround.
- Troubleshooting for when the installing of IE 11 has failed 1200_7C0021.ai
https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/2872074 Check the following Windows Update error code list, and do a workaround.
- Windows Update error code list
https://support.microsoft.com/ja-jp/kb/938205
018-230-07E
AppxIN19-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN20-1
Appendix 20. Setting for Wired l For memory exposure mode
Connection Model Legend

: 0 coils LAN Isolator
AC Power Cable
DVI
USB
Monitor
: 1 coil
Signal Cable DR-ID300CL
: 2 coils FC1 USB
u NOTE u
DR-ID1200MC
DC Power Cable
: 3 coils Keyboard
Card FC1 USB
Reader USB
When using the wired-only panel with the DS, the memory exposure mode is required Barcode
FC1
USB
FC1 FC1 Mouse
in order to use the panel. Reader

LAN
FC3
FC3 LAN
FC4 Hub
SE
 Network Configuration AC Hospital AC

DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200DS Adapter HUB Adapter
(Connecter)
CSL FC5
FC4
l For wired connection

FC6
1200_7C0002E.ai
FC1
Hand
SE SW I/F Box
 Precautions for Setting

Cable Hand SW
FC2 DVI
FC1 Monitor
SE
FC2
USB
- Wireless setting is not required.
DR-ID12xxSE
Cable
FC1
DR-ID300CL
DR-ID1200MC FC1 USB
Keyboard
- Enable SE’s MC communication function.
DR-ID1200MP LAN
Card
Reader USB
FC1 USB
Mouse
{IN1:14.1.10_Changing the SE Country Code}
FC1 FC1 FC1
DR-ID12xxSE
SE
Cable
FC2
FC3
Barcode
Reader
USB {IN2:14.1.8_Enabling SE’s MC Communication Function (Setting the SE
Country Code)}
FC2 LAN
FC3
FC3 Legend
FC3 LAN : 0 coils
FC4 Hub
DR-ID12xxSE
SE
DR-ID1200DS FC3 AC
Adapter
: 1 coil
: 2 coils
u NOTE u
(Connecter)
CSL FC5 FC3
When using the wired-only code (999), MC application V13 or later is required.
FC4 : 3 coils
FC6
FC4
SE FC5
DR-ID1200DS
CSL Hospital AC
HUB Adapter
FC4
FC6
SE FC1
Cable LAN Isolator
DR-ID12xxSE DR-ID1200PB
AC Power Cable
FC2
Signal Cable
FC2 DC Power Cable
1200_7C0001E.ai
018-230-07E
AppxIN20-2
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN20-3
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
AppxIN20-4
BLANK PAGE
018-230-07E
Control Sheet
09.30.2014 02 Revision (FM9274) All pages
03.31.2015 04 Revision for DR-ID 1213SE and DR-ID 1214SE (FM9287) 1
07.29.2016 06 Revision for DR-ID 1200PB (FM9340) 1-3

04.28.2017 07 Revision for MC V15 (FM9456) 1-3
Performance Check (PC)
018-230-07E
PC-1
DR-ID 1200 Performance Check List n Settings
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of DR-ID 1200 l Housing network settings
installation to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which MC IP address: ____________________________________
are based on the instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not
supposed to replace the installation steps set forth in the DR-ID 1200 Service Manual FTP server address: ____________________________________
but is to be followed concurrently.
l Software version
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking
the system connection and output image quality, and then pass the equipment over to MC APL ver: ____________________________________
the customer. MP Software ver: ____________________________________
n Installation Information SE aplWlan ver: ____________________________________
Site Name: _________________ Installed by: _______________________ SE fpgaRmv ver: ____________________________________
Site Number: _________________ Signature: _______________________ SE glg ver: ____________________________________
Room Name: _________________ Installation Date/Servicing Date: ________ SE mcu ver: ____________________________________
DR-ID 1200MC Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
{Safety Precaution:2.1.5_DR-ID 1200MC}_MC identification label n Checklist
MP[1] DR-ID 1200MP Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
MP[2] DR-ID 1200MP Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________ 1. Preparation for Installation
{Safety Precaution:2.1.2_DR-ID 1200MP}_MP rating indication label {IN1:2._Installation Preparations}
DS[1] DR-ID 1200DS Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________ - Pre-installation check(s)  OK  NG
DS[2] DR-ID 1200DS Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
DS[3] DR-ID 1200DS Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
{Safety Precaution:2.1.3_DR-ID 1200DS}_DS rating indication label
2. Checking the Items Supplied  OK  NG
{IN1:5._Checking the Items Supplied}
PB[1] DR-ID 1200PB Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
PB[2] DR-ID 1200PB Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________ Machine main body  Accessories 
PB[3] DR-ID 1200PB Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________
{Safety Precaution:2.1.4_DR-ID 1200PB}_PB rating indication label - Main body
 DR-ID 1201SE  N/A  OK  NG
DR-ID 1201SE/1202SE/1211SE/1212SE/1213SE/1214SE
Pharmaceutical S/N: ___________________  DR-ID 1202SE  N/A  OK  NG
{Safety Precaution:2.1.1_DR-ID 1200}_SE pharmaceutical certification label  DR-ID 1211SE  N/A  OK  NG
018-230-07E
DR-ID 1200 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
- Optional item 3. Checking for short-circuiting of the power supply voltage/machine
 X-Ray Shot Cable  N/A  OK  NG power source
 3-code / 5m  3-code / 15m  9-code / 5m  9-code / 15m
 DR-ID 1200MP  DR-ID 1200DS  DR-ID 1200PB
 AC Bucky Relay Unit  N/A  OK  NG {IN1:7._Installing the MP}
 100V  120V  200V  220V {IN1:8._Installing the DS}
 Additional SE cable  N/A  OK  NG {IN1:9._Installing the PB}
 10m  20m  Single-phase two-wire  Single-phase three-wire
 SE storage case  N/A  OK  NG - Power supply voltage: __________V  OK  NG
 14" x 17"  17" x 17" Specified value (Japan): 100 VAC ±10%
Specified value (Outside Japan): 100-240 VAC ±10%
 SE cable retaining clamp  N/A  OK  NG
- Power cable:
 Double-sided tape  Magnet
Resistance value measured between E and FG:
 Battery charger  N/A  OK  NG (specified value: with continuity)  OK  NG
Resistance value measured between N and FG: ______Ω
 SE cable for the wireless panel (SE-LAN cable)  N/A  OK  NG
(specified value: ∞)  OK  NG
 MP anchor retaining bracket  N/A  OK  NG Resistance value measured between L and FG: ______Ω
(specified value: ∞)  OK  NG
 I/F box  N/A  OK  NG
Resistance value measured between L and N: ______Ω
 Hand switches (2 buttons)  N/A  OK  NG (specified value: 100 kΩ or higher)  OK  NG
 I/F box cable (Used to connect between the I/F box and the MP)
 N/A  OK  NG 4. Checking connection with X-ray equipment
 10m  15m
{IN1:7.5_Connecting the X-Ray Shot Cable}
 I/F box cable (Used to connect between the I/F box and the X-ray equipment)
 N/A  OK  NG 4.1 Checking connection with X-ray high voltage generator  OK  NG
 110-3 wire  110-4 wire  GE1  GE2 - Manufacturer of the connected
 Shimadzu  Siemens  Toshiba  CPI X-ray high voltage generator: _______________________________
 DelMedical  DelMedical (round terminal)  GENDEX - Model: _______________________________
 Philips  EMD (For FDR D-EVO Suite) - Tube No.: _______________________________
 AP kit  N/A  OK  NG 4.2 Terminal block having the X-Ray Shot Cable connected  OK  NG
 DS wall-mounting bracket  N/A  OK  NG - MP [ ____ ]
 MPX0  MPX1
 DS floor anchor retaining bracket  N/A  OK  NG
018-230-07E
PC-3
5. Checking the SE 5.5
Calibration  OK  NG
SE serial ID: ___________________
5.1 Checking incorporation of the SE into the exposure stand  Offset  Gain  Defect  Lag
 N/A  OK  NG 5.6 Checking for image problems  OK  NG

{IN1:10._Installing the SE} {IN1:17._Checking for Image Problems}
- Manufacturer of the incorporated exposure stand: _______________________ {IN2:17._Checking for Image Problems}
- Model: _______________________ - Check for image nonuniformity  OK  NG
- Grid: - Check for white blank portion  OK  NG
 Steady grid type  Bucky contact type  Bucky AC type - Check the film character format information  OK  NG
- Terminal block for connecting the X-ray shot cable: _______________________ - Check the image format  OK  NG
 MPX0 MPX1 - Check the center for reading  OK  NG
- X-ray exposure information
5.2 Changing the local IP address  N/A  OK  NG X-ray dose: ______mR S value: _____ Tube voltage: _____kV
{IN1:14.1.15_Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC and the FTP Server} Tube current: ______mA Time: _____msec Distance: _____cm
{IN2:14.1.16_Changing the IP Address of the SE/MP/MC}
Additional filter:  Yes (If Yes, AL: ____mm, Cu: ____mm)  No
- MC IP address: _______________________________
- MP[1] IP address: _______________________________ 6. Backing up the machine-specific data
- MP[2] IP address: _______________________________ {IN1:21._Backing Up the Data}
- DS[1] IP address: _______________________________ {IN2:21._Backing Up the Data}
- DS[2] IP address: _______________________________  OK  NG
- DS[3] IP address: _______________________________
- SE (wired) IP address: _______________________________
- SE (wireless) IP address: _______________________________ 7. Keep output films as the record of performance check
 OK  NG
5.3 Use of radio waves  Yes  No
8. Test equipment used for the check
Test equipment: ____________ Model: ____________ S/N: ____________
- Wireless communication rate (average time): _____________ seconds Test equipment: ____________ Model: ____________ S/N: ____________
Test equipment: ____________ Model: ____________ S/N: ____________
5.4 Use of AUTO DETECT  N/A  OK  NG
 No Yes
018-230-07E

DR Id1200 - 018 230 07e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DR Id1200 - 018 230 07e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJIFILM DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2014-2017 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

CAUTION  Notation in the Manual

NOTE Notation of Symbols

- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches

- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

1. Safety Precautions................................................................... 1 3. CLASSIFICATION................................................................... 24

1. Commodity Composition and Optional Items....................... 1 5.2 Battery Charger..............................................................................19

10. Disposal of the Machine........................................................ 30

Machine Description (MD)

1. Summary of the Machine.................................................. MD-1

2. Block Diagram................................................................. MD-11

3. Effective Area and Center Position of Image............... MD-17

1. Overview of Troubleshooting............................................MT-1 8. BACKUP FILE...................................................................MT-30

4. Analysis of Abnormal Images.........................................MT-23

5. Troubleshooting from DS Error Log...............................MT-25

6. Countermeasure for the SE Temperature Error............MT-26

7. Troubleshooting from FUJIFILM-made AP Log.............MT-27

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

1. Precautions for Check, Replacement, 3.7 Power Supply Unit...................................................................MC-24

Maintenance Utility (MU1)

1. DR Web Maintenance Tool............................................. MU1-1 1.7 HISTORY...............................................................................MU1-49

Maintenance Utility (MU2)

1. PC-TOOL.......................................................................... MU2-1 [4] Install................................................................................................. MU2-26

1.10 EDIT HISTORY.....................................................................MU2-49

Service Parts List (SP)

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

2. Checking the Error Log.................................................... PM-3

3. Checking for Image Problems......................................... PM-4

4. Checking and Replacing the Battery Pack..................... PM-5

5. Checking the Radio Wave Conditions............................ PM-6

6. Inspecting the Fan (MP).................................................... PM-7

7. Inspecting the Filter (MP)................................................. PM-8

8. Replacing the Relay (MP)................................................. PM-9

9. Checking the LED and Buzzer Sound (DS)................... PM-10

10. Checking the Cables........................................................PM-11

11. Checking the G Sensor (SE).......................................... PM-12

12. Calibration....................................................................... PM-13

13. Checking for Image Problems....................................... PM-14

14. Checking the Error Log.................................................. PM-15

How to Read the Installation Manual........................................ IN-1

1. Installation Work Flowchart............................................. IN1-1 6. Charging the Battery Pack............................................. IN1-15

2. Installation Preparations.................................................. IN1-3 7. Installing the MP.............................................................. IN1-16

17. Checking for Image Problems..................................... IN1-204

18. Disconnecting the SE Cable........................................ IN1-207

19. Checking the Error Log................................................ IN1-208

20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY......................................... IN1-209

21. Backing Up the Data..................................................... IN1-210

Installation (IN2) (RU PC-TOOL)

1. Installation Work Flowchart............................................. IN2-1 6. Charging the Battery Pack............................................. IN2-15

2. Installation Preparations.................................................. IN2-3 7. Installing the MP.............................................................. IN2-16

9. Installing the PB.............................................................. IN2-64 14.1.3 Installing the RU Software................................................................ IN2-123

17. Checking for Image Problems..................................... IN2-210

18. Disconnecting the SE Cable........................................ IN2-213

19. Checking the Error Log................................................ IN2-214

20. Clearing the EDIT HISTORY......................................... IN2-215

Appendix 14. EAP-TLS Setting................................ Appx IN14-1